PC 2109 
.06 
CojSy 1 



^\-/'m^lmy 



m 
m 



LIBRARY OF CON^GRESS. 



I 
lux 






IDs 



I' 



^^^ 



EI) STATES OF AMERICA.^ 




J. V. DOUVILLE'S 
SPEAKING 

FRENCH GRAMMAR, 

FORMING A SKUIES OF 

SIXTY EXPLANATORY LESSONS, 

WITH 

COLLOQUIAL ESSAYS, 

PARTICULARLY CALCULATED TO RENDER THE 

EASY TO ENGLISH PERSONS; 

TO WHICH IS ADDED 

A COMPREHENSIVE AND CLASSIFIED VOCABULARY, 

WITH A COLLECTION OF FAMILIAR PHRASES, 

AND VARIOUS MODELS OF NOTES, BILLS OF EXCHANGE, AND RECEIl'TS ; AND ALSO TWO TABLES 
OF THE RESPECTIVE VALUE OF THE FRENCH AND F.Nr.r.l«:M coiiss. 

THE FIFTH EDITION, 

CORRECTED AND ENLARGED. 



By J. V. D O U V I L L E, A.M.. 

PROFESSOR OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 



LONDON: 

PUBLISHED FOR THE AUTHOR, 

BY SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, AND CO 

stationers' hall court. 

PARIS: 

BY A. AND W. GALIGNANI AND CO., 

RUE vivienne ; 
AND BY THE AUTHOR, RUE NEUVE DU MONT-THABOR, No. 10 

1835. 




-fC a- 10^ 



ENTERED AT STATIONERS' HALL. 



London :— Printed by William Clowes and Sons, Duke Street, Stamford Street. 



ADVERTISEMENT TO THE THIRD EDITION, 

In preparing this Edition of the Speaking French Grammar for the 
press, the Author has spared no pains in his endeavours to give the 
work the greatest possible degree of perfection : every part of it has 
undergone a complete revision ; many of the rules and observations 
have been simplified and condensed, so as to render them more distinct 
and easy of recollection, while much additional and useful matter has 
been introduced. Notwithstanding these additions and improvements, 
the work has been compressed into a single octavo volume of a mo- 
derate size, printed with an entirely new and superior type, and is 
offered at a price, not only much below that of the former editions, but, 
with reference to its size and contents, lower than that of other books 
of a similar description. 

The rapid sale of two large impressions of this work, each within 
eighteen months from the date of publication, may be appealed to as 
some criterion of the public judgment in its favour. Truly grateful 
for such flattering success, the Author indulges a hope that the present 
Edition will be found much improved, and still more worthy of the 
liberal patronage by which the work has been distinguished. 

London, Blay 20, 1828. 



ADVERTISEMENT TO THE FOURTH EDITION, 

The increasing demand for the Speaking French Grammar (a work 
particularly calculated to render the speaking of French easy to 
English persons), is a very flattering proof that this new production is 
judged to answer the purpose of its peculiar adaptation. Truly grate- 
ful for such an encouraging patronage, the Author has endeavoured 
to bring this Edition still nearer to perfection. In order to accom- 



iv ADVERTISEMENT TO THE FIFTH EDITION. 

plish this, he has added at the end of the volume the respective value 
of the French and English coins, which will prove eminently useful, 
more especially to travellers, who are frequently at a loss on this most 
important point. This, among other improvements, will, no doubt, 
tend to ensure a continuation of the favour and approbation of the 
public. 

The Key to the essays of the third edition of this work will equally 
well serve for those of the fourth ; and, if properly tised as a book of 
reference, will greatly facilitate the progress of the pupil. 

The Author begs to suggest that, after an attentive perusal of the 
rules, the best means to acquire the necessary facility in pronouncing 
the essays is to read them several times aloud in French, before attempt- 
ing to write them. 

London, Jpril2Q, 1831. 



ADVERTISEMENT TO THE FIFTH EDITION. 

The new and useful additions with which the present Edition of the 
Speaking French Grammar is enriched will greatly contribute to ren- 
der it still more deserving the liberal patronage by which it has been 
hitherto distinguished. The whole of the work has been most care- 
fully revised by the Author, and he flatters himself that it will be found 
the best companion which a person desirous of learning the French 
language can possibly have. Those, in particular, who are deprived of 
the assistance of a master, will highly appreciate it, as, by following 
the plan recommended in the Key, they will be enabled to acquire a 
thorough knowledge of the language by themselves. 

Paris, Jmte 25, 1835. 
Rue Naive du Mont-Thabor, No. 10. 



PREFACE. 



The extensive use of the French language has given it such intrinsic 
value that a knowledge of it has long been considered indispensably 
necessary. The exposition of its elementary principles has conse- 
quently engaged more general investigation in England than, perhaps^ 
any other tongue, either ancient or modern. But the practical part of 
the language, though by far the most essential to an English student, 
has yet unfortunately been more or less neglected by all writers upon 
this subject. It is therefore from a conviction of there being ample 
room for improvement in this particular, that the present work has 
been undertaken. 

The Author's principal object has bccu lo render the speaking of 
French as easy of attainment to English persons in England, as if 
they studied in France. In order to accomphsh this great desidera- 
tum, he has particularly applied himself, in the composition of the 
contents of this Grammar, to arrange them so as to enable the pupil 
to store his mind with useful expressions, at the same time that he 
imbibes just notions of the philology of the language ; for, unless a 
learner be early habituated to conversation, and properly grounded in 
the principles of the language, he will never be able to converse with 
a native of France. 

The work is divided into four parts, and, in the arrangement of the 
materials, every thing belonging to the same head has been classed 
under one article, by which plan the trouble frequently experienced in 
referring to several places for information on the same subject is 
obviated. 



Ti PREFACE. 

The first part is appropriated to the orthography of the language, 
and contains instructions on pronunciation. The modern orthography, 
being in accordance with the decisions of the French Academy, has 
been adopted, and the remarks on pronunciation are in conformity 
with the present practice of the fashionable circles in Paris. 

The second and third parts, which treat of Etymology and Syntax^ 
are divided into fifty-nine lessons, embracing all the rules of the 
French Accidence and Syntax, with Colloquial Essays in illustration 
of the rules. Etymology being necessarily the foundation of that 
perfect acquaintance with the language which every well-educated 
person ought to possess, particular attention has been bestowed upon 
it. The difficulties usually attending this part of Grammar have, it is 
hoped, been considerably diminished by the explanatory system intro- 
duced throughout the work, and by the vaiious modifications of each 
class of words being displayed in simple sentences, in order to impress 
them more firmly on the student's memory. The nature of the French 
verbs is also exhibited in a new and perspicuous manner ; but much 
must be left to the good sense of the pupil, guided by the skill of his 
master, to form such combinations as are in consonance with his own 
ideas for the expression of hio wants, emotions, or passions. In doing 
this, his progress will be greatly facilitated, if the teacher asks him 
questions of familiar discourse, and requires him to translate them 
into French. These questions may be partly formed by introducing 
the personal pronouns in conjunction with a verb, as — T have had the 
pleasure to see your sister, fed eu le plaisir de voir Mile, voire sceur. 
Have you spoken to her? lui avez-vous parle? No, I have not 
spoken to her, non, je ne lui ai pas parle. Has not Mr. D* * spoken to 
her ? M. D** 7ie lui a-t-il point parle ? Yes, he has spoken to her, oui, 
il lui a parle ; and so on through all the simple and compound tenses^ 
taking care to introduce by degrees the use of the subjunctive mood, 
and varying the sentences from the affirmative to the negative and 
interrogative forms of the verb. Without this practice, the utmost 
proficiency in conjugating the verbs will scarcely be of any avail for 
speaking French ; but, by adopting it, and a similar exercise on the 



PREFACE. vii 

other parts of speech, due attention being paid by the teacher to a 
correct pronunciation, a pupil may acquire the language with as much 
facility, purity, and elegance of expression, as if he studied it in Paris. 
It should also be observed that the verbs being gradually introduced 
into the essays, and being absolutely necessary for speaking French, 
the pupil must begin to learn them from the first lesson. 

The essays throughout these two divisions of the Grammar form an 
important and distinguishing feature of the work. They are chiefly 
composed of phrases and passages used in ordinary discourse, and 
may be considered as a repertory for conversation. By construing 
them into French, according to the method recommended in the Key, 
the student is kept in constant practice, and gradually becomes 
acquainted with a considerable number of familiar and idiomatic sen- 
tences, and with those variations and delicacies of expression which so 
frequently occur in the polite circles in the capital of France. A strict 
adherence to this plan will enable him, not only to acquire a thorough 
knowledge of the rules of the language, but also to sustain his part in 
conversation with persons of intelligence and fashion, and to appre- 
ciate the beauties of French authors and form a just conception of the 
merit of their compositions. 

The fourth part comprises, as the sixtieth lesson, a treatise on French 
Prosody and Versification, exemplified by quotations from eminent 
authors; — also three essays (in French) on grammatical analysis; — a 
comprehensive and classified Vocabulary of words most generally used 
in conversation ; — a collection of familiar sentences, arranged under 
distinct heads ; — numerous models of notes and letters, with some 
forms of bills of exchange, promissory notes, receipts, &c. ; — and for 
the use of such English persons as are only slightly acquainted with 
French, but who, on their visit to the French metropolis, may be de- 
sirous to make themselves understood, a collection has been made, in 
the form of dialogue, of the phrases, directions, observations, &c. that 
commonly occur in a journey from Calais to Paris, and on the return. 

How far the Author has succeeded in his endeavours to facilitate 
the speaking of French to English persons will be for the public to 



CONTENTS. 



Lesson XI. Plural of Adjectives and Participles adjectively used. . 46 

Lesson XII. Degrees of Comparison in Adjectives 47 

Lesson XIII. Of Numeral Adjectives . 52 

Of the Cardinal Numbers ib. 

Examples of the Cardinal Numbers with the Word/oi*, 

time , ... 56 

Lesson XIV. Of the Ordinal Numbers ih. 

Examples of the Ordinal Numbers with the Word fois, 

time 57 

Lesson XV. Of Pronouns , 60 

Of the Personal Pronouns ib. 

Of the Personal Pronouns which fill the Place of the 

Nominative or Subject of the Verb 61 

Lesson XVI. Of the Personal Pronouns 7ne, thee, him, her, it, us, ye or 

you, and thevi, which are used as Objects of the Verb . 63 

Lesson XVII. Of Adjective Pronouns 67 

Of the Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns 68 

Of the Relative Possessive Pronouns 69 

Lesson XVIII. Of the Demonstrative Pronouns 71 

Lesson XIX. Of the Relative Pronouns 74 

Repetition of the Relative Pronouns 78 

Lesson XX. Of the Indefinite Pronouns 80 

Lesson XXL Of Verbs - 85 

Of Number and Persons in Verbs 86 

Of Moods and the Tenses or Times ibM87 

Of Conjugations ',.... ib. 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb afOjV, affirmatively . 88 
Cases in which the Imperfect and Preterit Definite of the 

Indicative are used in French 89, 90 & 91 

Conjugation of the Verb avoir, negatively . . . . 93 & 94 

Conjugatiuii of the same interrogatively 97 

Conjugation of the same interrogatively and negatively . 99 

Conjugation of y ovozV, to be there 102 

Conjugation of the Auxiliaiy Verb eti^e, to Be ... 104 

Of the Regular Conjugations ". . 107 

First Conjugation: par/er, to Speak, with its additional 

Tenses 26. and 108 

Particular Observations on the Verbs which terminate in 

the Present of the Infinitive Mood in ayer, eyer, oyer, 

uyer, &c 112 

Second Conjugation: _^njV, to finish • 114 

Third Conjugation : r^-cew/r, to I'eceive . . . 118 & 119 

Fourth Conjugation : entendre, to hear, to understand, . 122 
Manner of finding the different Tenses and Persons of 

Regular Verbs from the knowledge of the Infinitive . 127 

Of Reflective Verbs 130 

First Conjugation of Reflective Verbs: se fromener, to 

walk 131 

Second Conjugation of Reflective Verbs: se rejouir, to 

rejoice 135 

Third Conjugation of Reflective Verbs : s'apercevoir, to 

perceive 139 

Fourth Conjugation of Reflective Verbs: se rendre, to 

surrender 143 

Of Reflective Unipersonal Verbs ....... 147 



CONTENTS. 



XI 



Page 
Conjugatiou of the Reflective Unipersonal Verb se ve7idi'e, 

to sell 148 

• A list of Verbs wlii<:h, though not admitting in English 
the Pronouns one^s se/f, myse/f, thyself^ &c. are never- 
theless Reflective in French 150 

Of Irregular and Defective Verbs 152 

Irregular Verbs of the First Conjugation: — aller, to go; 

s'en alter ^ to go away, &c ih. 

Observations on etre^ alle, &c. often incorrectly used in- 
stead of avoir, ete, &c 155 

Conjugation of the Reflective Verb s'cn aller, to go away . 156 

Conjugation of e/?iv^ypr, to send 159 

Irregular Verbs of the Second Conjugation . . . .160 

Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation 174 

Irregular Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation .... 180 

Of Unipersonal Verbs 198 

Unipersonal T^erbs of the First Conjugation .... ih,. 
Unipersonal Verbs of the Second and Third Conjuga- 
tions 199 & 200 

Unipersonal Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation . . , 202 

Lesson XXII. Of Negations and Interrogations 203 

Distinction betAveen pas and point ih. 

Lesson XXIII. Cases in which ne is used before a Verb in French without 

;3«s or/jom^ after it , . 207 

Lesson XXIV. Of Interrogations 210 

Lesson XXV. Of Adverbs . ._ 214 

Place of Adverbs in the Sentence ib. 

Lesson XXVI. Of Prepositions 216 

Of the Place and Repetition of Prepositions .... 219 

Lesson XXVII. Of Conjunctions 222 

What Tenses must be used after si, (if, whether) . , . ih. 

Of Interjections 224 

Lesson XXVIII. Of the French Idioms 226 

Cases in wbich the different Tenses of the Verb to be are 

expressed in French by those oi avoir ih. 

Lesson XXIX. Cases in which the Tenses of to be are expressed in French 

by those of y aro?;- 228 

Lesson XXX. Cases in which the Tenses of the Verbs to he and to do are 

expressed in French by those of the Verbs faire, se 

porter, and en etre 230 

Lesson XXXI. Cases in which the different Tenses of the Verb to be, being 

preceded by it, are expressed in French by il est, il etcdt, 

il sera, &c. and by c'est, c^etait, ce sera, &c 232 

Lesson XXXII. Avoir mal — a, an, a la, a f, or aux 235 

Lesson XXXIII. Of the Verb must, expressed in French by ilfaid,ilfaUait, 

il fatfdra, SiC 236 

Lesson XXXIV. Of the Defective Verbs may, will, would, can, shall, should, 

could, might and ought 239 



PART III.— SYNTAX. 



Lesson XXXV. 



Of Syntax 

Cases in which the Article is used in French 



242 
ib 



xu 



CONTENTS. 



Lesson XXXVI. 
Lesson XXXVII. 

Lesson XXXVIII. 

Lesson XXXIX. 

Lesson XL. 
Lesson XLI. 



Lesson XLII. 
Lesson XLIII. 
Lesson XLIV. 
Lesson XLV. 
Lesson XLVI. 
Lesson XLVII. 

Lesson XLVIII. 
Lesson XLIX, 



Lesson L. 

Lesson LI. 
Lesson LII. 
Lesson LIII. 
Lesson LIV. 



Lesson LV. 



Lesson LVI. 



Lesson LVII. 

Lesson LVIII. 
Lesson LIX. 



Page 
Cases in which there is no Article used in French . . 247 
Continuation of the Cases in which there is no Article 

used in French 252 

Of substantives # . . 256 

Of the Possessive Case and Compound Words , . . 257 
Of Adjectives and Participles adjectively used . . . 260 
Agreement of Adjectives, and Participles adjectively used, 
with their respective Substantives in French . , . ib. 

Of the Place of Adjectives 264 

Observations on some Adjectives which have a different 
Meaning, according as they precede or follow their re- 
spective Substantives ih. 

Of the Government of Adjectives 267 

A List of Adjectives which govern «, or au, a la, a /', or 
aifoe, before the succeeding word which depends on 

them ih. 

A List of Adjectives which govern de, or du, de la, de l\ or 

des^ before the next word depending on them • , . ib. 
General Observations on several Adjectives and Participles 
which, according to the sense in which they are used, 
govern different Prepositions before their Object . . 268 
Of the Adjectives of Dimension high, wide, broad, &c., , 273 

Of Comparatives 275 

Observations on the Pronouns lid, elle, and eux . , . 277 
Of the Supplementary Pronouns /e, /a, /', /es .... 279 
Oi the 'Pvonouus myse/f, ihyse/f, himself, herself, &ic. . . 281 
General Order in which the Pronouns come before the 

Verb or its Auxiliary in French 283 

Repetition of the Personal Pronouns 288 

Particular Observations on the Possessive Pronouns 
mi/, thy, his, her, our, your, their, and mine, thine, his, 

hers,8cc. . 290 & 291 

Cases in which its is expressed in French by son, sa, ses, 

and en 294 

Particular Observations on the Demonstrative Pronouns. 296 
Particular Observations on the Relative Pronouns . . 302 

Of the Indefinite Pronouns 306 

Of Verbs and of the Subject or Nominative of the Verb . 322 
Of the Verb's agreement with its Nominative or Subject, ib. 
Place of the Subject or Nominative of the Verb . . . 326 

OftheObjector Regimen of Verbs 329 

When de ov par is to be used after Passive Verbs . . . 330 
Place of the Object or Regimen of Verbs, when it is a 

Noun or a Verb 33] 

Of the different Prepositions which the Verbs govern . 335 
Cases in which the Preposition pour or afn de is used 
before a Verb in the Present of the Infinitive Mood in 

French 353 

Of the Subjunctive and the Cases in which it is required . 355 
What Tenses of the Subjunctive must be used * . . 362 
Of the Present Participle and Verbal Adjective . . , 366 
Of the Past Participle and the Cases in which it is de- 
clinable and indeclinable . « . « . t . # • 370 



CONTENTS. xiii 

PART IV.— PROSODY. 

Page 

Lesson LX. Of Prosody 378 

Of Accent ib. 

Of Quantity, and General Rules on Quantity . . ib. & 379 

A List of French Homomjmes 380 

Of Emphasis, Pauses, and Tones 381 & 382 

Of French Versification , ib. 

Of the Number of Syllables in Verses ib. 

Of Caesura and Hemistic 384 

OfRhjTne ib. 

Difference between rich and sufficient Rhymes . . . 385 

Arrangement of the Rhymes together 386 

Of the expressions which canuot be admitted into Poetry 387 
Of the Syllables which cannot enter into a Verse, or — of 

the Hiatus and E/inion 388 

Of Licences allowed in French Poetry ib. 

Of the Transpositions of Words ...,.., ib. 
Of the Letters which can be dropped in some Words . 389 

Of the Expressions belonging to Poetry ib. 

Of Verses belonging to the difFerent sorts of Poetry . . ib. 

Of Stanzas and Idyls 390 & 391 

OfFables, Epigrams, and Madi-igals . . . . . .392 

Of Impromptus, Enigmas, Inscriptions, Epigraphs, Epi- 
taphs, Distichs, Acrostics, Sonnets, and Rondeaux 

393, 394, & 395 

Manner of reading French Poetry 396 

Manner of composing French Verses ,,,,., ib. 

Of Grammatical Analysis 398 

A Vocabulary 402 

A List of some of the ancient and modern Names of the 
most remarkable Nations, Empires, Kingdoms, Pro- 
vinces, Towns, Mountains, Islands, Straits, Rivers, &c. 
that are not spelt alike in French and English . . . 426 

A List of Adjectives and Participles 430 

A List of Verbs 442 

A List of Adverbs and Adverbial Expressions .... 464 

A List of Prepositions 470 

A List of Conjunctions ^ . . . 472 

Familiar Sentences 473 

A Journey from Calais to Paris 485 

Models of Notes and Cards of Invitation, Ceremony, and 

Thanks 489 

Forms of Bills of Exchange and Promissory Notes . , 492 

Models of Receipts 493 

Tables of the respective value of the French and English 
Coins 494 

1. A Table of the value of French sot/s and centimes, with 
reference to English pence and half-pence, up to 1 franc ib. 

2. A Table of the value of French/ra«cs, with reference to 
English pence and shillings, up to 1 pound .... 495 

Recommendations of " The Speaking French Grammar and 
Introductory Book to (lit to-' 496 



OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 
General Observations on the Sounds of the Letters. 



ARTICLE L 

Of the Vowels. 

In the different gradations of sound, which vowels produce in different words, 
and which can only be learnt by practice, two general ones are distinguished : the 
slender sound, as given in the alphabet, and a longer one, which, though generally 
marked with the circumflex accent, is in several words not so distinguished, and 
must, consequently, be acquired by practice^ 

Examples of the Sounds of the Vowels. 

1. A is short as in dmdieur ;... and long as in age. 

2. I is short as in tiire ; and long.,. as in sire. 

3. O is short as in oracle; ...and long as in ofer. 

4. U is short as in Utile; and long as in .f.ule. 

The letter e has three sensibly different sounds : the open or long, the acute, and 
the obtuse or short. 

The open or long is in some words marked with the grave, and in others with the 
circumflex accent : as — succes, meme ; bu.t, in many other words, it has no such cha- 
racteristic : thus — chef. The cases, therefore, in which e is so pronounced, can only 
be knoAvn by use and observation. 

The acute sound is marked with the acute accent : thus — veriie, premedite. 

The obtuse or short e, being but faintly heard when pronounced, has no mark or 
accent : as in homme, je redemande ; &c. 

Of the Nasal Sounds. 

"When the vowels a, e, i, a, u, come before the consonants m and n, they form 
nasal sounds : this, however, only occurs when m and n are at the end of words, or 
when, being in the body of a word, they are followed by any other consonant than 
m or « ; for two m's or two n's, in several instances, have no nasal sound, although 
in some others they retain it, as in ennui, ennuyer, emmener, in which m and n, 
though followed by another m and n, preserve their nasal sound. 

M and n, at the end of foreign words, have no nasal sound, although they may 
be preceded by a vowel: thus Jerusalem, amen, are pronounced with the natural 
sound of m and n. 

The termination ent, in the third person plural of verbs, has no nasal sound : thus 
— ils aiment, ils parltrent, are pronounced — il or i zaime, il parlere, and not ilzaiman, 
ilpaltran. 

A, e, i, 0, u, admitting various combinations before m and n, form different nasal 
sounds, of which the following are the principal ones. They are pronounced as 
follows : 

Am an as in ambassadeur. 

Aim ein as in .faim. 

Em en as in embrasser. 

Im ein as in imbecile. j 

Om...,. on as in ombre. 

Um eun.... as in humble. 

An an as in ancien. 

Ain ein as in pain. 

Ean an as in Jean. 

En an as in ennui. 



OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 



Ein 


pin 




Eon .... 


on 


Icn . .. 


, . ien 


On 




Un 


un 



as m ..s€t?i. 

as in ajeun. 

as in pigeon. 

as in /e mien. 

on as in oncie. 

as in .., difunt. 



' Of Diphthongs. 

A diphthong is the union of two or more vowels in the same syllable, which, when 
pronounced, convey to the ear a double sound, although they be uttered with a 
single emission of the voice, as in the word Dieu, in which the sounds of i and eu 
are distinctly heard. Tire follov/ing are the principal diphthongs : 

Eoi as in viUageo is. 

la as in diacre, diable. 

le as in pied. 

le as in lumitre. 

leu as in Dieu. 

lo as in pioche. 

Oi as in lui. 

Ouai as in ouais! 

Oue as in ouest. 

Oin as in soin. 

Ouin as in baragouin. 

Ouan as in , louange. 

Oui as in Louis. 

Ui as in i ltd. 

Uai as in suaire. 

Observe. — A diphthong must not be confounded with the union of two or more 
vowels in the same syllable, producing a single sound : as — a/, ae, aie, au, eai, ei, eg, 
ao, eau, eo, ie, eu, oeit, and ue, in the following words : 

1. Ai, in the preterite and future of verbs, is pronounced like e acute : thus— /'aj, 
je chantai,je lirai, are pronounced — j^;je chant e, je /irt. 

Ai is also sounded like t open : — 1. In the terminations of the imperfect and con- 
ditional of verbs: as — favais,faimais,jedirais. 2. In the words ^rt^/a«v, Ecossais, 
Francais, Gro'cn/andais, Hol/andais, Ir/andais, Lyonnais, Poiojiais., and some others. 
3, In the middle of words : as — maitre,tnaison, 8cq.', ^ which are pronounced as if 
they were spelt j\ives, j'aimes, je dires, Anglts, Ecossts, Frances, Gro'cnlandts, 
Holandts, Ir/andes, Lyonnes, Polonts, metre, meson, &c. 

In faisant and the first syllables oi faisais, faisait, faisions, faisiez, faisaient, at 
takes the sound of e obtuse or short: as — fesant,fcsais, &c. ; but it is pronounced like 
a in douairiere : thus — douariere. 

2. Aie, eai, ei, in the words haie, demangeaison, seigneur, and some others, are 
pronounced like e open: thus — he, demanjezon, segneur. 

3. Ae iu Ca'cn (ville) is pronounced as if Caen were spelt without e: thus— 
Can. 

4. Ao in pcutn, paonne, faon, Laon, (ville,) is pronounced as if there were no o in 
these words: thus — pan, pane, fan, Lan ; but in Aoid, Aoriste, Saone, taon, (poisson,) 
alone is sounded, the a being mute: as — ou, oriste, sone, ton; but in aoit/^, par- 
ticiple of the verb aouter, to ripen, both a and o are pronoimced. 

5. Au and eau, at the end of words, are sounded like o long : thus — aloyau, bateau, 
are pronounced aloyo, baio. 

6. Ie is pronounced like /, and ue like u, in the different tenses and persons of 
the verbs which end in ier and uer in the present of the infinitive: thus— ^e prie, je 
prierai,je prierais, andje remue,je remiierai,je remuerais, are pronounced — je pri, je 
prirat,je prirais ; andjV remu,je remurai,je reniurais ; Sec. 

7. Eu is sounded like u, in j^eus, iu eus, il eut; nous eumes, vous eiiies, ils eurent ; 

B 2 



4 OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 

quefeusse, &c ; but it retains its natural sound eu, in Europe, Euridice, Eucharislie, 
heureux. heureusc, St. Eustache. 

8. CE takes the sound of ew, in soeia-, mceurs, ceuf. 

9. Geo, geo, geure, without any accent over the e after g, are pronounced— yfl,yo, 
jure. — II jugea ; Georges, geolier, gageure, must therefore be pronounced — il juja, 
Jorge, jblier,gujure. 



ARTICLE IL 

Of Consonants. 

As Consonants do not always have the same pronunciation as that which is 
marked in the alphabet;, the pupil's attention is directed to the following obser- 
vations. 

B. 

B preserves its natural sound h, except at the end of the words plomb and a 
plomb, in which it is not heard. If it be doubled in a word, only one is pro- 
nounced: as — abbe, sahbat — -pvononnced abe, saba. 



C, besides its natural sound k, has the sound of s, in the beginning and middle 
of words, before e or i: thus — ceci, cela, are pronounced sesi, «e/a. C is likewise 
sounded s, before a, a, and u, when a cedilla is placed under it : a.s— facade, garcon, 
recu, — pronounced — fasade, garson, resu. 

C is pronounced gue, in second, secondemenf, seconder: thus — segon, segondma??, 
sego?ider. 

"When c comes before q in the middle of words, it is not sounded : acqutrir is, 
therefore, pronounced aqueri?'. 

When c is doubled in the middle of words, only one is pronounced, if e or i does 
not immediately follow : thus — accabler, accomplir, accuser, are pronounced — acabler, 
acompHr, acuser ; but if c be doubled before e or /, the first c takes the sound of ^, 
and the second that of s: thus — accident, acces, &c., are pronounced aksidan, akses. 

C is mute in arsenic, broc,croc, cierc, echecs, (jeu,) esiomac, pore, i/xbac, these words 
being pronounced — arseyii, bra, cro, cler, eche, estoma, por, iaba ; but c retains the 
sound k, in — avec, bee, tehee, (perte,) and also in done in the beginning of a sen- 
tence, or in the middle of it, when coming before a vowel or an h mute, or even 
before a consonant, if a strong passion be expressed: as — voire ptre est dans /a 
misere, dofic vous devez f aider ; — voire ami est done arrive? — jusques a quund prelen- 
drez-vous dona me dicier des lois ? &c. which are pronounced — votre pere est dans la 
misere, donk vous devez P aider; — votrami est donkuni;e; — j usque za quand priten- 
drez-vous donk me dicier des lois? — In other cases, c is not heard in done: as allons 
done nous promener i quand viendrez-vous done? — pronounced — a//o/7s don nous pro- 
mener ; quand viendrez-vous Aon? 

D. 

D has its natural sound d, in the beginning of words, as also in the middle, when 
it comes before a consonant : — as dame, admission. 

If d be doubled in a word, only one d is pronounced : except in addition, reddi- 
iion, and adduction, in which both are heard. 

When an adjective terminates with d, and is used before a substantive, which 
begins with a vowel or h mute, d is pronounced like t, and joined to it in pronun- 



OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 5 

elation: as — tai grand acteur ; un grcijid homme ; which are pronounced tin gran- 
Vacleur ; un gran-i' omm. 

D, at the end of the third person singular of the present of the indicative of 
verhs, is also pronounced t, hefore the pronouns il, eUe, or on, and is joined to them 
in pronunciation: as — entend-il? coudelle bien ? repond-on ainsi? pronounced— 
enten-til? cou-tel/e bien? ?-cpon'fon ainsi ? 

At the end of the proper names, David, Jond, Obed ; as also in siid, (a point of 
the compass,) d preserves its natural sound d. 

In other cases, d is usually silent at the end of words : as — quand viendrez-vous ? 
pronounced — kan viendrez-vou ? 

F. 

F generally preserves its natural sound/, in the heginning and middle of words, 
as also at the end, when they are used hy themselves in the singular numher : as 
— feu, conjiance, boeuf, (xuf, neuf; hut it is silent in the plurals boeufs, oeufs, neufs, 
these words heing pronounced boeH, cei'i, neu. 

F in neuf (noun of number) takes the sound of v, when new/ occurs hefore a sub- 
tjiantive which begins with a vowel or h mute: ';3s — nevf ans, neuf hommes, — pro- 
nounced neu-van, neu-vomm ; but, when neuf covaes before a word beginning with a 
consonant or h aspirated, the / is mute: thus — iieuf chevaux is pronounced neu- ^ 
skevo. 

Fis always mute in clef, cerf, tteuf: these words being pronounced cl6, cer, tteu, 
whether in the singular or plural. 

When / is doubled in the middle of words, only one is pronounced : thus— 
officier, offrir, affaiblir, are pronounced ojicie, ofrir, afaiblir. 

G. 

G is sounded gue, in the beginning and middle of words, when followed by the 
vowels a, 0, u, or the consonants d, h, L m, r : as in gateau, gosier, aigu, Mugdebourg, 
glorieux, augmenter, agrtable ; but, in gangrene, it is pronounced k, thus — kangrene. 
When it comes before e or i, it takes the accidental sound y.- thus — gelie, gibier, are 
pronounced je!te,jifner. 

When g is followed by n in the middle of words, it has the liquid sound gn : as 
in — agneau, assignation, assigner, compagnie, compagnon, signer, &c. ; but in impregna- 
tion, stagflation, and a few others, — g and n retain their natural sound gue. and « ; 
thus — impreg -nation, stag-nation, &c. 

Signet is pronounced sinet. 

If g be doubled in a word, only one g is heard : except in snggtrer, and in any 
other word, in which the second g is followed by e marked vnt\\ an acute accent, 
thus — (e), in which case the first g is pronounced ^we, and the second^; thus — 
sugjerer. 

G is always mute in coing, poing, t tang, faubourg, kareng, legs, doigt, vingt, seing, 
by whatever word they may be followed. 

G, at the end of the foreign names Jgag, Dotg, retains its natural sound gue. — 
In bourg, it is pronounced k, thus — bourk. 

G final is mute in all other words followed by a word beginning mth a conso- 
nant or h aspirated: thus — rung noble is pronounced ran noble; but g final is 
sounded like k on the next word, when this begins with a vowel or h mute : as — 
rang honorable ; suer sang et eau ; which are pronounced ran-konorable ; suer san- 
k^-eau. 

H. 

H is pronounced with its natural aspirated sound he, at the beginning of words, 
except in the following and their derivatives, iu which it is mute. 

Habile, Haleine, Heberger, Heliotrope, 

Habit, Hamegon, Hebete, Hematologic, 

Habiter, Harmonie, Hecatombe, Hemisphere, 

Habitude, Hebdomadaire, Hegire, Hemistiche, 



OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 



Hemorrhagie, 

Herbe, 

Herbage, 

Heresie, 

Heriter, 

Hennite,, 

Hermi'ie 

Heroine, 

Heroique, 

Heroisme, 

Hesitet, 

Heterodoxe, 

Heterogene, 

Heure, 

Heureux, 

Hexagone, 

Hexametre, 



Hier, 

Hieroglyphe, 

Hiroiidelle, 

Histoire, 

Histrion, 

Hiver, 

Holocauste, 

Home lie, 

Homicide, 

Hommage, 

Homo gene, 

Homme, 

Honnete, 

Honneur, 

Hopital, 

Horizon, 



Horloge, 

Horreur, 

Horrible, 

Horoscope, 

Hospice, 

Hospitalier, 

Hostie, 

Hostilite, 

Hote, 

Hotel, 

Hotellerie, 

Hotesse, 

Huile, 

Hiiissier, 

Huitre, 

Htimain, e. 



Humble, 

Humecter, 

Humeur, 

Humidite, 

Humilite, 

Hyacinthe, 

Hydre, 

Hydromel, 

Hydropisie, 

Hydrophobie, 

Hymen, 

Hymne, 

Hyperbole, 

Hypocrisie, 

Hypothese, 

Hypotheque. 



H is likewise mute, at the beginning of proper names of towns, countries, &c. ; 
except in Holkmde, Hongrie, Haincmt, Hambourg, and a few others, in which it is 
fully pronounced h: but in the sentences — de la toile (P Hollande ; du fromage 
d'Hollande ; eau de la reine d' Hongrie ; the h is not pronounced. 

Ch must be sounded like sh in English: thus — chapeau, cheval, chose, chute, are 
pronounced shapo, sheval, shoze, shufe. 

Ch, at the end of words, is not, however, usuall)'' heard : thus — almanach is pro- 
nounced almana. 

J. and K. 

J and ^always have their natural sound^e and k. 

L. 

L generally preserves its natural sound /, in the beginning, middle, and at the 
end of words : as — le^-on, par/er,fL 

When I is doubled in the middle of words, and is preceded by any other vowel 
than I, oiil)^ one / is sounded : thus — colltge, collation^ collationner, (repas,) &c. — are 
pronounced colege, colacion, colacioiie ; but Apollon, allusion, allegorie, belligerant, 
belliqueux, collahoraieur, constellation, elltbore,foUiculaire, galUcan, gallicisme, oscilla- 
tion, palladium, rebellion, sollicifer, syllogis^ne^ tahdlion, collation, collationner (to 
collate), collegial, and their derivatives, are pronounced with the full sound of both 
the /'s. 

When / is doubled and preceded by i in the middle of words, as in— bataille, boii- 
teille, file, angnillc, paille, pillage, &c., it has a liquid sound, much resembling that 
of double / in the English word brilliant, or of gl in seraglio : except Gille, ville, 
mille, with their derivatives, and all words beginning with ill: as illtgitime, illustre, 
illusion, &c., in which the two /'s have their natural sound /. 

A single /, at the end of words, has likewise a liquid sound, when it is preceded 
by i : as in peril, ccueil, orgueil, travail, sommeil, soleil, &c. : except baril, chenil, 
coutil, cul, fournil, fusil, gril, nombril, outil, persil, soul, sourcil, in iwhich / is not 
sounded, Fil, nil, and mil, (noun of number,) and almost all adjectives ending 
with il, must likewise be excepted, as the / is pronounced with its natural sound /. 

M. 

il/ always preserves its natural sound w, in the beginning of words, as in — mer, 
mener. 

In the middle of words, m has the nasal sound of n, when it is preceded by a 
vowel and followed by a consonant : as — compte, compter, prompt — which are pro- 
nounced conte, confer, pron. 

When 7n occurs at the end of a word, and is preceded by a vowel, it takes the 
sound of n: thus — nom, pronom, faim, parfum, are pronounced non, pronon,fein^ 



OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 7 

parfun. At the end of foreign names, m retains its natural sound m : as in Priam, 
Amsterdam, Rotterdam, &c. ; but Adam and Absalom are pronounced Adan, Absalon. 
When m is doubled in the middle of Avords, only one m is sounded, which takes 
its natural sound m : thus — commode, commis, commissaire, grammaire, grammairien, 
are pronounced comode, comis, comisaire, gramaire, gramatrien ; but Amman, Em- 
manuel, commensurable, commemoration, grammatical, commotion, commuer, and their 
derivatives, as also all words beginning with i^nm : as immense, imm^diatement, must 
he excepted, as the two w's preserve each their natural sound m, 

N. 

iV usually has the sound of n, in the beginning and middle of words, when it 
is followed by a vowel: as in — nourrice, mener, &c. ; but enivrer, eriorgueillir, and 
their derivatives, must be excepted, these being pronounced as if spelt with two 
w's, the first having the nasal sound, and the second the natural one n : thus — an- 
nivrer, an-norgueillir. 

When n is doubled in the middle of words, only one n is pronounced, which 
retains its natural sound n ; but the first syllable of the word becomes short: as — 
anneaii, annte, innocence ; pronounced — ono, ante, inocence. From this rule, must 
be excepted ennui, ennwjer, ennoblir, in which the two 7«'s are sounded, the first with 
the nasal sound, and the second with the natural one : thus — an-nui, an-nuyer, an- 
noblir. In annales, annexes, inne, innove, innome, Cincinnatus, Linnte, Porsenna, 
both the «'s retain their natural sound n. 

Solennel, hennir, hennissement, are pronounced solanel, hanir, hanisseman. 

N, followed in a word by any other consonant than n, always has a nasal sound : 
as in encre, ingredient, &c. 

N final, preceded by a vowel, is always pronounced with the nasal sound, in 
a word which is either used by itself, or which comes before another word begin- 
ning with a consonant oxh aspirated: as \\\ passion, ambition, nation c^lebre, , 8cc. 
In foreign words, it is pronounced with its natural sound n : as in — Amen, Eden, 
Hymen, &c. 

But when n comes at the end of a word, before another word beginning with a 
vowel or h mute, it is necessary, besides its being pronounced with its nasal sound, 
that another n should be added in pronunciation to the beginning of the next word, 
in all the following cases: — 

1. At the end of adjectives immediately followed by their respective substan- 
tives: thus — ancien ami, bon homme, are pronounced ancien-nami, bo7x-n\mm ; but 
n, at the end of adjectives which are followed by any other word than their respec- 
tive substantives, as likewise at the end of all substantives, is pronounced with its 
nasal sound only, without the additional n to the next word, even when this begins 
with a vowel or A mute : thus — passion aveugle ; cela est certain el indubitable, are 
pronounced with the nasal sound only; and not passion-navei/gle ; cela est certain- 
net indubitable. 

2. After the possessive pronouns mo?/, ^?/, son: as — man ame ; mon intime ami; 
pronounced mo-name, mo-ninti-mami. 

3. At the end of un, coming before a substantive or an adjective, which it par- 
ticularises : — as uti /lonifne, un ancien ami, pronounced un-v^omm, un-nancien-nami ; 
but n in im, before any other word, is pronounced with its nasal sound only : as — 
il y en cut un assez hardi ; and not il y en eut un-nassez hardi. 

4. In on, coming before a verb affirmatively used: as on aime, on honorcra, ^XO' 
nounced on-nai?)7, on-n'onorera; but, in interrogative sentences, on coming after the 
verb or its auxiliary, has merely its nasal sound : as — a-t-on eu soin de lui ? and not 
a-t-on-nu soin de lui ? 

5. In en, followed by a word with which it is immediately connected by the sense : 
as — e?i Italic; en uti moment ; je li'en ai point; &c. — pronounced en-7iitalie, en-nun 
moman,je n\n-iCai poin ; but if en be not strictly connected with the next word, the 
nasal sound only should then be used: as — donnez-vi^en un peu ; and not — donnez- 



« OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 

Tf^ en-nun pen ; liecause we can make a little pause after en, Avhich shows that it is 
not inseparably connected Anth un jieu. 

6. After bieii and rien, when immediately followed by either an adjective, a verb, 
or an adverb, which they modify : as — bien ulilement^ hien honorable, bien a propos, 
bien ecrire, rien a dire, —pronounced bien-nuli/man, bien-n^o7iorable, bien-nd propos, 
bien-ntcrire, rien-na dire, &c. 

But when bieji and 7'ien are followed by some other word, or when they are used 
substantively, they are pronounced with the nasal sound only, jvithout the addi- 
tional 71 to the next Avord: as — il parlait hien et a propos ; ce bie7i est a moi ; ce rien a 
des attraits ; le bien et le mnl ; and not — il parlait bxen-net a propos; ce bien-nestd 
moi ^ ce rien-n'a de-zatlraits ; le bien-ne-l mal. 

P. 

P generally has its natural sound p, in the beginning and middle of words, as in 
— peuple, Septembre, accepter ; but it is not pronounced in iapteme, Baptiste,baptiser, 
baptistaire, sept, exempt, compte, C07npter, dompter, prompt, and their derivatives : 
these words being pronounced as if they were spelt baieme, Batiste, batiser, batistairg, 
set, exan, conte, confer, donter, pro7i ; and in general p is not pronounced in the 
majority of words in wlrich it comes between two consonants: except in coniempteur, 
exe7nption, redemption, rtdemptevr, in which it is sounded. 

When p is doubled in the middle of words, there is generally only one pro- 
nounced : thus — opporter, appeJer, are pronounced aporter, apeler. 

P final is mute at the en.l of these words : — camp, champ, drap, strop, loup, and in 
a few others ; but it is pronounced in cap, and the proper names Alep, Gap, Jalep. 

Pis likewise pronounced in leaiicoup and trop, when these words are immediately 
followed by another word beginning with a vowel or h mute, in which case p is 
joined to the next word in pronunciation: as — im coup inatlendu; il aitne beaucoup a 
Jouer ; — pronounced U7i cou-pinatendu, il airne beaiicou-pajouer; but if beaucoup and 
trop come before a word beginning with a consonant or h aspirated, or if they be 
used at the end of a sentence, or by themselves, p is not then pronounced : as— fen 
ai beat/coup trop — which is pronounced— ;;'e« ai beaucou tro. 

Ph is sounded like/; — thus philosophe, phrase, are pronounced//oso/,/rase. 



Q preserves its natural sound k, in the beginning and middle of words : as in 
quenouille^ acquirir, — pronounced kenonille, aktrir. 

Qu is pronounced cou, in equateiir and quaker ; cu, in equitation, Quvite-Curce, 
Qiiintilien ; and k, in qualif cation, Quasimodo, quadrille: thus — ecouateur, couaker^ 
tcuitacion, Cuintilien, Cuinte-Curce, kaliJicacio7%, Kasimodo, kadrille. 

Q final is not usually sounded in cinq, before a word beginning with a consonant 
or h aspirated : as — cinq gardens, cinq cavaliers, — pronounced with the nasal sound 
oi n,i\\\xs—cein garsons, cei7i cavaliers; but q in cinq retains its natural sound k 
before a substantive or an adjective beginning with a vowel or h mute, and is joined 
to it in pronunciation; as — cinq ans, cinq hommes, — pronounced cein-kuns, cein-k^omm. 

Q is also pronounced k, in ci7iq, used either by itself or at the end of a sen- 
tence, or before any other word than a substantive or an adjective, whether it 
begins with a vowel, an h mute or aspirated, or a consonant: as— /rois et deux 
font cinq ; les cinq pour cent; &c. — pronounced ti-oi zet deux font ceink ; les ceink 
pour ce7i. 

Q is mute, in coqWInde, — this word being pronounced co-d/Inde; but, q is sounded 
k in coq, in any other case. 

R. 

R always retains its natural sound r, in the beginning and middle of words, as in 
— regie, Ma7'di. 



OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 9 

When r is doubled in the middle of words, only one r is sounded, and the pre- 
ceding vowel is lengthened: thus — parrain, marraiue^ carrusse, guerre, tonnerre,Je 
pourrai, je pourrais, kc. are pronounced — par ain, moraine, edrosse, guere, toner e,je 
pourai, je pourais, &c. 

But the two ?-'s are pronounced in aberration, erreitr, errer, errone, ahkorrer ; 
and in the future and conditional of the verbs acqutrir, courir mourir, namely — 
j'acquerrai, facqiierrais ; je courrai, je cotirrais ; je mourrai, je viourrais \ &c. as 
also in the greatest part of words beginning by irr ; as — irregulier^ irraisonnabfe, 
irreligieur, irritation, irrevocable, irrefragable, &c. 

R final is pronounced: 1. — in the monosyllables cher, fer, mer, or, sieur, &.c. 
2.— at the termination of polysyllables ending in er, when er is immediately pre- 
ceded by /, m, or v : as — amer, enfer, hirer, &c. — 3. in the words cuiller, cancer, 
and in proper names : as, Jupiter, &c. 

R is likemse pronounced at the termination of the infinitive of all verbs of the 
second conjugation : as—Jlnir, partir, soriir, &c. It is also sounded at the end 
of any other word in ir or eur : as — p/aisir, loisir, repentir, bonheur, honneur, 
siffleur, &c. 

But r is not sounded: 1. — in Monsieur, which is pronounced Mocleu. 2. — at 
the end of polysyllables in ier : as — ojfficier, teinturier, parlicitlier, singufier, ejitier, 
&c. 3. — at the end of polysyllables in er, when er is not immediately preceded 
byy^ m, or v : as — danger, berger, &c. ; which words are pronounced — officie, tein- 
turie, pariiculie, singulie, entie, danje, berje, 8ic. 

R is also mute in the termination of the present of the infinitive of verbs of the 
first conjugation, when they are used either by themselves, or at the end of a 
sentence, or before words beginning with a consonant or h aspirated : as, dites- 
lui de danser ; je li'ai pas ose lui parler de cela ; pronounced dites-lui-d danst ; je 
n'ai pas ose lui par le-d cela \ but if these verbs come before words beginning with 
a vowel or A mute, the final r is slightly pronounced on them; thus — ainvr a 
danser ; folutrer et rire ; s^aiyiuser a lire; are pronounced — aime-rci-danse ; folatre- 
re rire : s'amuse-rii lire. 



S generally retains its natural sound s, in the beginning of words : as in 
semnine, soleil, statue, scorpion, &C. 

It is likewise pronounced s, in the middle of words, when it is preceded or 
followed by a consonant: as in absolu, converser^ conseil, lorsque, puisque, &c. ; 
but in Asdrubal, Alsace, Alsacien, halsaminc, balsamique, lalsamite, presbgfere, 
transiger, iy-ansaction, transition, transit, iransitif, intransitif, trunsitoire, and the 
words in which it comes between two vowels : as in htsiter, misere, rose, &c. it 
is sounded z: thus — Azdrubal, Alzace, Alzacien, heziter, mizere, roze, &c. 

S is, however, sounded s, in the following words, although coming between 
two vowels : as — desuetude, monosyllabe, monosyllabique, parasol, polysyllabe, pr6- 
seance, pr^supposer, presupposition, vraisemblance ; iwus gisons, ils gisent, il gisait, 
gisant. 

^Mien * is doubled in the middle of words, only one s is heard, which is pro- 
nounced with its natural sound *, but very acute: thus — bossu, bissexlil, desstche, 
desservir, essai, essieu, missel, messeant, passer, poisson, &c. — are pronounced — 
bo-su, bi-sextil, dt-seche, de-servir, e-sai, e-sieu, mi-sel, me-sean, pd-se, poi-son, &c. 

S, at the end of words, is not generally sounded, when these occur either by 
themselves or at the end of a sentence, or also before other words beginning 
with a consonant or h aspirated: thus — les grandes villes, is pronounced — le gran-d 
ville. 

But s is sounded z in the monosyllables mes, ies, $es, nos, vos, leurs, les, ils, 
when they are immediately followed by a word beginning with a vowel or [A 
mute : as — mes amis, vos intentions, ils aiment, &c. — pronounced — me-zaml, v6- 
zintencion, il or i-zaime. 

It is likewise sounded z, at the end of adjectives immediately followed by their 

B 5 



10 OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 

respective substantives, if these begin with a vowel or h mute : as — Ie& grands 
hommes; les bonnes ceuvres ; les grandes actions; — pronounced — It gran-z'omm, le 
bonne-zoeuvi'e, le gi'ande-zactions. But, at the end of substantives, followed by 
their respective adjectives beginning with a vowel or h mute, it is optional either 
to pronounce s with the sound z, or to omit it : thus — des personnes habites, may- 
be pronounced — des perso7i}i-zabile, or des fersonn-abile. 

h has likewise the same sound z, at the termination of the different tenses of 
verbs, when these come before a word beginning with a vowel or h mvite : thus — 
dis a monfrtre de venir, is pronounced di-za mon frere de venir. 

In gens, Jesus, lis, pi'us-que-parfait^ plus-pttition, and also in tons and plus taken 
substantively: as — tous pensent^ je dis phis, bien plus^ Sees preserves its natural 
sound */ but it is silent in Jtsus-Christ, le sens commun,Jleur de lis, and in plus 
and ious, followed by a v/ord depending on them, if this begins with a consonant 
or h aspirated: as — ious les hommes; donnez-moi un pen plus de pain ; — pronounced 
— tou le-z'omm ; donnez-moi un pen plu-d pain. 

iS is also pronounced s, in Atlas, anus, aloes, as, calus, en sus, foetus, iris, moeurs, 
prospectus, lapis, laps, locatis, (cheval de louage,) vis, vasistas, and in the words — 
Bacchus, blocus, Chorus, Cresus, Delos, Gil-Bias, gratis, Pallas, Vetius ; but it is 
mute in Judas, Mathias, Thomas, Jacques, aud in the words avis, des que, divers, 
OS, remords, tamis, tandis que, irepas, and a few others. 

T. 

T always preserves its natural sound t, in the beginning of Avords : as in — 
tenez, tkntbres. 

In the middle of words, it is also generally pronounced i, when followed by % : 
as in — amitie, chantier, entier, moitie, piiie, modestie, parlie, maintien, soutien, tien, 
tienne, nous portions, nous mettions, &c. ; but it is pronounced ce : 1. in prophetie, 
ineptie, inertie, tninutie. 2. in words terminating with atie : as — dtviocratie, pri- 
matie. 3. in words ending in tial, tiel, tion: as — partial, essentiel, nation, &c. 
with all their derivatives. 4. in proper names in tien or tienne: as — Diocletien, 
Gratien, Ftnitien, Fenitienne, &c. 5. in the words satiete, insatiable, initier, 
balbutier, patient, with their derivatives. 

T followed by i is, however, pronounced t, in words ending in tial or tion, if t be 
preceded by s or x : as — bastion, bestial, mixtion. 

When / is doubled in the middle of words, only one t is sounded : except in 
atticisms, attique, guttural, pittoresque, in which both the i's are pronounced : thus — 
at-ticisme, at-tique, gut-tural, pit-tor esque. 

T final is not generally pronounced, at the end of words wliich are used either 
by themselves or at the end of a sentence, or before words beginning with a con- 
so«ant or h aspirated: as — qui vient ? — il lui dit d^y aller ; &c. — pronounced — 
qui vien ? — il lui di d''y aller. 

But /, at the end of words which are followed by other words beginning with a 
vowel or h mute, and Avith Avliich they are inseparably connected by the sense, is 
pronounced and joined to them in pronunciation : as — un savant homme ; je suis tout 
a vous ; s'il vient a pleuvoir, — pronounced — un savan-fomm ; je suis tou-ta vous ; sHl 
vien-ta pleuvoir. 

If, however, t, terminating the tense of a verb, be preceded by r, it is not sounded, 
though followed by a vowel or an h mute, in the beginning of the succeeding word, 
on account of the harsh sound which would thus result from it : as — il part 
aujourd'' hui ; il court a bride abattue ; il s^endort a r ombre; — pronounced — il parau- 
jourd'hui ; il con-ra bride abattue; Il s'endo-ra f ombre ; and not — il par-taujourd' hui ; 
il coiir-ta bride abattue ; il s'' endor-ta V ombre. 

T\% likewise mute at the end of some substantives followed by their respec- 
tive adjectives, although these begin with a vowel or h mute, on account of the 
disagreeable sound which would result from the use of it ; and, in^general, / is 
silent at the end of words, whenever the harmony of the sound requires it : thus 



OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 11 

— un gout honible ; tin tort incroyable }- are pronounced — tm gou-orrible ; un iorincroy' 
able ; and not — un gou-t'orrible, tin tor-iincroyable. 

T is not pronounced in viugt, used either by itself or at the end of a sentence, or 
before a word beginning with a consonant or h aspirated. It is also mute in vingf, 
from eighty to ninety-nine inclusively, as also in cent, used by itself or before a con- 
sonant: thus — nous etions vingt ; vingt soldats ; quatre-vingt-onze honimes ; cent; cent 
chevatijp; &c., are pronounced — nou-zttion vein; vein-so/dd ; quatre-veiit-on-zomm ; 
cen ; cen-shevo ; but / is sounded in vingt and cent, immediately followed by a word 
beginning with a vowel or h mute, and also in the numbers from twenty to thirty, 
thirty io forty, forty to fifty, fifty to sixty, sixty to seventy-nine inclusively: as — vingt 
abricots, vingt-deux hommei, &c. — j)XOno\xncQ(\. vein-tabrico, veint-deuzomm, &c.; but # 
is silent in cent before un, une, huit, and onze. 

Tis likewise mute in sept and huit, followed by a word beginning with a consonant 
or A aspirated : as — sept chemises ; huit houppela?ides ; — pronounced — s6-shemJz ; hui- 
koupeland ; but it is sounded in sept and huit, when these numbers come before a 
word beginning with a vow-el or h mute, or w^hen they are used by themselves or at 
the end of a sentence, or, again, for expressing the date of Jthe month, in which 
latter case the t is even sounded before a consonant: as — sept ecus ; huit hommes ; ils 
etaient sept ou huit ; le sept de Juin ; le huit Sept^.mbre ; — pronounced — se-ttcu; hui- 
fomm ; ilzetaient st-tou huit ; le set de Juin ; le huit Septembre ; &c. 

Tis always mute in the conjunction et, and in the words vent and pont^ whether 
followed by a word beginning with a vowel, an h mute, or a consonant: as — lui et 
^lle ; le vent est haut ; le pout est-il fini9 — pronounced — lui-t-elle ; le ven-e-ho ; le 
pon-e-til fini ? and not — lui e-telle ; le ven-test haut ; le pon-tes-tilfini ? 

T is likewise usually mute, at the end of the termination enf, in the third person 
plural of verbs, even when followed by a vowel or h mute, if the verb be used affir- 
matively or negatively ; but it is pronounced, if the verb be employed interrogatively 
before a word beginning with a vowel or h mute : as — ils aiment a parler ; ils ne vien- 
nent pas aujourd^hui ; pronounced — il or i-zaim-u parler ; il ne vienn pah-zaiijourd/-hui ; 
but — lui parlireni-ils ? aimetit-ils a Jouer ? &c., must be pronounced lui parler-til ? 
aim-til a jouer ? &c. 

Tis not pronounced in Jesus-Christ, although it is in Christ, used without Jesus. 
It is likewise mute in aspect^ circonspect, respect., the final c only being heard ; but it 
is always pronounced in abject, accessit, brut^ chut, contact, correct, dot, direct, deficit, 
est (east), fat, granit, exact, incorrect, indirect, infect, indult, lest, luth, net, preterit, 
rapt, subit, suspect, strict, tacet, tact, toast, transit, vivat, zenith, zist, zest. 

\. 

V always has its natural sound — v. 

WvA not reckoned in the letters of the French alphabet, as it is to be found in 
French only in foreign names of persons, places, or things, in the beginning of 
which it usually takes the soxind of v : as in H'estphalie, Walbon, Wallone, Wirtem- 
berg, Warwick, Washington, — pronounced — Festphalie, Falbon, Valone, Virtemberg., 
Varvik, Vazington. In tvhist and wktsky, w is pronounced ou: thus — ouist, ouiski. 

Wy in the middle and at the end of words, varies in its pronunciation : thus— 
Neivton is pronounced Neuton; Warwick, Varvik; and Laiv, Lasse. 

X. 

X has the following different sounds :— ^ 

Ks ouCs as in extreme. ^ 

Gz as in Xavier, exemple. 

Ss as in Bruxelles, Auxerre. 

C as in.... excellent. 

Z as in..., deuxieme. 



12 OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 

When X comes at the heginning of a word, (which is only the case in a few 
foreign names,) it is pronounced cs or ks : except in Xavier, Xtnophon, Ximtnes, le 
Xante, Xantippe, and Xerxes, in which it is sounded gz : thus — Gzavier, Gzenophon, 
Gzimines, (which is also pronounced Chimenes,) le Gzanfe, Gzantippe, Gzersesse. 

X is likewise pronoimced ks or cs, in the middle of words, before a c guttural 
and one of the three vowels a, o, n ; or when it is followed by any other conso- 
nant than h, whatever may be the vowel following: as — excuse, excommtmit, expe- 
dient, inexpugnable, — pronounced — eks-cuse, eks-comunie, eks-pedian, ineks-pugnable ; 
but if c be followed by e or i, x must then be sounded like c only : as — execs, exciter, 
exception, &c., which are pronounced — ec-ces, ec-citer, ec-ception. X is also sounded 
cs, in the middle of words, between two vowels, if the word does not begin by e or 
in : as — axe, Alexandre, luxe, maxime, sexe, pronounced ac-se, Alec-sandre, hic-se, 
mac-sime, sec-se. 

Soixanie, and its derivatives, must however be excepted, as likewise Bruxelles^ 
Auxerre, Auxerrois, Auxonne, in which ir is sounded like doubles; thiis — soissante, 
Brusselles, Aussere, Ausstrrois, Amsone. — Sixieme, deuxieme, dixieme, are pronounced 
sizieme, deuzieme, dizieme. 

But when x occurs between two vowels, and the first letter of the word is e, or 
when the word begins by in, x is then sounded ^2;; in this case, if there be an h 
after x, it is not pronounced : thus — examen, exorbitant, exkeredation, exkiber, exer- 
cice, inexorable, are pronounced — eg-zamen, eg-zorbitan, eg-ztr6dacion, eg-ziber, eg- 
zercice, ineg-zorable, 

X is not generally sounded, at the end of words, used either by themselves or at 
the end of a sentence, or before words beginning with a consonant or h aspirated: 
as — tu peux le /aire; veux-tu y aller 9 &c. — pronounced tu peu-l faire ; veu-tu y 
aller 9 &c. 

The numbers six and dix must be excepted, as in them x is sounded like double s, 
when these words are used either by themselves or at the end of a sentence, 
although X is not pronounced when they come before a consonant or h aspirated : 
as — donnez-m^ en six; gardez-lui-en dix; six tables ; &c. — pronounced donnez-m^en siss; 
gardez-lui-en diss; si-tables; &c. 

X final is otherwise sounded z, before words beginning with a vowel or h mute, 
and is joined to them in pronunciation: thus — aux amis; aux hommes; chevnux 
alertcs; heureux epoux; je veux y aller ; tu peux ecrire ; deux ans ; six aunes ; dix 
hommes; are pronounced — d-zami ; o-zomm; shevo-zakrte ; heureu-ze'pou ; je veu-zy 
aller; tu peu-zecrire; deu-zan; si-zaune; di-zomm. 

X is likewise sounded s, in dix-huit, dix-neuf: — thus — dizuit, dizneuf. 

X is sounded cs or ks, at the end of proper names: as — Palafox, Fairfax, Styx, Sec. 
— pronounced — Palafocs, Fairfacs, Sties. It is also sounded cs, at the end of these 
words, — borax, index, lynx, sphinx, prefix: thus — boracs,indecs, lines, sphincs, prtjxcs: 
except Aix, which is pronounced Ai$. 

Y. 

• yis sounded i, either when it forms a word of itself, or when it comes before a 
vowel in the beginning of a syllable: as— II y a, yet/x, yacht, &c.— pronounced Jl-i-a, 
ieu, iak. 

yhas likewise the sound of i, between two consonants: a.s— acolyte, mystere, style, 
physique, &c.— pronounced acolite, mistere, stile, phisique ; but it is sounded like two 
«'s between two vowels : as — moyen, payer, nous employons, vous cssayez, pronounced 
— moi-ien, pai-ier, nous emploi-ion, vous essai-iez. In Pays, the y is also sounded like 
two t's : thus — Pai-'i. 

Z. 

Z always has its natural sound z, in the beginning and middle of words : as— 

zephyr, amazone. , , ., 1 4. 

It is usually mute, at the end of words which are used by thettiselves or at 



OF ACCENTS. 13 

the end of a sentence, or before a consonant or an h aspirated: as — vous par/ez 
(If. moi ; vous chantez trts-bien ; &c. — pronounced — vous par/t-d mot; vovs chafttt 
trts-bien. 

But z, at the end of the second persons pkiral of the tenses of verbs, occurring 
before words beginning with a vowel or an h mute, is pronounced with its natural 
sound z, and joined to them in pronunciation : as — vous aimez a me tourmenter — 
pronounced — vous aime-zd-m totermente. 

Lastly, z is sounded s, at the end of foreign proper names : thus — Alvarez, Cortez, 
JRodez, Suez, &c,, are pronounced — Alvares, Cortes, Rodts, Sues, &c. 



ARTICLE III. 



Of Accents. 

There are three accents in the French language, called the acute, the grave, and 
the circumflex. 

The acute accent is drawn from the right hand to the left, thus— (0. It is only- 
used over e, to which it gives an acute sound, much resembling that of a in English, 
as in the words — vtritt, proctde, prc'medite. 

The grave accent is drawn from the left hand to the right, as follows — Q), and 
when placed over c, as in — pere, mere, gives it an open sound, much like that in 
the word there. 

The circumflex accent is formed like v reversed, thus — ('^), and gives a long sound 
to the voAvel over which it is placed, as in the words — Cine, fete, gite, dome, flute. 

1 . Of the Acute Accent. 

The acute accent is used in French over every e which, either forming a syllable of 
itself or terminating one, has the sound of a in English : as in the words — e'tt, 
v^rite, procede, premtdite, probitt, &c. The acute accent is likewise used on the e of 
the last syllable of these words in the plural, though followed by s ; as — des pro- 
cedts, &c. 

The acute accent is also used on the last e but one in the last syllable of words 
ending with double e, Avhether they are in the singular or plural : as — armte, 
armees. It is likewise used on the final e of the past participle of all verbs of the 
first conjugation, with this observation, that, should the participle be employed in 
its feminine, either singular or plural, the accent is to preserve the same place as in 
the singular or plural masculine: thus— o/we, omie'e/ aiines, aimees. 

Lastly, the acute accent is used over the final e of the first person singular of 
the present of the indicative in all verbs of the first conjugation, when used inter- 
rogatively ; and also in those of the second, likewise used interrogatively, but 
which, when used j)ositively, end in e mute : as — aime-je? donne-js ? ouvre-j'e? (from 
the verbs aimer, donner, oiwrir.) 

2. Of the Grave Accent. 

The grave accent is used in French : — 

1 . Over every e which terminates a syllable, if followed b}^ a consonant and an e 
mute in the same word : as — yoe/e, mere, frere, maniere, jarretiere, ils parltrent, 
modele ; but words ending in ege must be excepted, as the e followed by ^e takes the 
acute accent: thus — sacrilege, sortilege, &c. 

2. Over the e in the last syllable of substantives ending in es in the singular : as 
— proces, succes, dtces ; and also generally over thee of the last syllable of adverbs 
and prepositions ending in the same manner : as — aupres, apres, des, expres^ pres, 
tres, &.C. But the monosyllables ces, les, mcs, tes, ses, and the compound article des, 
must be excepted, as they never take the grave accent. 



14 OF THE CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT, APOSTROPHE, &c. 

3. Over the preposition a, to distinguish it from the third person singular of the 
present of the indicative of the verh avoir, — il a ; and from a taken substantively : 
as — a Paris; — il a ; — il ne salt ni A ni B. 

4. Over /a, adverb, to distinguish it from /a, article or pronovm: as — allez-ld ; — 
la vertu et la science ; — aimez-la. 

5. Over oil, adverb or pronoun, to distinguish it from ou, conjunction: as — oii 
allez-voiis ? — la place ou voi/s aspire z ; — vous ou mot. 

6. Over des, preposition or conjunction, to distinguish it from des, article : as — 
des qitej''aiirai de l' argent, j"" acheterai des litres, 

7. Over des in des-lors. 

It is worthy of remark, that when the syllable des is used at the commencement 
of words, it takes the acute accent, if it be followed by a vowel or an h mute ; 
but if it is followed by a consonant it takes no accent : as — dtsastre, dtshonneur, 
despote. 

3. Of the Circumflex Accent. 

The circumflex accent is used in French over vowels which have a long sound, as 
in the following cases : — 

1. Over a followed by ch, or by t pronounced with its natural sound t, as in — 
fdcheuoc, Idche, tdche, bdtir, chateau, gateau, &c, but never when t has the sound s, 
as in nation, &c. 

2. Over e in the termination eme, as — mime, hapteme ; but the ordinal numbers— 
deuxiiine, troisihne, Sec, always take the grave accent. 

3. Over i in all the tenses of the verbs in aitre and oitre, in which e comes before 
as — i I par ait, il croit, &c., from the verbs paraitre, croitre. 

4. Over o before the finals le, me, ne : as — pole, role, dome, fantbme, trbne, zone, 
Sec, and also in — le nbtre, le vbtre, Sic, relative possessive pronouns, to distinguish 
them from the conjunctive nofre and votre, which are pronounced short. 

5. Over u in the adjective siir, to distinguish it from sur, preposition: as — je suis 
svir qi/e r argent est sur la table. 

6. Over u in mur (ripe), to distinguish it from miir (wall). 

7. Over 2i in rf«, participle of devoir, to distinguish it from du, compound article ; 
but this takes place only in the singular masculine, as there can be no mistake in 
the feminine singular, or in the plural of either gender. 

8. Over v in tu, the participle of the verb taire, that it may be distinguished 
from tu (thou), personal pronoun ; but still only in the singular masculine, for the 
same reason as for du. 

9. Over u in cru, participle of croitre, either in the masculine or feminine, singu- 
lar or plural, to distinguish it from cru, the participle of croire. 

10. Over the last vowel of the last syllable bvit one in the first and second per- 
sons plural of the preterite definite of the indicative, in all verbs : as — nous aimdmes, 
vous aimdtes ; nous finhnes, voiis finites ; nous resumes, vous realties; nous vendtmes, 
vons vendites ; &c, 

11. Over the last vowel of the third person singular of the imperfect of the sub- 
junctive: as — qi/'ilfut; qu^ileut', qi/il aimdt ; qi^ilfimt; qu'il re^ut ; qu^il vendit. 

Note. — The circumflex accent is also used over several words quoted in the large 
octavo Grammar, but which cannot be explained by any general rules. 

4. Of the Apostrophe, 

The apostrophe has the form of a comma, thus — (') ; it is placed above the level 
of the line, as — /'. It denotes the suppression of the vowels a, e, or t, in the mono- 
syllables le, la, je, me, te, se, de, ce, ne, que, and si, when these occur before another 
word beginning with a vowel or h mute; as — Vame, Pamour, Vhomme,j^ai, instead of 
la ame, le amour, le homme, je ai. 



OF THE HYPHEN, CEDILLA, &c. 15 

iS suffers the same elision : 1. in. jusque, before a, au, aux, and ici : a.s—yusqii'd 
Paris ; jusqu'cu ciel ; jusqi^aax tines ; jusqu'ici. 

2. In pi/isqi/e and qtioique^ before i/, Us, die, elks, on, vn, and tine ; and sometimes 
before words with which they are immediately connected: as — "pmsqi^il le veut ; 
quoiqi/'il dise ; pifisqiMinsi est. 

3. In qiielqzie,'beiove tin or tine: as — quelquhin, qtielqihme ; and also in g?/e/ gz/iV 
soit, quelle qi^elle soit ; but in no other case. 

4. In presque, in the compound word presqn^ile. 

But e and a do not suffer elision in ce, de, le. In, que, before otn, hint, kuitaine, 
hiiititme, onze, and onziime ; neither do they suffer elision in ce, de, le, la, que, when 
these words are used after a verb in the imperative mood, although the next 
word may begin with a vowel or an h mute; neither is a ever elided in la, adverb: 
thvis we write and pronounce — le out et le nun; le huit on le onze du mois ; le 
onziime; de huit qu'ils ttuietit ; — menez-le a Paris; ira-t-il la avec voiis? and not 
Fotii; Phuit ; Cunzs ; Vonzitme ; d' huit qu'ils ttaient ; menez-P -a Paris ; ira-t-il P avec 
vous 9 

Observe. — / suffers elision in the conjunction si (if), before il and Us, but never 
before elle or elles, nor any other word whatever ; thus we write and pronounce — 
il ira sHl veut ; — sHls viennent ; but — si elle veut ; si elles viennent, and not s'e//e veut ; 
s'elles viennent, 

2. Of the Hyphen. 

The hyphen, in French {tivet or trait iPunion), is a short horizontal line, drawn in 
this manner — (-), which is used: — 

1. Alter a verb followed by one of the pronouns jiV, tu, il, elle ; nous, vous, Us, elles ; 
le,la, les ; mot, toi, Itn, leur, y, en, ce, on: as — dis-moi ; dtpechez-vous ; yiattons-nous- 
en ; Sec. ; in which case if the verb be used interrogatively, and end with a vowel in 
the third person singular, a / is put between the verb and the pronoun, Avith a 
hyphen on each side of it : as — viendra-t-il? — parle-t-on 9 

2. Between the pronouns moi, toi, notis, vous, lui, elle, eiix, elles, and the word 
meme, which sometimes follows them : as — moi-mime, toi-meme, &c. 

3. Between wor<;s so joined that they make but one: as — arc-en-ciel, cure-dent, 
peut-etre, vis-d-vis, c'est-d-dit e. 

4. Between the nouns of number which are joined together : thus — dix-sept, dix- 
hmt, dix-neuf, &c., to quatre-viuyt-dix-neuf, inclusively; but vingt et un, trente et un, 
quarunte et un^ dnquante et un, soixante et un, and soixatite et onze, are excepted. 

5. Between tbe monosyllables ci and Id, and the. woi'd which precedes or ibllows 
them, when they are connected together: as— celui-ci, celui-ld; cet homme-ci, cette 
femme-ld ; ci-dessus, ci-dessous ; Id-haut, Id-bas ; &c. 

6- Of the Cedilla. 

The cedilla is a little mark made n.early like a comma, thus — (^,) ; it is placed 
under c ibllowed by a, o, or u, when c must be sounded like s : as — gar^on, le^on, 
re^u, which are pronounced g arson, lesim, resu. 

When c has the sound of s in the termination of the present of the infinitive of a 
verb, it preserves it throughout all its tenses and persons, and a cedilla is required 
under it whenever it is followed by a, o, or n : as — commencer, je commen^ais ; con- 
cevoir,je congus. 

7. Of the Diuresis, Parenthesis ^ Quotations , and Abbreviations. 

1. The diceresis, in French (dierese or trema), is a double dot, like this — (••)> put 
over the vowels t, V, and u, to denote, when they are not of the same syllable as 
the vowel preceninir them, that they ^are to be pronounced separately from it: as in 
the words — dieul, a'i, Antmous, Esau, faience, Fa'iencier, herdique, hair, la'ique, 
Mdise, Noel, naif, pa'ien, — pronounced — a-'ieul, ha-ir, Mo-'is€,pa-ien, &c. 



16 OF CAPITAL LETTERS. 

2. The parenthesis is made thus (), and is tised to enclose a particular phrase, or 
an occasional sentence, interposed in the middle of the principal one : as — 

Je crois aussi (soit dit sans vous deplaire) 
Que femme prude, en sa vertu severe, 
Pent en public faire beau coup de hien, 
Mais en secret souvent ne valoir rien. 

Voi.T. La Prude, act. i. sc. 4. 

Great use was formerly made of the parenthesis; hut it is now nearly superseded 
hy the employment of commas in its stead. 

3. Tlie quotation consists of two inverted commas, thus (") — placed at the begin- 
nino- of a recital or passage, quoted from another author, and repeated at the begin- 
ning of every line to the end, with two other commas thus, ("), in their natural 
position, at the end : as — 

Je songeais cette nuit qvie, de mal consume, 

Cote a cote d'un pauvre on m'avait inhume, 

Et que n'en \^ouvant pas soufRir le voisinage. 

En mort de qualiteje lui tins ce langage: 

" Retire-toi, coquin ! va pourrir loin d'ici ; 

" II ne t'appartient pas de m'approcher ainsi." 

" Coquin, (ce me dit-il, d'une arrogance extreme,) 

'' Va chercher tes coquins ailleurs, coquin toi-meme! 

" Ici tous sont egaux : je ne te dois plus rien ; 

" Je suis sur mon fumier, comme toi sur le tien." 

4. The abbreviatiotis are words usually shortened and represented by capital let- 
ters. The following are the most common ; 

M. or Mr for Monsieur. 

M""^ for Madame. 

M"^ for Mademoiselle, 

MM for Messieurs. 

S. M for Sa Majestt. 

S. M. -Imp for Sa Alajeste Impiriale. 

S. M. T. C for Sa Mujestt Trts-Chrtiienne, 

S. M. C for Sa Majestt Catholique. 

S. M. B for Sa Majestt Britannique. 

S. M. S for Sa Majestc Sutdoise. \ 

S. A for Son Altesse. - \ 

S. A.R for Son Altesse Roy ale. \ 

S.A.I for Son Altesse Impiriale. j 

S. A. E for Son Altesse EleitoraJe. \ 

S. Ex for Son Excellence. | 

S.Emi for Son Eminence. \ 

S. S for Sa Saintete. j 

M^ for Monseigneur. i 

J. C for Jesus-Christ. 

N.S for Notre-Seigneur. j 

N. S. J. C for Notre-Seigneur-Msus-Christ. i 

M<^ for Marchand. \ 

Mde for Marchande. ! 

Negt for Ntgociant. 

8. Of Capital Letters. .; 

Capital letters are letters larger than the others, and of a different form : such are j 

those at the top of this page. i 

Capital letters are used in the beginning of the first word of every complete sen- • 



OF PUNCTUATION. 17 

tence, in prose and poetry, and also of every line in poetry ; and after a period or 
note of interrogation. 

Phrases of direct address, as — Monsieur, Madame, Mademoiselle, Sec, are 
always begun with a capital ; and, in letter-writing, the address, as well as the 
body of the letter and each part of the subscription at the end, begins with a 
capital : thus — 

1. The address: — 

Monsieur, 

Monsieur Douville, 

Rue Neuve du Mont-Thabor, No. 10, a Paris. 

2. The body of the letter :— 

Mo7isi€ur, 

J'ai appris avec plaisir que vous avez publie 
nne nouvelle edilio7i de voire Grammaire. 

3. Tlie subscription : — 

J'«j Vhonneur d'etre, 

Monsieur, 
Voire tres-humble el tres-obtissant Serviteur, 
M. T-**. 

It is also proper to begin the following words with a capital, in whatever part of 
the sentence they may occur : 

1. All appellations of the Deity: an — Grand Dieu / Eire Supreme! &c. 

2. Proper names of persons, heathen gods and goddesses, kingdoms, provinces, 
towns, places, streets, mountains, rivers, ships, &c.: as— Napoleon, Cesar, Ciceron, 
Jean-Jacques Rousseau, Jupiter, Venus, la France, la Nor?nandie, Paris, Saint-Denis, 
rue Neuve-des- Petit s-Champs, les ^Ipes, la Loire, &c. 

3. The names of the days of the week and of the months: as^—Dimafiche, Lundi, 
Mardi, &c. ; Janvier, Ftvrier, Mars, &c. 

4. Substantives and adjectives derived from proper names: as — La Henriade ; 
la langue Italienne ; a la Frangaise. 

5. The first word of every direct quotation : as — // me dit : " Personne que 
moi,'^ &c, 

6. The principal words in the titles of books, and single letters used for abbre- 
viations: as — Ai/as Historique Chronologique, &c., par M. De A. Le Sage. 

Note. — It is the custom in English to write the pronoun /with a capital letter; 
but in French no distinction of this sort is made with the corresponding word je, 
which is never writteii with a capital, except at the beginning of a sentence or 
the commencement of a quotation : as — " Mais, Madame, je pensais que vous,'' and 
not Je, &c. 

9. Of Punctuation. 

Punctuation is the act of distinguishing or terminating each part of a sentence 
by stops or pauses, according to its sense or connexion with the whole. 

There are six principal stops made use of for punctviation in English and French, 
which are distinguished by the following names and figures : — 

1. the comma ( , ) I^a virgule. 

2. the semicolon ( ; ) Le point et la virgule. 

3. the colon ( : ) Les deux points. 

4. the period, or full stop ( . ) Le point. 

5. the note of interrogation ,..( ? ) Le point d'inlerrogation. 

6. the note of admiration ( ! ) Le poitit d' admiration. 

The comma is used to separate either the portions of a complete sentence, or the 
different members of simple sentences, when each is closely united, either in sense 
or grammatical construction : as — Chez mot, lui dtt-il, Madame, ce Ji'est ni moi ni ma 



18 GREEK AND ROMAN PROPER NAMES. 

femme qui commande, c'est la raison. — lis conviennent tous qu^en effet sa beautc, son air, 
son regard, le caracttre de pudeur et d" innocence empreint siir son visage avail quelqtce 
chose (fangchque. 

Le sort fait les parens, le choix fait les amis. Dei.ille. 

The semicolon separates the parts of a compound sentence, which are less depend- 
ent upon each other than those divided by commas ; it is also used after several 
passages, divided by commas, when their import is summed up : as — Le bal, la 
comedie, la promenade ; voila les amusemens da rnonde. 

Tous les jours je t'attends ; tu reviens tous les jours. Racine. 

The coloji is employed in a similar manner to the semicolon, but when the sense 
is more complete ; it is also used at a part where the subject might be finished, but 
beyond which it is prolonged by some additional observation : as — 

La fourmi n'est pas pretense : 
C'est la son moindre defaut. 

La Fontaine. 

The period marks the termination of the subject, or the completion of each com- 
pound sentence, when each is independent : as — Mon unique chagrin est de par ait re 
ingrat, et de n^avoir pas meme Pesperance que mon oncle soil detrompe. S'il est 
possible, il le sera, lui dis-je. Mais il nCa defendu de vous nommer a Itii ; et je connais 
son caracttre : il faut Vattendre et ne pas le heurter. 

The 7to{e of interrogation is used at the end of interrogative sentences, unless 
they be only expressed as quotations: as — Que voulez-vouz? — Les Tyriens me 
demandaient pourquoi je pleurals. 

Tire note of admiration is used after interjections and phrases of surprise, joy, 
grief, &c. : as — Ah ! ah ! le petit drole ; Dieu ! quel exemple vous choisissiez .' 

10. Woi^ds that are spelt alike in English and French. 

1. The most part of substantives and adjectives which end in English with any 
of these seven syllables, ble, ce, de, ent, ge, ion, and ne, are spelt alike in French. 
The only diilerence consists in the pronunciation and in the accents which some of 
them require in French : as — 

English and Freuch. English, French. 

1 ble fable, fable. 

2 ce evidence, evidence. 

3 de prelude, prelude. 

4 ent diligent, diligent. 

5 ge age,... dge. 

6 ion nation, nation. 

7 ne machine, machine. 

2, Most nouns ending in English with ary, ory, cy, ty, ous, our, and or, become 
French by changing these terminations, as follows : — 

1 ary into aire j as, military, militatre. 

2 ory into oire ; as, glory, gloire. 

3 cy into ce ; as, clemency, clemence. 

4 ty into te ; as, humanity, ... humanite. 

5 ous into enx J as, dangerous,... dangereux. 

6. ourOYor into eur; as, favour, faveur. 

11. Difference in the spelling of the Greek and Roman 'proper Names 
in English and French. 

1. Tlie Greek and Roman proper names of men, ending in English with a, are 
spelt alike in French: as — Agrippa, Caligula, Dolabella, Nerva. 

2. The proper names of women and goddesses, ending in English with a, become 



A GENERAL VIEW OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 19 

French by changing the final a into e mnte: as — Cleopatra, Cleopatre ; Matilda, 
Matilde ; Agrippina, Jgr-ippine ; Diana, Diane. 

3. The greater part of proper names, ending in English with as, become French 
by changing as into e mute: as — Eneas, Ente ; Mecenas, Mece/ie ; Pji:hagoras, 
Pythagore. 

4. Proper names, ending in English with es, become French by changing 
that final into e mute : as — Demosthenes, Demosthene ; Ulysses, Ulysse ; Socrates, 
Soc7'ale. 

5. Proper names, ending in English with o, become French by changing o into on : 
as — Cicero, Cicefon ; Cato, Colon ; Dido, Didon / Scipio, Scipion. 

6. Proper names, ending in English with us or ius, are usually spelt alike in 
French, when they consist of two syllables only : as — Brutus, Brutus ; Cyrus, 
Cyrus; Venus, Finns ; &c. But if they be composed of three or more syllables, 
they sometimes become French by changing its or ius into e mute : as — Camillus, 
Camille ; Esculapius, Esculape ; Orpheus, Orphee. 

7. Most proper names, ending in English with al or is, are the same in both 
languages : as — Annibal, Asdrubal, Juvenal, Scsostris. 

8. Most proper names, ending in English with ander, become French by 
changing ander into andre : as — Alexander, Alexandre ; Lysander, Lysandre. 



PART THE SECOND. 



ETYMOLOGY. 

A general View of the Parts of Speech. 

The second part of Grammar is Etymology, which treats of the different sorts of 
words, their various modifications, and their derivation. 

There are in French nine sorts of words, or parts of speech, namely: — the 
article, the substantive, the adjective, the pronoun, the verb,ih.Q adverb, the preposition, 
the conjunction, and the inteijection. 

1. The article is a word prefixed to substantives, to point them out, and to show 
hoAv far their signification extends : as — un honnne, a man ; une femme, a woman ; 
le rot, the king. 

2. The substantive is the name of any person, or thing, that exists or of which 
we have some notion : as — Alexandre, iVlexander ; soled, sun ; Londres, London ; 
vertu, virtue. 

3. The adjective is a word added to a substantive to express its quality or manner 
of being: as — U7ie belle femme, a fine woman; une grande ville, a large town. 

4. The pronoun is a word used instead of a noun, to avoid the too frequent repe- 
tition of the same word : as — mon ami est arrive ; il m'a apporte de bienjolies chose s : 
my friend is arrived ; he has brought me some very pretty things. 

5. The verb is a word of which the principal use is to express affirmation, or to 
signify to be, to do, or to suffer : as — je snis, I am ; j'aime, I love ; je suis aime, I am 
loved. 

6. The adverb is a part of speech joined to a verb, an adjective, and sometimes 
to another adverb, to express some quality or circumstance respecting it : as — il 
/)cir/e 6<>//, he speaks well; un fart ban homme, a very good man; il ecrit Ires-cor- 
rectement, he writes very correctly. 



20 INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.— OF THE ARTICLES. 

7. Prepositions serve to connect Avovds with one another, and to show the relation 
between them : as — il alia de Londres a Paris, he went from London to Paris. // vit 
de rapine, he lives on plunder. 

8. A conjunction is a part of speech chiefly used to connect sentences, so as, out 
of two or more sentences, to make but one ; it sometimes connects only words : 
as— voMs et lui, vous etes heureux, you and he are happy; le plaisir et la peifie, 
pleasure and pain. 

9. Interjections are words thrown in between the parts of a sentence, to express 
the passions or emotions of the speaker: as — del I Oh, heavens I — Que vous etes 
aimable ! how amiable you are ! 

I shall now proceed to treat of the different sorts of words just enumerated, and 
their various modifications, omitting however to notice their derivation, as it would 
involve explanations much too diffuse for the limits of this work. 



INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 
LESSON I. 

Of the Article, 

The article is a little w&rd which is prefixed to substantives to point 
them out, and show the extent of their signification. 

To facilitate the study of French to beginners, I have divided the 
article into indefinite, definite, and partitive. 

The indefinite article is a or an, un, une ; the definite the, le, la, 
l', les; the partitive some or any, du, de la, de l", des; which are 
subject to the following variations. 

1. Exam]ples of the Indefinite Article. 

* Before a noun m. Before a noun /. 

whatever its initial whatever its initial 
may be. may be. 

A or an, vn, une. 

Of or from a or an, - cVun, tVune. 

At or to a or an, a un, a une. 

2. Examples of the Definite Article. 

Before a noun Before a noun Before a noun Before a noun 

m. sing, be- /. sing, be- in. or/, sing. pi. of either 

ginning with a ginning with a beginning with gender, what- 

consonant or consonant or a u. or /t mute. ever its initial 

1i aspirated. h aspirated. may be. 

The, le, la, F, les. 

Of or from the, du, de la, de /', des. 

At or to the, av, a la, a I', aux 

3. Examples of the Partitive Article, 

Before a noun Before a noun Before a noun Before a noun 

fn.sing.be- /. sing, be- w. or/, sing. pi. of either 

ginning with a ginning with beginning with gender, what- 

conionant or a consonant or a w. or A mnte. ever its initial 

h aspirated. h aspirated. may be. 

Some or any, du, de la, de 1% des. 



INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.— OF THE ARTICLES. 21 

* ISote. — In the first seven essaj^s, the gender and number of substantives will 
be found marked, in order that the pupil may use the necessary articles. — m. at the 
end of a word, will, therefore, denote a noun or substantive masculine ; /. a noun 
feminine ; m. v. or nt. h. a noun masculine, beginning with a vowel or h mute ; 
m. fl. a noim masculine plural ; f. pi. a noun feminine plural ; m. or /. sing, a noun 
masculine or feminine singular. But in the succeeding ones these marks, if used, 
will further signify that, if the word going before be not of the gender and number 
indicated by them, it must be put in that gender and number. 

The adjectives which precede their respective substantives in English, but Avhich 
should come after them in French, as well as the construction of those sentences 
which might be found too difficult for beginners, are marked in the following 
essays with figures before the French words. Care must, therefore, be taken to 
place the words which are marked with the figure 1 before those which are marked 
with the figure 2, and so on with the words to which the succeeding figures are 
prefixed. This assistance will be continued, until the pupil is considered sufficiently 
acquainted Avith the necessary rules on those subjects. 

Throughout the essays, the English words which are not to be expressed in 
French are marked with an asterisk (*) after them ; and those which are spelt the 
same in French as in English have a dash, thus , under them. 

When several English words are found included within a parenthesis, ( ) they 
must be translated by the French words only which are placed under them. 

Whenever a word has been employed more than once in the same essay, its 
equivalent in French is not repeated, in order that the pupil may the better recol- 
lect it; and, in general, the French of all words easy to remember will be found 
gradually omitted, as the pupil advances in the essays. 



ESSAY I. 

A man. A woman. — Of a man. — Of a woman. — To a man. — To a woman 

homme m. femmef. 

— A friend. — From a friend. — To a friend. — The park. — Of the park. — To the 
ami m. pare m. 

park. — From the park. — A fine day. A week. A month. — A novel. — 

beau m. jour m. semaine f. inois m. romanm. 

A history. A cart. The waiter. Of the Avaiter. To the waiter. The 

histoire f.. charretie f. gar<^on m. 

mistress of the house. — Of the mistress of the house. — To the mistress of 

mailresse f. 7vaisonf. 

the house. Tire coaches. The carts. To the country. From the 

voiluresf.pl. charreltesf.pl. campagtie f. 

country. — The soul. — Of the soul. — To the soul. — The ladies. — Of the ladies. — 
ame f. v. dames f. pi. 

To the ladies. — ^The men. Of the men. — To the men. — The women. — 

hommes m. pi. femmes f pi. 

To the women. From the women. Some bread. — Some butter. — Some beer. — 

pain m. beurre m. biere f 

Some water. — Some wine. — Some ham. Some eggs. Some vegetables. 

eauf. V. vin in. jainbon m. ccufs m. pi. legumes m. pi. 



22 INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.— OF THE PERSONAL 

LESSON IL 

Of the Personal Pronouns. 

Personal pronouns are words used instead of the names of persons or 
things. They serve either for the nominative or object of the verb. 
Those which fill the place of the nominative of the verb are : — I, je, 
and f before a vowel or h mute ; thou, tu ; he, il ; she, elle ; it, il and 
elle ; we, nous ; ye or you, vous ; they, ils^ m. pi. and elles, f. pi. 

The pronouns which are employed for the object of the verb, are : — 
me, me, and sometimes moi ; thee, te, and sometimes toi ; him or it, le^ 
lui, y, and en ; her, /a, lui, y, and en ; us, nous ; ye and you, vous ; 
them, les, leur, eux, elles, and en ; as will be hereafter explained. 

Me, te, le, la, are spelt in* f P before a word beginning with a vowel 
or h mute. 

Of the Possessive Pronouns. 

Possessive pronouns express the possession or property of any thing. 
They are divided into conjunctive and relative. They are called con- 
junctive when they immediately precede a substantive, and relative when 
they refer to one. The conjunctive admit of any preposition before them ; 
and, in the following examples, they are exemplified with de, in the 
sense of of or from, in English ; — and a, for at or to. The relative, on 
the contrary, are always preceded by le, la, les, the ; du, de la, des, of 
or from the ; and au, a la, aux, at or to the, like a substantive, as may 
be seen hereafter. Both the conjunctive and relative possessive pronouns 
agree in gender and number with the substantives to which they refer. 

1. Examjoles of the Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns. 

FIRST PERSON. 
singular. Plural. 





Before a noun 


Before a noun 


Before a noun 


Before a noun 




m. beginning 


/. l)eginning 


in. or/, sing. 


pi. of either 




with a conso- 


with a conso- 


beginning with 


gender, what- 




nant or h 


nant or h 


a vowel or h 


ever its initial 




aspirated. 


aspirated. 


mute. 


may be. 


My, 


Mon, 


ma, 


mon. 


mes. 


Of or from my_, 


De mon, 


de ma, 


de mon, 


de mes. 


At or to my, 


A mon, 


a ma, 


a mon. 


a mes. 


Our, 


Notre, 


notre, 


notre, 


nos. 


Of or from our. 


De notre, 


de notre, 


de notre. 


de nos. 


At or to our. 


A noire, 


a notre, 
SECOND PERSON 


a notre. 


a nos. 




Singular. 
Mas. Fem. 


Before a noun m. or/. 

sing, beginning with a 

vowel or h mute. 


Before a 
noun plural. 


Thy, 


Ton, 


ta. 


ton. 


tes. 


Of or from thy. 


De (on, 


de ta. 


de ton. 


de tes. 


At or to thy. 


A ion, 


a ta, 


a ion. 


a tes. 


Your, 


Fotre, 


votre. 


votre, 


vos. 


Of or from your. 


De votre, 


de votre. 


de votre. 


de vos. 


At or to your. 


A votre, 


a votre. 


a votre 


a vos. 



AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 



23 



THIRD PERSON. 



Singular. 



Jiefore a noun m. ox f. 
sing, beainning with a 



Before a nouu 



Mas. 


Fern. 


vowel or h mute. 


plural 


His, her, or its. Son, 


i-a, 


son. 


ses. 


Of or from his, 1 ^^ 
her, or its, 3 ' 


de sa, 


de son. 


de ses. 


At or to liis, her, 1 ;^ 

• ■ r yt son, 
or its, J 


a sa, 


a son. 


a ses. 


Their, Leur, 


leur, 


leur, 


leurs. 


Of or from their, De leur, 


de leiir, 


de leur, 


de leurs. 


At or to their, A leur, 


a leur, 


a leur. 


a leurs. 



2. Examples of the Relative Possessive Pronouns. 







FIRST PERSON. 










Singtdar. 




Plural. 




Mas. 


Fera. 


Mas. 


Pern. 


Mine, 


Le mien, 


la mienne ; 


les miens, 


les miennes. 


Of or from mine. 


Du mien, 


de la mienne ; 


des miens, 


des miennes. 


At or to mine. 


Au mien, 


a la mienne ; 


aux miens. 


aux miennes 


Ours, 


Le noire, 


la noire ; 


les notres. 


les nofres. 


Of or from ours. 


Du noire, 


de la noire ; 


des notres. 


des ?i6ires. 


At or to ours, 


Au noire, 


a la not re ; 


aux nblres, 


aux no I res. 






SECOND PERSON. 








Singular. 




Plural. 


' 


Mas. 


Fem. 


Mas. 


Fem. 


Thine, 


Le iien, 


la ttenne ; 


les liens, 


les iiennes. 


Of or from thine. 


Du tien. 


de la tienne ; 


des tiens. 


des iiennes. 


At or to thine. 


Au tien, 


a la tienne ; 


aux liens, 


aux iiennes. 


Yours, 


Le voire. 


la voire ; 


les voires. 


les voires. 


Of or from yours. 


Du voire, 


de la voire ; 


des voires, 


des voires. 


At or to yours. 


Au voire. 


u la voire ; 
THIRD PERSON 


aux voires, 


aux voires. 




Singular, 




Plural. 




Mas. 


Fem, 


Mas. 


Fem. 


His, hers, or its. 


Le sien. 


la sienne ; 


les siens, 


les siennes. 


Of or from his, "i 
hers, or its, J 


> Du sien. 


de la sienne ; 


des siens. 


des siennes. 


At or to his, hers, "i 










or its, < 


' Au sien. 


a la sienne ; 


aux sienSy 


aux siennes. 


Theirs, 


Le leur. 


la leur ; 


les leurs. 


les leurs. 


Of or from theirs. 


Du leur, 


de la leur ; 


des leurs, 


des leurs. 


At or to theirs. 


Au leur, 


a la leur ; 


aux leurs, 


aux leurs. 



Note. — It is necessary to observe that, when parents address their children, and 
frequently little children their parents, either in a familiar conversation, or in an 
epistolary correspondence ; or when a man and his wife, a brother and sistei", or 
intimate friends, either speak or correspond together, as also when somebody is 
upbraided in a contemptuous manner, it is customary to use, in French, the verbs 
and the pronouns in the second person singular : as — Maman, vsux-tu venir avec 
moi ? Mamma, will you come with me ^ 



24 INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.--OF THE 

ESSAY 11. 

My father. — Of my father. — To my father. — From my son. — To my brother. — ^To 
pere m. jils m. frere m. 

his sister. — His niece. — To her cousin. — Thy wife. — Of thy wife. — To thy wife. 
sceur f. niece f. cousin m. femme f. 

— From thy wife. — Her husband. — From her husband. — To her husband. — His 
7nari m. 

daughters. — To his daughters. From her friend. — :-To her nephew. — Their 

Jltles f. pL ami 771. V. ncveu m. 

uncle. Our aunt. Your godfather and godmother. His mother-in- 

oncle m. v. tante f. parrairi vi. et voire marraine f. belle-mere f. 

law. — Her father-in-law. — Thy grandfather. — My grandmother. — Your hand- 
beau-pere m. grand-ptre m. grand' -mere f. mou- 

kerchief. His cravat. Her money. To her money. — Their garden. To 

choir m. cravate f. argent m. v. jar din m. 

their garden. From their house. To their orchard. — My relations. Your 

muiso7if. verger m. parens m. pi. 

neighbours. His acquaintances. Her birds. Our servants. Your 

voisinsm.pl. connuissancesf.pl. 0iseaux7n.pl. servantesf.pl. 

masters. To their children. Your temper, and hers. My pic- 

maitres 7n. pi. enfans m. pi. dispontion f sing. ia- 

tures, yours and theirs. — Her carriage and ours. — His house and mine. — 

bleauxm.pl. voilure f. 

My books and yours. 

livres m. pi. 



LESSON III. 

Of the Demonstrative Pronouns. 

The demonstrative pronouns are words which we use to point out the 
persons or things spoken of: they are — this, that; these, those; ce, cet^ 
cette, ces ; celui, cclle ; ceux, celles ; ceci, cela. 

The demonstrative pronouns, this, that, these, those, being the same 
in English, whether they precede a substantive or refer to one, offer no 
difficulty ; but being translated into French very differently in the one 
case from what they are in the other, I shall divide them into conjunc- 
tive and relative. 

The conjunctive are : — ce, cet, cette, this, that ; ces, these or those ; 
which always precede the substantive which they particularise, and 
can never be used without it. The relative are : — celui, celle, this, 
that; ceux, celles, these, those; which, usually referring to a noun ex- 
pressed before, can never be prefixed to any. Both the conjunctive and 
relative demonstrative pronouns agree, in French, in gender and number 
with their respective substantives, and retain the same place in the 
sentence which this, that, these, those, occupy in English. They never 
admit of any article before them, in either language, although they may 
be preceded by a preposition, or united by a conjunction. In the fol- 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 



25 



lowing examples, they are exemplified witli the prepositions de and a ; 
but any other preposition may be used instead, according as the sense 
may require it. 

ARTICLE I. 

Of the Conjunctive Demonstrative Pronouns. 

Whenever this, that, these, those, immediately precede a substantive 
or noun in English, as — that man, they are expressed, in French, by — 
ce, cet, cette, ces, as follows : — 









Singular. 








Before a noun m. 


Before a noun 


Before a noun f. sing. 






beginning with a 


n-!. beginning 


beginning either with a 






consonant or h 


with a vowel 


consonant, a vowel, or 






. aspirated. 


or h mute. 


an h mute or aspirated. 


This or that, 


by:- 


Ce, 


cef, 


cette. 


Of or from this or that, 


by:- 


Dece, 


de cet, 


de cette. 


At or to this or that, 


by:- 


A ce, 

Mas 


a cet, 
Plural. 


a cette. 
Fern. 


These or those, 


by:— 


Ces, 


ces. 


ces. 


Of or from these or those 


by:- 


De ces, 


de ces. 


de ces. 


At or to these or those, 


by:- 


A ces, 

ARTICLE II 


a ces. 


a ces. 



Of the Relative Demonstrative Pronouns. 

1. Whenever this, that, these, ^/lo^e, instead of immediately preceding 
a substantive or noun in English, refer to one, which is usually the case 
when they are followed either by the preposition of, or by one of the 
relative pronouns who, ivhom, that, or which, as — this goxon and that 
of your sister y they are expressed in French in the following manner : — 

Singi/lar. 







Mas. 




Fem. 


Tliis or that, 


by:- 


Celui, 




celle. 


Of or from this or that, 


by:_ 


De cehii, 




de celle. 


At or to this or that. 


by:- 


A celui, 
Mas. 


Plural. 


a celle. 
Fem. 


These or those, 


by:- 


Ceux, 




celles. 


Of or from these or those, 


by:- 


De ceux, 




de celles. 


At or to these or those, 


by:- 


A ceux. 




a celles. 



2. Whenever two or more persons or things being mentioned, this or 
these is used to point out the nearest to the person who speaks, and 
that or those the most remote from the person who speaks, as — which of 
these two watches ivill you have ? this is silver, and that is gold ; 
they are thus rendered in French : — 



Singular. 



This, 

Of or from this, 

At or to this, 





Mas. 


Fem, 


by:- 


Celui-ci, 


celle-ci. 


by:- 


De celui-ci. 


de celle-ci 


by:— 


A celui-ci. 


a celle-ci. 

c 



INTROI 


)UCTC 


►RY LESSONS.— OF THE 






Plural. 








Mas. 


Fem. 


These, 


by 


: — Ceiix-ci, 


celles-ci. 


Of or from these, 


ty 


:— De ceux-ci, 


de celles-ci 


At or to these, 


by 


: — A ceux-ci, 

Singular. 


a celles-ci. 






Mas. 


Fem. 


.That, 


hy 


— Celui-la, 


celle-la. 


Of or from that. 


by. 


— De cehd-la, 


de celle-la. 


At or to that, 


by: 


— A celui-la, 

Plural. 


a celle-la. 






Mas. 


Fem. 


Those, 


by: 


— eux-la, 


celles-la. 


Of or from those. 


by: 


— ■ De ceux-la^ 


de celles-la. 


At or to those. 


by: 


— A ceux-la, 


a celles-la. 



3. Whenever this or that is used in English in pointing at anything, 
without naming what it is, as — give me this or that ; this is then con- 
strued into French by ceci., with reference to the nearest object alluded 
to, and that by cela., with reference to the most remote object spoken of. 
They are both masculine singular, and have no plural, as : — 



This, 

Of or from this, 

At or to this, 



Mas. 
Ceci. 
De ceci. 
A ceci. 



Singular. 



That, 

Of or from that. 

At or to that. 



Mas. 
Cela. 
De cela. 
A cela. 



ESSAY III. 

This picture. ^That gold. «This night. These oranges. This book. — 

tableau m. orm.v. nuit f. f-'pl- livre m. 

Of this bird. To this bird. From that man. To that river. 

mseau m. v. homme m. h. riviere f. 

From that house. — To these laurels. From these laurels. To this day. 

maison f. lauriers m. pi. jour m. 

At that hour. From that moment. To these ladies. From those 



heuref. Des ; 

gentlemen. ^To these houses. 

messieurs m. pi. maisons f. pi. 

Ptolemy. This gown and that of your sister. - 

robe f. soeur f. 



Ptolomee 
mind 
esprit m. v. 

daughter. 

jillef. 
The state 

ttat m. V. 
two horses : 
deux chevaux 
apricots : 



and those of the body.- 



dames f. pi. 
The system of Copernicus and that of 
systeme m. Copernic et 

The disorders of the 
maladies f. pi. 

-These bracelets and those of his 
m. pi. 



corps m. 

of Switzerland is preferable to that of Italy.—— 
la Suisse est preferable Vltalie 



-The climate 
climat m. 
of France is very different from that of England. — (There are) 

la est tres-difftrent V Angleterre Voild 

this is four years old,* and that five. ^There are some 

a quatre ans cinq. 
these are ripe, and those (are not). Give me this or that. — 



abricots m. pi. sont murs ne le sont pas Donnez-moi 

Keep that for yourself. 1 (was speaking) of this and not of that 

Gardez potir voua-meme parlais nan pat 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 21 

LESSON IV. 

Of the Relative Pronouns. 

The relative pronouns are such as relate in general to some word or 
phrase going before, which is thence called the antecedent, and which 
they immediatel)' follow, agreeing with it in gender and number : they 
are — qui, que, lequel, dont, in the sense of ivho, whom, that, ivhich, of 
whom or of which, in English : as, — La dame qui vient d'entrer, the 
lady who has just gone in ; &c. 

When the relative pronouns qui, lequel, quel, who, which, or what, 
are used to ask questions, they are called interrogatives, and relate to 
some word or phrase, that is not antecedent, but subsequent, and which 
is specified in the answer : as, — Qui est Id ? Mademoiselle voire soeur ; 
Who is there ? Your sister. 

The following examples show the different constructions to which 
the relative pronouns, and the interrogatives quel ? and quoi 1 (what?) 
are subject. 

1. Whenever the relative pronouns loho, whom, that, which, &c., are 
used in English with reference to some word or phrase going before, they 
are expressed in French as follows : — • 

I\Ias. and Fern., Sing, and Plural. 



:— Qui. 

: — Dont. 

: — A qui. 

: — Que, for the direct object of a verb. 

: — De qui. 

Note. — Qui and que are used with reference to persons and things of whichsoever 
gender and number. 

2. Whenever loho or whom is used to ask a question, it is expressed 
in French : — 



Who, which or that, by 

Of whom or of which, by 

To whom or to which, by 

Whom, that or which, by 

From whom, by 



Who ? by 

Of whom ? by 

To whom ? by 

Whom ? by 

From whom ? by 



— Qui ? or Qui esi-ce-qui ? 

— De qui ? 



Qui? 
De qui ? 

3. When which is followed by the preposition of, and used to ask 
which person or thing out of several, or when, without being followed 
by the preposition of, it is used relatively to a noun going before, it is 
expressed in French in the following manner : — 

Singular. Plural. 

Mas. Fem. Mas, Fern. 

Which, by: — Lequel, laquelle ; Jesquels, lesquelles. 

Of or from vyhich, by: — Duquel, de laquelle ; desquels, desquelles. 

At or to which, by: — Auquel, a laquelle ; auxquels, aaxquelles. 

4. What, used by way of interrogation, immediately before a sub- 
stantive, or before a tense of the verb to he, followed by a substantive 
or noun in English, as — what street is it ? what is her name ? is ex- 
pressed in French : — 

c 2 



28 OF THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 



Singular. Plural. 

Mas. Fein. Mas. Fern. 

: — Quel f quelle ? quels ? quell es ? 

: — JDe quel? de quelle 9 de quels ? de qvelles? 

: — A quel? a quelle? a quels? a quelles? 

5. When what is used either as an exclamation or interrogation, or 
after a preposition, it is expressed in French thus : — 



What ? by 

Of or from v/hat ? by 
At or to what ? by 



What ! by 

Of or froni what ? by 

At or to what P by 

What ? by 



Quoi! and quoi de! before an adjective. 
Be quoi ? 
A quoi ? 

Que? for the direct object of a verb, and quoi after 
a preposition. 



ESSAY IV. 

The man who speaks. — The young lady who dances. — The woman whom I 
parle demoiselle f. danse 

know. — The pens which I have. The master of whom you (complain). 

connais plumesf.pl. maitre m. vous plaignez 

— The horses of which he has spoken (to me). — The person from 

chevauxm.pl. ^ ^parU ^rrC personne f. 

whom we have received that news. The young man whom you love. — ^The 

recti nouvelle f. jeune aimez 

children who are obedient. — The gentlemen to whom I write. Who 

enfans m. pi. sont obeissans messieurs m. pi. tcris 

is there ? Of whom do* you speak ? Whom do* you call ? What does* 

est la ^ ^parlez- ^ ^appelez- 

he do .^ — Whom shall" I believe.^ — Which of these two books.? 

^ ^fait- ^ ^croirai- m. sing. deux livres m. pi. 

Of which of your sisters do you speak ? ~ To which of these 

f. sing. soeurs f. pi. f. sing. 

houses do" you go ? Who is that tall young man ? What road 

maisons f. pi. ^ ^allez- est grand chemin m. 

has he taken ? — What book do* you read ? — What street (is it) ? What 

pris livre m. ^ ^lisez- rue f. est-ce 

day have they fixed ? What are their motives ? To what church 

jour m. jixt sont motifs m. pi. tglise f 

(does he go) ? — What ! — Of what do" you accuse him ? — What are* you thinking 
va-t-il ^ ^accusez- V ^ 4 ^pensez- 

of ? — In what have I neglected to fulfil my duty ? What do* you say '^ 

^a En ntgligt de remplir devoir m. ^ ^dites- 

Note. — The above articles and pronouns are fully explained in the following lessons. 



LESSON V. 

Of the Indefinite Article^ un, une, a or an. 
General Rule. — When several substantives follow each other in a 
sentence, and are used in an individual sense, the indefinite article un 
or une is used before each of them in French, according to its respec- 



OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 29 

tive gender ; although a or an, in a series of substantives, be frequently put 
before the first only in English, and understood before those which succeed : 
as, — a father, mother, and child, uii pere, U7ie mere, et un enfant. 

When a or an is preceded by one of the prepositions of or from, at or 
to ; of or from is expressed by (cV) before un or une, and at or to by «, 
as in the following examples : — 

A book, Lfn livre. A young lady, Une demoiselle. 

Of or from a book, />'wj livre. Of or from a young lady, Dhme demoiselle. 

At or to a book, A un livre. At or to a young lady, A une demoiselle. 

ESSAY V. 

It is necessary to observe that the abbreviations imp, pret. def. and 
pret. indef. which are used in the following essays, serve to denote that 
the succeeding verbs are to be put, in French, either in the imperfect, 
preterit definite, or preterit indefinite of the indicative, according as each 
abbreviation indicates. 

A boy. A girl. — A (chamber-maid). A maid of honour. — Tlie look 

garcon m. jille f. femme de chambre f. fd!e f. dChonneur regard m. 

of an amiable child. The door of a house. 1 have written to a friend. — 

'^aimable ^enfant m. portef. maison f. tcrit ami m. 

He has not spoken to a lady. — She has a good pear. — You have a fine apricot. — 
parlc dame f. bonne poire f. bel abricot m.. 

They had a garden, a park, and a river. I shall have a horse. Will 

ijnp. jardin m. parcm. et riviere f. cheval m. 

you have a carriage ? — We shall not have a new phaeton. — I should have had 
voiture f. nouveau phaiton m. 

a blue coat. — Would you have had a watch ? — Had she not a pair of 
%leu ^ habit m. montre f. imp. paire f. de 

(silk stockings), and a pair of (new shoes) ? — We had a good dinner. — 

bus de soie souliers neufs pret def. diner rn. 

Had they not a good supper P — I have received a letter from a charming 
pret. def. soi/per m. re<^u lettre f. churmante 

young lady. Give me a glass of water. Bring me a kniff, a 

demoiselle f. Donnez-moi verre m. d'eati Apportez-moi couteau m. 

fork, and a spoon. Take a glass of wine. — (Will you take) a bit of 

fourchette f. cuiller f. Prenez vin Voulez-vous pen m, 

cheese ? 1 have taken a cup of tea and a cup of coffee. Mr. S * * * 

fromage pris tasse f. the caft M. S * * * 

(has sent vis) a chest of oranges. — We have received this fruit from a friend. 
nous a envuyt caissef. ce ami m. 



LESSON VI. 

Of the Definite Article. 
The definite article may be divided into simple and compound. 
The simple article is le, la, les, the. The compound du, des, of or 
from the, and an, aux, at or to the. Du, des, and au, anx, are formed 



30 OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 

by a contraction of the prepositions de and a with the simple article le 
and les. 

Le is used before a substantive masculine singular, beginning with a 
consonant or h aspirated ; /', before a noun, either masculine or feminine 
singular, beginning with a vowel or h mute; and les, before plural 
nouns of both genders, whatever their initial may be. 

Du and au are used, instead of de le and a le, before substantives 
masculine singular, beginning with a consonant or h aspirated ; and 
des and aux, in the place of de les and a les, before plural nouns, 
either masculine or feminine, beginning with a vowel, a consonant, or 
h mute. 

La, de la, a la, must always be used before a substantive feminine 
singular, beginning with a consonant or h aspirated; and /', de V , and 
a V, before nouns singular, either masculine or feminine, beginning with 
a vowel or A mute. 

When a substantive is preceded by the adjective tout or tons, neither 
the contracted article dn or des, nor au or aux, being used before it, in 
such a case, the preposition de or a must be placed before tout or ious^ 
with le or les, according to the sense, before the substantive, as follows : 

Singular. Plural. 

Every body, Tout le monde. All men, Tons les hommes. 

Of or from everj'' body, De font le monde. Of or from all men. ^QtousX^^hommes. 

At or to every body, A tout le monde. At or to all men, A tons les hommes. 

Observe. — When of ox from, or at or to, occurs before proper names 
of persons or places, or before a pronoun or an adverb, or also some- 
times before the names of countries after the verbs Venir and Revenir, 
and some others implying going from a country to another, of or from 
is expressed in French by de, or d' if the word begins with a vowel or 
h mute, and at or to by h ; but never by du, de la, de V, or des, nor au, 
a la, a V, or aux, except in the cases mentioned in the Syntax : as, — 
from Paris to London, de Paris a Londres, and not du Paris au 
Londres. That belongs to William or to Peter, cela appartient k Guil- 
laume ou k Pierre ; and not — au Guillaume ou au Pierre. I come 
from France, je viens de France ; and not — de la France. 

General Rule. — The definite article, either simple or compound, is 
mostly used in French before every substantive, taken in a general or 
particular sense, and agrees with it in gender and number, whether it be 
used in English or not : as, — the gentleman, lady, and boy are gone, 
LE monsieur, la dame, et le garpon sont partis. Vice is odious, le vice 
est odieux. Ladies are amiable, les dames sont aimahles. 

Note. — Although the definite article be frequently omitted after the 
prepositions of or from and at or to occurring between two or more 
substantives following and depending on each other in English, it is 
usually expressed in French, except in the cases mentioned in the Syntax : 
as, — the love of glory, V amour de la gloire ; and not P amour de gloire. 
I vrent to market with her, j^allai au marche avec elle; and not a marche. 



OF THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE. 31 

ESSAY VI. 

The father, mother, and children. The love of glory. The fear of 

pere m. mere f. enfansm.pl. amour m. v. gloire f. crainte f. 

shame. The prattling of girls. The malice of the boys. The four 

hontef. habilm. Jillesf.pl. /. garconsm.pl. quatre 

seasons of the year. 1 have spoken to (Mr. D.'s sister). (Were you 

saisonsf.pl. anntef.v. parle la soeur de 31. D'^^*''^ Ne par- 

not speaking) to the child ? Honour forbids it. — ^Have you given my 

liez-vous pas enfant m. v. Honneurm.h. ^dtfend^le donne 

letter to the man ? The hope of success. — ^The lily is the emblem 

lettre f. homme vi. h. espoir m. v. succesm. lism. embleme m. v. 

of virginity, innocence, purity, and candour. — I prefer spring to summer, 

virginite f. f. v. puretc f. candeurf prtfere printemps m, ^ttm.v. 

autumn, and winter. ^The east, the west, the north, and the south, are 

atitomne m. v. hiver m. h. est m. v. ouest m. v. nord m. siid m. 

the four cardinal points. 1 have been dazzled by the rays of the sim. 

^cardinanx ^ m.pl. eblotii par rayonsm.pl. so lei I m. 

(1 shall go) to the village this evening. — Will you come with me to the market ? — 
J'irai ' * m. ^ .^soir m. Voulez- venir avec moi marcht m. 

We went together to the country. The fear of death and the love of glory 

alldmes ensemble campagtie f. mort f. amour m. v. 

are natural to all men. Cut the string in two. — Take this to the 

naturels hommesm.pl. Cotipez cor de f. en deux Portez ceci 

women. Send that to the men. 1 come from France and Italy. 

femmesf.pl. Envoyez cela hommes m. pi. viens • Italie f, v. 

He (will return) from Spain in two months. — That belongs to John or to 

reviendra Espagne f. v. en mois appartient Jean ou 

Peter. From Paris to Amsterdam. He (is the laughing-stock of) every 

Pierre • sert de jouet a 

body. — She told everybody of* it. — ^They gave some to all the children. 

''^dit ^a * ^ le '■^donnerent ^ en 



LESSON VII. 

Of the Partitive Article. 

The partitive article is some or any, which is expressed in French by 
du, before a substantive masculine singular, beginning with a consonant 
or h aspirated ; by de la, before a substantive feminine singular, like- 
wise beginning with a consonant or h aspirated ; by de l\ before a sub- 
stantive, either masculine or feminine singular, beginning with a vowel 
or /i mute ; and by des, before a substantive plural, of either gender, and 
whatever its initial may be. 

General Rule. — Whenever we wish to express a portion or part of 
one or more things, we use in French the partitive article du^ de la, 
de l\ or des, before the thing or each of the things alluded to, according 



32 OF THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE. 

to its gender or number, whether some or any be expressed or under- 
stood in Enghsh : as, — we had some soup, meat, and vegetables, nous 
eumes du potage, de la viande^ et des legumes. 

When an adjective or a participle precedes the thing or things of 
which we express a portion or part, as — give me some good wine^ the 
preposition de is then used in French before the adjective or participle, 
if it begins with a consonant or h aspirated, and d\ if it begins with a 
vowel or h mute, whatever its gender or number may be*, instead of du, 
de la, de V, or des : as, — give me some good wine, donnez-moi de hon 
vin, and not du hon vin. 

It must be particularly attended to, that it is only when a substantive 
is taken in a partitive sense, that de or d' is used instead of du, de la, 
de r, or des, before the adjective or participle preceding it; for, should 
a substantive be used in a particular, determinate sense, the article du, 
de la, de V, or des, must then be employed before the adjective 
or participle preceding it : as, — Thomas, bring me some of the good 
wine which I bought yesterday, Thomas, apportez-moi du bon vin que 
j^achetai hier^ and not de hon vin, &c. In this case, and any similar 
one, the article always answers to of the, expressed or understood in 
English, and not to some or any. 

Observe. — When some or any does not precede a substantive, but 
comes by itself after a verb, referring to something which has been men- 
tioned before, it is expressed in French by en, which is put before the 
verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one, except 
when the verb is in the imperative affirmatively used, in which case 
en is placed after it : as, — have you any apples ? yes, I have some ; 
avez-vous des pommes ? oui,j'en ai. Go and offer some to the lady and 
gentleman, allez en offrir a madame et a monsieur. Give me some, 
donnez-m'en. 

Should some or any be understood in any such sentence in English, 
en must likewise be expressed in French. 

En is also used in French before a verb which has a noun of number 
or an indeterminate pronoun, referring to something mentioned before, 
for its object : as, — How many children has he ? He has only one now, 
but he has had two ; Comhien denfans a-t-il? II n'en a qu'un a pre- 
sent, mais il en a eu deux. 

En serves also in French, with verbs governing de^ to recall the 
idea of anything that has been mentioned before, whether its equi- 
valent be expressed in English or not : as, — I am glad of it, y'en suis 
hien-aise ; because etre hien-aise governs de ; but this belongs to the 
pronouns. 

Hence or from thence, used after a verb, by which the coming from 
some place mentioned is expressed, is also construed into French by 
en, which is placed before the verb in a simple tense, and before the 
auxiliary in a compound one : as, — I come from thence, /en viens. — In 
this case, en is an adverb. 



OF SUBSTANTIVES. 33 



ESSAY VII. 



Give me some bread and butter. Have you any (roast-meat) ? No ; 

Dojtnez-moi pain m. beurre m. rati m. 

but we have some (very nice boiled meat). — (Do you choose) fat or 

mais excellent bouilH Vonlez-vous gras vi. ou 

lean ? A little of both, (if you please). — If you have any cheese, 

n%aigre m. peu Pun et de f autre s'il vous plait Si fromagem. 

bring (me some). — We have some apples, oranges, and lemons. — (There 

apportez-men poinmesf.pl. f-P^- citrons m. pi. voi- 

are) some raspberries and strawberries. — Put some oil and vinegar 

la framhoisesf.pl. fraisesf.pl. mettez hidlef.h. vinaigre m 

into the salad. Eat some vegetables. Will you have* any sauce ? — 

dans salade f. mangez legumes m. pL Voulez-vous f 

(Shall I help you to) some fish.'* Help the* gentleman to some Cham- 

Vous offrirai-je poisson m. Versez '^monsieur ^a ^ 2 

pagne. Have you offered any (to the lady) .'' Yes ; but she prefers some 

m. offert a madame prefer e 

water. Will you take some tea ? — Yes ; I will take some with pleasure. 

eaufv. Voulez-vous prendre them. prendrui avec plaisir 

(Help yourself to) some sugar and milk. — We had some fine peaches and 
Prenez sucre m. lait m. imp. belles peches 

apricots this year. They sell good ink, good pens, and good 

beauT abricots annee f vendent bonne encre bonnes phtmes ban 

paper. France produces wine, oranges, and olives. 1 have brought you 

papier f produit via m. fp^' — /• P-- ^Je ^ai ^apporte Hoiis 

some* of the fine cloth you (asked me for). — You have some beautiful 

beau drop m. que rn'aviez demande superbe 

(grapes), will you give me some.'' — If you want any, buy some. (Did 

raisin m. sing. ^donner ^m'en voulez achetez-en La 

the woman bring) any cream ? — No ; she (could not) get any. — I should be 
femme a-t-elle apporte creme f. n^ a pas pu troia-er ^ ^serais 

obliged to* you, if you could procure me some. — Have you a gun? — No; I 
^oblige ^ pouviez '^procurer ^m'en fusil ?«. ^ imp. 

had two very good ones* formerly ; but I have none now. — (Are you going) to 
2 * ^tres-bons ^autrefois n'en point a present allez-vous 

the park ? — No ; we (are coming from it.) 
pare m. h'enons ^en 



LESSON VIII. 

Of Substantives or Nouns. 

A substantive or noun is the name of a person or animal, and in 
general of anything that we either see, touch, or feel, or that is the 
object of any of our senses, or of which we have some idea or notion : 
as — Georges, George ; table, table ; soleil, sun ; vice, vice ; Londres, 
London ; &c. 

c 5 



34 



GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 



Two things are to be considered in substantives, the gender and 
imtnber. 

1. The gender. — Gender is the distinction of sexes. There are only- 
two genders in French, the masculine and the feminine. Whatever is 
neuter in English must therefore belong to either the one or the other of 
these two genders in French. 

All substantives, commonly used with reference to men or male ani- 
mals alone, and also to those objects to which we fancifully attribute the 
qualities of the male, are masculine: as, — Alexandre, Alexander; lion, 
lion ; vainqueur, conqueror ; juge, judge ; genie, genius ; &c. 

The feminine belongs to women and all animals of the female kind, 
as likewise to all objects to which we attribute feminine qualities : as, — 
Josephine, Josephine ; lune, moon ; terre, earth ; &c. 

As there are a great many names of inanim-ate things, the genders of 
which could never be ascertained from the above explanation, I have 
laid down the following general rule and exceptions, which will be found 
of great practical utility. 

General Rule. — Nouns ending with a consonant, or with a, i, o, w, 
er aiso with e accented, not preceded by t, are generally masculine : as, — 
combat, fight ; opera, opera ; ouhli, oblivion ; echo, echo ; chapeau, hat ; 
cafe, coffee ; &c. : whereas those which end with e mute, or with e or ie 
accented, preceded by t, are feminine : as, — pomme, apple ; bonte, good- 
ness ; amitie, friendship ; &c. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1. Exceptions to Nouns ending with a Consonant, 
Nouns, the terminations of which are either ion or aison, are femi- 
nine : as, — nation, nation ; demangeaison, itching : except bastion, 
bastion; champion, champion; croupion, rump; lampion, a small 
lamp ; million, million ; pion, pawn ; talion, retaliation ; septentrion, 
north ; scorpion, scorpion ; which are masculine. 

The following nouns ending either with a consonant or with i or u 
are also feminine. 

water. 

making, ceremony. 

hunger. 

favour. 

end. 

flower. 

flower-de-luce. 

faith. 

time. 

plentifuhiess. 

forest. 

ant. 

garrison. 

bird-lime. 

cure. 

halter. 



Aprts-midi, 


afternoon. 


Eau, 


Brebis, 


sheep. 


Fagon, 


Boisson, 


drink, beverage. 


Faim, 


Bru, 


daughter-in-law. 


Faveur, 


Chair, 


flesh. 


Fin, 


Chaleur, 


heat. 


Fleur, 


Chanson, 


song. 


Fleur de h's, 


Chauve-souris, 


bat 


Foi, 


Chanx, 


lime. 


Fois, 


Clef, 


key. 


Foison, 


Conr, 


yard;, court. 


Foret, 


Croix, 


cross. 


Fourmi, 


Cuiller, 


spoon. 


Garnison, 


Cvisson, 


baking. 


Gltt, 


Bent, 


tooth. 


Gutrison, 


Dot, 


portion, dowry. 


Hart, 



GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 



35 



Legorty 


lesson. 


Peau, 


skin. 


Loi, 


law. 


Perdrix, 


partridge. 


Main, 


hand. 


Plupart, 


most part. 


Mam an, 


mamma. 


Poix, 


pitch. 


Mer, 


sea. 


Rancon, 


ransom. 


Merci, 


mercy. 


Soeur, 


sister. 


Mcetirs, 


manners, morals. 


Soif, 


thirst. 


Moisson, 


harvest. 


Souris, 


mouse. 


Mort, 


death. 


Toi'son, 


fleece. 


Motisson, 


monsoon. 


Toussaint, 


All Saints' Day. 


Nef, 


nave, body of a 


Tour, 


tower. 




church. 


Toitx, 


cough. 


Noix, 


nnt. 


Trahison, 


treason. 


Nuit, 


night. 


Tjibu, 


tribe. 


Paix, 


peace. 


Tumeur, 


swelling. 


Pdmoison, 


swoon. 


Fertu, 


virtue. 


Part, 


part. 


Vis, 


screw. 


Prison, 


prison. 


Voir, 


voice. 



There are also several substantives in eur, denoting properties, qua- 
lities, and dimensions, which are feminine: as, — laideur, ugliness; 
lenteur, slowness ; hauteur ^ haughtiness, height ; epaisseur, thickness ; 
grosseur, bigness; longueur, length ; largeur, breadth; &c. 

2. Exceptions to Nouns ending with e mute. 

Nouns ending in age, age, ege, ege, ige, uge, uple, able, acle, aire, 
altre, etre, itre, ire, aire, asme, aume, erne, isme, iste, ome, ume, oire, 
ordre, and oxe, are generally masculine: as, — mariage, marriage; 
obstacle, obstacle ; privilege, privilege ; salaire, salary ; &c. : except 
affaire, business ; cage, cage ; chair e, pulpit ; creme, cream ; cire, wax ; 
decrottoire, shoebrush ; ecritoire, inkhorn ; etable, stable ; fable, fable; 
fenetre, vdndow; foire, fair; gloire, glory; grammaire, grammar; 
guetre, gaiter ; histoire, history; huitre, oyster; image, image; mdchoire, 
jaw ; memoire, memory ; mitre, mitre; nage, swimming ; nageoire, fin ; 
paire, pair; page, page; passoire, cullender; paume, palm; poire, 
pear ; rdcloire, strickle ; rage, rage ; satire, satire ; table, table ; tige, 
the body of a tree ; epitre, epistle ; victoire, victory ; vitre, a pane 
of glass ; liste, list ; batiste, cambric ; and a few others, which are 
feminine. 

The following ending with e mute are likewise masculine : — 



Abyme, 


abyss. 


Arbmte, 


shrub. 


^cre. 


acre. 


Architeete, 


architect. 


Acte, 


act. 


Article, 


article. 


Adverbe, 


adverb. 


Artifice, 


artifice. 


Adulttre, 


adultery. 


Artiste, 


artist. 


Ane, 


ass. 


Asthme, 


asthma. 


Aigle, 


eagle. 


Asyle, 


asylum. 


Ange, 


angel. 


Astre, 


star. 


Angle, 


angle. 


Athte, 


atheist. 


Antre, 


den, cave. 


Augiire, 


augury. 


Antagoniste, 


antagonist. 


Auspice, 


auspice. 


Antidote, 


antidote. 


Axe, 


axis. 


Arbre, 


tree. 


Benefice, 


benefice, benefit. 



36 



GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 



Beurre, 
Bitume, 
Blame, 

Bourgogne (vin). 
Bronze, 
Buste, 
Cable, 
Cadavre, 
Cadre, 
C a lice, 
Calme, 
Camphre, 
Capitaine, 
Caprice, 
Caracttre, 
Carrosse, 
Casse-noisette, 
Casque, 
Catalogue, 
Centime, 
Centre, 
Cercle, 

Champagne (vin), 
Change, 
Chanvre, 
Chcipitre, 
Charme, 
Chausse-pied, 
Chef-d^oeuvre, 
Chtvrefeiulle, 
Onffre, 
Chimiste, 
Cidre, 
Cimeticre, 
Cirque, 
Cloitre, 
Cache, 
Cache d^ecai. 
Code, 
CodfCillej 
Coffre, 
Colasse, 
Commerce, 
Compte, 
■ Conci/e, 
Concomhre, 

Conte, 

Cantrasfe, 

Convive, 

Costume, 

Cvude, 

Covvercle, 

Crane, 

Crepe, 

Crtpuscule, 

Crib^e, 

CrimCi 



"butter. 

bitumen. 

blame. 

burgundy. 

bronze. 

bust. 

cable. 

corpse. 

frame. 

chalice. 

calm. 

camphor, 

captain. 

whim, 

character. 

coach. 

nut-cracker. 

helmet. 

catalogue. 

centime. 

centre. 

circle. 

champagne. 

change, exchange. 

hemp. 

chapter, 

charm. 

shoeing-horn. 

master-piece. 

honey-suckle. 

cypher. 

chymist. 

cider. 

churchyard. 

circus. 

cloister. 

stage-coach, waggon 

passage-boat. 

code. 

codicil. 

trunk. 

colossus. 

trade. 

account. 

council. 

cucumber. 

tale, story. 

contrast. 

guest. 

costume. 

elbow. 

lid. 

skull. 

crape, 

twilight, 

sieve. 



Crocodile, 

Culte, 

Ctibe, 

Cygne, 

Cylindre, 

Danube, 

Dtlire, 

Dtluge, 

Demerile, 

Derriere, 

Dtsastre, 

Desordre, 

Diable, 

Dialogue, 

Diametre, 

Dilemme, 

Diocese, 

Disciple, 

Divorce, 

Dogme, 

Domaine, 

Domicile, 

Doute, 
Dogue, 
Drame, 
Droguiste, 
Ebtniste, 
Ecclesiastique, 
Edifice, 
Eloge, 
Em,pire, 
Emetique, 
Empldtre, 
Episode, 
Equilibre, 
, Escompte, 
Espace, 
Evangile, 
Exerctce, 
Exempley 
Faite, 
Faste, 
Fiacre, 
Flegme, 
Fleuve, 

Faie, 
Frontispive, 

Genie, 

Gendre, 

Genre, 

Germe, 

Geste, 

Gite, 

Glaive, 

Globe, 

Globule, 



crocodile. 

worship. 

cube. 

swan. 

cylinder. 

Danube. 

delirium. 

deluge, flood. 

demerit. 

back. 

disaster. 

disorder, 

devil. 

dialogue. 

diameter. 

dilemma. 

diocese. 

disciple. 

divorce. 

dogma. 

domain. 

dwelling-house, a 

bode, 
doubt, 
dog. 
drama, 
druggist, 
cabinet-maker, 
ecclesiastic, 
building, 
eulogy, praise, 
empire, 
emetic, 
plaster, 
episode, 
equilibrium, 
discount, 
space, 
gospel, 
exercise, 
example, 
top, pinnacle, 
pageantry, pomp, 
hackney-coach, 
phlegm, 
large river, 
liver. 

frontispiece, 
genius, 
son-in-law. 
gender, 
bud, shoot, 
gesture, action, 
dwelling, abode, 
sword, 
globe, 
globule. 



GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 



31 



Golfe, 


gtilf. 


Modele, 


model. 


Goiiffre, 


gulf, pit, abyss, 
degree. 


Monarque, 


monarch. 


Grade, 


Monasthe, 


monastery. 


Groupe, 


group. 


Monde, 


world. 


Guide, 


guide. 


Monopole, 


monopoly. 


Havre, 


harbour, haven. 


Monstre, 


monster. 


Homicide, 


homicide, man- 


Moule, 


mould. 




slaughter. 


Multiplicande, 


multiplicand. 


Homme, 


man. 


Murmure, 


murmur. 


Hospice, 


asylum. 


Musee, 


museum. 


Hote, 


host, landlord. 


Navire, 


ship. 


Hymm^e, 


Hymen. 


IStgoce, 


trade, commerce. 


Incendie, 


conflagration, fire. 


Nvmbre, 


number. 


Insecte, 


insect. 


Office, 


office, business, part. 


Jnlerprete, 


interpreter. 


Oncle, 


uncle. 


Interrtgne, 


interregnum. 


Ongle, 


nail. 


Jntervalie, 


interval. 


Opprobre, 


opprobrium. 


Isthme, 


isthmus. 


Orcheitre, 


orchestra. 


Jeune, 


fast, fasting. 


Ordre, 


order. 


Juge, 


judge. 


Or/tvre, 


goldsmith. 


Jurisconmlte, 


jurisconsult. 


Organe, 


organ. 


Labyrinthe, 


labyrinth. 


Facte, 


pact, compact. 


La'ique, 


layman. 


Panache, 


plume. 


Ltgume, 


vegetable. 


Pantomime, 


pantomime. 


Lihelle, 


libel. 


Pape, 


pope. 


Libraire, 


bookseller. 


Parachute, 


parachute. 


Lievre, 


hare. 


Parapluie, 


umbrella. 


Linge, 


linen. 


Parjure, 


perjury. 


Livre, 


book. 


Parricide, 


parricide. 


Lustre, 


lustre, gloss. 


Participe, 


jarticiple. 


Luxe, 


luxury. 


Parterre, 


; lower-garden, pit. 


Madere (vin). 


madeira. 


Patrirnoine, 


patrimony. 


Maire, 


mayor. 


Peigne, 


comb. 


Maitre, 


master. 


Peintre, 


painter. 


Male, 


male. 


Pine, 


Dolt of a lock. 


Manque, 


want. 


Peuple, 


people. 


Manifeste, 


manifesto. 


Philosophe, 


philosopher. 


Mnrbre, 


marble. 


Phmomme, 


phenomenon. 


Martyre, 


martyrdom. 


Piege, 


snare. 


Massacre, 


massacre. 


Pilate, 


pilot. 


Masque, 


mask. 


Pldtre, 


plaster. 


Mausolte, 


mausoleum. 


PoUe, 


stove. 


Melange, 


medley. 


Pot me. 


poem. ! 


Membre, 


member. 


Poivre, 


pepper. 


Mt moire. 


bill. 


Pole, 


pole. 


Mensonge, 


lie. 


Porte-m ouch ettes, 


snufFer-stand. 


Messie, 


Messiah. 


Porte-lettre, 


letter-case. 


Mercure, 


mercury. 


Porte-voix, 


speaking-trumpet. 


Mtrite, 


merit. 


Portique, 


portico. 


Merle, 


black-bird. 


Paste, 


post, place. 


Mtteore, 


meteor. 


Pouce, 


thumb. 


Meuble, 


piece of furniture. 


Pricepte, 


precept. 


Meurtre, 


murder. 


Precipice, 


precipice. 


Mille, 


mile. 


Prejudice, 


pre udice, detriment. 


Ministre, 


minister. 


Prelude, 


prelude. 


Ministere, 


ministry. 


Prestige, 


prestige. j 


Mystere, 


mystery. 


Prttexte, 


pretext, pretence. 



38 



GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 



Pretre, 

Principe, 

Prodige, 

Prophete, 

Proverhe, 

Pupitre, 

Regime, 

Regne, 

Reldche, 

Remede, 

Reproche, 

Repti'e, 

Reste, 

Reve, 

Rhone, 

Rhume, 

Risque, 

Role, 

Sable, 

Sabre, 

Sacrifice, 

Sanchmire, 

Scan dale, 

Sceptre, 

Schistfie, 

Sen/pule, 

Seig/e, 

Sepulcre, 

Service, 

Sexe, 

Siecie, 

Siege, 

Signe, 

Silence, 

Singe, 

Site, 

Somme, 

Songe, 

Soi^e, 



priest. 

principle. 

prodigy. 

prophet. 

proverb. 

desk. 

regime. 

reign. 

relaxation. 

remedy. 

reproach. 

reptile. 

remainder. 

dream. 

Rhone. 

cold. 

risk. 

part, roll. ' 

sand. 

sabre. 

sacrifice. 

sanctuary. 

scandal. 

sceptre. 

schism. 

scruple. 

rye. 

sepulchre. 

service. 

sex. 

age, century, 

seat. 

sign. 

silence. 

ape. 

site, situation. 

sleep, nap. 

dream. 

breath. 



Soufre, 

Spectre, 

Squelette, 

Style, 

Subside, 

Sucre, 

Supplice, 

Symbole, 

Synonyme, 

Telescope, 

Temple, 

Terme, 

Texte, 

Theme, 

Tigre, 

Tire-botte, 

Tonnerre, 

Triangle, 

Triomphe, 

Trone, 

Trophee, 

Tropique, 

Trouble, 

Tube, 

Tumult €, 

Ulcere, 

Vase, 

Vacarme, 

Vaudeville, 

Ventre, 

Verbe, 

Verre, 

Vestibule, 

Vice, 

Vinaigre, 

Voile, 

Volume, 

Zele, 

Z6phyre, 



brimstone, sulphur. 

spectre, ghost. 

skeleton. 

style. 

subsidy, aid. 

sugar. 

torment. 

symbol. 

synonyme. 

telescope. 

temple. 

limit, term, bound. 

text. 

theme. 

tiger.^ 

boot-jack. 

thunder. 

triangle. 

triumph. 

throne. 

trophy. 

tropic. 

trouble. 

tube, pipe. 

tumult. 

ulcer. 

vase. 

uproar. 

vaudeville, ballad. 

belly. 

verb. 

glass. 

vestibule. 

vice. 

vinegar. 

veil. 

volume. 

zeal. 

zephyr. 



The cardinal numbers quatre, onze, douze, treize, quatorze^ quinze, 
seize, trente, quarante, cinquante, soixante, are also masculine. 
The ordinal, deuxieme, troisieme, &c., are likewise masculine, unless 
they precede a substantive feminine, in which case they are feminine. 

3. Exceptions to Nouns ending with e accented preceded by t. 

The following nouns ending with e accented, preceded by t, are 
masculine : — benedicite, a prayer before meals ; comite, committee ; 
comte, county ; cote, side ; depute, deputy ; ete, summer ; pate, pie ; 
traite, treaty. 

Particular Observations. 

The following remarks on the genders of some particular substantives 
will be found highly useful, although the gender of some of them may 
be ascertained from the above general rule and exceptions. 



GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 39 

1. All substantives commonly used with reference to men alone, or 
male animals, are, as before said, masculine, whatever their terminations 
maybe : as — usurpateur, usurper ; vainqueur, conqueror; juge, judge ; 
whereas all those usually attributable to women, or female animals, are 
feminine, although their terminations may be masculine. 

2. The names of days, months and seasons, are masculine: as — 
Dimanche dernier ., on Sunday last. Fevrier prochain, next February. 
Le printemps, the spring ; un He pluvieux, a wet summer ; un hel 
automne, a fine autumn ; un hirer froid., a cold winter. 

3. When mi, middle, is used before the name of a month, it forms 
with it a compound word, which is feminine : as — la rai- Juin, the mid- 
dle of June ; la mi-Aout, the middle of August ; &c. 

4. The names of mountains are masculine : as — le Mont-blanc, 
Mount-blanc ; le Vesuve, Vesuvius ; &c. ; but les Alpes, the Alps ; 
les Pyrenees, the Pyrenees ; les Cordilleres, the Cordilleras ; les 
Vosges, the Vosges, are feminine. 

5. Words denoting the language of a country are masculine : as — 
le Fran^aiSf French ; le Hollandais, Dutch ; &c. 

6. The names of metals, half-metals, minerals and colours, are mas- 
culine : as — Par, gold ; P argent, silver ; le platine, platina ; le cuivrey 
copper ; Petain, pewter ; le rouge, red ; le vert, green ; &c. 

7. The names of trees and shrubs are masculine: as — chene, oak; 
hetre, beech-tree : but auhepine, white thorn ; epine, thorn ; ronce, 
bramble ; yeuse, holm-oak ; vigne, vine ; are feminine. 

8. The infinitives of verbs, adjectives, adverbs, prepositions, and even 
sentences taken substantively, are masculine : as — le manger, eating ; 
le boire, drinking ; le bon et le mauvais, good and bad ; un car, a for ; 
un si, an if; un qu^en dira-t-on, a — what will they say. 

9. Words compounded of a substantive and a verb are usually mas- 
culine, although the substantive itself may be feminine : as — tire- 
botte, boot-jack; casse -noisette, nut-cracker; &c. : but garde-robe, 
wardrobe, is feminine. 

N.B. For further explanations on the genders of substantives, see 
the octavo edition, in 2 vol., page 10, and following. 

ESSAY VIII. 

Tlie French and English have had a terrible sea-fight, — Have 
Francois m. pi. Anglais m. pi. combat naval 

you been to the play this winter ? No ; but I (am going) this evening to the 
comedie hiver vais soir 

opera. — We have some very nice brandy, (will you have any) ? Yes, (give 
opera excellente eau-de-vie en voulez-vous donnez- 

me some, if you please.) (I want) a new hat. We all went in 

nien s'il voiis plait 11 niefaut ^nettf ^ehapeau ^toiis ^alldmes dans 

a boat. — Do- you sell coffee ? — No ; we (only sell) tea. — He had a fine 

bateau ^vous Hendez cafe ne vendons que du the imp. beau 



40 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 

horse. — She has not a very sonorous voice. (It was) a forgetfulness. 

cheval "^fort ^sonore ^voix Cctait oubli 

Give me an apple and a pear. — Lend her a needle. — Goodness is the hasis 

Donnez-moi pomme poire Pretez-lui aigniUe Bontt base 

of her character. — My sister is gone out. — The French nation is very powerful. 
caractere soeur sortie ^Francaise ^ irts-puissante 

— A had <jiut.— 'Where is the Fleet-prison ? — She sang a pretty song. 

niauvaise noix Oil Ve ^la *Jiotte ^ chunta jolit chanson 

The key is on the tahle. — The children are in the yard. — I have a loose 

cfef sur enfnns m. pL dans cour '^qvi %ranle 

toothj which (pains me very much).— Tliat water is not good. — The end of the 
^dent me fait un rnal terrible eau bonne Jin 

hook. — (It is) the first time. — Had they not a park and a river in the forest ? 
livre C'est premiere fois imp. pare riviere foret 

— This law will he abolished. The hand of that young lady. Stop, sir, 

' ^oi abo/ie main demoiselle Jttendez 

my mamma (is coming), — The harvest is not yet finished. — She has had a 
maman vient moisson encore Jinie 

had night. — The sea is rough. — He (does not fear) death. — (There is) his 

mauvaise nuit mer agitte ne c rain t pas mort Voila 

portion. Thirst is worse than hunger. Virtue has its charms. A great 

Soif pire que faim Vertu ses charmes * ^grand 

misfortune hefell them in America. — Her happiness is not (to he envied). — 
^malheur ^il ^arriva Veur en Amtrique bonheur a envier 

We had a* sickness at the stomach all the way. She has 

pret. def. mal cosur pendant trajet 

made a good choice. Call the waiter. — The horizon is red. Upon my 

fait bon choix Appelez garcon roi/ge Sur 

honour. — (There was) nearly a million of men. (It is) an enormous price. 

honnetir II y avait pres d? hommes Cest '^cnorme ^prix 

— Do- not drink that, (it is) poison. — A great age. — She will not have a great 
nebuvezpas c'est grand age 

fortune. Her salary is small. — The kingdom of Naples. — Have you not a cage ? 

• salaire modique royaxme de — • 

— This cream is sour. — A silver inkstand. — He told me a long story. 

c?-eme aiyre ^d'' argent ^encrier '^conta hue long it e histoire 
I have not a good memory. — She read a page of the bible. — (He is) an atheist. 
bonne memoire lut — — — C^est athte 

— The churchyard of the parish — Was she not in her carriage ? A fine 

cirnetiere paroisse Imp. voiture belle 

night. (There was) a fire last week. An interval of two or 

nutt 11 y a eu incendie "derniere ^semaine interva/le ou 

three days. — A magnificent building. — (Let us go) to the play. (Shall we go 

jours '^magnifique ^edifice Allans spectacle Irons-nous 

into the) pit ? Will you lend me an umbrella ? (There was) a great 

au parterre Voulez- ^preter ^me parapluie 11 rtgna profund 

silence, when the thunder (was heard). The county of Essex is not so 

quand tonnerre se ft entendre comte si 



OF NUMBER IN SUBSTANTIVES. 41 

peopled as that of Middlesex. — She had a* pain (in her) side. — A com- 

peuple que iiyip. mat au cote ^ ^co- 

mittee (was held). — We have had a fine summer. — Give me a little of that pie. 
mitt ^on Hint hel tte pen pate 

— The treaty is made. (He is) an usurper. She was a* good judge. 

traite fait Cest usurputeur imp. bo?i ji<ge 

Do* you learn French? — Copper is not dear. — A fine oak. — A young vine. 
^ ^apprenez Francais Cuivre cher beau chene jeiine vigne 



LESSON IX. 

2. Of Number in Substantives. 

Number is the distinction of one from many. Substantives admit of 
two numbers, the singular and the pkiral. The singular is used, when 
reference is made to one person or thing only, and the plural when 
reference is made to more than one. 

Formation of the plural of substantives. 
General Rule. — The plural of substantives, either masculine or 
feminine, is generally formed by the addition of s to the singular : as — 
le jour, the day ; les jours, the days. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1. Nouns ending with s, x, or z, in the singular, are alike in the 
plural : as — lejils, the son ; les fils, the sons. La noix, the nut ; les 
noix, the nuts. Le nez, the nose ; les nez, the noses. 

2. Nouns which are terminated with ant or ent in the singular, have 
their final t changed into s for the plural, in words of more than one 
syllable ; but the t is retained in words of one syllable only, and s is 
added to it : as — enfant, child ; enfans, children ; appartement, apart- 
ment ; appartemens, apartments. Dent, tooth ; dents, teeth. 

3. Nouns, the terminations of which are either au, cu or ou, in the 
singular, have their plural formed by the addition of x : as — chapeau, 
hat ; chapeaux, hats ; jeu, game ; jeux, games ; chou, cabbage ; choux, 
cabbages. 

But c/w?/, nail ; con, neck; Jih>/, pickpocket ; />-?/, fool; hihou, owl; licou, halter; 
verroy, bolt ; troii, hole ; folloAV the general rule, taking s for the plural. 

4. The greater part of nouns ending in al or ail in the singular, be- 
come plural by changing al or ail into aux : as — cheval, horse ; che- 
vaux, horses ; travail, work ; travaux, works. 

Eventail, fan, follows the general rule, taking * for the plural : thus — eventai/s, fans. 

G'e/, heaven ; oei/,e\e; make in the plural — cieux, heavens; year, eyes: but the 
plural dels is used to denote the shades of a picture or the tops of beds : as, — les 
dels de ce tableau sont admirabl^s, the shades of that picture are beautiful. Les dels 
de ces lits so?if de toiite beai/te, the tops of these beds are magnificent. 

The plural dels is likewise used, when we speak of the sky under which a country 
lies : as — V Italie est sot/s un des plus beaux dels de /' Europe, Italy is under one of the 
finest skies in Europe. 



42 OF NUMBER IN SUBSTANTIVES. 

A'ieul, grandfather, makes dieuls in the pkiral, when we speak of our paternal 
and maternal grandfathers : as — mes deux dieuls out rempli les premxtres charges, 
my two grandfathers have filled the highest situations. But if we wish to denote 
those from whom our grandfathers descended, and all those who have preceded 
them, flVe^^/ makes then dieux in the plural : as — nos diei/x, our ancestors. 

Ancetres, ancestors ; catacombes, catacombs ; ciseai/x, scissars ; entrai/les, bowels ; 
funtrailles, funeral ; hardes, clothes ; mceurs, morals ; mouchettes, snuffers ; muni- 
tions, ammunition ; ttnebres, darkness ; vivres, provisions, victuals, have no singular. 

PLURAL OF COMPOUND WORDS. 

General Rule. — Compound words which are united I)y a hyphen, 
either do or do not admit the mark of the plural, according as the sense 
or nature of each word, taken separately, expresses the singular or the 
plural. 

The only words which can never take the mark of the plural in com- 
pound words, are the verb, the preposition, and the adverb : as — des 
porte-mouchettes, snuffer-stands ; des avant-coureurs, fore-runners, &c. 

Words also composed of Latin or foreign words do not generally take 
the mark of the plural : thus we write — des forte-piano, as un forte- 
piano ; des auto-da-fe, as un auto-da-fe. We also write des in-douze, 
des in-dix-huit, &c., as un in-douze, un in-dix-huit, &c. 

N.B. See the octavo edition, in 2 vol., for a list of compound words ; 
as, likewise, for those substantives and expressions which have no 
plural, and for those which have no singular. 

ESSAY IX. 
The pupil not having yet seen the rules for the formation of the 
plural of adjectives, it has been thought advisable, in the following 
essay, to give the adjectives in the plural, in order that they may 
agree with their respective substantives which are to be put in that 
number. 

His daughters are young and handsome. — Tlie flowers of these gardens are 

fille jeunes belles jieiir jardin 

almost withered. The kings of France and England have magnificent 

presqiie Jlttnes Angleterre ^magnijiques 

palaces. These lilies belong to my little sisters. — All these nuts are 

^palais lis appartiennent petites sceur Toutes noix 

bad. Children (are fond of play.) — (Are there) any apartments to let ? She 

mauvaises Enfant aiment djouer Ya-t-il appartement a louer 

has had a* tooth-ache all the night. — These two bridges are the finest in 
^aux '"^dents ^mal toute mat pont plus beaux de 

Europe. — (Do you not hear) the singing of birds ? — Their voices are not very 
/' ■ — N''entendez-vous point chant oiseau voix fort 

sweet. — His sister's jewels are beautiful. — The gods of the pagans were 

donees ^De'^sa^soei/r^lesmjou superbes dieu pdiens imp. 

despicable. What delightful spots ! — (Does she not sell) (ladies') hats ? 

mtpt'isables Quels '^charmans ^lieu Ne vend-elle pas ^de ^dames ^chapeau 

— No. — Send me some cabbages and turnips. — (Are there) (a great many) 

Nun Envoyez-moi chou navel Ya-t-il beaucoup de 



OF ADJECTIVES. 43 

pickpockets in Paris ? — No ; (not so many) as in London. — (Tliere are) more 

jilou a fas aidant qu' a Londres If 1/ (^ jo/w« de 

fools than wise men. — They had two English horses. Have you seen the 

fou que de sages imp. '-^Anglais ^ cheval vu 

wild beasts ? — He offered some fans to the ladies. — I have (a pain) (in my) 
^sauvages ^bete prtsenta eientail dame mal aux 

eyes. — Italy is under one of the finest skies in Europe. — My two grandfathers 
ceil lialie sous plus beaux ciel de P tiieul 

have filled the highest situations. — Posterity will admire the victories of these 
rempli premieres charge Postcrite admirera victoire 

generals. Where are the estates of your parents ? (Are not these) the 

genera/ Oil terre parent Ne sont-ce pas la 

playthings of our children ? — Have you seen the catacombs ? — Give me my 

joujou enfant catacombe Donnez-moi 

scissars. — (Her funeral was performed) (the day before yesterday.) — His morals 
ciseaux On hnjit sesfitntraiUes avant-hier moeurs 

are corrupt. Have you not got* the snuffers ? — Your brothers have been 

corrompues mouchettes frere 

very imprudent. — He has several pretty pictures. Are provisions dear ia 

tres-imprudens plusieurs Jo/is tableau ^sonf-ils^les-vivres*chers dans 

that country.? (Were there) any handsome ladies? Tell him to bring 

jmgs Yavait-il de belles dame Dites-lui de '^apporter 

me two small knives and two small forks. 
^m' petits couteau petites fourchette 



LESSON X. 

Of Adjectives and Participles Adjectively used. 

An adjective, or a participle adjectively used, is a word wliicli we add 
to a substantive to express its quality or manner of being. 

Now, as substantives are either masculine or feminine, singular or 
plural, it follows that adjectives or participles adjectively used, referring 
to them, must take the same gender and number to express, with cor- 
rectness, their different properties. 

Adjectives may express the quality or manner of being of substan- 
tives to a greater or less extent : which produces the degrees of com- 
parison. 

Three things are therefore to be considered in adjectives : — the gen- 
der, number, and degrees of comparison or signification. 

1. Of the Gender of Adjectives and Participles Adjectively used ; — 
OTy Formation of the Feminine of Adjectives and Participles Adjec- 
tively used. * 

General Rule. — Adjectives and participles adjectively used, ending 
in the masculine singular with a consonant, or any other vowel than e 
mute, usually become feminine by the addition of e mute to their termi- 
nation 'y whereas those which end with e mute are alike in both gen- 



44 



OF THE GENDER OF ADJECTIVES. 



ders : as — grand^ m. sing, grande, f. sing, great. Polly m. sing, polie, 
f. sing, polite. Aime, m. sing, aimee, f. sing, loved. Sage, m. sing. 
sage, f. sing, wise ; &c. 

We must except : — 1. Adjectives ending in / in the masculine sin- 
gular, the feminine of which is formed b)- changing / into 2;e : as — 
neuf, m. neuve, f. new, 

2. Adjectives ending in eux, in the masculine singular, which become 
feminine by changing eux into euse : as — heureux, m. heiireuse, f. happy. 
— Vieux, old, makes vleille in the feminine. 

3. Adjectives ending with any of the ten following terminations : — 
ais, as, et, el, eil, ien, on, os, ot, ul, of which the feminine is formed by 
doubling the final consonant, and adding e mute to it : as — epais, 
epaisse, thick ; gras, grasse, fat; sujet, sujette, subject ; cruel, cruelle, 
cruel; pareil, pareille, like; ancien, ancienne, ancient; bon, bonne, 
good ; gros, grosse, big ; sot, sotte, foolish ; nul, nulle, nul. 

Mativais, however, makes mmivaise m the feminme. 

Complet, complete ; discret, discreet ; dtvot, devout ; indhcret, indiscreet ; inquiet, 
uneasy; i/zcowjo/e^, incomplete ; jore/, ready ; replet, replete; secret, secret; likewise 
follow the general rule in the formation of their feminine : that is, they merely take 
an e rnxrte, without doubling their last consonant ; but they require a grave accent 
over the e which precedes the t in their termination : as, complet, complete ; discret, 
discrete ; &c. ; pret must be excepted, as it preserves the same circumflex accent 
which it has in the masculine : thus — pret, prSte. 

4. The following adjectives, of which the feminine is quite irregularly 
formed : — 

Beau, belle, 

Benin, htnigne, 

Blanc, blanche, 

Caduc, caduque, 

Doux, douce. 

Faux, fausse, 

Favori, favorite, 

Fou, folk, 

Frais, fr'iiche, 

- Franc, franche, 

Genti', g entitle, 
Grec, Grecque, 

Observe. — Beau, nouveau, fou, mou, vieux, are changed into bel, 
nouvel, fol, mol, vieil, when coming before a substantive masculine 
which begins with a vowel or h mute : as — un bel homme, a fine man ; 
un NOUVEL acteur, a new actor ; un vieil habit, an old coat ; &c. It 
is by adding le to this last termination that their feminine is formed : 
thus — bel, belle ; nouvel, nouvelle ; &c. 

Remark.; — Several words ending in e^/r, whether adjectives or substantives, have 
a peculiar termination in the feminine : thus — accusateur, accuser, makes accusa- 
trice ; acteur, actor, actrice ; buveur, drinker, buveuse ; chanteur, singer, cantatrice, 
when meaning a v/oman celebrated in the art of singing, and chanteuse, any woman 
who can sing ; ewpereur, emperor, imperatrice ; impecteur, overseer, inspectrice ; 
instituteur, inatitutov, institutrice j pecheur, sinner, pecheresse ; protecteur, protector, 
proiecirice ; &c. 



fine. 


Jaloux, 


jalouse. 


jealous. 


benign. 


Jumeau, 


Jumelle, 


twin. 


white. 


Long, 


tongue, 


long. 


decayed. 


Matin, 


malign e,' 


mischievous 


sweet. 


Mou, 


•molle. 


soft. 


false. 


Nouvenii, 


naivelle, 


new. 


favourite. 


Public, 


publique, 


public. 


fooHsh. 


Roiix, 


rousse. 


reddish. 


fresh. 


Sec, 


seche, 


drv. 


frank. 


Tiers, 


tierce. 


third. 


pretty. 


Traitre, 


traitresse, 


traitor. 


Greek. 


Turc, 


Turque, 


Turkish. 



OF THE GENDER OF ADJECTIVES. 45 

But anieriein\ anterior ; infe'rieur, inferior ; vmjei-r, of age ; meilleur, better ; 
mineur, under age ; supcrieur, superior, and a few others, quoted in the octavo 
edition, in 2 vol., follow the general rule in the formation of their feminine, that is 
to say, merely take an e mute : as — antcrteur, anttrieure ; ynajeur, vuijeure ; meilleur, 
meiVeure ; &c. 

PLACE AND AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES 
ADJECTIVELY USED. 

General Rule. — Adjectives, and participles adjectively used, gene- 
rally follow their respective substantives in French, and agree with 
them in gender and number : as — a sensible woman, une femme sen- 
sible ; a well written letter, une lettre bien ecrite. 

The twenty-two following : — ancien, ancient; aucun, none, not any; 
beau^ fine; bon, good; cher, dear; digne, worthy; grand, great; gros, 
big; habile, clew ev ; jeune, young; joli, pretty; mauvais, bad; me- 
chant, ^Yicked; meilleur, better ; moindre, least; nouveau, new ; petit^ 
little; saint, h.o\\ ; ^ew/, alone; vieux and vieil, old; vilain, ugly; 
triste, sad ; or their feminine, must however be excepted, as they usually 
precede their res])ective substantives, when used in immediate conjunc- 
tion with them ; but still agreeing in gender and number with them : 
as — une ancienne coutinne, an old custom; un beau cheval, a fine 
horse ; une Joi^iEjille, a pretty girl ; &c. 

Tiie articles, the demonstrative, the possessive and indefinite pronouns, 
as likewise the numerical adjectives, precede also their respective sub- 
stantives : as — les hommes, the men ; cette maison, this house ; 
votre livre, your book; le dixieme regiment, the tenth regiment ; &c. 

ESSAY X. 

His wife is tall and handsome. — Their house is too small. — That church 

femme grand beau maison trap petit ey/ise 

is badly built. — My sister was beloved by him. — ^That woman has been very 

mal bad soeur imp. cheri cle iui femme tres- 

imprudent. — Was she not faithful to* him ? — This apple is not ripe 

imprudent ^Ne imp? ^ ^pas ^Jidile ^lui pomme ^mitr 

enough. The meat is cold. The road (in the) north of that country is 

^aisez viandi' froid route du nord paijs 

bad, unsafe, and very dangerous over the steep mountains. (Will the 

vunaais peu si'ir dangerenx snr escarptes montagne La porte 

door be) open ? — I have (read) a very entertaining story. Is that gown 

sera-t-elle ouvert In amiisant histoire '^Est-elle ^ ^rohe 

new P His sister is not very active ; but she is Avell-informed, polite, and 

neuf socur fort actif inais '^bien instruit ^affab/e ^ 

sensible. Mrs. F*" has been very unfortunate. Is she not virtuous .^ She 

* Mme. F'''" ma/heureux vertueux 

has always been deceitful and jealous. — That cow is not very fat. — This law is 

totijoiirs trompeur j'ulonx vache gras loi 

cruel and barbarous. (It is) an ancient custom. — (She is) a drunkard. Miss 

cruel barbare C'est ancien coutume Cest buveur Mile. 

O * * was a beautiful actress, and a sweet singer : she had, above 

imp. ^charmant ^uctrice delicieux cantatrice imp. sur- 



46 OF THE PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES. 

all, a most benevolent disposition. — We have (seen) a very fine woman, (with) 
tout ^la ^plus '^beniii '^l humeur vu beau qui avait 

a white scarf on*. — Your cousin will be a very good singer — The rose is my 
blaric echarpe cousine bon chanteur 

favourite flower. (Is) this water fresh P It is not very clean. These 

favori fleur ^Est-elle ^ ^eau '^frais elle clair 

oranges are not sweet. That (young lady) is so foolish. This news is false. 

• doux demoiselle sot nouvelle faux 

— I shall write a very long letter to* you. — (There is) a new fashion (every 
^ ^tcrirai ^ ^ ^ "^lettre ^ Jl par ait nouveau mode tous les 

year). — (It is) the public opinion. — She had an old woman with her. — lie 
ans C'est public imp. vieux avec elle 

always wears an old coat. (He is) a very clever young man. The paint will 

^ ^porte habit Cent habi'e jeune homme peinture 

soon be dry. — (It was) a mere evasion. — Is she not attentive i* These old 

%ientbt ^ sec C'etait ^pur '^dl'faite attentif vieux 

clothes (are good for nothing.) 

hardesf.pl. ne sont bonnes a rien 



LESSON XL 

2. Plural of Adjectives and Participles Adjectivehj used. 

General Rule. — The plural of adjectives and participles adjectively 
used, of whichsoever gender, is generally formed like that of substan- 
tives, by the addition of s to the singular : as — grand, m. sing, grands, 
m. pi. grande, f. sing, grandes, f. pi. great. Poll, m. sing, polls, m. 
pi. polie, f. sing, polies, f. pi. polite. Aime, m. sing, aimes, m. pi. 
aimee, f. sing, aimees, f. pi. loved ; &c. This rule admits of no excep- 
tion, with respect to the formation of the feminine plural of adjectives; 
but, in forming the masculine plural, the following anomalies must be 
attended to. 

1. Adjectives ending in s or x in the masculine singular, do not 
change their termination in the masculine plural : as — heureux, m. sing. 
heureux, m. pi. happy ; gras, m. sing, gras, m. pi. fat. 

2. Adjectives which end in ant or ent in the masculine singular, have 
their masculine plural formed by changing the final t into s, when they 
consist of more than one syllable, whereas the t is retained and s is 
added to it, when they consist of one syllable only : as — reconnaissant, 
reconnaissans, grateful ; diligent, diligens, diligent ; lent, lents, slow. 

Tout, all, makes tous in the masculine plural, and toutes in the femi- 
nine plural. 

3. Adjectives which are terminated with au in the masculine singu- 
lar, take X for their masculine plural : as — heau, beaux, fine ; nouveau, 
nouveaux, new. 

4. Some adjectives ending in al in the masculine singular, become 
masculine plural by changing al into aux : as — egal, egaux, equal ; 
general, generaux, general. 



OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON IN ADJECTIVES. 47 

Observe. — ^To form the feminine plural of tlie above adjectives, or 
of any other belonging to the same general rule and exceptions, it is 
necessary to find, first, their feminine singular, and then to add s to it, 
according to the general rule : as — heureux, m. sing, heureuse^ f. sing. 
heureuses, f. pi. Gi'as, m. sing, grasse^ f. sing, grasses, f. pi. Prudent, 
m. &mg. prudente, f. sing. prudenteSy f. pi. Tout, m. sing. ,toute,f. 
sing, toutes, f. pi. Beau, m. sing, belle, f. sing, belles, f. pi. Egal, m. 
sing, egale, f. sing, egales, f. pi. &c. 

ESSAY XI. 
For the future, the verbs, which the pupil will find in the present of 
the infinitive mood in French, must be put in the same tense and per- 
son as the English verbs to which they correspond. 

He has great talents. — Her friends will be^ glad to see her. Young men 

de talent ami bien-aise de ^voir ^la Jetme gens 

(incur) great expenses. — These ladies are so graceful that they are admired by 
font de depense dnme si gracieitx qti' admirer de 

everybody. — Your brothers have been very fortunate, and your sisters extremely 

heuretix extremement 

unfortunate. — Those women are cruel and revengeful. — Are your pupils very 

malheureux femme vindicatif ^Sont-ils ^ '^tleve 

diligent ? — No ; they are extremely lazy. My servants are not so slow as 

puresseux domesiiqiie si lent que 

yours. — All our sheep are very fat. — (Are these) all your children .'* — No ; I have 
brebis tres-gras Sont-ce-la 

two pretty little girls in the country. His horses are not so fine as mine. — We 

joli Jille a campngne si que 

have (seen) the two new operas. Are the general officers (assembled ?) 

vu nouveau '^Sont-ils^ '^oQlcier assembles 

All men are equal after death. — The two handsome ladies, who came yesterday 
les aprts la mort beau dame qui vinrent hier 

to* see us, are dead. — (There are) red and grey partridges. — 

'^voir ^nous mort ^11 y a ^des ^rouge ^ ^des "^perdrix ^gris ^perdrix 

All these filberts are bad. These stories (are not at all) entertaining. — 

aveline mauvais histoire ne sont point du tout amusant 

Have they (bought) the five white houses (which I mentioned to you) the other day? 
achete blanc maison dont je vous parlai outre 

— These tables are not new. 
neuf 



LESSON XII. 

3. Of the Degrees of Signification or Comparison in Adjectives and 
Participles Adjective ly used. 

There are commonly reckoned three degrees of comparison in adjec- 
tives and participles adjectively used ; — the positive, the comparative, 
and the superlative. 



48 OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON IN ADJECTIVES. 

1. The positive, which is improperly termed a degree of comparison, 
is nothing but the adjective or participle itself, merely expressing the 
quality or manner of being of the substantive, to which it refers, without 
any increase or decrease by a comparison with any other object : as — un 
enfant sage et studieux, a wise and studious youth. 

2. The comparative is the adjective or participle which, preceded by 
one of the words plus, more; moins, less or not so; aussi, as; and 
followed by que, than or as, expresses a comparison, in a degree of 
superiority, inferiority, or equality, between two or more objects : as — 
il est plus estime que son frere, he is more esteemed than his brother, 
Elle est moins instruite que sa sceur, she is not so clever as her sister. 
II est aussi grand que vous, he is as tall as you. 

These three degrees of comparison are also expressed by plus de, 
moins de, or autant de, before a substantive, and que after it ; or que 
de, if another substantive, denoting a quantity or number, succeeds ; and 
by autant with a verb and que after it : as — lis ont plus de noix que nous, 
they have more nuts than we. // a moins de pratiques que son voisin, 
he has less customers than his neighbour. Elle a autant de tableaux 
que de livres, she has as many pictures as books. 3Ir. C*** est autant 
estime que Mr. T*** est hdi, Mr. C*** is as much esteemed as Mr. 
T*** is hated. 

We may likewise express a comparison in a degree of inferiority, by 
using the verb in the negative in French as in English, and placing si 
before tlie next adjective or participle and que after it, or autant de 
before a substantive with que or que de, according as the sense implies, 
after it : as — elle n^est pas si instruite que sa sceur, she is not so clever 
as her sister. II n'a pas autant de pratiques que son voisin, he has not 
so many customers as his neighbour ; &c. 

The following words express a comparison of themselves, without the 
help of any other word: — 1. meilleur, better, which is the comparative 
of bon, good, and le meilleur, the best, its superlative: as — le vin est 
meilleur que Peau, wine is better than water, and r\ot plus bon. We, 
however, say : — il n^est plus bon a rien, he is no longer good for any 
thing ; but, in this case, plus is not a comparative, but a negative ad- 
verb. 2. Pire, worse, the comparative of mauvais, bad ; and le pire, 
the worst, its superlative. 3. Moindre, less, the comparative oi petit, 
little, and le moindre, the least, its superlative : as — cette colonne est 
moindre que Pautre, this column is less than the other. 4. Mieux, 
better, the comparative of bien, well, and le mieux, the best, its super- 
lative. 5. Pis, worse, the comparative of mal, badly, and le pis, the 
worst, its superlative. 6. Moins, less, the comparative of feu, little, 
and le moins, the least, its superlative. 

Observe. — Meilleur and mieux, being expressed by the same word, 
better, in English, offer some difficulty to beginners, who are frequently 
at a loss which to use in French. The difficulty will disappear, by con- 
sidering that, whenever better is an adjective in English, it is always 



OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON IN ADJECTIVES. 49 

expressed by mellleur in French, and by mieux, when it is an adverb : 
as, — this pear is better than yours, cette poire est meilleure que la voire, 
because better is an adjective ; but — I like him better than his brother, 
je ralme mieux que son frere^ because better is an adverb. 

The following rule may be inferred from the above general obser- 
vations. 

General Rule. — 1. Whenever an adjective is used in the compara- 
tive in English, with the syllable er at its termination, it is expressed in 
French by its corresponding adjective, with plus ^before it, and when 
than follows, it is construed by que : as, — meat is dearer than bread, la 
viancle est plus chere que le j^ciin. 

2. When more or less occurs either before an adjective, a participle, 
or a substantive, or even is used by itself in English, more is construed 
into French by plus, and less by moins, before an adjective or a 
participle; and by — plus de, and mollis de, before a substantive 
expressing a quantity. The conjunction than which follows is ren- 
dered into French by cjue, before an adjective, a participle, a pro- 
noun or an adverb, or even before a substantive which does not denote 
a quantity; but it is expressed by que de before a substantive denoting 
a quantity, and by de only before a noun of number : as, — London is 
larger than Paris, Londrcs est plus grand que Paris. He has more 
prudence than you, il a plus de p)rudence que vous. We have more 
plums than apples, nous avons plus de prunes que de pommes. This 
young lady is more than twenty, cette demoiselle a plus de vingt ans. 

The preposition above, used in the sense of more thnn, is likewise expressed hy 
plus de : as, — she is not above four years old, elle 7i^a /5rt.splus de qualrc ans. 

3. When as, as much, as many, and so, so much, so many, are used 
in English to denote a comparison of equality between tvvo or more per- 
sons or things, as is expressed in French by aussi, before an adjective or 
a participle; as much, by autant, with a verb ; as much or as many, by 
aidant de, before a substantive ; so, by si, before an adjective or a par- 
ticiple; so much, by taut, with a verb ; and so much, so many, by tant 
de, before a substantive : as or that, which follows, is construed by 
que, before an adjective, a participle, a pronoun or an adverb, or even 
before a substantive which does not denote a quantity, but by que de 
before a substantive denoting a quantity : as — he is as tall and clever as 
his brother, il est aussi grand et aussi habile que son frere. She is 
not so handsome as her niece, elle n^est pas si belle que sa niece. I 
like her as much as her sister, je Paime autant que sa sceur. They 
have as much money and as many playthings as you, ils ont autant 
d.^ argent et autant de jouj'oux que vous. I have not so many friends 
as you, je n'ai pas autant d^amis que vous. She is so foolish that I 
will not speak to her, elle est si sotie que je ne veux pas lui parler. 
I hate them so much that . . . . Jc les hais tant que .... She has not 
so much beauty nor so many fine things as ... . Elle n^a pas tant de 
beaute ni tant de belles choses que. . . .' 



50 OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON IN ADJECTIVES. 

4. The suferlailve is the adjective or participle expressing the quahty 
or manner of benig of the substantive in a very high, or in the highest 
degree ; and, also, in a very low, or in the lowest degree : as — the wisest 
man; the least loise of all. 

From this definition, it may be inferred that there are two sorts of 
superlatives, — the superlative relative, and the superlative absolute. 

The superlative relative, as the term implies, always expresses a com- 
parison with some other thing, and requires de or f/i/, des or de la, 
before it, if a noun, and que if a verb, as in the following examples : — 
he is the most beloved of all, il est le plus aimb de tous. She is the 
most amiable young lady that I know, c'est la demoiselle la plus 
aimahle que/e connaisse. In any such case, the verb is usually°put in 
the subjunctive mood. 

The superlative absolute never expresses a comparison with or rela- 
tion to any other thing, but merely increases or lessens to the highest or 
lowest degree the quality of the substantive. It is formed by placing, 
according to the import of the sentence, one of the words — ires, fort, 
hien, very ; injiniv.ient, infinitely ; extremement, extremely ; before the 
adjective or participle : as, — elles sont trhs-belles, they are very hand- 
some. II fid infiniment mal repu, he was extremely ill received. 

General Rule. — When an adjective or a participle is used in the 
superlative degree in English, either Avith st or est at its termination, or 
when the adverb most or least, preceded by the article the, occurs before 
an adjective or a participle, as — the tallest and most clever of the hoys ; 
she is the least lazy of the girls ; the adjective or participle is construed 
into French by its corresponding adjective or participle, preceded by 
flus, in the sense of most, and by moins, in the sense oi least ; and one 
of the articles le, la, les, du, de la, des, or au, a la, aux, according to 
the import of the sentence, is prefixed to plus or moins, to correspond 
with tlie in English ; and when that either follows or is implied, it is 
expressed by que : as, — the tallest and most clever of the boys, le plus 
grand et le plus habile des gar pons. She is the least lazy of the girls, 
c^est la moins paresseuse des Jilles, 

Observe. — If the adjective or participle in the superlative precedes 
the substantive which it qualifies in French, — as le plus grand homme 
de rarmie Frangaise, the greatest man in the French army; there is no 
article used before the substantive; but if the substantive precedes the 
adjective or participle in the superlative, both take the definite article, 
le, la, or les : as, — c''est Vhomme le p/^^s maladroit que je connaisse, 
he is the most awkward man I know. 

Plus and moins, and le plus and le moins, are repeated in French 
before every adjective or participle which they qualify; and every adjec- 
tive or participle, either in the comparative or superlative, agrees in 
gender and number with its respective substantive : as, — Russia is more 
powerful and more independent than Sweden, la Russie est plus puis- 
sante et plus independante que la Suede. 



OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON IN ADJECTIVES. 51 

ESSAY XII. 

The simplicity of nature is more pleasing than all the embellishments of art. — 
simpticltt agreable tons embellissement P — 

The English navy is more powerful than you (think). — Miss S*** would be 
Anglais marine puissant ne croyez iW^ 

much more esteemed, if she v/ere less proud of her beauty. — Tlie rose is not 

heaucoup eitime ttait f.er sa beaidc ■ • 

less beairtiful than the tulip, but the tulip is more gaudy. — Is he less subject to 

beau tulipe brillant sujet 

the (head- ache) than he was ? — I am older than you. — Mr. S'*''*''' (is) more 

mal de iete imp. «' dgi a 

than sixty. 1 (did not think he was) above fifty. The consumption 

soixante ans ne crogais pas qui! ent cinqt;ante ans consommation, 

of wheat in London is not more than six millions and* seventy-nine thousand 
hit a mille 

bushels a year. England has more than two hundred men of war. — That 

boisseau par Angleterre cents vaisaeau guerre 

country has never less than eighteen thousand sailors. — I (shoidd think there 
fogs ii' jamais matelot croirais qu''il ri'g 

were not) less than twelve hundred (people) at the ball (last night). Your 

avait pas cents personnes bed hier an soir 

mother is not so old as she looks. — Paris is not so populous nor so la.rge as 

vieux I e par ait peuple grand 

London, — The Thames is much deeper than the Seine. — Your daughter (will 

Londres Tamise proton d y///e ne 

never be) so tall as you. — We shall not have so many plums this year as we 
ieraj(i?nais grand aufant de 

(had) the last; but I think we shall have more apples. This 

en eumes annte dernitre crois que de pomme 

young gentleman is as much esteemed as his brother is despised, Tliis 

jeune fno?isieur estimer frtre mipriser 

champagne is not better than mine. These children are worse than you 

enfant ne 

think. — He speaks much better than he v/rites. — Is that peach better than 

penser parler n^tcrit '^ed-elle'^ '^peche 

the other ?— The public buildings in Paris are the finest (in the) world. — You 

aid re edifice a bean dn monde 

will give this wreath of pearls to the most amiable and the most clever (of the) 

donner par are perle aimable habile des 

three. — Though this young lady is the handsomest and the most accomplished 
Quoique demoiselle sc>it beau accompli 

(I ever saw), I can assure you that she is not my best friend. — Ignorant 
que faie jamais vue puis ^assurer^ cons qu^ meilleur amie Ignorant 

men* arc more conceited than others. — You make greater progress than I 

rain les autre faites de grand progrts je «' 

should have thought. — China is the largest empire in the world. — I think 

Chine grand crois que 

Napoleon one of the most absolute princes who (ever reigned). — The most 
Napoleon 6tait absolu prince aient jamais regnc 

learned men are not always the most virtuous. — The Alps are very high 

savant homme ton jours veriueux Alpe^f.pL hunt 

D 2 



52 



OF THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 



and very steep. — The st^-le of Fenelon 

escarps. Fenelon 

London is the richest city in Europe 
riche ville de P 



; very rich and very harmonious. 

riche harmonieiix 

-God is infinitely merciful. Gold 

in/tniment inistricordieifx O?- 



is the most pure, the most precious, the most ductile, and the heaviest of all 

pi^r piicieiix ~— — — pesant 

metals. 

mtial 



LESSON XIIL 
Of the Numeral Adjectives. 

Numeral adjectives are either cardinal or ordinal : cardinal, as, — w?z, 
iine^ one; deux, two ; trois, three, &c. ordinal; as, — premier, -premiere, 
first; second, seconde, deuxieme, second; iroisieme, third; &c. 

The first are called cardinal, because they are the root of the ordinal, 
which are formed from them. 

1. EXAMPLES OF THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 



1 One, 


2 Two, 


3 Three, 


4 Four, 


5 Five, 


6 Six, 


7 Seven, 


8 Eight, 


9 Kine, 


10 Ten, 


11 Eleven, 


12 Twelve, 


13 Thirteen, 


14 Fourteen, 


15 Fifteen, 


16 Sixteen, 


17 Seventeen, 


18 Eighteen, 


19 Nineteen, 


20 Twenty, 


21 Twenty- one, 


22 Twentv-two, 


23 Twenty-three, 


24 Twentv-four, 


25 T went V- five 


26 Twenty-six, 


27 Twentv-seven, 


28 TwentV-eight, 


29 Twenty. nine, 


30 Thirtv, 


31 Tlairty-one, 


32 Thirtv-two, 


33 Tliirty-three, 


34 Thirty-four, 


35 Thirty-five, 



vn, m. line, f. 

deux. 

irois. 

quatre. 

cuiq. 

six. 

sept. 

hiiit. 

iieiif. 

dix. 

onze. 

dovxe. 

ireize. 

qiiatorze. 

qvinze. 

seize. 

dix-sept. 

dix-huit. 

dix-neiif, 

tingt. 

v'ugt et im. 

vuigt-deux. 

lingt-trois. 

vingt-quatre. 

vingt-cinq. 

vingt-six. 

vingt-sept. 

vitigt-hidt. 

vingt-nevf. 

trente. 

trente et mi. 

trenie-dei'X. 

trente-trois. 

trente-'{iiatre. 

t rente-cinq. 



36 Thirty-six, 

37 Thirty-seven, 

38 Thirty-eight, 

39 Thirtv- nine, 

40 Forty, 

41 Forty-one, 

42 Forty-two, 

43 Forty-three, 

44 Forty-four, 

45 Forty-five, 

46 Forty-six, 

47 Fortv-seven, 

48 Forty-eight, 

49 Fortv-nine, 

50 Fiftv, 

51 Fiftv-one, 

52 Fifty-two, 

53 Fifty-three, 

54 Fifty- four, 
oo Fifty-five, 

55 Fifty-six, 

57 Fifty-seven, 

58 Fifty-eight, 

59 Fiftj'-nine, 

60 Sixty, 

61 Sixt)--one, 

62 Sixty-two, 

63 Sixty-three, 

64 Sixtj'-four, 

65 Sixty-five, 

66 Sixty-six, 

67 Sixty-seven, 

68 Sixty-eight, 

69 Sixty-nine, 

70 Seventy, 



irente-six. 

trente-sept. 

trente-huit. 

trente-neuf. 

quarante. 

quarante et un. 

qua ranterdeux. 

quarcode-trois. 

quarante-qiiatre. 

quar ante-cinq. 

quarante-six. 

quaranie-sept. 

quarante-huit. 

quaranie-nevf. 

cinquanle. 

cinquante et t/n. 

cinqt/ante-deux. 

c'nquanfe-frois. 

cinq uante-q uatre. 

cinq uan fe-cinq. 

cinqimnfe-six. 

cinquante-sept. 

cinquante-huit. 

cinquante-neuf. 

soixante. 

soixante et un. 

soixante-deux. 

soixante-trois. 

soixante-qiiatre. 

soixante-cinq. 

soixanfe-six. 

soixarite-sept. 

soixante-huit. 

soixante-neuf. 

soixante-dix. 



OF THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 



53 



71 Seventy-one, 


soixante el onze. 


105 A hundred and 


72 Seventy-two, 


soixante-douze. 


five. 


73 Seventy-three. 


, mxante-treize. 


106 A hundred and 


74 Seventy-four, 


soixante-q vatorze. 


six. 


75 Seventy-five, 


soixante-qninze. 


107 A hundred and 


76 Seventy-six, 


soixante-fieize. 


seven. 


77 Seventy-seven 


, soixante-dixsept. 


108 A hundred and 


78 Seventy-eight, 


, soixante-dix-hmt. 


eight, 


79 Seventv-nine, 


soixante-dix-neiff. 


109 A hundred and 


80 Eighty, 


quotre-iingt. 


nine. 


81 Eightj'-one, 


quatre-vuigt-i/n. 


110 A hundred and 


82 Eighty-two, 


q f mi re-ring t-deitx. 


ten, 


83 EightV-thrce, 


qnatre-vingt-trois. 


111 A hundred and 


84 Eighty-four, 


qi/atre-viiigt-qualre. 


eleven, 


85 Eighty-five, 


qiiotre-iingt-cin q . 


112 A hundred and 


86 Eighty-six, 


qnafre-vingt-six. 


twelve. 


87 Eighty-seven, 


q natre-vingt-sept. 


113 A hundred and 


8S Eighty-eight, 


quatre-vingt-hui/. 


thirteen. 


89 Eighty-nine, 


q uaire-iingt-nenf. 


114 A hundred and 


90 Ninety, 


quatre-vingt-dix. 


fourteen. 


91 Ninety-one, 


q u afre-vingt-onze. 


115 A hundred and 


92 Ninety-two, 


q uatre-vmgt-doKze . 


fifteen. 


93 Ninety-three, 


q natre-vingt-treize. 


116 A hundred and 


94 Ninet}--four, 


qimire-vingt-qimtorze . 


sixteen. 


\)5 Ninety-five, 


qncdre-vingt-quinze. 


1 1 7 A hundred and 


96 Ninety-six, 


quatre-vingt-setze'. 


seventeen, 


97 Ninety-seven, 


qiiafre-vingt-dix-sept. 


118 A hundred and 


98 Ninety-eight, 


qtiutre-vingt-dix-huit. 


eighteen, 


99 Ninetj--nine, 


qnatre-vingt-dix-nenf. 


119 A hundred and 


100 A hundred. 


cent. 


nineteen. 


101 A hundred and cent un. 


120 A hundred and 


one. 




twenty. 


102 A hundred and ce«/ deux. 


121 A hundred and 


two, 




twenty-one. 


103 A hundred and cent trots. 


1 22 A hundred and 


three. 




twenty-two. 


104 A hundred and 
four, 


I cent qnatre. 


1000 A thousand, 



cent cinq, 
cent six. 
cent sept, 
cent hat. 
cent neuf. 
cent dix. 
cent onze. 
cent doi/ze. 
cent treize. 
cent qimtorze. 
cent quinze. 
cent seize, 
cent dix-sept. 
cent dix-huif. 
cent d'x-neuf. 
cent vingt. 
cent vingt et u?i. 
cent vingt-deux. 
mille. 



It is obvious, from tlie above examples, that the word a or one., by 
"svhieh the numbers hundred and ihousand are preceded in English, and 
the conjunction and^ by which they are usually followed, are left out in 
French : whereas et is used to join the numbers vingt, trente, quarante, 
cinquantc, soLvante, with un or line, and also soixante with onze^ 
although and be not expressed in English. 

The larger number must always take the precedence in French, whe- 
ther the smaller be used the first in English or not : as, — vingt-quatre, 
twenty-four or four and twenty, and not quatre et vingt. 

When the word thousand is used in mentioning a year or epoch, it is 
expressed in French by jnil, mth one / only : in other cicum stances, it is 
spelled with lie — mille, which never takes an s, except when it is 
used for the English word mile, in the plural : as, — in the year one 



54 OF THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 

thousand eight hundred and thirty,* Pan, ou en, mil huit cent trente. 
Two thousand men, deux mille hommes. It is four miles from here, 
il y a quatre niilles cPici. 

Vingt and cent take an s, either when they occur immediately before 
a substantive plural, or when they refer to one understood, provided they - 
be preceded by another number multiplying them : as, — six hundred 
men, six cents hommes; eighty gentlemen, quatre-Ymgts, messieurs. 
We are only eighty now, but we shall soon be two hundred, nous ne 
sommes que quatre-xingts a present, mats nous serons hientot deux 
CENTS, namely personnes. But we should say, — Nous etions cent, and 
not cents, we were a hundred; because, in this case, only one hundred is 
mentioned. 

When quatre-vingt and cent are used in quoting a year, or when they 
are immediately followed by another number, they then never take an 
s : ex. — in the year seven hundred and eighty. Pan, ou en, sept cent 
QUATRE-viNGT. Three hundred and eighty-two pounds, trois cent 
QUATRE-viiNGT-DEUx Uvrcs Sterling. 

Million takes an s in the plural : deux millions, two millions. 

Un is changed into une^ when referring to a substantive feminine 
singular : une houteille, a bottle. It is the only cardinal number which 
undergoes such a change. The other numbers serve both for the mas- 
culine and feminine genders. 

Observe. — "When after any tense of the unipersonal verb to be there, a noun of 
number comes before a substantive followed by a participle : as — there were one 
thousand men killed, — be is elegantly used before the participle, and repeated before 
every other participle which maj'' succeed, if any other number be added, likewise 
followed by a participle ; as — there were one thousand men killed, and eight hiui- 
dred v/ounded, il y eui mille hommes de tii6s, et hint cents de blesses ; but if there is no 
substantive expressed after the noun of number, the pronoun en is then vised instead 
before the verb y avoir, and de is always employed before the adjective or participle : 
as — there were two hundred wounded, and fifty killed, il y en etd deux cents de 
blesses, et cinquanle de ti(ts. In this case and any similar one, there is always a 
reference to something mentioned before or implied. 



ESSAY XIII. 

The infantry amounts to one hundred and twenty-six men. He owes us 

infanterie se monter doit 

one thousand four hundred and fifty-six pounds. (How many) days have 

livre sterling Combien de ^ 

you been detained there ? One hundred. — How many guns have they ordered ? 
^ ■* ^dttenu ^y fusil commandts 

About a thousand. Napoleon went to Russia in the year one thousand 

a peu pres alia en Russie 

eight hundred and thirteen, and (Lewis the Eighteenth) returned to France in 

Louis dix-huit revint en 

* When the preposition in, by which the substantive year is preceded, in men- 
tioning a date, is expressed by en, the substantive, the year, is then left out ; but 
when the year is expressed by fan, e7i is omitted. 



OF THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 55 

the year one thousand eight hundred and fifteen. — George (the Fourth) 

quaire prel. def. 
was crowned in the year one thousand eight hundred and twenty, or one thou- 

coitro7iner 
sand eight hundred and twenty-one. — Tlie army consists of two hundred and 

armte consister 
fifty thousand four hundred and twenty-five men. — We lost in that hattle three 

perd'wies batci/le 

hundred and twenty-eight pieces of artillery. — Kow many miles (do they reckon 
piece artillerie compte-t-on 

it) (from here) to the Tower ? Sixty-one or sixty-two. — I received j-esterday five 

d'^ici rcius 

thousand six hundred and forty-six pounds eight shillings and eleven pence. — 

schelling 
We (sat down) to table eight-and-twenty people, at the last dinner ; but we 
ttiom 4 5 2 1 "^personnes ^dernier '^diner 

(shall not amount to more) than fifteen at the next. Will you lend me a 

lie serous pas plus de prochain yjrcter^me 

hundred and twenty-one pounds sixteen shillings ? I would v.'ith all my heart, 

/e ferais de 
if I could; but I have paid, this morning, two hundred and eighty-one pounds 
ie poKvais payer 

which I owed, and I have not one shilling left. Ninety-one pounds and nine 

devais de reste 

pounds are one hundred pounds. Sixty-one shillings and nine sliillings are 

font font 

three pounds ten shillings. — We have now three hundred beautiful frigates, 

a present ^superhe '^frigate 

and tv/o hundred (line-of-battle-shipS;) ready (to sail). — (Tliere will be) a liun- 

vaisseaux de ligne pret a f aire voile li y aura 

dred and twenty ladies; but I do* not think (there will be) more than eighty 

crois quil y ait de 

gentlemen. We mustered six hundred and eighty, at the last ball ; but we 

messieurs * ^ttions ''7 8 i 2 s^^,/ 

(shall not muster) more than three hundred at the next. — How many ladies 
ne serous pas de 

(will there be) ? A hundred. Only a hundred ! (How is that ?) You have 

y aura-t-il D^oii vie/it cela 

invited four hundred. 1 (will give you) a receipt for eighty-one pounds, if 

invite vais vous douner reru 

you like. (Did you not give him) eight hundred pounds twelve shillings? 

votdez Ne lid dofindtes-vous point 

Ko ; he (only wanted) six hundred. — Tliat celebrated actor died in 

7i^en avail hesoin que de "^ctlthre ^ mourut 

the year one thousand seven hundred and eighty. This man is worth two 

ridie de 

millions sterling. — (There were) ninety-five men killed and thirty-two wounded 

11 y eut 
in the two first battles ; whereas there were nine hundred killed and seven hundred 

bataille mais 
wounded in the last. 



56 



OF THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 



EXAMPLES OF THE CARDINAL NUMBERS 

used loith the word fois, time. 

Particular attention must be paid that, whenever the word time is used 
with a noun of number in English, it must be construed into French 
hy fois, and never by temps : as, — six or seven times, six ou sept foisy 
and not — six ou sept temps. 

Fois, being feminine, requires un to be changed into une, whenever 
used with it : as — unefois, once ; vingt et unefois, twenty-one times; &c. 



Once^ 

Twice, 
Three times. 
Four times. 
Five times. 
Six times, 
Seven times. 
Eight times. 
Nine times, 
Ten times. 
Eleven times. 
Twelve times. 
Thirteen times, 
Fourteen times, 
Fifteen times. 
Sixteen times. 
Seventeen times, 
Eighteen times, 
Nineteen times. 
Twenty times, 
Twenty-one times, 

&c. 
Thirty times, 
Thirty-one times, 

&c. 
Forty times. 
Forty-one times, 

&e. 
Fifty times. 



line fois. 
deitjc foh. 
trois fois. 
quatre fois. 
cituj fois. 
six fois. 
sept fois. 
hint fois. 
neuf fois. 
dixfois. 
on ze fois. 
douze fois. 
treize fois. 
qucdorze fois. 
quinzefois. 
seize fois. 
dix-sept fois. 
dix-huit fois. 
dix-nenffois. 
vingt fois. 
vingt et une fois, 

&:c. 
i rente fois. 
trente et une fois, 

qucifan.'efois. 
quarante et une fo\ 

cinqu ante fois. 



Fifty-one times, 

&c. 
Sixty times, 
Sixty-one times, 

&c. 
Seventy times, 
Seventy-one times, 

&c. 
Eighty times. 
Eighty-one times, 

&c. 
Ninety times. 



cinquanle et une fois, 

soixanie fois. 
soixante et une fois, 

soixan (e-dixfois. 
soixante et on ze fois, 

quatre-vingis fois. 
qiiatre-vingt-une 

fois, 8^c. 
q uatre-vingt-dix 

fois. 
q uatre-vingt-onze 

fois, 8^c. 
cent fois. 
cent une fois. 



and so on, without expressing 
which follows it. 



Ninety-one times, 

&c. 
A hundred times, 
A hundred and one 

times, 
A hundred and two cent deux fois. 

times, 
A hundred and three cent trois fois. 

times, 
A hundred and four cent quatre fois. 

times, 
A hundred and five cerit cinq fois. 

times, 
A hundred and six cent six fois. 

times, 
A thousand times, mill e fois, 

which precedes hundred, and 



and 



LESSON XIV. 

2. OF THE ORDINAL NUMBERS. 

The ordinal numbers are formed by adding ihne to the terminations 
of the cardinal that end with a consonant : as, — huit, huitieme : except 
neuf, which is changed into neuvieme, and cinq into cinquicme. Those 
which are terminated with e mute take ieme in its stead : as, — quatre, 
quatrieme. 

After vingt, trente, quarante, cinquante, soixante, and quatre-vingt, 
the French do not use premier and second, as the English do first 
and second after twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, sixty, and eighty, but 



OF THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 



57 



they employ unieme and d euxieme : thns, — vingt et unieme, twenty- 
first ; vingt-deuxiemc, twenty-second ; trente et unieme^ thirt\--first ; 
trente-deuxieme,i\\\xty -second J quar ante et unieme, forty-first; qua- 
rante-deuxieme, forty-second; cinquante et unieme, fifty-first; cin- 
quante-deuxieme, fifty-second; soixante et unieme, sixty-first; solxante- 
deuxieme, sixty-second ; &c. 

The ordinal numbers take the mark of the plural when they refer to a 
noun plural : as, — les premiers essais, the first essays. 



EXAMPLES OF THE 

First, !!■• 

Second, 2f 

Tliird, 3f 

Fourth, 4? 

Fifth, 5? 

Sixth, 6^ 

Seventh, 7? 

Eighth, 8? 

Ninth, 9? 

Tenth, W 

Eleventh, 1 1^ 

Twelfth, 12t 

Thirteenth, 13? 

Fourteenth, 14? 

Fifteenth, 15? 

Sixteenth, 16? 

Seventeenth, 1 7? 

Eighteenth, 18? 

Nineteenth, 19? 

Twentieth, 20? 

Twenty-first, 21? 

Twenty-second, &c. 22? 

Thirtieth, 30? 

Thirty-first, 31? 

ThirtV-second, &c. 32? 

Fortieth, 40? 

Forty-first, 41? 

Forty-second, &c. 42? 

Fiftieth, 50? 

Fifty-first, 51? 

Fifty-second. &c. 52? 

Sixtieth, 60? 

Sixty-first, 61? 

Sixtv-second, &c. 62? 

Seventieth, 70? 

Seventj--first, &c. 71? 

Eightieth. 80? 

Eighty-first. 81? 

Eighty-second, &c. 82? 

Ninetieth, 90? 

Ninety-first, &c. 91? 

Hundredth, 100? 

Hundred and first, 101? 
Hundred and second, &c 1 02? 

Thousandth, &c. 1000? 



ORDINAL NUMBERS. 

M, F. M. & F. 

P;® premie/', premiere, wiieme. 

2de or 2^'^« second, seconde, deuxitme. 

troiiieme. 

quatritme. 

cinquitme. 

sixitme. 

septitme. 

htdtitme. 

?ieiaieme. 

dixieme. 

onzitme. 

doi/zieme. 

treizleme. 

qiiatorzitme. 

qtiinzitme. 

set zitme. 

dix-septiPme. 

dix-hidtitme. 

dix-neiaitme. 

vinglitme. 

vingt et tmitme. 

vingt-deiixicme, S^'C. 

trentihtie. 

trente et lontme. 

trente-dei/xiime, 8^'c. 

qitaranlitme. 

qiiarante el unit me. 

qi/arante-denxitme, S^c, 

cinqnanlitme. 

cinquante et unit me. 

cinq uante-deuxitme, 8^-c. 

soixantitme. 

soixante et unitme. 

soixcuite-deuxieme, 8fC. 

soi^ante-dixit m e. 

soixante et onzitme, 4'C. 

quatre-vingtitme. 

quatre-vingt-unitme, 

quatre-vingt-deuxitme, 8fC. 

quatre-vingt-dixitme. 

quatre-vingt-<)nzieme, 8fC. 

centitme. 

cent imieme. 

cent deuxitme, 8fc. 

millitme, 8fc, D 5 



58 OF THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 

Observe. — The ordinal numbers, which are used in English with the 
article the after the names of sovereigns, whom they serve to demonstrate 
or specify, are expressed in French by the cardinal, leaving out the 
article : except, however, the first, which 'must be construed by the 
ordinal premier, but still without the article : as, — George the fourth, 
Georges quatre. Lewis the first, Louis premier. Charles the second, 
Charles deux ou second ; as for second either may be used. 

When the ordinal numbers are used to express a date, they are like- 
wise rendered into French by the cardinal : except still the first, which 
must be construed, as above, by the ordinal premier ; but, in this case, 
the definite article le is required before the number expressing the date ; 
and both the article and number precede the month mentioned in French, 
although they sometimes follow^ it in English : as, — the 4th of May, le 
4 Mai. June the 10th, le 10 Juin. The 2nd of August, le 2 Aout. 
The 1st of September, le V Septemhre : as if it were in English, — 
the^ four Mai/ ; the ten June; the two August ; the first September. 
De may also be used before the month in French : as, — le 4 de Mai ; 
le 10 de Juin; le 2 d^Aoid ; le F' de Septembre ; &c. 

If the day of the week be mentioned with that of the month in a 
date: as, — Monday, 10 or the lOth ; Tuesday, 12 or the 12//i; 
Wednesday, 14 or the 14:th ; &c., the noun of number expressing the 
date ought then to follow the day in French as in English, but w^ithout 
using any article in French : as, — Monday, 10 or the 10th ; Lundi, 10. 
Tuesday," 12 or the 12th, Mardi, 12. Wednesday, 14 or the 14th j 
Merer edi, 14 : &c. 

The preposition on, which is used in English before the clays of both 
the week and the month, when any particular day or date is mentioned, 
is not expressed in French : as, — I shall write to them on Monday, je 
leur ecrirai Lundi. He will come on the 15th*of August, il viendra le 
15 cVAoid; &c., as if it were in English : — / shall lurite to them 
Monday ; he will come the IS August. 

Noie. — The adverbs of number are formed by adding ment to the ordinal numbers 
which end in H'we ; as — qimirihne, fourth; qiiairiemement, fourthly; ci7iqmtme,^ii\i, 
cinqmtmement, fifthly; &c.; but ment is added to the feminine terminations of 
premier and second : as — premier, m. premiei^e, f. first ; premitrement, firsts adv. ; 
second, m. seconde, f. second ; secondement, secondly, adv. 

EXAMPLES OF THE ORDINAL NUJVIBERS 

used with the word fois, time. 

When the ordinal numbers are used with the word fois, they are 
preceded in French by the definite article la, in the sense of the, in 
English : as, — 

The first time, la fremiere fois. 

The second time, la seconde ou la deuxieme fois. 

The third time, la timsitme fois. 

The fourth time, la qvatrihne fois. 

Tire fifth time, la cinqtdtme fois. 

The sixth time, la sixitme fois. 



OF THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 



59 



The seventh time, 

The eighth time, 

The ninth time, 

The tenth time, 

The eleventh time. 

The twelfth time. 

The thirteenth time, 

The fourteenth time. 

The fifteenth time, 

The sixteenth time. 

The seventeenth time. 

The eighteenth time. 

The nineteenth time. 

The twentieth time. 

The tw^enty-first time, 

Tlie tAventy-second time, &c. 

The thirtieth time, 

Tlie thirty-first time, 

Tlie thirty-second time, &c. 

The fortieth time. 

The forty-first time. 

The forty-second time, &c. 

The fiftieth time. 

The fifty-first time. 

The fiftj'-second time, &c. 

The sixtieth time. 

Tire sixty-first time, 

The sixty-second time, &c. 

The seventieth time, 

Tlie seventy-first time, &c. 

The eightieth time. 

The eighty-first time, 

Tlie eighty-second time, &c. 

Tlie ninetieth time, 

The ninety-first time, &c. 

The hundredth time, 

Tlie thousandth time, &c. 



la septieme fuis. 

la huititme fois. 

la neiivitmefois. 

la dixitmefois. 

la onzitme foix. 

la douzitme fuis. 

la Ireizihne fois. 

la quatorzieme fois. 

la qinnzitme fois. 

la seizitme fois. 

la dix-septitme fois. 

la dix-huitieme fois. 

la dix-neiivitme fois. 

la vingtihne fois. 

la vinjt el iinihne fois. 

la vingt-deuxihne fois, ^c. 

la treiitieme fois. 

la trente et i/nieme fois. 

la trente-deuxitme fois, 8fc. 

la qiiGraniitmefois. 

la quarante et unit me fois. 

la qiiarante-deuxitme fois, 8^'c, 

la ci/i'ii;aiititt)ie fois. 

la ci/iqitante et unitme fois. 

la ci)iqnante-deuxihne fuis, 4*c. 

la soixanti tine fois. 

la soixonte et itnieme fois. 

la soixante-deuxitme fois, 8fc. 

la so'xafife-dixie/ne fois. 

la soixante et onzieme fois, S^'C. 

la q aatre-v > ngiitm e fois. 

la quatre-vingt-unihne fois. 

la quatre-vinjt-deuxitme fois, (^v 

la quat )'e-vinjt-dixieme fois. 

la qiiaire-vingt-onzieme fois, S^'c. 

la centiemefois. 

la mi I lit me fois, S;c. 



First, on the contrary, 
au co?itntire 



heneficent. 
bienfuisant 

—(Did you see) Charles the 



ESSAY XIV. 

George the Tliird was good, peaceable and beneficent. Napoleon the 

imp. bo)i pacifqiie 

was warlike and ambitious. 
mp. guerrier amhitieux Avez-vous vu 

Tenth at the review this morning ? — I wrote to your brother in Ireland, on 
revue ^T ten vis '^ 7 s ^en^^Irlande ^^a 

that subject, on the ninth of June; but he answered me, on the twentieth of 
12 ^hiijet 12 3 4 1,^^^-^ 6 ^repondit 7 2 3 4 

July, that he (intended) to set out for Paris on the first of August, if his 

^ avait intention de partir 
affairs (allowed him.) Your letter of the tenth of April reached us on 



affaire le lid permeitaient 
the fifteenth of May.— 
Mai 
called, I 
pret. def. passer imp. 



~est^ 



-She came twice yesterday 
vint 2 ^hier 



parvenue 



but, th 
was absent ; and the second time I 



first time she 

was so engaged 
imp. occupe 



60 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

that I (could not) speak (to her.) They go there eleven or twelve times 

que ne pus pas lui ^vont ^y 

(in the course of the) year. — He sends us the papers five or six times a week. — 

par an ^envoie ^ papier par 

(How many) times have you been there ? — A hundred times. — (This is) the 

Combien de 2 3 4 1^ Foici 

twenty-first or twenty-second letter that I have received to-day. The person 

aie re^ue axijourd^kid personne 

who has just knocked at the door (looks) extremely ill. She (has been here) 

frapper porle a Pair malade est venue 

at least fifty times, (without ever being able) t6* speak (to you). Well ! 
cm moins sans jamais pouvoir ^ ^vous Eh bien 

tell her that, if she (will call again), on Friday next, I shall be very happy 
diteS'ltd que veut revenir prochain bien-uise 

to see her. 1 have done that a thousand limes. (Has not any body been 

devoir ^ la fait N^esl-il venu personne me 

here for me to-day) ? — Yes ; (there are) two or three gentlemen (waiting for* 
demander attjourdlmi il y a messieurs qia ^altendent 

you) in the (drawing-room.) Where does* his mother live ? In Oxford 

^vous sa^on Ou, "^ ^ ^demeurer Dans 

street, No. 72 or 73, 1 beg your pardon, (it is) in Parliament-street, 

"^demander ^vous c'eit 

No. 90. — (Does not jrour cousin live) at''' No. 31, Cheapside ? — No; it is in 

Voire cousine ne demeure-t-eUe pus ^ ^ ^ 

King-street, No. 12. — li you (will go) to No. 41, Strand, you (will see) 

voulez aller ^au ^ * ^ verrez 

some one who wishes to speak to* yoM. — We have lived fifteen years in the 
quelqihin desirer de ^ ^vous 

City, and one and twenty at the (West end) of the town. My father comes 

Cite (lUcst xient 

(every morning) to town, and returns in* the evening to the country, after 

tous les matins il retourner soir campagne aprts 

(having) paid seven or eight visits, Avhich he (never fails to make.) London, 

avoir fa>t visiie ne manque jamais de rendre 

September 12th, 1827.— Tuesday, 24th.— Come on Friday or Saturday. 



LESSON XV. 

Of Pronouns. 

There are four kinds of pronouns : namely, — the persojial, the adjec- 
tive^ the relative^ and the indefinite. 

1. Of the Personal Pronouns. 

Personal pronouns are words which we use instead of the names of 
persons or things, to avoid the too frequent repetition of the same. 
They are used in French, as in English, for the nominative or object of 
the verb. 

By nominative or subject of the verb is understood the person or thing 
of which anything is affirmed or denied: as, — V enfant dort, the child 



OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 61 

sleeps: and by object, the person or thing on which the action expressed 
by the verb either directly or indirectly falls : directly, that is, without 
the help of a preposition: as, — J''aime Louise, I love Louisa; in this 
sentence, Louise is immediately affected by the verb aime, without the 
medium of any preposition : indirectly, that is, with the help of a prepo- 
sition : as, — j''ai farle ^ voire soeur,! have spoken to your sister; 
voire soeur is here affected by the participle i)arle with the help of 
the preposition a. 

\. Of the Personal Pronouns which fill the place of the Nominative 
or subject of the Verb. 

/, thou, he, she, it, we, ye or you, and they, are the eight personal 
pronouns which fill the place of the nominative of the verb. / is 
expressed in French byjV, or J' before a vowel or h mute; thou,- hy tu; 
he, by il; she, by elle; it, by il or elle ; we, by nous ; ye or you, by 
vous ; they, by its or elles. 

Je is used for the first person singular of both genders ; tu, for the 
second singular, likewise of both genders; il, for the third person sin- 
gular masculine, and elle for the third feminine; nous, for the first 
person plural of both genders ; vous, for the second person, either sin- 
gular or plural, likewise of both genders; ils, for the third plural mas- 
culine, and elles for the third feminine. 

Je, tu, il, elle, represent the singular, and nous, vous, its, elles, the 
plural ; but vous is likewise singular when it refers to one person only. 

Gender affects the pronouns of the third persons singular and plural 
only : as, — il, elle ; its, elles. II and ils are masculine, and elle and 
elles feminine. The pronouns of the first and second persons are either 
masculine or feminine, according as the person or persons whom they 
represent is or are masculine or feminine. 

General Rule — 1. When a verb is used affirmatively or negatively, 
and has one of the personal pronouns,/^, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils or 
elles, for its nominative, the pronoun usually precedes the verb ; but if 
the verb be used interrogatively, the pronoun follows it : as, — I speak, 
je parle ; he does not speak, il ne parle pas ; do you speak? parlez' 
vous ? do you not speak ? ne parlez-vovs pas ? 

2. When the words of somebody are quoted, the pronoun, which 
serves as nominative to the verb, is placed after the verb: as, — /'y 
con sens, dit-il, 1 consent to it, said he. 

Particular Observations. — The pronouns /, thon, he, they, besides 
being construed by je, tu, il, ils or elles, are also expressed by moi, toi, 
lui, eux : 

1. When they come after each other in a series or kind of enumera- 
tion : as, — /, thou, he, they, &c.; moi, toi, lui, eux. 

2. When they are joined either together or to another pronoun or 
noun, or even to a part of a sentence, by a conjunction : as, — he and /, 
LUI et woi, and not il tt je. They and my son, eux et mon fils, and 



62 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

not Us et monjils. Neither they nor you, ni eux ni vous, and not ni ils 
ni vous ; &c. 

3. When they are preceded by one of the expressions : — it is, it was, 
it will he, it would he, or any similar one, either in the affirmative, 
negative, or interrogative form of the verb : as, — it is thou, c^est toi, 
and not tu ; it was not he, ce netait pas lui, and not il ; was it they ? 
ctaient-ce eux? and not ils ; &c. ; or when they are used in answer to 
a question : as, — who has done that? I ; qui a fait cela? ftioi, and not 
je, &c. Or, again, when they occur by themselves, either by way of 
exclamation or interrogation : as, — I ! moi ! 

4. When they are used either by themselves after the conjunction 
than (que) , in a comparative sentence, or when they come before the word 
alone (seul or seuls) ; as, also, when they precede or follow one of the 
relative pronouns who, ivhom, that or which {qui, que), and are em- 
ployed in a determinate sense : as, — she is younger than I, elle est plus 
jeune que moi. and not que je. They alone were speaking, eux seuls 
parlaient, and not ils seuls. Was it he who was singing ? etait-ce lui 
qui chantait ? and not il. They whom I loved so much, eux que faimais 
tant, and not ils. 

5. When they are employed to denote a contrast or opposition between 
two parts of a sentence : as, — you think so, and I think differently, vous 
etes de cet avis, et moi je pense differ emment : in any such case, moi, 
toi, lui, eux, must be followed by their corresponding pronouns je, tu, 
il, ils, as in the sentence just quoted. 

Moi and je, lui and //, and eux and ils, are also, sometimes, con- 
jointly used before a verb; or je, il or ils, before, with moi, lui or eux, 
after it, in a familiar style. The same are also used to impart more 
energy to the sentence, and express astonishment or surprise, in the 
sense of /, he, and they, in English : as, — I have said so ! moi ! j^ai dit 
cela ! or, j''ai dit cela, moi ! He has done that ! lui ! il a fait cela ! or, 
il a fait cela, lui ! 

Finally ; — moi, lui, and eux, are used before a verb in the present of 
the infinitive, for /, he, and thry^ before the conditional in English, to 
denote also astonishment or surprise : as, — I would betray my best 
friend ! — moi ! trahir le meilleur de mes amis ! He would be guilty of 
cowardice ! — lui ! jaire U7ie lachete ; or, faire une lachete, lui ! as if 
it were in English : — / to betray the best of my friends ! He to be 
guilty of cowardice ! or, to be guilty of cowardice, he ! 

ESSAY XV. 

You speak too fast. — He reads very well. — She does* not dance well. — Tliey 
trop vUe tit ires-bien danser 

(will come), if the weather (permit.) — Is she handsome ? — Does* it rain ? — 

viendront temps le pervwt beau Hi ^pleut- 

Yes ; it has (heen raining) all the morning. — I think (it will he) fine weather 
phi malinte crois g?/il/eru beau 

to-day. (Are you going) to the play this evening ? — No ; I (am going) into 

aujouj'd^hui Allez-vous ^ ^ ^coviidie ^ hoi?- vais a 



OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 63 

the country. — If you do* (not come) and* spend the day with me, I shall 
campagne ne venez pas passer joiirnee ne 

never* ask you again. — Have you finished your letter ? — No ; not yet. 

"■^mviter ^ ^pltis fadr leltre pas encore '^Ne 

Has he not sent you your coat ? — Yes ; I (have just received it.) (How 

^ ■* ^poinl ^envoyer ^ habit viens de le recevoir Com- 

much) did it cost you? — Six guineas and (a half.) — Does* she sell gloves? — 
bien ^a-t-il ^coide ^ gtdnte demie ^ ^vendre gant 

Has she hreakfasted ? — Do* you speak French ? — At what o'clock do* they dine ? 
dtjeuner par/er qvelle heiire diner 

At five. What o'clock is it now ? (Half past three.") Pray, 

a prtient Trois heures et demie ^Je voiis prie 

which is the way to go to the Park? — He and your sister were there. — You 
^qi/el ^ chemin pour alter pare ^ ^y 

and I (will go) together. They and your daughter (went) to the English 

nous irons ensemble alltrent ^ * ^Anglais 

Opera yesterday evening. (Is it) he who was (so much) offended? 

* ^hier '^au soir Est-ce imp. si fdtht 

(Was it) they who knocked at the door ? — No j it was I. — Tlieir brother 

Etaient-ce imp. frupper porte c' imp. Leur 

is taller than I ; but he is not so strong as I. He alone can do that. (It 

grand si fort seul pent fair e Ce 

will be) neither he nor I. — That lady maintains that this proposition is true, 

?ie sera ni ni dame souli'ent que • vrai 

and I pretend the contrary. You tell me she is dead, and he says it 

prtlemb'e conlraire '-^di'es ^ qu' morte dit que cela 

is not so*. — We (will take) a walk, this evening, you, your mother 

irons f aire tour de promenade soir 

and I. — I said so ! — He (will do) that ! — I do* not believe it. — I would reveal 
ai dit cela fera ~crois ^le rtvtler 

the secret of my friend ! No ; never. — Who was speaking (to you ?) He or 

jainaii imp. ^ ^vous 

Mrs. W***. You like the town, and I like the country. (Look at) that 

ikT"'^. aimer ville Regardez 

magnificent building ; it unites gracefulness with beauty, and elegance with 
mugnifique edifice riu)iir grace a elegance a 

simplicity. — (Tliere is) a fine pear-tree ; it blossoms every spring, yet it 

simpliciit Voila poirier feurir tous les p7-intemps cependant 

seldom produces any fruit. 
^^rarement ^produit du 



LESSON XVL 

Of the Personal Pronouns me, thee, him, her, it, us, ye or you, and 
them, which are used as objects of the Verb. 

General Rule. — Whenever any one of the above pronouns is 
governed by a verb in English, without the intervention of a prepo- 
sition, either expressed or understood, me is rendered into French by 
me ; thee, by te ; him or it, by le ; her or it, by la; us, by ?ious ; ye or 



64 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

you, by vous ; and them, by les ; provided the French corresponding verb, 
of which the pronoun is to be the object, requires no preposition : me, 
te, nous, vous, le, la or les, is then placed before the verb in a simple 
tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one : as, — he loves me, 
il m'aime ; I have followed you, je vous ai suivi ; he esteems her, il 
Vestime ; we have seen them, nous les avons vus. 

When, on the contrary, any one of the above pronouns is governed 
by a verb, through the medium of the preposition to, expressed or 
implied in English, and the corresponding verb in French requires a, 
me is again construed into French by me ; thee, by ie ; us, by nous ; ye 
or you, by vous ; but him and her are rendered by lui ; and them is 
expressed by leur, with reference to persons or animate objects, and it 
or them by y, with reference to inanimate things, leaving out the prepo- 
sition : me, te, nous, vous, lui, leur and y, are, as above, placed before 
the verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one : 
as, — she has written to us, elle nous a ecrit. He told me to go there, 
for he told to me, il me dit d''y aller. We have sent her some money, 
nous lui avons envoye de Pargent. I shall speak to them, je leur 
parlerai. Have you thought of it ? y avez-vous pense ? 

31 e or — at or to me, occurring after a verb, affirmatively used, in the 
second person singular or plural of the imperative, is expressed in 
French by 77ioi, and placed after the verb : as, — tell me, dis or dites -moi ; 
speak to me, parle or parlez-moi. But me or — at or to me, following a 
verb, negatively used, in the second person singular or plural of the 
imperative, is expressed by me, and placed before the verb, as in the 
other tenses : as, — do not speak to me, ne me parle pas, or ne me 
parlez pas. 

When me or — at or to me is used with the third person singular or 
plural of the imperative of a verb, affirmatively or negatively used, both 
me and at or to me are usually construed into French by me, and 
placed before the verb : as, — let him or them pay me, qu'^il me paie, or 
qu'ils me paient. Let her not look at me, qu'elle ne me regarde pas. 

Le, la, les, lui, leur, nous, y and en, being employed with a verb, in 
the second person singular, or in the first and second persons plural of 
the imperative, affirmatively used, are placed after it, whereas they pre- 
cede it, as in the other tenses, if the verb be used negatively : — as, 
follow him, her or them, suis-le, la or les ; let us write to him, to her or 
to them, ecrivons-lui or leur; take some, prenez-en ; do not lose it, 
ne le perds or ?ie le perdez pas; do not speak to him, to her, or to 
them, ne lui or ne leur p)arle pas ; do not think of it, n'y pensez pas ; 
do not eat any, 7i'en mangez pas, &c. ; but if the verb be in the third 
person singular or plural, whether affirmatively or negatively used, le, 
la, les, lui, leur, nous, y and en, always precede it : as, — let her take it, 
qu'elle le prenne ; let her not answer him, qu^elle ne lui reponde pas. 

Observe. — Whenever two or more pronouns are governed by a verb, 
they are placed in the following order before the verb in a simple tense. 



OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 65 

and before the auxiliary in a compound one : 1. me, te, se, nous, vous, 
precede le, la, les, en and y. 2. lui, leur, precede y and en. 3. le, la^ 
les, precede lui and leur. 4. y precedes en ; as it is pointed out in 
the syntax, where all the possible combinations of the personal pronouns 
occurring with a verb, are exemplified in affirmative, negative, and in- 
terrogative sentences. 

Cases in which to me is expressed in French by a moi ; to thee, by 
A TGI ; to him, by A lui ; to her, by a elle ; to us, by A nous ; to ye 
or you, by A vous ; to them, by A eux or A elles, and placed after 
the verb in a simple tense, and after the participle in a com- 
pound one. 

1. When they are governed by an English verb which, being 
a reflective one in French, requires a after it, whatever may be 
the preposition used in English : as, — she applied to me, elle 
s\idressa A moi ; because s\idressa is a reflective verb which 
governs A. 

2. When they depend on any of the following verbs which require a 
after them in French : — to go, aller ; to have business with, avoir 
affaire; to have consideration for, avoir egard ; to have recourse to, 
avoir recours ; to run, courir ; to be, to belong, etre ; to appeal to, en 
appeler ; to pay attention, faire attention; to mind, prendre garde ; 
to think, penser ; and to come, renin as, — I have some business with 
you, y'a/ affaire A vous; we shall have recourse to them, nous aurons 
recours A eux, &c. 

3. To me, to thee, to him, to her, to us, to you and to tliem, are also 
expressed in French by a moi, a toi, a lui, a elle, a nous, a vous, 
a eux or a elles, when they depend on any other verb than those just 
enumerated, provided it governs a in French, and the pronouns are 
joined either together or to a noun by a conjunction : as, — I shall speak 
to you and to him, je vous parlerai A vous et A lui. It was to the 
lady, and not to you, I was speaking, c^eiait a madame, et non pas a 
vous qiie je parlals. 

If me, thee, him, her, us, ye, you or them, should be governed by a 
verb requiring de, in French, instead of a, whether it be a reflective one 
or not, me should then be expressed by de moi ; thee, by de toi ; him, 
by DE LUI ; her, by d'elle ; us, by de nous ; ye or you, by de vous ; 
them, by d'eux or d'elles, and placed after the verb in a simple tense, 
and after the participle in a compound one : as, — I was laughing at him, 
je me moquais de lui. She does not pity me, elle n^a pas pitie de moi ; 
because the verbs se moquer and avoir pitie govern de. 

It is necessary to observe that him, her or them, referring to persons, 
and it or them, to things, that have been mentioned before, are also, when 
depending on a verb which governs de, expressed in French by en, 
which is put before the verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary 
in a compound one, except when the verb is in the imperative affirma- 



66 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

tively used, in which case en follows it in the second person singular, 
and in the first and second persons plural, whereas en precedes it if it 
be used negatively : in any case, de and the preposition which may be 
governed by the English verb, are left out : as, — I am not satisfied with 
him, her, or them, ye n'en suis pas content ; he is glad of it, il en est 
hien-aise ; I wonder at it, je m'en etonne ; she is very sorry for it, elle 
en est hien fdchee ; complain of it, plaignez-vous-en ; &c. ; because the 
verbs etre content, etre hien-aise, etre f ache, s^ Homier emdse plai7idre 
govern de. 

En is of great use in the French language, and is generally employed 
to recall the idea of anything that may have been said before, and in 
many instances is used for its. 

.Me, thee, him, her, us, ye, you, or the?n, coming after a preposition, 
in any other circumstance than the cases which have been mentioned, 
must be expressed in French by — moi, toi, lui, elle, nous, vous, eux or 
elles, and placed after the preposition : as, — this is for me and that for 
thee; ceci est pour moi et cela pour toi. 

Le, la, les, are always articles when they are used for the, before a 
noun : as, — the brother and sister, le frere et la soeur ; but they are 
pronouns when they are governed by a verb, and stand for him, her, it 
or them: as,— I have it or them,ye Vai ox je les ai. 

For any further explanations on the Pronouns, see the Syntax. 

ESSAY XVI. 

Have you seen Charles the Tenth ? Yes, I have seen him several times ; 
vti plusieurs fois 

hut I have never spoken to him. — I know them very well by sight. — Do"''' you 

ne jamais farler connais de vue 

believe her ? — Neglect the pleasures of life : the pains which follow them 
crorjez- Nigliger -plaisir vie peine sidvent en 

prove their vanity. — Jupiter, vexed that Saturn laid snares for* him, took 

prouver la vaniti irrile que Saturne tendit jnege lid prit 

up* arms against him, drove him out* of his kingdom^ and 

arme contre pret. def. chasser royaume pret. def. 

compelled him to quit heaven. — Do* you admire her ? Yes, and I love her 
forcer a quitter del admirer aimer 

with all my heart. To please her, (you must never) flatter her. 1 

de tout coeur Pour plaire lui il ne f aid jamais 

(shall write) to you, in two or three days. Do* you not see him 

tcrirai dans ^Ne ^ Hoyez- ^point ^ 

sometimes ? Yes ; I frequently meet him at the Exchange.— Prosperity 

^quelquef'jis ^ "friquemment ^rencontrer ^ a Bourse Prosptrite 

gets us friends, and adversity tries them.— Have you thought (of it) ?— No ; 
fait adversity eprouver penser y 

I have quite forgotten it.— Think of it for Sunday next.— — Do* not 

tout-a-fait oublier pour Dimanche prochain ^«' 

think (of it) (any more). When truth appears in all its brightness, (no 

a ^^ ^plus Quand vtrite parait dans eclat per- 



OF ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 6t 

body can) resist it. — Tell me the truth. — Do* not tell her that you have 

Sonne ne pent rtsister y Dites- que 

seen me. — Do* not speak to me. — Your dogs are hungry and thirsty, give 

chien ont faim soif donner 

them something* to eat and drink. — I shall apply to you. — Do* not 

a manger a hoire s'adresser 

trust him. — She came to me, and asked me to go vAih. her. — You 

sefier vint pret. def. prier f/' ^ ^ne 

never think of me. — He has some* business mth you "We shall have 

^jamais 'Spenser d affaire 

recourse to her, if we want any thing. — (It is) to you and me. — 

recours avoir hesoin de quelque chose Cest 

They appealed to me. — He never pays attention (to it). — I 



forgive both you and her, because I hope you will behave better 

pardonner el d parce que esptrer que se conduire mieux 

in future. — Will you do that for me ? — It depends upon you to merit her 
d I'aveyiir faire dtpend de de mtriier 

esteem. — I do* not pity them. — She has recourse to them. — Come and* 

esiime avoir pihe d' Venez 

speak to me. — Go and* dress yourself. — Answer me. — Go to him. — "\Vrite 

Allez haUUer vous Rtpondre Ecrivez' 

to her. — Forgive them. — Listen to* me. — Lend us that book; I (cannot), 

Pardonner Ecouter Preter livre ne saurais 

(I must) return it to day. Tliat belongs to you or to your sister. — 

il faut que je rende aujourd^ hui vous appartient ou 

It was not to you, it was to the* gentleman, I was speaking. — 

Ce imp. c' imp. monsieur que imp. 

(Has he complained) of me .'' — We were laughing at him. — I wonder at it. 

S''€St-il p/aint imp. se moquer de s'ttonner 

— Are you glad of it ? — No ; I am very sorry for it. — Life is a gift of God ; 

bioi-aise bien facht don 

to* destroy it is a crime. — Keep this for* me, I shall want it. — (Tliere is) 

disposer en Garder ^ ^7noi avoir besoin en voi/d 

3'our book, we do* not want it. — Pisistratus said of a drunken man, who had 

Pisislrate dit ivre avait 

spoken against him : — I am no more angry with him than (I should be with 

ne pas plus fachk c '" ' '- .■■—'.- 

a blind man v^-ho would have run) against me. 
tin aveuijle qui se serait jetc 



LESSON XVII. 

'Of Adjective Pronouns. 

Adjective pronouns are of a mixed nature, participating the properties 
both of pronouns and adjectives. 

They may be subdivided into two kinds, — the possessive and the 
demonstrative. 



68 OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

] . Of the Possessive Pronouns. 

Possessive pronouns are words which we use to express the possession 
or property of anything. 

They are divided into conjunctive and relative, as before explained. 

The conjunctive possessive pronouns are: — mon, ma, mes, ray; ton, 
ta, tes, thy ; son, sa, ses, his, her, or its ; notre, nos, our ; voire, vos, 
your; and leur, leurs, their. These pronouns are called conjunctive, 
because they always precede the substantives of which they express the 
possession : as, — mon chapeau, my hat. 

The relative possessive pronouns are : — le mien, lamienne, les miens, 
les miennes, mine; le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes, thine; le 
sien, la sienne, les siens, les siennes, his, hers, or its ; le notre, la notre, 
les notres, ours; le votre, lavotre, les votres, yours; and le leur, la 
leur, les leurs, theirs. They are so termed relative, because they are 
never prefixed to any substantive, but always refer to one : as, — mon 
livre et le votre, my book and yours. 

PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS ON THE CONJUNCTIVE AND RELATIVE 
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

1. On the Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns. 

General Rule. — The conjunctive possessive pronouns mon, ma, mes ; 
ton, ta, tes ; son, sa, ses ; &c., are usually employed in French before 
the name of everything of which we express the possession, and agree 
with it in gender and number; although my, thy, his, her, its, &c., 
never vary in English, and are, when referring to several nouns follow- 
ing each other in a sentence, usually put before the first, and understood 
before those which succeed: as, — my father, mother, and sisters are 
gone into the country, mon pere, ma mere, et mes soeurs sont alles a 
la campagne. 

The relative possessive pronouns le mien, la mienne, les aniens, les 
miennes, &c., likewise agree with their respective substantives in French : 
as, — your sister and mine, voire sceur et la mienne. Her friends and 
mine, ses amis et les miens. 

The two possessive pronouns son and sa always agree in gender with 
the thing possessed, in French, and not with the possessor, as his, her, 
and its do in English : as, — he loves his wife, il aime sa femme, and 
not son femme. She has lost her property, elle a perdu son hien, and 
not sa bien ; &c. ; always making them agree with the following noun. 

Mon, ton, son, are used in French instead of ma, ta, sa, before nouns 
feminine singular, beginning with a vowel or h mute, in order to avoid 
the harsh sound which would otherwise result from the meeting of two 
vowels : as, — mon oreille, my ear, instead of ma oreille. Ton epee, 
thy sword, instead of ta epee. Son hianeur, his temper, instead of sa 
humeur ; but notre, votre, leur, are indifferently employed before a 
noun masculine or feminine singular, either beginning with a vowel, a 



OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 69 

consonant, or h mute : as, — notre ami^ our friend ; yotre horloge^ 
your clock ; &c. 

Lem\ their, must not be confounded with leur, to them; the former 
being a possessive conjunctive pronoun which is prefixed to substan- 
tives, and takes an s in the plural : as, — leurs enfans, their children ; 
whereas the latter is a personal pronoun which goes before a verb, 
and never takes an s : as, — // leur parla de vous, he spoke to them 
of you. 

Noire and votre are pronounced short, when conjunctive pronouns, 
but when they are relative they are pronounced long, taking besides a 
circumflex accent over the o : as, — 7iot)-e maison est neuvej la votre ne 
Vest pas, our house is new, yours is not. 

One of the conjunctive possessive pronouns ?non, ma, mes, is used in 
French before the name or names of such of our friends or relations as 
we address, although my be not generally employed in such a case in 
English: as, — How do you do, father? Comment vous portez-vous, 
MON pere? — Adieu, children, adieu, mes enfans. 

AVhen inquiring about or speaking of persons for whom we feel some 
respect or consideration, and with whom we are not upon terms of inti- 
macy, one of the qualifications. Monsieur, Madame, Mademoiselle, or 
Messieurs, Mcsdames, Mesdemoiselles, according as we speak of one 
or several, is used before the possessive pronoun voire or vos, which 
precedes the name of the person or persons mentioned, although there 
be no equivalent expression made use of in English : as, — -present my 
compliments to your mother, presentez vies compliniens a madame 
votre mere. Give my kind regards to your sisters, dites hien des choses 
aimahles de ma part a mesdemoiselles vos soeurs. 

But friends, broiJiers, sisters, inquiring about or speaking of each 
other : parents speaking of their children, and children of their parents, 
will never use these preliminaries : as, for instance, — a friend inquiring 
after the health of his friend's sister, will say : — comment se porte ta 
soeur? how is your sister? and not comment se porte mademoiselle 
ta soeur ? 

Neither are these preliminaries used when speaking of or inquiring 
about servants, ivorkmen, or any other such persons who may be con- 
sidered as inferior: for instance, — when inquiring after the health of a 
gardener, we must say : — comment se porte Jacques ? how is James ? 
and not, comment se porte Monsieur Jacques? 

One's, employed in a general and indefinite sense for his, is expressed 
in French by one of the possessive pronouns, son, sa, ses, according 
to the gender and number of the substantive following : as, — one must 
live according to one's income, ilfaut vivre suivant son revenu. 

2. ON THE RELATIVE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

General Rule. — When any one of the relative possessive pronouns 
mine, thine J his, hers, ours,2jours, theirs, is preceded by the preposition 



70 OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

of and placed after the substantive to which it relates in English : as, — a 
friend of mine ; a hook of yours ; a countryman of his ; it is ex- 
pressed in French by its corresponding conjunctive possessive pronoun 
mes^ tes, ses, nos, vos, or leurs^ before which the preposition de is used : 
— mes^ tes^ ses, nos, vos, or leurs, is immediately prefixed to the sub- 
stantive to which it refers, and ihe substantive is put in the plural : 
as, — a friend of mine, un de mes amis ; a book of yours, un de vos 
livres ; a countryman of his, un de ses compatriotes ; as if it were in 
English, — one of my friends, one of your books, 8^c. 

But mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs, coming after any 
tense of the verb to he, employed in the sense of to helong : as, — this 
coat IS mine ; that music is yours ; are usually expressed in French by 
a moi, a toi, a lui, a elle, a nous, a vous, a eux or a elles, and placed 
similarly to mine, thine, his, &c. in English : as, — this coat is mine, cet 
hahit est a moi. That music is yours, cette musique est a vous. 

The word own, which is sometimes used after the possessive pronouns 
my, thy, his, her, our, your, their, to give more energy to the expres- 
sion, is rendered into French by the adjective propre : as, — I heard it 
with my own ears, je Pai entendu de mes propres oreilles. I saw it 
with my own eyes, je Pai vu de mes propres yeux. 

ESSAY XVII. 

My father, mother, and sisters loved him tenderly. — His wife is very 

soeitr imp. aimer tendrement femme 

ugly. — I have spoken to her husband. — Her hope is ill grounded. — Her son 
/aid jjurler man esperance mal fonde Jlls 

is not very learned. — (How old is) his (mother-in-law) .'' — His wit, his talents, 
savant Quel age a helle-mtre espnt talent 

his honesty, and his good nature, (make him admired) hy every body. — My 

homieiete naturel ^font Ve coyisiderer de 

principles, my taste for study, and my love of retirement, have made me choose 
principe goid pour fetnde amour retraite fait ckoisir 

a retired life. — If you wish (to keep) my friendship and protection, 

relirci vie dtkirer que je vous comerve amitie. 

do* not speak ill of me. — He has received these presents from my uncle and 
mal recevoir oncle 

aunt. — (Shall I send) ihis pheasant to your friend.? — Has she lost all her 
de tante E7iverrai-je fuisaii ami perdu , 

property.? — We expect a letter from our correspondent to-morrow^ — Have you 

bien attendre correq)onda?it demain 

not yet (heard) from your amiable cousin ? — All their projects have 

encore recu de nouvelles aimahle cousine jirojet 

(failed.) — Is* your (grand-father) still living ? — Yes ; but my grand-mother is 

tchoue grand-ptre '^encore ^vit-il grand'-mere 

dead. — (Come), friends, let us fly to glory. — How do* you do, children? — 
mort Allans amis voler gloire Comment se porter enfant 

Give my love to your sisters. — Is your mother (at home) ? — No ; but 

Faites amities '^Est-elle ^ ^ ^y 



OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 71 

my father (is), and he will be very glad to see you. Do* your nieces 

y est bien-aise de voir niece 

learn French ? — One cannot always satisfy one's wishes. — My 

npprennent-elles le On ne pent pas safisfaire desir 

horse and yours are very had, hut I think mine is a little better than yours. 
mauvais crois que peu meilleur que 

(Is it) her temper or yours that hinders you from living well together ? 

Esi-ce humeurf. qui empecher de hivre -^ ensemble 

If (it be) yours, it is easy for* you to remedy it, by (keeping a check) 

cest il '^ ^ ^ ^d'' apporter remtde ^y en qyrenant 

upon yourself; if it be hers, redouble your attention, complaisance, and 

sur vous-meme redouhler d'' de • de 

good behaviour; it is very seldom that this method (proves unsuccessful.) — All 
hons proctdts il rare que may en lie rtussisse pas 

the pictures are arrived from Italy, except yours, hers, and mine, which we 

tableau arriver Itnlie excepte que 

expect to-morrov7. — We know what are your amusements in town, whereas 
attemlojis savons quels amusement a la ville au lieu 

you (are quite ignorant) of ours in the country; but I assure you that ours 
que n'ntez nulle idee a campagne mais 

are infinitely superior to yours. — Tliey have (returned) us our music, where 
injiniment prtferables rendu musique ou 

is theirs ? Our field is cultivated, theirs (is not.) Her morals are correct, 

chainp culiiver fie Pest pas inceurs bon 

theirs are corrupt. My books are new, his are old. — Take this to my sonj 

corrompu livre veuf vieux Porter 

and that to yours. — — You may send these pistols to their country 

pouvez envoyer pistolet ^de ^campagne 

house, if you like, but (not) to mine. — She has learnt her lesson, and he 

^maison voulez uon pas appris le^on lui il 

has not learnt his. — He has found a cravat of yours among his. A cravat of 

irouver cravate parmi 

mine, you say? show it (to me). 1 (saw) a countryman of }-ours 

^ ^difes- montrer moi ai ru '"^ ^compatriote ^ •* 

yesterday. — This money is mine. — (That is) a trick of his. — Will you take this 

^hier argent Voda tour porter 

watch to your sister ? I think it is hers. — Whose great coat is this .'* It is my 
montre crois que c' Vt '^qui ^surtout ^ * C a 

(brother's.) I thought it was yours. No ; it is not mine. — Did you really 
frtre croyais que c' ce Avez- rcellement 

hear that ? Yes : I heard it with my own ears. — I tell you that I 

entendu ''^ai entendu V de oreille dis que 

saw it with my own eyes. 
^ai vu V de 



LESSON XVIII. 

2. Of the Demonstrative Pronouns. 

The demonstrative pronouns are words which we use to pomt out the 
person or thing spoken of, as previously explained. 



72 OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

It must be recollected that this^ that, these, those, are expressed in 
Frencli by — ce, cet, cette, ces, when they come immediately before the 
substantives which they particularise : as, — this gentleman, ce monsieur ; 
that bird, cet oiseau ; that man, cet homme ; this lady, cette dame; 
these young ladies, ces demoiselles ; those children, ces enfans ; of 
those men, de ces hommes ; &c. ; always using ce before a noun mascu- 
line singular, beginning with a consonant or h aspirated ; and cet before 
a noun likewise masculine singular, but beginning with a vowel or h 
mute. Cette, on the contrary, is always required before a noun feminine 
singular, whether it begins with a vowel, an h mute, or a consonant ; 
and ces before a noun plural, whatever its initial or gender may be. 

But this, that, these, those, are expressed in French by celui, celle, 
ceux, celles, when, instead of immediately preceding a substantive, they 
refer to one ; this is generally the case, when they are followed either by 
the preposition of in English, or by one of the relative pronouns ivho, 
whom, that or lohich : as, — the term of life is short, that of beauty is still 
more so, le temps de la vie est court, celui de la heaute Vest encore 
davantage. Madame, I bring you your gown, and that of your daughter, 
Madame, je vous apporte voire robe, et celle de votre Jille. Lend 
me that which you bought yesterday, p)retez-moi celui que vous ache- 
tdtes hier ; speaking of a parasol. 

Celui-ci, celle-ci, ceux-ci, celles-ci, this and these, are used to 
denote, among two or several objects or things, the nearest to the person 
who speaks; and ce/w2-/a, celle-ld, ceux-ld or celles-ld, to point out 
the most remote object : as, — which of these two horses would you advise 
me to buy? /Au is four years old, and that five; lequel de ces deux 
chevaux me conseilleriez-vous d^acheter? cei^ui-ci a quatre ans, et 
celui-lA cinq. 

Ceci and cela are used in the sense of this and that, not joined to 
any noun nor referring to any, but taken in an indefinite collective sense, 
when we either mention or point at some thing, without specifying what 
it is by its own name. They have no plural, and are used only in the 
singular, both for the masculine and feminine gender. Ceci refers to the 
nearest object or thing to the person who speaks, and cela to the most 
remote object : as, — what does tliis mean ? que veui dire ceci ? what did 
you do that for? pourquoi avez-vous fait cela ? Give this to the lady, 
donnez ceci a madame. Bring me that, apportez-moi cela. 

General Rule. — The demonstrative pronouns, ce, eel, cette, ces ; 
de ce, de cet, de cette, de ces ; and a ce, a cet, a cette, a ces, are used 
in French before every substantive which they serve to demonstrate, and 
agree with it in gender and number, although, when several substantives 
follow each other in a sentence in English, this, that, these, those, be 
frequently used before the first substantive only, and understood before 
those which succeed : as, — see how this man, woman, and child are 
playing together ! voyez comme get homme, cette femme, et cet enfant 
jouent ensemble! 



OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 73 

The relative demonstrative pronouns celui^ celle^ ceux, celles^ like- 
wise agree in gender and number with their respective substantives in 
French : as, — ce parapluie et celui de voire sosuVj this umbrella and 
that of your sister. 

The following lines of Racine beautifully exemplify the repetition of the demoa- 
strative pronouns ce, cet, cette and ces. 

De cette nuit, Phenice, as-tu vu la splendeur ? 

Tes yeux ne sont-ils pas tout pleins de sa grandeur ? 

Ces flambeaux, ce bucher, cette nuit enflammee, 

Ces aigles, ces faisceaux, ce peuple, cette armee, 

Cette foule de rois, ces consuls, ce senat, 

Qui tous de mon amant empruntaient leur eclat; 

Cette pourpre, cet or, que rehaussait sa gloire, 

Et ces lauriers encor temoins de sa victoire. 

(Rac. Btnnicey 1, 5.) 

ESSAY XVIII. 

This portrait is (beautiful.) — The term of life is short, that of beauty is still 

cle toute heaiitc temps vie court beautc ^ '^encore 

more so. — These peaches are not so ripe as those which I 

%ien davantage V -peche missi miir que pret. def. 

bought yesterday. — We gave the money to that man. — Look at* the 

acheter hier pret, def. donner argent Regarder 

beak of that bird. — (Is it) far from that house to the river ?— (Such a) happiness 
bee oiseau Y a-t-illoin rivitre Uu pareil honheur 

is infinitely superior to that which one can enjoy in this world. — 

infinhnent au-dessus de dont on peat j'ouir dans monde 

The climate of England is not comparable to that of Switzerland. — This 

climat P la Sinsse 

hatred, long restrained, broke forth, and was the unhappy 

hcdne long-temps contetm pret. def. ec/ater pret. def. ^malheweitx 

cause of those dreadful events. "Wliat gowni shall I lend her ? — That which 

^ ^terrible "^ivtnement Quelle robe preter liu 

you showed Miss 8*** last week. — I have just bought these two 

pret. def. montrer a dernier acheter 

silk umbrellas: this costs me twenty-four shillings, and that thirty. — Do* 
Ve ^soie ^pa)-apluie couie me schelling 

not mention that to (any body).— If she does that, she will repent it.—, 

parler de personne Si fait '^s ^repentir ^en 

Is this good to eat ? That is very bad to drink.— Take this (to the) 

"^Est-il ^ a manger mmivuis a boire Porter a 

lady, and keep that for yourself.— What (is the meaning of) this .? — See 
madame garder pour vous Que veut dire Voyez 

how these men and women are playing together ! — You (ought not to trust) 
<^^'^ jouer ensemble ne devries pas vous fier a, 

those who are interested in (deceiving you).— He may tell these stories to 

interesse a -tromper ^vous pent conter histoire 

those who will listen to* him. 

voudro7it bien "^ecoider V 



74 OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

LESSON XIX. 

Of the Relative Pronouns. 
' The nature of the relative pronouns having been already explained, 
and their different variations exemplified, the object of this article is to 
point out the mode of using them. 

The relative pronouns are (as shown in the beginning of this 
Grammar), qui, que, lequel, dont, who, whom, that, which, of whom 
or which. 

General Rule. — Whenever the relative pronouns ivho, whom^ that 
or which, are used in an English sentence, which is not interrogative, 
and refer to a substantive expressed before : as, — the young lady who 
sings; the children who are amiable; the gentlemen wb.om I have 
seen ; &c. ; who, that and ivhich, are expressed in French by qui, for 
the nominative of the following verb, and whom, that or ivhich, by que, 
for its direct object; both qui and que are used with reference to 
persons and things of whichsoever gender and number, and are imme- 
diately placed after the noun to which they relate : as, — the young lady 
who sings, la demoiselle qui chante. The children who are amiable, les 
enfans qui sont aimahles. The gentlemen whom I have seen, les mes- 
sieurs qvEJ'ai vus. 

But who, employed interrogatively for the nominative of the following 
verb : as, — ivho is there ? who has done that ? is construed into French 
by qui or qui est-ce qui : as, — who is there ? qui est la ? or qui est-ce 
qui est Id? — who has done that? qui a fait cela? or qui est-ce qui 
a' fait cela ? 

Whom, likewise used in an interrogative manner for the object of the 
succeeding verb : as, — whom do you call ? ivhom do you speak to ? 
from whom liave you received that news ? is also expressed by qui, 
but never by qui est-ce qui, or que: as, — whom do you call? qui 
appelez-vous ? and not qui est-ce qui or que appelfz-vous ? — whom do 
you speak to ? a qui parlez-vous ? and not a qui est-ce qui, &c., from 
whom have you received that news ? de qui avez-vous regu cette nou- 
velle ? and not de qui est-ce qui, &c. 

Whose, employed in an interrogative manner before a substantive 
followed by a tense of the verb to he, signifying either to belong to or 
whose turn it is to do anything : as, — whose book is this ? whose turn 
is it to speak ? is expressed in French by a qui, before the correspond- 
ing tense of the verb etre : as, — whose book is this? a qui est ce livre ? 
Whose turn is it to speak ? a qui est-ce a parler ? 

Which, followed by the preposition of, and used to ask which person 
or thing out of several, or when, without being followed by of, it is used 
relatively to a noun going before : as, — which of your sisters ? — to 
which of these flowers do you give the preference ? — from which of 
your brothers have you heard ? &c. — is expressed in French by lequel, 
laquelle, lesquels or lesquelles ; duquel, de laquelle, desquels or 



OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. '75 

desquelles ; auquel, a laquelle, auxquels or auxquelles : as, — which 
of your sisters ? laquelle de vos sosurs ? to which of these flowers do 
you give the preference ? a laquelle de ces fleurs donnez-vous la pre- 
ference? from which of your brothers have you heard ? duquel de lyos 
freres avez-vous regu des nouvelles ? 

Which, followed by the preposition o/, as in the above sentences, is 
also sometimes expressed by quel est celui de or quelle est celle de^ 
before the substantive following, with one of the relative pronouns qui, 
que or dont, &c., before the next verb, according as the relative pronoun 
stands for its nominative, or its direct or indirect object : as, — which of 
your brothers has done that ? quel est celui de vos freres qui a fait 
cela? which of these ladies do you like best, quelle est celle de ces 
dames que vous aimez le mieux ? 

When lohat, coming before a substantive, or before a tense of the 
verb to be, followed by a substantive, is used either by way of interro- 
gation, or to express satisfaction, pleasure, or astonishment : as, — what 
lesson have you learnt ? — lohat pleasure ! what are her motives ? it is 
expressed in French by quel, quelle, quels or quelles : as, — what 
lesson have you learnt? quelle legon avez-vous apprise ? what pleasure ! 
quel plaisir ! what are her motives ? quels sont ses motifs 1 

What, followed by a or an, either immediately before a substantive 
alone, or before an adjective followed by a substantive, and used also 
to express pleasure, satisfaction, or astonishment, is likewise exjDressed 
by quel ! quelle ! quels ! or quelles ! and a or an is left out : as, — What 
a rogue! quel coquin! What a fine lady! quelle belle dame ! 

But what, used immediately before a verb, in the beginning of an 
interrogative sentence, in the sense of what thing ? as, — what does he 
say ? what are you doing there ? is construed into French by que? or 
qu'est-ce que ? with this difference that, should ^if<? be used, the succeed- 
ing verb must be followed by its nominative; whereas, if qu^est-ce que? 
be employed, the verb is usually preceded by its nominative: as, — 
what do you say ? que dites-vous? or qit^est-ce que vous dites? what 
are you doing there ? que faites-vous Id ? or qu^est-ce que vous 
faites Id ? 

Wliat, forming an interrogative sentence of itself, as when one is not 
exactly certain of the thing which the person speaking has said, is ex- 
pressed in French by <yz<o«? ov comment? as, — what? quoi? or comment? 

What, depending on a preposition, whether the preposition imme- 
diately precedes what, or comes after the verb by which it is governed, 
is likewise expressed hy quoi: as, — what are you thinking of ? a quoi 
pensez-vous ? what does he complain of? de quoi seplaint-il? as if 
it were in English — of what think you? of ivhat complains he? 

When whose, without being used in an interrogative manner, is fol- 
lowed by a substantive, which is either the nominative or direct object 
of the succeeding verb : as, — God, whose decrees are eterncd ; God, 
WHOSE works we admire ; it is expressed in French by dont, for all 

E 2 



16 OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

sorts of objects of whichsoever gender and number. The same order 
which exists in the Enghsh sentence is retained in the French, if the 
substantive following lohose be the nominative of the next verb, as in 
the first of the above examples ; but, if it be its direct object, as in the 
second, it is then placed after the verb. In either case, the article le, 
la, or les, must be placed before the substantive : as, — God, whose 
decrees are eternal, Dieu, dont les decrets sont tternels. God, whose 
works we admire, Dieu, dont nous admirons les ouvrages ; as if it 
were in English, — God, of whom the decrees are eternal ; God, of 
whom we admire the ivorks. 

But if the substantive following whose should be the object of a pre- 
position expressed, or governed by a verb requiring one in French : as, — 
he is a man to whose honour I dare not trust : God, lohose laws all 
men should obey; the tree, on whose houghs those trophies hung ; 
whose should then be expressed by de qui, and sometimes by duquel, 
de laquelle, desqiiels or desquelles, with reference to persons or per- 
sonified objects; but never by de qui, with reference to inanimate things, 
— duquel, de laquelle, desquels or desquelles, being then always used. 
De qui or duquel, de laquelle, desquels and desquelles, must follow 
the substantive which whose precedes in English, and the preposition 
on which that substantive depends, comes first, although it frequently 
follows the verb in English : as, — he is a man to whose honour I dare 
not trust ; c^est un homme a Phonneur de qui je n^ose me Jier. God, 
whose laws all men should obey, Dieu, aux lois de qui tous les hommes 
doivent oheir. The tree, on whose boughs those trophies hung, Parbre, 
aux branches duquel ces trophees etaient suspendus ; as if it were in 
English — he is a man to the honour ofivhom I dare not trust ; God, to 
the laws of ivhom all men should obey ; the tree, to the houghs of 
lohich those trophies hung. 

Of whojii or of loJiich, coming after a substantive w^hich is also 
either the nominative or direct object of the following verb : as, — there 
nre roses, the smell of icliich is very agreeable ; it is a disease, the 
nature of which the doctors do not know ; is expressed in French, like 
the pronoun whose, by dont, for all sorts of objects of whichsoever 
gender and number, placing the substantive after dont, if it be the 
nominative of the following verb, as in the first of the examples just 
quoted; but after the verb, if it be its direct object, as in the second 
example. In any case, dont must precede the verb : as, — there are roses, 
the smell of which is very agreeable, voild des roses dont Vodeur est 
tres-agreable. It is a disease, the nature of which the doctors do not 
know, c'^est une maladie dont les medecins ne connaissent pas la 
nature ; as if it were in English — there are roses of lohich the smell 
is very agreeable ; it is a disease of icliich the doctors do not knoio 
the nature. 

Should of whom or of loliich come after a substantive, either depend- 
ing on a preposition, or governed by a verb requiring one in French : 



OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 77 

as, — the ladies for the sake of whom / sang; it was a sentence, to 
the rigour of which he could not submit ; of ivhom is then expressed 
by de qui or duquel, de laquelle, desquels or desquelles, with refe- 
rence to persons or personified objects; and of which, by duquel, de 
laquelle, desquels or desquelles, with reference to things, but never 
by dont. In this case, the construction of the sentence runs the same 
in French as in English : as, — the ladies for the sake of whom I sang, 
les dames pour V amour de qui, or desquelles, je chantai. It was 
a sentence, to the rigour of which he could not submit, c'^etait unc sen- 
tence, a la rigueur de laquelle il ne pouvait se soumcttre. 

If whom, that or ivhich, depend on a verb governing the preposition 
de in French : as, — the person whom / speak of; the advantages 
WHICH you enjoy ; the circumstances which, you mention; they are 
expressed, like lohose, of whom or of which, by dont for all sorts 
of objects, and the preposition de required by the French verb 
is left out, as also the preposition on which they depend in English : 
example, — the person whom I speak of, la personne dont je parle. 
The advantages which you enjoy, les avantages dont vous jouissez. 
The circumstances which you mention, les cir Constances dont vous 
faites mention ; because we say — par lev de ; — j'ouir de ; — faire men- 
tion de. 

Should the verb governing whom, that or which, require a after it 
in French, instead of de : as, — the j^erson luJiom I trusted has deceived 
me; it is a misfortune ivhich I did not expect: whom is then ex- 
pressed by a QUI, with reference to both persons and personified objects, 
and sometimes, also, by auquel, a laquelle, auxquels or auxquelles, 
according to the gender and number of the substantive; but ivhich and 
that, referring to inanimate things, are always construed by auquel, 
a laquelle, auxquels or auxquelles : as, — the person whom I trusted 
has deceived me, la personne a qui, or a laqiielle, je me fiais ni'a 
trompe. It is a misfortune which I did not expect, c'^est un malheur 
auquel je ne m"* attend ais pas ; because the verbs se Jier and s\xttendre 
govern the preposition u. 

Whom, preceded by the preposition from, and used with reference to 
persons, is always expressed by de qui, and never by dont : as, — the 
person from whom I have received that information, la personne de qui 
j^ai repu cette nouvelle ; and not dont. 

Dont can never be used to ask a question : whenever, therefore, of or 
from whom or which is employed interrogatively, it must be expressed 
in French by de qui, (with reference to persons only,) and by duquel, 
de laquelle, desquels or desquelles, with reference either to persons or 
things, if depending on a verb which governs the preposition de in 
French: as, — from whom have you received this letter ? de qui avez,- 
vous regu cette lettre ? and not dont. Of which of them do you speak? 
Ti\jQi\j¥.i. parlez-vous? and not c/o;?^ ; because the verbs recevoir and 
parler govern the preposition de. 



78 OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

Observe. — When the relative pronouns whorn^ that or which., depend 
on a preposition, which is to be construed into French by any other 
preposition than de or a, they are then expressed by qui^ and sometimes 
by lequel, laquelle, lesquels or lesquelles, with reference to persons or 
personified objects ; but they are always construed by lequel, laquelie, 
lesquels or lesquelles, with reference to things, and never by qui : as, — 
the child on whom I fell, V enfant sur qui je tombai. The Palladium, in 
which the Trojans had a particular confidence, was a statue of Minerva, 
le Palladium, dans lequel les Troyens avaient une conjiance particu- 
liere, etait une statue de Minerve ; and not dans qui, &c. 

Repetition of the Relative Pronouns. 

General Rule. — Whenever qui stands for the nominative, and que 
or dont, &c., for the object of two or more verbs following each other in 
a sentence, they are repeated before each verb in French, although ivho, 
whom, that or which, may be used before the first verb only in English, 
and understood before those which succeed : as, — she is a young lady 
who is handsome, sings w^ell, plays on several instruments, and is 
admired by everybody, c'est une demoiselle qui est belle, qui chante 
Men, qui joue de plusieurs instrumens, et qui est admiree de tout le 
monde. He is a man whom I know and respect, c^est un Jiomme queje 
connais et que je respecte. 

Taste and perspicuity are, however, in many instances, the best guides 
for the repetition or non-repetition of the pronouns. Qui, for instance, 
ought not to be repeated in the following sentence : the man who likes 
the country and inhabits the town is not happy, Phomme qui aime la 
campagne et habite la ville nest point heureux ; and not Phomme qui 
aime la campagne et qui habite la ville, &c. 

Whom, that and which, are frequently understood in English ; but 
their equivalents que, dont, a qui, &c., must always be expressed in 
French : as, — she is a lady I love, c^est une dame quE j^aime ; and not 
c'^est une dame j"* aime. 

Observe. — The relative pronouns cannot be separated in French, as 
they are sometimes in English, from the prepositions by which they are 
governed ; they must always be preceded by them : as, — the young lady 
v/hom I was speaking to, la demoiselle a qui je parlais ; and not — la 
demoiselle qui or que je parlais a. 

ESSAY XIX. 

The gentleman who is at the window. — Tlie lady who (has just gone out). — 
monsieur fenetre dame vient de sortir 

The bird which sings on that tree is very fine. — (It is) the young- man whom 

oiseau chanter Si/r arbre C'est jeune 

you recommended to* me. — The apples which you have (bought) are all 

avez recommander m' fomme achetees 

rotten. — (Send me hack) the dictionary which I lent you. — Children who 
pozirries Renvoyez-moi dictionnaire at prete Enfant 



OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 79 

are obedient are loved (by everybody).— Who has given you that ?— Whom 

obtissant aimer de tout le monde donner 

have yoxi met in the street ?— Whom (are you going) to* write to ?— Wliom 

renconirer ^vous ^allez- tcrire 

have you (received) these letters from ? — Whom do* you wish to ^speak to ? — 

regit lettre desirer par/er 

W^hose house is this? — ^WTiose gloves are these? — W^hich of your brothers 
maison gant frere 

(learns) French ? — To which of these houses do* you wish to* go ? — From which of 
apprend Frangais voidez- idler 

his sisters has he heard ? (There is) red and white wine, 

scein- recevoir des noitveflei Voila h'oiige ^ *di( vin b/anc ^vi/i 

which will you have- ?— What fault has she (committed), (that she should be 
duquel commise pour fa 

punished so severely) ?— What is the news to-day?— — What are her 

punir n sivirement sont jiourellesf. pi. aifjourd'' hui 

motives ?— What satisfaction !— To what hotel do* you go? Wliat grammar 

motif •- hotel idler De 

do* you (use)? What have I done ?— What does* he (want)?— What 

vouz sen'ez-vous fait veut- 

was* she (telling) you ?— What were* they (doing) there ?— What have you 

disait- faisaieut- 

done with your money ? — In what have I neglected to fulfil my duty ? — What 

de En neyliger de remplir devoir 

(do they charge her) with ? — What does- his brother (apply liimself) to ? — What 

/' accuse-t-on de is'appHque-t-il 

do* they aim at ? — Tlie man, whose genius is grand and sublime like nature. . . . 

riser genie —— comme 

Tire Lady, whose wit and talents you admired (so much) — Napoleon, 

*esprit ^ ^talent ^ imp. '^admirer ^tant 
whose greatness of soul is* so much (praised), and to whose valour the French 

"^grandeur ^ *^ ame '^tant ^on^rante 

owe so many victories, died at forty-five years of age. — The man, whose 

devoir iant de est niort ^ ^ o z ip 

conduct is regular, and whose actions are upright, is a hundred times 

conduite regulier irrtprockahle 

happier than he who passes his life in wantonness and iniquity. — She is a 
cehd dissipation C 

woman to whose caprices I (shall never submit) We have some foreign 

ne 7ne souniettrai jamais ttranger 

flowers, the smell of which is very sweet. (Is not that) the young lady of 

f\eur odeur ctgr table N'esi-ce pas lit demoiselle 

whom your mother complains ? — Providence, without the assistance of (whom) 
se plaindre sans secours laquelle 

we (cannot) succeed The daughter of Minos gave a thread to 

Tie pouvons reussir pret. def donner Jil 

Theseus, (by means) of which he (went out) of the labyrinth. — Tlie Alps, on 
Thisie au moyen sortit labyrinthe Alpes sur 

the summit of which reign perpetual snow and ice, present, 

sommet rtgner perpituel des neiges f pi. des glaces f. pi. presenter 



80 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

at sunset, the most striking and magnificent spectacle the eye 

au soleil couchcmt imposant magnifiqve que 

(ever "beheld). The person whom you (pitied so much) is dead. — The good 

ait jamais contemple dont aviez d piiie mort 

reputation which he enjoj's — Have you seen the house which I mentioned to 

jouir vu ai par/e 

you ? — The money I wanted was for the relief of that unfortunate 

dont avais besoi/i imp. sotdagement malheureux 

family (That is) what I wanted to* speak to you ahout. The person whom I 

^voiia ^qiioi * ^voidais '' ^ ^de 

trusted (the most) has deceived me. (It is) a misfortune which I did not 

le plus tromper Cett malheur 

expect. — The ladies from whom I received that information are gone to 

icdtendre pret. itidef. recevrAr nouvelle cdltes en 

America. — Idleness is a vice to which (young people) are (very much) inclined. 

Amtnque Paresse jeunes gens frts- enclin 

— If I had known the deplorable situation to which she is reduced, I should 

avais su ttat rtduit ^ 

have lent her some money. — The studies he applies himself to are not very 
^avoir '^piveter Vui argent ttude s^appliquer tres- 

difficult. — It is the gentleman I was running after. — London and Paris are two 
difficile C'est monsieur courais apres 

large stages, on which men are always masked. Who goes there ? Whom 

grand thtdtre sur masqui va Id 

shall I apply to ? — What a* shocking accident ! — What is your opinion on 

s'adresser terrible avis 

that affair ? — What are* you doing there ? — Is the exercise, which I gave 

affaire fuites- ^E^t-il ^ ^tkeme ^ * ^ai donne 

you to write, too difficult ? The wine we drank yesterday was not very 

^ ■^u ^ ^*^lrop difficile vin bunies hier imp. 

good. (She is) a young lady who sings well, plays on several instruments, 

Ced demoiselle chanter jouer de plusieurs 

and is admired by every body. (Is not) that man unhappy Avho likes the 

admirer de ^ N' est-il pas ^ ■* "^malheureux aimer 

town and inhabits the country ? 
habiter campagne 



LESSON XX. 

Of Indefinite Pronouns. 

Indefinite pronouns are words which we use to denote persons and 
things in an indefinite manner. They are the following : — 

One, people, they, On. 

Whoever, "j 

Whosoever, \Quicotique ; qui que ce soit qui: this last governs the 

Any one who or that, j subjunctive. 

Any body who or that, J 

Whomsoever [ ^"^ ^^'^ "^ *°'^ 5^*'^' "^^'^^^ *^^^ succeeding verb in 

' \ the subjunctive mood. 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 



81 



Somebody, 
Some one, 
Any body. 
Any one. 

Each, 

Every body. 
Every one, 

Everj^, 

No body. 
No one. 
Not any body. 
Not any one. 

No, 

None, 

Not one. 
Not any, 

Nothing, 

Not any thing-. 

Nothing at all. 
Nothing whatever 

The same. 

Many, 
Several, 

Such, 

Such a one, 

Som ', 
Any, 



Whatever, 
"NVhatsoeverj 



However, 
Howsoever, 
Though ever so much. 
Though ever so little. 
Let ever so. 

Whatever, 

Whatsoever, 

W^hichsoever, 

All, 

All the. 

The whole of, 

The whole. 



Qiielqii'im, quelqu^une. 

Chaciin. chaciine. 
Tout le monde. 



Chaqi<e ; tons le^, toides les ; tout, toide. 

^Personne. 

Nul, nuUe ; aucim, aticune. 
Anciin, aucv.ne. 



\Pas im, pas une. 
\Rien. 



or what 

[sot; 



hat- \jRien 
v cr , J 



(hi tout. 



Le meme, la ineme, ies mimes. 
\Plusieurs. 



and, sometimes, que'conque, 






Tel, telle; tels,telles. 

Un tel, une telle. 

■> Quelque, quelques ; 
J qttelconqties. 

Quelqhe, quelques, before a substantive, with qzic 
before the following verb, which is put in the 
subjunctive mood; and, also, quel que, quelle que, 
quels que, quelle^ que, in two words, before a tense 
of the verl) etre, which is likewise put iu the 
subjunctive mood. 

Quelque and tout, indeclinable, before an adjective, 
or a participle, with que before the next verb> 
which is put in the subjunctive mood after 
quelque, and in the indicative after tout. 

Quelque chose que; quoi que ce soif que; quoi que ;- 
with the succeeding verb iu the subjunctive 
mood, if depending on these words. 

Tout, toute ; tous, toutes. 

•■ Tout le, toute la ; tous les, toutes ies. 

Le tout. 

E 5 



82 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

All that, 1 yr^^^^ ^^ ^^- ^^^^ ^^ ^^_ 

Every thing that, j ^ ^ 

Another, Uti autre, tine autre. 

Others, Les autres ; and autrui after a preposition. 

Each other, \L\m P autre, Ptme P autre ; les tins, les autres, les 

One another, J tmes les autres. 

Uun et P autre, Pune et P autre ; les uns el les autres, 



Both, 

One and another^ 



[ 



les vnes et les autres ; tous les deux, toutes les deux ; 
and tous deux, toides deux. 

^mi on Pautre, Pmie ou P autre ; les uns ou les autres, 
les vnes ou les autres. 

Ni Pun ni Pautre, ?ii Pune ni Pautre ; ni les mis fii les 
autres, ni les unes ni les autres. 



Either, f 

Neither, | 

General Rule. — Whenever the pronouns one, ive, you, they, and 
people, are used in an indeterminate sense, as in these sentences, — one 
says ; people say ; they say ; we are not alivays happy ; one is not 
always young and handsome ; they fought like desperate men ; &c., 
they are expressed in French by on, which always requires the verb of 
which it is the nominative, in the third person singular of the active voice, 
and the adjective or participle which may refer to it, (viz. to on,') in the 
singular masculine, if reference be made to men, and in the feminine 
singular, if to women ; but in the plural, either masculine or feminine, 
according to the sense, if including an idea of plurality : as, — one says, 
people say, they say, on dit ; we are not always happy, on n'est pas 
toujours heureux ; one is not always young and handsome, on n'est 
pas toujours jeune et jolie ; they fought like desperate men, on se 
battit en desesperes. This pronoun is likewise used to express all inde- 
finite and general expressions of reports : such as, — it is said, it is 
reported, on dit ; and all passive and indeterminate phrases : as, — I was 
told of it yesterday, on me le dit hier ; he has been informed of it, 
on le lui a mande. 

When one is not employed in an indefinite sense, but is used by way 
of distinction, as when, speaking of two boxes, we say : — in one you 
will find books, and in the other money ; — it is expressed in French by 
run or rune, according to the gender ; and they, referring to a substan- 
tive or pronoun plural going before, by ils or elles, according as the sub- 
stantive or pronoun is masculine or feminine. We is also expressed by 
nous, and you by vous, when not taken in an indefinite sense : as, — you 
will receive two boxes : in one you will find books, and in the other 
money, vous recevrez deux holies : dans Vune vous trouverez des livres, 
et dans Pautre de r argent. I have invited them, but they will not come, 
je les ai invites, mats ils ne veulent pas venir. We shall go, nous 
irons ; &c. 

Whenever also a verb, being used in the passive voice, is not taken in 
an indeterminate sense, but is followed by the preposition hy and a 
substantive particularising it: as, — / was told hy Mrs. L*** that ; 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 83 

he was attacked by four thieves ; she was run over by a cart or horse ; 
&c., the pronoun on cannot be used, but the verb is sometimes expressed 
by changing the passive voice into the active, using the substantive 
following for its nominative, and leaving out the preposition by ; and, 
sometimes, the passive voice is used in French as in English, if the verb 

and sense will admit of it : as, — I was told by Mrs. L**** that , 

Madaine L*** me dit que He was attacked by four thieves, il fut 

attaque par quatre voleurs. She was run over by a cart or horse, une 
charrette ou un cheval lui passa sur te corps ; &c. 

Observe. — Von is used instead of on, after et, si, ou, to avoid the 
harsh sound which would result from the meeting of these words with 
on; thus we say — et Von, si Von, ou Von ; and not et on, si on, ou on : 
as, — SI l'on faisaii la paix, j'irais en France, if peace were to be 
made, I should go to France, and not si on faisait ; &c. 

Von is also employed in lieu of on, after que, if the next word begins 
with c or q, for the like purpose of avoiding the harsh sound which would 
result from the meeting of que with on in this case : as, — ce que l'on 
conpoit bien s'exprime clairement ; and not ce qu'on conpoit bien, &c. 

But on must always be used after et, si, ou, que, when the succeeding 
word is one of the pronouns le, la, les, lui, leur, or any other word with 
which Pon would form a disagreeable sound : as, — on le lui a dit, he 
has been told of it ; and not l'on le lui a dit. 

On is in general to be preferred to Von ; and on must be used at the 
beginning of either a whole sentence or of a part of it : as, — on aime 
une femme aimable, on la cherit, on Vadore, we love an amiable 
w^oman,we cherish and adore her ; and not l'on aime une femme aimable, 
l'on la cherit, l'on Padore. 

On and Poji can only be used for the nominative of the verb : they 
precede it in affirmative and negative sentences ; but in an interrogative 
sentence, o)i alone can be used for the nominative of the verb, and it is 
placed after the verb in a simple tense, and after the auxiliary in a com- 
pound one ; and when the verb ends with a vowel in the third person 
singular, a t. with a hyphen on each side of it, is put between the verb 
and on : as, — que fera-t-on? what will be done. 

On or ron is generally repeated in French before every verb of which 
it is the nominative, although the expression equivalent to it in English 
may, when several verbs follow each other in a sentence, be used before 
the first only, and understood before those v\^hich succeed. The con- 
junction a?icl, which is used before the last verb in such a case in English, 
is elegantly suppressed in French : as — people love their children, caress 
and often spoil them, on aime ses enfans, on les car esse, on les gate 
souvent. 

Aucun, nul, ni Pun ni Pautre, pas un, or their feminine aucune, 
nulle, ni Pune ni Pautre, pas une, as also personne and rien, require 
ne before the verbs of which they are the nominatives or objects, and 
the adjectives or participles which refer to them are put in the masculine 



84 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

singular, if reference be made to men, and in the feminine singular, if to 
women : as, — I say nothing, je ne dls rien ; nobody told you so, per- 
Sonne ne vous a dit cela ; &c., always putting the verb in the third per- 
son singular, if any one of these pronouns be its nominative. 

For further explanations on this subject, see the Syntax, on the article 
of Indefinite Pronouns. 

ESSAY XX. 

Is one well attended there ? Yes; very well. — One is always better (at 
^Est^ ■* her-vi ^y ires-bien mieux chez 

home) than elsewhere. — You will receive two parcels : in one you will find a 
soi qi^ ailleurs recevoir paquet 

hill of exchange, and in the other two (hank-notes.)— 1 have heen told by 

iettre change billets de bunque 

Mr. L** that your mother is much better. — My father was attacked by 

&e 'porter beaucoi/p mieux attaquer par 

four thieves, in returning home, ' last night. — His sister was unfortunately 

en retourner chez lid hier au soir malheureusement 

hit by a mad dog. Do* they talk of peace ? People attribute the 

mordiie enrage chien parler paix attribuer 

invention of gunpowder to Berthold Sherward of Friburg. They say 

^a canon ^poudre ■ Fribourg dit 

that the French will not succeed in Spain. — It is reported that the Spaniards 
Fran^ais reussir en Espagne Espagnoi 

have won the last battle. — I was* told (of it) yesterday. — (What news 
gagner dernier bataille me dit le Que dit-on. 

is there) ? None.— (Is it thought) that Marshal N** (will be) acquitted ? No ; 
denouveau Rien Croit-on Martchal N*"^ soit acquit ter 

people think that he will be condemned to death. — If peace were to be made, 

C7'oit condamner a mort 

I should go to France. — We learn better what we understand, than what we 
en apprend ce que comprend que 

(do not). Do that, or (you will be punished). — She has been* informed 

ne comprend pas Faites Von vous punira Lui mander 

(of it) Bring your papers, and they will be* examined. False reports 

le Apporfer on les examiner *Faux ^uruit 

are* often circulated. W'hat do* they say in England of the Spanish 

2 '^fait^cou7'ir Que en Angleterre '^d'' Espagne 

war ? (I shall have some fruit sent) from the country. — W^e love an amiable 

^guerre On nUenverra du fruit campagne 

woman, we cherish and* adore her. — Somebody told me so. — W'ell ! whoever 

chair adorer ^ ^a dit '^ '^f Eh bien I ^ 

told you so was wrong.— Has any body written (to him)?— Every body 
*a dit '^ V avaii tort ^A-t-il ^ *tcrit Vui 

believes it.— Nobody (came here) to-day.— We have seen none of his friends. 
croit le * ^ir^n'estS'enu ami 

She knows nothing. — Every one has his own* manner of (thinking and acting.) 

sait maniere penser et d'agir 

Every country has its laws and customs. — No man is free from error. — 

Chaque pays loi ses usage exempt erreur 



OF VERBS. 85 

(There was not) a single lady. — Tlie same thing does* not please at all times. — 

// rCy avait pas seid dame chose plait en temps 

Many people say so. — He does nothing. — \Vlien we apply ourselves to several 
^disent Ve fait on s'appliquer a 

sciences at once, we seldom succeed in any. Such or such a* thing. 

a lafais ^rarement ^riushir dans auciin chose 

Whatsoever merit he may have, he will never succeed. "Whatever 

■nitrite sub.pr. 

ser\'ices you have rendered me, I have been thankful (for them). 

'— stib.pret. rendus ^ ^ * '^reconnaissant ^e« 

"Whatever your birth and elevation may be, you ought not to* 

^ ^ ^naissance ^ ^votre iltvaiion sub. pr. -elre devoir 

despise any body. However foolish fashions may be, people follow 

mtpriser per^onne ^ ^ou *mode sub.pr. "^etre suit 

them Whatever may happen, give me notice (of it). All the 

Qiioi qti' siib.pr. ar river donner in^ ^avis ^en 

ladies were so well (dressed). — Were all their friends there ? — All that 

imp. mises ^Etaient-ils i 2 a 4^ 

she saj^s is not true. — Do* not speak ill of others. — (Another) would 
dit vrai mul nuUe autre personne 

not have behaved in that manner. They will both come. Either 

se comporter de manicre "■^tuus les deux ^vieudront * 

of* you* can render me that service. — Neither of* them* knows 

^vous ^pouvez rendre service ^ ^ils ^ne havent 

what to* do. 
*qu€ '^faire 



LESSON XXI. 

Of Verbs. 

Verbs are words by which we denote the actions or state of persons 
or things ; or, again, verbs are words the principal use of ivhich is to 
signify ajfirmation. 

Verbs change their forms to agree with their nommatives. Particular 
attention must, therefore, be paid, when a verb is to be used, to ascertain 
the number and person of its nominative, that the verb may be made to 
agree with it. 

There are five kinds of verbs, namely : — the active^ the passive, the 
neuter, the reflective, and the unipersonal. 

Active verbs express an action which an agent, called the nominative 
or subject, performs on an object or regimen, without the help of a pre- 
position : as, — Pierre ainie Sophie, Peter loves Sophia. 

Passive verbs are those of which the nominative or subject is affected, 
in some particular manner, by an agent : as, — Louise estaimee de Paul, 
Louisa is loved by Paul. 

Neuter verbs are of two kinds in French : 1. Those the nominative 
of which performs an action that either is or can be directed towards an 
object or term with the help of a preposition : as, — il nuit a ma repuia- 



86 OF VERBS. 

Hon, he injures my reputation. 2. Those which express an action per- 
formed by their nominative, but which action cannot be directed towards 
an object, or, in other w^ords, — those which express the state, situation, 
or manner of being or existence of their nominative or subject : as, — je 
dors, I sleep ; j^existe, I exist. 

Reflective verbs express an action that falls on their nominative or 
subject, which is then represented in its function as object, by one of the 
governed personal pronouns me, te, se, nous, vous : as, — je me flatte, I 
flatter myself; tu te fiattes, thou flatterest thyself, &c. 

Unipersonal verbs, otherwise called impersonal, are verbs which are 
only used in the third persons singular of their different tenses : as, — ^7 
7j a, there is ; il faut, it is necessary ; il importe, it is of importance. 

Defective verbs are not included in the division of yerhs just given, as they are 
only those in which certain tenses or persons, not admitted by use, are wanting. 

Of Number and Persons in Verbs, 

There are two numbers in verbs as in nouns : the singular and the 
plural. The singular, when a single person or thing performs the action 
expressed by the verb : as, — I sing, ye chayite ; thou walkest, tu marches; 
&c. The plural, when two or more persons or things concur in the 
same action: as, — we sing, nous chantons ; they sleep, Us dorment. 

In each number there are three persons : the first, the second, and the 
third. The first is the person who speaks ; the second, the person spoken 
to ; and the third, the person spoken of. 

There are three pronouns to represent these three persons : — I, je ; 
thou, tu ; he, she, or it, il or elle, for the singular ; we, nous ; ye or you, 
vous ; they, ils or elles, for the plural; but vous is likewise used for the 
singular, when referring to one person only, as before explained. 

All substantives, either common or proper, are of the third person. 

Observe. — A word is always ascertained to be a verb, when one of the 
above pronouns can be prefixed to it. Lire is, therefore, a verb ; because 
we can say : — je lis, tu lis, il ou elle lit, &c. 

Of Moods. 

We call moods the different manners of using a verb, in order to 
express the different affections of our mind, or the various ways in which 
an action is performed or suffered. 

A verb may be used in five different manners, namely, — in an indefi- 
nite, positive, conditional, imperative, and subordinate manner ; which 
constitute five moods in verbs, called — the infinitive, the indicative, the 
conditional, the imperative, and the subjunctive. 

The infinitive is so termed because it expresses a thing or action in an 
indefinite manner, without any reference to number or person : as, — • 
parler, to speak ; finir, to finish ; recevoir, to receive. 

The indicative affirms in a direct, positive, and absolute manner : as, — 
je connais ces dames, I know these ladies. 



OF VERBS. 87 

The conditional denotes that a thing or action, either would take or 
would have taken place, depending on a condition : as, — je vous ren- 
dials service, si je le pouvais, I would render you service, if I could. 
II serait venu, sHl avail fait beau temps, he would have come, if it had 
been fine weather. 

The imperative is used for commanding, exhorting, entreating, or 
permitting : as, — venez ici, que je vous parle, come here, that I may 
speak to you. 

The subjunctive represents a thing under a condition, motive, wish, 
or supposition, and is dependent on a conjunction : as, — quoiqu'il 
pleuve, je veux qv'^ils viennent, though it rain, I wish them to come. 

Of the Tenses or Times. 

Tenses are the distinctions of time, or, in other words, the different 
forms which a verb assumes to express the present, past, or future. 

Tenses may be divided into simple and compound. The simple 
tenses are those which consist of a single verb : as, — ecrire, to write; 
j^ecris, I write. The compound consist of two or more verbs, being 
formed with the different tenses of either the verb avoir, to have, or etre, 
to be, and the past participle of another verb : as, — j^ai parle a M. C**; 
I have spoken to Mr. C**. 

There are six tenses in the infinitive mood : — the present, the pre- 
terit, the present participle, the present participle compound, the past 
participle, and the participle future. 

The indicative has eight tenses : — the present, the imperfect, the pre- 
terit definite, the preterit indefinite, the preterit anterior definite, the 
pluperfect, the future simple, and the future anterior. 

The conditional has two : — the present and the past. 

The imperative has only one tense, which is tiihtr present or future. 

The subjunctive has four tenses : — the present, the Imperfect, the 
preterit, ?indi the pluperfect. 

For a full explanation of the use of the tenses, see page 10 and fol- 
lowing, in the large octavo Grammar, in two volumes; but for the cases 
in which the imperfect, and the preterit definite and the indefinite are 
used, refer to the observations under the tenses of the verb avoir, in this 
Grammar, pages 89, 90, and 91. 

Of Conjugations. 

The act of repeating or writing all the moods, tenses and persons of 
a verb, according to their regular combination or arrangement, is called 
conjugating that verb. 

The verbs which undergo the same variations in all their tenses and 
persons are said to belong to the same class or conjugation; that is, to 
be conjugated alike. 

All the verbs of the French language end, in the present of the infini- 
tive mood, in one of these four manners : — er, ir, oir, or re : as, — -parler. 



88 CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 

to speak; jinir, to finish ; recevoir, to receive; and entendre, to hear; 
which constitute four general conjugations, distinguished from each other 
by their respective termination in the present of the infinitive ; and called 
the first, the second, the third, and the fourth conjugation. 

The verbs which follow through all their tenses and persons the varia- 
tions of the verb, which is given as a model of its conjugation, are called 
regular ; whereas those that differ in their variations from the given model 
are irregular. The verbs a?;oi>, to have, and eire, to be, are irregular ; 
and they are exemplified the first only on account of being much used in 
the formation of the compound tenses of other verbs. 

1. Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Avoir, to have, affirmatively. 

Avoir is an auxiliary verb, when it is used in forming the compound 
tenses of other verbs : s.s,—j^aijoue, I have played. In other cases, it 
is an active verb : as, — il a de Vargent, he has money. 

The pupil is particularly recommended to write, from memory, each 
of the verbs separately, after having learnt it ; at least, the two 
auxiliaries avoir and etre ; the four models of the regular conjugations, 
and the models of reflective verbs ; as also aller, to go, and s'^en aller, 
to go away. He will thereby acquire a surprising readiness, not only in 
spelling the verbs, but in using them ; as there is, perhaps, no better 
remembrancer than the eye. 





INFINITIVE MOOD. 


Simple Tenses, 


Compound Tenses, 


PRESENT. 


PRETERIT. 


To have, 
Avoir. 


To have had. 
Avoir eu. 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 


PRESENT PART. COMPOUND. 


Having, 

Ah'cmt.'-^ 


Having had, 
Ayant eu. 


PAST PARTICIPLE. 


PARTICIPLE FUTURE. 


Had, 

Ell, eue ; eiis, cues 


Being about to have, 
Devant avoir. 




INDICATIVE MOOD. 


PRESENT. 


PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 


I have, 
JVu.t 


I have had, 
J^ai eu. 



* Though we write ayant, we pronounce ai-ian, as if it were in English, a-ianj. 
The same is to be observed in all words in which y is used instead of two i's. 
f We write fed and pronounceye. 



CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 



89 



Thou hast, 
Tu as.* 

He has. 

She has, 
E//e a. 

We have, 
Noiis avons. 

You have, 
^Fbusavez. 

They have, 
//* or Elles out. 



Tl'iOu hast had, 
Tu as eu. 

He has had, 
// a eu. 

She has had, 
Elle a eu. 

We have had. 
Nous avons eu. 

You have had, 
Fous avez eu. 

They have had, 
I/s or E/les out eu. 



IMPERFECT. 
I had, 
XTavais.^ 

Thou hadst, 
Tu avais. 



PLUPERFECT. 

I had had, 
J'avais eu. 



Thou hadst had, 
Tu avais eu. 



* The second person singular of every tense, except in the imperative mood, is ter- 
minated with *, in all verbs. The wevhsvou/oi)', pouvoir,va^ou; and prera/oir, however, 
are excepted, as their first and second persons singular of the present of the indica- 
tive take an a: at their terminations : as — vouloir,je veux, tu veux ; poucoir.je peux, or 
hetie):,Je puis, fu peux ; vuloir,je vaux, tu vaux ; prtvaloir,je pi'n'aux, tu privaux. 

f The second person plural of every tense, in all verbs, is terminated with s or 
z : it is terminated with z, when the e, which immediately precedes, is pronounced 
with the sound of a short in English, and with * when the e is not pronounced at 
all : as — vous avez, vous aimez ; vous eutes, vous ai mates, vous re(^xdes, &c. 

Observe. — The preterit indefinite is generally employed in French,- whether the 
preterit or compound of the present be used in English, Avhen we speak of some 
action or thing that has been done, or has happened, in a time which is not yet 
completely over : the time is considered as not being completely over, in French, 
when one of the demonstrative pronouns ce, cct, cette, ces, this, that, these, those, 
either is or can be used before it : as — he paid us this morning, il nous a payes ce 
matin. I have seen him this week, this month, this year, y^ /'ai vu cette semaine, ce 
mois, cette annee, &c.: in these sentences, the preterit imh'fnite is used, because ce 
matin, cette semaine, ce mois, cette annte, are considered as parts of a time which is not 
entirely elapsed. 

The preterit indefinite is also used, in French, when mention is made of an action 
or thing which has taken place in a time that is not specified, although quite past; 
in this case, the compound of the present is- likewise employed in English: as — he 
has travelled much, il a heaitcoup voyage. I have seen him once, jiV Pai vu unefois. 

X J' avais is pronounced /ai-e*, as if it were in English — Tahvay. 

§ Cases in which the Imperfect is used in French. 
General Rule. — The imperfect is used, in French, to represent the actions, 
inclinations, or qualifications ; — the character, condition, or situation of persons 
and things, at some particular time which is past, whether it be specified or not : 
as, — when I was taking an airing j^esterday, I saw a very fine lady, whose features, 
complexion, and dress, united all the graces of Venus, and whose hair, flowing in 
wavy ringlets down her shoulders, was tied with a beautiful riband ; comme je me 
•pTomenaiis hier,je vis une charmante dame, dont les traits, le teint, /7ja6iV, reunissaient 
toutes les graces de Fenus, et dont les longs cheveux, qui descendaient en boucles ondoyantes 
sur ses epaules, etaient attaches avec un superbe ruban. 



90 CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 

He had, He had had, 

// avail. II avait eu. 

She had, She had had, 

Elle avait. Rile avait eu. 

We had, We had had, 

Noiis avians. Nous avians eu. 

You had. You had had, 

Vous aviez. Fous aviez eu. 

They had. They had had, 

lis or Elles avaient. lis or Elles avaient eu. 

The imperfect \s also used: 1st, in mentioning the habits, customs and manners, 
"whether of private individuals or of nations : as — his father went every day to the 
play, son pere allait tous /g-s jours a la comedie. We played at cards every evening, 
wo?/« jouions aux cartes tous les soirs. Running, swimming, hunting, were the favourite 
diversions of the ancient Romans, whilst the women and the old men were intrusted 
with the domestic affairs ; la course, la nage, la chasse etaient les amusemens favoris des 
anciens Romains, tandis que les femmes et les vieillards etaient charges des sains du 
menage. 

2. In describing the character of nations, whether ancient or modern, or of per- 
sons that are dead, though in some cases the preterit definite and the indefinite are 
also used : as — the Romans were very powerful, les Romains etaient tres-puissans. 
Napoleon was a great general, Napoleon etSiit un g7'and general. 

3. In giving the character or describing the qualifications of persons who are still 
living ; and, in this case, if a vague and undetermined period of time be expressed, 
the preterit indefinite may also be used : as — this lady was very beautiful in her 
youth, cette dame etait trts-belle dans sajeunesse ; or, a ete trts-belle, Sec. 

4. When the present participle of a verb is or can be used with was or were, in 
English, instead of the preterit : as — while they endeavoured to. . . . ; that is, — while 
they were endeavouring, ta7idis qu''ils iiichaieni de, &c. 

5. To denote things or actions which are often repeated : as — she was always in 
such a hurry, elle etait toujours si pressee. 

6. The imperfect is likewise used to express any circumstance which happened to 
take place at the same time when an accident, fact, event, or action, occurred. The 
verb denoting the fact, event, action, or accident, in the second part of the sentence, 
is put in the preterit definite, if we allude to a thing which happened in a time now 
quite elapsed; and, in the indefinite, if the time be not yet quite elapsed. The imper- 
fect expresses then a present with respect to something past : as — je passais qvand 
vous tombdtes, I was passing by as you fell ; alluding to a time quite past ; but 
je passais quand vous etes tomht, I was passing by when you fell, refers to a time that 
is not yet quite elapsed ; to-day, for instance. 

. The sentence frequently begins by the fact, event, action, or accident, and 
finishes by the circumstance which took place at the same time : as — il m^appela 
lorsque je passaxs, he called me as I was passing by. 

If we wish to express two circumstances which happened to take place at the 
same time, they must be both put in the imperfect : as — vous dansiez lorscpie je chun- 
iais, you were dancing when I was singing. Lorsque j'' etais a la campagne,je me pro- 
menais tous les jours, when I was in the country, I took a walk every day. 

Finally. — The imperfect is sometimes used after «, (if,) to denote a condition 
or supposition : as — si je cotinaissais vas intentions, je les executerais, if I knew your 
intentions, I would fulfil them. // ne serait pas si miserable, s'il faisait plus d'' atten- 
tion a ses affaires, he would not be so miserable, if he paid more attention to his 
business. 



CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 91 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 

I had^ I had had, 

*/'«/*.f feus eu. 

Thou hadst. Thou hadst had, 

Tu eits. Tu eus eu. 

He had. He had had, 

// eid. II eut eu. 

She had, She had had, 

El/e eut. Elfe eut eu. 

We had, " We had had. 

Nous eum€S.\ Nous eumes\ eu. 

You had. You had had, 

Fbus elites. Fous eutes eu. 

They had. They had had, 

lis or Elles eurent. lis or Elles eurent eu. 

FUTURE SIMPLE. FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

I shall have, I shall have had, 

J^amrti.^ J^aurai eu. 

Thou wilt have, Thou wilt have had, 

Tu auras. Tu auras eu. 

He will have, He will have had, 

// aura. II aura eu. 



* Cases in which the Preterit Dejinite is used in French. 

Gene R AT, Rule. — The preterit definite is used in French to express real definite 
facts or actions of short duration, and entirely done with, finished, completely over, 
and that in a time past, at the distance at least of a day from the time in which 
we speak : as — he fell dead yesterday, il tornba mort hier. The verb tomba mort is in 
the preterit definite, because it expresses an action of short duration, which is done 
with, finished, completely over, and which took place in a time quite elapsed. This 
tense is particularly employed in narrations, whether historical or of daily events. 

Observe. — The definite and indefinite preterits are sometimes indifferently used, 
in familiar conversation, especially when we speak of common events, in the general 
occurrences of life, though the time may be specified and entirely elapsed : as — I 
supped with him lavSt night, ye soupai oxfai soupe hier an soir avec lui. 
f Teus is pronounced J'^<. 

;j: A circumflex accent (') is required over the last vowel of the last syllable but 
one, in the first and second persons plural of the definite and anterior definite pre- 
terits of the indicative, in all verbs, as above. 

^ The following manners of expression being very much used, require particular 
attention : they are formed with the present or imperfect of the verb devoir, in 
French, and the present or imperfect of the verb to be, in English, followed, in 
either language, by the infinitive of a verb. 

1. I am to have, 2. I was to have, 

Je dois avoir. Je devais avoir. 

Thou art to have. Thou wast to have, 

Tu dois avoir. Tu devais avoir. 

He is to have. He was to have, 

// doit avoir. II devaii avoir. 



92 



CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 



She will have, 
El/e aura. 

We shall have, 
Noi/s aurons. 

You will have, 
Vous aurez. 

They will have, 
J Is or Elks auront. 



PRESENT. 



I should have, 
J^aiiruis. 

Thou wouldst have, 
Tu aurais. 

He would have, 
// aurait. 
She v/ould have, 
El7e aurait. 

We should have. 
Nous aurions. 

You would have, 
Vbus auriez. 

They would have, 
lis or Elles auraient. 



She will have had, 
Elle aura eu. 

We shall have had. 
Nous aurons eu. 

You will have had, 
Vous aurez eu. 

They will have had, 
//* or Elles auront eu. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



I should have had, 
J''aurais eu.''- 

Thou v/ouldst have had, 
Tu aurais eu. 

He would have had, 
// aurait eu. 
She would have had, 
Elle aurait eu. 

We should have had. 
Nous aurions eu. 

You would have had, 
Vous auriez eu. 

They wovdd have had, 
lis or Elles auraient eu. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT OR FUTURE. 

No First Person in the Singular. 

Have (thou), Aie. 

Let him have, Quil ait.\ 



She is to have, She was to have, 

Elle doit avoir. Elle devait avoir. 

We are to have. We were to have, 

Noiis devons avoir. Nous devious avoir. 

You are to have. You were to have, 

Vous devez avoir. Vous deiiez avoir. 

They were to have, 
lis or Elles devaient avoir. 
* There are cases in which we also use feusse eu, tu cusses eu, il or elle exit eu ; 
nous eussions eu, vous eussiez eu, ils or elles eussent eu, for the conditional past. A 
circumflex accent is then required over the u, which precedes the t, in the third per- 
son singular. 

f We write quHl ait, and not qu^il aie, (as also qum soit, and not qu^il soie, in the 
third persons singular of the imperative and of the present of the subjunctive of the 
verb etre ;) but these are exceptions to the general rule, which requires the third 
person singular of the imperative, and that of the present of the subjunctive, to be 
terminated with e mute, in all verbs. 



They are to have, 

Ils or Elles doivent avoir. 



CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 



93 



Let her have. 
Let us have, 
Have (ye o?- you), 
Let them have. 



Qu'elle ait. 

Ayons. 

Ayez. 

Quails or Qiiel/es aient 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 



That I have or may have, 
Quej ^aie. 

That thou mayst have, 
Qi^e til (ties. 

That he may have, 
Qu'i/ ait. 

Tliat she may have, 
Qit'elle ait. 

That we may have. 
Que nous ayons. 

That you may have, 
Que vans ayez. 

That they may have, 
Qu'ils or Qu^elles aient. 



PRETERIT. 



That I may have had, 
Quej ^aie eu. 

That thou mayst have had. 
Que tu aies eu. 

That he may have had, 
Qu^i/ ait eu. 

That she may have had, 
Qi^elle ait eu. 

That we may have had. 
Que nous ayons eu. 

That you may have had, 
Que vous ayez eu. 

That they may have had, 
Quails or Qi^elles aient eu. 



[M PERFECT. 

That I might have, 
Que j^eusse. 

Thai thou mightst have, 
Que tu eusses. 

That he might have, 
Qu'il eiit:'^ 

Tliat she might have, 
Qu'elle eut. 

That we might have. 
Que nous eussions. 

Tliat you might have, 
Q^/evous eussiez. 

That they might have, 
Qu^i/s or Qitelles eussent. 



PLUPERFECT. 

That I might have had, 
Quej^eusse eu. 

That thou mightst have had. 
Que tu eusses eu. 

That he might have had, 
Qu'i/ eut * eu. 

That she might have had, 
Qit'elle eut eu. 

That we might have had. 
Que nous eussions eu. 

That you might have had. 
Que vous eussiez eu. 

That they might have had, 
Qii'ils or Qu'elles eussent eu. 



2. Conjugation of Avoir, to have, negatively. 

A verb is used negatively when the word not is employed with it in 
English. Not is expressed in French by ne pas : both these words pre- 
cede the verb in the present of the infinitive ; but, in any other tense, 
either simple or compound, ne, or n\ if the verb begins with a vowel or 
A mute, is placed before the verb in a simple tense, and j9a-s after it; 



* A circumflex accent {") is required over the last vowel which comes before the 
final /, in the third person singular of the imperfect and of the pluperfect of the sub- 
junctive, in all verbs. 



94 



CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 



and ne or 7i' before the auxiliary in a compound one, with pas after it, 
that is to say, between the auxiliary and the participle, as may be seen in 
the following example. If any pronoun should occur as the object of 
the verb, it must be placed between ne and the verb in a simple tense, 
and between ne and the auxiliary in a compound one. 

Not is also expressed by ne point with a verb, as may be seen 
on the subject of the negations. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Simple Tenses. 
PRESENT. 

Not to have, 
Ne pas avoir. 

PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 

Not having, 
Nayant pas. 

PAST PARTICIPLE. 

Had, 

Ei<, eue : ens, eues. 



Compound Tenses. 

PRETERIT. 

Not to have had, 
N avoir pas eu. 

PRESENT PART. COMPOUND. 

Not having had, 
Nayant pas eu. 

PARTICIPLE FUTURE. 

Not being about to have, 
Ne (levant pas avoir. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

I have not, 
Je tHai pas. 

Thou hast not, 
Tu n^as pas. 

He has not, 
// «'rt pas. 

She has not, 
Elle n^a pas. 

We have not. 
Nous navons pas. 

Yo\i have not^ 
Vous rHavez pas. 

They have not, 

lis or Elles ri^ont pas. 

IMPERFECT. 

I had not, 
Je n^avais pas. 

Thou hadst not, 
Tu n^avais pas. 

He had not, 
// n^ avail pas. 

She had not, 
Elle if avail pas. 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

I have not had, 
Je n'ai pas eu. 

Thou hast not had. 
Tit n'as pas eu. 

He has not had, 
// r^a pas eu. 

She has not had, 
Elle ?«'a pas eu. 

We have not had. 
Nous n''avons pas eu. 

You have not had, 
Vous n'avez pas eu. 

They have not had, 
lis or Elles riont pas eu. 

PLUPERFECT. 

I had not had, 
Je n^avais pas eu. 

Thou hadst not had, 
Tti ri'avais pas eu. 

He had not had, 
// ti' avail pas eu. 

She had not had, 
Elle 7t' avail pas eu. 



CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 



95 



We had not, 
Nous n' avians pas. 

You had not, 
P'oi/s n^aviez pas. 

They had not, 

lis or Elfes n'' aval en f pas. 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I had not, 
Je 7i'eus pas. 

Thou hadst not, 
Tu ?i'eus pas. 

He had not, 
// n''eid pas. 

She had not, 
E/le rCeiit pas. 

We had not. 
Nous li'eames pas. 

You had not, 
P^ous iCeutes pas. 

They had not, 

lis or Elles n^eurent pus. 

FUTURE SIMPLE. 

I shall not have, 
*/e )iau)'ai pas. 

Thou wilt not have, 
Tu ti' auras pas. 

He will not have, 
// ytaura pas. 

She will not have, 
Elle rCaura pas. 



We had not had, 

Noiis n' avians pas eu. > 

You had not had, 
Vous n^avisz pas eu. 

They had not had, 

lis or Elles n^avaient pas eu. 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 

I had not had, ^ 

Je 7i^eus pas eu. 

Thou hadst not had, 
Tu ii'eus pas eu. 

He had not had, 
// n^eut pas eu. 

She had not had, 
Elle n'eut pas eu. 

We had not had, 
Nous 71^ e limes pas eu. 

You had not had, 
Fous 71' elites pas eu. 

They had not had, 

lis or Elles 7i^eut'ent pas eu. 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

I shall not have had, 
Je n''au7'ai pas eu. 

Thou wilt not have had, 
Tu 7i'au)'as pas eu. 

He will not have had, 
// 71 aura pas eu. 

She will not have had, 
Elle /i\iura pas eu. 



* 1. I am not to have, 
Je 7ie dois pas avoir. 

Thou art not to have, 
Tu 7ie dois pas avoir. 

He is not to have, 
// ne doil pas avoir. 

She is not to have, 
Elle 7ie doit pas avoir. 

We are not to have, 
Nous ne devo7is pas avoir. 

Ye or you are not to have, 
Foits 7ie devez pas avoir. 

They are not to have, 

lis or Elles ne doivent vas avoir. 



* 2. 1 was not to have, 
Je ne devais pas avoir. 

Thou wast not to have, 
Tu 7ie devai'i pas avoir. 

He was not to have, 
// ne devait pas avoir. 

She was not to have, 
Elle ne devait pas avoir. 

We were not to have. 
Nous 7ie devions pas avoir. 

Ye or you were not to have, 
fous 7ie deviez pas avoir. 

They were not to have, 

lis or Elles ne devaient pas avoir ^ 



96 



CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 



We shall not have, 
NoziS n^ain'ons pas. 

You Avill not have, 
Vmis rHaurez pas. 

They will not have, 
lis or Elles n'auront pas. 



We shall not have had, 
Nous ri'aurons pas eu. 

You will not have had, 
Vovs n^aurez pas eu. 

They will not have had, 
Ih or Elles iCauront pas eu. 



PRESENT. 

I should not have, 
Je rHaurah pas. 

Thou wouldst not have, 
Tu ri'aurais pas. 

He would not have, 
// n^aurait pas. 

She would not have, 
Elle ii'aurait pas. 

We should not have. 
Nous navrions pas. 

You would not have, 
Fbus nauriez pas. 

They wovdd not have, 
J/s or El^es ?i'auraient pas 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PAST. 



I should not have had, 
Je ii'aurais pas eu. 

Thou wouldst not have had, 
Tu Ii'aurais pas eu. 

He would not have had, 
// n^oiti'ait pas eu. 

She would not have had, 
Elle n'aurait pas eu. 

We should not have had, 
Noi/s 7tauno7is pas eu. 

You would not have had, 
Vous iCauriez pas eu. 

They would not have had. 
Us or Elles i{ auraient pas eu. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT OR FUTURE. 



Have not (thou). 
Let him not have. 
Let her n(»t have. 
Let us not have, 
Have not (ye or you), 
Let them not have. 



Naie pas. 

Qu'il 71'ait pas. 

Qu'elle n^axt pas. 

Nayo7iS pas. 

N'ayez pas. 

QuHls or Qu' elles 7i^aieht pas. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

That I have not or may not have. 
Que je fi'aie pas. 

That thou mayst not have, 

Qtfe tu n'aies pas. 

That he may not have, 

Qu''il 71'ait pas. 

That she may not have, 

Qii^elle 71^ ait pas. 

That we may not have. 
Que nous i^aijons pas. 

That you may not have. 
Que vous Tt'ayez pas. 

That they may not have, 
QuHls or Qu^ elles n'aieut pas. 



PRETERIT. 

That I may not have had, 
Queje 7i'aie pas eu. 

That thou mayst not have had, 
Que. tu n'aies pas eu. 

That he may not have had, 
Qu'il 72^ ait pas eu. 

That she may not have had, 
Qu'elle 71'ait pas eu. 

That we may not have had. 
Que nous n^ayons pas eu. 

That you may not have had, 
Q^,'e vous 7i^ayez pas eu. 

That they may not have had, 
Qii'ils or Qu elles 7i\iie7U pas eu. 



CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 



97 



IMPERFECT. 



That I might not have, 

Queje ti'euitse pas. 

That thou mightst not have, 

Que tu n^eusses pas. 

That he might not have, 

QWii rCeut pas. 

That she might not have, 

Qu'elle rHexd pas. 

That we might not have. 
Que nous ii^eussions pas. 

That you might not have. 
Que voiis n'eussiez pas. 

That they might not have. 
Quails or Qu'elles rCeussent pas. 



PLUPERFECT. 

That I might not hare had, 
Queje n'eusse pas eu. 
"That thou mightst not have had. 
Que tu Ti^eusses pas eu. 

That he might not have had, 
Quil ?i'eut pas eu. 

That she might not have had, 
Qi^elle 71! exit pas eu. 
That we might not have had. 
Que nous n'eussions pas eu. 

That you might not have had. 
Que vous Ti' eussiez pas eu. 

That they might not have had, 
Quails or Qiielles rCeussent pas eu. 



3. Conjugation of Avoir, to have, interrogatively. 

To use a verb interrogatively, or to ask questions, it is necessary to 
place the pronoun which serves as nominative to the verb, after the verb 
in a simple tense, and after the auxiliary in a compound one. Both the 
verb and pronoun are united by a hyphen in French, and when a verb 
ends with a vowel in the third person singular of any of its tenses, a t, 
with a hyphen on each side of it, is put between the verb and the pro- 
noun, in order to avoid the harsh sound which would otherwise result 
from the meeting of two vowels. A verb can only be used interroga- 
tively, and interrogatively and negatively, in French, in the different 
tenses of the indicative and conditional moods, as shown hereafter. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Simple Tenses. 



PRESENT. 



H-.ye I, 

Ai-je ? 

Hast thou, 
As-tu ? 

Has he, 

A-t-il ? 

Has she, 
A-t-eUe ? 

Have Ave, 
Avons-nous ? 

Have you, 
Avez-vous ? 

Have they, 
Ont-ils or Ont-el/es ? 



Compound Tenses. 
PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

Have I had, 
Ai-je eu ? 
Hast thou had, 
As-iu eu ? 

Has he had, 
A-t-il eu ? 

Has she had, 
A-t-elle eu ? 

Have we had, 
Avons-nous eu ? 

Have you had, 
Avez^mis eu ? 

Have they had, 
07it-ils or Ont-elles eu ? 



98 



CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 



IMPERFECT. 

Had I, 

Avcds-je ? 

Hadst thou, 
Avais-tii ? 

Had he, 

Avait-il ? 

Had she, 
Avcdt-elle 9 

Had we, 
Avions-nous f 

" Had you, 
Aviezrvoits ? 

• Had they, 
Avcdent-ils or Avment-eiles ? 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

Had I, 

Eus-Je ? 

Hadst thou, 
Etis-iu ? 

Had he, 

Etfi-d/ ? 

Had she, 
Eut-elle ? 

Had we, 
Eumes-nous ? 
Had you, 
Eutes-vous ? 

Had they, 

Eurent-ils or Eurent-elles 9 

FUTURE SIMPLE. 

Shall I have, 
'^Aurcd-je ? 



PLUPERFECT. 

Had I had, 
Avcds-je eu ? 

Hadst thou had, 
Avais-tu eu f 

Had he had, 

Avait-il eu ? 

Had she had, 
Avait-elle eu 9 

Had we had, 
Avio/is-nous eu? 

Had you had, 
Aviez-vous eu 9 

Had they had, 

Avcdent-ils eu or Avcdent-elles eu 9 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 
Had I had, 
Eus-je eu 9 

Hadst thou had, 
Eus-tu eu 9 

Had he had, 
Eut-il eu ? 

Had she had, 
Eut-elle eu 9 

Had we had, 
Eumes-nous eu 9 

Had you had, 
Eutes-vouz eu ? 
Had they had, 
Eurent-ils eu or Eurent-elles eu 9 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

Shall I have had, 
Aurcd-je eu ? 



* ] . Am I to have, 
Dois-je avoir ? - 
Art thou to have, 
Dois-tu avoir 9 
Is he to have, 
Doit-il avoir 9 
Is she to have, 
Doit-elle avoir 9 
Are we to have, 
Devons-not/s avoir 9 
Are ye or you to have, 
Devez-vous avoir 9 
Are they to have, 
DoivenUils or elles avoir 9 



2. Was I to have, 
Devais-je avoir 9 
Wast thou to have, 
Devais-tu avoir 9 
Was he to have, 
Devait-il avoir 9 
Was she to have, 
Devait-elle avoir 9 
Were we to have, 
Devions-nous avoir 9 
Were ye or you to hare, 
Deviez-vous avoir 9 
Were they to have, 
Devaient-ih or eil€» avoir f 



CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 



99 



Wilt thou have, 
Auras-tu ? 

Will he have, 
Aura-t-il ? 

Will she have, 
Aura-t-elle ? 

Shall we have, 
Atirom-nous ? 

Will you have, 
Aurez-voiis ? 

Will they have, 
Auront-ils or Auront-elles ? 



Wilt thou have had , 
Auras-tu eu ? 

Will he have had, 
Aura-t-il eu ? 
Will she have had, 
Aura-t-elle eu 9 
Shall we have had, 
Aurotvi-Twm eu ? 

Will you have had, 
Aurez-vous eu ? 

Will they have had, 
Auront-ils eu or Auront-elles eu 9 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



PRESENT, 



PAST. 



Should I have, 
Aurais-je ? 

Wouldst thou have, 

Aurais-iu ? 

Would he have, 

Aitrait-il ? , 

Would she have, 
Aurait-elle ? 

Should we have, 
Aur ions-nous ? 

Would you have, 
Auriez-vous ? 

Would they have, 
Auraietii-ils or Auraient-elles ? 



Should I have had, 
Aurais-je eu ? 
Wouldst thou have had^- 
Aurais-tu eu ? 

Would he have had, 
Aurait-il eu ? 

Would she have had, 
Aurait-elle eu ? 

Should we have had^ 
Au7'iofis-7ious eu ? 

Would you have had, 
Auriez-vous eu ? 

Would they have had, 
Auraient-ils eu or Auraient-elles eu ? 



4. Conjugation of Avoir, to have, interrogatively and negatively. 

When a verb is used interrogatively and negatively in French, the 
same method is followed as when it is used interrogatively, except that 
ne or ti' is placed before the verb in a simple tense, with pas after it, 
and ne or n' before the auxiliary in a compound one, with pas after it, 
that is, between the auxiliary and the participle. 



Simple Tenses. 
PRESENT. 

Have I not, 
N'ai-Je pas ? 

Hast thou not, 
N^as-tu pas ? 

Has he not, 
N'a-t-ilpasf 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Compound Tenses. 

PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

Have I not had, 
N^ai-je pas eu ? 

Hast thou not had, 
A 'as-/2/ pas eu f 

Has he not had, 
N^a-t-il pas eu? 



F 2 



100 



CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HA.VE. 



Has she not, 
N^a-t-elle pas ? 

Have we not, 
N'avons-nous pas ? 

Have you not, 
N^avez-vous pas ? 

Have they not, 
N'ont-ils pas or N'ont-elles 
pas'? 

IMPERFECT. 

Had I not, 
ISPavais-je pas ? 
Hadst thou not, 
N'avais-tu pas f 

Had he not, 
N'avait-il pas ? 

Had she not, 
N^avdt-elle pas ? 

Had we not, 
JVavions-noi/s pas ? 

Had you not, 
N'aviez-vous pas ? 

Had they not, 

N^avaient-ils pas or N'avaient- 
elles pas f 

TRETERIT DEFINITE. 

Had I not, 

N^eus-Je pas ? 

Hadst thou not, 
N^eus-tu pas ? 

Had he not, 
N'eut-il pas ? 

Had she not, 
JVetd-elle pas ? 

Had we not,' 
N'eumes-nous pas ? 

Had you not, 
N^edtesoom pas 9 

Had they not, 

N^eurent-ils pas or N'eLrent-eiles 
pas ? 

FUTURE SIMPLE. 

Shall I not have, 
* IS^aurai-je pas ? 



Has she not had, 

N''a-t'e?/e pas eii ? 

Have we not had, 
N'avoiis-nous pas eu ? 

Have you not had, 
N'avcz-vous pas eu ? 
Have they not had, 
N^ont-ils pas eu or N'ont-elles 
pas eu? 

PLUPERFECT. 

Had I not had, 
N^avais-j'e j}o.s eu ? 

Hadst thou not had, 
N^avais-tu pas eu? 

Had he not had, 
N^avcdt-il pas eu 2- 
Had she not had, 
N^avait-elle pas eu ? 

Had we not had, 
N'av{ons-7wus pas eu ? 

Had you not had, 

N'aviez-vous pas eu ? 

Had they not had, 
N'avaient-ils pas eu or N'avaient- 
ellespas eu ? 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 
Had I not had, 
N'eus-je pas eu ? 

Hadst thou not had, ■ 
N^eus-tu pas eu f 

Had he not had, 
N'eift-il pas eu? 

Had she not had, 
N'euf-e/^e pas eu ? 

Had we not had, 
N''eumes-nous pas eu ? 

Had you not had, 
N'eutes-vous pas eu ? 

Had they not had, 
N"* eure7it-ils pas eu or N^eurent- 
elles pas e« ? 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

Shall I not have had, 
N^aurai-je pas eu ? 



1. Am I not to have, 

Ne dois-je pas avoir ? 



2. Was I not to have, 
Ne clevais-je pas avoh^ ? 



CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 



101 



Wilt thou not have, 
^^ auras- f upas? 

Will he not have, 
N'aura-t-il pas f 

Will she not have, 
N'aui-a-t-elle pas ? 

Shall we not have, 
N'aurons-7ious pas ? 

Will you not have, 
N'aurez-vous pas ? 

Will they not have, 
N''auront-ils pas or N^au?'oni- 
elles pas ? 



Wilt thou not have had, 
N^auras-tu pas eu ? 

Will he not have had, 
N'aura-t-il pas eu ? 

Will she not have had, 
^aura-t-elle pas eu ? 

Shall we not have had, 
N'aurons-iious pas eu f 

Will you not have had, 
N'aarez-vous pas eu ? 

Will they not have had, 
N^oitront-ils pas eu or N'auront' 
elles pas eu ? 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



PRESENT. 



PAST. 



Should I not have, 
JVaurais-Je pas ? 

Wouldst thou not have, 
N^aurais-fu pas ? 

Would he not have, 
N'aurait-il pas ? 

Would she not have, 
Naurait-elle pas ? 

Should we not have, 
JVoioions-nous pas ? 

Would you not have, 
N' auriez-vous pas f 

Would they not have, 
N'auraient-ils pas or N'a-uraieat- 
elles pas ? 



Should I not have had, 
N'aurais-je pas eu ? 

Wouldst thou not have had, 
N' aurais-tu pas eu ? 

Would he not have had, 
JSPdurait-il pas eu ? 

Would she not have had, 
Wauraxt-elle pas eu ? 

Should we not have had, 
N^oid-'mis-nous pas eu f 

Would you not have had, 
N' auriez-vous pas eu ? 

Would they not have had, 
N'auraient-ils pas eu or N'<mraient- 
elles pas eu ? 



Art thou not to have, 
Ne dois-tu pas avoir ? 

Is he not to have, 
Ae doit-il pas avoir ? 

Is she not to have, 

AV doit-elle pas avoir ? ^ 

Are we not to have, 

Ne devom-nous pas avoir ? 

Are ye or you not to have, 
Ne devez-vous pas avoir ? 

Are they not to have, 

Ne doivent-ils or elles pas avoir ? 



Wast thou not to have, 
Ne devais-tu pas avoir ? 

Was he not to have, 
Ne devait-il pas avoir? 

Was she not to have, 
Ne devait-elle pas avoir ? 

Were we not to have, 
Ne devioTis-nous pas avoir ? 

Were ye or you not to have, 
A'e deviez-vous pas avoir ? 

Were they not to have, 

Ne devaieiU-ils or elles pas avoir ? 



102 CONJUGATION OF Y AVOIR, TO BE THERE. 



Conjugation of the Unipersonal Verb y avoir, to be there. 

As the unipersonal verb y avoir, to be there, is of very great use in 
speaking and writing French, the pupil must learn it immediately after 
avoir. Its tenses are formed by placing y, there, before the third persons 
singular of the different tenses of avoir, whether they be used affirma- 
tively, negatively, or interrogatively, as shown hereafter. 



Simple Temes. 
PRESENT. 

To be there, 
Yavoh'. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Compoz/nd Tenses. 
PRETERIT. 

To have been there, 
Y avoir en. 



PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 



Being there, 
Yayunt. 



iPRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUND. 



Having been there, 
Y ay ant eu. 



PARTICIPLE FUTURE. 
Being about to be there, 
Devant y avoir. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

There is or are, 
By a. 

There is or are not, 
// rCy a pas. 

Is or are there ? 
Ya-t-in 

Is or are there not ? 

ISPy a-t-il pas .? 

IMPERFECT. 

There was or were, 
// y avait. 

There was or were not, 
II ii'y avait pas. 

"Was or were there ? 
Yavait-ilf 

Was or were there not ? 
iV'y avait-it pas 9 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

There was or were 
// y eut. 

There was or were not, 
// n'y eut pas. 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

There has or have been, 
II y a eu. 

There has or have not been, 
II n'y a pas eu. 

Has or have there been ? 
Y a-t-il eu'i 

Has or have there not been ? 
N''y a-t-il pas eu f 

PLUPERFECT. 

There had been, 
II y avait eu. 

There had not been, 
11 r^y avait pas eu. 

Had there been ? 
Yavait-il eu? 

Had there not been ? 
N'y avait-il pas eu f 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 
There had been, 
// y eut eu. 

There had not been, 
// n^y eut pas eu. 



CONJUGATION OP V AVOIR, TO BE THERE. 103 



Was or were there ? 
Yeut-i/f 

Was or were there not ? 

iVy eut-ilpas? 

FUTURE SIMPLE. 

*There will be, 
// tj aura. 

There will not be, 
// n'y aura pas. 

Will there be ? 
Yaura-t-il? 

Will there not be ? 
iV'y aura-t-il pas ? 



Had there been ? 

Y eiit-il eu ? 

Had there not been ? 
N'y eut-il pas eu ? 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

There will have been, 
// 7j aura eu. 

There will not have been, 
JlrCy aura pas eu. 
Will there have been ? 

Y aura-t-il eu ? 

Will there not have been ? 
iV'y aura-t-il pas eu ? 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

There would be, 
//y aurait. 

There would not be, 
// n'y aurait pas. 

Would there be ? 
Y aurait-il 9 

Would there not be ? 
N'y auraitMpas? 



PAST. 

There would have been, 
// y aurait eu. 

There would not have been, 
// n^y aitrait pas eu. 

Would there have been ? 
Y aurait-il eu ? 

Would there not have been ? 
JN^y aurait-il pas eu ? 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 



That there may be, 
Qu'il y ait. 

That there may not be, 
Qu''il riy ait pas. 



PRETERIT. 



That there may have been, 
Qu'il y ait eu. 

That there may not have been, 
Qu^il n^y ait pas eu. 



IMPERFECT. 



That there might be, 
Qtt'il y eut. 

That there might not be, 
Qu^il n'y eut pas. 



PLUPERFECT. 



That there might have been, 
QiCil y eut eu. 

That there might not have been, 
Qu^il ity eut pas eu. 



* J . There is or are to be, 
// doit y avoir. 

There is or are not to be, 
// ne doit pas y avoir. 

Is or are there to be ? 

Doit-il y avoir f 

Is or are there nt)t to be ? 

Ne doit-il pas y avoir ? 



There was or were to be, 
// devait y avoir. 

There was or were not to be, 
// ne devait pas y avoir. 

Was or were there to be ? 
Devait-il y avoir '? 

Was or were there not to be ? 
Ne devait-il pas y avoir ? 



104 



CONJUGATION OF EIRE, TO BE. 



Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Etre, to he. 

Observe. — The verb etre and those which succeed are all written 
affirmatively ; but the pupil must practise them after the four different 
manners in which a verb can be used : that is — in the affirmative, 
negative, interrogative, and interrogative and negative forms of the 
verb, the better to be enabled to use them any way when required. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Simple Tenses. 



PRESENT. 



To be, 
Etre. 



Compound Tenses. 

PRETERIT. 

To have been, 
Avoir ett. 



PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
Being, 
Etant. 



PAST PARTICIPLE. 



Been, 
EU.* 



PRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUND. 
Having been, 
Ayant ite, 

PARTICIPLE FUTURE. 

Being about to be, 
Devant etre. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 



I am, 

Je si/is. 

Thou art, 
Tu es. 

He is, 
// est. 

She is, 
Ei/e est. 

We are. 
Nous sommes. 

You are, 
Vous etes. 

They are, 

lis or Elles sont. 



IMPERFECT. 

I was, 
J^ttais. 



Thou wast, 
Tu tlais. 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
I have been, 
S'ui tie. 

Thou hast been, 
Tu as tte. 
He has been, 
// a tte. 

She has been, 
EUe a ete. 

We have been, 
JSous avons tte. 

You have been, 
Vous avez ttt. 

They have been, 
lis or Elles out tt^. 

PLUPERFECT. 

I had been, 
J\tvais ttt. 

Thou hadst been, 
Tu avais ttt. 



* The past participle etc never changes its termination, whether it be used with 
reference to a substantive masculine or feminine, singular or plural. 



CONJUGATION OF ETRE, TO BE. 



105 



He was, 
// ttait. 

She was, 
Elle ttait. 
We were, 
Nous etions. 

You were, 
Vous ttiez. 

They were, 

lis or Elles etaient. 



He had been, . 
// avait et6. 
She had been, 
Elle avait tie. 
We had been. 
Nous avians etc. 

You had been, 
p^ous aviez tie. 

They had been, 

lis or Elles avaient ttt. 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I was, 
Jefus. 

Thou wast, ' 
Tufus. 

He was, 
Jlfut. 
She was, 
Elle fut. 
We were, 
Nous f limes. 

You were, 
Vous fides. 

They were. 

Us or Elles furenf. 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 
I had been, 
J'e^/s ttt. 

Thou hadst been, 
Tu eus tte. 

He had been, 
// eut ttt. 

She had been, 
Elle eut tte. 

We had been, 
Nous eumes ^tt. 
You had been, 
Fous eutes iti. 
They had been. 
Us or Elles eurent ttt. 



FUTURE SIMPLE. 
I shall be, 
*Je serai. 

Thou wilt be, 
Tu seras. 

He will be, 
// sera. 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

I shall have been, 
faurai ttt. 

Thou wilt have been, 
Tu auras ttt. 

He will have been, 
// aura ttt. 



1. 1 am to be, 
Je dois etre. 

Thou art to be, 
Tu dois etre. 

He is to be, 
// doit etre. 

She is to be, 
Elle doit etre. 

We are to be. 
Nous devons etre. 

You are to be, 
Votis devez etre. 

They are to be, 

Us or Elles doivent etre. 



2. 1 was to be, 
Je devais etre. 

Thou wast to be, 
Tu devais etre. 

He was to be, 
// devait etre. 

She was to be, 
Elle devait etre. 
We were to be. 
Nous devious etre. 
You were to be, 
Fbus deciez etre. 

They were to be. 

Us or Elles dtvaicnt etre. 



r 5 



im 



CONJUGATION OF ETRE, TO BE. 



She will be, 
El/e sera. 

We shall be. 
Nous se?'ons. 

You will be, 
Fbus serez. 

They will be, 
I/s or El/es seront. 



She will have been, 
E//e aura eie. 

We shall have been. 
Nous azirons tie. 

You will have been, 
Fgus aurez tte. 

They will have been, 
lis or Elles auront 6tL 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

I should be, 
Je serais. 

Thou wouldst be, 
Tu serais. 

He would be, 
// serait. 

She would be, 
Elle se7'ait. 

We should be, 

Nous serions. 

Yovi would be, 
Fous seriez. 

They would be, 
lis or El/es seraienf. 



PAST. 

I should have been, 
Taurais or Peusse ete. 

Thou wouldst have been, 
Tu aurais or Tu eusses tte. 

He would have been, 
// aurait or // eut ete. 

She would have been, 
Elle aurait or Elle eut tte. 

We should have been. 

Nous aurions or Nous eussions tte. 

Yovi would have been, 

Fbus auriez or Fous eussiez 6te. 

They would have been, 
lis or Elles auraient or //« or Elles 
eussent ett. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT OR FUTURE. 



Be (thou). 
Let him be. 
Let her be. 
Let us be. 
Be (ye or you), 
Let them be. 


Sois. 

QuHlsoit. 

Qu'elle soit. 

Soyons. 

Soyez. 

Quails or Qu' elles soient. 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


PRESENT. 


PRETERIT. 


That I may be. 
Que je sois. 


That I may have been, 
Que j'aie Ht. 


That thou mayst be, 
Que tu sois. 


That thou mayst have been. 
Que tu axes 6tt. 


That he may be, 
Qi^il soit. 


That he may have been, 
Qu'il ail ttt. 


That she may be, 
Qu' elle soit. 


That she may have been, 
Qu'elle ait tte. 


That we may be. 


That we may have been, 


Que nous soyons. 


Que noxis ayons tti. 



FIRST CONJUGATION : PARLER, TO SPEAK. 107 



That you may be, 
Que vous soyez. 
That they may be, 
QWils or Qu^elles soient. 

IMPERFECT. 

That I might be, 
Qut je fusse. 

That thou mightst be. 
Que tu fusses. 

That he might be, 
Qu'ilfut. 

That she might be, 
Qu'elle fid. 

That we might be. 
Que nous fissions. 
That you might be. 
Que vous fussiez. 

That they might be, 
QuHls or Qu'e//esfusse/if. 



That you may have been. 
Que vous ayez ete. 

That they may have been, 
Quils or QiCelles aient ttc. 

PLUPERFECT. 

That I might have been. 
Que feusse ett. 

That thou mightst have been, 
Que tu eusses tie. 

That he might have been, 
QiiHl exit tte. 

That she might have been. 
Quelle eut ttt. 

That we might have been, 
Qi/e nous eussio/is ttt. 

That you might have been. 
Que vous eussiez ttt. 

That thej^ might have been, 
Qu''ils or Qiielles eussent 6te. 



Of the Regular Conjugations, 

It has been already explained that there are four general conjugations, 
distinguished from each other by their respective termination in the 
present of the infinitive mood : the first ends in ei\ like farlei\ to speak; 
the second in z'r, like finir^ to finish; the third in oir^ like recevoir, to 
receive ; and the fourth in re, like entendre^ to hear. 

As all the verbs of the French language cannot be conjugated like 
these four regular models, there being irregular verbs, that is, verbs the 
variations of which are not exactly similar in all tiieir tenses and persons 
to those of the four given examples, I shall more particularly point out, 
at the head of each conjugation, the verbs which are regular and conju- 
gated after the same model. 



First Conjugation : Parler, to speak. 

Every verb ending in er, in the present of the infinitive mood, is 
regular, and conjugated precisely after the same manner as parler ; that 
is, it undergoes exactly the same variations in all its tenses and persons : 
except aller, to go ; s^eji aller^ to go away ; envoi/er, to send ; and ren- 
voyer, to send back ; which are irregular, and have conjugations peculiar 
to themselves. 

When, therefore, an English verb being translated into French proves 
to be a regular one of the first conjugation, the same changes must be 
made in that verb, as those which occur in parler ; that is, the termina- 



108 FIRST CONJUGATION : PARLER, TO SPEAK. 



tion er of the present of the infinitive mood must be changed into the 
different terminations of the tense wanted, as in jparler. 

To, before the infinitive of a verb, denotes the present of the infinitive ; 
was, before a present participle, represents the imperfect of the indica- 
tive ; did, before the infinitive of a^rb which is not preceded by to, 
represents also, sometimes, the imperfect of the indicative ; shall or will 
denotes the future ; should or would, the conditional ; let, the imperative; 
Tway, the present of the subjunctive; and might, the imperfect of the 
subjunctive. 



Simple Tenses. 

PRESENT. 

To speak. 
Purler. 

PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 

Speaking, 
Par/ant. 

PAST PARTICIPLE. 



Spoken, 

Parle, ee ; es, ees. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Compotmd Tenses. 

PRETERIT. 

To have spoken. 
Avoir parte. 

PRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUND. 

Having spoken, 
Ayant parle. 

PARTICIPLE FUTURE. 

Being about to speak, 
Devant parlex. 



PRESENT.* 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 



I speak, do speak, or am speakings 
Je parle. 



I have spoken or been speaking, 

..^ J^ai parle. 

Thou speakest, dost speak, or art speaking, Thou hast spoken or been speaking. 



Tu parle%. 

He speaks, does speak, or is speaking, 
11 parle. 

She speaks, does speak, or is speaking, 

Elle parle. 

We speak, do speak, or are speaking. 

Nous parlons. 

you speak, do speak, or are speaking, 

Fbus parlez. 

They speak, do speak, or are speaking, 

lis or Elles parlent. 

IMPERFECT. 

I was speaking, 
Je parl&is. 



Tu as parle. 

He has spoken or been speaking, 

// a parle. 

She has spoken or been speaking, 

Elle a parle. 

We have spoken or been speaking, 

Norn avons parle. 

You have spoken or been speaking, 

Fous avez parle. 

They have spoken or been speaking, 

Jls or Elles out parle. 

PLUPERFECT. 

I had spoken or been speaking, 
J avals parle. 



* The auxUiary do or does, which the English use in affirmative, negative and 
interrogative sentences, is not expressed in French. 



FIRST CONJUGATION: PARLER, TO SPEAK. 109 



Thou wast speaking, 
Tu parldXs. 

He was speaking, 
II parldiii. 

She Avas speaking, 
Elle pariait. 

We were speaking. 
Nous parlions. 

You were speaking, 
Fous par/iez. 
They were speaking, 
//« or EUes parlaient, 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I spoke, 
Je par/ai. 

Thou spokest, 
Tu parldiS. 

He spoke, 
// joar/a. 

She spoke, 
£l/e parla.. 

We spoke. 
Nous parlkmes. 
You spoke, 
Fbus parlktes. 

They spoke, 

I/s or El/es par/erent. 

FUTURE SIMPLE. 

I shall speak, 
*/e joar/erai. 

Thou wilt speak, 
Tu parievas. 



Thou hadst spoken or been speaking, 
Tu avais parle. 

He had spoken or been speaking, 
// avait parle» 

* She had spoken or been speaking, 
Elle avait par le. 

We had spoken or been speaking, 
iYoMS aviotis par/e. 

You had spoken or been speaking, 
/^2/« at'j>^ parle. 

They had spoken or been speaking, 
lis or £//es avaient parlk. 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 

I had spoken, 
J'eus parlk. 

Thou hadst spoken, 
Tu eus parlk. 

He had spoken, 
// eut parlk. 

She had spoken, 
Elle eut parlk. 

We had spoken. 
Nous eumes parlk. 

You had spoken, 
Vous eutes parlk. 

They had spoken, 

lis or Elles eurent parlk. 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

I shall have spoken, 
J'aurai parlk. 

Thou wilt have spoken, 
Tu auras parlk. 



* 1. I am to speak, 
Je dots parler. 

Thou art to speak, 
Tu dots parler. 

He is to speak, 
// doit parler. 

She is to speak, 
Elle doit parler. 

We are to speak. 
Nous devons parler. 

You are to speak, 
Fous devez parler. 

They are to speak, 

lis or Elles doivent parler. 



2. I was to speak, 
Je devais parler. 

Thou wast to speak, 
Tu devais parler. 
He was to speak, 
// devait parler. 

She was to speak, 
Elle devait parler. 

We were to speak. 
Nous devious parler. 

You were to speak, 
Fous deviez parler. 

They were to speak, 

Jls or Elles devaient parler. 



110 FIRST CONJUGATION: PARLER, TO SPEAK. 



He will speak, 
// parleva. 
She will speak, 
El/e parlexa. 
We shall speak, 
Nozts par iex OTIS. 
You will speak, 
Fbzis par/erez. 
They will speak, 
Jh or E//es parlexoni. 



He will have spoken, 
// aura parle. 
She will have spoken, 
£l/e aura parlk. 
We shall have spoken. 
Nous aurons parlk. 
You will have spoken, 
Vous aurez parlk. 
They will have spoken. 
Us or Elles onront parlk. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

I should speak, 
Je parlerais. 

Thou wouldst speak, 
Tu parlerais. 
He would speak, 

II parlevsiii. 

She would speak, 
Eile parleva.ii. 
We should speak. 
Nous parlerions. 
You would speak, 
Foifs parleriez. 
They would speak, 
Us or Elles joar/eraient. 



PAST. 



I should have spoken, 
J\mrais or J^eiisse parle. 
Thou wouldst have spoken, 
Tu aurais or Tu eusses parlk. 
He would have spoken, 
// aurait or // eut parle. 
She would have spoken, 
Elle aurait or Elle cut parlk. 
We should have spoken, 
Nous atirions or Nous eussions parlk. 
You would have spoken, 
P'ous aunez or Fmis eussiez parlk. 
They would have spoken, 
lis or Elles auraiejit or lis or Elles 
eussent parlk. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT 
Speak (thou), 
Let him speak, 
Let her speak. 
Let us speak, 
Speak (ye or you). 
Let them speak. 



OR FUTURE. 
Parle. 
QuHl parle. 
QiCelle parle. 
Par Ions. 
Parlez. 
Quails or Qu' elles patient 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

That I may speak, 
Que je parle. 

That thou mayst speak. 
Que tu paries. 

That he may speak, 
QuHl parle. 

That she may speak, 
Qu^elle parle. 
That we may speak, 
Qi(€ nous parl'xoxis. 



PRETERIT. 

That I may have spoken, 

Quej^aie parlk. 

That thou mayst have spoken, 

Que tu aies pay-Ik. 

That he may have spoken, 

Qu''il ait parlk. 

That she may have spoken, 

Qii'elle ait parlk. 

That we may have spoken. 

Que no/Its ayons parlk. 



FIRST CONJUGATION: PARLER, TO SPEAK. Ill 



That you may speak. 
Que vous par /iez. 
That they may speak, 
Qu'ils or Qif'elles parl^ni. 

IMPERFECT. 

That I might speak. 
Que je parlsisse. 

That thou mightst speak, 
Qi/e tu par^asses. 

That he might speak, 
Qu^il pariat. 

That she might speak, 
Qu'e//e parikt. 

That we might speak. 
Que nous ;)ar/assions. 

That you might speak. 
Que vous /jor/assiez. 

That they might speak, 
Quails or Qu^e/les parlassent. 



That you may have spoken. 
Que vous ayez par/e. 
That they may have spoken, 
QuHis or Qu'ei/es cdent parlk. 

PLUPERFECT. 

That I might have spoken. 
Que j'eusse parle. 

That thou mightst have spoken, 
Que tu eusses par/e. 

That he might have spoken, 
Qu'il eut parlk. 

That she might have spoken, 
Qu'e/le eut par/e. 

That we might have spoken. 
Que nous eusiions par/e. 

That you might have spoken, 
Que vous eussiez par/e. 

That they might have spoken, 
Qu'i/s or Qu^e//es eussent parle. 



The two following additional tenses, which may be termed fast just 
elapsed, and past elapsed before another thing or action took place, 
require particular attention. 

1. The past just e/apsed is used to denote a thing or action which has just been 
done ; it is Englished hy the present of the indicative of the verb to fiave, with the 
adverb ji'm*/, and the past participle of another verb : as — I have just spo/ien ; she has 
just read; &c. 

2. The past e/apsed before anot/ier thing or action too/t p/ace, denotes that a thing or 
action had just been done when another took place: it is formed in English by the 
imperfect of the verh^ have, Avith the advexh just, and, as above, the past participle 
of another verb : as — Ihadjustspo/ien; f/iou hadst just spo/ien ; &c. 

Have just is expressed in French by the present of the indicative of the verb 
venir, and had just by the imperfect of the same verb ; de is put immediately after 
the person of the verb venir which is used, and the succeeding past participle is 
placed in the present of the infinitive, as follows : — 

2. PAST ELAPSED BEFORE ANOTHER 
THING OR ACTION TOOK PLACE, 
been speaking, 



1. PAST JUST ELAPSED. 



I have just spoken or been speaking, 

Je viens de par/er. 

Thou hast just spoken or been speaking, 

Tu viens de par/er. 

He has just spoken or been speaking, 

// vient de par/er. 

She has just spoken or been speaking, 

El/e vient de par/er. 

We have just spoken or been speaking. 

Nous venous de par/er. 

You have just spoken or been speaking, 

Vous venez de par/er. 



I had just spoken or 

Je venais de par/er. 

Thou hadst just spoken or been speaking, 

Tu venais de par/er. 

He had just spoken or been speaking, 

// venait de par/er. 

She had just spoken or been speaking, 

E//e venait de parler. 

We had just spoken or been speaking. 

Nous venions de par/er. 

You had just spoken or been speaking, 

Fous veniez de par/er. 



They have just spoken or been speaking. They had just spoken or been speaking, 
I/s or E//es viennent de par/er. J/s or Elles venaient de par/er. 



112 OBSERVATIONS ON THE VERBS ENDING 



Particular Observations on the Verbs which end in the Present of 
the Infinitive in — ayer, eyer, oyer, uyer, cer, e'er, ger, ier, eler, 
eter and uer. 

1 . Verbs in ayer, eyer, oyer and uyer : as, — payer, to pay ; grasseyer, 
to lisp ; nettoyer, to clean ; essuyer, to wipe ; &c. 

The y of the termination of the present of the infinitive mood in these 
verbs is changed into i, in the tenses in which y would occur before e, 
es,OY entmwto.. This takes place, 1. In the three persons singular, 
and in the third person plural, of the present of the indicative : as, — 
payer, je paie, iu paies, il ou elle paie, lis ou elles paient : 2. In all 
the persons of both the future and conditional simple : as, — je paierai, 
tu paieras, &c., and Je paierais, tu paierais, &c. 3. In the second 
and third persons singular, and in the third plural of the imperative : 
as, — paie, qu'il ou qu^elle paie, quails ou qu^elles paient. 4. In the 
three persons lingular, and in the third plural of the present of the 
subjunctive : as, — que je paie, que tu paies, qu^il ou qu'elle paie, 
quails ou qu* elles paient ; and not — je paye, tu payes, &c. But the y 
is preserved before any other termination than e, es, or ent mute : as, — 
nous payons, vous payez, &c. 

In the above verbs, and in all those of which the present participle 
ends in yant: as, — croire, croyant ; voir, voyant ; fuir, fuyant ; 
s'^asseoir, s^asseyant; &c., both a y and an z are required in the two 
first persons plural of the imperfect of the indicative and of the present 
of the subjunctive : as, — nous payions, vous payiez ; nous croyions, 
vous croyiez ; que nous payions, que vous payiez ; que nous croyions, 
que vous croyiez ; &c. 

What has just been said with reference to the verb payer is applicable 
to the verbs grasseyer, nettoyer, essuyer, and, in general, to all those 
which are terminated, in the present of the infinitive mood, with eyer, 
oyer, and uyer. 

2. In verbs in cer : as, — commencer, to begin, &c. — a cedilla is 
required under the c in those tenses in which it occurs before a or o, in 
order to preserve its soft pronunciation of s : as, — commenpant ; nous 
commenpons ; &c. 

3. In verbs in eer : as, — agreer, to accept of; &c. — an e only is used 
in the tenses in which the first letter of the different terminations is 
either a, o or i : as, — agrean^, nous agreo^i^-, vous SigTtiez, &c. ; but when 
the first letter is not one of these three vowels, the two e's of the infini- 
tive are preserved : as j^agreerais, tu agreerais ; &c. The past parti- 
ciple is spelt with three e's, in the feminine : thus, — agreee. 

4. In verbs in ger : as, — manger, to eat ; &c. — the e of the infinitive 
is kept after g in the tenses in which g would be followed by a or o, in 
order to preserve its soft pronunciation of/: as, — mangeant ; nous 
mangeons ; &c., and not — mangant, nous mangons. 



m—AYER, EVER, OYER, UYER, &c. 113 

5. In verbs in ier : as, — prier, to pray; etudier, to study, &c. — two 
i's must be used in the two first persons plural of the imperfect of the 
indicative and of the present of the subjunctive ; that is, the i which 
immediately precedes the termination er in the present of the infinitive, 
and that belonging to the plural terminations — ions, iez, of the imper- 
fect of the indicative and of the present of the subjunctive : as, — nous 
priionSj vous priiez ; que nous etudiionSy que vous etudiiez ; &c. 

6. In verbs in eler and eter : as, — appeler, to call ; jeter, to throw ; &c- 
— the / and the t are generally doubled before e, es, or cnt mute : as, — 
j'appelle, tu appelles, il ou elle appelle. Us ou elles appellent ; — je 
Jette, tu jettes,il ou clle jette. Us on elles jettent ; &c. But these 
letters are not doubled before any other termination : thus we write — 
nous appelonSj vous appelez, &c., and nous jetons^ vous jetez, &c. 

The following verbs : — bouri'eler, to torment, to rack ; congeler, to 
congeal : deceler, to detect ; degeler, to thaw : geler, to freeze ; har- 
celer, to teaze, to torment ; peler, to peal ; rec'eler, to secrete ; regeler, 
to freeze again ; achetet\ to buy; colleter, to collar; coqueter, to coquet; 
decolletei\ to make bare, to uncover the neck ; etiqueter, to ticket ; 
suracheter, to overbuy ; trompeter, to trumpet ; must however be ex- 
cepted from the above rule, as, instead of doubling the / or t in the 
tenses in which these letters come before e, es, or ent mute, a grave 
accent is used over the e which precedes them : as, — U gele^ it freezes ; 
U gelera, it will freeze ; U degelc, it thaws ; U degelera, it will thaw ; 
j'achete, I buy; tu achetes, il ou clle achete ; Us ou elles achetent ; &c., 
and not il gelle, il degelle, j'achette, tu achettes, &c. 

In verbs ending in ecer, emer, ener, ever, evrer : as, — depdcer, to 
carve ; semer, to sow ; mener, to take, to lead ; achever, to finish ; 
sewer y to wean ; a grave accent is likewise used over the e which pre- 
cedes c, m, n, or r, before e, es, or ent mute, instead of doubling these 
consonants : as, — je mene, tu mmes, il mene. Us ou elles menent ; 
je meneraiy tu meneras, &c. ; je menerais, tu rnenerais, &c. ; and not 
je menne, tu mennes, &c. 

Verbs ending in ebrer ; as celebrer, to celebrate ; ecer, as rapiecer, 
to piece ; echer, as lecher, to lick ; eder, as posseder, to possess ; egler, 
as regler, to regulate ; egner, as regner, to reign ; egrer, as reintegrer, 
to reintegrate ; eguer, as alleguer, to allege ; eler, as reveler, to reveal ; 
emer, as blasphemer, to blaspheme ; e7ier, as aliener, to alienate ; 
equer, as hypothequer, to mortgage ; erer, as esperer, to hope ; ete?', as 
inquieter, to make uneasy ; etrer, as penetrer, to penetrate ; have their 
acute accent which precedes the first consonant of the last syllable in 
the infinitive, changed into a grave one, before e, es, or ent mute : as, — 
esperer, j^espere, tu esperes, il espere. Us ou elles esperent ; j^esps- 
rerai, tu esperer as, &c. ; j^ esperer ais, tu esperer ais, &c. ; que j^ espere, 
que tu esperes, &c. 

7. In verbs in ouer and uer : as, — jouer, to play; contribuer, to 
contribute, &c. — a diaeresis is required over the i, in the terminations of 



114 SECOND CONJUGATIOI^f : FINIR, TO FINISH. 

the two first persons plural of the imperfect of the indicative and of the 
present of the subjunctive : as, — nous jouions, vous jou'iez ; que nous 
contrihuions, que vous contribu'iez. 

The neuter verb puer, to stink, is only used in the present of the 
infinitive, as likewise in the present, imperfect and future of the indica- 
tive, and in the conditional : as, — puer, je pue, tu pues, il pue. Us ou 
elles puent ; &c. 

A diaeresis ( " ) is required over the e, in the verb arguer, in the 
tenses in which e is mute : as, — j^ argue, tu argues, il argue, Us ou 
elles arguent ; j^arguerai, tu argueras, &c. ; j^arguerais, tu ar- 
guerais, &c. 

When, in verbs of the first conjugation, the termination er of the 
present of the infinitive is preceded by another vowel, as in the verbs 
prier, to pray ; jouer, to play; avouer, to confess; &c., the e of the 
termination may be preserved or suppressed, in poetry, in the future and 
conditional ; if it be suppressed, a circumflex accent is put over the 
vowel preceding it : as, — je jouer ai o\i jour ai ; j^ avouer ai ou avourai ; 
j^arguerai ou argurai ; j^appuierais ou apputrais ; je prier ais 
ou prirais ; &c. 

The unipersonal verbs, — hruiner, to drizzle; degeler, to thaw; 
eclair er, to lighten ; geler, to freeze ; greler, to hail ; importer, to 
matter ; neiger, to snow ; resulter, to result ; tonner, to thunder ; &c., 
though only used in the third persons singular of their different tenses, 
take, in those persons, precisely the same terminations as parler does. 



Second Conjugation : Finir, to finish. 

All verbs ending in ir, in the present of the infinitive mood, and 
issant in the present participle, are regular, and conjugated precisely 
after the same manner as finir. Every other verb, of which the present 
participle does not end in issant, although terminated with ir, in the 
present of the infinitive mood, is irregular, and will be found exemplified 
under the article of irregular verbs. 

The changes which the regular verbs of this conjugation undergo in 
their different tenses and persons, fall on the last letter r only ; the other 
letters remain the same ; but the i, by which r is preceded in the present 
of the infinitive mood, will be found printed in roman letters in the fol- 
lowing verb finir^ as it occurs in every tense and person in all the 
regular verbs of this conjugation, either as a part of the termination or 
immediately before it. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Simple Tenses. C&mpovnd Tenses. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT. 

To finish, To have finished, 

Finix. Avoir Jin\. 



SECOND CONJUGATION: FINIR, TO FINISH. 115 



PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 

Finishing, 
jR'«issant. 

PAST PARTICIPLE. 
Finished, 
Fin\, ie ; is, ies. 



PRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUND. 
Having finished, 
Ayanijxra. 

PARTICIPLE FUTURE. 

Being about to finish, 
Devant jxnxt. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 



I finish, do finish, or am finishing, 
Je jiHVA. 

Thou finishest, dost finish, or art 

finishing, 
7?//ms. 

He finishes, does finish, or is 

finishing, 
///«it. 

She finishes, does finish, or is 

finishing, 
EUeJirni. 

We finish, do finish, or are finish- 

,ing, 
A'oz^^nissons. 

You finish, do finish, or are 

finishing, 
Vous JiH\%%Qx. 

They finish, do finish, or are 

finishing. 
Us or El/es JiriissQnt. 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

I have finished, 
J^aijini. 

Thou hast finished, 
Tu asjini. 



He has finished, 
II a Jim. 

She has finished, 
Elle afni. 

We have finished, 
Nous avo?isJim. 

You have finished, 
Fbiis avezjini. 

They have finished, 
I/s or E//es ontjini. 



IMPERFECT. 

I was finishing, 
/<?^«issais. 

Thou wast finishing, 
T^y^/assais. 

He was finishing, 
//^wissait. 

She was finishing, 
E//e Jinissa.it. 

We were finishing, 

iVaw* j^wissions. ^ 

You were finishing, 
Fbus Jinissiez. 

They were finishing, 
I/s or £//e*^«issaient. 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I finished, 
Je^nis. 



PLUPERFECT. 

I had finished, 
J^ avais Jiiii. 

Thou hadst finished, 
Tti avals Jitii. 

He had finished, 
// avaitjini. 

She had finished, 
Elle avait Jini. 

We had finished, 
iVWs avians Jini. 

You had finished, 
Fous aviezjini. 

They had finished, 
I/s or E//es avaientjini. 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 

I had finished, 
J''ensjini. 



116 SECOND CONJUGATION: FINIR, TO FINISH, 



Thou fiiiishedst, 
Tujinis. 

He finished, 
///wit. 

She finished, 
Eliejinit. 

We finished, 
Noiis Jinmies. 

You finished, 
Foiis Jtmies. 
They finished, 
Jls or EllesfmxQnt 

FUTURE SIMPLE. 

I shall finish, 
/e/wirai.* 

Thou \rilt finish, 
T^^j^rtiras. 

He will finish, 
////?ira. 

She will finish, 
£//e/«ira. 

We shall finish. 
Nous Jlnixons. 

You will finish, 
Fbtis JinixQZ. 

They will finish, 
lis or Ellesjirdxovii. 



Thou hadst finished, 
Tu eusjini. 

He had finished, 
// eutjinx. 

She had finished, 
Elle eutfim. 

We had finished, 
Nous eumes Jin\. 

You had finished, 
Fous elites Jini. 

They had finished, 
lis or Elles eurentjini. 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

I shall have finished, 
J* aurai Jini. 

Thou wilt have finished, 
Tu auras Jinx. 

He will have finished, 
// aura Jinx. 

She will have finished, 
Elle aurafinx. 

We shall have finished. 
Nous auroiisjiin. 

You will have finished, 
P'ous aurez Jiiix. 

They will have finished. 
Us or Elles aurontjinx. 



PRESENT. 

I should finish, 
Je/wirais. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PAST. 



I should have finished, 
J'aurais or J^ eusse Jinx. 



* l.I am to finish, 
Je doisjinir. 

Thou art to finish, 
Tu doisjinir. 

He is to finish, 
// doit Jinir. 

She is to finish, 
Elle doit Jinir. 

We are to finish. 
Nous devons Jinir. 

You are to finish, 
Vous devez Jinir. 

They are to finish. 

Us or Elles doivent Anir, 



, I was to finish, 
Je devais fmir. 

Thou wast to finish, 
Tu devais Jinir. 

He was to finish, 
// devait Jinir. 

She was to finish,^ 
Elle devait Jinir. 

We were to finish. 
Nous devions Jinir. 

You were to finish, 
pljus deviez Jinir. 

They were to finish, 
Jls or Elles devaient finir. 



SECOND CONJUGATION: FINIR, TO FINISH. 117 



Thou wouldst finish, 
TuJin\x2L\%. 

He would fiuish, 
J/finiTjiit. 

She would finish, 
EUeJlmrsiii. 

We should finish, 
Nous Jlnirions. 

You would finish, 
Fbus /imr'niz. 

They would finish, 
//* or E//esJinixaient. 



Thou wouldst have finished, 
Tu aw'ais or Tu eusses fini. 

He would have finished, 
Jl aurait or // exit Jlni. 

She would have finished, 
Elle await or Elle eut fini. 

We should have finished. 

Nous aurions or Nous eussionsfini. 

You would have finished, 
Fous auriez or Vous eussiez fini. 
They would have finished. 
Its or Elles aut'aient, or J/s or E//es 
eussentfini. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT OR FUTURE. 



Finish (thou), 
Let him finish, 
Let her finish. 
Let us finish. 
Finish (ye or you). 
Let them fiuish. 



jPmis. 

Qu'ilfinisse. 

Qu'ei/efinisse. 

Finissons. 

Finissez. 

Quails or Qu^el/es finissent. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

That I may finish, 
Quej'efinisse. 

That thou mayst finish, 
Que iufiniaiies. 

That he may finish, 
QM'iV^wisse. 

That she may finish, 
Qu^e//efi»isse. 

That we may finish. 
Que noits finissions. 

That you may finish. 
Que vous finissiez. 

That they may finish, 
QWils or Qu'ei/esfinissent. 

IMPERFECT. 

That I might finish, 
Quejefi/naae. 

That thou mightst finish. 
Que tufinisses. 

That he might finish, 
Qu'ilfi?ni:. 

That she might fiuish, 
Qu'elkfinit. 



PRETERIT. 

That I may have finished. 
Que fate fini. 

That thou ma3'st have finished. 
Que tu aiesfini. 

That he may have finished, 
Qu''il ait fini. 

That she may have finished, 
Qu'tlle ait fini. 

That we may have finished, 
Que 710US ayonsfini. 

That you may have finished. 
Que vous ay ez fini. 

That they may have finished, 
Qu'ils or Qu''elles aientfini. 

PLUPERFECT. 

That I might have finished. 
Que j^eusse fini. 

That thou mightst have finished. 
Que tu eusses fini. 

That he might have finished, 
Qu'i/ eut fini. 

That she might have finished, 
QiCelk exit fim. 



118 THIRD CONJUGATION: RECEVOIR, TO RECEIVE. 



That we might finish. 
Que woMS ^Missions. 

That you might finish, 
Que voMS^«issiez. 

That they might finish, 
QuHls or Quelles^nissent, 



That we might have finished. 
Que nous eussi oris Jim. 

That you might have finished, 
Que vous eussiez Jini. 

That they might have finished. 
Quails or Qu^elles eussent Jini. 



ADDITIONAL TENSES. 



PAST JUST ELAPSED. 



I have just finished, 
Je viens de Jinir. 

Thou hast just finished, 
Tu viens de Jinir. 

He has just finished, 
// vienf de Jinir. 

She has just finished, 
E/le vient de Jinir. 

We have just finished. 
Nous venons defmir. 

You have just finished, 
Vms venez de Jinir. 

They have just finished, 
lis or Elfes viennent de Jinir. 



PAST ELAPSED BEFORE ANO- 
THER THING OR ACTION TOOK 
PLACE. 

I had just finished, 
Je venais de Jinir. 

Thou hadst just finished 
Tu venais de Jinir. 

He had just finished, 
// venait de finir. 

She had just finished, 
Elle venait de Jinir. 

We had just finished. 
Nous venions de Jinir. 

You had just finished, 
Fous veniez de Jinir. 

They had just finished, 
I/s or Elles venaient de Jinir. 



Third Conjugation 



Recevoir, to receive. 



All verbs ending in evoir, in the present of the infinitive mood, and 
evant in the present participle, are regular, and conjugated precisely 
after the same manner as recevoir : such are apercevoir and s^apercevot?', 
to perceive ; concevoir, to conceive ; devoir, to owe, to be indebted ; 
decevoir, to deceive ; percevoir, to gather, to collect, (taxes) ; redevoir, 
to owe again ; which, with recevoir, are the only regular ones of the 
third conjugation. Any other verb ending in oir, in the present of the 
infinitive mood, is irregular, and will be found exemplified under the 
article of irregular verbs. 

The changes which the regular verbs of this conjugation undergo in 
their different tenses and persons, fall sometimes on the five last letters, 
evoir, and sometimes on the three last, oir, only : as, — recevoir, je recois, 
je recevrai. 

A cedilla ( , ) is placed under c, in verbs ending in cevoir, in all the 
persons in which c is followed by o or u, in order to preserve its soft 
pronunciation of s : as,- — je repois, je repus, &c. 



THIRD CONJUGATION: RECEVOIR, TO RECEIVE. 119 



Simple Tenses. 

PRESENT. . 

To receive, 
iiecevoir. 

PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 

Receiving, 
i?ecevant. 

PAST PARTICIPLE. 

Received, 

Regvi, ue ; us, ties. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Compound Tenses. 

PRETERIT. 

To have received, 
Avoir regxx. 

PRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUND. 

Having received, 
Ayant refu. > 

PARTICIPLE FUTURE. 

Being about to receive, 
Devant rfcevoir. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 



I receive, do receive, or am re- 
ceiving, 

Je ?*efois. 

Thou receivest, dost receive, or art 

receiving, 
Tu refois. 

He receives, does receive, or is re- 
ceiving, 

II regoii. 

She receives, does receive, or is re- 
ceiving, 
Elle regoii. 

We receive, do receive, or are re- 
ceiving. 
Nous recevons. 

You receive, do receive, or are re- 
ceiving, 
Vous ?'ecevez. 

They receive, do receive, or are re- 
ceiving, 
lis or Elles ?-efoivent. 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
I have received', 
J^ai regu. 



Thou hast received, 
Tu as i-egu. 

He has received, 
// a regxi. 

She has received, 
Elle a regu. 

We have received, 
Noi/s avons regw. 

You have received, 
Fous avez regu. 

They have received, 
Jls or Elles ont regn. 



IMPERFECT. 



I was receiving, 
Je reeevais. 

Thou wast receiving, 
Tu ?-ecevais. 

He was receiving, 
// recevait 

She was receiving, 
Elle recevait. 

We were receiving, 
Nous reeevions. 



PLUPERFECT. 

I had received, 
J^avais regn. 

Thou hadst received, 
Tu avais regn. 

He had received, 
// avail reg\i4 

She had received, 
Elle avaif regn. 

We had received, 
Nous avians regn. 



120 THIRD CONJUGATION: RECEVOIR, TO RECEIVE. 



You were receiving, 
Fous ?*eceviez. 

They were receiving, 
lis or Elles recevaient. 



You had received, 
Fous aviez regu. 

They had received, 

lis or E//es avaient regn. 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I received, 
Je regus. 

Thou receivedst, 
Tu regus. 

He received, 
// regut. 

She received, 
E//e regui. 

We received, 
Nous regvimes. 

You received, 
/-OMS refutes. 

They received, 

lis or jE//es r^purent. 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE 

I had received, 
J^evs regu. 

Thou hadst received, 
Tu eus regu. 

He had received, 
// eut regu . 

She had received, 
E//e eut reg\x. 
We had received, 
Nous eumes regu.. 

You had received, 
Fotis eutes regu. 

They had received, 
I/s or E//es eurent regu. 



FUTURE SIMPLE. 

*I shall receive, 
Je recevrai. 

Thou wilt receive, 
Tu recevras. 

He will receive, 
// r<?cevra. 

She will receive, 
El/e recevra. 
We shall receive. 
Nous ?*ecevrons. 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

I shall have received, 
Taurai regu. 

Thou wilt have received, 
Tu auras regu. 

He will have received, 
// catra regu. 

She will have received, 
El/e aura regu. 

"We shall have received, 
Nous aurofiis regw.. 



* l.I am to receive, 
Je dois recevoir. 

Thou art to receive, 
Tu dois recevoir. 

He is to receive, 
11 doit recevoir. 

She is to receive, 
Elle doit recevoir. 

We are to receive, 
Nous devo7is I'ecevoir. 

You are to receive, 
P'ous devez recevoir. 

Tliey are to receive, 

lis or Elles doivent recevoir. 



2. 1 was to receive, 
Je devais recevoir. 

Thou wast to receive, 
Tu devais recevoir. 

He was to receive, 
11 devait recevoir. 

She was to receive, 
Elle devait recevoir. 

We were to receive, 
Nous devions recevoir. 

You were to receive, 
P'bus deviez recevoir. 

They were to receive, 

lis or Elles devaient recevoir 



^ 



THIRD CONJUGATION: RECEVOIR, TO RECEIVE. 121 



You will receive, 
Vous recevrez. 

They will receive, 
//* or Elles /-ecevront. 



You will have received, 
Votts aurez re^xx. 

They will have received, 
lis or Elies auront regxx. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

I should receive, 
Je r^eevrais. 

Thou wouldst receive, 
Tti r^cevrais. 

He would receive, 

II recevrait. 

She would receive, 
Eile recevrait. 

We should receive, 
Nous recevrions. 

You would receive, 
Fous recevriez. 

They would receive, 
//* or Elles rtcevraient. 



PAST. 



I should have received, 
J'aurais or Teusse regii. 

Thou wouldst have received, 
Tu awais or Tu eusses refu. 

He would have received, 
// aurait or // eut regu.. 

She would have received, 
Elle aurait or Elle eut regu. 

We should have received, 

Nous aurions or Nous eussions regn. 

You would have received, 
Vous auriez or Fous eussiez regu. 

They would have received, 
lis or Elles auraient or lis or Elles 
eussent regu.. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT OR FUTURE. 

Receive (thou), Regois. 

Let him receive, Qu'tl regoive. 

Let her receive, Qu^elle regoive. 

Let us receive, j^ecevons. 

Receive (ye or you), Becevez. 

Let them receive, Quails or Qu^ elles refoivent. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

That I may receive. 
Que je refoive. 

That thou mayst receive, 
Que tu ref oives. 

That he may receive, 
Qu'tl r^f oive. 

Tliat she may receive, 
Qu'elle regoxwe. 

That we may receive. 
Que ?ioi/s rerevions. 

That you may receive, 
Que vous recev iez. 

That they may receive, 
Qu'ils or Qu^elles refoivent. 



PRETERIT. 

That I may have received, 
Quefaie regu. 

That thou mayst have received, 
Que tu aies regu. 

Tliat he may have received, 
Quil ait regu. 

That she may have received, 
QiCelle ait regu. 

That we may have received, 
Qiie notts ayons regu. 

That you may have received. 
Que vous ayez ?vfu. 

That they may have received, 
QuHls or Qi^ elles aient regu. 
G 



122 FOURTH CONJUGATION: ENTENDRE, TO HEAR. 



IMPERFECT. 

That I might receive, 
Que je refiisse. 

That thou mightst receive, 
Qne tu refusses. 

That he might receive, 
Qtt'il reput. 

That she might receive, 
Qu^ellje 7'egii.i. 

That we might receive, 
Que nous repussions. 

That you might receive, 
Que vous 7'€pussiez. 

That they might receive, 
Qu'Us or Qiielles repussent. 



PLUPERFECT. 



That I might have received. 
Que 'feusse recw. 

That thou mightst have received, 
Que tu eusses regw. 

That he might have received, 
Qu'il eat regxi. 

That she might have received, 
Qu^elle eut regn. 

That we might have received. 
Que nous eussiotis repu. 

That you might have received. 
Que vous eussiez regu. 

That they might have received, 
Qu'iis or Qu''e7les eussent regu. 



ADDITIONAL TENSES. 



PAST JUST ELAPSED. 

I have just received, 
Je viens de recevoir. 

Thou hast just received, 
Tu viens de recevoir. 

He has just received, 
// vient de recevoir. 

She has just received, 
Elle vient de recevoir. 

We have just received, 
Nm/s venons de recevoir. 

You have just received, 
Fous venez de recevoir. 

They have just received, 

lis or Elles viennent de recevoir. 



PAST ELAPSED BEFORE ANO- 
THER THING OR ACTION TOOK 
PLACE. 

I had just received, 
Je venais de recevoir. 

Thou hadst just received, 
Tu venais de recevoir. 

He had just received, 
// venait de recevoir. 

She had just received, 
Elle venait de recevoir. 
We had just received, 
Not/s veniofis de recevoir. 

You had just received, 
Pous veniez de recevoir. 

They had just received, 

Us or Elles venaient de recevoir. 



Fourth Conjugation : Entendre, to hear, to understand. 

All verbs ending in dre, in the present of the infinitive mood, in dant 
in the present participle, and du in the past participle, are regular, and 
conjugated precisely after the same manner as entendre : such are the 
forty-five wliich are quoted after this conjugation, and M'hich, with 
entendre, are the only regular ones of the fourth conjugation. 

The changes which the regular verbs of this conjugation undergo in 
their different tenses and persons, fall on the two last letters re only ; 
but as the d, by which these letters re are preceded in the present of 
the infinitive mood, is repeated immediately before the termination of 



FOURTH CONJUGATION : ENTENDRE, TO HEAR. 123 

each person, and as it constitutes itself the termination of the third 
person singular of the present of the indicative, I have exemplified it in 
Roman letters in the following verb. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Simple Tenses. 


Compound Tenses. 


PRESENT. 


PRETERIT. 


To hear, 
Enten^xe. 


To have heard. 
Avoir' entendu. 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE COI 


Hearing, 
jBn/ewdant. 


Having heard, 
Ayant entendu. 


PAST PARTICIPLE. 


PARTICIPLE FUTURE. 


Heard, 

Enfe?idu, ue ; us, ues. 


Being about to hear, 
Devant entendre. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

I hear, do hear, or am hearing, 
J'eniends. 

Thou hearest, dost hear, or art hearing, 

Tu entendu. 

He hears, does hear, or is hearing, 

// entend. 

She hears, does hear, or is hearing, 

Elle entend. 

We hear, do hear, or are hearing, 

Nous entendoxis. 

You hear, do hear, or are hearing, 

Vous entendez. 

They hear, do hear, or are hearing, 
I/s or Eiles entendeut. 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

I have heard, 
J'ai entendw. 

Thou hast heard, 
Tu as entendvL. 

He has heard, 
J/ a enfendn. 

She has heard, 
El/e a entendu. 

We have heard, 
Not/s avons entetidu. 

You have heard, 
Pbus avez entendu. 



Tliey have heard, 

I/s or E//es ont entendu. 



IMPERFECT. 



PLUPERFECT. 



I did hear, 
J'entenddl^. 

Thou didst hear, 
Tu entenddtX^. 

He did hear, 
// entendaii. 

She did hear, 
Elle enteriddii. 

We did hear. 
Nous entendh.oxiS. 



I had heard, 
J'avais entendu. 

Thou hadst heard, 
Tu avais entendu. 

He had heard, 
// avait entendu. 

She had heard, 
Elle avait entendu. 

We had heard. 
Nous avians entendu. 



G 2 



124 FOURTH CONJUGATION : ENTENDRE, TO HEAR. 



You did hear, 
Fous entendiQZ. 

They did hear, 

lis or El/es enten^axQiii. 



You had heard, 
Vous aviez entendxx. 

They had heard, 

lis or Elles avaient entendu. 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. - 

I heard, 
J'eniendis. 

Thou heardst, 
Tu entendis. 

He heard, 
// entenCdt. 

She heard, 
EUe entendii. 

We heard. 
Nous entend\TCiQ^. 

You heard, 
Foiis entendxiQS. 

They heard, 

lis or Elles e«/endirent. 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 

I had heard, 
J'eus entendn. 

Thou hadst heard, 
Tu eus entendn. 

He had heard, 
// eut entaidu. 

She had heard, 
Elle eut entendn. 

We had heard. 
Nous eumes entendn. 

You had heard, 
Vous elites entendn. 

They had heard, 

//* or Elles eurent entendn. 



FUTURE SIMPLE. 

I shall hear, 
*/'6'«/e«drai. 

Thou wilt hear, 
Tu entendtas. 

He will hear, 
// entendra.. 

She will hear, 
Elle entendra.. 

We shall hear, 
Norn entendtons. 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

I shall have heard, 
Xaurai entendn. 

Thou wilt have heard, 
Tu au?'as entendn. 

He will have heard, 
// aura e7itendn. 

She will have heard, 
Elle aziTa entendn. 

We shall have heard. 
Nous atirona entendn. 



*1. 1 am to hear, 
Je dois entendre. 

Thou art to hear, 
Tu dois entendre. 

He is to hear, 
11 doit entendre. 

She is to hear, 
Elle doit entendre. 

We are to hear. 
Nous devons entendre. 

Ye or you are to hear, 
Vous devez entendre. 

They are to hear, 

lis or Elles doivent entendre. 



2. I was to hear, 
Je devais entendre. 

Thou wast to hear, 
Tu devais entendre. 

He was to hear, 
// devait entendre. 

She was to hear, 
Elle devait entendre. 

We were to hear. 
Nous devions entendre. 

Ye or you were to hear, 
Vous deviez entendre. 

They were to hear, 

//* or E/les devaient entendre. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION: ENTENDRE, TO HEAR. 125 



You will hear, 
Fous entenAxQZ. 

They will hear, 

lis or EUes enten^xo-ai. 



You will have heard, 
Fous aurez entendio.. 

They will have heard, 
lis or EUes miront e«/e«du. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

I should hear, 
T entendsoSs. 

Thou wouldst hear, 
Tu e«/e«drais. 

He would hear, 
// enten^xidxt. 

She would he^ir, 
Elle ^7?^e«drait. 

We should hear, 
Nous eH/<'ndrions. 

You would hear, 
Vcftis ew^e-rtdriez. 

They would hear, 

//* or Elks ert/e/idraient 



I should have heard, 
Tmtrais or Teusse entendu. 

Thou wouldst have heard, 
Tu aurais or Tu eusses entendn. 

He would have heard, 
// aurait or // eut entendn. 

She would have heard, 

Elle await or Elle eut entendn. 

We should have heard. 

Nous aurions or Nous eussions entendn. 

You would have heard, 

f^ous <xu7iez or Foua eussiez entendn. 

They would have heard, 
lis or EUes auraient or lis or EUes eus- 
sent entendu. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT OR FUTURE. 



Hear (thou), 
Let him hear. 
Let her hear, 
Let us hear. 
Hear (ye or you). 
Let them hear, 



Entends. 

Qu'il entende. 

QiCelle entende. 

E?ifendons. 

Entendez. 

Quails or Qu'elles entendent. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

That I may hear. 
Que f entende. 

That thou mayst hear. 
Que tu entendes. 

That he may hear, 
Qu^il entende. 

That she may hear, 
Qu'eUe entende. 

That we may hear, 
Ql^e nous entendions. 

That you may hear. 
Que vous eniendiez. 

That they may hear, 
QuUls or Qu^elles entendeni. 



PRETERIT. 



That I may have heard, 
Quefaie entendn. 

That thou mayst have heard. 
Que tu aies entendn. 

That he may have heard, 
Qu''il cat entendn. 

That she may have heard, 
Quelle ait entendn. 

That we may have heard, 
Que fious ayons entendn. 

Tliat you may have heard. 
Que vous ayez entendn. 

That they may have heard, 
Qifih or Qu'cUes aient entendn. 



126 FOURTH CONJUGATION : ENTENDRE, TO HEAR. 



IMPERFECT. 

That I might hear, 
Que fentendisse. 

That thou mightst hear, 
Qife tu e^i^endisses. 

That he might hear, 
Qu'il entendiii. 

That she might hear, 
Qu'elle entendiii. 

"That we might hear, 
Que nous e/i/ewdissions. 

That you might hear. 
Que vous €nte?idissiez. 

That they might hear, 
Qu'ils or Qt^elles entendxs&Qui. 



PLUPERFECT. 

That I might have heard. 
Que f eusse entendu. 

That thovi mightst have heard. 
Que tu eusses entendu. 

That he might have heard, 
Qu'il eiit entendu. 

That she might have heard, 
Qi^elle eut entendxx. 

That we might have heard. 
Que nous eussions entendu. 

That 5^ou might have heard. 
Que votis eussiez entendxx. 

That they might have heard, 
QuHls or Qii'elles eussent entendn. 



ADDITIONAL TENSES. 



PAST JUST ELAPSED. 

I have just heard, 
Je viens (Pentendre. 
Thou hast heard, 
Tu viens (T entendre. 

He has just heard, 
// vient d'' entendre. 
She has just heard, 
Elle vient d"" entendre. 

We have just heard, 
Nous venons d^ entendre. 

You have just heard, 
Vous venez d^ entendre. 

They have just heard, 

Ik or Elles viennent d'' entendre. 



PAST ELAPSED BEFORE ANOTHER 
THING OR ACTION TOOK PLACE. 
I had just heard, 
Je venais d'entendre. 

Thou hadst just heard, 
Tu venais d^ entendre. 

He had just heard, 
Ilvencdt d^ entendre. 

She had just heard, 
Elle venait d^entendre. 

We had just heard, 
Nozis venions d' entendre. 

You had just heard, 

Vous veniez d^eniendre. 

They bad just heard, 

Us or Elles venaient d'entendre. 



Conjugate, after the same manner, the followhig verbs which, with 
entendre, are the only regular ones of this conjugation. 



Jppendre, 
Atlendre, 

Condescendre, 

Cofifondre, 

Correspondre, 

DefendrCf 

Demordre, 

Dependre, 

Descendre, 

Detendre, 
Dttordre, 



to append. 

to wait or wait for ; to 

expect, 
to condescend, 
to confound, 
to correspond, 
to defend, to forbid, 
to recede from. 
to depend, 
to come or go down, to 

descend, to take down, 
to unbend, 
to untwist. 



Distendre, 

Epandre, 

Etendre, 

Fendre, 

Fondre, 

Mtvendre, 

Mordre, 

Parfondre, 

Pendre, 

Perdre, 

Pondre, 

Pourfendre, 



to distend, 
to scatter, 
to spread, 
to cleave, 
to melt, 
to vuidersell. 
to bite. 

to melt equally, 
to hang, 
to lose, 
to lay eggs, 
to split a man in two 
with a single blow. 



HOW TO FIND THE DIFFERENT TENSES. 



127 



PrHendre, 


to pretead. 


Retordre, 


to tmst again. 


Refeiidre, 


to split or cleave again. 


Revendre, 


to sell again, to sell by 


Refondre, 


to melt or cast again. 




retail. 


Remordre, 


to bite again. 


Se morfondre, 


to wait in vain : to catch 


Rendre, 


to render, to return. 




cold upon heat. 


Ripandre, 


to spill, to shed, to spread 


Sous-entendre, 


to understand. 


Rejjendre, 


to hang up again. 


Survendre, 


to sell too dear. 


Reperxlre, 


to lose again. 


Suspendre, 


to suspend. 


Re pond re, 


to answer, to reply. 


Tendre, 


to bend, to lay. 


Rttendre, 


to stretch again. 


Tundre, 


to shear. 


Retendre, 


to bend again. 


Tordre, 


to twist. 


Retondre, 


to shear again. 


Veyidre, 


to sell. 



Any other verb ending in re, in the present of the infinitive mood, is 
irregular, and must be conjugated after its own model, as exemplified 



under the article of irres-ular verbs. 



Manner of finding the different Tenses and Persons of regular 
Verbs, from the Knowledge of the Infinitive. 

The simplest manner of finding the different tenses and persons of 
regular verbs is to derive, first, from the present cf the infinitive, the 
first person singular of eVery tense, and then to deduce the other persons 
from the first, as follows : — 

First Conjugation : Parler, to speak. 

In verbs of the first conjugation, the termination er of the present of the infini- 
tive is changed into ant, for the present participle ; e accentexl with an acute accent, 
for the past participle ; e mute, for the first person singular of the present of the 
indicative ; o/s, for the imperfect ; ai, for the preterit definite ; erai, for the future ; 
errtiV, for the conditional; e mute, for the imperative and the present of the sub- 
junctive; and asse, for the imperfect: as, — parle-;-, parl««t, parle, je parlp, je 
parlw'y, je parlm, je parleror/, je parler«is, parle, que je parle, que je parla*se. 

Second Conjugation : Finir, to finish. 



In verbs of the second conjugation, the termination 
infinitive is changed into issont. for the present participle ; 



> of the present -of the 
i, for the past participle ; 
is, for the present of the indicative ; issais, for the imperfect ; is, for the preterit 
definite ; irai, for the future ; i?'ais, for the conditional ; is, for the imperative ; 
isse, for the present of the subjunctive ; and isse, for the imperfect : as, — finir, 
Unissanf, fin/, je fin/s, je Q.nissais, je finjs, je finirai, je ^ntrois, finis, que je finisse, 
que j e finisse. 

Third Conjugation : Recevoir, to receive. 

In verbs of the third conjugation, the termination evoir of the present of the 
infinitive is changed into evant, for the present participle; z/, for the past participle; 
ois, for the present of the indicative ; evais, for the imperfect ; m, for the preterit 
definite; evrai, for the fatnve ; evrais, for the conditional; ois, for the imperative; 
oive, for the present of the subjunctive ; and t/sse, for the imperfect : as, — vecevoir, 
vecevanf, le^i/, je recozs. je recevais, JQ re^/^, ]e xecevrai, je xecevrais, xecois, que je 
reqoive, que je recf/sse. 



128 HOW TO FIND THE PERSONS IN THE TENSES. 

Fourth Conjugation : Entendre, to hear. 

In verbs of the fourth conjugation, the termination dre of the present of the 
infinitive is changed into dant, for the present participle ; di/, for the past participle ; 
ds, for the present of the indicative ; dais, for the imperfect ; dis, for the preterit 
definite ; drai, for the future ; drais, for the conditional ; <^*, for the imperative ; 
de, for the present of the subjunctive ; and disse, for the imperfect : as, — entenri^re, 
entendant, entendu, j'entenc^, yentendais, yeniendis, j'entenc^m, j'entenc^rais, 
entencfc, que j'entenc^e, que j'entenc^me. 

When the first person singular of every tense is thus found, the 
others may be ascertained in the following manner : — 

PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE. 

Singular, 

1 . When the first person singular of the present of the indicative is terminated 
withe mute: a,s,—jepar/€; an* is added for the second, and the third is like the 
first : thus — je par/e, iu paries, il parle. 

2. When the first person singular ends with s: as, — je finis, je regois ; the second 
is like the first, and the s is changed into t for the third: thus, — je finis, fu finis, il 

finit ; je regois, tu regois, il regoit. 

3. When the first person singular is terminated with ds : as, — j^entends; the 
second is like the first, and the s is left out for the third : thus, — fentends, tu entends, 
il entend. 

Plural. 
The three persons plural of the present of the indicative are always 
terminated, in regular verbs, — 

1. With om, ez, ent, in those of the first conjugation: as, — nous parlons, vous 
parlez, ils parlew/. 

2. With issons, issez, issent, in those of the second: as, — nous ^nissons, vous 
finmez, ils fmissent. 

3. With evons, evez, oivent, in those of the third: as, — nous XQzevom, vous 
rec«;e2, ils xe^oivent. 

4. With dons, dez, dent, in those of the fourth: as, — nous entenrfo;?^, vous 
entenrfe;t, ils enten</e«^ 

IMPERFECT OF THE INDICATIVE. 

The imperfect of the indicative is terminated, in all regular verbs, — 

1. With ais, ais, ait, ions, iez, aienf, in those of the first conjugation: as, — je 
parlaw, tu parlcH*, il parlmV; nous parhons, vous Tparliez, ils ^arlaient. 
■ 2. With issais, issais, issait, issions, issiez, issaient, in those of the second : — as, — 
je finmm*, tu finmms, il Unissait ; nous finissions, vous fimssiez, ils ^nissazent. 

3. With evais, evais, evait, evions, eviez, evaient, in those of the third: as, — ^je 
xecevais, tu x&cevais, il recevait ; nous recevions, vous xeceviez, ils xecevaient. 

4. With dais, dais, dait, dions, diez, daient, in those of the fourth: as, — ^j'entent/rtis, 
tu ^niexidais, il entenc/mV ; nous exiiendions, vous enten(/j>z, ils ^niQXidaient. 

PRETERIT DEFINITE OF THE INDICATIVE. 

This tense ends, in all regular verbs, — 

1. With ai, as, a, dmes, dtes, eretit, in those of the first conjugation : as,— je parlot, 
tu parl«5, il parla / nous parldme*, vous parla^w, ils parlere«/. 



\ 



HOW TO FIND THE PERSONS IN THE TENSES. 129 

2. With is, is, it, imes, ties, irent, in those of the second : as,— je fin^>, tu fin/s, 
il ^nit ; nous ^nimes, vous Unites, ils finiVew/. 

3. With us, us, ut, umes, utes, urent, in those of the third : as, — ^je xQgus, tu regus, 
il rea/t ; nous xequmes, vous xequtes, ils XQ^rent. 

4. With dis, dts, dit, dimes, dites, dirent, in those of the fourth: as, — j'entenc/w, 
tu enten^As, il QxiiQwdilj nous eni^ndimes, vous eniQwdites, ils enten<i»>e«/. 

FUTURE OF THE INDICATIVE. 

The future of the indicative ends, in all regular verbs, — 

1. With erai, eras, em, erons, erez, eront, in those of the first conjugation: as, — 
je parleroi, tu parlercw, il parle/'a; nous parlerow*, vous parlere^, ils -^axleront. 

2. With ii-ai, ii'as, ira, irons, irez, iront, in those of the second : as, — ^je finr/-a/, 
tu fimra*, il finj'ra; nous fimVows, vous ^wirez, ils ^wiront. 

3. With evrai, e.vras, evra, evrons, evrez, evront, in those of the third : as, — ^je 
XQcevrai, tu xQcev7'as, il xecevra ; nous xecevrons, vous xecevrez, ils xQcevront. 

4. With drui, dras, dra, drons, drez, dront, in those of the fourth: as, — j' enten- 
dreti, tu entenr^ra*, il entenc/ra; nous entenrfron*, vous QviiQudrez, ils entenc/ro/i/. 

CONDITIONAL PRESENT. 

This tense is always terminated, in all regular verbs, — 

1. With erais, erais, erait, erions, eriez, eraient, in those of the first conjugation: 
as, — je TpsLxlerais, tu parlera/s, il parleraiV; nous parlen'ow*, vous parlener, ils 
■pa.x\eraient. 

2. With irais, irais, irait, irions, iriez, iraieiif, in those of the second : as, — je 
finiVazs, tu finirais, il fin?>ai/; nous finmo;?*, vous ^niriez, ils dniraie/it. 

3. With evrais, evrais, evrait, evrions, evi-iez, evraient, in those of the third : as, 
— ^je XQCevrms, tu recei-ms, il xQcevrait ; nous xecevriotts, vous xQzevriez, ils rece- 
vruient. 

4. With drais, drais, drail, drions, driez, draient, in those of the fourth : as, — 
j'entenc/rai*, tu entenc/ra/s, il entent/rai'/ ; nous entenc/rj'o/i«, vous eniQwdriez, ils en- 
iQXidraient. 

IMPERATIVE. 

The terminations of this mood are : — 

1. E, e, ons, ez, e?d, in all regular verbs of the first conjugation: as, — parlg, qu'il 
parle; parlon*, parley, qvi'ils parl^Mf. 

2. Is, isse, issons, issez, issent, in those of the second: as, — fine's, qu'il fintsse; 
Gnissons, finmez, qu'ils Unissent. 

3. Ois, oive^ econs, evez, oivent, in those of the third: as, — xegois, qu'il xec^oive ; 
lecevons, xecevez, qu'ils xec^oivenf. 

4. Ds, de, dons, dez, dent, in those of the fourth: as, — entenr/s, qu'il entente; 
eniexidons, entcndez, qu'ils eniendent. 

PRESENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

This tense is terminated, in all regular verbs, — 

1. With e, es, e, ions, iez, ent, in those of the first conjugation : as, — que je parle, 
que tu parW, qu'il parle; que nous parh'ow*, que vous parhVz, qu'ils parlew^ 

2. With isse, isses, isse, issions, issiez, issent, in those of the second : as, — que je 
finme, que tu finmes, qu'il finisse ; que nous &nissions, que vous ^nissiez, qu'ils 
^nissent. 

3. With oive, oives, oive, evions, eviez, oivent, in those of the third: as, — que je 
regojve, que tu recoiVw, qu'il xQcpive ; que nous xecevions, que vous receive*, qu'ils 
xe^oivent. o 

G 5 



130 OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 

4. With de^ des, de, dions, diez, dent, in those of the fourth : as, — que j'entenrf^, 
que tu entente*, qu'il entent/e; que uous enteurfions, que vous entenrfjVz, qu'ils 
GrAendent. 

IMPERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

This tense has the four following terminations : — 

1. Asse, asses, at, assions, assiez, assent, in the regular verbs of the first conjugation: 
as, — que je parlasse, que tu parlasses, qu'il pariah y que nous parlassi'ows, que vous 
l^axlassiez, qu'ils ^oxXassent. 

2. Isse, isses, it, issions, issiez, issent, in those of the second : as, — que je finme, que 
tu ^nisses, qu'il ^mt ; que nous fin^ss^o^w, que vous ^nissiez, qu'ils ^nissent. 

3. Usse, usses, ut, ussions, nssiez, ussent, in those of the third : as, — que je reQwsse, 
que tu regusses, c^u^il xeqiit ; que nous xe^ussions, que vous xegiissiez, qu'ils regussent. 

4. Disse, disses, dit, dissions, dissiez, dissent, in those of the fourth : as, — que j'enten- 
disse, que tu enten^mes> qu'il Qniendit ; que nous QniQuxdissiom, que vous Qxiiendissiez, 
qu'ils Qniexidissent. 

As it would lead into explanations much too long and diffuse to give 
the terminations of the different tenses and persons of the irregular verbs, 
the learner must pay particular attention to their various models which 
are given hereafter. 



Of Reflective Verbs. 

Reflective verbs have not conjugations peculiar to themselves ; they 
admit precisely the same variations throughout all their tenses and 
persons as the verbs of the respective conjugations to which they 
belong. 

The pronoun se or s\ by which these verbs are preceded in the pre- 
sent of the infinitive mood and in its compound, in French, and also in 
the present participle and in its compound, must be changed, in those 
tenses, into the different objective personal pronouns representing the 
person or persons speaking or spoken to, according to the sense of the 
sentence : as, — to rise, to get up, se lever ; I have just got up, je viens 
de me lever ; thou hast just got up, tu viens de te lever ; he or she has 
just got up, il ou elle vient de se lever ; we have just got up, nous 
venons de nous lever ; you have just got up, vous venez de vous lever ; 
they have just got up, ils ou elles viennent de se lever. 

In the different tenses of the indicative, as likewise in those of the 
■ conditional and of the subjunctive, se or s^ is changed into je me, tu te, 
il ou elle se ; nous nous, vous vous, ils ou elles se, in the sense of 
myself, thyself, himself, herself or itself; ourselves, yourselves and 
themselves, either expressed or implied in English : as, — Je me flatte, I 
flatter myself; tu te flattes, thou flatterest thyself; &c. 

In the imperative, when the verb is used affirmatively, se or s^ is 
changed as follows : ex. — se lever, to rise ; leve-toi, rise thou ; qu^il ou 
qu'elle se leve, let him or her rise ; /eyon^-Nous, let us rise ; levez- 
vous, rise ye or you ; quHls ou qu^ elles se levent, let them rise. But, 
when the verb is used negatively, se or 5' admits of the following 



FIRST CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 131 

changes : — ne te leve pas, do not rise or rise not thou, qu'*il ou qu*elle 
ne se leve pas, let him or her not rise ; ne nous levons pas, let us not 
rise ; ne vous levez pas, do not rise or rise not ye or you ; quHls ou 
qw'elles ne se levent pas, let them not rise. 

The compound tenses of reflective verbs are formed by the addition of 
their past participle to the simple tenses of etre, with the pronouns 
je me, tu te, il ou elle se, nous nous, vous vous. Us ou elles se. These 
tenses are Englished by the corresponding ones of to have. The past 
participle of those verbs agrees in gender and number with its direct 
object, when this is represented by one of the personal pronouns me, te, se, 
nous, vous, which precede it ; as, — elle s^est beaucoup negligeE, she has 
neglected herself much ; nous nous sommes promenes ce maim, we have 
taken a walk this morning. 

When reflective verbs are used either in the affirmative, negative or 
interrogative, or also in the interrogative and negative form, the pro- 
nouns me, te, se, nous vous, must precede the verb in the simple tenses, 
and the auxiliary in the compound ones, except in the imperative mood, 
as exemplified above : as, — Je me promene, tu te promenes, il ou elle 
se promene ; nous nous promenons, vous vous promenez. Us ou elles se 
promenent ; je me suis promene, tu Ves promene, &c. — je ne me pro- 
mene pas, tu ne te promenes pas, &c. — je ne me suis pas promene, tu 
ne fes pas promene, &c. — me promenai$-je ? te promenais-tu ? &c. — 
ne me promenais-je pas 1 ne te promenais-tu pas ? &c. — ne m'etais-je 
pas promene 1 ne Vetais-tu pas pi^omene ? &c. 



First Conjugation of Reflective Verbs : Se promener, to loalk. 

Every reflective verb of this conjugation follows the same variations 
as — se promener. 

The three following : — aller, to go ; envoyer, to send ; and renvoyer, 
to send back ; if employed in a reflective way, are excepted : they require 
the same pronouns and in the same order as — se promener ; but, being 
irregular verbs, they are liable to the variations of their own conjugations, 
as exemplified hereafter under the article of irregular verbs. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Simple Tenses, Compound Tenses. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT. 

To walk, To have walked, 

Se promenQX. S'etre promenk, ou ee. 

PRESENT PARTICIPLE. PRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUXD. 

Walking, Having walked, 

Se promemwi. S'ttant promene, ou de. 

PAST PARTICIPLE. PARTICIPLE FUTURE. 

Walked, Being about to walk, 

Promene, ee ; es, ees. Devant se promenex. 



132 FIRST CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

I walk, do walk, or am walking, 
Je me promene. 

Thou walkest, dost walk, or art walking, 
Tu te promenes. 

He walks, does walk, or is walking, 
// se promene. 

She walks, does walk, or is walking, 
El/e se promene. 

We walk, do walk, or are walking, 
iVo?/* nous promenons. 

You walk, do walk, or are walking, 
Fims voi/s promenez. 

They walk, do walk, or are walking, 
lis ou E/les se promenent. 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

I have walked or been walking, 
Je me suis promene, ou ee. 

Thou hast walked or been walking, 
Tu t'es promene, ou ee. 

He has walked or been walking, 

II s' est promene. 

She has walked or been walking, 
Elle s''€st promenee. 

We have walked or been walking. 
Nous Tious somines promenes, ou ees. 

You have walked or been ■w^alking, 
Vous vous etes promenes, ou ees. 

They have walked or been walking, 
lis se sont promenes ou Elles se sont pro- 
menees. 



IMPERFECT. 



I was walking, 
Je me promenais. 

Thou wast walking, 
Tu te promenais. 

He was walking, 
// se prome?mit. 

She was walking, 
E/le se promenaii. 

We were walking, 
Nous nous promenions. 
You were walking, 
Fbus vous promeniez. 

They were walking, 

lis ou Elles se promenaievit. 



PLUPERFECT. 

I had walked or been walking, 
Je m'etais promene, ou ee. 

Thou hadst walked or been walking, 
Tu fitais promene, ou ee. 

He had walked or been walking, 
// s'etait promene. 

She had walked or been walking, 
Elle s'ttcdt promenee. 

We had walked or been walking, 
ISous nous ttions promenes, ou ees. 

You had walked or been walking, 
Vous vous etiez promenes, ou ees. 

They had walked or been walking, 
lis s'etaient promenes ou Elles s'ttaient 
promenees. 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I walked, 

Je me promenax. 

Thou walkedst, 
Tu te promenas. 

He walked, 
// se promena.. 

She walked, 
Elle se promena. 

We walked, 

Nous nous promenaxnes. 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 

I had walked, 

Je me fus promene, ou ee. 

Thou hadst walked, 
Tu te fus promene, ou ee. 

He had walked, 
// se fut promene. 
She had walked, 
Elle se Jut promenee. 

We had walked. 

Nous rums fumes promenes ^ oti ees 



FIRST CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 



133 



You walked, 

Fous vous promenaies. 

They walked, 

lis ou Ei/es se promenexent. 



FUTURE SIMPLE. 

I shall walk, 
*Je me promtnerai. 

Thou wilt walk, 
Tu te promenersLS. 

He will walk, 
// se promenera. 

She will walk, 
E/le se promenera. 

We shall walk, 

Nous nous promeneions. 

You will walk, 

Vous vous promenevez. 

They will walk, 

lis ou E//es se vromeneront. 



You had walked, 
Fous vous fates promenes, ou ees. 
They had walked, 
lis se furent promems ou Elles se 
furent promenk^^. 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

I shall have walked, 

Je me serai promenkj ou ee. 

Thou wilt have walked, 
Tu te seras promene, ou ee. 

He will have walked, 
// se sera prome?iL 

She will have walked, 
Elle se sera p?-ovjenee. 

We shall have walked. 

Nous nous sei'ons promeuks, ou ees. 

You will have walked, 

Fous vous serez promenes, ou ees. 

They will have walked, 
lis se seront promenk% ou Elles se 
seront p7'otnenees. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



PRESENT. 



I should walk, 
Je me promener ais. 

Thou wouldst walk, 
Tu te promenevais. 

He would walk, 
// se promaierait. 



PAST. 

I should have walked, 
Je me serais ou Je me fusse pronien^^ 
ou ee. 

Thou wouldst have walked, 
Tu te serais ou Tu te fusses promen^, 
ou ee. 

He would have walked, 

Jl se serait ou Jl se fut prwnend. 



1. 1 am to walk, 

Je dois me promener. 

Thou art to walk, 
Tu dois te promener. 
He is to walk, 
// doit se promener. 

She is to walk, 
Elle doit se promener. 

We are to walk, 

Nous devons nous promener. 

Ye or you are to walk, 
Fous devez vous promener. 

They are to walk, 

//4' ou Elles doivent se promener. 



* 2. 1 was to walk, 

Je devais me promener. 

Thou wast to walk, 
Tu dfvais te promener. 

He was to walk, 

// dfvait se promener. 

She was to walk, 

Elle devait se promener. 

We were to walk. 

Nous devious nous promener. 

Ye or you were to walk, 
Fous deviez vous promener. 

They were to walk, 

Jls ou Elles devaient se promener. 



134 FIRST CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERES. 



She would walk, 
Elle se promrnQxaJii. 

We should walk, 
Nous nous promenerions. 

You would walk, 
Fbus vous promenQXXQZ. 

They would walk, 

lis ou Elles se promenex aient. 



She would have walked, 

El/e se serait ou Elle sefutpromenQQ, 

We should have walked, 
Nous nous serions ou Nous nous fus- 
sions pi'07nenes, ou ees. 

You would have walked, 
Vous vous seriez ou Vous vous fiissiez 
promeneSy ou ees. 

They would have walked, 

lis se seraient ou lis se fussent pro- 

menQ^, ou Elles se seraient ou Elles 

se fussent p7'ome7iees. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT OR FUTURE. 

1. Affirmatively. 

Walk (thou), Promtne-toi. 

Let him walk, Qu^il se promene. 

Let her walk. Quelle se promene. 

Let us walk, Prome?ions-not(s. 

Walk (ye or you), Pt-oTnenez-vot/s. 

Let them walk, Qtt'ils ou Qic'elles se promhient. 



2. Negatively. 



Do not walk or walk not (thou), 

Let him not walk. 

Let her not walk. 

Let us not walk, 

Do not walk or walk not (ye or you), 

Let them not walk, 



Ne te promene pas. 

Qu''il ne se promene pas. 

Qi/elle ne se promene pas. 

Ne nons promenoxis pas. 

Ne vous promenez pas. 

Qu'ils ou Qu' elles ne se promenent pas. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 



PRETERIT. 



That I may walk. 
Que je ?ne promene. 

That thou mayst walk, 
Que tu te promenes. 

That he may walk, 
Qii'il se promene. 

That she may walk, 
Qu'elle se promene. 

That we may walk. 

Que 710US nous promenio'os. 

That you may walk, 
Que vous vous pronieniez. 

That they may walk, 

Qt/Hs ou Qi^ elles se promenent. 



That I may have walked. 
Que Je me sois promene, ou ee. 

That thou mayst have walked. 
Que tu te sois promene, ou ee. 

That he may have walked, 
Qi^il se soit promene. 

Tha»t she may have walked, 
Qu'elle se soit promenee. 

That we may have walked, 

Que nous nous soyons promenes, ou ees. 

That you may have walked, 

Que vous vous soyez promenes, ou ees. 

That they may have walked, 
Qu'ils se soient pi'omenes ou Qu^ elles se 
soient p?'07?ienees. 



SECOND CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 135 



IMPERFECT. 

That I might walk, 
Que je nie pfomenSLSse. 
That thou mightst walk, 
Que tu te prmnensLSses. 

That he might walk, 
Qu'il se promen^i. 

That she might walk, 
Qi^elle se pt'omendt. 

That we might walk, 

Que nous nous pro7nena.ssions. 

That you might walk, 
Que vous vous p7'omena.%^iQZ. 

That they might walk, 

Qi/ils ou Qitelles se pro/«e;?assent. 



PLUPERFECT. 

That I might have walked, 
Que je v\e fusse promenk, ou ee. 
That thou mighst have walked, 
Que tu te fusses promene, ou ee. 

That he might have walked, 
QuHl se flit promenL 

That she might have walked, 
Qu'elle se fiit promeneQ. 

That we might have walked, 
Que nous nous fussiom p7^ome>teS) ou ees. 
That you might have walked. 
Que vous vous fussiez promenes, ou ees. 
That they might have walked, 
Qi/ils se fussetit pro/nenes ou Qu'elles 
se fussent prometitQS. 



ADDITIONAL TENSES. 



PAST JUST ELAPSED. 



I have just heen walking, 
Je viens de me promener. 

Thou hast just been walking, 
Tu viens de te promener. 

He has just been walking, 
// vient de se promener. 

She has just been walking, 
E/le vient de se pi'omener. 

We have just been walking. 
Nous venons de nous promener. 

You have just been walking, 
Vous venez de vous promener. 

They have just been walking, 

lis ou Elles vienne?it de se profmener. 



PAST ELAPSED BEFORE ANOTHER 
THING OR ACTION TOOK PLACE. 
I had j ust been walking, 
Je venais de me promener. 

Thou hadst j ust been walking, 
Tu venais de te prouiener. 

He had just been walking, 
// venait de se promener. 

She had just been walking, 
El/e venait de se promener. 

We had just been walking, 
Nous venions de jious promener. 

You had just been walking, 
P'ous veniez de vous promener. 

They had just been walking, 

I/s ou E//es vencdent de se promener. 



Second Conjugation of Reflective Verbs : Se rejouir, to rejoice. 

Conjugate after the following manner every reflective regular verb of 
this conjugation. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Simple Tenses. 
PRESENT. 

To rejoice, 
Se rejouiv. 

PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
Rejoicing, 
Se r^owissant. 



Compound Tenses. 

PRETERIT. 

To have rejoiced, 
S''etre rejoui, ou ie. 

PRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUND. 
Having rejoiced, 
S'Hant rtjoui, ou ie. 



136 SECOND CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 



PAST PARTICIPLE. 

Rejoiced, 
Rejoui, ie ; is, ies. 



PARTICIPLE FUTURE. 

Being about to rejoice, 
Devant se rejauxx. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

I rejoice, do rejoice, or am rejoicing, 
Je me rejouis. 

Thou rejoicest, dost rejoice, or art rejoicing, 
Tu te rejoins. 

He rejoices, does rejoice, or is rejoicing, 
// se rejouit. 

She rejoices, does rejoice, or is rejoicing, 
El/e se rtjouit. 

We rejoice, do rejoice, or are rejoicing, 
I^otfs nous rc^'owissons. 

You rejoice, do rejoice, or are rejoicing, 
Vous vous rejouissez. 

Tliey rejoice, do rejoice, or are rejoicing, 
I/s ou E^les se rejouisseut. 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

I have rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
Je me szfis rejoui, ou ie. 

Thou hast rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
Tu fes rejoui, ou ie. 

He has rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
// s'est rejoui. 

She has rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
Eiie s'est rejouie. 

We have rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
Nous nous sommes rejouis, ou ies. 
You have rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
Fbus vous etes rejouis, ou ies. 
They have rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
lis se sont rejoui?, ou Elks se sont rejouies. 



IMPERFECT. 

I was rejoicing, 
Je me re/owissais. 

Thou wast rejoicing, 
Tu te re/o«issais. 

He was rejoicing, 
1/ se rejouissait. 

She was rejoicing, 
Elle se re/owissait. 

We were rejoicing. 
Nous nous r<?;o?/issions. 

You were rejoicing, 
Vous vous rej niissiez. 

They were rejoicing, 

lis ou Elles sc rejot/issaient. 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I rejoiced, 
Je me rejoins. 

Thou rejoicedst, 
Tu te rejouis. 

He rejoiced, 
// se rejouit. 

She rejoiced, 
Elle se rejouit. 



PLUPERFECT. 

I had rejoiced or been rejoicing, 

Je m'etais rejoui, ou ie. 

Thou hadst rejoiced or been rejoicing, 

Tu fetais rejoui, ou ie. 

He had rejoiced or been rejoicing, 

llittait I'ejoui. 

She had rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
Elle s'etait rejouie. 
We had rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
Noits nous ttions rejouis, ou ies. 

You had rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
Fous vous eliez rejouis, ou ies. 
They had rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
lis s^etcdent rejouis ou Elles ^etaieni 
rejouies. 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 

I had rejoiced, 

Je me fus rejoui, ou ie. 

Thou hadst rejoiced, 
Tu te fus rejoui, ou ie. 

He had rejoiced, 
// se fut rejoui. 

She had rejoiced, 
Elle se fut rejouie. 



SECOND CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 137 



We rejoiced, 

Nous nous rejotnmes. 

You rejoiced, 
Fbus vous rejouites. 

They rejoiced, 

I/s ou E//es se re/Wrent. 



We had rejoiced, 

Nous nous fumes rtj wis, ou ies. 

You had rejoiced, 

Fbus vous fides rejouis, ou ies. 

They had rejoiced. 
J/s se furent rejou'is ou EUes se furent 
rejouies. 



FUTURE SIMPLE. 

* I shall rejoice, 
Je me rejouirsii. 

Thou wilt rejoice, 
Tu te rejotaxdiS. 
He will rejoice, 
// te rejou'xra.. 
She Avill rejoice, 
E//e se re/oj/ira- 
We shall rejoice. 
Nous nous rejou'iTons. 

You will rejoice, 
Fbus vous rejouirez. 

They will rejoice, 

I/s ou E//es se rejouivont 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

I shall have rejoiced, 
Je me serai rejoia, ou ie. 
Thou wilt have rejoiced, 
Tu te seras rejoin, ou ie. 
He will have rejoiced, 

II se sera rejoui. 

She will have rejoiced, 
E//e se sera rejouie. 
We shall have rejoiced, 
Nous nous serons rej'ouis, ou ies. 

You will have rejoiced, 
Fbus vous serez rejoins, ou ies. 
They will have rejoiced, 
I/s te seront rejouis, ou EUes se seront 
rejouies. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

I should rejoice, 
Je me rejouixd^is. 
Thou woiddst rejoice, 
Tu te rpyottirais. 

He would rejoice, 
// se re/'o?/irait. 



♦1.1 am to rejoice, 
Je dois me rejoui)'. 

Thou art to rejoice, 
Tu dois te rejouir. 

He is to rejoice, 
11 doit se rejouir. 
She is to rejoice, 
Elle doit se rejouir. 
We are to rejoice. 
Nous devons nout rejouir. 

Ye or you are to rejoice, 
Fbus devez vous rejouir. 

They are to rejoice, 

I/s ou E//es doivent se rejouir. 



PAST. 

I should have rejoiced, 

Je me serais ou Je mefusse rejoui, ou ie. 

Thou wouldst have rejoiced, 

Tu te serais ou Tu te fusses rejoin, ou ie. 

He would have rejoiced, 

// se serai t ou I/sefut rejoui. 



2. I was to rejoice, 
Je devais me rejouir. 
Thou wast to rejoice, 
Tu devais te rejouir. 

He was to rejoice, 
// devait se rejouir. 
She was to rejoice, 
E/le devait se rejouir. 
We were to rejoice, 
Nous devious nous rejouir. 
Ye or you were to rejoice, 
Fous deviez vous rejouir. 

They were to rejoice, 

I/s ou E//es devaient se rejouir. 



138 SECOND CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 



She would rejoice, 
Elle se re;Wirait. 

We should rejoice, 
Nous 710US ^rjoMirions; 

You would rejoice, 
F(ms vous rejouiviez. 

They would rejoice, 

Bs ou Eiles se re/owiraient. 



She would have rejoiced, 
E^le se serait ou El^e sefuf reJmAe. 
We should have rejoiced. 
Nous tious serio?is ou Nous nous fussions 
rejouis, ou ies. 

You would have rejoiced, 
Foils vous seriez ou Fous vous fussiez 
rejouis, ou ies. 

They would have rejoiced, 

lis se seraient ou lis se fmsent reJouis, 
ou Elles se seraient ou Elles se fm- 
sent rej'ouies. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT OR FUTURE. 



1, Affirmatively. 



Rejoice (thou). 
Let him rejoice, 
Let her rejoice. 
Let us rejoice. 
Rejoice (ye or you), 
Let them rejoice. 



Hej'ouis-toi. 

QiHil se rejouisse. 

Qu^elle se rejouisse. 

Hejmdssons-Hous. 

Rej'ouissez-vous. 

Qu''ils ou Qu'elles se rejouissent. 



2. Negatively. 



Do not rejoice or rejoice not (thou). 

Let him not rejoice. 

Let her not rejoice, 

Let us not rejoice. 

Do not rejoice or rejoice not (ye or you). 

Let them not rejoice. 



Ne te rejouis pas. 

Qii'il ne se rejouisse pas. 

Qu^elle ne se rejotasse pas. 

Ne nous rejoiAssons pas. 

Ne vous rejouissez pas. 

Qiiils ou Qu' elles ne se re;bMissent pas. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 



PRETERIT. 



That I may rejoice. 
Que je me rejouisse. 

That thou mayst rejoice. 
Que fu te rejouisses. 

That he may rejoice, 
QuHl se rejouisse. 

That she may rejoice, 
Qttelle se rejouisse. 

That we may rejoice, 
Que nous ?ious rejouissions. 

That you may rejoice. 
Que vous vous rejouissiez. 

That they may rejoice, 

Qu''ils ou Qu elles se rejomsserd. 



That I may have rejoiced. 
Que je me sois rejoui, ou ie. 

That thou mayst have rejoiced. 
Que tu te sois rejoui, ou ie. 

That he may have rejoiced, 
Qi/il se soit rejoui. 

That she may have rejoiced, 
Qu^elle se soit rejouie. 

That we may have rejoiced. 

Que no?js nous soyo^is rejouis, ou ies. 

That you may have rejoiced, 
Que vous vous soyez rejouis, ou ies. 

That they may have rejoiced, 
QuHls se soient rejouis ou Qu^elles 
soient rejouies. 



THIRD CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 139 



IMPERFECT. 

That I might rejoice, 
Que je me rkjoms^Q. 

That thou mightst rejoice. 
Que tu te r^owisses. 

That he might rejoice, 
Qu'il se rejouit. 

That she might rejoice, 
Qx^elle se rejouit. 

That we might rejoice, 
Que nous fious rc/Wissions. 

That you might rejoice, 
Que vous vous rejouiasiGZ. 

That they might rejoice, 
Qu^i/s ou Qu'eUes se ry'o?nssent. 



PLUPERFECT. 

That I might have rejoiced, 
Que je me fusse rejoui, ou ie. 

That thou mightst have rejoiced. 
Que hi te fusses rejoui, ou ie. 

That he might have rejoiced, 
Qu'i/ se fut rejoin. 

That she might have rejoiced, 
Qu^elle se fut rejouie. 

That we might have rejoiced. 

Que nous nous fissions rejouis, ou ies. 

That you might have rejoiced, 
Que vous vous fussiez rejouis, ou ies. 

That they might have rejoiced, 
Qu'iis se fussent rejouis, ou Qu^elles se 
fussent rejozaes. 



ADDITIONAL TENSES. 



PAST JUST ELAPSED. 

I have just rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
Je viens de me rejouir. 

Thou hast just rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
Tu viens de te rejouir. 

He has just rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
// vie}it de se rejouir. 

She has just rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
Elle vient de se rejouir. 

We have just rejoiced or been rejoicing. 
Nous ve7io?is de nous rejouir. 

Yoii have just rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
Vous venez de vous rejoidr. 

They have just rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
Us ou Elles viennent de se rejouir. 



PAST ELAPSED BEFORE ANOTHER 
THING OR ACTION TOOK PLACE. 

I had just rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
Je venais de me rejouir. 

Thou hadst just rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
Tu venais de te rejouir. 

He had just rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
// venait de se rejoidr. 

She had just rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
Elle venait de se rejouir. 

We had just rejoiced or been rejoicing. 
Nous venions de nous rejouir, 

You had just rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
Fbus veniez de vous 7'ejouir. 

They had just rejoiced or been rejoicing, 
// ou E/les venaient de se 7'ejouir. 



Third Covjugation of Reflective Verbs : S'apercevoir, to perceive. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Compound Tenses. 



Simple Tenses. 

PRESENT. 

To perceive, 
<S'a/)ercevoir. 

PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
Perceiving, 
S'apercevdint. 



PRETERIT. 



To have perceived, 
S'etre aperga. 



PRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUND. 



Having perceived, 
S'etant apergw.. 



140 THIRD CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 



PAST PARTICIPLE. 

Perceived, 
AperQM, ue ; us, ues. 



PARTICIPLE FUTURE. 

Being about to perceive, 
Devant s'ojoercevoir. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

I perceive or do perceive, 
Je m'apergois. 

Thou perceivest or dost perceive, 
Tu fapergoxs. 

He perceives or does perceive, 
// s^apergoii. 

She perceives or does perceive, 
Elle s'apergoxi. 

We perceive or do perceive, 
Nous nous apercQxoxiS. 

You perceive or do perceive, 
Fbus vous apercQsei. 

They perceive or do perceive, 
lis ou Elks s'flfjoerfoivent. 

IMPERFECT. 

I was perceiving, 
Je m apercevais. 

Thou wast perceiving, 
Tu fapercexais. 

He was perceiving, 
// s'apercexa.it. 

She was perceiving, 
Elle s^apercewaii. 

We were perceiving. 
Nous 7WUS apercQvions. 

You were perceiving, 
Fous vous apercQv'iQi. 

They were perceiving, 
lis ou Elles «' wjoercev aient. 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I perceived, 
Je nCapergxiS. 

Thou perceivedst, 
Tu fapergns. 

He perceived, 

II s'ttpergni. 

She perceived, 
Elle ^ aper gwi. 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

I have perceived or been perceiving, 
Je me suis apergii, ou ue. 

Thou hast perceived or been perceiving, 
Tu fes apergu, ou ue. 

He has perceived or been perceiving, 
lis s'est apergu. 

She has perceived or been perceiving, 
Elle s^est apergue. 

We have perceived or been perceiving, 
Nous nous sommes apergiis, ou ues. 

You have perceived or been perceiving, 
P^ous vous etes apergnsy ou ues. 
They have perceived or been perceiving, 
lis se sont aperg\x% ou Ellcs se snni 
opergues. 

PLUPERFECT. 

I had perceived, 

Je m'etcus apergu, ou ue. 

Thou hadst perceived, 
Tu fetais apergu, ou ue. 

He had perceived, 
// s'etait apergu. 

She had perceived, 
Elle s'etait apergue. 
We had perceived. 
Nous 710US etions apergus, ou ues. 

You had perceived, 

Fbtis vous etiez apergus, ou ues. 

They had perceived, 
lis s'etaient apergus ou Elles s'etaient 
aperguQs. 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 

I had perceived, 

Je me /us apergu, ou ue. 

Thou hadst perceived, 
Tu te fus apergu^ ou ue. 

He had perceived. 
Use fid apergu. 

She had perceived, 
Elle se fid apercxxa. 



THIRD CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 141 



We perceived. 

Nous nous aper^nraes. 

You perceived, 
Fbus vous aperguies. 

They perceived, 

J/s ou El/es «'rt/>erf urent. 



FUTURE SIMPLE. 

* I shall perceive, 
Je m'apercevTa.i. 

Thou wilt perceive, 
Tu fapercevias. 

He will perceive, 
// s'aperceyra. 
She will perceive, 
El/e s" apercesxQ.. 
We shall perceive, 
Nous nous apercewons. 
You will perceive, 
Fbus vous apercevrez. 

They will perceive, 

JIs ou Elles s'apercevxont. 



We had perceived. 

Nous nous fumes apergus, ou ues. 

You had perceived, 

Fous vous futes apergus, ou ues. 

They had perceived, 
lis sefurent apergns ou Elles se furent 
apergues. 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

I shall have perceived, 
Je Tne serai apergn, ou ue. 
Thou wilt have perceived, 
Tu ie seras aper^u, ou ue. 
He will have perceived, 
// se sera apergu. 

She Avill have perceived, 
Elle se sera apergue. 

We shall have perceived, 
Nous 710US serons apergns, ou ues. 

You will have perceived, 
Fbtis vous serez apergus, ou ueg. 

They will have perceived, 
lis se seront apergxxs ou Elles se seroni 
apergues. 



PRESENT. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



I should perceive, 
Je ni'apercevxa.is. 

Thou wouldst perceive, 
Tu /'o/jcrcevrais. 



PAST. 

I should have perceived, 

Je me serais ou Je me fusse apergu, 

ou ue. 
Thou wouldst have perceived, 
Tu te serais ou Tu te fusses aperfu, 
ou ue. 



* 1. I am to perceive, 
Je dois m'apercevoir. 

Thou art to perceive, 
Tu dois fapercevoir. 

He is to perceive, 
JL doit s'apercevoir. 

She is to perceive, 
Elle doit s' apercevoir. 

We are to perceive, 

Nous devons nous apercevoir. 

Ye or you are to perceive, 
Vous devez vous apercevoir. 

They are to perceive, 

lis ou Elles doivent s' apercevoir. 



2. I was to perceive, 
Je devais 7n apercevoir. 
Thou wast to perceive, 
Tu devais f apercevoir. 

He was to perceive, 
// devait s' apercevoir. 
She was to perceive, 
Elle devait s' apercevoir. 

We were to perceive. 

Nous devions nous apercevoir. 

Ye or you were to perceive, 
Fous deviez vans apercevoir. 

They were to perceive, 

lis ou Elles devaiaU s' apercevoir 



142 THIRD CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 



He would perceive, 
11 s' apercQV xaii. 

She would perceive, 
Elle s apercewxahi. 

We should perceive, 
Nous nous c^ercevrions. 

You would perceive, 
Vous vous apercevriez. 

They would perceive, 

lis ou El/es 5'a/9ercevraient. 



He would have perceived, 
// se serait apergu. 

She would have perceived, 
EUe se serait apergne. 

We should have perceived. 
Nous nous serious ou Nous nousfiissions 
apergxxs, ou ues. 

You would have perceived, 
Vous vous seriez ou Vous votes fussiez 
apergus, ou ues. 

They would have perceived, 

1/s se seraient ou I/s se fussent apergus, 
ou Elles se seraie7it ou Elles se fus- 
sent ajoerpues. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT OR FUTURE. 
1. Affirmatively. 



Perceive (thou), 
Let him perceive. 
Let her perceive, 
Let us perceive. 
Perceive (ye or you). 
Let them perceive. 



Perceive not (thou). 
Let him not perceive, 
Let her not perceive, 
Let VIS not perceive. 
Perceive not (ye or you). 
Let them not perceive, 



Apergoi^-toi. 

Qiiil sapergo\VQ. 

Qiielle i aperg(m%. 

Apercevons-nous. 

Apercevez-^ous. 

QuHls ou Qu' elles s'a/jerpoivent. 



2. Negatively. 



Ne fapergois pas. 

Qu'il ne s''apergo\ve pas. 

Quelle ne s^apergoivQ pas. 

Ne nous apercevons pas. 

Ne vous cfjoercevez pas. 

Quils ou Qu' elles ne s" apeJ'goivQni pas. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

That I may perceive, 
Que je m'apergoive. 

That thou mayst perceive. 
Que tu fapergoives. 

That he may perceive, 
Qu'il s'apergoive. 

That she may perceive, 
Quelle s'apergoive. 

That we may perceive. 
Que nous nous ajoercevions. 

That you may perceive. 
Que vous vous uperceviez. 

That they may perceive, 
QuHls ou Qu^elles s'apergovfQxA. 



PRETERIT. 

That I may have perceived, 
Queje me sois apergu, ou ue. 

That thou mayst have perceived, 
Que tu te sois apergu, ou ue. 

That he may have perceived, 
Qiiil se soit apergu. 

That she may have_ perceived, 
Qu'elle se soit aperguQ. 

That we may have perceived. 

Que nous ?ious soyons apergns, ou ues. 

That you may have perceived. 
Que vous vous soyez apergns, on ues. 

That they may have perceived, 
Qu''ils se soient apergus ou Qu' elles se 
soient ope/'fues. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 143 



IMPERFECT. 

That I might perceive, 
Que je tti'apet'gusse. 
That thou mightst perceive, 
Que tu f apergusses. 

That he might perceive, 
Qu'il s'opergut. 

That she might perceive, 
Qu'e//e s'apergnt. 

That we might perceive, 
Que nous nous apergussions. 

That you might perceive. 
Que vous vous a/^erpussiez. 

That they might perceive, 
Qu^i/s ou Qu'eHes s'apergiisseni. 



PLUPERFECT. 

That I might have perceived. 
Que je me fusse apergvi, ou ue. 

That thou mightst have perceived, 
Que tu te fusses apergn, ou ue. 

That he might have perceived, 
Qt/il se fut apergu. 

That she might have perceived, 
Qtcelle se fut apergue. 

That we might have perceived, 

Que nous nous fussions apergus, ou ues. 

That you mdght have perceived, 
Que vous vous fussiez apergus, ou ues. 
That they might have perceived, 
Qu'i/s se fusseni upergns ou Queiles se 
fussent apergues. 



ADDITIONAL TENSES. 



PAST JUST ELAPSED. 



PAST ELAPSED BEFORE ANOTHER 
THING OR ACTION TOOK PLACE. 

I had just perceived, 
Je vaiais de m'apercevoir. 

Thou hadst just perceived, 
Tu venais de fapercevoir. 

He had just perceived, 

II venait de s^ apercevoir. 

She had just perceived, 

''apercevoir. 



Elle venait de 



I have just perceived, 
Je viens de fn' apercevoir. 

Tliou hast just perceived, 
Tu viens de (apercevoir. 

He has just perceived, 

II vient de s' apercevoir . 

She has just perceived, 
Elle vient de s' apercevoir . 

We have just perceived, 
Nous venons de nous apercevoir. 

You have just perceived, 
P7)us venez de vous apercevoir. 

They have j ust perceived, 

lis ou Elles viennent de s apercevoir. 

If any otlier regular verb of the third conjugation should be used 
reflectively, it must follow the example which has just been given. 



We had just perceived. 

Nous venions de nous apercevoir. 

You had just perceived, 
Fous veniez de vous apercevoir. 

They had just perceived, 

lis ou E/les venaient de s' apercevoir . 



Fourth Conjugation of Reflective Verbs : Se rendre,* to surrender. 

Every reflective regular verb of this conjugation follows the same 
variations as — se rendre. 



Simple Tenses. 

PRESENT. 

To surrender, 
Se rewdre. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Compound Tenses. 

PRETERIT. 

To have surrendered, 
S'etre re«du, ou due. 



"'■' This verb signifies also, to repair, to go to, to lead to. 



144 FOURTH CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 



PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
Surrendering, 
Se rewdant. 

PAST PARTICIPLE. 
Surrendered, 
Rendu, due ; dus, dues. 



PRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUND. 
Having surrendered, 
S'etant rendu, mi due. 

PARTICIPLE FUTURE. 

Being about to surrender, 
Devant se rendxe. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

I surrender, do surrender, or am surren- I have surrendered. 



Je me rends. [dering, 

Thou surrenderest, dost surrender, or art 
Tu te rends. [surrendering, 

He surrenders, does surrender, or is sur- 
i/ se rend. [rendering. 

She surrenders, does surrender, or is sur- 
Elle se rend. [rendering, 

"We surrender, do surrender, or are sur- 
Nous nous rendons. [rendering. 

You surrender, do surrender, or are sur- 
Fous vous rewdez. [rendering, 

They surrender, do surrender, or are sur- 
Ils ou Elles se rendent. [rendering, 

IMPERFECT. 

I was surrendering, 
Je me rendais. 

Thou vrast surrendering, 
Tu te re«dais. 

He was surrendering, 
// se rendait. 

She was surrendering, 
Elle se rewdait. 

We were surrendering, 
' Nous nous rcndions. 

You were surrendering, 
Fous vous rendiez. 

They were surrendering, 
lis ou E//«s se r^ndaient. 



Je me suis rendu, ou due. 

Thou hast surrendered, 
Tu fes rendu, ou due. 

He has surrendered, 
// s'est rendu. 

She has surrendered, 
Elle s'est r^ndue. 

We have surrendered, 

Nous noi/s sommes rendus, ou dues. 

You have surrendered, 

Vous vous etes rendus, ou dvies. 

They have surrendered, 

lis se sont rendus ou Elles se sont rewdues. 

PLUPERFECT. 

I had surrendered, 

Je m^etais re7idu, ou due. 

Thou hadst surrendered, 
Tu t'etais rendu, ou due. 

He had surrendered, 
// s'etait r«7idu. 

She had surrendered, 
Elle s'etait r endue. 

We had surrendered, 

Nous nous etions rendus, ou dues. 

You had surrendered, 

Vous vous etiez rendus, ou dues. 

They had surrendered, 
lis s'etaient rendus ou Elles s'etaient 
residues. 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I surrendered, 
Je me rendis. 

Thou surreuderedst, 
Tti te rendis. 

He surrendered, 

II se rendit. 

She surrendered, 
Elle se rewdit. 



PRETERIT ANTKRIOR DEFINITE. 

I had surrendered, 

Je me fits rendu, ou due. 

Thou hadst surrendered, 
Tu te fus rendu, ou due. 

He had surrendered, 

II se fut raidu. 

She had surrendered, 
Elle se fut residue. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 145 



We surrendered. 
Nous nous rewdimes. 
You surrendered, 
Fous vous rendites. 
They surrrendered, 
I/s ou E//es se re«dirent. 



FUTURE SIMPLE. 

I shall surrender, 
*Je me re«drai. 

Thou wilt surrender, 
Tu te 7-e/«dras. 

He will surrender, 
// se renCixm. 

She will surrender, 
Elle se ?'e?jdra. 

We shall surrender. 
Nous twus 7'endxons. 

Yoii will surrender, 
P^ous vous re/?drez. 

They will surrender, 
lis ou Elles se 7T«dront. 



CON 



PRESENT. 

I should surrender, 
Je me r^wdrais. 

Thou wouldst surrender, 
Tu te rertdrais. 

He would surrender, 
// se ?'e//drait. 

She would surrender, 
Elle se rez/drait. 



We had surrendered. 

Nous nous fumes rend\i%, ou dues. 

You had surrendered, 

Vous vous futes rendns, ou dues. 

They had surrendered, 
lis se furent rertdus ou Elles se furent 
rendu.es. 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

I shall have surrendered, 
Je me serai rendu, ou due. 

Thou wilt have surrendered, 
Tu te seras ?e«du, ou due. 

He will have surrendered, 
// se sera rendu. 

She will have surrendered, 
Elle se sera re/idue. 

We shall have surrendered. 
Nous nous serous rendus, oii dues. 

You will have surrendered, 
Vous vous serez re/idus, ou dues. 

They will have surrendered, 
lis se seroni re/idus ou Elles se seront 
r endues. 

DITIONAL MOOD. 

PAST. 

I shoidd have surrendered, 

Je me serais ou Je me fusse re«du, ou due. 

Thou wouldst have surrendered, 

Tu te serais ou Tu te fusses rendu, ou due. 

He would have surrendered, 
Jl se serait ou II sefi'it rendu. 

She would have surrendered, 

Elle se serait ou Elle se ftd rendue. 



I am to surrender, 
Je dois me rendre. 

Thou art to surrender, 
Tu dois te rendre. 

He is to surrender, 

II doit se rendre. 

She is to surrender, 
Elle doit se rendre. 

We are to surrender. 
Nous devons nous rendre. 

Ye or you are to surrender, 
Vous devez vous rendr-e. 

They are to surrender, 

lis ou Elles doivent se rendre. 



I was to surrender, 
Je devais me rendre. 

Thou wast to surrender, 
Tu devais te rendre. 

He was to surrender, 
// devait se rendre. 

She was to surrender, 
Elle devait se rendre. 

We were to surrender, 
Nous devious nous rendre. 

Ye or you were to surrender^, 
Vous deviez vous rendre. 

They were to surrender, 

lis ou Elles devaient se rendre. 



146 FOURTH CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 



We should surrender, 
Nous nous ?-e«drions. 



You would surrender, 
Vous vous rendriez. 



They would surrender, 
I/s on Elles se rewdraient. 



We should have surrendered, 
Nous nous serions ou Nous nous fussions 
renAws, ou dues. 

You would have surrendered, 
Vous vous seriez ou Vous vous fussiez rewdus, 
ou dues. 

They woidd have surrendered, 

lis se seraient ou lis se fussent rendus, ou 

Elles se seraient ou Elles se fussent 

rendues. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT OR FUTURE. 



1. 

Surrender (thou), 
Let him surrender. 
Let her surrender. 
Let us surrender, 
Surrender (ye or you), 
Let them surrender. 



Affirmatively. 

Ren(\^-toi. 

QuHl se renAe. 

Qu'elle se rende. 

Rendons-?ious. 

RendQZ-vous. 

Qu'ils ou Qu'elles se rendent. 



2. Negatively. 



Do not surrender or surrender not (thou). 

Let him not surrender, 

Let her not surrender. 

Let us not surrender, 

Do not siirrender or surrender not (ye or 

you). 
Let them not surrender. 



Ne te rends pas. 
Qu'il ne se rende pas. 
Qif'elle ne se rende pas. 
Ne nous rendons pas. 

Ne vous rendez pas. 

Quails ou Qi/ elles ne se rewdent pas. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

That I may surrender, 
Queje me rende. 

That thou mayst surrender. 
Que tu te re«des. 

That he may surrender, 
Qu^il se rertde. 

That she may surrender, 
Qu'elle se rende. 

Tliat we may surrender. 
Que nous nous rendiows. 

That you may surrender, 
Que vous vous rendiez. 

Tliat they may surrender. 
Quails ou Qu^elles se rendent. 



IMPERFECT. 

That I might surrender, 
Queje me rf?jdisse. 

That thou mightst surrender, 
Que tu te rendisses. 



PRETERIT, 

That I may have surrendered, 
Queje me sois rendu, ou due. 

That thou mayst have surrendered. 
Que tu te sois rendu, ou due. 

That he may have surrendered, 
Qu'il se soit rendu. 

That she may have surrendered, 
Qu''elle se soit rendue. 

That we may have surrendered. 
Que nous nous soyons rewdus, ou dues. 

That you may have surrendered, 
Que vous vous soyez rewdus, ou dues. 

That they may have surrendered, 
Qum^s se soient re«dus ou Qu'el/es se 
soient vendues. 

PLUPERFECT. 

That I might have surrendered, 
Queje me fusse rendu, ou due. 

That thou mightst have surrendered. 
Que til te fusses rendu, ou due. 



OF REFLECTIVE UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



147 



That he might surrender^ 
Qu''il se rendit. 
That she might surrender, 
QiCdle se rendii. 

That we might surrender, 
Que nous nous rendissions. 

That you might surrender. 
Que vous voiis rertdissiez. 

That they might surrender, 
Qu'i/s ou Qu^elles se rewdissent. 



That he might have surrendered, 
Qu^ilse fiU rewdu. 

That she might have surrendered^ 
Qu''elle se fid residue. 

That we might have surrendered. 
Que nous nous fussions rendus, mc dues. 

That you might have siirrendered, 
Que vous vous fussiez rendus, ou dues. 

That they might have surrendered, 
QuHls se fussent ren^\\% ou Qiielles * 
fussent rewdues. 



ADDITIONAL TENSES. 



PAST JUST ELAPSED. 

I have just surrendered, 
Je viens de me rtndre. 

Thou hast just surrendered, 
Tu viens de te rendre. 

He has just surrendered, 
// vient de se rendre. 

She has just surrendered, 
Elle vient de se rendre. 

We have just surrendered, 
Nous venons de nous rendre. 

You have just surrendered, 
Vous venez de vous rendre. 

They have just surrendered, 

Jls ou Elles vietment de se rendre. 



PAST ELAPSED BEFORE ANOTHER 
THING OR ACTION TOOK PLACE. 

I had just surrendered, 
Je venais de me rendre. 

Thou hadst just surrendered, 
Tu venais de te rendre. 

He had just surrendered, 
// venait de se rendre. 

She had just surrendered, 
Elle venait de se rendrh. 

We had just surrendered. 
Nous venions de nous rendre. 

You had just surrendered, 
Vous veniez de vous rendre. 

They had just surrendered, 

lis ou EUes venaient de se rendre. 



Observe. — If any irregular verb be employed reflectively, the pro- 
nouns follow the same order with it as with the regular verbs ; but the 
irregularities belonging to its conjugation, in the variations of its tenses 
and persons, must be attended to. See S'en aller, to go away, page 1 56 ; 
and S^asseoir, to sit down, page 177. 

Almost every active verb can be used in a reflective manner. 



Of Reflective Unipersonal Verbs. 

Reflective unipersonal verbs are generally active verbs which are used 
only in the third person singular of their diff^erent tenses. They have 
for antecedent one of these pronouns — il ou elle, it ; ceci, this ; cela, 
that; celm-ci, celle-ci, this; celui-ld, celle-la, that; followed by se , 
or, also, a substantive likewise followed by se : as, — il ou elle se vend 
bien, it sells well ; ce drap ne se vend pas. that cloth does not sell ; 
je crains que celui-ci ne se vende pas mieux, I am afraid this will not 
sell better. 

Should these verbs have for antecedent a pronoun plural : as, — ceux- 
ciy celles-cif these ; ceux la, celles-la, those ; followed by se ; or 

h2 



148 CON JUG. OF REFLECTIVE UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 

also, a substantive plural likewise followed by se : as, — ces marchan- 
diseS'Ci se, &c. these goods, &c. ; — they should then be put in the 
third persons plural of their different tenses : as, — ces marchandises-ci 
se vendent bien, mais celles-ld ne se vendront pas si hien, these goods 
sell well, but those will not sell so well. 

The following example of reflective unipersonal verbs is of the fourth 
conjugation. With its assistance, the pupil will easily understand the 
manner of using any other reflective unipersonal verb, whatever may be 
its conjugation, as the pronouns and negatives always come in the same 
order, the verb only following the variations of its own conjugation. 



Conjugation of the Reflective Unipersonal Verb — Se vendre, to sell. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Simple Tenses. 



Compoitnd Tenses. 



PRESENT. 

To sell, 
Se fendie. 



PRETERIT. 



To have sold, 
S'Sire vendu, on due. 



PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 

Selling, 
Se venda.nt 



PRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUND. 
Having sold, 
S^etant vendu, ou due. 



PAST PARTICIPLE. 
Sold, 
Fendu, due ; duSj dues. 



PARTICIPLE FUTURE. 

Being to be sold, 
Devant se vendxe. 



PRESENT. 



It sells, does sell, or is selling, 
// ou etle se vend. 

It does not sell, 

// ou el/e ne se vend ras. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
It has sold. 



Does it sell ? 

Se vend-il f ou se vend-elle ? 

Does it not sell P 



II s'est vendn, ou e//e s'cst vendwQ. 

It has not sold, 

// ne s'cst pas vendu, ou el/e ne s^esi pas 
vendue. 

Has it sold ? 



S'esi-il r;e«du ? ou sfest-eUe vendue ? 

Has it not sold ? 

Ne se vend-il pas ? ou ne se vend-elle pas ? Ne s'est-il pas vendu? ou ne s'est-elle pas 

vendue ? 



IMPERFECT. 

It was selling, 

// ou elle se venddai. 

It was not selling, 

// ou elle ne se vendait pes. 

Was it selling ? 

Se vendaii-il? ou se vendsdi-elle? 



PLUPERFECT. 

It had sold, 

// s'eiait vendu, oxi elle s^etait ve?idue. 

It had not sold, 

11 ne s'ttait pas vendu^ ou elle ne s'ciait pas 
vendue. 

Had it sold ? 

S'etait-il vendu ? ou s'elaif-elle vendue ? 



CONJUG. OF REFLECTIVE UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 149 



Was it not selling ? 
Ne S€ f e«dait-i7 pas ? 
elle pas ? 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

It sold, 

11 ou elle se vendit. 

It did not sell, 

// ou elle ne se vendit pas. 

Did it sell ? 

Se vendit-il ? ou se vendM-elle 9 



Did it not sell ? 

JVe se vendit-il pas ? ou ne se vend\i-elle 
pas? 

FUTURE SIMPLE. 



Had it not sold ? 
ou ne se vendaiit- Ne s'tlaii-il pas vendu ? ou tie s^etait-elle 
pas venduG ? 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 
It had sold, 
Jl se fut vendVi, ou elle se fut vendue. 

It had not sold, 

// ne se fut pas rendu, ou elle ne se fut 
pas rendue. 

Had it sold? 

Sefut-il vendu ? ou se fut-elle rendue ? 

Had it not sold ? 

JSe se fut-il pas uendu? ou tie seful-elle 
pas vendue ? 



It will sell, 
*// ou e//e se vendra. 

It will not sell, 

II ou elle ne se vendra pas. 

Will it sell ? 

Se vendrd-t-il ? ou se vendva.-t-elle ? 

Will it not sell ? 

Ne se vendra-t-il pas ? ou ne se vendra 
/-e//e pas ? 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

It will have sold, 

Jl se sera vendu, ou elle se sera vendue. 

It will not have sold, 
// ne se sera pas vendu, ou elle ne se sera 
pas vendue. 

Will it have sold ? 

Se sera-t-il vendu P ou se sera-t-elle ven- 
due ? 

Will it not have sold ? 
Ne se sera't-il pas vendu ? ou ne se sera- 
/-e//e pas vendue ? 



PRESENT. 

It would sell, 

// ou elle se vend rait. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PAST. 



It would not sell, 

// ou e//e ne se vendrait pas. 



Would it sell ? 

Se vendrait-//? ou se rendrait-e//e ? 



It would have sold, 

Jl se serait ou // se fut vendu, ou elle se 
serait ou elle sefut vendue. 

It would not have sold, 

Jl ne se serait pas ou // ne se fit pas 

vendu, ou e//e ne se serait pas ou e//e ne 

se fut pas vendue. 

Would it have sold P 
jSe serait-H ou <Se ful-il vendu ? ou se 
ser ait-el le ou se fid-elle vendue ? 



*1. It is to be sold, 

Jl ou e//e doit se vendre. 

It is not to he sold, 

// ou e//e 7ie doit pas se vendre. 

Is it to be sold ? 

Doit-il ou e//e se vendre ? 

Is it not to be sold ? 

Ne doit-il ou e//e pas se vendre ? 



2. It was to be sold, 

// ou e//e devait se vendre. 

It was not to be sold, 

//ou e//e ne devait pas se vendre. 

Was it to be sold P 
Dcvait-il ou c//e se vendre ? 

Was it not to be sold P 

iVe dcvait-il ou e//e pas se vendre ? 



150 



OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 



Would it not sell ? 

Ne S€ vendrait-il pas ? ou ne se rewdrait- 
elle pas ? 



Would it not have sold ? 

Ne se 'serait-it pas ou Ne se fut-il pas 

vendn ? ou ne se serait-elle pas ou ne 

sefut-elle pas vendue ? 



PRESENT. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRETERIT. 



That it may sell, 

QuHl ou qu^elle se rerade. 

That it may not sell, 

QuHl ou qiCelle ne se vende pas. 



That it may have sold, 

Qu^il se soit v€7id\\, ou q^^elle se soit vendue. 

That it may not have sold, 
QuHl ne se soit pas vendn, ou qi^elle ne se 
soit pas vendue. 



IMPERFECT. 



That it might sell, 
Q^/^7 ou qu'e/Ze se rendit. 
That it might not sell, 
Qti'i/ ou qii^elle ne se venditpas. 



PLUPERFECT. 

That it might have sold, 

Qiiilsefut vendw, ou qifelle se fut rewdue. 

That it might not have sold, 
QiHl ne se fut pas vendu, ou qt^elle ne se 
fut pas vendne. 

The present and preterit of the infinitive of reflective unipersonal 
verbs may be used with another verb, as follows : ceci pourra se ven- 
dre, this may sell : cela pourrait s^etre vendu, that might have sold. 
The participles accord well with a demonstrative pronoun or a substan- 
tive : as, — ceci se vendant a...., this selling at....; cela s'^etant 
vendu d. . . ., that having sold at. . . .; cet article clevant se vendre 
d. . . . , that article being to be sold at. . . . 



A list of Verbs, which, though not admitting in Enghsh the pronouns 
-one^s self, myself, thyself, himself, herself, ourselves, yourselves, 
themselves, are nevertheless reflective in French. 

s'absfenir. 
s'accorde}'. 
s'adresser. 
se baigner. 



to Ahstain, 

to Agree, 

to Apply, 

to Bathe, 

to Be angry, to he of- 
fended, 

to Become liquid, 

to Be dying, 

to Be eager, 

to Be moved, 

to Be ohstinate in a 
thing, 

to Be out of conceit 
with, 

to Be renewed, 

to Be resolved, to de- 
termine, 

to Be silent, 

to Beware, to keep from, 

to Blow, 



se facher. 
se liquefier. 
se mourir, 
s^empresser. 
s^attendrir. 

s'opini&trer. 

se degouter. 
se renouveler. 
se 7tsoudre, se 

determiner, 
se taire. 
se garder. 
^epanouir. 



to Boast, 
to Break loose, 
to Catch cold, 
to Care for, 
to Complain, 
to Confer, 
to Congeal, 
to Delight in, 

to Desist, to give over, 

to Discharge, 

to Discourse with, 

to Distrust, 

to Exclaim, 

to Expect, 

to Evaporate, 

to Fade away, 

to Faint away, 

to Fall asleep, 

to Fall asleep again, 



se vanter. 

se dtchainer. 

s^enrhumer. 

se soucier. 

se plaindre. 

iahoucher. 

sefiyer, 

se plaire, se com- 

plaire. 
se de'sister. 
s^acquitter, 
s'entretenir. 
se defier. 
se recrier. 
s'attendre. 
s'evaporer. 
se fihrir. 
s'evanoidr. 
s'endomnir. 
se rendormir. 



OF REFLECTIVE VEKBS. 



151 



to Fall furiously upon 




to Overflow, 


se deborder. 


or to fall tooth and 




to Paint, 


se farder. 


nail upon, 


s'acharner. 


to Perceive, 


s'apercevoir. 


to Fancy, 


sejigurer, iima 


- to Persist, to be ob- 






giner. 


stinate, 


s'obstiner. 


to New feather, to be- 




to Putrefy, 


se putrejier. 


gin to thrive, 


se remplumer. 


to Quit one's country, 


s'expatrier. 


to Flock in crowds, 


s'attrouper. 


to Rebel, 


S€ revolter.. 


to Flow out, to elapse, 


itcouler. 


to Recant, to go from 




to Fly away. 


s'envoler. 


one's word, 


se dedire. 


to Fly into a passion. 


fi'emporter. 


to Recollect, 


se rappeler. 


to Gangrene, 


se gangrener. 


to Rejoice, 


se rejouir. 


to Get intoxicated, 


s'enivrer. 


to Remember, 


se souvenir. 


to Get palsied. 


se paralyser. 


to Repent, 


se reptntir. 


to Get weary, 


s'ennuyer. 


to Resign, to give up. 


se demettre. 


to Go away. 


s'en aller. 


to Retract, 


se rttracter* 


to Go to bed, 


se coxicher. 


to Rise, to get up. 


se lever. 


to Grieve, 


s'attrister. 


to Run into debt, 


s^endetter. 


to Grow better, 


iamender. 


to Run away, 


ienfiar. 


to Grow bold, 


s''enhardir. 


to Seize, to lay hold of. 


se saisir. 


to Grow drowsy, 


s'assoupir. 


to Seize, to invade, 


s^emparer. 


to Grow familiar, 


se familiariser. 


to Sell, 


se vendre. 


to Grow impatient. 


sHmpatienter. 


to Set off, 


s' acheminer. 


to Grow milder, 


se radoucir. 


to Shrink, to diminish, 


s"" apetisser. 


to Grow poor, 


s^appauvrir. 


to Sit down, 


s^asseoir. 


to Grow proud. 


^enorgueillir. 


to Sit down to table. 


s'afiabler. 


to Grow rich. 


s''enrichir. 


to Slip, to creep into. 


se glisser. 


to Grow tired, 


se lasser. 


to Stay, to stop. 


s'arreter. 


to Heal, 


se giterir. 


to Steal away. 


s''esqinver. 


to Inquire, 


s'enqtierir. 


to Stick to. 


s'aitacher, ^. 


to Intermeddle, 


ientremettre, 


to Stiffen, to bear up 






s^ngerer. 


against. 


se raidir. 


to Kneel down, 


s'agenoidUer. 


to Stoop, 


se baisser. 


to Laugh at. 


se moquer. 


to Strive, to try, to do 




to League, 


se liguer. y 


one's endeavours, 


iefforcer. 


to Lean on one's elbow, 


s^accouder. 


to Struggle, 


se debattre. 


to Lean upon. 


s'appuyer, sur. 


to Submit, 


se soumettre. 


to Make haste, 


se dtpecher, se 


to Subscribe, 


s'abonner. 




hater. 


to Surrender, 


se rendre. 


to Make one's escape, 


s' evader fS'echap 


- to Take a strong fancy. 






per. 


to be conceited \vith, 


s'enteter. 


to Make one's study. 


s^ttudier. 


to Take delight in, 


se plaire. 


to Marry, 


se marier. 


to Take offence. 


se formaliser. 


to Match or make an 




to Take pet, 


se piquer. 


alliance. 


s'allier. 


to Take refuge, 


se rifugier. 


to Meddle with. 


se me/er. 


to Take rest. 


se reposer. 


to Melt, 


se fondre. 


to Take root, 


s'enraciner. 


to Mistake, 


se mtprendre. 


to Trust, 


sejier. 


to Mistrust, 


se m&fier. 


to Vanish away, to be 




to Move, to come or 




eclipsed. 


s'cclipser. 


go forward, to get 




to Walk, 


se promener. 


preferment, 


iavancer. 


to Withdraw, 


se retirer. 


to Mutinj^, 


se mutiner. 


to Wonder, 


i6tonner, itmer 


to Oppose, 


s'opposer. 




veiller. 



There are several other verbs which do not admit the pronouns one^s 



152 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 

self, myself^ thyself, himself &c. in English, and wliich are, however, 
reflective in French ; but they must be learnt by practice. 



Of Irregular and Defective Verbs. 

Irregular verbs are those which differ in the variations of some of 
their tenses and persons from the verbs which serve as models for the 
regular conjugations. Defective verbs are those in which some tenses 
or persons, not admitted by use, are wanting. 

However great the irregularity of a verb may be, its anomalies never 
occur but in the simple tenses, the compound always being regular. 

The only irregular verbs of the first conjugation are : aller, to go ; 
s'en aller, to go away ; envoyer, to send ; and renvoyer, to send back. 
The defective unipersonals are : ^rmVter, to drizzle; neiger, to snow; 
greler, to hail ; eclairer, to lighten ; tonner, to thunder ; geler, to 
freeze ; degeler, to thaw ; and re suiter, to result. 

The four irregular verbs of the first conjugation are here exemplified ; 
but the defective unipersonals will be reserved for the article of uniper- 
sonal verbs. The defective unipersonal verbs of the first conjugation 
admit, in the third person singular of their different tenses, precisely 
the same variations as parler. 

Irregular Verbs of the First Conjugation. 
1. ^^/er, to go [Neuter Verb]. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT. 

To go, To have or to be gone, 

Alkr. Etre alle on aUte. 

PRESENT PARTICIPLE. PRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUND. 

Going, Having or being gone, 

Alla7it, Etant alii ou allie. 

PAST PARTICIPLE. PARTICIPLE FUTURE. 

Gone, Being about to go, 

Allt, ie ; is, ees. Devant oiler. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

I go, do go, or am going, I have gone, 

Je vais. Je suis alii ou allee. 

Thou goest, dost go, or art going. Thou hast or art gone, 

Tu vas, Tu es alle ou allie. 

He goes, does go, or is going. He has or is gone, 

II va. II est alii. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 153 



She goes, does go, or is going, 
EUe va. ' 

We go, do go, or are going, 
Nous allons. 

You go, do go, or are going, 
Vons allez. 

They go, do go, or are going, 
lis ou Elks vont. 

IMPERFE«T. 

I was going, 
Tallais. 

Thou wast going, 
Tu allots. 

He was going, 
7/ allait. 

She was soing, 
EUe allait. 

We were going, 
Nuus allions. 
You were going, 
Voi/s alliez. 

They were going, 
lis ou Elles allaienf. 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I went, 
fallal. 

Thou didst go, 
Tu alias. 

He went, 

II alia. 

She went, 
EUe alia. 

W^e went, 
Nous allumes. 

You went, 
Vous alldles. 

They went, 

lis ou Elles allerent. 

FUTURE SIMPLE. 
I shall go, 
* JHi-ai. 



She has or is gone, 
EUe est alike. 

We have gone, 

Nous sommes^ allts ou alltes. 

You have or are gone, 
Vous etes allts ou allies. 

They have or are gone. 

Us sont allts ou Elles sont allies. 

PLUPERFECT. 

I had or was gone, 
J''itais allt ou allte. 

Thou hadst or wast gone, 
Tu ttais alle ou allie. 

He had or was gone, 
// itait alii. 

She had or was gone, 
EUe itait allie. 

We had or were g>>ne. 
Nous itions allts ou allies. 
You had or were gone, 
Vous itiez alles ou allies. 

They had or were gone, 

lis itaierd allis ou £'/^s itaient allies. 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 
I had or was gone, 
Je fits alii ou allie. 

Thou hadst or wast gone, 
Tu fus alii ou allee. 

He had or was gone. 

She had or was gone, 
EUe fut allie. 

We had or were gone. 
Nous fumes alles ou allies. 

You had or were gone, 
Voits ftites allis ou allies. 

They had or were gone, 

Us furent allis ou eUes furent allies. 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
I shall have gone, 
Je serai alii ou allie. 



*1.I am to go, 
Je dois atler. 

Thou art to go, 
Tu dois aller. 

He is fo go, 
11 doit aller. 



2. I was to go, 
Je devais aller. 

Thou wast to go, 
Tti devais aller. 

He was to go, 
11 devait aller. 



H 5 



154 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 



Thou wilt go, 
Tu iras. 


Thou wilt have gone, 
Tu seras alii ou allte. 


He will go, 
// ira. 


He will have gone, 
// sera allL 


She will go, 
Elle ira. 


She will have gone. 
Elk sera allee. 


We shall go, 
Notis iro7is. 


We shall have gone, 
Nous serons alles ou allies. 


You will go, 
Vous irez. 


You will have gone, 
Vous serez allis ou allies. 


They will go. 
Us ou Elles iront. 


They will have gone. 

Us seront allis ou Elles seront allies. 




CONDITIONAL MOOD. 


PRESENT. 

I should go, 
Sirais. 


PAST. 

I should have gone, 

Je serais ou Je fusse alii ou allie. 


Thou wouldst go, 
Tu irais. 


Thou wouldst have gone, 

Tu serais ou Tu fusses alii ou allee. 


He would go, 
// irait. 


He would have gone, 
Userait ou U fut alii. 


She would go, 
Elle irait. 


She would have gone, 
Elle serait ou elle fut allee. 


We should go. 
Nous irions. 


We should have gone. 

Nous serious ou Nous fissions alles onallees. 


You would go, 
Vous iriez. 


You would have gone, 

Vous seriez ou Vous fussiez allis om. allies. 


They would go, 
Us ou Elles iraient. 


They would have gone. 
Us seraient ou Us fussent alles, ou Elles 
seraient ou Elles fussent allies. 




IMPERATIVE MOOD. 




PRESENT OR FUTURE. 


Go (thou). 
Let him go. 
Let her go. 
Let us go. 
Go (ye or you). 
Let them go, 


Va. 

QuHl aille. 

Qu'elle aille. 

Allons. 

Allez. 

Quils ou Qiielles aillent. 


She is to go, 
Elle doit aller. 


She was to go, 
Elle devait aller. 


We are to go, 
Nous devons aller. 


We were to go, 
Nous devious aller. 


You are to go, 
Vous devez aller. 


You were to go, 
Vous deviez aller. 



They are to go, 

Us ou Elles doivent aller. 



They were to ^o, 

lis ou Elles devaient aller. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 155 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

Tliat I may go, 
Que j^aille. 

That thou mayst go, 
Que tu allies. 

That he may go, 
Qu''il aille. 

That she may go, 
Qiielle aille. 

That we may go, 
Que nous allions. 

That you may go. 
Que vous alliez. 

That they may go, 
Qu'ils ou Qii'elles aillent. 

IMPERFECT. 

That I might go. 
Que fallasse. 

That thou mightst go. 
Que tu allasses. 

That he might go, 
Qu^il all at. 

That she might go, 
Qiielle allat. 

That we might go, 
Que nous allassions. 

That you might go. 
Que vous allassiez. 

That they might go, 
Qu'ils ou Qu^elles allassent. 



PRETERIT. 

That I may have gone, 
Que je sois allt ou allie. 

That thou mayst have gone, 
Que tu sois alle ou allee. 

That he may have gone, 
Qu'il soil alle. 

That she may have gone, 
Qu'elle soil allee. 

That we may have gone, 
Que nous soyons allts ou alltes. 

That you may have gone. 
Que vous soyez alles ou allees. 

That they may have gone, 

Qu''ils soient allts ou QiHelles soient alUes. 

PLUPERFECT. 
That I might have gone, 
Que je fusse allt ou allte. 

That thou mightst have gone, 
Que tu fusses allt ou allee. 

That he might have gone, 
Qii'il fut allt. 

That she might have gone, 
Qu^elle fut allte. 

That we might have gone, 
Que nous fussions allts ou allies. 

That you might have gone, 
Que vousfussiez allts ou allies. 

That they might have gone, 
Qu'ils fussent allts ou Qii'elles fttssent 
allies. 



Observe. — There is a very common error prevalent in France in the application 
of the compound tenses of the above verb : — etre allt, je suis alle, tu es alle, U 
est alle, elle est allte, &c. being used instead of — avoir iti, j^ai eti, tu as e'ti, il 
ou elle a iti, &c., when it is intended to express that a person has been somewhere. 

The general rule to follow on this subject is that, whenever the return from the 
place mentioned has taken place — avoir iti,j''ai iti, tu as ite, il ou elle a Hi, &c. 
must be used; and when the retvu-n has not been effected — etre alii, je suis alii, 
tu es alle, il est alii ou elle est allie, is required : for instance — Josephine est allee 
a Vo'pira, Josephine is gone to the opera; implies that she is gone there and is 
not yet returned ; whereas — Josephine a iti a Popira, Josephine has been to the 
opera, expresses that she has been there and is returned, or at least has left the 
opera. 

The following mode of expression — I will come and see you, is frequently erro- 
neously used in English instead of — I will go and see you; whenever such is the 
case, the different tenses oi alter must be employed, in French, in the sense of going 
from the place where one is to any other place : as,— ^■'tVaj vous voir, I will go and 
see you. Venir always denotes coming to the place where the person spealdng is: 



156 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 

as,— .;V ne crois pas que je puisse veni'r ici demain, I do not think I shall be able to 
come here to-morrow. 



2. S^en aller, to go away [Reflective Verb]. 

S'en aller, being the verb aller itself, reflectively used with ihe particle en, is con- 
jugated after the same manner as aller. The particle en comes immediately before 
the verb in the simple tenses, and before the auxiliary in the compound ones, whether 
the sentence be affirmative, negative, or interrogative: as, — -je m'en vais, I am going 
away ; je ne m'en vais pas, I am not going away ; s'en va-t-il ? is he going away ? 
ne s'en va-t-il pas ? is he not going away ? &c. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Simple Tenses. 



PRESENT. 



To go away, 
S'en aller. 



Compound Tenses. 



PRETERIT. 



To have gone away, 
S'en St re allt ou atl^e. 



PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 

Going away, 
S^en allatit. 



PRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUND. 

Having gone away, 
S'en etant allt ou allte. 



PAST PARTICIPLE. 



Gone away, 

Alle, allte ; es, tes. 



PRESENT. 



PARTICIPLE FUTURE. 

Being about to go away, 
Devant s^en aller. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 



I go, do go, or am going away, 
Je m'en vais. 



I have gone away, 

Je m'en suis alle ou allte. 



Thou goest, dost go, or art going away. Thou hast gone away. 



Tu fen vas. 

He goes, does go, or is going away, 

II s'en va. 

She goes, does go, or is going away, 

Elle s'en va. 

We go, do go, or are going away, 

Noi/s nous en al/ons. 

You go, do go, or are going away, 

Fbus vous en allez. 

They go, do go, or are going away, 

Jls ou Elles s'en vont. 



Tu fen es allt ou allte. 

He has gone away, 
// s'en est allt. 

She has gone away, 
Elle s'en est allte. 

We have gone away. 

Nous nous en sommes allts ou alltes. 

You have gone away, 

Vous vous en etes allts ou alltes. 

They have gone away, 

lis s'en sotit allts ou Elles s'en sont allees. 



IMPERFECT. 



I was going away, 
Je m'en allais. 

Thou wast going away, 

Tu fen allais. 

He was going away, 

II s'en allait. 



PLUPERFECT. 

I had gone awaj'-, 

Je m'en ttois allt ou allee. 

Thou hadst gone away, 
Tu fen ttais alle ou all^e. 

He had gone away, 
// s'en ttait allt. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 157 



She was going away, 
Etle s'en aflait. 

We were going away, 
Notts nous en al/iotis. 

You were going away, 
Foi/s vot/s en alliez. 

Tliey were going away, 
]ls ou El'es s^en allaieni. 



She had gone awaj', 
Elle s^en ttait allce. 

We had gone awaj', 

Nous nous en etions allts ou alltes. 

You had gone away, 

Vovs vous tn etiez allts ou allces. 

They had gone away, 
Jls s'en etaient allts ou Elles s'en ctaient 
alltes. 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I went awa}'-, 
Je m'en allai. 

Thou didst go away, 
Tn t'en alias. 

He went away, 

II s'en a I la. 

She went away, 
Elle s'en alia. 

We went awa}'^, 
Nous nous en alldmes. 
You went away, 
Votis vous en alldtes. 

Tliey went awaj'', 

lis ou Elles s'en allerenf. 



FUTURE SIMPLE. 

I shall go away, 
* Je m'en irai. 

Thou wilt go away^ 
Tu t'en iras. 

He will go awaj', 

II s'en ira. 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 

I had gone away, 

Je m'en /us alle ou alle'e. 

Thou hadht gone away, 
7?/ t'en /us allt ou allee. 

He had gone away, 

II s'en /ut allt. 

She had gone awa)--, 
Elle s'en/ut allee. 

We had gone away. 

Nous notfs en/umes allts ou alltes. 

You had gone away, 
Vous votis en/utes allts ou alltes. 
They had gone awaj^, 
Jls s'en /went alle's ou Elles s'en 
/urent allies. 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

I shall have gone away, 
Je m'en ierai allt ou allte. 

Thou wilt have gone awaj', 
Tu t'en seras allt ou al'ie. 

He will have gone away, 
// s'en sera allt. 



* 1. 1 am to go away, 
Je dots m'en alter. 

Thou art to go away, 
Tu clois t'en a Her. 

He is to go away, 
// doit s'en aller. 

She is to go away, 
Elle doit s'en aller. 

We are to go away. 
Nous devons nous en aller. 

You are to go away, 
Vous devez vous en aller. 

They are to go away, 

Jls ou Elles doiveni s'en aller. 



2. 1 was to go away, 
Je devais m'en aller. 

Thou wast to go away, 
Tu devais t'en aller. 

He was to go away, 
// devait s'en aller. 

She was to go away, 
Elle devait s'en aller. 

We were to go away. 
Nous devions nous en aller. 

You were to go awaj'-, 
Vous dtviez vous en aller. 

They were to go away, 

lis ou Elles devaient s'en aller, 



158 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 



She will go away, 
Elle s'en ira. 

We shall go away, 
Nous nous en irons. 

You will go away, 
Vous vous en irez. 

They will go away, 
I/s ou Elles s^efi iront. 



She will have gone away, 
Elle s'en sera alUe. 

We shall have gone away, 
Nous nous en serons alles ou allees. 

You will have gone away, 
Fous vous en serez allis ou alltes. 

They will have gone away, 
lis s'en seront allts ou Elles ien seront 
alltes. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



PRESENT. 



I should go away, 
Je nCen h-ais. 

Thou wouldst go away, 
Tu fen irais. 

He would go away, 

II s'en irait. 

She would go away, 
Elle s^en irait. 
We should go away, 
Nous 710US en h'ions. 



You would go away, 
Vous vous en iriez. 



They would go away, 
lis ou Elles s'en iraient. 



PAST. 



I should have gone away, 

Je uien serais ouje ?n''en/usse alle ou allee. 

Thou wouldst have gone away, 

Tu fen serais ou lu fen fusses all6, ou allee. 

He would have gone away, 
// s'en serait ou il s'en fut alii. 

She Avould have gone aAvay, 

Elle s'en serait ou Elle s'en fut allee. 

We should have gone away, 
Nous nous en serions ou Nous nous en 
fussions allts, ou allies. 

You would have gone away, 
Fbus vous en seriez ou Fous vous enfussiez 
alles, ou allies. 

They would have gone away, 

lis s'en seraient ou J Is s'en fussent alles, ou 

Elles s'en seraient ou Elles s'en fussent 

allies. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT OR FUTURE. 



1. Affirmatively. 



Go away (thou). 
Let him go away, 
Let her go away. 
Let us go away, 
Go away (ye or you). 
Let them go away. 



Fa-fen. 

Qu'il s'en aille. 

Qu'elle s'en aille. 

Allons-nous-en. 

Allez-vaus-en. 

Qu'ils ou Qu'elles s'en aillent. 



2. Negatively. 



Do not go away or go not away (thou), 

Let him not go away. 

Let her not go away. 

Let us not go away, 

Do not go away or go not away (ye or you). 

Let them not go away. 



Ne fen va pas, ■ 

Qu'il ne s'en aille pas. 

Qu'elle ne s'en aille pas, 

Ne nous en allons pas, 

Ne vous en allez pas. 

Qrfils ou Qif elles ne s'en aillent pas. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 159 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT, 



That I may go away, 
Queje m^en aitle. 

That thou mayst go away. 
Que iu fen allies. 

That he may go away, 
QuHl s'en aille. 

That she may go away, 
Qii'etle s^en aille. 

That we may go away. 
Que nous nous en allions. 

That you may go away, 
Que voics vous en alliez. 

That they may go away, 
Qu'ils ou Qu'etles s'en aillent. 



PRETERIT. 

That I may have gone away. 
Que je nCen sois alle ou allee. 

That thou mayst have gone away, 
Que tu fen sois alle ou allee. 

That he may have gone away, 
Qu^il s'en soil alle. 

That she may have gone away, 
Qu'elle s'en soil allee. 

That we may have gone away. 

Que nous nous en soyons alles ou allees. 

That you may have gone away. 
Que vous vous en soyez alles ou allees. 

That they may have gone away, 
QuHls s^en soient alles ou Qu^elles s'en 
soient allies. 



IMPERFECT. 

That I might go away, 
Queje nfen al/asse. 

That thou mightst go away, 
Que tu fen allasses. 

That he might go away, 
Qu''il s^en alldt. 

That she might go away, 
Qu'elle s'en alldt. 

That we might go away. 
Que 710US 710US en allassions. 

That you might go away, 
Que vous vous en allassiez. 

That they might go away, 
Qu'ils ou Qu'elles s'en allassent. 



PLUPERFECT. 

That I might have gone away, 
Que je rrfen fusse alle ou allee. 

That thou mightst have gone away. 
Que tu fen fusses alle ou allee. 

That he might have gone away, 
Qu'il s'en fat alle. 

That she might have gone away, 
Qu'elle s'en fut allee. 

That we might have gone away. 

Que nous nous enfussions alles ou allies. 

That you might have gone away, 
Qtie vous vous en fussiez alles ou allies. 

Tliat they might have gone away, 
Qu'ils s'en fusserit alles ou Qu'elles s 
fussent allees. 



3. Envoyer, to send {Active Verb] ; 

Envoyant, sending ; envoye, envoyee, sent. Avoir envoye, ayant envoye. 

tu envoies, 
vous envoyez, 

tu envoyais, 
vous envoyiez, 

tu envoyas, 
vous envoy atesj 



Ind. Pres. J'envoie, 

Nous envoyons. 

Imp. J'envoyais, 

Nous envoyions, 
Pret. Def, J 'envoy ai, 

Nous envoy ames, 



il ou elle envoie ; 
ils ou elles envoient. 

il ou elle envoyait ; 
ils ou elles envoyaient. 
il ou elle envoya ; 
ils ou elles envoyerent. 



160 IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION, 



Fut. J'enverrai*, tu enverras, 

Nous enverrons, vous enverrez, 

Cond.Pres. J'enverrais *, tu enverrais. 

Nous enverrions, vous enverriez, 

Jmperative.[No 1st Person.'] envoie, 

Envoyons, envoyez, 

Sub, Pres. Que j'envoie, que tu envoies. 

Que nous envoyions^ que vous envoyiez, 

Imp. Que j'envoj'^asse, que tu envoyasses. 

Que nous envoyas- que vous envoyas- 
sions, siez, 

Conjugate after the same manner renvoyeVy to send back. 



il oti elle enverra ; 
ils oti elks enverront, 

il ou el'e envorrait; 
ils ou elles enverraient. 

qvi'il ou qu'elle envoie ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles envoient 

qu'il ou qu'elle envoie; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles envoient. 

qu'il ou quelle envoyat ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles envoyas- 
sent. 



Irregular verbs of the Second Conjugation. 

1 . Conjugation of the Irregular Neuter Verb — Venh\ to come. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Simple Tenses. 


Compound Te 


PRESENT. 


PRETERIT. 


To come, 
Fenir. 


To have or to be come, 
Etre venu ou venue. 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 


PRESENT PARTICIPLE C 


Coming, 
Penant. 


Having or being come, 
Etant venu ou venue. 


PAST PARTICIPLE. 


PARTICIPLE FUTURE. 


Come, 

Venu, ue ; us, ues. 


Being about to come, 
Devant venir. 




INDICATIVE MOOD. 


PRESENT. 


PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 



I come, do come, or am coming, 
Je viens. 



I have or am come, 
Je suis venu ou venue. 



Thou comest, dost come, or art coming, Tliou hast or art come, 



7u viens. 

He comes, does come, or is coming, 
il vient. 

She comes, does come, or is coming, 
Elle vie?it. 

We come, do come, or are coming, 
Nous venons. 



es venu ou venue. 



Tu 

He has or is come, 
// est venu. 

She has or is come, 
Elle est venue. 

We have or a,xe come, 

Nous sommes venus ou venues. 



* The second r only is pronounced in all the persons of the future and conditional 
of these verbs, but the syllable ve becomes long: thus, — -fenverrai, tu enverras, &c. 
and fenverrais, tu enverrais, &c. are pronounced — -yenve-rai^ tu enve-ras, &c. and 
fenve-rais, tu enve-rais, &c. Je renverrai, tu renverras, Sec, and je renverrais, tu 
renverrais, &c. are also pronounced — je renve-rai, tu renve-ras, &c. andy^ renve-raisy 
tu renve-rais, kc. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 161 



You come, do come, or are coming, 
Vous venez. 

They come, do come, or are coming, 
lis ou El/es viennent. 

IMPERFECT. 

I was coming, 
Je venais. 

Thou wast coming, 
Tu venais. 

He was coming, 
// venait. 

She was coming, 
El/e venait. 

We were coming, 
Notts venions. 

You were coming, 
Vous veniez. 

They were coming, 
lis ou Efles venaient. 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I came, 
Je vins. 

Thou didst come, 
Tu vins. 

He came, 
// vint. 

She came, 
Elle vint. 

We came, 
Nous vznmes. 

You came, 
Fous vhttes. 

They came, 

]ls ou Ef/es vinrent. 

FUTURE SIMPLE. 

I shall come, 
* Je viendrai. 



You have or are come, 
Vous efes venus ou venues. 

They have or are come, 

I/s sont venus ou Elles sont venues. 

PLUPERFECT. 

I had or was come, 
Jttais venu ou venue. 

Thou hadst or wast come, 
Tu ttais venu ou venue. 

He had or was come, 

II etait venu. 

She had or was come, 
Elle tlait venue. 

We had or were come. 
Nous ttions venus ou venues. 

You had or were come, 
Voi.s tliez venus ou venues. 

They had nr were come, 

lis e/aient venus ou Elles etaient venues. 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. 

I had or was come, 
Je fus venu ou venue. 

Tliou hadst or wast come, 
Tu fus venu ou venue. 

He had or was come, 
Ilfut venu. 

She had or was come, 
Elle fut venue. 

We had or were come. 
Nous f times venus ou venues. 

You had or were come, 
Vous fides venus ou venues. 

They had or were come, 

lis f //rent venus ou Elles fu rent venues. 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

I shall have come, 

Je serai venu ou venue. 



*1. I am to come, 
Je dois venir. 

Thou art to come, 
Tu dois venir. 

He is to come, 
11 doit venir. 

She is to come, 
Elle doit venir. 



I was to come, 
Je devais venir. 

Thou wast to come, 
Tu devais venir. 

He was to come, 
// devait venir. 

She was to come, 
Elle devait venir. 



162 IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



Thou shalt or wilt come, 
Tu viendras. 

He shall or will come, 
// viendra. 

She shall or will come, 
Elle viendra. 

We shall come, 
Nous viendrons. 

You shall or will come, 
Vous viendrez. 

They shall or will come, 
lis ou Elles viendront. 



Thou shalt or wilt have come, 
Tu seras venu ou venue. 

He shall or will have come, 
// sera venu. 

She shall or will have come, 
Elle sera venue. 

We shall have come, 

Nous serons venus ou venues. 

Yovi shall or will have come, 
Vous serez venus ou venues. 

They shall or will have come, 

//« seront venus ou £'//es seront venues. 



PRESENT. 



I should come, 
Je viendrais. 

Thou wouldst come, 
Tu viendrais. 

He would come, 

II viendrait. 

She would come, 
Elle viendrait. 

We should come. 
Nous viendrions. 

You would come, 
Fous viendriez. 



They wovild come, 

lis ou Elles viendraient. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PAST. 

I should have come, 

Je serais ou Je fusse venu, ou venue. 

Thou wouldst have come, 

Tu serais ou TuJ\isses venu, ou venue. 

He would have come, 
// serait ou II fid venu. 

She would have come, 

Elle serait ou Elle fat venue. 

We should have come. 
Nous serions ou Nous fussions venus, oil 
venues. 

You would have come, 
Foz/* seriez ou Foms fussiez venus, oil 
venues. 

They would have come, 
i/s seraient on lis fussent venus, ou jB//ie* 
seraient ou Elles fussent venues. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT OR FUTURE. 

Come (thou), Viens. 

Let him comie, Q«/'i7 vienne. 

Let her come, Qu^elle vienne. 

Let us come, Fienofis. 

Come (ye or you), Fenez. 

Let them come, Q^/'^7s ou Qu^elles viennent. 



We are to come. 
Nous devons venir. 

You are to come, 
Vous devez venir. 

They are to come, 

lis ou Elles doivent venir. 



We were to come, 
Nous devious venir. 

You were to come, 
Vous deviez venir. 

They were to come, 

lis ou Elles devaient venir. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 163 



PRESENT. 

That I may come, 
Que je vienne. 
That thoa mayst come, 
Que tu viennes. 

That he may come, 
Qu'il vienne. 

That she may come, 
Qi^elle vienne. 

That we may come, 
Que nous venions. 

That you may come, 
Qi/e volts veniez. 

That they may come, 
Qw'zVs ou Qu'elles viennent 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRETERIT. 

That I may have come, 
Quej'e sois vefiu ou venue. 
That thou mayst have come, 
Que tu sois venu ou venue. 

That he may have come, 
Qu'il soil venu. 
That she may have come, 
Qi^elle soil venue. 

That we may have come. 

Que nous soyons venus ou venues. 

That you may have come, 
Que vous soyez venus ou venues. 

That they may have come, 
QuHls soient venus ou Qdelles soient 
venues. 



IMPERFECT. 

That I might come, 
Quej'e vinsse. 

That thou mightst come. 
Que tu vinsses. 

That he might come, 
Qu'il Vint. 

That she might come, 
QiCelle vint. 

That we might come, 
Que nous vinssions. 

That you might come, 
Que vous vinssiez. 

That they might come, 
Qu^i/s ou Qu'elies vinssent. 



PLUPERFECT. 

Tliat I might have come, 
Que je fusse venu ou venue. 

That thou mightst have come. 

Que tu fusses venu ou venue. 

That he might have come, 

Qu'il fut vemc. 

That she might have come, 

Qu'elle fut venue. 

That we might have come, 

Que nous fussions venus ou venues. 

That you might have come, 

Que vous fussiez venus ou venues. 

That they might have come, 
Qu'ils fussent venus ou Qu'elles fussent 
venues. 



ADDITIONAL TENSES. 

The additional tenses of the above verb are formed with arriver, 
follows : — 

1st TENSE. 



I am or have just come, 
Je viens crarriver. 

Thou art or hast just come, 
Tu viens (Tarriver. 

He is or has just come, 
// vient Warriver. 

She is or has j ust come, 
Elle vient (Varriver. 



2d TENSE. 

I had or was just come, 
Je venais (Tarriver. 

Thou hadst or Avast just come, 

Tu venais (Tarriver. 

He had or was just come, 

II venait (Varriver. 

She had or was just come 
Elle venait (Tarriver. 



164 IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



We are oi- have just come. 
Nous venons d'arriver. 

You are or have just come, 
Pons venez cTarriver. 
They are or have just come, 
Us on Elks viennent Warriver. 



We had or were just come. 
Nous venions d'arriver. 

You had or were just come, 
Fbus veniez d'arriver. 

They had or were just come, 
//* ou Elles venaient d'arriver. 



Conjugate after the same maimer every verb ending, in the present of 
the infinitive, in enir : as, — 

j-^ppa7^temr, 

Avcnir, 
\Circonvenir, 
\Contenir, 
fContrevenir, 
* Convenir, 
\Deprcvemr, 
\Dttenir, 

Devenir, 

Disconvenir, 
jfEntretenir, 

Intervenir, 
\Maintenir, 

J\1tsavenir, 



to belong, 
to happen, 
to circumvent, 
to contain, 
to contravene, 
to agree, to suit, 
to unprepossess. 
to detain, 
to become, 
to disagree, 
to entertain, 
to intervene, 
to maintain, 
to succeed ill. 



irA 



to obtain. 

to come to preferment, to attain. 

to prevent, to inform. 

to proceed from. 

to become again. 

to retain. 

to come again, to come back, 

to abstain. 

to sustain, to support. 

to remember. 

to relieve. 

to come unexpectedly. 

to hold. 



\Obtenir, 

Parvenir, 
^Pi'tvenir, 

P?'overnr, 

Redevenir, 
\ Ret enir, 

Pevenir, 

S'abstenir, 
jSoidenir, 

Se souvenir & 

*e ressouvenir, 
\Subvenir, 

Survenir, 
j-Tenir, 

The verbs which are marked with a (t)? ii^ the above hst, take avoir 
in their compound tenses ; whereas those which have not this mark 
take etre. 

* Convenir is conjugated with avoir in its compound tenses, when it 
is used in the sense of to suit : as — that would have suited me, cela 
m'aurait convenu ; but it takes etrc, in the sense of to agree : as, — 
we have agreed on the price, nous sommes convenus du prix. 

The n, in the above verbs, and in any other ending in enir in the 
present of the infinitive mood, is, as in the verb venir, doubled in the 
tenses, in which it comes before e, es, or ent mute : as, — tenir, to hold; 
que je tienne, que tu tieniies, quails ou qu'' elles tiennent, &c, 

Avenir^ to happen, can only be used in the third person singular of 
a few tenses, and in the present of the infinitive : as, — sHl avient, if it 
happens, &c. 

Provenir, to proceed from, is seldom used but in its third persons 
singular and plural: as, — cela provient de, that proceeds from ; tous 
ces malheurs provenaient de...., all these misfortunes proceeded 
from, &c. 

2. Acquerir, to acquire [Active Verb] ; 

Acquevani, acquiring ; acij^uis, acquise, acquired. Avoir acquis, ayant acquis. 



Jnd. Pres. J'acquiers, 

Nous acquerons. 

Imp. J'acquerais, 

Nous acquerions, 

Pret. Def. J'acqvxis, 

Nous acquimes, 



tu acquieis, 
vous acqiierez, 

tu acquerais, 
vous acqueriez, 

tu acquis, 
vous acquites, 



il ou elle acquiert; 
ils ou elles acquierent. 

il ou elle acquerait; 
ils ou elles acqueraient, 

il ou elle acquit; 

ils ou elles acquirent. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 165 



Put. 



J'acquerrai, 
Nous acqueirons, 



Cond.Pres. J'acqvitrrais, 

Nous acquerrions, 

Imperative. \^No \st per'non.^ 
Acqiierons, 

Sub, Pres, Que j'acquiert?;, 

Que nous acquerions^ 

Imp. Que j'acquisse, 

Que nous acquissions^ 



tu acquervas, 
vous acquerrez, 

tu acquenais, 
vous acqueniez, 

acquieis, 
acquerez, 

que tu acquieres, 
que vous acqueriez, 

que tu acquisses. 



il ou elle acquerra ; 
ils ou elles acquerront. 
il ou elle acquerrait ; 
ils 02i elles acquerraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle acquiere ,• 
qu'ils ou qu'elles acquierent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle acquiere ; 
qu'ils oii qu'elles acquierent. 
qu'il ou qu'elle acquit ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles acquissent. 



que vous acquissiez. 

Conjugate after the same manner the verbs conquerii\ to conquer; 
reconqiierir, to conquer again ; requerivy to require ; s''enquerh\ to in- 
quire; and querir^ to fetch. 

Conquerir is only used in the present of the infinitive, in the preterit 
definite, in the imperfect of the subjunctive, and in the compound 
tenses. 

Reconquirir is chiefly used in the past participle. 

S'enquh'ir is very little used, except in the present of the infinitive 
and in its compound tenses. 

Querir^ to fetch, is only used in the present of the infinitive with the 
verbs aller, venir, and envoyer : as, — Allez me quirir M. un tel, go 
and fetch me Mr. such a one ; je Pai envoye querir, I have sent for 
him ; il nicest venu querir, he came to fetch me ; &c. This verb must 
not be used in an elevated style. 

3. Assaillir^ to assault [Active Verb] ; 



Assaillant, assaulting 
Jnd. Pres. J'assaille, 



assailli, assaillie, assaulted. 
tu assailles. 



Imp. 



Nous assaillons, 

J'assaillais, 
Nous assaillions, 



vous assaillez, 

tu assaillais, 
vous a>)sailliez, 

tu assaillis, 
vous assaillites, 

tu assailliras, 
vous assaillirez, 

tu assaillirais, 
vous assailliriez, 

assaille, 
assaiilez, 

que lu assailles, 



Avoir assailli, ayant assailli. 

il ou elle assaille; 
ils ou elles assailleut. 

il ou elle assaillait ; 
ils uu elles assaillaient. 



il ou elle assaillit ; 

ils ou elles assaillirent. 



Pret. Def. J 'assaillis, 

Nous assaillimes, 

Put. J'assailliral,* 

Nous assaillirons, 

Cond.Pres. J'assaillirais,* 

Nous assaillirions, 

Imperative. [iVo \st person.'\ 
Assaillons, 

Sub. Pres. Que j'assaille, 

Que nous assaillions, que vous assailliez, 

Imp. Que j'assaillisse, que tu assaillisses. 

Que nous assaillis- que vous assaillis- 
sions, siez, 

Conjugate after the same manner tressaillir^ to start : but je tres- 



il ou elle assaillira ; 
ils ou elles assailliront, 

il ou elle assaillirait ; 
ils ou elles assailliraient. 

qu'il ou quelle assaille ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles assaillent. 
qu'il ou qu'elle assaille ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles assaillent. 
qu'il ou qu'elle assaillit ; 
qu'ils oti qu'elles assaillis- 
sent. 



* JVailly is of opinion that j''assaillerai, tu assailleras, &c. may also be used in the 
future ; and fassaillerais, tu assaillerais, &c. in the conditional. 



166 IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



saillirai, tu tressailliras, &c. or je tressaillerai, tu tressailleras, &c. 
may be used in the future, as also je tressaillirais, tu tressaillirais, &c. 
and je tressaillerais, tu tressaillerais, &c. in the conditionaL 

4. Bouillir, to boil [Neuter Verb] ; 

Bouillant, boiling ; bouiUi, bouillie, boiled. Avoir bouilli, ayant bouilli. 

tu bous. il ou elle bout ; 

vous bouillez, ils ou elles bouillent. 

tu bouillais, il on elle bouillait ; 

vous bouilliez, ils ou elles bouillaient, 

tu bouillis, il ou elle bouillit ; 

vous bouillites, ils ou elles bouillirent. 

tu bouilliras, il ou elle bouillira ; 

vous bouillirez, ils ou elles bouilliront. 

il ou elle bouillirait ; 
ils ou elles bouilliraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle bouille ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles bouillent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle bouille ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles bouillent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle bouillit ; 
qu'ils ozi qu'elles bouillis- 



Ind. Pres. Je bous, 

Nous bouillons, 

Imp. Je bouillais. 

Nous bouillions, 

Pret. Def. Je bouillis, 

Nous bouillimes. 

Put. Je bouillirai, 

Nous bouillirons, 



Cond. Pres. Je bouillirais. 

Nous bouillirions. 

Imperative. [iVb 1st person^ 
Bouillons, 

Sub. Pres. Que je bouille, 

Que nous bouillions, que vous bouilliez, 

Imp. Que je bouillisse, que tu bouillisses. 
Que nous bouillis- que vous bouillis- 
sions, siez, 



tu bouillirais, 
vous bouilliriez, 

bous, 
bouillez, 

que tu bouilles, 



sent. 



The above verb can only be used properly in French in the third 
person singular and in the third plural of its different tenses ; as, — TJeau 
bout, the water boils ; ces choux ne bouillaient pas, these cabbages did 
not boil, &c. Should it be required to be used in any other of its per- 
sons in French, in the sense of/ boil, thou boilest, he or she boils ; we 
boil, you boil, they boil, &c. in English, it must be expressed by the 
corresponding person of the verb faire, putting bouillir in the present 
of the infinitive : thus, — Je fais bouillir, tu fais bouillir, il ou elle fait 
bouillir ; nous fais ons bouillir, vous faites bouillir, ils ou elles font 
bouillir, &c. : as, — Je fais bouillir de la viande, I boil some meat ; 
and not je bous. 

Rebouillir, to boil again, is conjugated after the same manner as 
bouillir, and follows the same rules. 

5. Courir, to run [Neuter and Active Verb] ; 

Courant, running' ; 

Ind. Pres. Je cours, 

Nous couroris. 

Imp. Je courais. 

Nous courions, 

Pret. Def. Je courus, 

Nous couiumes. 
Put. Je courrai, 

Nous courrons. 



couru, courue, run. 

tu cours, 
vous courez, 

tu courais, 
vous couriez, 

tu courus, 
vous courutes, 

tu courras, 
vous courrez, 



Avoir couru, ayaut couru. 

il ou elle court ; 
ils ou elles courent. 

il ou elle courait ; 
ils ou elles couraient, 

il ou elle courut ; 

ils ou elles coururent. 

il ou elle courra ; 
ils ou elles courront. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 167 



Cond. Fres. Je courrais. 

Nous courrious^ 

Imperative. [No \sf person.^ 
Courons, 

Sub. P7'es. Que je coure, 

Que nous courions, 

Imp. Que je courusse. 

Que nous courus- 
sions, 



tu courrais, 
vous courriez, 

coiurs, 
courez, 

que tu coures, 
que vous couriez^ 

que tu courusses, 
que vous courus- 
siez. 



il ou elle courrait ; 
ils ou elles courraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle coure; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles courent. 
qu'il ou qu'elle coure ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles courent. 
qu'il ou qu'elle courut ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles courussent. 



Conjugate after the same manner the verbs accourir, to run to ; 
concourir, to concur; discourir., to discourse; encoiirir, to incur; 
parcourir, to run over; secourir, to succour; recoiirir^ to have re- 
course to. 

Accourir, to run to, takes avoir or etre in its compound tenses, 
according to the sense in which it is used: as, — /'a^ accouru and ie 
suis accouru, &c. 

6. CueiUir, to gather [Active Verb] ; 



Cueillant, gathering ; cueilli, cueillie, gathered. 

Ind. Pres. Je cueille, tu cueilles. 

Nous cueillons, vous cueillez, 

Imp. Je cueillais, tu cueillais, 

Nous cueillions^ vous cueilliez, 

Pret. Def. Je cueillis, tu cueillis. 

Nous cueillimes, vous cueillites, 

Fut. Je cueillerai, 

Nous cueillerous, 
Cond. Pres. Je cueillerais, 

Nous cueillerions. 

Imperative. {^No \st person.'] 
Cueillons, 

Sub. Pres. Que je cueille^ 

Que nous cueillions, que vous cueilliez, 

Imp. Que je cueillisse, que tu cueillisses, 
Que nous cueillis- que vous cueillis- 
sions, siez, 



tu cueilleras^ 
vous cueillerez, 

tu cueillerais, 
vous cueiileriez, 

cueille, 
cueillez, 

que tu cueilles, 



Avoir cueilli, ayant cueilli. 

il ou elle cueille ; 
ils ou elles cueilleut. 

il ou elle cueillait ; 
ils ou elles cueillaient. 

il ou elle cueillit ; 

ils oil elles cueillirent. 

il ou elle cueillera ; 
ils ou elles cueilleront. 

il ou elle cueillerait ; 
ils ou elles cueilleraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle cueille ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles cueillent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle cueille; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles cueillent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle cueillit ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles cueillis- 
sent. 



Conjugate after the same manner accueillir, to make welcome, to 
receive kindly ; and recueillir, to gather, to reap, to receive. 

1. Faillir, to fail [Neuter and Defective Verb]; 

Faillant, failing ; failli, faillie,/rttVec^. Avoir failli, ayant failli. 

Pret. Def. Je faillis, 

Nous faillimes, 



tu faillis, 
vous faillites, 



il ou elle faillit ; 
ils ou elles faillirent. 



This verb is only used as above. Its compound tenses are regular, 
and formed with the diiferent tenses of the auxiliary verb avoir and 



168 IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



its own past participle /a^7/^ : as, — faifailli, iu as failli, il ou elle a 
failli, &c. 

Faire faillite is more generally used than faillir^ in the sense of to 
fail, to break, to be a bankrupt. 

Defaillir, to fail, to decay, derived from faillir, is hardly ever used, 
except in the plural of the present of the indicative : nous defaillons ; 
in the imperfect, /e defaillais ; in the preterit definite, y^ clefaillis, tu 
defaillis, &c. in the preterit indefinite, j^ai defallli, &c. and in the 
present of the infinitive, defaillir. 

8. Fleurir, to blossom, to flourish [Neuter Verb]. 

"VVlien this verb is taken in the sense of shooting forth flowers, it is 
regular and conjugated like finir. But when it is used in a figurative 
sense, denoting prosperity, as when speaking of a kingdom or a town, 
we say, It is in a flourishing state, its present participle is then 
/lo7'issant,2LTid its imperfect of the indicSitiYe jcjiorissais, tu florissais, 
il ou elle fiorissait, &c. instead of fleurissant, je fleurissais, tufleu- 
rissais, il ou elle Jieurissait, &c. This is the only irregularity of 
fleurir, its other tenses being always regular. 

Refleurir, to blossom or flourish again, is conjugated after the same 
manner &s fleurir ; its present participle is also, when used in its 
natural sense, refleurissant, and its imperfect of the indicative, re- 
fleurissais ; but when it is employed in a figurative sense, its present 
participle is reflorissant, and its imperfect of the indicative refloris' 
sais, &c. 

9. Fuir, to fly, to shun [Active and Neuter Verb] ; 
Yx\ya.r\.i, Jiying ; i\\\,iM\Q,Jle(l. Avoir fui, ay ant fui. 
tu fuis, 
vous fuyez, 

tu fuyais, 
vous liiyiez, 

tu fuis, 
vous fuites, 

tu fuiras, 
vous fuirez^ 

tu fuirais, 
vous fuiriez, 

fuis, 
fuyez, 

que tu fuies, 
que vous fuyiez, 

que tu fuisses, 
que vous fuissiez. 

Conjugate after the same manner s'^enfuii 
imperative, it makes enfuis-toi, &c. 



Ind. Pies. 



Imp. 



Je fuis, 
Nous fuyoiis, 

Je fuyais, 
Nous fuyious, 



Pret. Def. Je fuis. 

Nous fuimes, 

Fut. Je fuirai, 

Nous fuirons, 

Cond. Pres. Je fuirais. 

Nous fuirions, 

Imperative. \No \>>t person.'] 
Fuyons, 

Sub. Pres. Que je fuie, 

Que nous fuyions. 

Imp. Que je fuisse, 

Que nous fuissions, 



il ou elle fuit ; 
ils ou elles fuient. 

il ou elle fuyait ; 
ils ou elles fuyaient. 

il ou elle fuit; 

ils ou elles fuirent. 

il ou elle fuira ; 
ils ou elles fuiront. 

il ou elle fuirait ; 
ils ou elles fuiraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle fuie ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles fuient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle fuie; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles fuient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle fuit ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles fuissent. 

to run away : in the 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 169 



10. Gesir, to lie [Neuter and Defective Verb]; 

Gisant, l^i'^g. 

This verb, which formerly signified to be lying down, is no longer in 
use. We, however, sometimes say : — il gft, nous gisons, Us gisent, 
il gisait, gisant. 

Ci-g1t^ here lies, is the common form by which an epitaph begins , 
this expression is also fine in a figurative sense, and particularly in 
poetry. 

Ci-git Ver-vert, ci-gisent tons les coeurs. — Gressef. 



11. Hair, to hate [Active Verb] ; 



Haissaut, haling ; 

Ltd. Pi'es. Je hais. 

Nous haissons, 

Imp. Je haVssais, 

Nous haissions, 

Prei. Def. Je haVs, 

Nous haVmes, 

Fitt. Je hairai, 

Nous haVrons, 

Cond.Pres.Je haVrais, 

Nous haVrionS;, 

Imperative. \_No \st person.^ 
Haissons, 

Sub. Pies. Que je liaVsse, 

Que nous haissions, 

Imp. Que je haVsse, 

Que nous haissions, 



haV, haVe, hated 

tu hais, 
vous haissez, 

tu haVssais, 
vous haissiez, 

tu haVs, 
vous haites, 

tu haVras, 
vous haVrez, 

tu haVrais, 
vous hairiez, 

hais, 
haissez, 

que tu haVsses, 
que vous haissiez, 

que tu haVsses, 
que vous haissiez. 



Avoir haV, ayant haV. 

\\ou elle hait ; 

ils ou elles hai'ssent. 

il ou elle haVssait; 
ils ou elles hai'ssaient. 

il ou elle hait ; 

ils ou elles hairent. 

il ou elle haira ; 
ils ou elles hairont. 

il ou elle haVrait ; 
ils ou elles hairaient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle haVsse j 
qu'ils ou qu'elles hai'ssent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle hai'sse; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles hai'ssent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle ha'i't ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles hai'ssent. 



The h is aspirated through all its tenses and persons. 

A diaeresis (") is required over the ?', in all the persons and tenses 
of hair, to show that the i is to be pronounced separately from the pre- 
ceding vowel a : as, — ha-'ir., je ha-'issais, &c. The three first letters 
of this verb form two syllables, except in the three persons singular of 
the present of the indicative, and in the second singular of the impera- 
tive, in which they form only one, and are written without the diaeresis, 
thus — je hais, tu hais, il ou elle hait ; hais ; pronounced— j'e he, tu 
he, il ou elle he ; he. It is in this particular alone that consists the 
irregularity of hair ; for all its other tenses and persons are regidar, 
and conjugated after the same manner asjinir. 

12. Issir, to descend [Neuter and Defective Verb], 
This verb, which was formerly employed for sortir, is now only used 
in its past participle, issu, issue, with the different tenses of the verb 
etre ; it signifies venu, descendu, dhine personne, dhme race, &c. as, 
— il est issu c?e . . . . , he is descended from .... 



170 IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



13. Mourir, to die [Neuter Verb]; 

Mowxsxii, dying ; vaoxi, vcioxie, died. Etre mort, etant mort. 

Ind. Pres. Je meurs. 

Nous mourons, 

Imp. Je mourais, 

Nous mourions^ 

Pret. Def. Je mourus^ 

Nous mourumesj 

Fut. Je mourrai, 

Nous mourrons, 

Cond. Pres. Je mourrais, 

Nous mourrions, 

Imperative. \^No \st person.^ 
Mourons, 

Sub. Pres. Que je meure, 

Que nous mourions, 

Imp. Que je mourusse, 
Que nous mourus- 
sions, 

The two r^s of the future and conditional of this verb are both pro- 
nounced. Its compound tenses are formed with the simple tenses of 
etre. 

14. Oui'r, to hear [Active and Defective Verb]. 

This verb can only be used now in the present of the infinitive ouh, 
to hear; in the preterit definite, y'oww, I heard; z7 ou?Y, he heard ; in 
the imperfect of the subjunctive, que fou'isse, that I might hear ; quHl 
omt, that he might hear; and in its compound tenses, which are 
formed with the simple tenses of the auxiliary verb avoir, and its past 
participle ou'i, ou'ie. Any other verb which may follow in the sentence 
is put in the present of the infinitive: as, — I heard say, j^ai ou'i 
dire, &c. 

15. Ouvrir, to open [Active Verb] ; 

Ouvrant, opening ^ ouvert, ouverte, opened. Avoir ouvert, ayant ouvert. 



tu meurs, il ou elle meurt; 
vous mourezj ils ou elles meurent. 


tu mourais, 
vous mouriez. 


1 ou elle mourait ; 
lis ou elles mouraient. 


tu mourus, il ou elle mourut ; 
vous mourutes, ils ou elles moururent. 


tu mourras, il ou elle mourra ; 
vous mourrez, ils ou elles mourront. 


tu mourrais, il ou elle mourrait ; 
vous mourriez, ils ou elles mourraient. 


meurs, qu'il ou qu'elle meure ; 
mourez, qu'ils ou qu'elles meurent. 


que tu meures, qu'il ou qu'elle meure ; 
que vous mouriez, qu'ils ou qu'elles meurent. 


que tu mourusses, qu'il ou qu'elle mourfxt ; 
que vous mourus- qu'ils ou qu'elles mourus- 
siez, sent. 



Ind. Pres. J'ouvre, 

Nous ouvrons, 


tu ouvres, 
vous ouvrez, 


il ou elle ouvre ; 
ils ou elles ouvrent. 


Imp. J'ouvrais, 

Nous ouvrions, 


tu ouvrais, 
vous ouvriez, 


il ou elle ouvrait; 
ils ou elles ouvraient. 


Pret. Def. J'ouvris, 

Nous ouvrimes, 


tu ouvris, 
vous ouvrites, 


il ou elle ouvrit ; 

ils ou elles ouvrirent. 


Fvt. J'ouvrirai, 

Nous ouvrirons. 


tu ouvriras, 
vous ouvrirez, 


il ou elle ouvrira ; 
ils ou elles ouvriront. 


Cmd. Pres. J'ouvrirais, 

Nous ouvririons, 


tu oiivrirais, 
vous ouvririez, 


il ou elle ouvrirait ; 
ils ou elles ouvriraient. 


Imperative. [No \st person.] 
Ouvrons, 


ouvre, 
ouvrez, 


qu'il ou qu'elle ouvre ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles ouvrent. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. Ill 



Sub. Pres. Que j'ouvre, 

Que nous ouvrions 



qu'il ou qu'elle ouvre ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles ouvrent. 



que tu ouvres, 
que vous ouvriez, 

/wjo. Quej'ouviisse, que tu ouvrisses, qu'il 02/ qu'elle ouvrit ; 

Que nous ouvrissions, que vous ouvrissiez^ qu'ils on qu'elles ouvrissent. 

Conjugate after the same manner the verbs — couvrir, to cover; 
decouvrir, to discover, to uncover ; entr^ouvrir, to open a little ; mes- 
qffrir, to underbid; offrir, to ofter; rouvrir, to re-open; recouvrir, 
to cover again : souffrir, to suffer ; and any other verb ending in vrir 
and/rzV in the present of the infinitive. 

16. Partir, to set out, to go away [Neuter Verb] ; 
Partant, setting out ; partly partie, set out. Etre parti, etaut parti. 



Ind. Pres. Je pars, 

Nous partons. 

Imp. Je partais. 

Nous partions, 

Pret. Def. Je partis. 

Nous partfmes, 

Fut. Je partirai, 

Nous partirons, 

Cond.Pres. Je partirais. 

Nous partirions, 

Imperative. \No \sl person.'\ 
Partons, 

Sub. Pres. Que je parte, 

Que nous partions, 

Imp. Que je partisse. 



tu pars, 
vous partez, 

tu partais, 
vous partiez, 
tu partis, 
vous partites, 

tu partiras, 
vous partirez, 

tu partirais, 
vous partiriez, 

pars, 
partez, 

que tu partes, 
que vous partiez, 



il ou elle part ; 

ils ou elles partent. 

il ou elle partait ; 
ils ou elles partaient. 

il ou elle partit ; 
ils ou elles partirent. 

il ou elle pariira ; 
ils ou elles partiront. 

il ou elle partirait ; 
ils ou elles partiraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle parte ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles partent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle parte; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles partent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle partit ; 



que tu partisses. 
Que nouspartissions, que vous partissiez, qu'ils ou qu'elles partissent. 

Conjugate after the same manner refartir, to set out again ; its 
compound tenses are also formed with etre. 

Repartir, in the sense of to reply, takes avoir in its compound 
tenses : as, — il ne lui a reparti que des impertinences, he only replied 
to her by impertinent words ; il ni'a reparti avec beaucoup d^esprit, 
he replied to me with much ingenuity. 

Rtipartir and departir, meaning to distribute, to divide, are regular 
verbs, and conjugated, in all their simple and compound tenses, like 
Jinir. 

17. Sentir, to smell [Active and Neuter Verb]; 

Sentant, smelling ; senti, sentie, smelt. Avoir senti, ayant senti. 



Ind. Pres. Je sens, 

Nous sentons. 
Imp. Je sentais. 

Nous sentions, 

Pret. Def. Je sentis. 

Nous sentimes. 



tu sens, 
vous seutez, 

tu sentais, 
vous sentiez, 

tu sentis, 
vous sentites, 



il ou elle sent; 

ils ou elles sentent. 

il ou elle sentait; 
ils ou elles sentaient. 

il ou elle sentit ; 
ils ou elles sentirent. 
I 2 



172 IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



Fut. Je sentirai, tu sentiras, 

Nous semirons, vous sentirez, 

Cond, Pres. Je sentirais, tu sentirais, 

Nous sentirions, vous sentiriez, 

Imperative. [No \st pey'soni] sens, 

Sentons, sentez, 

Sub, Pres. Que je sente, que tu sentes. 

Que nous sentions, que voiis sentiez. 

Imp. Que je sentisse, que tu sentisses. 

Que nous sentissions, que vous sentissiez, qu'ils on qu'elles seutissent. 

Conjugate after the same manner the verbs consentii\ to consent ; 
demeniir, to give one the lie; meniir, to lie; pi'essentir, to foresee; 
ressenti?', to resent ; se ressentir, to feel still ; se repentir, to repent ; 
and in general all verbs ending in entir in the present of the infinitive. 

18. Servir, to serve [Active Verb] ; 

Servant, serving ; servi, servie, served. Avoir servi, ayant servi. 



il oil elle sentira ; 
ils ou elles sentiront. 

il 071 elle sentirait ; 
ils ou elles sentiraient. 

qu'il cu qu'elle sente ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles sentent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle sente ; 
qu'ils oil qu'elles sentent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle sentit. 



Ind. Pres. Je sers, tu sers, 

Nous servons, vous servez. 

Imp. Je servais, tu servais, 

Nous servions, vous serviez, 

Pret. Def. Je servis, tu servis^, 

Nous servimes, vous servites, 

Fut. Je servirai, tu sendras. 

Nous servirons, vous servirez, 

Cond. Pres.Je servirais, tu servirais, 

Nous servirions, vous serviriez. 

Imperative. [No \st person. '\ sers, 

Servons, servez, 

Svb. Pres. Que je serve, que tu serves, 

Que nous servions, que vous serviez. 

Imp. Que je servisse, que tu servisses, 

Que nous servissions, que vous servissiez, 

Conjugate after the same manner desservir, to clear the table, to 
injure, &c. 

Asservir., to enslave, to subject, is regular, and conjugated like finir. 

19. Sortir, to go out [Neuter Verb]; 

Sortant, going out i sorti, sortie, gone oid. Etre sorti, etant sorti*. 

Ind. Pres. Je sors, tu sors, il ou elle sort ; 

Nous sortons, vous sortez, ils oti elles sortent. 

* This verb takes etre in its compound tenses, when it is used to express that 
somebody is gone out and not returned : as, — is Mr. Douville at home ? no, he is 
gone out ; M. Douvil/e y est-il ? non, il est sorti ; hut, when it is employed to denote 
that some one has been out and is returned, it then takes avoir in its compound 
tenses : as, Mr. Douville has been out this morning, and is returned, M. Douville a 
sorti ce matin, et il est de retovr. 



il ou elle sert -, 

ils oic elles servent. 

il ou elle servait ; 
ils ou elles servaient. 

il ou elle servit ; 

ils ou elles servirent. 

il ou elle servira ; 
ils ou elles serviront. 

il ou elle servirait ; 
ils ou elles serviraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle serve ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles servent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle serve ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles servent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle servit ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles servissent. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 173 



Imp. Je sortais, 

Nous sortions, 

Pret. Def. Je sortis, 

Nous sortimes, 

Fui. Je sortirai. 

Nous sortirons, 

Cond. Pies. Je sortirais, 

Nous sortirions. 

Imperative. [A'b \st person.'] 

Sortons, 
Sub. Pres. Que je soite, 

Que nous sortions 

Imp. Que je sortisse, 



tu sortais, 
vous sortiez, 

tu sortis, 
vous sortites, 

tu sortiras, 
vous sortirez, 

tu sortirais, 
vous soitiriez. 



il ou elle sortait ; 
ils ou elles sortaieut. 

il ou elle sortit ; 
ils oti elles sortirent. 

il oil elle sortira ; 
ils ou elles sortiront. 

il ou elle sortirait ; 
ils ou elles soitiraient. 



sors, 

sortez, 

que tu sortes, 

que vous sortie z, 

que tu sortisses, 
Que nous sortissions, que vous sortissiez. 

Conjugate after the same manner ressortir, to go out again ; dormir, 
to sleep ; s'endormiry to fall asleep ; se rendormir, to fall asleep again ; 
endormir^ to lull asleep; &c. 

Dormir and endormir take avoir in their compound tenses. 



qu'il ou qu'elle sorte ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles sortent. 
qu'il ou qu'elle soite ; 
qu'ils 61?/ qu'elles sovtent. 

qn'il ou qu'elle sortit ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles sortissent. 



20. Vetir, to clothe [Active Verb] ; 

Vetant, clothing ; vetu, vetue, clothed. Avoir vetu, ayant vetu *. 

tu vets, 
vous vetez, 

tu vetais, 
vous vetiez, 

tu vetis, 
vous vetites, 

tu vetiras, 
vous vetirez, 

tu vetirais, 
vous v^tiriez, 

vets, 
vetez, 

que tu vetes, 
que vous vetiez, 

que tu vetisses 



Ind. Pres. Je vets, 

Nous vetous, 

Imp. Je vetais, 

Nous vetious, 

Pret. Def. Je vetis. 

Nous vetimes, 

Fi.t. Je vetirai. 

Nous vetirons, 

Cond. Pres. Je vetirais. 

Nous vetirious, 

Imperative. [No 1st perso?!.] 
Vetons, 

Sub. Pres. Que je vete, 

Que nous vetious, 

]?np. Que je vetisse. 



il ou elle vet ; 

ils ou elles vetent. 

il ou elle vet ait; 
ils ou eiles vetaient. 

il ou elle vetit ; 

ils ou elles vetirent. 

il ou elle vetira ; 
ils ou elles vetivont, 

il ou elle vetirait ; 
ils ou elles vetiraient. 



qu'il ou qu'elle vete ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles vetent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle vete ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles vetent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle vetit ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles vetissent. 



Que nous vetissions, que vous vetissiez, 

Conjugate after the same manner se vetir, to dress or clothe one's self; 
revetirj to clothe ; devetir, to strip, to undress ; se devetir, to divest 
one's self. 

Revetir and devetir take avoir and sometimes etre in their com- 
pound tenses. 



* This verb takes also sometimes e.fre in its compound tenses : as — il est bien vetu 
he is well clothed. 



174 IRREG. VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 

Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation. 

1. Dechoir, to decay [Neuter and Defective Verb] ; 

Decheant, decaying. Dechu, dechue, decayed. 



Ind. Pres. Je dechois, 

Nous dechoyons^ 



tu dechois, 
vous dechoyez, 

[The imperfect is not used.'\ 



il ou elle dechoit ; 
ils ou elles dechoieut. 



Pi^et. Def. Je dechvis, 

Nous dechumes, 

Put. Je decherrai, 

Nous decherrons, 

Co7id.Pres. Je decherrais. 

Nous decherrions. 

Imperative. \_No \st person.~\ 
Dechoyons, 

Sub. Pres. Queje dechoie, 

Que nous dechoyions, que vous dechoyiez, 

Imp. Que je dechusse, que tu decliusses, 



tu dechu s, 
vous dechutes, 

tu dechervas, 
vous decherrez, 

tu decherrais, 
vous decherriez, 

dechois, 
dechoyez, 

que tu dechoies, 



il ou elle dechut ; 

ils ou elles dechurent. 

il ou elle decherra ; 
ils ou elles decherront. 

il ou elle decherrait ; 
ils ou elles decherraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle dechoie ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles dechoientt 

qu'il on qu'elle dechoie ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles dechoient. 

qu'il ou qu^'elle dechut 



Que nous dechussions, que vous dechussiez, qu'ils ou qu'elles dechvissent. 

The above verb is seldom used, except in the present of the infinitive ; 
as, — son credit.^ sa rk'putation, commencent a dechoir, his credit and 
reputation begin to decrease ; and in its compound tenses, in which it 
takes etre, when it expresses the state of the subject: as, — ils sont 
dechus de leurs privil"ges, they have lost their privileges ; and avoir ^ 
when it denotes the action of declining : as, depuis ce moment il a 
dechu de jour en jour, from that moment he has declined every day. 



2. Mouvoir, to move [Active Verb] ; 
Mouvant, moving ; mu, mue, moved. Avoir rau, ayant nau. 



Ind. Pres. 

Imp. 
Pret. Def. 

Put. 
Cond.Pres. 
Imperative. 
Sub. Pres. 



Je mens. 
Nous mouvons, 

Je mouvais. 
Nous mouvions, 

Je mus, 
Nousmumes, 

Je mouvrai, 
Nous mouvrons, 

Je mouvrais. 
Nous mouvrions, 

[No 1st person.] 
Mouvons, 

Que je meuve. 



tu meus, 
vous moxivez, 

tu mouvais, 
vous mouviez, 

tu inus, 
vous miltes, 

tu mouvras, 
vous mouvrez, 

tu mouvrais, 
vous mouvriez, 

meus, 
mouvez, 

que tu meuves, 



Que nous mouvions, que vous mouviez, 



il ou elle meut ; 

ils ou elles meuvent. 

il ou elle mouvait ; 
ils ou elles mouvaient. 

il ou elle mut ; 

ils ozi elles murent. 

il ou elle mouvra ; 
ils uu elles mouvront. 

il ou elle mouvrait ; 
ils ou elles mouvraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle meuve ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles meuvent, 

qu'il ou qu'elle meuve ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles meuvent. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 175 



Imp. Que je musse, que tu musses, 

Que nous mussions, que vous mussiez, 



qu'il ou qu'elle mut : 
qu'ils ou qu'elles mussent. 



The above verb is seldom used lexcept in the present of the infinitive : 
as, — je ne sals pas comment il a pu mouvoir cette pierre, I do not 
know how he could move that stone. 

The object, in exemplifying all its tenses, has been to give a model 
for the verbs which are conjugated after the same manner: such as, — 
emouvoir, to move ; s^emouvoir, to be concerned : this latter, being a 
reflective verb, requires etre in its compound tenses. 

Promouvoir, to promote, is only used in the present of the infinitive, 
and in its compound tenses, which are formed with avoir : as, — on veut 
le promouvoir^ they wish to promote him ; on Va promu, he has been 
promoted. 



3. Pouvoir, to he able [Active and Defective Verb]; 

Pouvant, being able ; pu [indeclinable], been able. Avoir pu, ayant pu. 



Lid. Pres. Je puis on Je peux. 
Nous pouvons, 

Imp. Je pouvais, 

Nous pouvions, 

Pret. Def. Je pus, 

Nous pumes, 

Fut. Jepourrai*, 
Nous pom-rons, 

Cond.Pres.Je pourrais*, 

Nous pourrions, 

Sub. Pres. Quejepuisse, 

Que nous puissions, 

Imp. Que je pusse, 

Que nous pussions, 



tu peux, 
vous pouvez, 

tu pouvais, 
vous pouviez, 
tu pus, 
vous putes, 

tu pourras, 
vous pourrez, 

tu pourrais, 
vous pourriez, 

que tu puisses, 
que vous puissiez, 

que tu pusses, 
que vous pussiez, 



il ou ellc pent ; 

ils ou elles peuvent. 

il ou elle pouvait; 
ils ou elles pouvaient. 
il ou elle put ; 
ils ou elles purent. 

il OM elle pourra; 
ils ou elles pourront. 

il ou elle pourrait ; 
ils ou elles pourraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle puisse ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles puissent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle put; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles pussent. 



4. Pourvoir, to provide [Active and Neuter Verb] ; 

Pourvoyant, providing ; pourvu, pourvue, provided. Avoir pourvu, ayant pourvu. 

tu pourvois, il ou elle poiirvoit ; 

vous pourvoyez, ils ou elles pourvoient. 

tu pourvoyais, il ou elle pourvoyait; 

vous pourvoyiez, ils ou elles pourvoyaient. 



Ind. Pres. Je pourvois 

Nous pourvoyons, 

Imp, Je pourvoyais, 

Nous poxu-voyionSj 

Pret. Def. Je pourvus. 

Nous pourvumes, 



tu pourvus, 
vous po\irvutes. 



il ou elle pourvut ; 
ils oti elles pourvurent. 



* The second r only is pronounced in all the persons of the future and condi- 
tional of this verb ; but the foregoing syllable becomes long : thus,— j> pourrai, tu 
pourras, &c. are pronounced— /e potl-ra?,, tu pou-ras, &c. and Je po2/rrais, tu pourrais, 
Scc.j'e pou-rais, tu poic-rais, &c. 



176 IRREG. VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 



Fut. Je pourvoirai. 

Nous pourvoirons, 
Cond.Prcs. Je pourvoirais, 

Nous pourvoirionSj, 

Imperative. \^No \st person.'\ 
Pourvoyons, 

Sub. Pres. Que je pourvoie, 
Que nous pour- 
voyions. 

Imp. Que je pourvusstj, 
Que nous pourvus- 
sions. 



tu pourvoiras, 
vous pourvoirez, 

tu pourvoirais, 
vous pourvoiriez, 

pourvois, 
pourvoyez, 

que tu pourvoieS;, 
que vous pourvoyiez. 



il ou elle pourvoira ; 
ils ou elles pourvoiront. 

il ou elle pourvoirait ; 
ils ou elles pourvoiraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle pourvoie ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles pourvoient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle pourvoie ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles pourvoient. 



que tu pourvusses, qu'il ou qu'elle pourvut; 

que vous pourvussiez, qu'ils ou qu'elles pourvussent. 



5. Ravoir, to have or get again [Active and Defective Verb] ; 

This verb is only used in the present of the infinitive : as, — il plaide 
pour ravoir son hien^ he pleads to get his property again. 



6. Savoir, to knoiv [Active Verb] ; 



Sachant, knowing ; su, sue, hiown. Avoir su, ayant su. 

Ind. Pres. Je sais, 

Nous savons. 

Imp. Je savais, 

Nous savions, 

Prei. Dp/. Je sus, 

Nous sumes, 

Fut. Je saurai, 

Nous saurons, 

Cond.Prcs. Je saurais, 

Nous saurions. 

Imperative. \^No \st person.~\ 
Sachons, 



Sub. Pres. Que je sache, 

Que nous sachions, 

Imp. Que je susse. 

Que nous sussions, 



tu sais, 
vous savez, 

tu savais, 
vous saviez, 

tu sus, 
vous sutes, 

tu sauras, 
vous saurez, 

tu saurais, 
vous saiuiez, 

sache, 
sachez, 

que tu s aches, 
que vous sachiez, 

que tu susses, 
que vous sussiez. 



il ou elle sait ; 
ils ou elles savent. 

il ou elle savait ; 
ils ou elles savaient, 

il ou elle sut ; 
ils ou elles surent. 
il OM elle saura ; 
ils ou elles saurout. 

il ou elle saurait; 
ils ou elles sauraient. 



qu'il ou qu'elle sache ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles sachent. 



qu'il ou qu'elle sache ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles sachent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle sut ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles sussent. 



Observe. — Although savoir and connaitre he Englished by the same 
word to know, there is a material difference in the use of them in 
French. Savoir is usually employed in speaking of sciences or things 
that are studied and learnt : as, — Do you know Latin ? Savez-vous le 
Latin ? I know my lesson, Je sais ma lepon ; whereas connaitre is 
employed in mentioning things which are the objects of our senses, and 
properly signifies to be acquainted ivith : as, — I know that gentleman, 
that country, &c. Je connais ce monsieur , ce }')ays, &c. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 177 



7. S'asseoir, to sit down [Reflective Verb] ; 



Ind. Pres. 

Imp. 
Pret. Def. 

Put. 
Cond. Pres 
Imperative 
Sub. Pres. 

Imp. 



S'asseyant, sitting; assis, assise, sat. S'etre assis, s'etant assis. 

Je m'assieds, tu t'assieds, il ou elle s'assied; 

Nous nous asseyons, vous vous asseyez, ils ou elles s'asseyent. 
Je nrasseyais, tu t'asseyais. 

Nous nous asseyions, vous vous asseyiez, 

Je m'assis, tu t'assis. 

Nous nous assimes, vous vous assites, 
Je m'assierai*, tu t'assieras, 

Nous nous assierons, vous vous assierez, 

Je m'assierais, tu t'assierais. 

Nous nous assieriun"?, vous vous assieriez 



[iVb \st person.^ 
Asseyons-noiis, 

Que je m'asseye., 
Que nous nous asse- 
yions, 

Que je ni'assisse, 
Que nous nous assis- 
sions. 



assieds-toi, 
asseyez-vous, 

que tu t'asseyes, 
que vous vous as- 
seyiez, 

que tu t'assisses, 
que vous vous as- 

sissiez, 



il ou elle s'asseyait ; 
ils ou elles s'asseyaient. 

il ou elle s'assit ; 

ils ou elles s'assirent. 

il ou elle s" assiera ; 
ils ou elles s'assieront. 

il ou elle s'assierait ; 
ils ou elles s'assieraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle s'asseye ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles s'asseyent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle s'asseye ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles s'asseyent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle s'assit ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles s'assissent. 



Conjugate after the same manner se rasseoir., to sit down again. 

Asseoii\ to set, follows also the same conjugation ; but, being an 
active and not a reflective verb, it only takes the personal pronouns — 
ye, tu^ il, elle., nous, vous, ils, elles ; its compound tenses are formed 
\vith avoir : as, — J'^ai assis Venfant sur la chaise, I set the child upon 
the chair. 

Rasseoir, to settle, in speaking of liquids which purify by remaining 
still, is only used in the present of the infinitive, and sometimes in its 
compound tenses which are formed with etre : as, — laissez rasseoir le 
cafe, let the coffee settle ; il est bien r as sis, it is quite settled. 



8. Surseoir, to reprieve, to supersede [Active Verb] ; 
Sursoyant, reprieving : sursis, sursise, reprieved. Avoir sursis, ayant sursis. 



Ind. Pres. Je sursois. 

Nous sursoyons, 

Imp. Je sursoyais, 

Nous sursoyions, 

Pret. Def. Je sursis. 

Nous sursimes, 

Fuf. Je surseoirai. 

Nous surseoirons, 



tu sursois, 
vous sursoyez, 

tu sursoyais, 
vous sursoyiez, 

tu sursis, 
vous sursites, 

tu surseoir as, 
vous surseoirez. 



il ou elle sursoit ; 
ils on elles sursoient. 

il ou elle sursoyait; 
ils ou elles sursoyaient. 

il ou elle sursit ; 

ils ou elles sursirent. 

il ou elle surseoira ; 
ils ozi elles surseoiront. 



* Je m'asseijerai, tu t'asseyeras, &c. andj'e m^asseyerais, tu fasseyerais, &c. may also 
be used in the future and conditional. 



118 IRREG. VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 



Cond.Pres. Je surseoirais, tu surseoirais. 

Nous surseoirions, vous surseoiriez, 

Imperative. [No \st person.'\ sursois, 

Sursoyons, sursoyez, 

Sub. Pres. Que je sursoie, que tu sursoies, 

Que nous sursoyions^ que vous sursoyiez, 

Imp. Que je sursisse, que tu sursisses. 

Que nous sursissions, que vous sursissiez^ 



il ou elle surseoirait ; 
ils ou elles surseoiraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle sursoie ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles sursoient. 

qu'il otf qu'elle sursoie ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles sursoient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle sursit ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles sursissent. 



The above verb, which is principally used in proceedings at law, is 
seldom employed but in the present of the infinitive, and in its compound 
tenses : as, — surseoir le jugement dlun proces, to put off the verdict of 
an action, &c. 

We also say — surseoir a ^execution dun arrU, in which sense 
surseoir is neuter. 

When sursis, past participle of surseoir, is taken adjectively, it is 
frequently used with the different tenses of ctre : as, — le jugement est 
sursis, the judgment is put oflf. 



9. Valoir, to be vjorth [Active and Neuter Verb] ; 
Valantj being worth; valu [ind€clinable~\, bee?i worth. Avoir valu, ayant valu. 



Jnd. Pres. Je vaux. 

Nous valons. 

Imp. Je valais, 

Nous valions, 

Pret. Def. Je valus. 

Nous valumes, 

Fut. Je vaudrai, 

Nous vaudrons, 

Cond, Pres, Je vaudrais. 

Nous vaudrions^ 

Imperative. [No 1st person.'\ 
Valons, 

Sub. Pres. Quejevaille, 

Que nous valions, 

Imp. Que je valusse, 



tu vaux, 
vous valez, 

tu valais, 
vous valiez, 

tu valus, 
vous valutes, 

tu vaudras, 
vous vaudrez, 

tu vaudrais, 
vous vaudriez, 

vaux, 
valez, 

que til vailles, 
que vous valiez, 

que tu valusses, 



Que nous valussions, que vous valussiez. 



il ou elle vaut ; 
ils ou elles valent. 

il ou elle valait ; 
ils ou elles valaient. 

il ou elle valut; 

ils ou elles valurent. 

il ou elle vaudra ; 
ils ou elles vaudront. 

il ou elle vandrait ; 
ils ou elles vaudraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle vaille ; 
qu'ils ott qu'elles vaillent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle vaille ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles vaillent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle valut ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles valussent. 



Conjugate after the same manner the verbs prevaloir, to prevail ; 
equivaloir^ to be equivalent ; and revaloir, to repay. 

The present of the subjunctive of prevaloir is que je prevale, que tu 
prevales, qu'il prevale ; que nous prevalions, que vous prevaliez, 
qu'ils prevalent. Prevaloir generally governs the preposition sur : as, 
— il ne faut pas que la raison prevale sur I'usage, reason must not 
prevail over custom. When prevaloir is taken in a reflective sense, it 
requires de: as, — Lhomme ne doit pas se prevaloir heaucoup de sa 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 179 

raison qui le trompe si souvent^ men must not boast much of their 
reason w^hich so often deceives them. 

Equivaloir, to be equivalent, is seldom used, except sometimes in 
the third person singular of the present of the indicative : as, — Ceci 
equivaut a cela ; and even then it is better to use the adjective equiva- 
lent^ with the different tenses of etre : as, — Ceci est equivalent a cela, 
this is equivalent to that. It requires the preposition a. 

Revaloir, to return like for like, is always used with the pronoun le 
or cela : as, — Je le lui ai revalu, I returned him like for like ; j'e lui 
revaudrui cela, I shall return him like for like. 

10. Voir, to see [Active Verb] ; 
Voyant, seeing ; vu, vue, seeti. Avoir vn, ayant vu. 



Ind. Pres. Je vols, 

Nous voyons, 


tu vols, 
vous voyez, 


il ou elle voit ; 
ils oti elles voient. 


Imp. Je voyais. 

Nous voyions, 


tu voyais, 
vous voyiez, 


il ou elle voyait ; 
ils oif elles voyaient. 


Pret. Def, Je vis, 

Nous viraes, 


tu vis, 
vous vites, 


il ou elle vit ; 

ils ou elles virent. 


Fut. Jeverrai*, 
Nous verrons, 


tu verras, 
vous verrez, 


il ou elle verra ; 
ils ou elles verront. 


Cond. Pres. Je verrais *, 

Nous verrions, 


tu verrais, 
vous verriez, 


il oti elle verrait ; 
ils ou elles verraient. 


Imperative. \_No Ist persofi.] 
Voyons, 


vois, 
voyez, 


qu"il ou qu'elle voie ; 
qu'ils oil qu'elles voient. 


Sub. Pres. Que je voie, 

Que nous voyions, 


que tu voies, 
que vous voyiez. 


qu'il ou qu'elle voie ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles voient. 


Imp. Que je visse. 

Que nous vissions, 


que tu visses, 
que vous vissiez. 


qu'il ou qu'elle vit ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles vissent. 



Conjugate after the same manner the verbs — revoir, to see again; 
entrevoir, to have a glimpse of, and jprevoir, to foresee ; but the future 
of this last is : — Je prevoirai, tu prevoiras, &c. and the conditional : 
Je frevoirais, tu prevoirais, &c. 



11. Vouloir, to he ivilling [Active and Defective Verb] ; 

Voulant, being willing ; voulu, ue, wished for or to 8fc. Avoir voulu, ayant voulu. 

Ind. Pres. Je veux. 

Nous voulons. 



Imp. Je voulais, 

Nous voulions, 



tu veux, 
vous voulez, 

tu voulais, 
vous vouliez, 



il ou elle veut ; 
ils ou elles veulent. 

il ou elle voulait ; 
ils ou elles voulaient. 



* The second r only is pronounced in all the persons of the future and conditional 
of this verb and of its derivatives ; but the foregoing syllable becomes long : thus,—- 
je verrai, tu verras, &c. are pronounced— ^"e ve-7'ai, tu ve-ras, &c. and/e verrais, 
tu verrais, &.c.je ve-rais, tu ve-rais, &c. 



180 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

Pref. Def. Je voulus, tu voulus, il ot.i elle voulut ; 

Nous voulumes, vous voulutes, ils ou elles voulurent. 

Fut. Je voudrai, tu voudras, il ou elle voudra ; 

Nous voudrons, vous voudrez^ ils ou elles voudront. 

Cond. Pres. Je voudrais, tu voudrais, il ou elle voudrait ; 

Nous voudrions, vous voudviez, ils ou elles voudraient. 

Imperative. Veuillez. [ This person is the only 07ie used^ 

Sub. Pres. Que je veviille, que tu veuilles, qu'il ou qu'elle veuille ; 

^Que nous voulions, que vous vouliez, qu'ils ou qu'elles veuillenf. 

Imp. Que je voulusse, que tu voulusses, qu'il ou qu'elle voulut; 

Que nous voulussions, que vous voulussiez, qu'ils ou qi^elles voulussent. 



Irregular Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation. 
1. Absoudre, to absolve [Active and Defective Verb] ; 

Absolvantj absolving ; absous, absoute, absolved. Avoir absous, ayant absous. 

Ind. Pres. J'absous, tu absous, il o« elle absout ; 

Nous absolvons, vous absolvez, ils ou elles absolvent. 

Imp. J'absolvais, tu absolvais, il ou elle absolvait ; 

Nous absolvions, vous absolviez, ils ou elles absolvaient. 

[^This verb has no preterit definite7\ 

Fm/. J'absoudrai, tu absoudras, il om elle absoudra ; 

Nous absoudrons, vous absoudrez, ils ou elles absoudront. 

Cowrf. Prw.J'absoudrais, tu absoudrais, il om elle absoudrait; 

Nous absoudrions, vous absoudriez, ils ou elles absoudraient. 

Imperative. [Ao \st personP^ absous, qu'il ou qu'elle absolve; 

Absolvous, absolvez, qu'ils ou qu'elles absolvent. 

Suh, Pres. Que j'absolve, que tu absolves, qu'il ou qu'elle absolve ; 

Que nous absolvions, que vous absolviez, qu'ils ou qu'elles absolvent. 

[^There is no imperfect of the subjunctive.'] 
Conjugate after the same manner dissoudre, to dissolve. 

2. Faire accroire, to make one believe. En faire accroire, to impose 
upon one. 

Accroire is only used in the present of the infinitive with the verb faire, which 
serves as an auxiliary to it: as, — elle lui fait accroire tout ce qu'elle veut, she makes 
him believe every thing she likes ; on ne peut pas lui en faire accroire, he is not a man 
to be imposed upon. 

3. Battre, to beat [Active Verb] ; 

Battant, beating ; battu, battue, beaten. Avoir battu, ayant battu. 

/«f/. Pre*. Jebals tu bats, ilo« elle bat; 

Nous battons, vous battez, ils ou elles battent. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 181 



Imp. Je battais. 

Nous battions, 

Pret. Def. Je battis, 

Nous battimes, 

Fut. Je battrai, 

Nous battronsj 

Cond, Pres. Je battrais, 

Nous battrions. 

Imperative \_No \st person.^ 
Battons, 

Sub. Pres. Que je batte. 

Que xious battions, 



Imp, 



Que je battisse, 
Que nousbattissions. 



tu battais, 
vous battiez, 

tu battis, 
vous battites, 

tu battras, 
vous battrez, 

tu battrais, 
vous battriez, 

bats, 
battez, 

que tu battes, 
que vous battiez, 

que tu battisses, 
que vous battissiez. 



il ou elle battait ; 
ils oti elles battaient. 

il ou elle battit; 

ils ou elles battireut. 

il ou elle battra ; 
ils ou elles battrout. 

il ou elle battrait ; 
ils ou elles battraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle batte : 
qu'ils oti qu'elles batte r.t. 

qu'il ou qu'elle batte : 
qu'ils ou qu'elles battent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle lattit; 
qu'iis ou qu'elles battissent. 



Conjugate after tlie same mariner ahattre, to pull do\Yn ; combattre, 
to fight; debattre, to debate; rabattre, to pull down again, to abate; 
rebattre, to beat again ; s^ebattre^ to make or be merry ; se debattre., to 
struggle, &c. 

4. Boire, to drink [Active Verb] ; 

Biivant, drinhiiig ; bu, bue, drunk. Avoir bu, ayant bu.. 



Ind. Pres. 


Je bois. 
Nous buvons. 


tu bois, 
vous buvez, 


il ou elle boit; 

ils ou elles boivent. 


Imp. 


Je buvais, 
Nous buvions. 


tu buvais, 
vous buviez. 


il ou elle buvait ; 
ils ou elles buvaient. 


Pret. Def. 


Je bus, 
Nous bumes. 


tu bus, 
vous butes. 


il ou elle but ; 

ils ou elles burent. 


Fut. 


Je boirai, 
Nous boirons. 


tu boiras, 
vous boirez, 


il ou elle boiia ; 
ils ou elles boiront. 


Cond. Pres 


, Je boirais, 
Nous boirions. 


tu boirais, 
vous boiriez. 


il oti elle boirait ; 
ils ou elles boiraient. 


Imperative 


. [No } St person.] 
Buvons, 


bois, 
buvez, 


qu'il ou qu'elle boive ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles boivent. 


Sub. Pres. 


Que je boive. 
Que nous buvions, 


que tu boive s, 
que vous buviez. 


qu"il ou qu"elle l)oive; 
qu"ils ou quc'lies boivent. 


Imp. 


Que je busse, 

Que nous bussions. 


que tu busses, 
que vous bussiez. 


qu'il ou qu'elle but ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles bussent. 



Conjugate after the same manner reboire, to drink again. 



5. Clorre, to close [Active and Defective Verb]. 

This verb is only used in the three persons singular of the present of 
the indicative : as, — je clos, tu clos, il ou elle clot; in the future, /e 
clorrai ; in the conditional, j/'e clorrais ; in the imperative, clos ; in the 
three persons singular of the present of the subjunctive : — que je closer 
que tu closes-, qu^il ou qu^elle close; in the present of the infinitive, 



182 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

clorre ; in the past participle, clos, close ; and in its compound tenses, 
which are formed with avoir. 

The present of the infinitive is frequently used with the different tenses 
of the verb faire. 

Enclorre^ to enclose, is conjugated after the same manner. 

Note. — Some write clorre and enclorre with one r only in the present 
of the infinitive, and in the future and conditional : thus, — clore^ en- 
clore ; je clorai^ fenclorai, &c. and Je clorais, fenclorais, &c. 



6. Conclure, to conclude [Active Verb] ; 
Coucluant, concluding ; conclu, conclue, concluded. Avoir conclii^ ayant conclu. 



Ind. Pres. Je concius, tu conclus. 

Nous concluons, vous concluez, 

Imp. Je concluais, tu concluais, 

Nous concluions, vous concluiez, 

Pret. Def. Je conclus, tu conclus, 

Nous conclumes, vous conclutes, 

Fut. Je conclurai, tu concluras, 

Nous conclurons, vous conclurez, 

Cond.Pres.Zo, conclurais, tu conclurais. 

Nous conclurions, vous concluriez, 

Imperative. \_No \st person.'] conclus, 

Concluons, concluez. 

Sub. Pres. Que je conclue, que tu conchies, 

Que nous concluions, que vous concluiez, 

Imp. Que je conclusse, que tu conclvisses, 

Que nous conclus- que vovis conclussiez, 
sions, 



il ou elle conclut ; 
ils ou elles concluent. 
il ou elle concluait; 
ils ou elles concluaient. 
il ou elle conclut ; 
ils ou elles conclurent. 
il ou elle conclura ; 
ils ou elles concluront. 

il ou elle con«lurait ; 
ils ou elles concluraient, 

qu'il ou qu'elle conclue ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles concluent. 

qu'il ozi qu'elle conclue ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles concluent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle conclut ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles conclussent. 



Conjugate after the same manner exclure, to exclude. 

A diaeresis ( " ) is required, in these verbs, over the i of the termina- 
tions ions, iez, in the two first persons plural of the imperfect of the 
indicative and of the present of the subjunctive, to denote that the i is 
to be pronounced distinct from the u which precedes it : as, — nous con- 
clu-'ions, vous conclu-iez ; nous exclu-ions, vous exclu-'iez ; que nous 
conclu-ions, que vous conclu-iez ; que nous exclu-ions, que vous ex- 
clu-'iez. 



7. Conduire, to conduct [Active Verb] ; 
Qon^msa.\ii, conducting ; conduit, conduite, coTirfwc/ec/. Avoir conduit, ayant conduit. 



Ind. Pres. Je conduis, 

Nous condviisons, 

Imp. Je conduisais. 

Nous conduisions, 

Pret. Def. Je conduisis, 

Nous conduisimes, 



tu conduis, 
vous conduisez, 

tu conduisais, 
vous conduisiez, 

tu conduisis, 
vous conduisites, 



il ou elle conduit ; 

ils ou elles conduisent. 

il ou elle conduisait ; 

ils ou elles conduisaient. 

il ou elle conduisit ; 

ils ou elles conduisirent. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 183 



Fut. 



Je couduirai. 
Nous conduirons, 



Cond. Pres. Je conduirais, 

Nous conduirions, 

Imperative. \_No \st persoti.'] 
Conduisons, 

Sub. Pres, Que je conduise, 

Que nous condui- 
sions, 



tu conduiras, 
vous conduirez, 

tu conduirais, 
vous condviiriez, 

conduis, 
conduisez, 

que tu conduises, 
que vous conduisiez, 



il ou elle conduira ; 
ils ou elles conduiront. 



il 
ils 



elle conduirait ; 
elles condvdraient. 



qu'il ou qu'elle conduise ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles conduisent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle conduise ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles conduisent. 



Imp. Q 



Que je conduisisse, que tu conduisisses, qu'il on qu'elle conduisit; 
Que nous conduisis- que vous conduisis- qu'ils ou qu'elles conduisis- 
sions, siez, sent. 

Conjugate after the same manner all verbs ending in the present of 
the infinitive mood in uire : as, — deduire, to deduct ; instruire, to in- 
struct ; reduire^ to reduce; introduire, to introduce, &c. 

Nuire, to hurt, makes mii * in its past participle ; in its other tenses 
it is conjugated like conduire. 

Luire, to shine, and reluire, to glitter, make also lui* and relui* 
in their past participles ; they have no preterit definite in the indicative, 
and no imperfect of the subjunctive; but they follow conduire in their 
other tenses. 

8. Confire, to pickle^ to preserve [Active Verb] ; 
Confisant, pickling ; confit, confite, pickled. Avoir confit. ayant confit. 



hid. Pres. 



Imp. 



Je confis. 
Nous confisons, 

Je confisais, 
Nous confisions, 



Pret. Def. Je confis, 

Nous conf imes, 

Fut. Je confirai, 

Nous confirons, 

Cond. Pres. Je confirais, 

Nous confirions, 

Imperative. \_No \st person.^ 
Confisons, 

Sub. Pres. Quejec«nfise, 



tu confis, 
vous confisez, 

tu confisais, 
vous confisiez, 

tu confis, 
vous conf ites, 

tu confiras, 
vous confirez, 

tu confirais, 
vous confiriez, 

confis, 

confisez, 

que tu confises, 



Que nous confisions, que vous confisiez. 

Imp. Que je confisse, que tu confisses, 

Que nous confissions, que vous confissiez. 



il ou elle confit ; 

ils ou elles confisent. 

il ou elle confisait ; 
ils ou elles confisaient. 

il ou elle confit ; 
ils ou elles confirent. 
il ou elle confiia; 
ils ou elks confiront. 
il ou elle confirait ; 
ils ou elles confiraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle confise ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles confisent, 
qu'il ou qu'elle confise ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles confisent. 
qu'il ou qu'elle confit; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles confissent. 



Conjugate after the same manner circoncire t, to circumcise ; and 

ence that the past p; 
and that of suffire ; — suffi, without 



suffire, to suffice ; with this diiference that the past participle of cir- 
concire is circoncis 
feminine. 



circoncise. 



* The past participles, 7iui, lui, and relui, have no feminine. 

•}• The French Academy, Restaut, Wailly, Feruud, and Demandre think that cir- 
concire has no present participle and no imperfect either in the indicative or sub- 
junctive; but others are of a contrary opinion. 



184 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

9. Comiaitre, to know [Active Verb] ; 

Connaissant, Imowing ; connu, connue, known. Avoir connu, ay ant connu. 



Ind, Pres. Je connais, 

Novxs connaissons, 

Imp. Je counaissais, 

Nous connaissions, 

Fret. Def. Je connus. 

Nous connumes, 

Fut, Je connaitrai, 

Nous connaitrons, 

Cond. Pres. Je connaitrais. 

Nous conuaitrions. 

Imperative. \_No \};t person.'] 



Sub. 



Counaissons 
Pres. Que je counaisse, 



tu connais, 
vous connaissez, 

tu connaissais, 
vous connaissiez, 

tu connus, 
vous connutes, 

tu connaitras, 
vous connaitrez, 

tu connaitrais, 
vous connaitriez, 

connais, 
connaissez. 



il Oil elle connait ; 

ils ou elles connaissent. 

il ou elle connaissait ; 

ils ou elles connaissaient. 

il ou elle connut ; 

ils oil elles connurent. 

il ou elle coimaitra; 

ils ou elles connaitront. 

il ou elle connaitrait ; 

ils ou elles connaitraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle connaisse ; 
qu'ils ou qu' elles connaissent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle connaisse ; 



que tu connaisses, 
Que nous connais- que vous connaissiez, qu'ils ou quelles connaissent 
sions. 

Imp. Que je connusse, que tu connusses, qu'il ou qu'elle connut ; 

Que nous connus- que vous connussiez, qu'ils ou qu' elles connussent. 

sions. 

Conjugate after the same manner reconnoitre., to know again ; me- 
connaitrey not to know ; se meconnaitre, to forget one's self; apparai- 
ire, to appear ; comparaUre, to make one's appearance; disparaltre, 
to disappear ; paraitre, to appear ; reparditre, to appear again ; and, 
in general, all those ending in a1tre or oUre in the present of the 
infinitive: except cro'itre, to grow; naltre, to be born; and ^a ?/?•<?, to 
feed or graze, which are exemplified at full length hereafter, on account 
of not being exactly similar either in the terminations of all their tenses 
and persons or in the accentuation. 



] 0. Coudre, to sew [Active Verb] ; 

Cousant, seicing ; cousu, cousue, sewed. Avoir cousu, ayant cousu. 



Jnd. Pres. Je couds, 

Nous cousous. 

Imp. Je cousais, 

Nous cousions. 

Fret. Def. Je cousis, 

Nous coDsimes, 

Fut. Je coudrai, 

Nous coudrons, 
Cond. Pres. Je coudrais, 

Nous coudrions. 

Imperative. [iVo \ft person. "] 
Cousons, 



tu couds, 
vous cousez, 

tu cousais, 
vous cousiez, 

tu cousisj 
vous cousites, 

tu coudras, 
vous coudrez, 

tu coudrais, 
vous coudriez, 

couds, 
cousez, 



il ou elle coud ; 

ils ou elles consent. 

il ou elle coiisait ; 
ils oti elles cousaient. 

il ou elle cousit ; 

ils ou elles cousirent. 

il ou elle coudra ; 
ils ou elles coudront. 

il ou elle coudrait ; 
ils ou elles coudraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle couse ; 
qu'ils ou qu' elles consent. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 185 



Sub. Pres. Que je couse. 

Que nous cousions. 

Imp. Que je cousisse, 



que tu couses, 
que vous cousiez, 

que tu cousisses. 



Que nous cousissions, que vous cousissiez, 



qu'il ou qu'elle couse ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles consent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle cousit ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles cousissent. 



Conjugate after the same manner recoudre, to sew again ; and decoU' 
dre, to unsew. 

11. Craindre, to fear [Active Verb]; 
Ciaignaut, /earw^'/ craint, crainte,/(?arer/. Avoir craint, ayant craint. 



Ind. Pres. Je crains, 

Nous craignons, 

Imp. Je craignais, 

Nous craignions, 

Pret. Def. Je ciaignis, 

Nous craitrnimes. 



tu crains, 
vous craignez, 

tu craignais, 
vous craigniez, 

t<i craignis, 
vous craisfuites, 



il ou elle craint ; 

lis ou elles craignent. 

il ou elle craignait ; 
ils ou elles craignaient. 

il ou elle craignit ; 

ils ou elles craignirent. 

il ou elle craindra ; 
ils ou elles crauidront. 

il ou elle craindrait ; 
ils ou elles craindraieut. 



Fat. Je craindrai, tu craindras, 

Nous craindrons, vous craindrez, 

Cond. Pres. Je craindrais, tu craindrais. 

Nous craindrions, vous craindriez, 

ImperaHve. \_Xo \ii person.'\ crains, 

Craignons, craignez. 

Sub. Pres. Que je craigne, que tu craignes. 

Que nous craignions, que vous craigniez, 

Imp. Que je craignisse, que tu craignisses. 

Que nous craignis- que vous craignissiez, qu'ils &?i qu'elles craignissent, 
sions. 



qu'il on qu'elle craigne; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles craignent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle craigne ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles craignent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle craignit : 



Conjugate after the same manner all verbs ending in aindre, eindre^ 
and oindre, in the present of the infinitive : as, — plaindre^ to pity ; 
p e 171 dre, to iiaint ; joindre, to join; atteindre, to reach ; astreindre, 
to bind, to subject; ceindre, to gird; poi?idre, to peep, to dawn, to 
shoot forth, &c. 

Poiiidre is only used in the present of the infinitive and in the future : 
as, — lorsque les herbes commencent dpoindre au printemps, when the 
grass begins to peep in the spring; je partirai des que Ic jour poindra, 
I shall set out at break of day. 



12. Croire, to believe [Active Verb]; 
Croyant, believing ; cru, crue, believed. Avoir cru, ayant cru. 



Ind. Pres. Je crois. 

Nous croyons, 

Imp. Je croyais, 

Nous croyions, 

Pret. Def. Je crus, 

Nous criimes. 



tu crois, 
vous croyez, 

tu croyais, 
vous croyiez, 

tu crup, 
vous criites. 



il ou elle croit ; 
ils ou elles croient. 

il ou elle croyait ; 
ils ou elles croyaient. 

il ou elle crut ; 

ils ou elles crurent. 



186 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



Fut. Je croirai, 

Nous croirons, 

Cond. Pres. Je croirais. 

Nous croirions. 

Imperative. \_No \st person. ~\ 
Croyons, 

Sub. Pres. Que je croie. 

Que nous croyions, 

Imp. Que je crusse> 

Que nous crussions. 



tu croiras, 
vous croirez, 

tu croirais, 
vous croiriez, 

crois, 
croyez, 

que tu croies, 
que vous croyiez, 

que tu crusses, 
que vous crussiez, 



il ou elle croira ; 
ils ou elles croiront. 

il ou elle croirait ; 
ils ou elles croiraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle croie ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles croient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle croie ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles croient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle crut ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles crussent. 



13. Croitre, to grow [Neuter Verb] ; 
Croissant, growing; cx\\, crue, grown. Avoir cru, ayant cru. 

il ou elle croit ; 

ils ou elles croissent. 

il ou elle croissait ; 
ils ou elles croissaient. 

il ou elle crut ; 

ils ou elles crurent. 

il ou elle croitra; 
ils ou elles croitront. 

il ou elle croitrait ; 
ils ou elles croitraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle croisse ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles croissent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle croisse ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles croissent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle crut ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles crussent. 



Ind. Pres. Je crofs. 

Nous croissons, 


tu crois, 
vous croissez, 


Imp. Je croissais. 

Nous croissions, 


tu croissais, 
vous croissiez. 


Pret. Def. Je crus, 

Nous crume.s. 


tu crus, 
vous crutes. 


Fut. Je croitrai, 

Nous croitrons, 


tu croitras, 
vous croitrez. 


Cond. Pres. Je croitrais. 

Nous croitrions, 


tu croitrais, 
vous croitriez. 


Imperative. \^No \st person.'] 
Croissons, 


crois, 
croissez. 


Sub. Pres. Que je croisse, 


que tu croisses. 



Que nous croissions, que vous croissiez, 

Imp. Que je crusse, que tu crusses, 

Que nous crussions, que vous crussiez. 



Conjugate after the same manner accroitre *, to increase ; and de- 
cro^tre, to decrease. 

Croitre takes avoir in its compound tenses, when it is used to express 
the action of growing : as, — il a bien cru cette annee^ he has grown 
very much this year ; but it takes etrc, when it denotes the state in 
which one is : as, — il ripest 'point cru du tout, he is not grown at all. 



Ind. Pres. Je dis. 

Nous disons; 

Imp. Je disais. 

Nous disions. 



14. Dire, to say, to tell [Active Verb] ; 

Disant, saying ; dit, dite, said. Avoir dit, ayant dit. 

tu dis, 
vous dites, 

tu disais, 
vous disiez. 



il ou elle dit ; 

ils ou elles diseut. 



il ou elle disait ; 
ils ou elles disaient. 



* Accru, past participle of accroitre, is written without accent. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 187 



Pret. Def. Je dis, 

Nous dimes, 

Fut. Je dirai, 

Nous dirons, 

Cond, Pres. Je dirais. 

Nous dirions, 

Imperative. [JVo 1st person.'] 
Disons, 

Sub. Pres. Queje dise, 

Que nous disions, 

Imp. Que je disse, 

Que nous dissions, 



tu dis, 
vous dites, 

tu diras, 
vous direz, 

tu dirais, 
vous diriez, 

dis, 
dites, 

que tu discs, 
que vous disiez, 

que tu disses, 
que vous dissiez. 



il on elle dit ; 

ils ou elles dirent, 

il ou elle dira ; 
ils ou elles diront. 
il ou elle dirait ; 
ils ou elles diraient. 
qu'il ou qu'elle dise; 
qu'ils ou qu' elles disent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle dise ; 
qu'ils ou qu' elles disent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle dit ; 
qu'ils ou qu' elles dissent. 



Conjugate after the same manner redire, to say again. 

The following verbs contredire^ to contradict ; dedire, to unsay, to 
disown ; interdire, to interdict; medire, to slander; maudire^ to curse; 
predire, to foretel; se djdire, to recant, to go from one's word, are also 
conjugated after the same manner, except in the second person plural of 
the present of the indicative, in which they take these terminations : — 
vous contredisez ; vous dcdisez ; vous interdisez ; vous medisez ; vous 
maudissez ; vous predisez ; vous vous dedisez ; and in the second 
person plural of the imperative, in which they are also terminated : — 
contredisez; dedisez; interdisez ; miidisez ; maudissez; predisez; 
dedisez-vous ; and not — contredites, dedites, medites, &c. 

Maudire takes two ^'s in the present participle maudissant, cursing; 
in the three persons plural of the present of the indicative: — nous mau- 
dissons, we curse; vous maudissez, you curse; ils ou elles maudis- 
sent, they curse ; in all the imperfect — Je maudissais, tu maudissais, 
il ou elle maudissait ; nous maudissions, vous ?naudissiez, ils ou elles 
maudissaient : in the three persons plural of the present of the sub- 
junctive — que nous maudissions, que vous maudissiez, quHls ou 
qu* elles maudissent : and in all the persons of the imperative, except 
in the second singular : as, — maudis, quHl ou qu^elle maudisse ; mau- 
disso?is, maudissez, qu'ils ou qu elles maudissent. In its other per- 
sons and tenses it is conjugated like dire. 



15. Ecrire, to write [Active Verb] ; 
Ecrivant, writing ; ecrit, ecrite, written. Avoir ecrit, ayaut ecrit. 



Ind. Pres. J'ecris, 

Nous ecrivons. 

Imp. J'ecrivais, 

Nous ecrivions, 

Pret. Def. J'ecrivis, 

Nous ecrivinies, 

Fut. J'ecrirai, 

Nous ecrirons, 



tu ecris, 
vous ecrivez, 

tu ecrivais, 
vous ecriviez, 

tu ecrivis, 
vous ecrivites, 

tu ecriras, 
vous ecrirez. 



il ou elle ecrit ; 
ils ou elles ecrivent. 
il ou elle ecrivait ; 
ils ou elles ecrivaient. 

il ou elle ecrivit ; 

ils ou elles ecrivirent. 

il ou elle ecrira ; 
ils ou elles ecriront. 



188 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



Cond. Pres 


. J'ecrirais, 


tu ecrirais, 




Nous ecririons. 


vous ecririez, 


Imperative 


.{.No 1st person. 1 
Ecrivons, 


ecris, 
ecrivez, 


Sub. Pres. 


Que j'ecrive. 


que tu ecrives, 




Que nous ecrivions, 


que vous ecriviez, 


Imp. 


Que j'ecrivisse. 


que tu ecrivisses, 




Que nous ecrivis- 


que vous ecrivis- 




sions. 


siez. 



il ou elle ecrirait; 
ils ou elles ecriraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle ecrive ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles ecrivent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle ecrive ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles ecrivent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle ecrivi't ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles ecrivissent. 



Conjugate after the same manner the verbs circonscrire, to circum- 
scribe j decrire, to describe ; inscrire, to inscribe ; prescrire, to pre- 
scribe ; proscrire, to proscribe ; recrire, to write again ; souscrije, to 
subscribe; transcrire, to transcribe, &c. 



16. Faire, to do, to make [Active Verb] ; 



Faisant. doinff ; 


fait, faite, do?ie. Avoii 


: fait, ayant fait. 


Ind. Pres. Je fais, 

Nous faisons, 


tu fais, 
vous faites, 


il ou elle fait ; 
ils otf elles font. 


Imp. Je faisais, 

Nous faisions, 


tu faisais, 
vous faisiez, 


il ou elle faisait ; 
ils ou elles faisaient. 


Pret. Def. Je fis, 

Nous fimcs, 


tu fis, 
vous f ites. 


il ou elle fit ; 

ils ou elles firent. 


Put. Je ferai, 

Nous ferons. 


tu feras, 
vous ferez, 


il ou elle fera ; 
ils ou elles feront. 


Cond. Pres. Je ferais, 

Nous ferions;, 


tu ferais, 
vous feriez. 


il ou elle ferait ; 
ils ou elles feraient. 


Imperative. [No \st person.] 
Faisons, 


fais, 
faites. 


qu'il ou qu'elle fasse ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles fassent. 


Sub. Pres. Que je fasse. 

Que nous fassions, 


que tu fasses, 
que vous fassiez. 


qu'il ou qu'elle fasse ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles fassent. 


Imp. Quejefisse, 

Que nous fissions. 


que tu fisses, 
que vuus fissiez. 


qu'il ou qu'elle fit ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles fissent. 



Conjugate after the same manner contrefaire, to counterfeit, to 
mimic; defaire, to undo; redefatre, to undo again; refaire, to do 
again ; satisfaire, to satisfy ; surfaire, to ask too much. 

Forfaire, to forfeit, to act contrary to one's duty, is a neuter and 
defective verb, only used in the present of the infinitive, and in its 
compound tenses, which are formed with avoir, and the past participle 
forfait. It is principally employed at the bar, in speaking of the par- 
tiality of a judge ; as, — si un juge vient a forfaire, if a judge acts 
contrary to his duty. We also say, in a familiar style, when speaking 
of a woman who has suffered herself to be seduced : — elle a forfait a 
son honneur, she has forfeited her honour. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 189 

17. Frire, to fry [Active and Defective Verb]. 

This verb is only used in the three persons singular of the present of 
the indicative — je fris^ tufris, il ou e lie frit ; in the future : je frirai, 
tu friras, il ou elle frira ; nous fr irons, vous frirez. Us ou elles 
friront ; in the conditional: je frirais, tu frirais, il ou elle frirait ; 
nous fririons, vous fririez, Us ou elles friraient ; in the second person 
singular of the imperative : fris ; in the present of the infinitive : frire; 
and in its compound tenses, which are formed with avoir and the past 
participle — frit, frite. 

To supply the persons and tenses which are wanting in this verb, the 
different tenses of the xerh fair e must be used with the infinitive /rzVe : 
as, — 710US faisons frire, vous faites frire. Us ou elles font frire ; je 
faisais frire, tu faisais frire, il ou elle faisait frire, &c. 



18. Lire, to read [Active Verb] ; 
Lisaut, reading ; lu, lue, reo(f. Avoir hi, ayant lu. 



Irid. Pres. Je lis, 

Nous lisons. 


tu lis, 
vous lisez. 


il ou elle lit ; 

ils ou elles lisent. 


Imp. Je lisais, 

Nous lisions, 


tu lisais, 
vous lisiez, 


il ou elle lisait ; 
ils ou elles lisaient. 


Pre/. Def. Je lus. 

Nous lianes. 


tu lus, 
vous lutes. 


il ou elle lut ; 

ils ou elles lurent. 


Fut. Je lirai. 

Nous lirons. 


tu liras, 
vous lirez. 


il ou elle lira; 
ils oil elles liront. 


Cond. Pres. Je lirais, 

Nous lirions, 


tu lirais, 
vous liriez. 


il ou elle lirait ; 
ils ou elles liraieut. 


Imperative. \ No \st person. ~\ 
Lisons, 


lis, 
lisez. 


qu'il ou qu'elle Use; 
qu'ils ou qu' elles lisent. 


Suh. Pres. Que je lisc, 

Que nous lisions, 


que tu Uses, 
que vous lisiez. 


qu'il ou qu'elle lise ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles lisent. 


Imp. Que je lusse, 

Que nous lussions, 


que tu lusses, 
que vous lussiez. 


qu'il ou qu'elle lut ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles lussent. 



Conjugate after the same manner r el ire, to read again, Hire, to elect, 
and reelire, to elect again. 

19. Mettre, to put [Active Verb] ; 

Mettant, putting ; mis, mise, pift. Avoir mis, ayant mis. 

Ind. Pres. Je mets, tu mets. 

Nous mettons, vous mettez. 

Imp. Je mettais, tu mettais, 

Nous mettions, vous mettiez, 

Prei. Def. Je mis, tu mis, 

vous mites, 

tu mettras, 
vous mettrez, 



Je mis. 
Nous mimes, 

Fut. Je mettrai. 

Nous mettrons. 



il ou elle met ; 

ils ou elles mettent. 

il ou elle mettait ; 
ils ou elles mettaient. 

il ou elle mit ; 

ils ou elles mirent. 

il ou elle mettra ; 
ils ou elles mettront. 



190 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



Cond. Pres. Je mettrais, 

Nous mettrions. 

Imperative. \_No \st person.'] 

Mettons, 



tu mettrais, 
vous raettriez, 

mets, 
mettez, 



il ou elle mettrait ; 
ils oil elles mettraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle mette ; 
qii'ils oic qu' elles mettent. 



Sub. Pres. Que je mette^ 

Que nous mettions, 

Que je misse, 
Que nous missions, 



Imp. 



qu'il on qu'elle mette ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles mettent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle mit ', 
qu'ils ou qu'elles missent. 



que tu mettes, 
que vous mettiez^ 

que tu misses, 
que vous missiez. 

Conjugate after the same manner evefry verb compounded of mettre : 
such as, — admettre, to admit; commettre., to commit; compromettre, 
to compromise; demettre, to disjoint, to put out; omettre, to omit; 
permettre, to permit ; promettre, to promise ; remettre, to put or set 
again, to replace; soumettre, to submit; /?'an,yme'^/re, to transmit; se 
demettre, to resign ; s^entremetti'e, to interpose, &c. 



20. Moudre, to grind [Active Verb] ; 
Moulant, grinding ; moulu, moulue, ground. Avoir moulu, ayant moulu. 



Ind. Pres. Je mouds, 

Nous moulons, 



tu mouds, 

vous moulez, 



il ou elle moud ; 
ils on elles moulent. 



Imp. Je moulais, 

Nous moulions, 

Pret. Def. Je moulus. 

Nous moulumes, 

Fui. Je moudrai. 

Nous moudrons, 

Cond. Pres. Je moudrais, 

Nous moudrious, 

Imperative. \_No \st person.] 
Moulons, 

Sub. Pres. Que je moule, 

Que nous moulions 

Imp. Que je moulusse 



tu moulais, 
vous mouliez, 

tu moulus, 
vous moulutes, 

tu moudras, 
vous moudrez, 

tu moudrais, 
vous moudriez, 

mouds, 

moulez, 

que tu monies, 

que vous mouliez, 

que tu moulusses, 
Que nous moulus- que vous moulus- qu'ils ou qu'elles moulus- 
sions, siez, sent. 



il ou elle moulait ; 
ils ou elles moulaient. 

il ou elle moulut ; 
ils ou elles moulurent. 
il ou elle moudra ; 
ils ou elles moudront. 

il ou elle moudrait ; 
ils ou elles moudraient. 

qu'il oil qu'elle moule ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles moulent. 
qu'il ou qu'elle moule ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles moulent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle moulut ; 



Conjugate after the same manner remoudre, to grind again. 

Emoudre, to grind (knives or razors), is also conjugated after the 
sanie manner, as likewise remoudre, to grind again, in the same sense. 

Emoudre is frequently used in the present of the infinitive with the 
different tenses of the verb faire : as, — faire emoudre des couteaux, 
des ciseaux, &c. to have knives or scissors ground. 



21. Naitre, to he horn [Neuter Verb] ; 
Naissant, being born ; ne, nee, born, Etre ne, etant ne. 



Ind. Pres. Je nais. 

Nous naissons. 



tu nais, 
vous naissez, 



il ou elle nait ; 

lis oil elles naissent. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 191 



il ou elle naissait ; 
ils ou elles naissaient. 

il ou elle naquit ; 

ils ou elles naquirent. 

il ou elle naitra ; 
ils ou elles naitront. 

il ou elle naitrait ; 
ils ou elles naitraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle naisse ; 
qvi'ils ou qu'elles naissent. 

qxi'il ou qu'elle naisse ; 
qii'ils ou qu'elles naissent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle naquit; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles naquissent. 



Renaitre, to be born again, to revive, is conjugated after the same 
manner. 



Imp. Je naissais, 

Nous naissions, 


tu naissais, 
vous naissiez, 


Pret. Def. Je naquis, 

Nous naquimes, 


tu naquis, 
vous naquites, 


Fut. Je naitrai. 

Nous naitrons, 


tu naitras, 
vous naitrez, 


Cond. Pres. Je naitrais. 

Nous naitrions^ 


tu naitrais, 
vous naitriez, 


Imperative. \_No 1 st person.] 

Naissons, 


nais, 
naissez, 


Sub. Pres. Que je naisse, 

Que nous naissions, 


que tu naisses, 
que vous naissiez. 


Imp. Que je naquisse, 

Que nous naquis- 
sions. 


que tu naquisses, 
que vous naquis- 
siez, 



22. Paitre, to graze [Active and Neuter Defective Verb] ; 
Paissant, grazing ; pu, pue^, grazed. Avoir pu, ayant pu. 

Ind. Pres. Je pais, tu pais, il ou elle pait ; 

Nous paissons, vous paissez, ils ou elles paissent. 

Imp. Je paissais, tu paissais, il ou elle paissait ; 

Nous paissions, vous paissiez, ils ou elles paissaient. 

[This verb has no preterit definite; the preterit definite of the verb/a?>e 
is \ised instead Avith the infinitive pai/re : thus, — -je Jis paitre, tu Jis 
paitre, il ou elle Jit paitre, &c.] 



Fut. Je paitrai. 

Nous paitrons, 
Cond. Pres. Je paitrais. 

Nous paitrions, 

Imperative. [iVo \st person.] 
Paissons, 

Sub. Pres, Que je paisse, 



tu paitras, 
vous paitrez, 
tu paitrais, 
vous paitriez, 

pais, 
paissez, 

que tu paisses. 



il ou elle paitra ; 
ils ou elles paitront. 
il oit elle paitrait ; 
ils ou elles paitraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle paisse ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles paissent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle paisse j 
qu'ils ou qu'elles paissent* 



Que nous paissions, que vous paissiez, 

[This verb has no imperfect of the subjunctive ; the imperfect of the 

subjunctive of /aire is used instead with the infinitive paitre : as, — 

que jejisse paitre, que tufisses paitre, &c,] 

Repaltre, to feed, and se repaitre, to feed one's self, are conjugated 
after the same manner; but they have a preterit definite in the indica- 
tive, and an imperfect of the subjunctive: as, — je repus, tu repus, &c. 
je me repus, tu te repus, &c. que je repusse, que tu repusses, &c. que 
je me repusse, que tu te repusses, quHl ou qu^elle se repid ; que nous 
nous repussions, que vous vous repussiez, quails ou qu'elles se re- 
pussent. 

Repaitre, used in the sense of eating, when speaking of men or horses 



192 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

on a journey, is a neuter verb : as, — il a fait dix milles sans I'epaitre, 
he has travelled ten miles without baiting ; but, when it is employed in 
a figurative sense, it is an active verb : as, — elle repait son esprit de 
vaines chimeres, she entertains her mind with vain chimeras. In this 
sense, it is also used in a reflective manner : as, — 

Je ne me repais point de pareilles chimeres. — Rac. 

The x)ast participle pu is very little used, except with repu^ past par- 
ticiple of repaitre : as, — il a pu et repu. A circumflex accent is placed 
over the i before the #, in the above verbs, in the present of the infinitive 
and in the third person singular of the present of the indicative, and in 
all the future and conditional. 



23. Plaire, to please [Neuter Verb] ; 



Plaisant, pleasing y plu [i.ndeeli7iabie'\, pleased. 



Jnd. Pres. Je })lais. 

Nous plaisons^ 

Imp. Je plaisals, 

Nous plaisions, 

Prel. Def. Je plus, 

Nous plumes, 
Ful. Je plairai, 

Nous plairons, 

Cond. Pres. Je plairais, 

Nous plairions, 

Imperative. [A^o \st perso7t.'\ 
Plaisons, 

Sub. Pres. Que je plaise, 

Que nous plaisions, 

Imp. Que je plusse, 

Que nous plussions, 



tu plais, 
vous plaisez, 

tu plaisais, 
vous plaisiez, 

tu plus, 
vous plutes, 

tu plairas, 
vous plairez, 

tu plairais, 
vous plairiez, 

plais, 
plaisez, 

que tu plaises, 
que vous plaisiez, 

que tu plusses, 
que voiis plussiez. 



Avoir plu, ayant plu. 

il ou elle plait ; 

ils ou elles plaisent. 

il ou elle plaisait ; 
ils ou elles plaisaient. 

il ou elle plut ; 

ils ou elles plurent. 

il ou elle plaira; 
ils oil elles plairont. 

il ou elle plairait ; 
ils ou elles plairaient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle plaise ; 
qu'ils 01/ qu'elles plaisent. 

qu'il ott qu'elle plaise ; 
qvi'ils ou qu'elles plaisent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle plut ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles plussent. 



Conjugate after the same manner all verbs compounded of plaire : 
such as, — deplaire, to displease ; complaire, to humour, to please, &c. 

Taire, to conceal ; and se taire, to forbear talking, to be silent, to 
liold one's tongue, are also conjugated after the same manner : but se 
iaire, being a reflective verb, takes etre in its compound tenses. 



Ind. Pres. 



Imp. 



24. Preiidre, to take [Active Verb] ; 
Prenant, taking ; pris, prise, taken. Avoir pris, ayant pris. 



Je prends. 
Nous prenons, 

Je prenais, 
Nous prenions. 



tu prends, 
vous prenez, 

tu prenais, 
vous preniez, 



il ou elle prend ; 

ils ou elles prennent. 

il ou elle prenait ; 
ils ou elles prenaient. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 393 



Fret. Def. Je pris, 

Nous primes, 

Flit. Je prendraij 

Nous prendrons, 

Cotid. Pres. Je prendrais. 

Nous prendrions, 

Imperative [Ao \st person^ 
Prenons, 

Sub. P7'es. Que je prenne, 

Que nous prenions. 

Imp. Que je prisse. 

Que nous prissions. 



tu pris, 
vous prites, 

tu prendras, 
vous prendrez, 

tu prendrais, 
vous prendriez, 

prends, 
prenez, 

que tu prennes, 
que vous preniez, 

que tu prisses, 
que vous prissiez, 



il ou elle prit ; 
ils ou elles prirent. 

il ou elle prendra ; 
ils ou elles prendront. 

il oil elle prendrait ; 
ils ou elles prendraient. 
qu'il ou qu'elle prenne ; 
qu'ils ou qu' elles prennent. ' 
qu'il ou qu'elle prenne; 
qu'ils ou qu' elles prennent. 
quil ou qu'elle prit ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles |)rissent. 



Conjugate after the same manner all verbs ending in endre, in the 
present of the infinitive, in enant^ in the present participle, and in is, 
in the past participle : as, — apprendre, to learn ; comprendre^ to com- 
prehend; desapprendre, to unlearn, to forget; enireprendre, to un- 
dertake ; rapprendre, to learn again ; reprendre, to take again : se 
meprendre, to mistake ; surprcndre, to surprise ; ^6? deprendre, to 
disengage one's self, &c. 

The n, in these verbs, is always doubled in the tenses in which it 
comes before e, es, or ent, mute : as, — que fapprenne, que in ap- 
prenneSf qu'il ou qu^elle apprenne, quails ou qu'elles apprennenty &c. 



25. Rt^soudre, to resolve and dissolve [Active Verb]; 

Resolvant, resolving; resolu, resolue, resolved; et resous [without fe7iiinine'], 
dissolved. Avoir resolu, ayant resolu. 



Ind. Pres. Je resous, tu resous, 

Nous resolvous, vous resolvez. 

Imp. Je resolvais, tu resolvais, 

Nous resolvions, vous resolviez, 

Pret. Def. Je resolus, tu resolus. 

Nous resolumes, vous resolutes, 

Fut. Je resoudrai, tu resoudras. 

Nous resoudrons, vous resoudrez, 

Cond. Pres. Je resoudrais, tu resoudrais. 

Nous resoudrions, vous resoudriez, 

Imperative. \_No ^st persoyx.'] resous, 

Resolvous, r6solvez, 

Suit. Pres. Que je resolve, que tu resolves. 

Que nous resolvions, qOie vous resolviez, 

Imp. Que je resolusse, que tu resolusses. 

Que nous resolus- que vous resolus- qu'ils ou qu'elles r^solus- 
sions, siez, sent. 

This verb has two past participles : the first is — resolu, resolue, in 
the sense of to resolve, to determine, to decide : as,— ce jeune homme a 



il ou elle resout ; 
ils ou elles resolvent, 
il ou elle resolvait ; 
ils ou elles resolvaient. 
il ou elle resolut ; 
ils ou elles resolurent. 
il ott elle resoudra ; 
ils ou elles resoudront. 

il ou elle resoudrait ; 
ils ou elles resoudraient. 
qu'il ou qu'elle resolve ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles resolvent, 
qu'il ou qu'elle resolve ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles resolvent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle resolut ; 



194 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

resolu de changer de conduite, this youDg man has determined to 
change his conduct ; and resous, without feminine, meaning dissolved : 
as, — le soleil a resous le brouillard en pluie, the sun has dissolved 
the fog into rain. 

Conjugate after the same manner se resoudre, to be resolved, to form 
a resolution, and se resoudre, to be dissolved, to melt. 





26. Rire 


to laugh [Neuter Verb] ; 




Riant, iaz/ghing ; ri 


{indeclinable'], lavghed. 


Avoir ri, ayant ri. 


Ind. Pres. 


Je ris, 
Nous rions. 


tu ris, 
vous riez, 


il ou elle rit ; 
lis ou elles rient. 


Imp. 


Je rials, 
Nous riions. 


tu rials, 
vous rliez. 


11 ou elle riait ; 
ils ou elles riaient. 


Pret. Def. 


Je x\s, 
Nous rimes. 


tu ris, 
vous rites. 


il ou elle rit ; 

ils ou elles rirent. 


Put. 


Je rirai. 
Nous rirons. 


tu riras, 
vous rirez. 


il ou elle rira ; 
ils ou elles riront. 


Cond. Pres 


Je rirais. 
Nous ririons. 


tu rirais, 
vous ririez. 


il ou elle rirait ; 
ils ou elles riraieut. 


Imperative 


[No 1 St person.] 
Rions, 


ris, 
riez. 


qu'il ou qu'elle rie ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles rient. 


Sub. Pres. 


Que je rie. 
Que nous riions, 


que tu ries, 
que vous rilez. 


qu'il ou qu'elle rie ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles rient. 


Imp 


Que j e risse. 
Que nous rissions, 


que tu risses, 
que vous rissiez. 


qii'il ou qu'elle rit ; 
qu'ils ou qvi' elles rissent 



Conjugate after the same manner se rire de, to laugh at, except in 
its compound tenses, which are formed with etre, like other reflective 
verbs. 

Sourire, to smile, is also conjugated after the same manner, taking 
avoir in its compound tenses. 

27. Rompre, to break [Active Verb]; 

Rompant, breaking ; rompu, rompue, broken. Avoir rompu, ayant rompu. 

Ind. Pres. Je romps, tu romps. 

Nous rompons, vous rompez, 

Imp. Je rompais, tu rompais. 

Nous rompions, vous rompiez, 

Pret. Def. Je rompis, tu rompis, 

Nous rompimes, vous rompites. 

Put. Je romprai, tu rompras. 

Nous romprons, vous romprez, 

Cond. Pres. Je roraprais, tu romprais. 

Nous romprions, vous rompriez. 



il ou elle rompt ; 
ils ou elles rompent. 

il ou elle rompait ; 
ils ou elles rompaient. 

il ou elle rompit ; 

ils ou elles rompirent. 

il ou elle rompra ; 
ils ou elles rompront. 

il ou elle romprait ; 
ils ou elles rompraient. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



195 



Imperative. \_No \st person.^ 
Rompons, 

Sub. P?-es. Qvie je rompe. 

Que nous rompions, 

Imp. Que je rompisse. 

Que nous rompis- 
sions. 



romps, 
rompez, 

que tu rompes, 
que vous rompiez, 

que tu rompisses, 
que vous rompissiez, 



qu'il ou qu'elle rompe; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles rorapent. 
qu'il ou qu'elle rompe ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles rompent. 

qu'il 021 qu'elle rorapit ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles rompissent. 



Conjugate after the same manner corrompre, to corrupt, and inter' 
rompre^ to interrupt. 

28. Sourdre, to spring [Neuter and Defective Verb]. 

This verb is only employed in speaking of fountains, springs, and rivers which rise 
out of the earth. Its only tenses in use are the present of the infinitive, and the 
third persons singular and plural of the present of the indicative : as, — ce marais sera 
difficile a dessecher,on y voit sourdre des eaitx de tons cotes, this marsh will be drained 
with difficulty, from the springs rising in every part. On dit que le Rhin, le Rhone, et 
le Pu, soiirdent au pied de la meme montagne, it is said that the Rhine, the Rhone, 
and the P6, take their rise at the foot of the same mountain. 



29. Suivre, to follow [Active Verb] ; 

Suiv sent, following ; suivi, suiwie, followed. Avoir suivi, ayant suivi. 



Ind. Pres. 


Je suis. 
Nous suivons, 


tu suis, 
vous suivez, 


il ou elle suit ; 

ils ou elles suivent. 


Imp. 


Je suivais. 
Nous suivions, 


tu suivais, 
vous suiviez. 


il ou elle suivait ; 
ils ou elles suivaient.' 


Fret. Def. 


Je suivis, 
Nous suivimes, 


tu suivis, 
vous suivites. 


il ou elle suivit ; 

ils ou elles suivirent. 


Fut. 


Je suivrai, 
Nous suivrons. 


tu suivras, 
vous suivrez, 


il ou elle suivra ; 
ils ou elles suivront. 


Cond. Pres 


Je suivrais. 
Nous suivrions. 


tu suivrais, 
vous suivriez, 


il ou elle suivrait ; 
ils ou elles suivraient. 


Imperative 


\^No \st person.'] 
Suivons, 


suis, 
suivez. 


qu'il ou qu'elle suive ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles suivent. 


Sub. Pres. 


Que je suive, 
Que nous suivions, 


que tu suives, 
que vous suiviez, 


qu'il ou qu'elle suive ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles suivent. 


Imp. 


Que je suivisse. 
Que nous suivissions 


que tu suivisses, 
, que vous suivissiez. 


qu'il ou qu'elle suivit ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles suivissent. 



Conjugate after the same manner poursuivre, to pursue, to prosecute. 

S''ensuivre, to follow, to result, is also conjugated after the same 
manner ; but it is only used in the third persons singular and plural of 
its diiferent tenses, either simple or compound, and in the present of the 
infinitive : as, — un grand Men s^ensuivit, much good resulted from it. 
Tons les maux qui s^ensuivireiit, all the evils which resulted from it^ 

This verb is also frequently used in an impersonal manner with the 
pronoun il, in the third person singular of its different tenses, in the 

k2 



196 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

sense of resulting : as, — il s^ensuit de Id que, . , hence it follows that. . ; 
de cette proposition, il s^ensuivit que. ., from that proposition, it fol- 
lowed that ... Its compound tenses are formed with eii'e. 

30. Tistre, to weave [Neuter and Defective Verb]. 

This verb is only used in its compound tenses, which are formed with its past 
participle tissi^, woven, and the different tenses of either avoir or et?'e, according as 
we wish to express an action, or the state of the thing mentioned, 

Tisser is its substitute in the other tenses : thus v/e say, — Tisser du lin, de la laine, 
du colon, to weave flax, wool, cotton. 

Tissu is used, both in a natural and figurative sense, either as a substantive or a 
participle : thus, — vn drop bien tissu, a well woven cloth ; un tissu d'or, d''argent, de 
soie, a gold, silver, or silk lace ; un long tissu de belles actions, a long series of noble 
actions. 

31. Traire, to milk [Active and Defective Verb]; 

Trayant, milking ; trait, traite, milked. Avoir trait, ayant trait. 

Ind. Pres. Je trais, tu trais, il ou elle trait ; 

Nous trayons, vous trayez, ils 02i elles traient. 

Imp. Je trayais, tu trayais, il ou elle trayait ; 

Nous trayions, vous trayiez, ils ou elles trayaient. 

[ This verb has no pretent dejifiite.'] 
Ful. Je ti airai, tu trairas, il im elle traira ; 

Nous trairons, vous trairez, ils oit elles trairont. 

Cond. Pres. Je trairais, tu trairais, il ou elle trairait ; 

Nous trairions, vous trairiez, ils ou elles trairaient. 

Imperative. \ No \st person. 1 trais, qu'il ou qu'elle traie; 

Trayons, trayez, qu'ils ou qu'elles traient. 

Sub. Pres. Que je traie, que tu traies, qu'il ou qu'elle traie ; 

Que nous trayions, que vous trayiez, qu'ils ou qu'elles traient. 

l^There is 7io imperfect of the subjunctive.'] 

Conjugate after the same maimer the verbs derived from traire: 
such as — atiraire, to attract, to entice ; ahstraire, to abstract ; ex~ 
<?-azV^, to extract; disiraire, to distract, to divert; rentraire, to fine- 
draw ; retraire, to redeem (an estate) ; soustraire, to subtract, to 
hide, to conceal, to get or take away; se soustraire a, to avoid, to es- 
cape, to withdraw one's self from. 

Attraire is not much used, except in the present of the infinitive : as, 
— le sel est hon pour attraire les pigeons, salt attracts pigeons ; and 
even then attirer is preferred. 

Ahstraire is very little used, /afre abstraction being better. 

32. Vaincre, to vanquish, to conquer [Active Verb] ; 

Vainqviant, conquering ; vaincu, vaincue, conquered. Avoir vaincn, ayant vaincu. 

Ind. Pres. Je vaincs, tu vaincs, il ou elle vainc; 

Nous vainquons, vous vainquez, ils ou elles vainquent. 



IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 197 



Imp. Je vainquais, 

Nous vainquions, 

Pret. Def. Je vainquis, 

Nous vainquimes, 

Fut. Je vaiiicrai, 

Nous vaincrons, 

Cond. Pres. Je vaincrais, 

Nous vaincrions. 

Imperative. [_No \sf person.] 
Vainquons, 

Sub. Pres. Que je vainque, 

Que nous vainquions 

Imp. Que je vainquisse. 
Que nous vanquis- 
sions, 



tu vainquais, 
vous vainquiez, 

tu vainquis, 
vous vainquites, 

tu vain eras, 
vous vaincrez, 

tu vaincrais, 
vous vaincrifz, 

vaincs, 
vainquez, 

que tu vainques, 
que vous vainquiez, 

que tu vainquisses, 
que vous vainquis- 
siez. 



il ou elle vainquait ; 
ils ou elles vainquaient. 

il ou elle vainquit ; 

ils ou elles vainquirent. 

il ou elle vaincra ; 
ils ou elles vaincront. 

il ou elle vaincrait ; 
ils ou elles vaincraient. 

qu'il ou qu'elle vainque ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles vainque: 



qu 
qu 



iquent. 



I'il 



; qu'elle vainque ; 



qu'ils ou qu'elles vainquent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle vainquit ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles vainquis- 
sent. 



Conjugate after the same manner convaincre, to convince. 

In verbs ending in aincre, the c is changed into qu in the tenses in 
which it comes before the vowels, a, e, ?, and o, as may be seen in the 
above conjugation. 

The three persons singular of the present of the indicative, and the 
second singular of the imperative, are very seldom used. Voltaire 
expunges them, Corneille has however used them in Sertorius, Act iv. 
So. 4:— 

'' De Tamour aisemeut on ne vainc pas les charmes." 



33. Vivre, to live [Neuter Verb] ; 
Vivant, /m//^ ; \iicn\j)ideclhiable'], lived. Avoir vecu, ayant vecu. 



hid. Pres. Je vis, 

Nous vivons, 

Imp. Je vivais, 

Nous vivions, 

Pret. Def. Je vecus. 

Nous vecumes, 

Fut. Jo vivrai. 

Nous vivrons, 

Cond. Pres. Je vivrais. 

Nous vivrions, 

Imperative. \_No \st person.'] 
Vivons, - 

Sub. Pres. Que je.vive. 

Que nous vivions. 

Imp. Que je vecusse. 



tu vis, 
vous vivez, 

tu vivais, 
vous viviez, 

tu vecus, 
vous vecutes, 

tu vivras, 
vous vivrez, 

tu vivrais, 
vous vivriez, 

vis, 
vivez, 

que tu vives, 
que vous viviez. 

que tu vecusses, 



il ou elle vit ; 

ils ou elles vivent. 

il ou elle vivait ; 
ils ou elles vivaient. 
il ou elle vecutj 
ils ou elles vecurent. 

il ou elle vivra ; 
ils ou elles vivront. 

il ou elle vivrait ; 
ils ou elles vivraieut. 

qu'il ou qu'elle vive ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles vivent. 

qu'il ou qu'elle vive ; 
qu'ils ou qu'elles vivent. 
qu'il ou qu'elle veciit ; 



Que nous vecussions, que vous vecussiez, qu'ils ou qu'elles vecussent. 

Conjugate after the same manner the verbs compounded of vivre 
2iSy—survivre^ to outlive. 



198 UNIPERSONAL VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUG. 

Vivre governs the preposition de : as, — il vit de pain, he lives upon 
bread. 

The third person singular of the present of the subjunctive — vive^ 
and the third plural of the same tense vivent, are frequently used with- 
out any antecedent, by way of acclamation or shout of joy, before the 
names of persons to whom we wish a long and happy life : as, — vive le 
roil long live the king! vivent les gens d^ esprit! long live men of 
genius ! They are likewise used before the name of any thing that we 
highly esteem and praise : as, — vive la vie ! life for ever ! vivent la 
Champagne et la Bourgogne pour les bons vins / Champagne and 
Burgundy for ever ! 



Of Unipersonal Verbs. 

Unipersonal verbs are only used in the third persons singular of their 
simple and compound tenses, admitting in those persons precisely the 
same terminations as the verbs, either regular or irregular, of the con- 
jugation to which they belong. 

The compound tenses of these verbs are formed by the addition of 
their past participle to the simple tenses of avoir or etre, according as 
either is required. 

It is necessary to observe that some of the following verbs are not 
given as examples of unipersonal verbs, but, as they are only used in 
the third person singular of their different tenses, they are better classed 
among the unipersonals. 

Unipersonal Verbs of the First Conjugation. 

1. Neiger, ^0 i-now; [Unipersonal Verb] ; 
Neigeant, mowing ; neige, snowed. Avoir neige, ayant neige. 



Ind. Pres. It snows, does 
snow, or is 
snowing, 
II neige. 



it does not snow or 
is not snowing, 

il ne neige pas. 

Im}}. It was snowi?ig, it teas not snowing, 
II neigeait. il ne neigeait pas. 



does it snow ? does it not snow 9 



it did not snow, 
il ne neigea pas. 

it will not snow, 
il ne neigera pas, 

it would not snow, 
il ne neigerait pas 

\_No imperative.'] 
Sub. Pres. That it may snow, that it ma>j not mow, 
Qu'il neige. qu'il ne neige pas. 

Imp. That it might snow, that it ytiighf ?iot snow, 
Qu'il neigeat. qu'il ne neigeat pas. 



Pret. Def. It snowed, 
II neigea. 

Fvt. It win snow, 
II neigera. 

Cond.Pres. It would snow, 
II neigerait. 



neige-t-il ? 
was it snowing ? 
neigeait-il ? 
did it snow ? 
neigea-t-il ? 
will it snow ? 
neigera-t-il ? 

would it snow ? 
neigerait-il ? 



ne neige-t-il pas ? 

was it not snowing ? 
ne neig»ait-il pas ? 

did it not snow ? 
ne neigea-t-il pas ? 

will it not snow ? 
ne neigera-t-il pas ? 

would it not snow ? 
ne neigerait-il pas ?j 



UNIPERSONAL VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUG. 199 

The compound tenses of this verb are formed by the addition of its 
past participle neige to the third persons singular of the simple tenses 
of avoir : as, — // a neige, it has snowed ; il n^a pas neige, it has not 
snowed; a-t-il neige? has it snowed? n'a-t-il pas neige? has it not 
snowed? &c. 

Conjugate after the same manner bruiner, to drizzle; greler, to hail; 
geler, to freeze ; degeler, to thaw ; tonner, to thunder ; eclairer, to 
lighten ; importer, to concern ; resulter, to result. 

Arriver, to happen ; sembler, to seem ; or any other verb of the first 
conjugation, when used in an unipersoiial manner, are also conjugated 
after the same model. 

Arriver takes etre in its compound tenses. 



Second Conjugation. 
1. Saillir, to project [Neuter and Defective Verb]; 

SaxWdiXd, projecting ; sailli, saillie,p/-o/ec/e£/. Avoir sailli, ayant sailli. 

Ind. Pres. It projects, does it does not project, does it project ? does it not project ? 
project, or is 
projecting, 
II saille. il ne saille pas. saille-t-il ? uc saille-t-il pas ? 

Imp. It projected, it did not project, did it project ? did it 7iot project ? 

II saillait. il ne saillait pas. saillait-il ? ne saillait-il pas ? 

[ This verb has no preterit dejxnite.^ 

Fut. It will project, it will not project, will it project^ will it not project? 

II saillera. il ne saillera pas. saillera-t-il ? ne saillera-t-il pas ? 

Cond.Pres. It would project, it would 7iot project, would it project? ivould it not project? 
11 saillerait. il ne saillerait pas. saillerait-il.'' ne saillerait-il pas ? 

\_No imperative. '\ 
Sub. Pres. That it may project, that it may not project, 
Qu'il saille. qu'il ne saille pas. 

Imp. That it might project, that it might not project, 
Qu'il saillit. qu'il ne saillit pas. 

Observe. — As saillir is not an unipersonal verb, it may be preceded by the pro- 
noun elle for its nominative or subject, when referring to a substantive feminine 
singular, either expressed or understood; it may also be used in the third persons 
plural of its different tenses., with the pronoun ik ou elles : as, — il on elle saille, Us 
ou elles sail lent I il ou elle saillait, ils ou elles saillaient ; il ou elle saillera, ils ou elles 
sailferont ; Hon elle saillerait, ils on elles sailleraient ; qu il on qu'' elle saille, qu'i/s on 
qu^ elles saillent. 

Such is the conjugation of «ai7/jV, when used with reference to a balcony, a cornice, 
or anj' other ornament of architecture, projecting from the main part of a building: 
as, — ce baicon saille trop, Was balcony projects too muchj cette corniche ne mille pas 
assez, this cornice does not project enough, &c. 

But when saillir is employed to describe the gushing or spouting out of liquid bodies, 
it is then conjugated like the vevh Ji?tir : as, — saillir, saillissant, sailli; avoir sailli, 
ayant sailli ; je saillis, tu saillis, Scc.je saillissats, tu saillissais, &c. Ex.; le sang saillis- 
sait de sa veine avec impituosite. On fait saillir Peau a ime trts-grande hauteur par la 
compression qu^on en fait dans les pompes. 



200 UNIPERSONAL VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUG. 



Unipersonal Verbs of the Third Conjugation. 



1. Falloir, i 


to he necessary [1 


Jnipersonal 


Verb] ; 


[No pres. pari.'] fallu 


[indeclinable'], been necessary. Avoir fallu, ayant fallu. 


Ind. Pres. It is necessary, 
11 faut. 


it is not necessary, 
il ne faut pas. 


is it necessary ? 
fant-il ? 


is it not necessary ? 
ne faut-il pas ? ' 


Jmp. It was neces- 


it was not neces- 


was it neces- 


was it not neces- 


sary, 
11 fallait. 


sary, 
il ne fallait pas. 


sary 7 
fallait-il.^ 


sary ? 
ne fallait-il pas ? 


Pret. Def. It was neces- 


it was not neces- 


wan it neces- 


was it not neces- 


sary, 
11 faliut. 


sary, 
il ne faliut pas. 


sary ? 
fallut-il ? 


sary ? 
ne fallut-il pas ? 


Put. It will be ne- 


il will not be neces- 


will it be neces- 


will it not be neces- 


sary, 
11 faudra. 


sary, 
il ne faudra pas. 


sary ? 
faudra-t-il ? 


sary ? 
ne faudra-t-il pas ? 


Cond. Pres. It would be ne- 


it would 7iot be ne- 


would it be ne- 


woidd it not be ne- 


cessary, 
11 faudrait. 


cessary, 
il ne faudrait pas. 


cesary ? 
faudrait-il ? 


cessary ? 
ne faudrait-il pas ? 




[No imperative.] 




Sub. Pres. That it may be 


that it may not be 






7i€cessary, 
Qu'il faille, 


necessary, 
qu'il ne faille pas. 






/♦WJ9. That it might be 


that it might not be 






necessary, 
Qu'il faimt. 


necessary, 
qu'il ne faliut pas. 







The compound tenses of this verb are formed by the addition of its 
past participle fallu to the third persons singular of the simple tenses 
of avoir : as, — il a fallu, it has been necessary ; il ri'a pas fallu, it 
has not been necessary ; a-t-il fallu ? has it been necessary ? n^a-t-il 
pas fallu ? lias it not been necessary? il avail fallu, it had been ne- 
cessary, &c. 



2. Pleuvoir, to rain [Unipersonal Verb] ; 

Pleuvant, raining; plu [indeclinable], rained. Avoir plu, ayant plu. 



Ind, Pres. It rains, does it does not rain, 
rain, or is 
raining, 
II pleut. 



does it rain ? 



il ne pleut pas. pleut-il ? 

Imp. It was raining, il was not raining, was it raining 

II pleuvait. il ne pleuvait pas. pleuvait-il ? 

Pret. Def. Il rained, it did not rain, did it rndn ? 

II plut. il ne plut pas. plut-il ? 

Put. It will rain, it will not rain, will it rain ? 

II pleuvra. il ne pleuvra pas. pleuvra-t-il ? 



does it not rain ? 



ne pleut-il pas ? 

was it not raining ? 
ne pleuvait-il pas i* 

did it not rain $ 
ne plut-il pas ? 

will it not rain ? 
ne pleuvra-t-il pas ? 



UNIPERSONAL VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUG. 201 



Cond. Pres. It would rain, 
II pleuvrait. 



Sub. Pres. TTiaftt mat/ rain, 
Qu'il pleuve. 
Imp. That it might 
rain, 
Qu'il pliit. 



it would not rain, would it rain ? would it not rain ? 
il ne pleuvrait pas. pleuvrait-il ? ne pleuvrait-il pas ? 

[;Vo imperative.^ 
that it may not rain, 
qu'il ne pleuve pas. 
that it might not 

rain, 
qu'il ne plut pas. 

The compound tenses of pleuvoir are formed by the addition of its 
past participle -plu to the third persons singular of the simple tenses of 
avoir : as, — il a pluy it has rained ; il n*a pas phi^ it has not rained ; 
a-t-il plu ? has it rained ? n^a-t-il pas flu 1 has it not rained ? il avail 
plu, it had rained, &c. 

3. Eclioir, to he or fall due, to expire [Neuter and Defective Verb]; 
Echeant, being due ; echu, echue, been due. Etre echu, etant echu. 



Ind. Pres. It becomes due, 


it does not become 


does it becon\e 


does it 7iot become 




due. 


due 9 


due? 


11 echoit on 


il n'echoit pas. 


echoit-il ? 


n'echoit-il pas ? 


echet. 








Imp. It was due. 


it was not due. 


was it due ? 


was it 7iot due ? 


11 echeait. 


il n'echeait pas. 


6clieait-il ? 


n'echeait-il pas ? 


Pret. Def. It was or be- 


it was fiot due. 


was it due ? 


was it not due f 


came due. 








11 echut. 


il n'echut pas. 


echut-il ? 


n'echut-il pas ? 


Fut. It will be due. 


it will 7iot be due. 


will it be due ? 


unll it 7iot be due ? 


11 echerra. 


il n'echerra pas. 


echcrra-t-il ? 


n'echerra-t-il pas ? 


Cond. Pres. It would be due. 


it would not be due. 


would it be due ? 


would it /lot be due f 


11 echerrait. 


il n'echerrait pas. 


echerrait- il ? 


n'echerrait-il pas ? 




[A'o imperative.} 




Sub. Pres. That it may be 


That it may not 


be 




due, 


due. 






Qu'il echee. 


qu'il n'echee pas. 






Imp. That it might be 


77m/ if might not 


be 




due. 


due. 






Qu'il echut. 


qu'il n'echut pas. 







The compound tenses of this verb are formed by adding its past 
participle ecJm to the third persons singular or plural of the different 
tenses of avoir, to expres the action of a bill or bills falling due : as, — 
mon billet a echic le premier de ce mois, my bill became due on the 
first of this month ; but echu is added to the third persons singular or 
plural of the different tenses of etre, to denote the state of a bill being 
due : as, — cet effet est echu, this bill is due ; il ripest pas encore echu, 
it is not yet due ; est-il echu ? is it due ? n^est-il pas echu ? is it not 
due, &c. 

The present of the infinitive eclioir is frequently used with the diffe- 
rent tenses of devoir : as, — cet effet a dCi echoir le vingt de Mars, 
this bill must have been due on the twentieth of March. 

K.5 



202 UNIPERSONAL VERBS;OF THE FOURTH CONJUG. 

Echoir may also be used in the third persons plural of its different 
tenses : as, — ils echoient, Us echurent, Us echerront, Us echerraient, 
quails echeentj qu'ds echussent. 

4. Seoir, to Jit [Neuter and Defective Verb] ; 

S&Yaxii, fitting ; sis, sise*, situated. 



Ind. Pres. It fits, 
II sied. 


it does not fit, 
il ne sied pas. 


does it fit ? 
sied-il ? 


does it not fit ? 
ne sied-il pas ? 


Imp. It fitted, 
11 seyait. 


it did not fit, 
il ne seyait pas. 


did it fit 9 
seyait-il ? 


did it not fit ? 
ne seyait-il pas ? 


[ 


This verb has no ft 


eterit definite.] 




Put. It will fit, 
11 siera. 


it will not fit, 
il ne siera pas. 


will it fit ? 
siera-t-il ? 


will it not fit ? 
ne siera-t-il pas? 


Cond. Pres. It would fit, 

■ 11 sierait. 


it would not fit, 
il ne sierait pas. 


would it fit ? 
sierait-il ? 


would it not fit 9 
ne sierait-il pas ? 




\_No imperative^ 




Sub. Pres. That it may fit, 
Qu'il siee. 


that it may not fit, 
qu'il ne siee pas. 








\No imperfect.'] 




This verb may also be used in the third persons 
as, — Us sieenty quHls sieent. It has no compound 


plural of its tenses 
tenses. 



Fourth Conjugation. 
1, Eclore, to hatch, to blow, to open [Neuter and Defective Verb] j 

\_No present participle.] Eclos, eclose, hatched. Etre eclos, etant eelos. 
Ind. Pres. II eclot, il n'eclot pas ; ecl6t-il ? n'6cl6t-il pas ? 

[ This verb has no imperfect nor preterit definite.] 



Put. II eclora, 
Cond.Pres.ll §clorait, 

Sub. Pres. Qu'il eclose, 



il n'6clora pas ; eclora-t-il ? 

il n'eclorait pas ; eclorait-il ? 

l_No imperative.] 
qu'il n'eclose pas. 

[A^o imperfect.] 



n'6clora-t-il pas ? 
n'eclorait-il pas ? 



This verb, not being an unipersonal one, maybe preceded by the pro- 
noun elle, for its subject, when referring to an antecedent feminine 
singular ; it may also be used in the third persons plural of its tenses : 



* The past participle sis, sise, is only used now as an adjective, in the sense of 
siiite., situee: thus, — une maison sise a, . . ., a house situated at. . . . 



OF NEGATIONS. 203 

as, — il ou elle eclot, Us ou elles eclosent; il ou elle eclora^ Us ou elles 
ecloront; il ou elle ecloraU, Us ou elles ecloraient ; quHl ou qu^elle 
eclosey quails ou qu'elles eclosent. 

Its compound tenses are formed by the addition of its past participle 
eclos to the third persons singular or plural of the simple tenses of etre : 
as, — U est eclos, it is hatched ; Us ne sent pas eclos, they are not 
hatched, &c. 

Eclore is not only used in speaking of oviparous animals, such as 
birds, insects ; it is also employed in speaking of flowers blowing, and 
of different things that begin to appear. 

2. Braire, to bray [Neuter and Defective Verb]. 

This verb, which expresses the cry of the ass, is seldom used but in the present 
of the infinitive braire : in the third persons singular and plural of the present of 
the indicative — il ou elle braii, ils ou elles braiefit : in the third persons of the 
future — il ou elle braira, ils ou elles hrairont : and in the third persons of the condi- 
tional — il ou elle bruiraif, ils ou elles brairaient. 

3. Bruire, to roar [Neuter and Defective Verb]. 

This verb is only used in the present of the infinitive, in the present participle, 
and in the third persons singular and plural of the imperfect of the indicative : 
as, — bruire, bruyant ; il briiyait, ils bruyaient. In the other tenses we use — faire du 
hruit i rendre un son confus: as, — on entendait bruire les vagues, you coidd hear the 
roaring of the waves ; les flots bruyaient horriblement, the waves were roaring dread- 
fully. 



LESSON XXII. 

Of Negations and Interrogations, 

1. OF NEGATIONS. 

How to express in French not, no, not that, no more, neither, nor, never, 

by no means. 

1. Not. When not is used with a verb in English, it is expressed in 
French by ne pas or ne point, placing ne or ?i' before the verb in a 
simple tense, with pas* or point ^ after it; and ne or ti' before the 

* DISTINCTION BETWEEN PAS AND POINT. 

Pas and point are often indifferently used in negative sentences, with this differ- 
ence, however, that /)om^ denies more absolutely than /7as, meaning not at all: for 
instance, — Je ne vais point a la comtdie, I do not go to the pla}^, signifies that I never 
go; whilst je? ne vais pas a la comedie, may imply that I do not go now, or this 
evening, although I may sometimes go. 

In interrogative sentences, point is generally used, when doubt is entertained 
about the thing mentioned, and pas when we are certain of it : as for instance, 
— ti'avez-vous point vu ma soeur? have you not seen my sister ? implies that I am 
totally ignorant whether you have or have not seen her ; but n'avez-vous pas vu 
ma soeur, signifies that I am conscious you have seen her, and I msh to let you 
know it. 



204 OF NEGATIONS. 

auxiliary in a compoimd one, with also pas or point after it ; that is, be- 
tween the auxiliary and the participle; and if any pronoun is to precede 
the verb as its object, placing it between ne and the verb in a simple 
tense, and between ne and the auxiliary in a compound one : as, — I do 
not speak, je ne parle pas ; he has not written, il n^a pas ecrit ; has 
it not rained ? n^a-t-il pas plu ? I have not it, je ne Vai pas ; she has 
not seen him, elle ne Va pas vu, &c. always leaving out the words does, 
do, or did, which the English generally use in negative and hiterro- 
gative sentences, in the present, imperfect, and preterit of the indi- 
cative. 

If the verb should be in the present of the infinitive mood in French, 
both ne pas or ne point come more elegantly before it, placing the- pro- 
nouns /e, la, les, lui, ou leur, v;hen used as its object, between ne and pas 
or point : as, — it is disagreeable not to speak French, il est desagreable 
de ne pas parler Franpais ; it is prudent not to say it, il est prudent 
de ne le pas dire. 

When these four verbs — cesser, to cease ; oser, to dare ; pouvoir, to 
be able ; aud savoir, to know ; are employed with a negative in English, 
they are more commonly used in French with ne only before the verb, 
in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one, without 
pas or point after it ; although if we wish to express a complete nep;a- 
tion, pas or point should be used after the verb or the auxiliary : as, — 
I cannot do it, je ne le puis ou je ne le puis pas. I dare not- say it, je 
n'ose le dire, &c. 

Not, used in a reply to a question before an adverb or any other word, 
is expressed in French by pas only : as, — how do you do, madam ? not 
very w^ell, sir; comment x^ous portez-vous, madame? pas trcs-hien, 
monsieur. 

2. No. When 7io is used in English in reply to a question, it is con- 
strued into French by non : as, — have you seen him ? no, sir ; Pavez- 
vous vu ? non, monsieur. Not, employed in the second part of a sen- 
tence after or, whether the phrase be interrogative or negative, is like- 
wise expressed by 7ion : as, — will you do it or not? voulez-vous le jairc 
ou non? — whether he come or not, I do not care, qu^il vienne ou non, 
je ne ni'en soucie pas. 

No, used in reply to a question, is Ukewise expressed by point., non pas, or nmni, 
if in a familiar style: as, — will you have any? no; fw voulez-vous? point; will 
you give me this? no, miss; vou/ez-vovs me donner ceci? non pas, tnndemoise.'/e ; 
do you come with me, my dear P no, madam ; vcnez-vous avec mot, ma chtre? nenni, 
madame. 

3. Not that is expressed in French by non que, non pas que, ce n^est 



Pas and point require sometimes de or d' before the next word: as, — there is no 
answer, il ii't/ a pas ou point de reponse. 

Pus de ou point de must be repeated in French before every word aflPectod by tio 
in English: as, — she has no friends, no money, no resources, etle n\i point d'owj?. 
point Sargent, point de ressources. 



OF NEGATIONS. 205 

pas que, according as it sounds best, Avith the following verb in the 
subjunctive mood : as, — I will do it, not that I am obliged to it, but for 
the sake of their children, je le ferai, non que oil non pas que j*y sois 
oblige, mais pour Vamour de leurs enfans. 

4. No more and not any more. When no more comes after a verb, 
or when not is used after one of the words does, do, did, shall, will, 
would, and should, with any more after the following verb ; or also, 
when not is employed after the auxiliary have, with any more after the 
next participle, as in these sentences — / saw him no more ; I have not 
seen him any more ; no more and not any more, &c. are ex])ressed in 
French hy plus after the verb in a simple tense, with ne before it, and by 
p/w.y. after the auxiliary in a compound one, with also ne before it, fol- 
lowing the same rules for the place of the pronouns which may be used 
as the objects of the verb as with 7iot : as, — I saw him no more, je ne 
le vis phis. I have not seen her any more, /e ne Pai plus rue, &c. 

Should no more be followed by than, it is then expressed by pas plus 
after the verb, with ne before it, as above : as, — my sister is no more 
than twenty, ma soeur n^a pas plus de vingt ans. 

5. Neither and nor, used before two nouns, or two verbs in the pre- 
sent of the infinitive mood ; neither coming before the first, and nor 
before the second ; or also any before a substantive which follows a 
verb used negatively, with or or nor before the next substantive : as, — 
I have neither friends nor money ; she can neither sing nor dance; 
do not put any sugar or milk in my tea ; are expressed in French by 
ni before the first noun or verb, with jii before the second, putting ne 
before the verb which precedes them, but without pas or point after it : 
as, — I have neither friends nor money, je n''ai ni amis ni argent ; she 
can neither sing nor dance, elle ne salt ni chanter ni danser ; do not 
put any sugar or milk in my tea, ne mettez ni sucre ni lait dans mon the. 

Neither and nor, being used before two verbs in the indicative mood, 
neither before the first and nor before the second, are expressed in 
French thus — neither by ne, before the first verb, and nor by ni ne 
before the second : as, — I neither love nor hate her, je ne Paime ni ne 
la hais. 

Neither, at the end of a sentence, is expressed in French by non 
plus : as, — he will not have it, nor I neither, il ne le veut pas, ni moi 
non plus. 

6. Never and hy no means, employed with a verb, are expressed in 
French by ne before the verb in a simple tense, with jamais or nulle- 
ment after it, and ne before the auxiliary in a compound one, with also 
jamais or nullement after it : that is, between the auxiliary and the 
participle, without ever using pa? or point in this case ; but placing the 
pronouns which may be employed as objects of the verb between ne and 
the verb in a simple tense, and between ne and the auxiliary in a com- 
pound one : as, — she will never come, elle ne viendra jamais ; she is 
by no means obliging, elle n'^est nullement obligeante. I never saw 
him before, /(? ne Pai jamais vu auparavant. 



206 OF NEGATIONS. 

If the verb should be in the present of the infinitive, both ne and jamais elegantly 
precede it : as, — it is praiseworthy never to speak an untruth, ii est louable de ne 
jamais meniir. 

Neve?' and by no means, used by themselves in answer to a question, 
are also expressed in French hy jamais and nullement, without ne ; but 
never preceded by no is construed by non jamais : as, — have you seen 
the king ? no, never; avez-vous vu le roil non, jamais. 

Jamais may be placed at the head of a sentence in some particular 
cases, which can only be learnt by use ; ne is then required before the 
verb : as, — I never saw so amiable a lady, jamais, je n'ai vu ou je n'ai 
jamais vu de dame si aimahle. 

Jamais, followed by a substantive taken in a partitive sense, requires 
de or d^ before such substantive, in the sense of some or any in English : 
as, — I never drink any water, j'e ne hois jamais d'eaw. 

ESSAY XXII. 
When the abbreviations, suh. pr. — sub, imp. — sub. pret. — and sub. 
plu. occur before a French verb, in the following essays, they denote 
that it is to be put either in the present, imperfect, preterit, or pluperfect 
of the subjunctive. 

The Misses S * * do not excel in music. — Your brothers have not made 
Demoiselle exceller dans faire 

any progress in the (Italian language). — Do you not know her ? — She 
de ItaHen connaitre pret. def. 

confessed that she would not have spoken to me, (had she not been in want) of 

avouer si die rC avail pas eu besoin 

money. — It is very unpleasant not to speak French. — How disappointed I 
argent II d^sagriable ^Qi/e ^contrarie ^imp. 

was at not (being able) to* go with them. — How does* your mother do ? 

de pouvoir se porter 

Not very well, madam; she had again a relapse yesterday. — Will you 

pret. def. encore rec.hute 

call at Lady D.'s to-day P No, sir, I think she is gone into the 

passer^ chez^ •■ 4^)*** ^aujourd^hui croire qiC a 

country; besides, I have not the pleasure of (knowing) her. — Whether she 
de plus connaitre Q'J 

writes to me or not, I shall not go. — Will you give me one of these 
suh. pr. ecrire Fouloir 

apples, my dear ?— No, sir ; they are not mine. — The proverb " no virtue no 

a moi proverbe point 

happiness" is not so true as this one, " no money no paternoster." — He is not 

vrai celui-ci Suisse 

very particular in his dress, although he always dresses very 

recherche habits fl. quoiqu"" ^ sub. pr. ^se mettre 

genteelly. — I cannot go and''' letch them. — Her parents are in a very mise- 
proprement ne pouvoir chercher 

rable condition, they have no money, no means of (getting) any, and no friends 

etat moijens gugner 

on whom they can depend. Well! I will give them some relief; 

sur siib.pr. pouvoir compter Eh bien quelques secours 



OF NEGATIONS. 20*7 

not that I think they deserve it, but for the sake of their children.— 

sub. pr. croi?'e gu' mn'iter amour 

(It was) a delicious fruit, but we have not any more (of it). — You will see 
Citait dclicieux 124 5 3^^ ^^^y 

him no more after this week. — My little boy is no more than six or seven j^ears 
semaine garcon a de 

old*. — They are no forwarder than they were when they came to 

plus avanct imp. quand pret, def. venir 

town. — She can neither read nor write. — You have not put any sugar or milk 
savoir lire tcrire mettre 

in my coffee. — I neither love nor hate her. — She neither pleases nor displeases 
aimer hair plaire deplaire 

me.— They do not care for it, nor I neither. — Why do you say so, 

^ 2 V ^soucier '^e/i dire cela 

since you know she cannot* speak English ? — I dare not tell her 
puisque qil ne parler pas Anglais oser ^dire Vui 

(of it). (Some people) do not cease complaining of Fortune, 

Ve I^ y o, des gens m. pi. qui cesser de se pfaindre — 

although they are loaded with her favours. — Time past never returns, 

sub. pr. cotnblt de faveur passe revenir 

and a word once uttered cannot (be recalled). — Never speak ill of (others). 
une fois prononcer elre rappele mal atdrui 

—I by no means approve of* his conduct. — Love your children; never blame 
approuver conduite bldmer 

them without cause, and never reprove them with passion. — It is noble never 
raison reprimander coltre ^ 

to deceive (any body).— Will you consent (to it)? — No, never. — Never did* I 
^de ^romper personne y 

(see any thing) like it*. — Never man had more success with so little 
«'a« vu rien de semblable de si pen de 

merit. — I never drink any water. 
boire 



LESSON XXIII. 

Cases in which ne is used in French before a verb, loithout pas or 
point after it, although there is no negative in English. 

1. Ne is used in French before a verb after que, when que comes 
after the comparatives 'plus, moins, mieux, meilleur, or the words 
autre and autrement, if the verb preceding these expressions be em- 
ployed affirmatively, or even sometimes interrogatively : as, — I love you 
more tenderly than I ever did any other lady, /e vous aime plus tendre- 
ment que je \\^ at jamais aime aucunc autre dame. She is better to-day 
than she was yesterday, elte est mieux aujourcVhui qu'elle n^ctait hier. 
Does he write better than he speaks ? ecrit-il mieux qu'il ne parle ? 

But if the verb preceding plus, mains, mieux, meilleur, or autre and 
autrement, be used negatively, ne is not then required before the verb 



208 . OF NEGATIONS. 

following que : as, — she is not more amiable than she was formerly, 
elle ripest pas plus aimable qu*elle etait autrefois, and not — qu'el'le 
n^etait. 

Should the verb preceding que, as well as that which follows it, be in 
the present of the infinitive; or if, not being in the present of the 
infinitive, a conjunction should intervene between que and the second 
verb, ne should not then be used before the second verb, whether the 
first be employed affirmatively, negatively, or interrogatively : as, — it is 
more noble to forgive than to revenge one's self, il est plus noble de 
pardonner que de sevenger, and not que de ne se venger. You do not 
dance better than when you were at school, vous ne dansez pas mieux 
que quand vous etiez a Pecole, and not — que quand vous n*etiez^ &c. 

2. Ne is also required in French after the conjunctions a moins que, 
unless; de crainte que, for fear; de peur que,\est; and que used in 
the same sense, before the next verb which depends on them, and which 
must be put in the subjunctive mood : as, — I shall not go unless you 
come and fetch me, je uHrai pas a moins que vous ne veniez me 
chercher. Go out quickly for fear he should see you, sortez prompte- 
me7it de crainte quHl ne vous voie. I shall not go to see her unless 
she invite me, je n'irai pas la voir qu^elle ne m^en prie ; for a moins 
qu^elle ne m'en prie. 

Avant que, before, and que used in the same sense or for until, 
require ne before the next verb, if any thing uncertain be expressed by 
it, whereas ne is not required, if the thing expressed be positive. In 
either case the verb must be put in the sutijunctive mood : as, — he will 
not come before you go and fetch liim, il ne viendra pas que vous 
n^alliez le chercher. In this sentence, ne is used before alliez, because 
it is uncertain whether you will go or not. Wait till the rain is over, 
attendez quHl ne pleuve plus. Ne is also used before pleuve, as it is 
likewise uncertain when the rain will cease; but we say — elle vint ici 
deux jours avant qu^elle mourOt, she came here two days before she 
died, and not avant c^u^elle ne mourf/t, because reference is made to a 
thing about which there can be no uncertainty. 

3. When the verbs craindre, to fear, to be afraid ; apprehender, to 
apprehend ; avoir peur, to be afraid ; trembler, to tremble ; are fol- 
lowed by que, they also require ne before the next verb, which must be 

. put in the subjunctive mood, without pas or point after it, if the thing 
expressed by it be not wished for, but on the contrary objected to : as, 
— I fear or am afraid he will come, /<? crains cpiHl ne vienne ; because 
I wish him not to come. 

But if the thing expressed by the verb coming after que be wished 
for, which is generally the case when that verb is accompanied by not 
in English, ne is then required before it with pas or point after it, and 
it is, as above, put in the subjunctive mood : as, — I am afraid my sister 
will not come to-night, /'ai peur que ma scsur ne vienne pas ce soir ; 
because I am anxious for her coming. 



OF NEGATIONS. 209 

The same is to be observed after de crairite que awA de peur que ; that is, /)a^ or 
point must be used after the verb depending on these conjunctions, when the thing 
exjiressed by it is wished for ; whereas ne only is required before it, if the thing 
expressed by it be not wished for: as, — I shall take your letter myself, for fear it 
should not be delivered in time, je me chargerai moi-mime de voire lettre, de crainte 
qi^elle ne soil pas remlue en temps. In this sentence, pas is used after the verb, be- 
cause I wish the letter to be delivered: but in this — 1 sh.ill speak to your father, for 
fear he should punish you, je parlerai a voire ptre, de peiir ou de crainte qu'il ne vous 
punisse; ne only is used before the verb, because I wish no punishment should be 
inflicted on you. 

Should, on the contrary, the verb following que express a thing, the 
event of which would be a matter of indifference, both ne and j)as should 
then be omitted and the verb put in the subjunctive mood, as above: 
as, — I do not fear his coming, je ne crains pas qu'il vienne ; because 
whether he come or not is a matter of indifference to me. 
"^ 4. Prendre garde, used in the sense of taking care that a thing shall 
not happen, and followed by que, governs likewise ne before the suc- 
ceeding verb, which must be put in the subjunctive mood: as, — take 
care the child does not fall, prenez garde que Pcnfant ne tomhe. 

5. Nier, douter, and disconvenir, followed by que, require ne before 
the next verb, when they are employed negatively, as also sometimes 
interrogatively ; but, if they be used affirmatively, 7ie is not required 
before it. In any case, the following verb is i)ut in the subjunc- 
tive mood : as, — I do not deny, doubt, disagree, that it will be fine 
weather, ye ne nie pas, je ne doute pas,je ne disconviens pas qu''il ne 
fasse beau temps ; but — I deny, doubt, disagree, that it is so, je nie, je 
doute, je disconviens que cela soit, and not que cela ne soit; because 
the sentence is affirmative. 

Observe. — If the preceding verbs and conjunctions should be fol- 
lowed by de, and a verb in the present of the infinitive, instead of que 
with the subjunctive, ne should not then be used before that verb : as, 
— he fears, apprehends, trembles, to displease you, il craint, il appre- 
hende, it tremble, de vous deplaire, and not de ne vous deplaire. 
Take care you do not fall, prenez garde de tomber, and not de ne toniber. 
They came to see us two days before they went away, ils vinrent nous 
voir deux jours avant de partir, and not arant de ne partir. She 
would not walk for fear of dirtying her shoes, elle ne voulait pas marcher 
de crainte de salir ses souliers, and not de crainte de ne salir. 

ESSAY XXJII. 

He flatters himself more than he (should), and he praises others less than 
se flatter devrait louer autre 

they deserve. — My sister writes much better than she speaks. — Miss D*** is 

in trite r icrire 

(quite another person) (to what) she was when she left us. 

tout autre qu^ imp. quand pret. def. quitter 

They speak otherwise than they think. — JMrs. L* * * is not better than she 

autrenient penser 



210 OF INTERROGATIONS. 

was yesterday, and I believe her health will never improve, unless 
imp. hier croire que sante se retablii^ 

she goes into the country. — It (is) better to* delay a little, than 
sub. pr. a campagne vaut difftrer 

to prosecute them now. We are more numerous than when we were 

Je poursuivre a pi^esent nombreux imp. 

in France. — Unless you punish him severely, he will not study. 

en sub. pr. punir stverement etudier 

Stop a moment, for fear my father should come and 

Attendre de crainte que sub. pr. venir qu'ilsub,pr. 

see you. — I will never forgive you, unless you ask his pardon.— 

voir pardonner sub. pr. '^demander ^lui 

They will not set out before you are returned. — Wait till the rain 

partir que sub. pr. etre de retour Attendi'e sub. pr. 

is over. — He wrote to me two months before he went out to the 

sub. imp. partir pour 
Indies. — She (was so afraid) I should tell you of* it, that she 

avait si grand' peur que sub. imp. ^dire ^ Ve 

made me promise never to* mention her name in your presence. — 
pret. def. faire prometlre de prononcer en presence 

Mr. S** (is very late) this evening; I am afraid some misfortune has 

tarde bien soir craindre qu'il ^qtielque ^malheur ''^soit 

happened (to him). — Miss T * * is gone to* see her cousin ; but the weather 

^arriver ^/ui 
is so bad that we are apprehensive she will not return 

mauvais craindre qu'' sub. pr. revenir 

(to-night). — They (are not at all afraid) he will scold them. — They 

ce soir ne craignent pas du toid qii' sub. pr. grander 

tremble lest he should meet them. — I am not afraid to speak to him; 

qu' sub.pr. rencontrer de 

but I tremble to (address) his wife. 1 (am going out) for* a mo- 

d' adresser la parole a vais sortir 

ment, take care the child does not fall. 1 doubt whether he 

sub. pr. iomber douter qu' sub. pret. 

has mentioned it (to her). — Take care you* do* not* fall. — He will not do 
^ ^purler hn ^lui de faire 

it for fear of displeasing you. 
de dtplaire 



LESSON XXIV. 

2. Of Interrogations. 

Of the different modes of interrogation in which the nominative of 
the verb, if a pronoun, is placed after the verb. 

Rule 1. When the nominative of a verb, employed interrogatively, 
is one of the pronouns je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, lis, elles, ce, or on; 
it is placed after the verb in a simple tense, and after the auxiliary 
in a compound one, with a hyphen (-) between the verb or the auxihary 
and the pronoun. The words does, do or did, w^hich are used in 



OF INTERROGATIONS. 211 

interrogative sentences in English, are left out in French, except didy 
which, when being employed in the sense of has or have, is expressed 
by the corresponding person either singular or plural of the present of 
tire indicative of the verb avoir, and the following verb is put in the 
past participle : as, — do you call ? appelez-vous ? shall I go with you ? 
irai-je avec vous ? how much did it cost you? comhien vous a-t-elle* 
coute ? speaking of a watch. 

But if the nominative of the verb be a substantive, or one of the pro- 
nouns quelqu^un, le mien, le tien, le sien, le noire, le voire, le leur, 
la leur, les leurs, celui-ci, celui-la, &c. instead of being one of the 
personal pronouns, as above, the sentence should then be construed by 
beginning with the substantive or pronoun, placing next the verb, and 
using immediately after it, in a simple tense, and after the auxiliary in 
a compound one, one of the personal pronouns il, elle, ils or elles, 
according to the gender and number of the substantive or pronoun going 
before: as, — is breakfast ready ? le dejeuner est\\ prei? has any body 
told you so ? quelqu^uji vous a-t-il dii cela ? was the battle lost ? la 
haiaille fui-tWe perdue ? as if it were in English — ike breakfast is it 
ready? any body you has he told that 1 the battle ivas it lost? 

Should the sentence begin by one of the pronouns — qui, who ? que, 
what ? de qui, of or from whom ? a qui, to whom ? de quoi, of what ? 
a quoi, to what? or by one of the adverbs of interrogation — oil, where? 
d^oii, whence? par ou, through what place ? comment, how? combien, 
how much, how many ? the pronouns il, elle, ils or elles, are then 
usually omitted, if the verb has no direct object depending on it, 
and the nominative of the verb is placed after the verb in a simple 
tense, and after the participle in a compound one ; but if the verb 



* Observe. — 1. When a verb is used interrogatively^ and ends with a vowel iu 
the third person singular of any of its tenses, a /, with a hyphen on each side of it, 
is put between the verb and the pronouns //, e/(e and on, to avoid the harsh sound 
which would result from the meeting of the two vowels : as, — pai^le-i-il ? does he 
speak? da)ise-i-e/fe bienf does she dance well? viendra-i-on? will they come ? &c. 
and not parle-il 9 danse-elfe bien 9 viendra-on ? 

2. An acute accent ( ' ) is required over the last e, in the first person singular of 
the present of the indicative, in all verbs which, being terminated with an e mute 
in that person, are used interrogatively; because the e has then an acute sound: 
as, — do I speak? parle^e? dolsnff'er? souffrp-je? and not — parle-je? souffre-je9 

3. An acute accent is also required over the final e of the first person singular of 
the present and imperfect of the subjunctive, in a few verbs which, having their 
nominative placed after them to express a kind of msh or acclamation, are termi- 
nated with an e mute in the first person singular of these tenses : as, — may I ! 
puisst-je ! were I ! dussc-je! &c. 

4. When the first person singular of the present of the indicative of a verb has 
only one syllable, the expression est-ce que is sometimes used before the verb to 
express an interrogation, instead of placing the pronoun after it ; this is done, in 
some instances, to avoid the harsh sound which would otherwise be produced from 
the pronoun being placed after the verb : as, — do I sleep ? est-ce queje dors ? and 
not dors-je ? do I lose P est-ce que je perds ? and not pe7'ds-je ? 



212 OF INTERROGATIONS. 

should have a direct object dependmg on it, one of the pronouns il, elle. 
Us or elles^ must be employed and placed as in the preceding obser- 
•vation : as, — who is that young lady ? qui est cette demoiselle 1 what 
were these ladies telling you ? que^ vous disaient ces dames ? where is 
your son gone ? ou est alle voire Jils ? &c. In these sentences, the pro- 
nouns il, elle^ and elles^ are left out, because the verbs have no direct object 
depending on them ; but in the following or any similar sentence one 
of the pronouns — z7, elle, ils or elles^ must be used : as, — how did the 
young lady find her way home last night? comment mademoiselle 
trouva-t-d\Q son chemin hier au soir ? because the verb trouver has a 
direct object, which is chemin. 

* Note. — In the example que vom disaient ces dames? que is the direct object of 
the verb disaient ; and it will form an exception to the rule whenever so emplu3ed. 

2. The interrogative expressions — is this or that ? — is not this or 
that ? — are these or those ? — are not these or those ? &c. are expressed 
in French thus : 1. is this or that, by — est-ce Id? 2. is not this or 
that, by — ii* est-ce pas Id ? 3. are these or those, by — sont-ce Id 1 4. 
are not these or those, by — ne sont-ce pas Id ? &c. according to the 
tense in which the verb to be is in English, and as it is in the singular 
or plural. The answer to these questions is made by the different tenses 
of the verb etre, thus : — ce Pest ou ce les sont ; ce ne Pest pas ou ce 
ne les sont pas, &c. : as, — is this your carriage? est-ce Idvotre voiture 1 
yes, it is; oui, ce Pest. Is not that your hat? n''est-ce pas Id votre 
chapeau ? no, it is not : non, ce ne Pest pas. Are these your children ? 
sont-ce Id vos enfans ? yes, they are ; oui, ce les sont. Was this your 
horse? etait-ce Id votre cheval? yes, it was; oui, ce Petait. 

The following kind of interrogation, in which the first part of the 
sentence is affirmative and the second interrogative with a negation, 
implying a wish that the thing mentioned may take place, or a certainty 
that it has taken place : as, — you ivill come, ivill you not? you have 
written to him, hare you not ? is expressed in French uy translating 
the first part of the sentence literally, and using n"* est-ce pas ? for the 
second part, whatever may be the expression or tense of the verb in 
English : as, — you will come, will you not ? vous viendrez, n^est-ce 
pas ? you have written to him, have you not ? vous lui avez ecrit, n''est- 
ce pas? &c. as if it were in English — you ivill come, is it not? you to 
him have xvritten, is it not ? 

But the next mode of interrogation in which we feel a kind of sur- 
prise at the thing mentioned taking or having taken place, the first part 
of the sentence being usually negative, and the second interrogative 
without negation : as, — it does not rain, does it ? — your father is not 
dead, is he ? is expressed in French by using — 1. est-ce que, in the 
beginning of the sentence. 2. the nominative of the verb. 3. the verb ; 
leaving out the negative used in the first part of the sentence in Eng- 
lish, as likewise does it? did it ? or ivill it ? &c. which forms the second 



OF INTERROGATIONS. 213 

part of the sentence : as, — it does not rain, does it ? est-ce qu^il pleut ? 
your father is not dead, is he ? est-ce que voire fere est mort ? as if it 
Avere in Enghsh — is it that it rains? is it that ij our father is dead? 

When we feel surprised at any thing not taking place, est-ce que is 
also sometimes used to ask a question, whatever may be tlie mode of 
interrogation in English : as, — don't you go there sometimes ? est-ce 
que vous n^y alia;: pas quelquefois ? 

ESSAY XXIV. 

Shall we go out to-day? Will you come and* drink tea with us? — Does 

sortir aujourdlmi Vouloir vfnir prendre chez 

any hody call me ? — Do I love her more tenderly than I (should) ? — May I 

071 appeler aimer tendrement ne ie devrais 

live to see those happy days ! — (Were it even at the expense of) my life, I 
vivre pour voir dusse-je y perdre ia 

swear I will deliver her from the slavery to which she is reduced ! — Do I 
jnrer que delivrer esclavage rtduirc. 

sleep at church ? — Do I sell impious books ? — Did Mr. T* * play 

dormir tglise vendre impie pret. de/.jouer 

last night ? Yes ; he performed the part of Henry the Fourth. — Did 

hier au soir pret. def. remplir role 

any body toll you so ? — Is the company arrived ? — At what o'clock 

quelqu^un pret. indef. dire cela compagnie arriver heiire 

will dinner be ready ? — Did not the servant tell you that he is not 

diner pret scrvante pret. indef. dire 

awake ? ^'Vhy has not Mr. T""' * accepted the two bills which I 

eveille Poiirqvoi accepter effet ai 

(brought) this morning? — Is Mr. P** (in the) counting-house? — Was the girl 
apportvs matin an bureau jille 

going to market, when I met her yesterday ? — Is Mrs. C* * 

imp. alter marche pret. def. rencontrer hier 

(at home) ? Yes, sir, she is (dressing). — Is not the (music-master) here? No; 
chez elle a ii'habiller maitre de musique ici 

he (is just gx3ne out). — What were* those ladies telling you? — How much 
vient de sortir imp. dire Combien 

did* that coat cost you ? — How many sisters has Mr. N**? 

habit pret. indef couter 
Plow is Mr. Z"-'"" ? — Will not Miss S** come this evening? — Where 

Comment se porter venir soir 

is Miss gone ? (Which way) did the lady go ? — In what 

Mademoiselle aller Par oil pret. indef Dans 

year was Lewis the Sixteenth crowned ? (How long) did he 

annee pret. def Louis couro?iner Combien de temps 

reign? — How did* your sister find her way home* 

pret. def. rcgner pret. def. troiwer chemin 

last night ? Why did * she not wait for me ? — Is this your hat ? 

hier tut soir Poiirquoi pret. def attendre chapeau 

Yes, it is ; give it me. — Is not that your carriage ? — No, it is not. — Was 
donner voiture imp. 



214 OF ADVERBS. 

that your house ? Yes, it was. — Are these your horses ? No, they are not. 

maison imp, cheval 

— You speak French, don't you ? — They live in the country, do they not P — 

demeurer a campagne 

He was a* coal merchant, was he not? — They will come, will they 

imp, "^de '^charbon ^marchand venir 

not ? — It does not rain, does it ? — She is not dead, is she ? — Do you not go 

pleuvoir mort 

sometimes to the opera ? No, never. 



LESSON XXV. 

Of Adverbs. 

Adverbs are words which we use with verbs, adjectives, and some- 
times with other adverbs, to express some quality or circumstance re- 
specting them : as, — he reads well, il lit hien. A truly good man, un 
treS'hon homme. She writes very correctly, elle ecrit tres-correcte- 
7nent. 

Adverbs may be divided into simple and compound. 

A simple adverb consists of a single word : as, — toujours, always ; 
jamaisy never. Compound adverbs, on the contrary, are formed of two 
or more words : as, — d la Franpaise, after the French way ; a PAnglaise, 
after the English manner. 

Many adverbs are formed from adjectives by the simple addition of 
ment to the termination of those which end with a vowel : as, — sage, 
sagement; poli,poliment ; whereas ment is added to the feminine termi- 
nation of those which end with a consonant : as, — grand, (m.) grande, 
(f.) grandement, (adv.) If the adjective be terminated with nt, as, 
prudent, the final letters {nt) must be changed into m, before the 
adverbial termination ment be added to it : as, — prudent, prudem, pru- 
demment. 

Place of Adverbs in the Sentence. 

Adverbs are usually placed after the verb in a simple tense, and be- 
tween the auxiliary and the participle in a compound one, except 
au^ourd^hui, to day; hier, yesterday; demain, to-morrow; and the 
adverbs composed of several words, as also the simple adverbs that 
either have or can have an object depending on them, which are put 
after the participle : as, — elle rit toujours, she always laughs. Je lui 
ai souvent parle, I have often spoken to him. Je Pai vu hier, I saw 
him yesterday. II sera elu aujourd'hui, he will be elected to-day. 
Nous y avons d^nh a la Franpaise, we have dined there in the French 
style, &c. 



OF ADVERBS. 215 

Adverbs may also be placed before the verb in French, and they are 
frequently used at the beginning of a sentence or of a part of it, but 
never between the verb and its nominative, as it is often the case in Eng- 
lish : as, — HiER, je dejeimai chez M. C* *, et, aujourd'hui, je clmerai 
chez Mademoiselle T* *; I breakfasted yesterday at Mr. C's^ and I 
shall dine to-day at Miss T.'s. 

The adverbs bien, well ; mal, badly ; micux, better ; usually precede 
the verb in the present of the infinitive mood, but in the other moods 
and tenses they are placed after it in a simple tense, and between the 
auxiliary and the participle in a compound one : as, — to behave well, 
se bien conduire. She did right, ell e jit hien. You have done wrong, 
vous avez mal fait. 

Observe. — Often enough is construed into French by assez souvent, and not souvent 
asseZi because assez must precede soi/vent in French. Too mitch, too many, by beau- 
coup trop, and not trap beaucoup. Very much by beau coup, and never by ires-beau- 
coup. So much, so many, by tant, and not by si beaucoup. As much, as many, by 
atdatit. 

When bien comes in French before another adverb, it means ve?^, t)nich quite : 
as, — bien, tres ou fort tard, very late. Bien ou beaucoup moins, much less. Bien 
assez, quite enough. But when bien follows another adverb, it signifies we/l : assez 
bien, pretty well. Pas si bien ou moins bien, not so well. TV-es ou fort bien, very well. 
Aussi bien, as well. Si bien, so well. 

Rather so is construed into French by nn pen. 

There are some adjectives which become adverbs when they are used with a verb 
to express some circumstance respecting it: as, — she sings right, elle chante juste; 
he sang wrong all the evening, il chantafaux toute la soiree ; that smells badly, cela 
sent mauvais. 

ESSAY XXV. 

We seldom repent of talkingf little, but frequently of talking too much. 
On rarement se repentir purler peu souvent trop 

— Never do to others what you (would not like them to do unto you). I have 

faire a autrui ce que 7ie voudriez pas qu'on vousfit 

always advised my children to behave well, and never to wrong 

conseiller a de se conduire de faire tort a 

(any body). — Courtiers often pass all their life in the hope of attaining 
personne Courtisan passer espoir pai^enir a des 

honours which they never obtain. — Your letter is very badly written ; I 

obtenir tcrire 

am afraid you have written it hastily. — He does very wrong in 

craindre que sub. pret. a la hate faire mal de 

allowing his daughters to frequent the theatres so often. — If you do not 
permettre a fille de frequenter spectacle 

shun gambling, you will insensibly get a taste (for it). — Perform 

eviter jeu ^ '^insensiblement ^acquerir Vc ^gout ^en RempUr 

f For the future, the verbs which the pupil will find in the present participle in 
English, must, when depending on the preposition de or a, be put in the present of 
the infinitive in French. 



216 OF PREPOSITIONS. 

your duty well, and you will merit his esteem. — I do not think she 

devoir meritei- estinie crvire qu' sub. 

did right in sending her son to Paris to learn mathematics. 

•pret. fdire bien (T pour apprendre mathcmatiques f. pi. 

French is * much better taught in France than in England. — Interpret 
^On^ ^ * "■'■enseigner ^en Interpreter 

favourably the actions of (others,) and do not think ill of your (neighbours). 

autrui penser prochain m. sing. 

If she had acted conformably to the rules of honour and justice, nobody would 

agir confoiinhnent regie personne 

have spoken ill of her. — We breakfasted yesterday (in the French style); 

pret. def. dejeuner a la Fran<^aise 

and, to-da)-, we shall dine (after the English manner). — (What is done) with 

diner aPAnglaise Ce qui se fait 

cheerfulness is generally well done. — H* comes often enough. — They have 

plaisir ordinairement venir 

(too great a) confidence in him ; they will certainly repent it.— 

beaucoup trop de conjiance en certainement se repentir en 

(That is) quite enough, I thank you. — She is as well (at your house) as 
En voila bien r enter cier chez vous qu' 

here. — ^These flowers do not smell so badly as those. — How incorrectly she 
ci sentir mauvais Qu' faux 

sang all the evening ! — You take (a great deal) too much physic, 
pret. def. chanter soiree beaucoup de medecine 

it will ruin your constitution. — If she wishes to get better, (she must) 
cela detriiire desirer de se retablir il faut qu'elle 

drink much less wine. 
sub. pr. boire de 



LESSON XXVI. , 

Of Prepositions. 

Prepositions are words which we use to connect other words with one 
another, and to show their relation to each other : as, — il passa de 
France en Angleterre, he went from France to England. 

Manner of expressing in French the prepositions from, to, about, 
over, on, in, upon, against, after, by, ivith, according to, for, &c. 

1. From and to. When these prepositions are used to denote the 
distance or the going from one place to another, they are rendered into 
French, thus — from, by de ; and to, if before the name of a town, village, 
or place, by d; but to is construed by e7i, if it occurs before the name of 
a country or kingdom : as, — from London to Brighton, de Londres a 
Brighton. He went from England to France and from France into 
Italy, il alia d^ Angleterre en France et de France en Italie. 

If the substantive which is used after from should be repeated after 
to — to should then be expressed by en, as before the names of countries : 



OF PREPOSITIONS. 217 

as, — she is always going from shop to shop, elle va toujours de bou- 
tique en boutique. 

When from and to are used to express a duration of time, as in this 
sentence — from 7iiorning to night, from is expressed by depuis, and to 
hy jus qu\ with a, or au, a la, a l\ or aux, according as the preposition 
or article is required : as, — from morning to night, depuis le matin 
j'usqu'au soir. 

From, coming after a verb denoting that we either come, return, w^ere 
returning, or wdll return, from the house of somebody, is construed into 
French by de chez, before the name of the person or persons mentioned : 
as, — I come or return from Mr. B.'s, je viens ou reviens de chez 
M. B* * ; — we were returning from Messrs. L.'s house, notis revenions 
de chez MM. L * *. 

To or at, employed after a verb denoting equally that we either go, 
have been, or will go to the house of somebody, is expressed in French 
by cJiez, before the name of the person alluded to : as, — I am going to 
your \\ou^t,jc vais chez vous ; hew^as going to Mrs. S.'s, il allait chez 
Madame S**. 

Chez can only be used before the names of persons and never before those of 
places. "We cannot saj', — en revenant de chez Pall-MaU, j'ai tte chez la maimn de 
Somerset, in returning- from Pail-Mall, I have been to Somerset-House ; but — 
en revenant de Pall- Ma//, fat ete a la maison de Somerset; because P«//-M/// and 
Someiset- House are two places which require the prepositions de and a. 

Tof employed in the sense of so far as or to the, is expressed in 
French hy jusqu\ with a, or au, a la, a /', or aux, according as the pre- 
position or article is required : as, — 1 will prosecute him to the end, j'e 
le poursuivrai jusqu^au bout. 

2. About. — When this preposition is used to denote the different 
parts of a day or year, the date of a month, or any time in general, it is 
expressed in French by vers, with the definite article le, la, or les, before 
the succeeding word. It is also sometimes construed by sur, before the 
different hours of a day, and in this sense the definite article les is used 
before the hour mentioned : as, — it was about the evening, c'etait vers 
le soir ; it will be about six o'clock, ce sera vers ou sur les six heures ; 
he will come about July, il viendravers le mois de Juillet ; about the 
tenth, vers le dix ; I went there about one o'clock, fy allai sur les 
une heure, although une is singular. 

About, denoting an approximate number or quantity of a thing, or 
preceding a noun which expresses the depth, height, dimension, weight, 
or measure of any thing, is expressed in French by environ, a peu pres, 
or pres de, according to the import of the sentence : as, — there w^ere 
about two hundred people, il y avail environ deux cents personnes ; 
this tree is about twenty-four feet high, cet arbre a pres de vingt-quatre 
pied s de hauteur ; there w^ere about ten bushels of wheat, // y avait 
environ ou a peu pres dix boisseaux de froment. 

L 



218 OF PREPOSITIONS. 

When about is used before a personal pronoun, after a tense of the 
verb to have, it is expressed in French by sur : as, — I have no money 
about me, je n^ai point d^ argent sur mot. 

3. In, en and daiis. — These prepositions are used in so many different 
* significations, that it is almost impossible to give rules for the cases in 

which en or dans is requisite. 

En is, however, used to express the length of time spent in doing a 
thing, whereas dans denotes that after such a time is elapsed, such or 
such a thing will take place : as, — they now go in two hours from Paris 
to Versailles, on va a present en deux heures de Paris a Versailles ; 
in this sentence, en conveys the meaning that two hours are spent in 
going from Paris to Versailles ; but in the next — I shall set out in two 
hours for Versailles, je partirai dans deux heures pour Versailles ; 
dans implies that, when tw o hours are elapsed, I shall set out. 

En cannot be followed by the definite article /e, la, or les, except in 
a few cases in which it admits of la or V : as, — en Vabsence d^un tel, 
in the absence of such a one; en Vltat oii je suis reduit, in the state 
to which I am reduced ; en la presence de Dieu, in the presence of 
God ; en Vhonneur de Madame une telle, in honour of Madame such 
a one ; but dans may be accompanied by le, la, or les : as, — dans 
Vhiver, in winter ; dans le printemps, in the spring ; dans Vete, in the 
summer ; dans Vautomne, in the autumn, &c. and not en Vhiver ; en 
le printemps, &c. 

4. On and upon. — When these prepositions are used before the 
name of a person on whom we either have called or intend to call, they 
are expressed in French by chez, and the verb to call or to wait is con- 
strued into French by passer : as, — J. shall call upon yo\i,j6 passerai 
chez vous ; she called on me yesterday, elle passa hier chez inoi. 

On or upon, being used after any tense of the verb to play, before the 
name of an instrument on which somebody plays, is expressed in Fiench 
by de, or by the article du, de la, de I', or des, according as the pre- 
position or article is required : as, — he plays beautifully on the violin, 
il joue admirablement du violon. 

On or upon, employed before a word that denotes opportunity, occa- 
sion, or any time in general ; or, also, before the words right, left, horse- 
back, and /bo/, is expressed in French by a, or au, a la, a /', or aux, 
' according as the preposition or article is required : as, — upon the first 
opportunity, d la premiere occasion ; I met him on his arrival, je le 
rencontrai a son arrivee ; you will turn on the right, vous tournerez 
a droite ; it is on your left from here, c''est a gauche dHci ; I shall go 
there on horseback, j'irai a cheval ; she will go on foot, elle ira d 
pied ; on the news of his arrival, a la nouvelle de son arrivee. 

5. Over. — When this preposition is employed to express that a thing 
is done or past, it is expressed in French by passe, fini, or fait : as, — 
now the danger is over, we. . .maintenant que le danger est passe, 
nous. , .my work will soon be over, mon ouvrage sera bientStfini. 



OF PREPOSITIONS. 219 

Over, in the sense of through, is also construed into French by par : 
as, — he has travelled all over Italy, il a voyage par toute Pltalie. It 
is likewise sometimes expressed by de P autre cote de : as, — over the 
way, de Pautre cote du chemin. 

6. Against, after, and on. — These prepositions are frequently ex- 
pressed in French by a : as, — against to-morrow, d demain ; against 
onr return, a notre retour ; I will sing after my own way,je chanterai 
a ma maniere ; she dresses after the English way, elle s^hahille a 
VAnglaise. 

7. By and with are sometimes expressed by a : as, — cloth with three 
threads, de ritoffe a trois Jils ; do you sell these grapes by the pound? 
vendez-vous ce raisin a la livre ? this castle is built with lime and 
cement, ce chateau est bdii a chaux et a ciment. 

8. According to, as, for, and several others, are also sometimes ex- 
pressed by a : as, — this hat is not according to her taste, ce chapeau 
n'est pas a son gout ; I take you as or for a witness, je vous prends a 
temoin ; to fight with swords, se hattre a Vepke. 

The above prepositions have several other significations, which can 
only be learnt by practice. They are frequently used after a verb in 
English to form a part of its signification : as, to read over, parcourir ; 
to give over, abandonner ; I have my shoes on, je suis chausse ; put 
your hat on, couvrez-vous ; go on, avancez. 

Of the Place and Repetition of Prepositions. 

General Rule. — Prepositions are placed in French before the words 
which they govern, and never after them, as is frequently the case in 
English : as, — whom do you complain of? de qui vous plaignez-vous ? 
and not — qui vous plaignez-vous de ? What are you speaking about? 
de quoi parlez-vous ? and not quoi parlez-vous de ? as if it were in 
English : ofiohom complain you ? about ivhat speak you ? 

The prepositions a, de, and en, are generally repeated in French be- 
fore every noun, pronoun, or verb in the present of the infinitive mood, 
which they govern, whether they are or are not repeated in English : 
as," — the same prejudices are found in Europe, Asia, Africa, and even 
in America, on trouve les memes prejuges en Europe, en Asie, en 
Afrique, et jusqu'en Amerique. You will receive a letter either from 
him or from me, vous recevrez une lettre de lui ou de moi. 

All other prepositions, and particularly those which have two or three 
syllables, are repeated in French, when the substantives which they 
govern either have different significations or stand in opposition to each 
other ; but never, or very seldom, when the substantives are nearly sy- 
nonymous : as, — your book is in this room or in the other, voire livre 
est dans cette chambre ou dans I'autre. In this example, dans is re- 
peated, because there is a marked opposition between the two rooms; 
but in the next — passer sa vie dans la mollesse et Voisivete, to pass 

l2 



220 OF PREPOSITIONS. 

one's life in effeminacy and idleness ; dans is not repeated, because the 
substantives mollesse and oisivete are nearly synonymous. 

ESSAY XXVI. 

Tliey now go in two days from London to Paris, and in two hours 

On a present aHer Lojidres 

from Paris to St, Cloud. — We went from Switzerland to Italy, and from 

prel. clef. Suisse 

Italy to Turkey. — You really pass all your time in going from shop to 

Turquie reeUement passer a boidiqite 

shop, from street to street, and from place to place. — (Is it) far from here to 

rue Y a-t-il loin ici 

the (Regent's Park) ? — He made me wait from eight o'clock (in the) 

Fa?-c du Regent pret. def. faire attendre du 

morning till four in the afternoon ; and after all I could not speak to 

matin de aprts-midi api'is tout pret. def. poin'oir 

him. — We returned yesterday from Mrs. L* * *'s, in four hours. — When 

pret. def revenir hier 
are you going to Lady D.'s ? — (As I was going) this morning to the king's palace, 

En aUant 

I (met) Lord S '•' '•' '•', who was coming Lack from the Tower with his 

ai rencontre — — — imp. revenir Tour 

lady and children. — We go out (every day), from seven (in the) morning till 
dame sortir tous /es jours du 

nine, and we study from ten till one, and sometimes till two. That 

etudier quelquefois 

unfortunate accident happened to me about the evening. — I will call 

Tualheureux pret. def. arriver soir passer 

about one o'clock to arrange that little business. — We expect our ships 

pour arranger affaire attendre bdtiment 

from the West Indies, about the middle of August. — She will write to 

Occidental Indes, f pi. trdlieu Aoxit tcrire 

you about the twelfth. — At what o'clock did you call on me yesterday ? 

pret. def. ^ ^ ^ 

— I was (at your house) about ten or eleven o'clock. — There were about 

imp. chez vous les ^ imp. * 

three hundred and sixty people this afternoon, in a room of about fifty 
•^ ^ "' ^personne ^ ^apy^es-midi sulle environ 

feet long and thirty-five wide. — (There will be) about twenty bushels of 

longueur sur largeur 11 y aura boisseau 

wheat. — I have no money about me. — In three or four days, I will see Mr. L "' * 
fromerd voir 

about that affair. — In two hours, the prince will set off" for Richmond. — 
touchant partir 

— (How long) Avill he be going there ? — About one hour and a half. — I 
Combien de temps a. ^y * 

went there, the other day, in one hour and* twenty minutes. In 

pret. def. « V ^ ^ ^ 

autumn and winter, I sleep in town ; Init in the spring and summer; I reside 
coucher a la dans rtsider 



OF PREPOSITIONS. 221 

in the country. — We never go out in the absence of our father. — ^We have drawn 

a sorlir iirer 

upon yovi at three months' sight ; and we flatter ourselves that you will honour 

de vue se flatter faire honneur 

our demand. — You will he delighted to hear her play on the harp. — Tell 

a demande rati de entendre jotter Dire 

them that they will hear (from me)^ on the first opportunity. — Which is 

recevoir de mes nouvelles occasion 

the way to go to the Opera.? — Take the first street on the right, then the 

'poitr Opera Prendre puis 

second on the left, and you will see the (Opera-house) before you. — On the 

voir Opera devant 

news of her arrival, we set out on horseback for London. — We 

arrivee pret. def. partir a cheval pret. def. 

-met them going on foot to the fair. — Put on your boots or shoes. — 

qui alfaient pied foire Met'.re vos 

Go on. — She has travelled all over Africa and America. — Have patience, the 

Avancer voyager 

operation will soon be over. — Although the physicians have given her 

bientot Quoique medecin sub. pret. abandonner 

over, I hope she will recover. — I (shall be very happy) to render you that 

esperer se rttablir me ferai un plaistr de 

service, upon my return from the continent. — Every one acts after his own * 
retour Chacun aijir 

way, and according to " his (taste.) My daughter likes to dress 

manitre suivant ffonis pi. aimer a s'habilkr 

(after the French fashion), and I like to dress (after the English style). — 

« la Francaise ?noi ci PAnglaise 

Have you any stockings with three threads ? — Don't you sell (these grapes) by 

has ce raisin 

the pound? — The walls of this ancient castle are built Avith lime and cement. 

mur chateau bulir 

— I take you as a witness that we shall fight with swords. — That is not quite 

se battre tpee Cela toitt-ii-fait 

after my taste. — Their house is situated in a delightful spot, which presents 
a situcr charinant lieu 

at once a fine view of the sea, of the town, and of the country. That 

a lafois vue 

young lady is uncommonly clever: she teaches drawing, singing, and 
demoiselle extraordinairemeitt habile enfieigne a dessiner chanter 

dancing. — You will see the same thing in (every country): in France, England, 
danser voir dans tous les pays en 

Italy, and Spain. — I left my gloves, yesterday morning, on my bed 

^pret. def. ^laisser ^ ^gant ^ ^ sur lit 

or on yours. — Tliey pass all their time in softness and idleness in the country; 
* ^passer 6 7 8 9 io^^q//^^^^ u i'^oisivete ^a ^ ^ 

but in town they are engaged with their French, Italian, and music. 1 

a la occupe a lialien ^ 

went last j^ear to Poland, Germany, Sweden, and Russia. I think 
pret. def. * ^ ^annee Pologne Allemagne Suede Russie ^ 



222 OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

this summer I shall visit England, Scotland, and Ireland. In our 

^ ^ ^que ^ ^aller ^en Ecosse Irtande Dans 

tour through Italy, we went to Florence, Venice, and Rome; and 

voyage en prei. def. Fenise 

we returned to London by Geneva and Dover. — Are you not indebted 

pret. def. retonrner Gentve par Douvres redevahle 

for your life to the cares of every kind, which she took of you during 

de la aux soin tout espece pret. indef. rendre pendant 

your illness in America ? How could you, without fear and shame, 

maladie en Comment imp. ponvoir crainte ptideur 

(hold such language) ? 
tenir de tels propos 



LESSON XXVII. 

Of Conjunctions and Interjections. 

1. OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

Conjunctions are words which we use to connect sentences together 
and sometimes only words : as, — vous et moi^ you and I. 

The principal conjunctions in French are : — et^ mais, si, ou, qfin que, 
car, aussi, ni, or, done, que, parce que, quoique, soit que, four que, 
poui'vu que, aussitot que, quand, puisque, lorsque, de peur que, de 
crainte que, a moins que, avant que, depuis que, jusqu^d ce que, 
cependant, c^est pourquoi, comme. 

The conjunction ni, (neither and nor,) must be repeated in French 
before every word which it modifies, whether its equivalent in English 
be repeated or not. No article is used in French before the word which 
follows ni : as, — he has neither gold nor silver, il n'a ni or ni argent. 
Religion is neither austere, terrible, nor cruel, la religion n^est ni 
farouche, ni affreuse, ni cruelle. 

Que is employed in French between two verbs : 1 . In the sense of 
that, either expressed or understood in English : as, — I know she will 
come, je sais qu'^elle viendra. 

' 2. Que is likewise used in the middle of a sentence for a great many 
other conjunctions, and particularly for the following : — si, if; quoique, 
though, although ; afin que, in order that ; quand, lorsque, when ; 
comme, as i puisque, since ; a moins que, unless ; avant que, before ; 
cependant, yet ; de peur que, lest ; de crainte que, for fear ; depuis 
que, since ; and jusqu'a. ce que, till or until. The verb which follows 
que is put in the indicative or subjunctive in French, according as the 
conjunction represented by que requires it : as, — if I have not saluted 
you, it is because I did not know you, si je ne vous ai pas salue, c^est 
que je ne vous connaissais pas ; for c'est parce que je ne vous con- 
naissais pas. We shall not set out before it is light, nous ne partirons 
pas, qu'iV ne soit jour; for avant quHl ne soit jour. Wait till he is 
arrived, attendez qu'z/ soit arrive ; for jusqu'd ce qu^il soit arrive. 



OF CONJUNCTIONS. 223 

Come, that 1 may speak to you, approchez, que j> vous parle ; for afin 

que je vous parte, &c. 

3. Que is also employed in the second part of a sentence, to avoid the 
repetition of the conjunction occurring in the first part, and the suc- 
ceeding verb is put in the indicative or subjunctive, according as the 
conjunction used in the first part of the sentence requires it. In this 
case, the second part of the sentence generally begins by and in Eng- 
lish, and the conjunction is understood: as, — if you love her, and you 
wish to persuade her of it, si vous Paimez, et que* vous vouliez le lui 
persuader ; instead of — et si vous voulez le lui persuader. Since he 
was your friend, and you were so much indebted to him, jjuisqu^il etait 
voire ami, et que vous lui etiez si redecable ; for — et puisque vous lui 
etiez si redevable, &c. 

4. Que is also used for when, but, or tha?i, in the second part of a 
sentence, when the words hardly, scarcely, sooner, or no sooner, are 
employed in the first part : as, — he was scarcely arrived in France when 
he hastened to go to Paris ; or, — he had no sooner arrived in France, 
but, or than, he hastened to go to Paris ; il etait a peine arrive en 
France, qu'il se hata dialler a Paris. 

5. Que stands likewise for hoiv or how much, before an adjective or 
a verb, to express admiration, wonder, or surprise, but the adjective 
following how or Iww much is usually put after the verb in French : as, 
— how unfortunate I am ! que je suis malheureux ! \\q\\ he likes 
apples! qu'il aime les pommes ! 

When how much or hoio many occurs before a substantive in the 
beginning of a sentence, to denote admiration, wonder, or surprise, it is 
also expressed by que, with de before the substantive : as, — how many 
friends he has ! qu^ il a d^amis ! But when how much or how mariy 
either depends on a preposition or is used to ask a question : as,— /o 
how many misfortunes have I not been exposed! how many brothers 
has he ? it is expressed in French by combien de, and not by que : as, 
— to how many misfortunes have I not been exposed ! a combien de 
malheurs n^ai-je jjas He expose/ how many brothers has he? combien 
de freres a-t-il ? 

This sentence — may I die if I said so ! or any other of the same 
kind, beginning by may, or some similar expression, and denoting either 
a wish, command, imprecation, or indignation, is expressed in French 
by que, in the beginning of the sentence, with the following verb in the 
subjunctive mood : as^ — may I die if I said so ! que je meure si je 
I'ai ditf 

Observe. — 1. Tlie present of the indicative must be used in French, instead 
of the future or present of the subjunctive in English, as also the imperfect of 
the indicative, in place of the preterit or conditional in English, after si, (if,) mean- 

* The conjunction qite, used in the second part of a sentence to avoid the repetition 
of si employed in the first, governs the following verb in the subjunctive mood. 



224 



OF INTERJECTIONS. 



iiig suppost que: as, — we shall go into the country, if it be fine weather, nous irons a 
la campagne, s'il fait beau temps, and not s'il fera ou sHl fasse. I should go with you, 
if you would allow me, firais avec vous, si vous vouliez me le permeitre, and not si 
vous voudriez. But the future and conditional tenses must he employed in French 
as in English, after si, signifying whether, if a future action he implied : as, — I do 
not know if they will come to-morrow, ^e 7ie sais pas s^i^s viendront detnain, and not 
s'i/s viennent ; whereas the present of the indicative is requisite in hoth languages. 
if a present action be mentioned : as, — do you know if they are coming now ? savez- 
vous s^i^s viennent a present ? and not s'ils vieiidront. In either case, si is always pre- 
ceded by a verb implpng doubt or uncertainty. 

2. The future tense must be used in French, although the present of the indi- 
cative be tisually employed iti English, after the conjunctions: /orsque, quand, when; 
aussitot que, as soon as, and any other of the same kind, implying futurity: as, — I 
shall go when I huve finished my letter, firai quand j'auraij^wj two lettre, and not 
quand j'ai fini. Come as soon as you have done, venez aussitot que vous aurez Ji7ii, 
and not que vous axezjini; &c. 

2. OF INTERJECTIONS. 

Interjections, as the term implies, are words thrown in between the 
parts of a sentence, to express the sudden emotions or passions of the 
speaker. They are only single exclamations, but which frequently sup- 
ply the place of a whole sentence. 



They may be divided as follows : — 



1. For grief or affliction :- 



French. 
Ah! 
Helas! 
Aie! 
Ahi! 
He! 
Ouf! 

and desire : — 
Ah! 
Bon! 
Vive lajoie ! 



Ah! 
He! 



English. 
Ah! 
Alas! 
Ay! 
Oh! 

O ! O dear ! 
Pho! 

2. For joy 
Ah! 
Well! 
Huzza! 

3. For fear 
Ah! 
Oh! 

4. For aversion, contempt, and 
disgust : — 
Away ! Al/ez ! 

Fie! Fi! 

Fie upon ! Fi done ! 

5. For derision: — 
Oh ! Oh ! 

Pshaw ! He ! zest ! 

6. For admiration : — 
Oh ! Oh ! 

Hah ! Ha ! 

Oh! Hah! Eh! 

Observe. — Although 6on, vive 



7. For surprise : — 
Oh! Oh! 
Bless me ! Misericorde . 
Dear me ! O dear ! Bon dieu ! 
O heavens ! O ciel! 
Lack-a-day ! Ouais ! 

8. For encoiu-aging : — 
Come on ! AUons ! fa .' 
Cheer up ! Cottrage ! 
Holdfast! Tenezferme! 

9. To warn, and make people get out of 
the way : — 



ho fa, 



Clear the way 

Hem! 

Oh! 

Look, look ! 

Lo! 

Hark ! 



Gare! 
Hem! 
Oh! 
Voyez ! 
Tenez ! 
Ecoutez 



10. 



Hold! 
Soho! 



Hush! 
Hist! 

Hail! 



To call :— 

Hola! 
He! 

11. For silence: — 
Chut! 
St! 

12. For salutation :- 
Salut ! 



St! 



Paix . 



Welcome ! 
joie, allex. 



Soyez le bien venu ! 

misericorde^ hon Dieu, 



OF INTERJECTIONS. 225 

allons, courage, tenez ferme, voyez, tenez, ecoutez, salut, soyez le hien 
venu, O del, paix, tout beau, be not interjections of themselves, they 
become such when they are used to express sudden affections or emotions 
of the soul : so, also, ihe following words, and several others of the same 
kind, used in Moliere : — Morhleu! zounds! parhleu ! in good faith! 
diantre ! the deuce ! &c. 

The interjection O has not been specifically mentioned among the 
above, being seldom used but in conjunction with a substantive, to 
express certain passions or emotions of the soul : as, — O Steele ! temps I 

mosurs ! volupte supreme ! O monfils ! &c. 

ESSAY XXVII. 

They spared neither children, women, nor old men. She has 

pret. def. tpargntr ni vinllard 

neither honour nor decency. — Come here, that I may speak to you. — The 

dccence Fenir siib.pr. Aii 

moment we die, our fate is determined for ever. We shall not set out 

que inovrir sort dtterminer ioujours parti r 

hefore it is light. Wait till (the rain is over). A miser (might 

sub. pr. Aftendre il ne pie uve plus avare au- 

have) all the gold in the world, yet he would not be satisfied. — As you have 
rait or content 

had (so many) misfortunes, and you cannot pay your debts, you (ought) to* 
taut de malheur pouvoir payer dette devriez 

compound with your creditors. Since she has so many perfections, and you 

composer crtanciers Puisqu^ 

love her so tenderly, why don't you marry her ? Unless your 

tendrement pourquoi 6pouser a inoins que 

father pays me half of what he owes me, and gives me 

sub. pr. la moiiic ce qii"* devoir sub. pr. 

security for the remainder, I shall go to law with* him. Although 

caution reste poursuivre Quoiqu^ 

they possess great riches, and enjoy all ihe pleasures of life^ 

sub. pr. poss^der biens sub. pr. jouir de vie 

they are not happy. — I know she trembles for fear her master should send 

savoir trembler maitre sub. pr. renvoyer 

her away*. — The king had no sooner arrived, but he ordered (the 

imp. ctre pret. def. faire 

gardens fo be illuminated). — The ladies had scarcely alighted from their* 

illuminer lesjardins dame imp. etre descendre 

(carriages), when it began to rain. How unfortunate that man 

voiiure pret. def. commencer a pleuvoir malheureux 

is ! he never succeeds in any thing. — How much she resembles her mother ! 

rtussir aucuii ressembler d 

and how many graces she displays already! but of how much slander is 

chnrm.es dtployer dtjd mauvais propos 

she not the victim ! — To how many dangers am I not daily exposed ! — May 

danger journellement 

1 die, if I (ever mentioned it to him) ! W^e shall go to-morrow into the 

lai en ai jamais parlc a 

L 5 



226 OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 

country, if it be fine weather. 1 should take you with me, if you 

faire mener 

would ask her pardon They do not know if he will come. 

imp. voiiloir demander lui savoir venir 

Tell them, when you see them, that, as soon as I hear from 

^Dire ^ ^ ^ ^voir '* recevoir des nouvelles 

tlieir brother, I shall let them know it. Write to us as soon as you 

^ ^faire "^leur ^savoir Ve 

get there. 
%tre y 



LESSON XXVIII. 

Of the French Idioms. 

1. Cases in which the different tenses of the verb to be are expressed 
in French by those 0/ avoir» 

General Rule. — 1 . When the different tenses of the verb to be are 
used before the adjectives hungry, dry, thirsty, hot, warm, cold, 
ashamed, and afraid, — they are expressed in French by the corre- 
sponding ones of the verb avoir, and the adjectives hungry, dry, thirsty, 
hot, loarm, cold, ashamed, and afraid, are construed by the substan- 
tives faim, soif, chaud, froid, honte, and feur : as, — I am hungry, 
faifaim; he is thirsty, z7 a ^oz/; are you cold? avez-vous froid? no, 
I am very warm, non, fai bien chaud ; she was ashamed, elle avait 
honte; were you afraid? aviez-vous peur? as if it were in Enghsh — 
/ have hunger; he has thirst, &c. 

If we express that any particular part of the body is affected with 
cold or heat : as, — my hands are cold ; the verb avoir is then used in 
the same person in French as the possessive pronouns my, thy, his, her, 
its, our, your, and their, preceding the part of the body mentioned, are 
in, when construed by the corresponding personal pronouns /e, tu, il, 
elle, nous, vous, ils or elles, which must serve as nominatives to the 
verb avoir. The article au, aux, or a la, a V, is then requisite before 
the part of the body alluded to : as, — my hands are co\di, j^ at froid aux 
mains, &c. as if it were in English, / have cold to the hands. 

2. When they come before the expressions in the right and in the 
wrong, they are likewise expressed by the tenses of avoir, — and in the 
right is construed by the substantive raison, and in the wrong by tort : 
as, — he is in the right, il a raison; she is in the wrong, elle a tort. 

3. When a person's age is mentioned, the different tenses of the verb 
to he are also construed by those of avoir, and the substantive year, 
which is frequently understood in English, is always expressed by an or 
ans in French, whereas the adjective old, if used in English, is left out 
in French: as, — my sister is twenty, or twenty years old, ma soeur a vingt 
ans., and not — ma soeur est, &c. 



OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 227 

If the age of a person or of an animal be asked, the different tenses of the verb 
to be are still construed by those of avoir ; but old is expressed by age, and how by 
quel : as, — how old is your sister ? quel age a voire saeur ? 

4. When we speak of the dimensions of any thing, the different tenses 
of the verb to be are likewise expressed by those of avoir ; but de is 
put before the word which expresses either the length, height, depth, 
breadth, or any other dimension of the object alluded to : as, — this 
church is sixty feet high, cette eglise a soixante pieds de hauteur, and 
not est soixante pieds, &c. 

If the dimensions of any thing should be mentioned, without the verb 
to be, de should likewise be put in French before the noun of number 
which precedes the expressions of measure, — feet, inches, lines, &c. : 
as, — a well forty feet deep, un puits de quarante pieds de profondeur, 
and not un putts quarante pieds, &c. We have a table twenty feet 
three inches long, nous avons une table de vingt pieds* trois polices 
de longueur, and not une table vingt pieds, &c. 

The English adjectives of dimension may also be rendered into French by their 
corresponding adjectives, b\it the substantives are more elegantly used; and, in any 
case, deep must be construed by de frofondeur, and not by de profond : as, — a mine 
two hundred feet deep, une mine de deux cents pieds de profondeur, and not une mine 
deux cents pieds de profond, 

Observe. — The expression in vain for, preceded by a tense of the 
verb to be, having the pronoun it taken indeterminately for its nomina- 
tive or subject : as, — it is in vain for you to repeat it ; is usually 
expressed in French by the corresponding tense of the verb avoir, with 
the adjective beau, thus — avoir beau, which implies the verb to be and 
the expression in vain for ; the noun or pronoun which follows in vain 
for is used as the nominative of the verb avoir beau, and if the pro- 
nouns me, thee, him, her, us, ye or you, and them, should be used after 
in vain for, they are construed by je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils or elles, 
to become the nominatives of avoir beau, which is put in the same 
number and person as the pronoun is in. The succeeding verb is put 
hi the present of the infinitive mood, without any preposition before it, 
and the pronoun it, which precedes the verb to be in English, is not 
expressed in French : as, — it is in vain for you to repeat it, vous avez 
beau le repeter ; as if it were in English — you have fine it to repeat. 

Sometimes, also, in vain for is expressed by inutile, and the verb to 
be is construed by the corresponding tense of etre in French, with the 
pronoun il taken indeterminately for its nominative, in the sense of it 
in English. In this case, the noun or pronoun following in vain for 
becomes the object of etre, and the succeeding verb is put in the pre- 
sent of the infinitive, with de before it : as, — it will be in vain for him to 
go there, il lui sera inutile d^y aller. 

* When a fraction of the principal measure is mentioned, de must not be re- 
peated in French before the noun of number preceding it : thus we cannot say 
— vne table de vingt pieds de trois pouces de longueur ; but — ufie table de vingt pieds 
trois pouces de longueur. 



228 OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 



ESSAY XXVIII. 



I was hungry and thirsty. 1 should be ashamed to speak to hhn 

imp. de 

She was warm, and caught cold. They are afraid oi me. 

imp. elle pret. def. senrhumer 

Are your feet cold ? My feet are not very cold, because I have walked fast ; 

pied iris marcher vite 

but my hands are so cold that I cannot make my pen. It is in vain for you 

n ne poiwoir tailler plume 

(to remonstrate with her,) she will never allow that she is in the wrong, 

ltd f aire des remontrances convenir sub. pr. 

although she is fully convinced that she is not in the right. How 

quoiqu' sub. pr. pleinement cofzvaiticu 

old are j-our sisters ? The eldest is twenty-five, and the (youngest) will be 

cadette 

fifteen at Christmas next This room is a hundred feet ten inches long 

d Notl prochain longueur 

by fifty feet wide, and twenty high. — The steeple of that church is not six hun- 
sur largeur hauteur clocher tijlise 

dred and thirty-four feet I'igh, and eighty in diameter. There was in 

de diamttre imp. 

Peru a mine fifteen or sixteen hundred feet deep. 1 thought this 

Ptrou profondeur imp. croire que 

mountain was three thousand feet high and one* thousand in circumference 

imp. mille de circonference 

at its base. — It would be in vain to write to them in the country, as they 
base inutile de ecrire a puisqu' ■. 

set out to-morrow morning for Paris, where they intend remaining all 

partir on avoir intention de passer 

the summer. 
tie 



LESSON XXIX. 

2. Cases in ivJiich the different tenses of the verb to be are expressed 
in French by the corresponding ones of the unipersonal verb y 
avoir. 

General Rule. — The diiferent tenses of the verb to be are ex- 
pressed in French by those of y avoir : — 1. When they are accom- 
panied by the adverb there : as, — there were many people, il y avait 
hien du monde. In this and any similar case, the verb must be used 
in the singular in French, whether it be in the singular or plural in 
English. 

2. When they are employed in speaking of the distance from one 
place to another ; in which case, should how far be used in English, it 
must be expressed by combien in French : as, — Windsor is twenty 
miles distant from London, il y a vingt milles de Londres a Windsor. 



OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 229 

How far is it from Calais to Paris ? combien y a-t-il de Calais a Paris? 
&c. The adjective distant^ which is sometimes employed in such sen- 
tences in English, is not expressed in French. 

3. When being used to express the time since a thing, action, or 
event took place; and if hoiv long should be employed in English, it is 
expressed by combien in French : as, — how long has he been dead ? 
combien y a-t-il qu'il est mort ? she has been talking these two hours, 
il y a deux heures qu'elle parle, &c. The verb preceding these or 
those, in sentences of this kind, is, thus, put in the preterit indefinite of 
the indicative in French, if the thing mentioned has ceased to exist; but 
it is used in tlie present, if it be still existing. In either case, que is 
used before the verb, and these or those is not expressed in French. 

4. After hoiv much and hoiv many, (combien,) used, to ask the 
quantity or number of persons or things: as, — how mucli cheese is there? 
combien de fromage y a-t-il? how many people were there? combien 
de per Sonne s y avait-il? — de is required before the substantive following 
combien, in any such case. 

The expressions — some days since, a week ago, a fortnigld ago, a 
month since, and all similar ones, are likewise rendered into French by 
the different tenses of y avoir : as, — some days since, il y a quelques 
jours; a week ago, il y a une semaine ; a fortnight ago, il y a une 
quinzaine ; a month since, il y a un mois, &c. as if it were in English, 
— there is some days, there is a week, &c. 

ESSAY XXIX. 
Were there many people (iu the) Park last Sunday ? Yes, (a great 
imp. ail dernier beau- 

many). — '\^'el•e there many ladies ? I should think there were 

coitp imp. Lien dcs croire qii' imp, en. 

at least three or four thousand. There are (deceitful people). How 

au mains des gens qui sont trompeurs 

far is it from London to Plymouth P A very long distance; nearly three 

Londres grand presque 

hundred miles. It is not far from Paris to Rheims ; but it is very far from 

mifle 

Rome to Moscow. Calais is twenty-seven miles distant from Dover. She 

Moscou Douvres 

(has been) married these twenty years. They (have been) gone these four 

est marier sont partir 

days. How many inhabitants are there in Paris ? (There may be) seven or 

habitant a 11 pent y en avoir 

eight hundred thousand. Do you know how many members there are iu the 

savoir membre 

(House of Commons) ? There are six hundred and fifty-eight. Some years 

Chambre des Commimes ^ *annte 

ago, I was at the (Epsom-races,) where I witnessed a very 

^ imp. ^ courses d'Epso)?i pre(. def. etre ttmoin 



230 OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 

melancholy accident, that happened to one of the spectators. — (A week 

fdcheiix fret. def. arriver 11 y a hiiit 

or a fortnight ago,) a friend of mine received from the country a letter, 

ou quinze jours pret. def. 

by which (he was informed) that though the rain had been very 

dans on lui mandait bien que pluies f. pi. sub. plu. 

heavy (it) had not yet done any injury to the corn. It is not 

abondant elles encore f aire de tort bles m. pi. 

a month since I lent you fifty pounds. Mr. P * * 

que pret. indef. priter livre sterling i^que ^ ^ pret. indef. 

died, about six weeks ago, (from the) cut of a* sabre, which he 
"^/riourir ^environ ^ ^semai?ie des suites d'un coup ■• pret. def. 

received on his head, last winter, on the Dover road. 

a la dernier hiver ^de ^Douvres ^route 



LESSON XXX. 

3. Cases in which the verbs to be and to do are expressed in French 
by faire and se porter. 

General Rule. — I. Whenever we speak of the various kinds of the 
weather, and we use the verb to be in the third person singular of its 
different tenses, with the pronoun it taken indeterminately for its nomi- 
native or subject, the corresponding person and tense of the verb faire 
must be employed in French, with the pronoun il, likewise employed 
indeterminately for its subject, in the sense ofit: as, — it is fine weather, 
il fait beau temps; is it fine weather? fait-il beau temps? &c. as if it 
were in English — it makes fijie weather ; makes it fine weather? &c. 

But if the verb to be should have one of the words loeather, day, or 
night, or any other similar expression for its nominative, instead of 
being preceded by the indeterminate pronoun it, the different tenses of 
etre, and not those oi faire, should then be used in French : as, — the 
weather is very fine, le temps est tres-heau, and not — le temps fait 
tres-beau. 

2. When the different tenses of the verb to be or to do are used in 
speaking of or inquiring about the health of somebody, they are ren- 
dered into French by those of the reflective verb se porter : as, — how^ 
is Miss A* * ? comment se porte Mad"^ A* * ? she is not very well, elle 
ne se porte pas tres-bien. 

It is with, it has been with, it loill be with, it would be with, or any 
other tense of the verb to be, thus used impersonally with the pronoun 
it and the preposition with, is rendered into French by the corresponding 
tense and person of the verb etre, with the pronoun il likewise employed 
in an impersonal manner, but with the particle en before the verb in a 
simple tense, and before the auxihary in a compound one ; that is, be- 
tween the pronoun il and the verb or the auxiliary, with de, or du, de 
la, de r, or des^ according as either is required, immediately after it 



OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 231 

in a simple tense, and after the participle in a compound one : as, — it 
is with, il en est de ; it has been with, U en a ete de ; it will be with 
you as with others, ii en sera de vous comme des autres ; it would be 
with, il en serait de, &c. 

ESSAY XXX. 

It is very cold this morning; yet I do not thmk it is quite 

f7-oid cependant croire qu' sub. pr. tout-a-fait 

so cold as it was yesterday, and (the day before). — It was terribly 

si qu! imp. avant-hier imp. excessivement 

cold last week. — If it be fine weather to-morrow, and the roads 

dernier fait que chemin sub.pr. 

are not too dirty, we shall go into the country. — The weather has been very 

trop crotte a 

inconstant all the summer ; we have not had a single week of continued fine 

ett seul semaine continuel 

weather. — The weather is not so damp (in the) south of England, (as it is) iu 

si humide au midi quHt Pest 

the north. — Is it fine weather to-day ? No ; it is very bad weather. — The 

weather is so changeable in this country, that sometimes it is the most 

variable quelquefois 

(delightful weather) in * the morning ; and, two hours after, it is close, 

beau temps du monde tin temps lourd 

datk, and rainy, which is very injurious to the health. — The days 
sombre pluvieux prtjudiciable 

begin to (shorten very much) ; it is dark at seven o'clock. — It is very unpleasant 

a dtcroitre rapidement nuit mauvais 

(walking), when the pavement is so slippery. — If it be (day-light), we shall 

marcher pave glissaiit jour 

certainly set out at four o'clock. — (How is the weather) this afternoon ? I do 

partir Quel temps fait-il 

not know, I have not been out. — When we were in town, last week, it 

sortir imp. a la 

was very bad weather, now we are in the country it is very fine ; 

imp. maijitenant que a 

I am almost sure that if we (were to return) to town, it would be bad weather 

stir retournions ^ ^ 

again. — How do you do this evening ? Very well, I thank you. — How are your 
^encore soir 

father and mother .'* They are pretty well. — Is Miss A* * better ? No ; she 

passablement mieux 

is still very poorly. — Have you seen your cousins lately ? How are they 

encore indisposee cousi?ie depuis pen 

all? Not very well, sir; Miss G** has a bad cold, and her sister is still very 

gros rhume 
lame. I really think it will be with them as it has been with the Misses 
boiteux reellement 
W * *. — Well ! (did I not tell you) it would be with you as it has been with 

Eh bien ne vous ai-je pas dit 
your brother ? 



232 OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 



LESSON XXXI. 



4. Cases in which the different tenses of the verb to be, being fre- 
ceded by the pronoun it, are expressed in French by il est, il etait, 
il sera, &c. and by c'est, c'etait, ce sera, &c. 

General Rule. — Whenever the verb to be, being used in the third 
person singular of its different tenses, with the pronoun it taken inde- 
terminately for its nominative or subject, and an adjective or a participle 
foUov/ing ; as, — it is difficult to succeed in the world ; — it is, it was, 
it will be, or any other of its tenses thus employed, is expressed in 
French by the third person singular of the corresponding tense of etre, 
with the pronoun il, likewise taken indeterminately for its nominative 
or subject, provided there be no reference implied to any thing men- 
tioned before, but on the contrary a marked reference to what follows : 
as, — it is difficult to succeed in the world, il est difficile de reussir 
dans le monde, and not c'^est difficile, &c. 

But it is, it was, it will be, &c. having reference to something spoken 
of before, as when, alluding to what may have just been said or done, 
we say — it is very unfortunate, for — that is very unfortunate ; it ivas 
very consoling, for — that was very consoling ; — it is, it was, it will be, 
are then construed by the third persons singular of the corresponding 
tenses oi etre, preceded by ce, or c', thus — c^est, c^etait, ce fut, ce sera, 
&c. : as, — it is very unfortunate, c^est bien malheureux ; it was very 
consoling, c'^ etait bien consolant, &c. In any such case, the verb forms 
a complete sense with the adjective or participle following; whereas, in 
the preceding observation, there remains something to be expressed 
after the adjective or participle. 

Cest, c"^ etait, ce fat, ce sera, &c. are also used in French in the 
sense of — it is, it was, it will be, &c. in English : 1. before the indefi- 
nite article un, une, a or an. 2. before the cardinal numbers un, une, 
one; c/ei<x, two; trois, three, &c. 3. before the ordinal numbers, if 
these be preceded by the definite article le, la, or les, the : as, — le pre- 
mier, the first ; le second, the second, &c. 4. before a substantive, a 
pronoun, or a verb in the present of the infinitive. 5. before the prepo- 
sitions a and pour, and a few others : as, — it is a man, c^est un homme. 
' It was the first time, c"* etait la premiere fois. Is it not Miss such a one ? 
n^est-ce pas 31"' une telle? It is I, c^est moi. It will be he, ce sera 
lui. It would be encouraging vice, ce serait autoriser le vice. It was 
not his, ce n'^etait pas a. lui. Is it for me ? est-ce pour moi ? and not 
il est un homme ; il est la premiere fois, &c. 

"When it is, it was, it will be, are used before the substantive time, or 
before a noun of number followed by the words hour, o'clock, mijiute, 
or any other similar expression of time, they are rendered into French 
by il est, il etait, il sera, &c. : as, — it is time to set out, il est temps de 
partir. It is three o'clock, // est trois heures, &c. — but it is, it was, it 



OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 233 

will he, used to denote that such or such a thing either took or will take 
place at such a particular hour : as, — it was at six o'' clock ; it will he 
for seven; — it is, it was, it will he, &c. are then construed by c''est, 
c^etait, ce fut, ce sera, because then the pronoun it means this or that 
thing : as, — it was at six o'clock, c^eiait a six heures. It will be for 
seven, ce sera pour sept heures. 

Observe. — When it is, it was, it will he, it would he, &c. are used 
either in the affirmative, negative or interrogative form, before the 
pronoun theij (eux or elles), or before a substantive plural accom- 
panied or not by an adjective, or also before a demonstrative pronoun in 
the plural, provided these words do not depend on a preposition, — they 
are expressed in French by the third persons plural of the different 
tenses of etre, preceded by ce or c' : thus, — it is they, ce sont eux, and 
not c^est ; it will not be the kingdoms of France and England, ce ne 
seront pas les royaumes cle France et cVAngleterre, and not ce ne sera 
pas ; was it they? etaient-ce eux ? and not etait-ce? would it not be 
they ? ne seraient-ce pas elles ? and not ne serait-ce fas 1 is it the 
honours that have been bestowed upon him that. . . .? sont-ce les hon- 
neurs aiixquels il a cte elev'e qui. . . J &c. But if it is, it was, it will 
he, &c. should precede a pronoun which, when construed into French, 
is either eux or elles depending on a preposition, or if they should come 
before a substantive or a demonstrative pronoun in the plural, likewise 
depending on a preposition, or also, if they should precede any other 
personal pronoun than eux or elles, they should then be expressed by 
c^est, c'etait, ce fut, &c. and not by ce so7it, c^etaient, ce furent, &c. : as, 
— it is to them I speak, c^est a eux que je parle, and not ce sont ; it 
will be to these ladies I shall give it, ce sera a ces dames que je le 
donneraiy and not ce seront ; it was not to you I spoke, ce n'etait ^ja,? 
a, vous que je parlais, and not ce n^etaient pas, &c. 

If it ivas should be used interrogatively in the preterit definite of 
the indicative, before the pronoun theij, {eux or elles,) not depending 
on a prei)Osition, it should then be construed by the third person singular 

of the preterit definite of etre in French : as, — was it they who ? 

fut-ce eux qui. . . .? and wot furent- ce eux qui. . . .? 

Was it, thus used interrogatively in the preterit definite of the indi- 
cative before a substantive plural not depending on a preposition, is also 
construed by the third person singular of that tense, as the third plural 
would form too harsh a sound : as, — was it the French who . . . . ? fut- 
ce les Franpais qui. . . .? and not furent-ce ? &c. 



ESSAY XXXI. 

It is very uufortunate he has not succeeded. — Would it not be 

bien malhenreiix sub. pret. rdt/sxir 

advisable to write to her P — It is certainly a very good thought. — It is so 

expedient de certainement pemee 



234 OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 

uncertain when they will return. — Have you (heard) of the dreadfixl 

incertain revenir entendu parler horrible 

murder of Miss p***? Yes, it makes one* shudder with horror. It is 
assassinat cela fris&onner (T horreur • 

this young lady who brought me the news (of it,) and 

jeune demoiselle pret. indef. ^apporter ^ * ^nouvelle ^en 

the amiable child fainted in pronouncing the name of the unfor- 

enfant pret. indef. s'evanouir prononcer infor- 

tunate victim. — Was it not Mrs. N** who scolded you so much at the 

tvnti victime pret. def. grander tant 

review the other day ? No ; it was her sister. — Is it the first time you 
revue fuis que sub. 

have seen her ? — It is the third or fourth time he has called to pay you. 
pret. voir soit venu pour 

— Is it you who ? No ; it is she. — If it were not so late, I should 

imp. tard 

b.e delighted to be of the party. — (Is this) for me or you? — It is for 

charme dj' fartie Ceci est-il pour n' 7ti 

(neither) of us ; it is for Mr. D.'s sister. — (If that man were not 

fun ni pour P autre ^de ^M. D*'^ ^ Si Pon ne riprimandaif 

to be reprimanded) for his infamous behaviour, it would be (encouraging) vice. 
pas cet homme sur infdme conduite autoriser 

— I think it is jealousy that makes you hold such language. — What o'clock is 

croire jalousie faire tenir ce lanr/age heure 

it? It is eleven o'clock. Is it really so late''' Yes, In that case, I 

reellement En cas il 

(must) leave you directly (Come,) gentlemeia, awake ; it is time 

faz/t que sub. pr. quitter sur-le-ckamp AUons s'tveiller 

to set out; it is almost eight o'clock. Eight o'clock! it is impossible; 

de pariir presque ' — 

(it is only) three hours since we (went to bed). — I have seen Miss F** this 

il n^y a que que sommes au lit voir 

morning, and I inquired of* her at what o'clock the concert would begin. 

matin ai demand^ commencer 

She informed me it would be at nine or ten o'clock (in the) evening. — 

a dit que a du imp. 

Was it not at (twelve o'clock) you came on Saturday ? No j it 

midi que pret. def. imp. 

was about two in the afternoon. — It is not those who speak much who 

I*.',, sur les heufes de 

are the most esteemed. — It was the French and the Russians who 

estimer imp. Russe pret. def. 

began that shameful and disgraceful war. — It will not be they who will have 
honteux dtshonorant guerre elles 

the^ honour of opening the ball. — Is it the honours (so unjustly bestowed upon 
■ hcnneur ouvrir bal auxquels il a 6tt si i7ijustement 

him), that render him so proud (as to) despise us ? — Was it they 

6levt fier et le font mepriser imp. 

who . . . . ? No. — It was my neighbours who saved my life when my 

imj). voisin pret. def. me 



OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 235 

house was on fire. — It is for thena to command and for you to obey. — Was it 

imp. en a a commander a cCobiir 

not to them you lent that money ? — It is to you I speak.— 

que fret. def. prefer que 

Should it be they who . . , . ? No j it is Messrs. Stewart and Co. 

Ore 



LESSON XXXII. 

Avoir mal a, au, h. la, or aux. 

General Rule. — We make use in French of the different tenses of 
the verb avoir mal., when we speak of any iUness or indisposition of the 
body or mind, whatever may be the verb used in English. The com- 
pound article au., aux, or a la^ a l\ is used before the part affected with 
pain, and the possessive pronoun rtiy., thij., his, her, our, your, or their, 
which may be used before it in English, is left out in French : as, — I 
have the head-ache, fai mal a la tete ; she has the tooth-ache, elle a 
mal aux dents ; I feel a pain in my side, /'ai mal au cote ; I had a bad 
\e^, j"'avais mal a la j'ambe ; he had a sore foot, il avait mal au pied ; 
as if it were in English, — / have ill to the head ; she has ill to the 
teeth, &c. 

If the part of the body affected with pain should be preceded by a 
demonstrative or possessive pronoun, as — I feel a very bad pain in this 
arm ; the preposition a should then be used before the pronoun in 
French, instead of au, a la, a P,oy aux : as, — I feel a very bad pain 
in this arm, fai grand mal a ce bras ; and not au ce bras. 

The article un or le, accordmg to the import of the sentence, might 
also be used, in some sentences of this kind, before the substantive mal, 
after a tense of the verb avoir, placing de before the part of the body 
affected with pain : as, — j'ai un violent mal de cote, I have a great 
pain in my side, Elle a le mal de gorge, she has a sore throat. 

When the sentence is made by a tense of the verb to be: as, — my 
lips are sore ; the verb avoir mal must then be put in the same person 
in French as the possessive pronoun preceding the part of the body 
mentioned is in, when construed by its corresponding personal pronoun 
je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils or elles. One of the compound articles 
au, aux, or a la, a l\ is used before the part of the body alluded to, and 
the word sore, or any other denoting pain, is implied in avoir mal: as, 
— my lips are sore, fai mal aux levres : in this sentence, j^ai is in the 
first person singular, because the possessive pronoun my, which pre- 
cedes lips, is of the first person singular. Sentences of this kind always 
begin by the verb ; then comes the compound article, and the part of 
the body affected with pain is placed next; as if it were in English, — 
to have sore at. 



236 OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 

But the next sentences — my head always aches ; my eyes ache still 
a little ; his arm does not get better ; and any similar one, in which we 
mention an habitual pain, especially if it be known to the person spoken 
to, are expressed in French by using before the verb one of the pro- 
nouns me, te, lui, nous, vous, leur, according to the person in which 
the possessive pronoun preceding the part of the body mentioned is in 
English, with the article /e, la, or les, or sometimes one of the posses- 
sive pronouns mon, ma, mes, before the part of the body alluded to : as, 
— my head always aches, la tete me fait toujours mal ; my eyes ache 
still a little, mes yeux me font encore un jjeu mal ; my arm does not 
get better, mon bras ne se guerit pas, &c. but practice alone can teach 
these different forms of expression. 

ESSAY XXXII. 

I feel a pain in my eyes, neck, and side. — (What is the matter with) Miss 
CGU cote qu' a 

H***? She has a sore throat, and feels a great oppression on her chest. — 

mal gorge ressentir dans la poitrine 

My eyes are so sore that I cannot open them. — "When I was young, I 
7ie pouvoir ouvrir imp. 

had often the head-ache ; now I am old, my legs are so bad that I 
imp. que jambe mal 

cannot stand. You (cannot fancy how painful my foot is). 

me tenir dehout ne sauriez votis imaginer combien mon pied me fait mal 

Mrs. T** has had a violent (tooth-ache) all the night. — My arm pains 

mal de dents la ^fuire *mal 

me (very much). — That poor child is sore (all over :) his head-ache is returned, 
^ '^bien partout '^de ^tete ^mal revenir 

and his eyes pain him more than ever, — She has a pain in her stomach. 

^faire ^mul ^lui ° jamais estomac 

— My shoulder does not get better, and my head still aches. 

I'paule se guerir encore /aire mal 



LESSON XXXIII. 

Must expressed in French by il faut, il fallait,il faudra, &c. 

General Rule. — The verb must is generally expressed in French 
by the third person singular of the different tenses of the unipersonal 
verb falloir : thus, — il faut, il fallait, il faudra, il faudrait, &c. 
according to the tense in which must is in English ; the conjunction que 
is placed immediately after il faut, il fallait, or il faudra, &c. and the 
nominative of must, whether it be a noun or a pronoun, becomes the 
nominative of the succeeding verb, which is put in the subjunctive mood 
in French : as, — I must go out, il faut que je sorte ; she must do it, il 
faut qu'elle le fasse ; they must pay me, il faut quHls me paient ; as 
if it were in English, it must that I go out ; it must that she do it, &c. 



OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 237 

If the nominative of must should be taken in an indefinite or even 
sometimes in a definite sense: as, — we must he prudent; children 
must he instructed ; you must not do that; in this case, the sentence 
would be more elegantly expressed in Frencli by placing the verb fol- 
lowing must in the present of the infinitive, instead of using it in the 
subjunctive. Que should then be left out, and the nominative o^ must, 
if one of the pronouns loe^ you, they, one or people, should not be ex- 
pressed : as, — we must be prudent, il faut etre prudent ; you must not 
do that, il ne faut pas fairc cela, &c. but if the nominative of must 
should be a noun, it should be i3laced after the verb which follows il 
faut, il fallait, &c. : as, — children must be instructed, z7 /a i^f instruire 
les enfans. 

When must comes before have, or when want is used in the sense 
oi must have : as, — / must have some gloves ; he wants a coat ; must 
have and want are then elegantly expressed in French by the different 
tenses of the unipersonal verb falloir, as above, but placing (when the 
nominative of must is one of the personal pronouns /, thou, he, she, 
we, you, they) one of the pronouns me, te, lui, nous, vous, leur, instead, 
between il and the tense of falloir which is used, with the thing wanted 
after it : as, — I must have some gloves, il me faut des gants ; he wants 
a coat, il lui faut un habit ; — but if the nominative of must or wa7it 
should be a substantive, it should then be placed after the thing wanted 
at the end of the sentence, with a before it : as, — your brother must 
have a hat, il faut un chapeau a votre frere. 

II faut, il fallait, il faudra, &c. are also used at the end of a sen- 
tence in French, for the English expressions — you ought, it ought to he, 
it should he, or any similar one : as, — you do not behave as you ought, 
vous nc vous conduisez pas comme il faut ; that is not as it ought to 
be, or should be, cela n' est pas comme il faut. 

AVhen the verbs to he necessary, to he requisite, or similar ones, are 
used impersonally, they are also usually expressed in French by the uni- 
personal verb falloir. The preposition for, which follows, is left out; 
and if a personal pronoun succeeds, it sometimes becomes the object of 
falloir, and is placed before it : that is — between // and the tense of 
falloir which is used, with the next verb in the present of the infinitive 
mood : as, — it is necessary for you to go there, il vous faut y aller. 
Sometimes also the pronoun serves as a nominative to the following- 
verb, in which case que is used after falloir, and the next verb is put 
in the subjunctive mood : as, — it will be necessary for you to take some 
lessons, il faudra que vous preniez quelques lepons. If a substantive 
should follow the preposition for, instead of a personal pronoun, it 
would then always be the nominative of the succeeding verb, which 
must be put in the subjunctive mood, with que after the verb falloir : 
as, — it will be necessary for your brother to go there, il faudra que 
votre frere y aille. 

The above verbs may also be expressed by etre necessairc, which re- 



238 OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 

quires de before the next verb, if it be in the present of the infinitive, { 

and que, if in the subjunctive. ; 

Observe. — The expressions il s^enfaut, il s'' en fall ait, il s^enfallut, ! 

il s''en faudra, or any other tense of the verb falloir, thus used with j 

s^en before it, require (when being used either negatively or interro- ' 

gatively, or when being accompanied by any one of the words peu, guere, \ 

rien, presque rien, &c. which have a negative import, or also by any j 

other word implying doubt) ne before the next verb, which is put in ] 

the subjunctive mood: as, — there is not much wanting of the whole \ 

sum, il ne s^en faut pas de beaucoup que la sonime entiere n'y soit. "j 

How much is it wanting of the whole sum ? combien s^en faut-il que la ,; 

somme entiere n'y soit? I was very near being killed, il ne s^enfallut j 

rien, ou il s'en fallut peu, que je ne fusse tue, &c. But ne is not '\ 

required before the succeeding verb, when il s^ en faut, il s'en fallait, ■ 

il s'en fallut, &c. being employed affirmatively, are not accompanied by \ 

any of the above words, or by any other word of a negative import, or i 

implying doubt. In this case, the following verb is likewise put in the > 

subjunctive mood, as above : as, — he is very far from being as tall as j 

his brother, il s'en faut beaucoup qu'il soit aussi grand que son frere, \ 

and not — qu'il ne soit; because il s'en faut is used affirmatively. ' 

Note. — De beaucoup must be used after il s'en faut, il sen fallait^ \ 
il s'en fallut, &c. when we wish to express that a sum or quantity is- 

deficient by much ; and beaucoup without de, when we speak of a great \ 
difference between two persons or things. 



ESSAY XXXIII. i 

Your sister must come and* look for her book herself, because I do j 

sub. pr. ^ ^cheroher 4 5 2 parce que ' 

not know where she has put it. — You must write to them immediately. — \ 

savoir ou mettre kerire tout de suite i 

Y-ou must not do that. Must I go there ? A woman must have \ 

faire oiler y sub. pr. \ 

mvich circumspection. — You must go and* see my daughters in the country. 

circonspection voir jiUe a campagne \ 

We must buy a horse on the first opportunity. — I fear it will : 

sub. pr. acheter a occasion craindre sub. pr, \ 

be necessary to go to Bath, to stop the payment of that bill. Will it be \ 

pour arret er paiement billet | 

necessary to give them time? — One must be very patient to suffer so much i 

du II pour souffrir ainsi \ 

without (complaining). Young men must be encouraged^ and old people ' 

sons se plaindre Jeunes gens encourager vieillard j 

assisted. — I want a new coat. — My brother must have a pair of boots, \ 

assister nouveau poire botte * 

and two or three pairs of shoes. — You want a pair of black gloves to attend : 

smdieii- noir gant pour asmter \ 



OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 239 

the funeral, and a pair of white for the Opera. — It will be necessary for 
^ enterrement blanc Opera 

them to* take a house in town. — Do you think it will be ne- 

sub. pr. pi'endre a la sub.pr. ne- 

cessary for my nieces to* be there? — (I have been told) that his cousins 

cessairc sub. jyr. y On ni^a (lit cot/sine 

do not behave exactly as they ought. — His wife always speaks of you as 

f:e conduire tout-a-fa\t 
she ought : she (never mentions j'our name but with) the greatest respect and 

ne prononce jamais votre nom qii'avec 

esteem. — There was not much wanting of the whole sum. 
la plus grand e imp. s' en falloir que eniier n^yfiXt 

— How much was it wanting of the whole sum ? — (She is very far) from 

Combien que II s'enfaut beaztcoup qu^elle sub. pr, 

being so handsome as her sister. 
aussi beau que 



LESSON XXXIV. 

Of the defective verbs — may, will, ivould, can, shall, should, could, 
might, and ought. 

General Rule. — Whenever may, ivill, would, can, shall, should, 
could, and might, are not the distinguishing signs of the different tenses 
of other verbs, but are verbs distinct of themselves, they are rendered 
into French as follows: — I. will and ii7oi//c/, denoting determination, 
are expressed by the different tenses of vouloir. 2. — may, can, could, 
or might, expressing possibility, are rendered by the tenses of pouvoir ; 
and should, denoting necessity or duty, is construed by those of devoir. 
As will and would can always be changed into the dififerent tenses of 
the verb to he willing or desirous ; may, can, could, and might, into 
those of to be able ; and should into those of to be necessary ; these 
will be the distinctive signs of the tenses in which vouloir, pouvoir, and 
devoir, ought to be used in French, and they will be placed in the same 
person and tense in which the verb to be is in English : as, — he will 
not confess it; that is, — he is not willing to confess it, il ne veut pas 
Vavouer. I could not speak to him; implyhig — I was not able to speak 
to him, je ne pus pas lui parler. He should do that; in the sense of 
— he ought to do that, or, it would be necessary for him to do that, il 
devrait faire cela. 

Will, would, could, should, do, and shall, used either in reply to a 
question, or to express assent to any thing mentioned before, may be 
expressed in French by the same verb as that by which the question is 
asked, or simply by — je le veux ouj'e le veux bien ; or by — oui, mon- 
sieur, madame, or mademoiselle : as, — will you go to the country this 
summer ? yes, I will ; irez-vous a la campagne cet ete ? oui, j'irai. 



240 OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 

Will you do that for me? yes, I ^vill; voulez-vous faire cela four 
moi? oui, je le veux hien ; or simply — om, monsieur, madame, on 
mademoiselle. 

When would, could, should, r/iight, and ought, are followed by have 
before the past participle of another verb, as in these sentences — you 
should have called me ; if they would have jmr sued him, they might 
have caught him ; you ought to have paid her a visit, since you knew 
she was returned ; they are expressed in French by the imperfect or 
conditional of the verb avoir, according to the sense, nsing one of the 
past participles fu, du, or voulu, after it, if something past, as in the 
above sentences, be implied, and placing the succeeding verb, which is 
in the past participle in English, in the present of the infinitive in 
French : as, — you should have called me, vous auriez du m^appeler. 
If they would have pursued him, they might have caught him, s^ils 
avaient voulu le poursuivre, lis auraient pu Vattraper. You ought 
to have paid her a visit, since you knew she was returned, vous auriez 
du lui faire visite, puis que vous saviez qu^elle etait de retour. 

Would, could, shoidd, and might, are also sometimes construed into 
French, in sentences of this kind, by the conditional of one of the verbs 
pouvoir, vouloir, and devoir, expressing have by avoir or etre, according 
as either is required, and placing the following verb in the past participle 
in French as it is in English : as, — she could have written her exercise 
before you if. ... , elle pourrait avoir ecrit son theme avant vous 
si. ... , &c. 

Will have or would have, followed by a noun or a pronoun and a 
verb in the present of the infinitive, as — / will have you pay him im- 
mediately ; I would not have her write to him ; must be expressed in 
French by the corresponding tense of the verb vouloir, placing que after 
it, and using the noun or pronoun following, as the nominative to the 
next verb, which is put in the subjunctive mood : as, — I will have you 
pay him immediately, je veux qiie vous le payiez tout de suite. I 
would not have her write to h\m,je ne voudrais pas qu'elle lui ecrivit. 

Will have or would have used also as follows, — which of these two 
books ivill you have 1 I would have them both ; is likewise rendered 
into French by the difi"erent tenses of vouloir : as, — which of these two 
books will you have ? lequel de ces deux livres voulez-vous ? I would 
have them both, je les voudrais ious les deux. 

Can, used in English in the sense of to know, is generally rendered 
into French by savoir : as, — I can read and write, je sais lire et ecrire. 

Ought is always construed into French by either the present, imper- 
fect, or conditional of devoir, according to the import of the sentence: 
as, — you ought to remember it, vous devriez vous en souvenir. 

ESSAY XXXIV. 

Will you lend me the book which I mentioned to you the other 
preter dont purler 



OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 241 

(lay ? Yes, I will, provided you return it to me (in the course of) 

■poia-vu que sub. pr, rendre dans 

two or three days. — "Will you show me your rin^^? No, I will not. — Do 

moiifrer bague le 

you know Italian? Yes, I do, 1 would most willingly oblige you, if 

savoir tres-volo/itiers 

I could. Is that young man (thoroughly acquainted ^vith book- 

imp. /e pouvoir sait-il bien teiiir les Hires 

keeping?) — I do not know, but he (should be). — Will you have the kindness 

le devrait bonte 

to take that letter to the post for nie ? Yes, I (will.) if you can 
de porter le veux biefi 

lend me an umbrella. — (You must) tell him that he should take you to the 
parapluie II faut devoir inener 

play two or three times a year. — If the French would have pmsued 

spectacle par ph/perf. voiiloir 

the Russians, they might have taken all their ammunition. — I could have 

Riisse preiidre munitions 

finished mj'- drawing as soon as you, if I had been willing, but 

Jinir dessin aussitot que pluperf. P vouloir 

it would not have been so well done as it is He ought to have paid 

executer qu'il T faire 

her a* visit, (being informed of her return). — If I were in your stead, 

jnnsqu'il savait qii elle etait de retour imp. a 2)lace 

I would have him pay me immediately; although I would not 

vouloir sub. imp. sur-le-champ quoique sub. imp. vouloir 

have * him suffer (by it). — Well ! which of these two watches will 

il sub. imp. -souffrir ^en He bien viontre 

you have ? — They arc really so pretty, that I would have them both. — She is 

riellement joli 

so ignorant that she can neither read nor write. — That storm was so 

tempete pret. de/. 
violent, and lasted so long, that you (ought) to* remember it 

prct. def. durer devricz ^vous ^souvenir ^en 

— I do not think he ought to* forgive his sister, before she 

sub. pr. devoir pardonner a avant qu' sub. pr. ne 

asks his pardon. — Do you think she would come with us, if I (were 

liti sub. imp. 

to ask her) ? Yes ; I am sure she would not refuse you. — Is it probable you 

fen pr-iais re/user que ' 

(could have obtained) the consent of her father, if I had not spoken 

eussiez pu obtenir pluperf. 

to him (in your favour) ? 

avantagevsement de vovs 



242 SYNTAX.— OF THE ARTICLE. 

PART THE THIRD. 



OF SYNTAX. 

The third part of French grammar is Syntax, which treats of the 
regular construction of the different parts of speech, conformably to the 
genius and established rules of the French language. 



LESSON XXXV. 

Of the Article. 
1. Cases in which the article is used in French. 

First General Rule. — 1. The definite article — le, la^ l\ les ; duy 
de la, de l\ des ; or au, a la, a l\ aux, according to the import of the 
sentence, is used in French before every substantive taken in a general 
or particular sense ; that is, before every substantive designating either 
a whole species of things or beings, a kind of things, a determinate 
thing, or a private individual, and agrees with it in gender and number, 
whether any article be employed in English or not : as, — men and 
women are mortal, les hommes et les femmes sont mortels ; wine is dear 
in this country, le vin est cher dans ce pays ; gold is more precious 
than silver, l^or est plus precieux que Pargent. 

2. The definite article is also used in French before words expressing 
the measure, quantity, weight or number of any thing, when we either 
mention its price or value, or ask how much it is worth or sold for : in 
this case, the indefinite article a or an is usually employed in English : 
as, — this cloth is worth twenty shillings a yard, ce drap vaut vingt 
schellings la verge ; champagne is sold for a guinea a bottle, le cham- 
pagne se vend une guinee la houteille ; and not — ce drap vaut vingt 
schellings une verge ; le champagne se vend une guinee une houteille. 

But Avhen we mention the time by which actions are measured, things and 
persons are hired or paid for, as likewise, what is given for attendance or admit- 
tance into public places, the preposition par is more generally used than the definite 
article le, la, or les, before the word which expresses the time, attendance, or person : 
as, — I give him twenty guineas a year, je lid donne vingt ginnees par an ; he gets six 
shillings a week, il gagtie six schellings par semaine ; so much a head, tant par tete ; 
so much each, /(2w^ par per5on«e; so much a lesson, /aw/ par lecon; and not— je lid 
donne vingt guinees Van; il gagne six schellings la semaine; tant la tete ; tant la 
personne ; tant la. legoti ; &c. 

3. The definite article is likewise used in French before adjectives, 
infinitives of verbs, adverbs, prepositions, or conjunctions, used substan- 
tively, although there is generally no article employed before them in 
English: as, — I like white better than black, j^aime mieux le blanc 



SYNTAX.— OF THE ARTICLE. 243 

qiie le noir. That which is necessary is to be preferred to what is merely 
useful, le necessaire est preferable a Vutile. He wishes to know the 
why and the wherefore of every thing, il veut savoir le pourquoi et le 
comment de tout. 

4. When two adjectives, being united by the conjunction and^ qua- 
lify or specify the same substantive, the article must be used before 
each of them in French, when they express contrary qualities : as, — 
the first and second floor, le premier et le second etage ; the good and 
bad company, la bonne et la mauvaise compagnie. But if the adjec- 
tives belong to that class of adjectives which must follow their respective 
substantives in French, the article is placed before the substantive and 
repeated before the second adjective : as, — the French and English 
languages, la langue Fran^aise et VAnglaise. 

If the adjectives should not express contrary qualities, being either 
synonymous, or denoting compatible qualities, the article should only be 
used before the first adjective, without being repeated before the second : 
as, — the virtuous and learned Mr. D* *, le rertueux et savant 
Mr. D* * ; and not — le vertueux et le savant Mr. D* *. 

Neither is the article repeated before the second of two substantives 
which are often mentioned together: as, — le flux et reflux de la mer, 
the ebbing and flowing of the sea ; and not — le flux et le reflux. Les 
tours et sinuosites de ce JieiLve, the windings of that river ; and not — 
les tours et les sinuosites^ &c. 

Observe. — When the words lady and you7ig lady, or ladies and young ladies, are 
preceded hy an article, an adjective, or a pronoun in English, they are ex- 
pressed in French by datne or dames, demoiselle or demoiselles, and not by madame 
or mesdames, nmdemoiselle or mesdemoisefles ; and, in general, the words dame, 
demoiselle, or their plural, are used without the possessive pronouns ma, mes, 
whenever they are preceded by a word specifying or qualifying them : as, — the 
lady and young lady whom I have seen home, la dame et la demoiselle que j'ai 
reconduites, and not — la madams el la mademoiselle. A fine lady, une belle dame, 
and not — wie belle madatne. 

5. When addressing somebody we mention his title, quality, dignity, 
or profession, (if a liberal one,) the article must be used in French 
before such dignity or quality, &c., besides the word monsieur, madame, 
or mademoiselle, although no article be used in English : as, — 
Mr, colonel, shall we have the pleasure of your company to-day? 
Monsieur le colonel, serez-vous des notres aujourd^hui? Mr. general ? 
Monsieur le general ? 

One of the qualifications monsieur, madame, or mademoiselle, or 
their plural messieurs, mesdames, or mesdemoiselles, is also used in 
French with the article le, la, or les, before a word of reproach, when 
we scold or blame somebody : as, — Monsieur le fripon, Mr. thief. 
Monsieur le coquin, Mr. rascal. Mademoiselle la libertine. Miss 
libertine. Mesdemoiselles les paresseuses, you lazy ladies. 

Second General Rule. — The definite article is generally employed 
in French before the four quarters of the globe, as likewise before the 

m2 



244 SYNTAX.— OF THE ARTICLE. 

names of kingdoms, countries, provinces, rivers, mountains, and hills, 
althougli (except before those of rivers and of some mountains) no 
article be used in English : as, — P Europe ^ Europe ; VAsie, Asia ; 
PAfriqu'e, Africa ; PAmerique, America ; la France, France ; la Nor- 
mandie, Normandy ; la Bretagne, Britany ; la Seine, the Seine ; 
PAngleterre, England; la Tamise, the Thames, &c. 

If the names of countries, kingdoms, or provinces, should be preceded 
by a verb expressing either coming from, going out, or passing from, and 
be considered merely as a point of departure, without any reference to 
their extent, they should then be preceded by the preposition de or <i' only 
in French, without any article, whatever may be the preposition on which 
they depend in English : as, — I come from France and Italy, je viens 
de France et d^Italie. I shall soon set out from England, j'e partirai 
hientot d'Angleierre. 

They are likewise preceded by the preposition de or d' only, after a name 
of title or dignity, or after any thing of which they express the country : 
as, — the emperor of France, Perapereur de France ; the king of Eng- 
land, le roi d^ Angleterre ; Italian silks, soieries d^Italie. 

But if countries, kingdoms, or provinces, should be considered with 
reference to their whole extent, as it is generally the case after the words 
— \m{\i^, limites ; boundaries, homes; coastB, cotes ; ])eo]Ae,peuples ; 
countries, regions ; the compound article du, des, or de la, de P, should 
then be used before them : as, — the limits, the boundaries, the coasts of 
France and England, les limites, les homes, les cotes de la France et 
de PAngleterre. The people of Asia, Africa, and America, les peuples 
de PAsie, de PAfrique, et de VAnierique, — and not les limites de France 
et d^Angleterre; les peuples d'' Asie, d'' Afrique,et d^ Amerique ; because 
France, Angleterre, Asie, Afrique, and Amerique, are considered in 
these sentences under the idea of their whole extent. 

The names of countries, kingdoms, or provinces, are used without 
any article in French, when, being preceded by the preposition en, in 
the sense of m, to, or into, in English, they depend on a verb denoting 
either being, residing, or travelling in, or also going to a country, except 
after the verb partir pour, to set out for, which requires the article le, 
la, or les, before the country mentioned, as likewise after any other verb 
governing pour, or any other preposition than en : as, — he lives in 
Spain, il demeure en Espagne. I shall go to France, jHrai en France. 
I passed from Italy into Switzerland, je passai cPItalie en Suisse. 1 
shall soon set out for Spain and Portugal, je partir ai hientot pour 
VEspagne et le Portugal. We were travelling towards France, nous 
voyagions vers la France, &c. 

But the names of distant countries, those of mountains, hills, and 
rivers ; the names also of some provinces in France and Italy : as, — 
le Perche, le Maine, le Milanais, la Pouille, and particularly those 
which are composed of an adjective and a substantive : as, — les Pays- 
Bas ; la Nouvelle- Angleterre ; are always preceded by the compound 



SYNTAX.— OF THE ARTICLE. 245 

article au, aux, or a la, a l\ instead of en, in the sense of at, to, or into, 
in English; and by du, de la, de /', qy des, instead of t/e, for o/ or 
from : as, — to go to Japan, oiler au Japon, and not en Japon. I have 
been to the Indies, jl'a^ cte aux hides, and not enlndes. He is gone to 
China, U est alle a la Chine, and not en Chine. The kings of China, 
Peru, and Japan, les rois de la Chine, du Perou, et du Japon, and not 
de Chine, de Perou, et de Japon. He comes from Canada, il vient du 
Canada, and not de Canada. When we were returning from the Alps 
and Perclie, en revenant des Alpes et du Per die, and not — d'Alpes et 
de Perche. We shall go to the Netherlands and jSIilanese, nous irons 
aux Pays-Bas et au Milanais, and not a Pays-Bas et a Milanais, &c. 
Terre-Neuve, Newfoundland, is however excepted, as it is only preceded 
by a, in the sense of at or to, and by de for of ox from : as, — he went to 
Newfoundland, il alia a Terre-Neuve, and not en or a la Terre-Neuve^ 
They are returned from Newfoundland, ils sont revenus de Terre' 
Neuve, and not de la Terre-Neuve, 

When countries have the same name as their capital town, they are 
used without any article in French as in English, but they may be pre- 
ceded by de, in the sense of of or from, and by a, for at or to : as, — 
the kingdom of Naples, le royaume de Naples. The dominions of 
Venice, les Hats ou la r'^publique de Venisc. He has been to Naples, 
il a ete a Naples. 

ESSAY XXXV. 

For the future, the verbs which are to be put in the imperfect or 
preterits definite and indefinite of the indicative in French, will not be 
found marked, as before, as the pupil must now endeavour to place 
them in the right tenses himself. 

Ladies think that Latin and Greek are not so necessary as history, g-eography, 
Dame croire — — Grec 

and mathematics. — Fortune is a capricious deity. — Glory, riches, nohlencss, 
mat/itmatiquea capricieux divinitt richesses noblesse 

and power (are only) imaginary names. Charity is the greatest of all 

puissance ne sont que imaginaire 7iont 
christian virtues. — Pride and vanity have often Leen the source of (a great many) 
Chretien Orgueil bien 

errors. — Gold is much harder than silver; but it is not so precious as diamond. 
des ditr prtdeiix diamant 

Good champagne is sold in France for* eight or nine francs a bottle. 

se vendre boideille 

How much is silk worth an ell in this country .'' This coffee costs me two 

Combien va/oir dans pays caft couter 

shillings a pound. We have some snuff at three sous an ounce. 1 give him 

schel/ing tabac sou once 

ixty guineas a year, (including board and lodging.) — (She is allowed) ten or 
guinee la table et le logement On lui do?in€ 

eleven shillings a week for her (pocket money). How much do you charge a 

schelling menus plaisirs prend?'e 



246 SYNTAX.—OF THE ARTICLE. 

lesson ? According to circumstances : sometimes half-a-guinea, and sometimes 
si/ivanf qnelquefois 

only five or six shillings. — (You can) dine at that hotel for four shillings 
seulement On diner hotel a 

a head. 1 like green better than red, because it does not hurt the sight 

aimer H'ert ^mienx blesser ^ Hue 

so much. Eating and drinking are necessary to man. Good and bad 

^fanf Manger boire 

company have each their followers. The virtuous and learned Mr. C* * 

chaciin partisan 

died, at thirty-three years of age, at his country seat near Windsor, and 
mourir ^ ^ ^ ^ 4 2^? 3 chateau pres de 

left a most lovely (wife) and four little darlings of* children. ^We 

laisser la ainiable des femmes '"^ ^charmant ^ 

took the first and second floor of that house. Although you say that 

prendre ttage sub.pr. 

French and Italian are the finest of European languages, and the easiest 
Fran^ais It alien 12 ^ ^p ^Europe ^langue facile 

to learn, yet I like the English and German best.* 

a cependant donner la preference a Anglais a Allemand 

Tlie ebbing and flowing of the sea, the beautiful harmony of the heavens, and 

beau del 

the regular revolution of the stars and planets deserve our admiration. — Who 

regulier ttoile planete 

(could have) thought that he would have extricated himself* so 

aurait pa croire mh. phi. se debarrasser 

easily from the mndings of that river ? Colonel, shall we have the plea- 

faeiletnent 

sure of your company to dinner to-day P Mr. thief, if you ever (happen) to 

^ ^il ■* ^jamais ^arrive de 

(come here again), I swear I will break your neck. You lazy ladies, 

remettre les pieds ici jurer que ^ '^casser H^ous le cou 

what have you (been doing) all the morning ? We have (been learning) our 
fait matinee appris 

French lessons. The young ladies of that school (are so well-behaved) 

^de^Fran(^ais^ demoiselles pension se conduisent si bien 

that every body admires them. Europe, Asia, Africa and America, are the 

four quarters of the world. France, England, Germany, Spain and Italy, 

partie Allemagne Espagne 

are the finest kingdoms in Europe. ^The Rhone, the Rhine, and the Danube, 

royaume de f 
are very large rivers ; and Mont-Blanc, the Alps, and the Pyrenees, 

de grand fleuve Pyrenees f. pi. 

very high mountains. — My brother writes to me from Prussia that the King of 
haut montagne ecrire ^qu ^ ^" ^^ 

Sweden and the Empress Maria are expected every day at Berlin.— 

^^Stiede ^^ ^* ^^Imperafrice ^^Marie ^on '^attend *tous ^les^jours ' * 
When will your sister set out from France for Portugal ? In ten or twelve days. 
partir Dans 



SYNTAX.— OF THE ARTICLE. 241 

■ - I (saw), at Vienna, the Emperors of France and Russia, and the Kings of 
cri vu 

England and Prussia (dining) together in a beautiful pavilion. Do you think 

diner ensemble siiperbe 

the people of Europe are more civilized than those of the other 

penples m. pi. sub. pr. civilist 

quarters of the world ? Undoubtedly.— Can you show me the limits of France ? 
partie Sans doiite montrer 

No J but I think those of Switzerland and Italy are fixed here. If you think the 

Suisse fixe 

coasts of England are ornamented with such beautiful country-seats, 

coie sub. pr. ornk cV aussi beau muisoti de plaiscmce 

and exhibit (such delightful prospects) as these, you 

qu^elles sub. pr. offrir a la vue d'aussi riantes perspectives que 

(are very much mistaken). (How long) have you lived in England? 

vous trompez bien Combien de temps demeurer 

Seven years. And in Holland ? Five years and a half. Did you remain 

rester 
long in Italy, when j^ou made the tour of Europe ? Only two months.— — 
long-temps /aire 

And in France ? Tliree years. — All my friends are now in America. — Next 

a present 

year, we intend going to Prussia and Sweden. When do you 

se proposer d'' 

set out for Scotland and Ireland ? In three or four months. My nephew sails, 

partir neveii partir 

next week, for the West Indies. Have you been to Japan and China. 

Occidental Lutes f. pi. 

Tlie Governor of Canada is not very popular. They are going this year to 

populaire annee 

the East Indies. She is gone to (Newfoundland). Mr. E" * arrived 

Oriental Terre-Neuve ar river 

yesterday from the West Indies, and he intends setting out next month 

se proposer de 
for the continent.— Will he go to Mont-Blanc ? He talks (of it) ; but I do not 

en 

think he will have time before the mnter. The kingdom of Naples 

sub.pr. en 
and the Venetian dominions are not very powerful. 

puissant 



LESSON XXXVI. 

2. Cases in which there is no Article used in French. 

First General Rule.- — There is no article used in French before 
the word DicUy taken in an indefinite sense, nor before the proper names 
of divinities, men, women, months, towns, villages, and places, when 
they are used in a general and indeterminate sense, although they, and 



248 SYNTAX.— OF THE ARTICLE. 

the word Dieu, may be preceded by a preposition : as,- — God is good, 
Dieu st bon. Minerva is prudent and Venus beautiful, Minerve est la 
prudtnce et Venus la heaute. London is considerable, Londres est 
considerable. I am going to Paris, je vais a Paris. He sets out for 
Amsterdam to-morrow, il -part demain pour Amsterdam, &c. 

When the cardinal or ordinal numbers are used in quotations after 
the words livre, book; chapitre, chapter; facje, page, &c., there is no 
article used before them in French, although the definite article the may 
be most commonly used, in such a case, with the ordinal numbers in 
English : as, — book the eighth, livre huit ou liuitieme. Chapter the 
ninth, chapitre neufou neuvieme ; and not livre le huit ou le huitieme ; 
chapitre le neuf ou le neuvieme. — We always say — tome premier, 
volume the first; section premiere, section the first; and not tome un; 
section une. But if the ordinal numbers, instead of following the words 
book, chaptu esson, page, &c. as above, should precede them as in 
these sentences: the tenth lesson ; the fifteenth day ; in this case, both 
the article and the ordinal number should be used in French as in 
English : Ex. — The tenth lesson, la dixieme legon. The fifteenth day, 
le quinzieme jour. 

The proper names St. Jean, St. Michel, St. Pierre, and St. Thomas, 
are used without any article, except when the days of their commemora- 
tion are mentioned, in which case the article feminine la is used before 
them, on account of the substantive fete being then understood : as, — 
la St. Jean, la St. Michel, la St. Pierre, la St. Thomas ; and, if we 
speak of any thing which is to take place on those days, a is required 
before the article : thus, — a la St. Jean, at Midsummer ; a la St, 
Michel, at Michaelmas, &c. 

Note. — The article le, du, or au, according to the import of the sen- 
tence, is required before the word dieu, taken either as the divinity of 
any individual religion or of a particular thing ; and les, des, or aux, 
before the plural dieux, when we speak of the Pagan divinities : as, — 
le Dieu des Chretiens, the God of the Christians. Mars est le dieu 
de la guerre. Mars is the God of war. Les dieux et les demi-dieux, 
the gods and demi-gods. 

Proper names of men and women, used in the plural, likewise take 
. the definite article les before them : as, — les Alexandres, les Cesars, &c. 

When the proper name of a man or woman, in the singular, is qualified by 
another word, the article /«■ or la is used hefore that word, with this difference, 
that, should it precede the proper name, it denotes a quality common to many, 
whereas, if it should follow, it expresses a distinctive quality : as, — /e gtyreral 
Wellington, the general Wellington; in which case, gtntral merely denotes the 
quality of general, which may belong to any body else ; but in this — Wellington le 
general; gentral ex^pvesses a quality which distinguishes Wellington from any other 
person who may have the same name. 

The article is likewise used before the names of women of light cha- 



SYNTAX.— OF THE ARTICLE. 249 

racter, when we speak of them in a contemptuous manner : as, — la 
Watson, the Watson. 

It is also used before the names of some Italian authors and painters: 
as, — ic Tasse, PArioste, le Titien, 

It must be noticed that, when the prepositions de and a come before a French 
proper name, which is preceded by the article le or la, the contraction never takes 
place : we therefore say — les tableaux de Le Brun, the pictures of Le Brun, and not du 
Brim, Le livre de Le Maire, Le Maire's book, and not du Moire ; whereas the con- 
traction is required before proper names which are not French,if, being preceded by 
the article, they come after the preposition de : as — les ouvrages du Dante et du 
Tasse, and not de le Dante et de le Tasse. 

Second General Rule. — No article is used in French before com- 
mon substantives taken in a general and indeterminate sense : — 

1 . When they are used by way of title or address, although the inde- 
finite article a or an may be prefixed to them in English : as, — a pro- 
clamation, proclamation; a new grammar, nouvelle grammaire ; a 
preface, preface, &c. 

2. To give more emphasis to the expression, when several substan- 
tives are enumerated, either as the subject or object of a verb, in which 
case, likewise, there is no article used in English : as, — citizens, 
strangers, enemies, people, kings, emperors, pity and revere him, cito- 
yens. Strangers, cnnemis, peuples, rois, empereurs, le plaignent et le 
reverent. 

3. After ne que, in the sense o^ nothing hut, in English : as, — I be- 
held nothing but solitude and desolation, Je n'ai vii qu^ abandon et 
solitude. 

" Je ne trouve partout que \kchejlaite7-ie, 
Qvi'injNSiice, inttrct, trahison, fourberie." — Moliere. 

4. In proverbs : as, — poverty is no crime, " pauvrete n'est pas vice.*' 
Content is beyond riches or the greatest wealth, " contentement passe 
richesse.^' 

5. When persons or things are addressed : as, — friends, let us fly to 
glory, amis, colons d la gloire. 

'* Fleurs charmantes, par vous la nature est plus belle." — Delille. 

But when common persons are addressed in the ordinary occurrences of life, 
the definite article is sometimes used and sometimes not, which can only be 
learned by practice: thus, for instance, we say without article — ecoutez, gar^on! 
hark ye, my lad ! whereas we express with the article — tcoutez, la Jille ! hark ye, 
my girl ! — if calling a man who sells umbrellas in the street, or a milk-woman, 
we may say : — marchand de parapluies ! or, Phomme aux parapluies ! and, la femme 
au lait ! 

6. After quel, quelle, quels or quelles, used to express surprise or 
admiration, although the indefinite article a or an be commonly used 
after lohat, in such a case, in English : as, — what a fine young lady ! 
quelle belle demoiselle ! what a fine man ! quel bel homme ! what a 

M 5 



250 SYNTAX.~OF THE ARTICLE. 

rogue ! quel coquin 1 and not quelle une belle demoiselle ! quel un hel 
homme ! quel un coquin ! 

Neither is a or an expressed in French, when it is used in English before a word 
which qualifies or determines what the preceding substantive is, as in this example : 
— the Uuke of York, a prince of the blood, le Due d' Fork, prince du sang ; and not 
tin prince du sang. 

A or an, used in the second part of a sentence, before a substantive which begins 
an observation on the preceding part, is likewise left out in French: as, — Mr. 
S* * * has canvassed two thousand votes, a sufficient number to exclude any other 
candidate, M. S* * * s'est assure deux mille voix, nonibre si/ffisant pour exclure tout 
autre catididat, and not — loi nombre suffisant, &c. 

7. When they are immediately preceded either by the verb avoir or fair e 
or by any other verb with which they express but one and the same idea. 
In this case, both the verb and the substantive generally are or could 
be expressed by one word in English : as, — avoir envie, to envy ; avoir 
pitie, to pity ; faire peur, to frighten, &c. The same takes place, when 
they are joined to a verb by a preposition : as, — trembler de froid, to 
shiver with cold ; agir en pere, en roi^ &c., to act like a father, a 
king, &c. 

8. When they are immediately preceded by nij neither and nor : as, 
— je n^ai ni or ni argent, I have neither gold nor silver. II ne peut 
souffrir ni femme ni enfans, he can bear neither wife nor children. 

If several substantives should be enumerated, the first being preceded by neither, 
while ?ior is understood before some of the others, ni must be repeated before each 
of them in French. 

9. After soit repeated, or soit in the first part of a sentence with ou 
in the second, in the sense of either and or : as, — soit erreur, soit 
mechancete de sa part, or soit erreur ou mechancete de sa part, either 
through error or wickedness on his part. 

10. After jamais, never : as, — jamais peut-etre femme ne fut plus 
cruelle, there was never perhaps a more cruel woman. 

11. Sometimes after tout, toute, all: as, — toute femme qu* ell e est, 
although she be a woman. 

12. After en, in, into : as, — etre en ville, to be in town, &c. 

But the definite article is sometiines used after en, in some particular cases which 
have been before mentioned under the article of prepositions : as, — en Phonneur de 
Madame T-' *, in the honour of Mrs. T* "•' ; en P absence de Mademoiselle C* *, in the 
absence of Miss C* * ; en la presence de Dieu, in the presence of God ; avoir con- 
Aance en la mistricorde du ?-ot, to trust to the king's mercy. 

13. Finally, when substantives are employed adjectively, no article is 
used before them in French, whether there be any used in English or 
not : as, — le mensonge est bassesse, lying is a base action. La severite 
dans les lois est humanite pour les peupleSj severity in laws is humanity 
towards the people, &c. 



SYNTAX.— OF THE ARTICLE, ' 351 



ESSAY XXXVI. 

Gdd is the supreme being who governs every thing by his power and 
supreme etre gonverner tout jmssance 

wisdom. Oxford, Bath, and Brighton are three fine towns.— ^ — When do you 

sagesse 

set out for Paris ? Next month. — Venus was one of the goddesses to whom the 

parfir procham deesse 

Pagans offered their incense and sacrifices. Alexander the Great and Napoleon 

Pdien offrir encem Alexandre-le-Grand 

are considered as the two most powerful monarchs that ever reigned. 

considerer puissant monarqiie sub, pret. regner 

What a difference between the worship of the God of the Christians and that 

entre culte Chretien 

of the gods of the Pagans ! A beautiful statue was erected to the god of war 

superbe on tlex^er 

in memory of that brilliant and ever memorable victory over the Thracians, 

mtmoire ci jamais sur Thraces 
^The heathens had a great number of gods and demi-gods. Come and* 

see me on Monday or Thursday. September and October are two fine months 

in England. The works of Dante are not better written than those of Tasso. — 

She will leave this house at Midsummer or at Michaelmas. Book the first. 

quitter 
Chapter the second. Section the twelfth. Rule the seventh. Volume the 

sixth. — Article the third. — A proclamation of his Majesty George the Fourth. — 

A new grammar of the French language. General reflections on the progress 

of the Christian religion among the heathens. A life of the much-lamented 

pdien trts-regretic 

Mr. D**. The Duke of lived formerly at* No. 21, Pali-Mall, St. 

demeurer autrefois 2 3 i 

James's ; but I do not think he lives there now. A history of France 

siib. pr. y a present 

from 1800 to the abdication of Napoleon the Great. 1 find every where 

depuis jusqu'a 

nothing but gross flattery, injustice, interest, treason, and imposture. Did you 

bas trahison Avez 

ever hear these proverbs : ^" Poverty is no crime j" " Content is the greatest 

entendre 
blessing P" Come, friends, let us fly to glory ! Delightful flowers ! nature is 

All07lS 

embellished by you. — Waiter ! give us a bottle of Madeira. — Hark ye, my girl ! 
embelli Gargon Madere 

take care (you put) clean sheets on my bed. Oysterwoman! I (want to*) 

avoir soin de mettre b/cmc des drops a huttris femme voudrcds 



252 SYNTAX.— OF THE ARTICLE. 

speak to you. — What a terrible noise these children make ! 1 did not know the 

bruit savoir 

Duke of * * * was a prince of the blood. He has been accused of 

sub. imp. accuser 

felony, a crime punishable by death. — Have pity (on the) poor. Mind 

felonie punissable de des pauvre Prendre garde 

(you do not) frighten her. You are shivering with cold, come and* 

de "^faire ^peur ^hd trembler de froid 

warm yourself. George the Third always acted as a good king and father. 

vous chauffer 
He knows neither history, geography, nor mathematics. 1 had neither ink nor 

paper. (Either through) negligence or forgetfulness on his part, the bill was 

Soit oubli de billet 

not presented in time. Never was any* man more cruel. He particularly 

presenter en 

recommended me to go there in the absence of Mrs. N* *. Always think you 

recornmander cT y petiser 

are in the presence of God. Although you have been sentenced to 

sub. pref. condamner a 

death, hope in the king's mercy, (he may forgive you). 

mo7-t mistricorde peut-etre vous pardonnera-t-il 



LESSON XXXVIL 

Continuation of the cases in which there is no article used in French. 

Third General Rule. — No article is used in French before words 
denoting the country of persons: as, — Frangais, French j Anglais, 
English, &c. ; nor hefore nouns expressing titles, dignities, trades, pro- 
fessions, or any other attribute, when they are not accompanied by an 
adjective or any other word modifying them, but are used by themselves, 
or are merely preceded by a tense of the verb etre, (to be,) although 
the indefinite article a or an be generally employed, in such a case, in 
English : as, — his father is an officer, son pere est officier. I am a 
surgeon, je suis chirurgien. You a surgeon ! vous chirurgien ! My 
sister is a milliner, ma soeur est marchande de modes; and not S07i 
pere est un officier ; je suis un chirurgien., &c. 

If these words should be modified by an adjective following them in 
French, or by some other expression which does not form an indivisible 
sense with them, they should then be preceded by the indefinite article 
W7Z, une, (a or an,) whereas the article is omitted, if the following word 
or words form an indivisible sense with them : as, — his father is a dis- 
tinguished officer, son pere est un officier distingue^ ou d\tn merite 
distingue, and not est officier distingue ; but we say — il est officier aux 
gardes, he is an officer in the guards, and not il est un officier, because 
officier and aux gardes cannot be divided without altering the sense. 



SYNTAX.— OF THE ARTICLE. 253 

Un or une, or the definite article le, la, les, or du, cle la, des, &c. 
according to the import of the sentence, is likewise used before these 
words, whether they be accompanied or not by an adjective, when they 
are preceded by a tense of the verb etre, having ce or c', for its antece- 
dent : as, — c*est un officier, he is an officer ; ce sont des marchandes 
de modes, they are milliners ; c^est un enfant, it is a child, &c. 

1/71 or u?ie is also used before the above qualifying expressions, when- 
ever the substantive or noun to which they refer depends on the pre- 
position de, or when en comes before the verb preceding them, in the 
sense of de lui or d^elle, which is frequently the case with the different 
tenses of the verb faire : as, — U a fait de sonjils un medecin, he has 
made his son a physician. J^en ferai un preire, I shall make a priest 
of him. 

Un or imc is likewise used in French before a substantive singular, 
referring to things, and specifying or qualifying another substantive, if 
a or an be employed before it in English ; but if a or an should not be 
expressed in English, and the word should be plural, the compound 
article des should then be used before it in French : as, — his house is a 
palace, c^est un palais que sa maison. Their houses are palaces, leurs 
maisons sont des palais, &c. 

Fourth General Rule. — 1. The preposition de or d\ only, is used 
in French before a substantive taken in a general raid indeterminate 
sense, after the words sorte, sort; genre, kind; espece, species-; melange^ 
mixture ; or any other of the same kind, leaving out the article a or an, 
which is sometimes used after of or from, in such a case, in English : 
as, — une sorte de fruit, a kind of fruit. // deshonore la profession 
d^auteur, he disgraces the profession of an author. 

2. The preposition de or d^ is also used in French, without any 
article, before a substantive which expresses, in an indeterminate man- 
ner, the nature, matter, quality, profession, or country of the preceding 
substantive, \vhich is usually placed the second in English and the first 
in French : as, — a gold snuff-box, une tabatiere d'or ; a marble table, 
une table de marbre ; silk-stockings, des bas de soie ; a French master, 
U7i maitre de Franpais ; Burgundy wine, du vin de Bourgogne, &c. 

But if we wish to specify a particular kind of thing, instead of ex- 
pressing in an indeterminate manner the nature, matter, or quality of 
the preceding noun, as gold and marble do in the above sentences, in 
which they denote any kind of gold and marble, the compound article 
du, des, or de la, de /', should then be used in French : as, — a table of 
Carara marble, une table du marbre qu'on tire de Carara. 

3. The preposition de or d' is likewise used in French, without any 
article, after the following adverbs of quantity, scarcity, or exclusion : 
— assez *, enough ; autant, as much, as many; beaucoup, much, many; 
combien, how much, how many ; jamais, never ; moins, less ; pas or 

* 1 . Asscz, enough, always precedes the substantive which it particularises in 



254 SYNTAX.— OF THE ARTICLE. 

point, no; peu, little, few; plus, more; rien, nothing; tard, so much, 
so many; trop, too much, too many; also after the words — nomhre, 
number ; quantite, quantity ; livre, pound ; mesure, measure ; aune, 
ell ; verge, yard ; hoisseau, bushel ; and any other word of quantity, 
when the following substantive is taken in an indeterminate sense : as, 
— give me an ell of riband, donnez-moi une aune de rub an ; meaning 
any kind of riband ; but if the following substantive should refer to 
something pointed at or alluded to in a particular and determinate man- 
ner : as, — give me an ell of the same riband which you have given to 
my sister ; the compound article du, des, or de la, de /', should then 
be used before it : as, — give me an ell of the same riband which you 
have given to my sister, donnez-moi une aune du 7neme ruban que 
vous avez donne a ma soeur ; and not de meme ruban que, &c. 

4. No article (but the preposition de or <i') is used in French before 
substantives taken in an indeterminate sense, after an adjective, a par- 
ticiple, or a verb governing de in French, whatever may be the prepo- 
sition on which these substantives depend in English : as, — thirsting 
after glory, avide de gloire, and not de la gloire ; loaded with honours 
comble dUionneurs, and not des honneurs. 

If any particular thing should however be specified in a determinate 
manner, the compound article du, des, or de la, de V, should be used 
before it : as, — he deserves the praises which are bestowed upon him, 
il est digne des louanges qu^on lui donne. 

5. No article whatever is used in French before substantives taken in 
an indeterminate sense, after the prepositions — a, at or to ; avec, with ; 
contre, against ; entre, between ; par, by ; sans, without ; and several 
others : as, — he spoke with courage, il par la avec courage ; he did it 
unaware, il le Jit par megarde, &c. But if any thing should be specified 
in a particular manner, un or une, or the definite article le, la, or les, 
according to the sense, should be used before it : as, — he fought with 



French, although enough follows it in English : as, — there were not dancers enough, 
il w'y avaif pas assez de danseurs. 

2. Bien, much, many, and la phtpart, the most part, require the compound 
article du, des, or de la, de /', before the next svibstantive : as, — he lias many 
friends, il a bien des amis. Most people believe it, la plnpart du monde le croit ; &c. 
and not il a bien d'amis ; la plupart de monde, Sec. 

3. When a substantive is used immediately after a verb employed negatively, 
and is followed by an adjective or an incidental sentence modifying it, the com- 
pound article du, des, or de la, de V , must be used before it, whereas de only is 
required, if it should not be modified by any other word : as, — I will not make you 
any frivolous reproaches, /e ne vous ferai point des reproches frivoles. I have not such 
low ideas, je n''ai point des seniimens si has. Never give any advice which it would 
he dangerous to follow, ne donnez jamais des conseils qiHl soit dangereux de suivre ; 
&c. But we say with de only: — she has no wit, elle rHa point ^esptit; they have 
not lent her any money. Us ne lui mt point pri^tt cC argent; because esprit and argent 
are not modified by any adjective. 

" N'afFectez point ici des soins si genereux." — Voltaire. 



SYNTAX.— OF THE ARTICLE. 255 

astonishing courage, il se hattit avec un courage etonnant ; against the 
house, contre la maison, &c. 

Neither is there any article used in French before substantives which 
are repeated with the prepositions c/e, en, or pour : as, — de jour en jour, 
from day to day ; de boutique en boutique, from shop to shop ; de place 
en placey from place to place ; mot pour mot, word for word, &c. 



ESSAY XXXVII. 

My father was a lieutenant (in the life-gwards) iinder Napoleon. — His 

des gardes du corps 

brother was a colonel in the eighteenth regiinent. — Are you a Frenchman or 

du 

an Englishman.?——! am a Scotchman. — She is an Italian. — I am neither 

Ecossids ne ni 

a Portuguese nor a Spaniard ; I am an Irishman. — One of ray sisters is a mil- 

Porttigais Espagnol Irlandcds 

liner, at the corner of Regent-street; and my eldest brother is a surgeon, in 

ain6 chiritrgien a 

the country. — ^That unfortunate man* died an atheist. — He was elected a 

mistrabie mourlr athee ilire 

member of parliament for the county of Middlesex. — This young clerg3Tnan 

parlement comtt ecc/esiastiqite 

will soon be a bishop. — The best coffee comes from Mocha, a town of 
bientot tveque meilleur cafe venir Muka 

Arabia Felix. Was not his father a general ? No, he was only a major.— 

P Arable- Heureuse rC que 

We have been to Normandy, a province of France. — Apelles was a painter ; 

drnis la Normundie peintre 

Phidias, a sculptor; and* Livy, an historian. — Socrates was a distinguished 

sculpteur Tite-Live historien cklebre 

philosopher ; and Harvey, a physician of great repute. — Was not Cicero a great 

mtdecin reputation Cic6ron 

orator, and Virgil an excellent poet ? — My cousin is an officer in the guards. — 

orateiir 

Who is that gentleman who is talking with that beautiful lady ? He is a 

monsieur parler a beau C 

captain of my acquaintance. — And (the one) near him? It is Mr. L**, the 
capitcdne connaissance celui qui est C 

barrister. Never mind what he says ; (he is but) a child. — Are you 

avocat Ne fait es pas attention a ce qi^ ce n^est qu' enfant 

acquainted with those ladies ? Yes ; they are opera dancers. — What do 

connattre ce de /' des danseuse 

you intend doing with your two sons ? I think I shall make a 

avoir intention de faire de croire que fcdre 

merchant of the elder, and a stock-broker of the younger. — Have you been 
n^gociant aine courtier de change 

to Mr. S.'s lately ? Yes. Is not his house a palace ? — We are exposed in 
* * ^ ^depuis^peu N^est-cepas expos6 



256 SYNTAX.— OF SUBSTANTIVES. 

this world to all sorts of infirmities and dangers. — He prescribed for* me a 
infirmiie ordonner 

mixture of rhubarb, nitre, and other drugs. The hieroglyphics of the 

mixtion rhubarbe drogue hieroglyphe 

Egyptians were figures of men, birds, animals, and reptiles. — (There are) 

Egyptien des /^oeVa 

two kinds of apples, to which shall I have the pleasure of helping you ?— I 
sorte desquelles offrir 

have a gold snufF-box, which (cost me) twenty-five pounds. She always 

m'a coide Hvres sterling 

wears silk-stockings.— Tell the music-master, when he (comes), that I shall 
porter au viendra 

not be able to* see liim to-day.— Waiter, give us a bottle of Rhenish wine.— 

poiwoir du Rhin 

Is the chamber-maid up stairs ?— Few people (are satisfied with the mere neces- 
chamhre fille en haid gens savent se contenier du pur ntces- 

saries of life). — I doubt whether they have two (hundred pounds weight) 

*«^''^ douter qu' sub. pr. quintaux 

of sugar in their warehouse. .Most young men boast too much. — Women 

magasin La plupart jeunes gens se vanter 
have frequently too much sensibility. — I do not entertain such mean opinions. 
souvent avoir des ^si ^bas Sentiment 

— Listen, my dear, never give advice (for which you may afterwards be 
Ecotder des conseils qui ptnssent vous attirer des 

upbraided). — The roads are lined with laurels, pomegranate trees, jessamines, 
reproches chemin bordt de laurier grenadier jasmin 

and other evergreen and ever blooming trees. He is not worthy of 

toujours vert tovjonrs fleuri digne 

the honours (which are bestowed upon him). — Mr. C** preached, yesterday, 

qu''on lui rend precher 

with force and eloquence. — The forty-second regiment fought with the greatest 

combattre 
courage and intrepidity. — She spends all her time in going from shop 

la plus grande passer a 

to shop, and street to street. 
de 



LESSON XXXVIII. 

Of Substantives, 

First General Rule. — When two or more substantives follow each 
other in a sentence, and the second substantive, if only two, or the third 
or fourth, &c. if more than two be used, is dependent on the first as its 
object, the preposition de, or, if the article be also required, du, de la, 
de r, or des, is used before the second, and repeated before those which 
succeed, according to its or their gender and number, in the sense of of 
OT from, in Enghsh : as, — the corruption of the heart is often the cause 



SYNTAX.— OF SUBSTANTIVES. 251 

of the corruption of the mind, la corruption du cceur est souvent la 
cause de la corruption de Pesprit. Peru has rich mines of gold and 
silver, le Perou a de riches mines d^or et d' argent. 

If, instead of the preposition de, the first substantive should govern 
a, in the sense of at or to in English; in this case — a, or, if the article 
be also required, au, a la, a V, or aux, should be used before the second 
substantive, and repeated before those which follow, according to its or 
their gender and number : as, — justice is obedience to written laws and 
constitutions, la justice est Poheissance aux lois ecrites et aux consti- 
tutions. 

Of the Possessive Case. 

Second General Rule. — Whenever a substantive is in the pos- 
sessive case in English, the preposition de, or, if the article be also 
required, du, de la, de l\ or des, is used before it in French, placing 
first the substantive or noun of which the possession is expressed, 
and which is placed the second in English: as, — Esop's fables, les 
fables d^Esope ; Miss Rose's book, le litre de Mademoiselle Rose ; 
&c. as if it w^ere in English — the fables of Esop, the book of Miss 
Rose. 

If the possessive case should be preceded by of the : as, — one of the 
king's palaces ; of the is sometimes expressed by des, and sometimes 
left out: as, — one of the king's palaces, lui des palais du roi ; two of 
the king's guards, deux gardes du roi. 

Should the possessive case depend on a tense of the verb to be, em- 
ployed in the sense of to belong to : as, — this is my sister's ; the pre- 
position a, ox, if the article be also required^ au, a la, a l\ or aux, must 
then be used in French before the substantive which is in the possessive 
case in English : as, — this is my sister's, ceci est a ma soeur. 

Tlie preposition a must likewise be used in French before a substan- 
tive which, being used in reply to a question, is in the possessive case in 
English, although in such a case the verb to be may not be expressed 
before it: as, — whose hat is this ? Mr. H.'s, a qui est ce chapeau? a 
M. H* *. 

If the substantive of which the possessive case expresses the posses- 
sion should be followed by the preposition of or fi'om, and a substantive 
with which it forms an indivisible sense : as, — the emperor'' s presence 
of mind is incredible ; I have read AnquetiTs History of France ; 
the substantive of which the possessive case expresses the possession 
should likewise be placed the first in French, with de or cV immediately 
before the substantive with which it forms an indivisible sense : then 
comes the substantive in the possessive case, preceded by de, or, if the 
article be also required, dii, de la, de l\ or des ; and sometimes, also, 
by par : as, — the emperor's presence of mind is incredible, la presence 
d'esprit de Vempereur est incroyable. I have read Anquetil's History 
of France, j'ai lu CHistoire de France de ou par Anquetil. 



258 SYNTAX.— OF SUBSTANTIVES. 

But when the substantive following that of which the possessive case 
expresses the possession does not form an indivisible sense with it, it 
is then necessary to give the sentence another turn : as, — five years of 
uninterrupted sufferings, borne with the greatest fortitude, have proved 
this great man's contempt of his enemies, cinq ans de souffrances 
continuelles, supportees avec un courage etonnant, ont montre le mepris 
que ce grand homme faisait de ses ennemis. 

The word house ^ which is frequently understood in English after a 
proper name, or any other word in the possessive case, must be ex- 
pressed in French by chez ; as, — he returned yesterday from Mr. 
Canning's in an hour, il revint hier de chez M. Canning en une 
heure. 

Third General Rule. — When two words following each other 
in English are so joined as to make a kind of compound word, the first 
expressing the matter, species, quality, or property of the second : as, 
— silk-stockings ; ecw-rings ; &c. the order of the words must be in- 
verted in French, in the same manner as for the possessive case, placing 
that which is the first in English the second in French, with the prepo- 
sition de or d' before it : as, — silk-stockings, des bas de soie ; ear-rings, 
des houcles d'oreilles ; a saddle-horse, un cheval de main ou de selle ; 
a hat-box, un etui de chapeau ; &c. ; as if it were in English, — stock- 
ings of silk ; rings of ears ; &c. 

If the first of the two words should denote the use of the second : as, 
— gun-poioder ; Jire-arms ; the dining-room; &c. the preposition a 
should then be used before it; whereas, if it should express any thing 
good to eat or drink, the compound article aw, a la, a l\ or aux, ac- 
cording to its gender and number, should be employed before it : as, — 
gunpowder, de la poudre a canon; fire arms, des armes ^ feu ; the 
dining-room, la salle a manger ; the milkman, I' homme au lait ; the 
05'ster-woman, la femme aux hmtres ; &c. 

Observe. — When two substantives are united by the preposition de 
in French, the second must be put in the singular, if it merely denotes 
the nature, quality, or substance of the first, in an indefinite manner, 
without any idea of plurality : as, — un marchand de vin, a wine- 
merchant ; des marchands de vin, wine-merchants ; des bas de soie, 
silk-stockings ; des caprices de femme, woman's whims; des plants de 
vigne, vine-plantations ; des langues de boeuf, de mouton, &c. neat's, 
sheep's tongues ; &c. 

But if the second substantive should express an idea of plurality, that 
is, an idea of several persons or things assembled or put together, and 
which could be taken separately and numbered, it should then be put in 
the plural : as, — une pension de dames, a ladies' school ; un bouquet 
de roses^ a nosegay of roses ; &c. 

What has just heen said, with reference to the preposition de, is applicable to the 
prepositions a, en, and sans, and any other uniting either two substantives together 
or an adjective or a verb with a substantive, always putting the substantive which 



SYNTAX.— OF SUBSTANTIVES. 259 

follows the preposition, either in the singular or plural, according as the sense 
requires it : thus we say — aller a pied, in the singular, because jyied is merely used 
in this sentence to specify, in an indefinite manner, the mode of going, and to dis- 
tinguish it from any other ; but we aaj—sai/ter a pieds joi?its, in the plural, because 
joints specifies and recalls the idea of two feet. 

The additional s and the apostrophe (') used to form the possessive 
case in English, are left out in French : as, — Miss Rose's book, le livre 
de Mademoiselle Rose, and not de Mademoiselle Roses. 

ESSAY XXXVIII. 

(We must observe) the rules of civility, decency, and good manners.— 
II faut observer honneteie bienseance moeurs 

There is no country that has so miany rich mines of gold and silver 

sitb. pr. mdant de 

as Peru. — The divine law prescribes obedience to kings and magistrates. — I do 

Perou prescrire 

not thiirk your sister's hat is here, unless Mrs. A** has 

-sub. pr. a moins qiee M'^' A** sub.pret. 

put it in the (bed-room). Have you in your library Hume's History 

mettre . chambre a coucher bibliothtque 

of England ? No j but I have (ordered) it at my bookseller's, and he 
^ ^ * ^fait ^demander ^ chez libraire 

is to* send it me to-morrow. — Mrs. L.'s sweet temper and great 
devoir envoyer aimabie disposition sa 

activity delight and enchant me. — I walked back yesterday from Mr, 

me charmer enchanter revenir ~a ^pied ^ de chez 

T.'s, in two hours, without (being) fatigued. — Where is my mother's pelisse? 
etre ■ 

This is my sister's. Will you give me Mr. W.'s umbrella ? Miss A* * has a 

paraphtie 
handsome pair of ear-rings, which have been (sent) to her from America, 
beau oreilles boticle on envoy'ae 

with a beautiful Indian sbawl. 1 want a pasteboard hat-box. - I 

superbe Indes schall avoir besoin rf' de carton chapeau 6tui 

question whether there is a better saddle-horse in all England.— You 

douter qit' sub. pr. de main 

ought to* keep fire-arms in your bed-room, for your safety during the 
devriez garder surete pendant 

night. (So I do ;) but they are useless, because I have no gunpowder. 

C^est ce quejefais inutile 

— ^That house consists of two large offices and a dining-room (on the) ground- 
en grand manger salle au rez de 

floor, two drawing-rooms on the first, six bed-rooms on the second, four on 
chaussie salon 

the third; two (water-closets), and a large garden. The milk-woman is] at 

cabinets d'aisances 

the door; where have you put the milk-pot? (Are there) as many silk-worms 

Y O't-il autant de soie ver 



260 SYNTAX.— OF ADJECTIVES. 

in Switzerland as in Italy? Do you come from the herb-market? No; I 

Suisse qte' ' herbes pi. marche 

coine from the hay-market. Go to the (fish-market), and try to get a 

foiH poissonnerie tacher de trouver 

nice salmon ; then call at the butcher's, and tell him to send us a breast 
hon ^ensuite ^passer chez ^dire ^ de poitrine 

of veal. Tell the oyster-woman to call the rabbit-man, who is over the 

a d^ lapin de V autre cote du 

way. How many wine-merchants are there in this town ? Three. This 

chemin 

couch and arm-chair are stuffed with (horse-hair). -Send me two sheep's 

canape fauteuil rembourrer de criti 

tongues and some qviince jelly.^ Do you know a good ladies' (boarding- 
cow?^ marmelade comiaitre pen- 
school,) (to which) I can send my little girl ? No ; I do not. What a 

sion ou sub. pr. poiivoir 

beautiful nosegay of roses ! 1 can leap over that brook with my* feet 

bouquet sauter ruisseau a 

close. Can you ? No ; I do not think I can. Shall we 

joint et vous le que sub. pr. le 

ride or (walk) there*? I should much prefer (going) in a* boat. 
alter a chevcd a joied beaucoup prtferer d^y oiler en 



LESSON XXXIX. 
Of Adjectives and Participles Adjectively used. 

PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS ON THE AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES AND 
PARTICIPLES ADJECTIVELY USED WITH THEIR RESPECTIVE SUBSTAN- 
TIVES, IN FRENCH. 

First General Rule. — Adjectives and participles adjectively used 
agree in French, in gender and number, with the substantives which 
they qualify : as, — a handsome woman, une belle fcmme ; a good man, 
un hon homme. 

Observe. — 1. Whenever the adjective feu, (late,) is employed before 
the article /(?, /a, or les, or before one of the possessive pronouns mon, 
ma, mes, it always remains indeclinable : as, — feu la princesse, the 
late princess ; feu via niece ; my late niece ; feu mes tantes, my late 
aunts; &c., but \{ feu should be preceded in French, as late is in English, 
by the definite article, or by one of the possessive pronouns wow, ma, 
mes, it would then become declinable, and agree in gender and number 
with its respective substantive : as,— /a feue princesse, the late 
princess; ma feue niece, my late niece; mes feues tantes, my late 
aunts; &c. 

2. When demi, half, and nu, naked, come before their respective 
substantives : as, — une demi-heure, half an hour ; une demi-lieue, half 
a league; nu-tete, bare-headed; nu-pieds, bare-footed; nu-jambes. 



OF THE AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 261 

bare-legged ; they remain indeclinable : but when nic follows its respec- 
tive substantive, it agrees in gender and number with it ; whereas demi^ 
in such a case, agrees only in gender with it, and never in number : as, 
— les pieds nus et les jamhes nues, without shoes and stockings ; la tete 
7iue^ bare-headed ; nne livre et dernie, a pound and a half; deux lieues 
et demie, two leagues and a half. 

" Pres du temple sacre, les graces rfe;«/-nues." — Voltaire. 

When demi comes before its respective substantive, it must be pre- 
ceded by un or une, according to the gender of the substantive, although 
a or an follows half in English : as, — un demi-cent^ half a hundred ; 
une demi-livre, half a pound, &c. but un or une is not used, when demi 
comes after its respective substantive : as, — deux cents et demi, two 
hundred and a half; deux livres et demie, two pounds and a half, &c. 
and not, deux cents et un demi ; deux livres et une demie, &c. 

Second General Rule. — Whenever an adjective, or a participle 
adjectively used, refers to two or more substantives, as in the following 
examples: — her father and brother are dead; this actor plays with 
exquisite taste and feeling ; his courage and boldness seem astonishing 
tome; she has astonishing sweetness and evenness of disposition ; it 
is placed after them in French, whether it precedes or follows in English, 
and is put in the plural masculine, if the substantives are all mascu- 
line, or of different genders ; but, if they be all feminine, it must be put 
in the plural feminine : as, — her father and brother are dead, son pere 
et son frere sont morts. This actor plays with exquisite taste and 
feeling, cet acteur joue avec une noblesse et un gout charmans. His 
courage and boldness seem astonishing to me, sa hardiesse et son 
courage me semblent etonnans. She has an astonishing sweetness and 
evenness of disposition, elle a une douceur et une egalite d'esprit mer- 
veilleuses. 

When the substantives are of different genders, as in the above examples, and the 
adjective referring to them has not the same termination in the masculine and 
feminine, the ear and taste require that the substantive which is masculine should 
be placed the last in French, that is, the nearest to the adjective : as, — cet acteur 
joue avec nne noblesse et tm gout charmcois, and not avec un gout et une noblesse char- 
mans. Sa hardiesse et son courage rne semblent etonnans, and not so>i courage et sa 
hardiesse me setnb/ent etonnans : because charmant and etonnant make charmante and 
etonnante in the feminine. 

If the substantives should be synonymous, as in the following exam- 
ple : — his whole life has been nothing but continual labour and occu- 
pation ; the adjective agrees then with the last substantive only, with- 
out expressing the conjunction which may be used in English : as, — his 
whole life has been nothing but continual labour and occupation, toute 
sa vie n^a ete qu'un travail, quhine occupation continuelle. The same 
takes place, when the substantives are not synonymous, if we dwell more 
upon the last than on the others, either because it explains the preceding 



262 OF THE AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 

ones, or is more energetic, or because it is of such moment that the 
others are nearly forgotten : as, — 

— — — " . . . ,le fer, le bandeau, la flamrae est toute preteP 

Racine, Iphigenie, Act iii. Sc. 5. 

Observe. — If any one of the adjectives which usually precede their 
respective substantives in French, should be used to qualify two or 
more substantives in English : as, — great events and revolutions fol- 
lowed the death of Ccesar ; it should be repeated before each, sub- 
stantive in French, and agree with it in gender and number : as, — great 
events and revolutions followed the death of Caesar, de grands evenemens 
et de grandes revolutions suivirent la mort de Cesar. 

Third General Rule. — When two or more adjectives qualify the 
same substantive in English : as, — a sober, regular, and laborious life 
strengthens health ; they are generally placed after it in French, whe- 
ther they precede or follow it in English, and agree with it in gender and 
number, using the conjunction et before the last : as, — a sober, regular, 
and laborious life strengthens health, une vie moderee, reglee, et la- 
bor ieuse for tijie la sante. We however say — ma chere et tendre amie, 
my sweet, lovely friend. Un grand jeune homme, a tall young man. 
Ma pauvre petite enfant, my sweet little child. Une longue et char- 
mante lettre, a delightful long letter; and not, mon amie chere et 
tendre, &c. 

But when the adjectives, being considered each separately with the 
substantive, serve to qualify a thing which is an only one of its kind : 
as, — the French, Italian, and English languages ; if the substantive 
should be in the plural in English, it must be put in the singular in 
French, and be preceded by the definite article le, la, or /', which is 
likewise repeated before each of the adjectives : as, — the French, Italian, 
and English languages, la langue Fran^aise, PItalienne, et PAnglaise. 

" La langue Anglaise, /'Espagnole, 

Cedent a la Frangaise en douceur, en beauts ; 
Depuis Deucalion, de Tun a I'autxe pole, 
Toutes lui cedent en clarte." 

Observe. — All adjectives adverbially taken, that is, which only ex- 
press an action or circumstance of the verb to which they are joined, 
without referring to any substantive, are always written in the singular 
masculine : as, — those ladies speak low, ces dames 'par lent bas. These 
flowers smell good, ces fieurs sentent bon, &c. 

ESSAY XXXIX. 

The victory which Napoleon obtained in that country, was disadvantageous 
victoire remporter pays disavuntageux 

to the French and prejudicial to the English. That lady is beloved by her 

prejudiciable cherir de 



OF THE AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 263 

husband; he caresses and* adores her, It is not improbable that the late 

mari caresser adorer 

queen had several good qualities. -I was obliged to wait for half 

reine rC sub. pret. plusieurs qualite cTatiendre 

an hour. Give me half a pound of sugar. (It is) scarcely half a league 

II y a a peine lieue 

from (this place). 1 cannot go there in an hour and a half. The 

ici y en 

beggar (I relieved) this morning, vras bareheaded and barefooted. 

mendiant a qui fai donni raumone 

— His legs were naked. — They walked yesterday five leagues and a half, in 
^11 ^les * ^(tvoir ^ fcdre 

six hours and a half. Mr. T* * * plays with exquisite taste and feeling. ^The 

jouer charmant noblesse 

French fight with astonishing courage and intrepidity. 1 (never saw) a 

se buttre etonnant infrepidiie n^ ax jamais vu de 

lady who united such an admirable sweetness and equanimity of temper. 

sub, imp. reunir si merveilleux tgalitk esprit 

Modesty and disinterestedness deserve to be praised and admired, when they 
desinteressement miriter d' loner 

originate in good and laudable motives. His brother and sisters are not happy, 

venir de 
— Their whole life has been (nothing but) continual labour and occupation. — 
«' qu' 

Great events and revolutions happened at his death. Do not give me a long and 

arnver 

tedious book, or I shall not read it. What have I to dread from a just, 

ennmjeux lire a redouter 

good, and merciful king ? Experience will always teach that a sober, 

eltment apprendre 

regular, and laborious life fortifies health ; whereas a dissipated and idle life 

uu lieu qit' dissipc oisif 

destroys it. Will you show me the letter of that tall young man to his sweet 

ditrmre cker 

and lovely friend? Yes, (here it is;) but mind you* do* not* lose 
tendre amie la void prendre garde de perdre 

it.' Another time, I shall write you a delightful long letter : to-day, I 

fois '^charmant ^et ^ 

(can only inform you) that Mrs. S.'s interesting little child is dead, 

n'f« que le temps de vous dire charmant enfantf. 

Nobody is ignorant that the French, English, and Spanish languages 

ignorer sub. pr. 

are inferior to the Italian in sweetness ; but (it is universally acknowledged) 

le ccder douceur aussi tout le monde convient 

that the French (is superior for) its* perspicuity and beauty. 1 

femporte sur ioutes les autres en clarte en 

am delighted to hear you say these flowers smell so sweet. 
charme de sentir ban 



264 OF THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 

LESSON XL. 

Of the Place of Adjectives. 

First General Rule. — The following adjectives, ancien^ aucuriy 
beau, bon, cher, digne, divers, grand, gros, habile, jeune, jolt, 
mauvais, mechant, moindre, meilleur, nouveau, 'petit ^ saint, seul, sot^ 
vieux, vieil, vilain, triste, or their feminine, usually precede their re- 
spective substantives in French, when used alone with them : as, — a 
young man, un jeune homme ; an old woman, une vieille femme ; a 
fine hat, un beau chapeau ; &c.* 

But if the above adjectives should be modified by one of the following 



* Observations on some adjectives which have a different meaning, according as 
they precede or follow their respective substantives. 

1. Grand, used with reference to men, and coming before the word homme: 
as, — tm grand homme, signifies a man of great merit ; but, when it is placed after the 
word homme, it has reference to size: as, — un homme grand, a tall man. When 
grand is used with reference to women, it always applies to size : as, — nne grande 
femme, a tall woman. It likewise always applies to size, when used with reference 
to men, if any other adjective expressing some circumstance or quality of the body 
should follow ; as, — tin grand homme sec, a tall thin man. 

2. Gros, referring to women, and placed after the vroxxS. femme, signifies pregnant : 
as, — vne femme grosse, a pregnant woman; but, placed before it, it means stout: as, 
-—une grosse femme, a stout woman. 

3. Un hon homme, une bonne femme, most frequently signify a silly man 
or woman ; and un homme hon, une femme bonne, a good, charitable man or 
woman. 

4. Un brave homme, une brave femme, a good man or woman ; and tm homme 
brave, une femme brave, an intrepid man or woman. 

5. Un cruel homme, une cruelle femme, a man or woman who cannot be moved 
by entreaties ; and im homme cruel, une femme cruelle, an inhuman man or 
woman. 

6. Unefat/sse clef, a false key ; and ime cleffausse, a wrong key. 

7. Un galant homme, a polite man ; un homme galant, an admirer of the ladies. 

8. Uti honneie homme, an honest man; rm homme honnete, a civil man; vne 
honneie femme, a correct woman. 

9. Des honnetes gens, honest people ; des gens honnetes, civil and polite people. 

10. Un malhonnele homme, a dishonest man; un homme malhonntte, an uncivil 
man. The same rule is applicable io femme and_9'e/2.s, 

11. Unnouvel habit, a new coat or another coat; that is, a coat different from 
the one in \ise or just left off ; and un habit nouveau, a coat of a new fashion; un 
habit nevf, a coat just come from the tailor and which has not been worn, or, at least, 
very little. 

12. Un pauvre homme, ti7ie pauvre femme, B. man or woman of little merit; and 
un homme pativre, vne femme pauvre, a poor luan or woman. 

13. U71 petit homme, une petite femme, a. man ox ■svorxxan oi a small size; and ?,'« 
homme petit, a mean man. 

14. 1/71 plaisant homme, a ridiculous man ; tm homme plaisant, a facetious man. 

15; Un plaisant conte, a story without probability or truth; U7i co7ite plaisant, an 
amusing story. 

16. Un simple homme, an only or a single man ; U7i homme simple, a simpleton. 

17, Une sage femme, a midwife ; une femme sage, a wise woman. 



OF THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 265 

adverbs — ires, fort, bieji, ext)-eme?nent, plus, nioins, assez ; or if they 
should be joined by a conjunction to another adjective qualifying also 
the same substantive, they then sometimes follow it : as, — it is a very 
dull town, c''est une ville tres-triste. She is a very amiable woman, 
c'^est une femme extremement aimahle. The days are long and fine, 
les jours sont longs et beaux ; &c. but we say — a good and happy year, 
ujie bonne et heureuse annee. 

When spul means onbf, it usually precedes its respective substantive: as, — it 
is the only hat I have, c'est le seul chapeau que j^nie ; but when it signifies alone, 
it commonly follows it: a.s, — les enfcms sont seuls, the children are alone. 

Cher, (dear,) denoting affection, and not having any object depending on it, 
always precedes its respective substantive: as, — my dear friend, w?o« cher ami; 
but, if it shoidd have an object depending on it, or if it should express the price of 
any thing, it should always follow its respective substantive: as, — that woman is 
dear to her children, cette femme est chtre a ses enfans. This lace is dear, cette den- 
ielle est chere. 

Bon and digne, having an object depending on them, likewise follow their re- 
spective substantives: as, — a man good to every body, loi homme bon enters tout le 
monde ; that action is not worthy of him, cette action n^ est pas digne de ltd. 

Triste, used in the sense of dull, sad, generally follows its respective substantive : 
as, — visage triste, air triste, a. sorrowhil countenance; i/ne ville triste, a dull town; 
but, in the sense of i/i/erior, melancholy, miserable, it precedes it : as, — c'est un triste 
orateur, he is a miserable speaker ; un triste accident, a melancholy accident. 

Second General Rule. — The following adjectives — attentif, atten- 
tive; blancj white; phivieux, rainy; personnel, personal; instruit, 
learned, or their feminine; and, in general, all those not mentioned iu 
the preceding rule, usually follow their respective substantives in French, 
although, in some instances, some will equally well precede or follow 
them, according to taste, and the harmony of the sentence : as, — a 
white handkerchief, nn mouchoir blanc ; a learned man, un homme 
instruit; &c. 

Observe. — Any adjective, having an object depending on it, is generally placed 
after the substantive to which it refers : as, — a misfortune common to all, un mal- 
heiir commun a tons ; but, should a substantive have an object depending on it, and 
be qualified by an adjective, the adjective should precede the substantive, in order 
that the substantive may immediately be followed by its object: as, — the incom- 
parable author of Vert-Vert, P incomparable anteiir de Fert-Fert, and not fauteur 
incomparable de Fert-Fert ; or, if the adjective should be of that class of adjectives 
which do not precede their respective substantives, it should be placed after the 
object of the substantive, but not immediately after the substantive : as, — a coarse 
rush mat, une natte de j'onc grossitre, and not — une natte grossiere dejonc. 

Third General Rule. — Past participles of verbs, adjectively used, 
are generally placed in French after the substantives which they qua- 
lify : as, — a confused thought, une pensee embrouillee ; a well-peopled 
town, une ville bien peuplee ; &c. 

Maudit, cursed; and pretendu, pretended; must be excepted, as 
they precede their respective substantives : ex., — a cursed trade, un maudit 
metier; a pretended wit, un pretendu savant. 

N 



266 OF THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 

ESSAY XL. 

An amiable woman gives to (everything) she says an inexpressible grace. — I 
rtpandre sur tout ce qzi' inexprimable grace 

like a young man who follows the good advice (which is given him). — 

suivj'e conseils m. pi. qiCon lui donne 

He was a great man— Look at that tall thin man. — He had on* a blue coat, 
C grand sec bleu 

well made, and of superfine cloth. — In a* fortnight or three weeks, the 

faire superjin drap Dans quinze jours semaine 

days will be long and fine. — My little nephew comes very regularly, (every 

neveu regulierement toiis les 

new) year's day, to* wish me an agreeable and happy new* year. — 
premiers ^de Van ^jours pi. souhaiier bon ann6e 

Besides the different apartments, which I have mentioned to you, there is a 

Outre appartement dont parler 

very large closet adjoining the kitchen, in which two servants might 
grand cabinet contigu a ctdsine domestiqiie poiirraient 

sleep very well. — On entering my sick friend's room, I found a very 
'^coucher ^ ^ Kn entrer dans malade la chambre trouver 

young doctor, (explaining) to a very clever man of my acquaintance, the cause 
docieur qui expliquait habile 

of the patient's illness. My dear child, is not your brother equally dear to 

malade indisposition tgalement 

your father (with yourself) ? — (Is such) an action worthy of a man who boasts 
que vot/s Est-ce la digne se vanter 

(of his civility and attention to) every body ? Yesterday, your sister looked 

d'etre civil et officieux envers avoir fair 

very sorrowful ; I am afraid she has experienced some grievous 

triste craxndre sub. pret. eprouver quelque fdcheiix 

disappointment. — Very distressing intelligence (has been forwarded to us) 

conire-temps ^Une ^ ^affiigeayit '^noiivelle hious ^avons ^regu 

from India: it is the death of the governor's daughter, a* young lady 
■* ^ mort gouverneur demoiselle 

of the most fascinating manners, and of whom the most flattering 
qui 6tait remplie attrayant charmes m.pl, ^ b 6 

hopes were entertained. — Your son has made astonishing progress in his studies. 
* ^on \oncevoir etonnant progres 

— New York, in America, is a well-peopled town. — A prejudiced mind is the 
en peuplt prtvenu 

sovice of innumerable errors. — Every minister who prefers the public good to 
innombrable Tout 

his private interest is beloved by his countrymen. — What is geo- 

particulier aimer de compatriote Qu'est-ce que c'est que 

graphy? The description of the terrestrial globe, — I am extremely sorry 

Cest terrestre fdcM 

that the incomparable author of Vert-Vert is dead. — The only bed 

sub.pr. seul 

(there is) in his house is a coarse rush mat. 
quHl y ait jonc natte. ♦ 



OF THE GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 267 

LESSON XLI. 

Of the Government of Adjectives. 

General Rule. — Whenever an adjective or a participle acljectively 
used governs a preposition in English, that preposition, whether it be 
aty to, of, from, ivith, by, in, on, upon, about, or any other, must be 
construed into French by the preposition which the French adjective or 
participle requires ; and if it be de or a, and the article be at the same 
time required, dii, de la, de P, or des, must be used instead of de, and 
au, a la, a V, or aux, for a, according to the gender and number of the 
substantive before which either is to be placed : as, — I am satisfied with 
him, je suis content de lui ; because content governs de. She is sen- 
sible of reprimands, elle est sensible aux reprimandes ; because sensible 
requires a. 

To facilitate the application of the above rule, some of the adjectives 
most in use are quoted hereafter, with the prepositions which they 
govern. 

1. A list of adjectives and participles which govern the preposition a, 
or, if the article be also required, au, a la, a 1', or aux, before the 
succeeding word which depends on them. 

Accessible, accessible. Exact, exact. Prejudiciable, hurtful. 

Adoune, addicted. Facile, easy. Pret, read;/. 

Adroit, dexterous. YovoxsXAq, favourable. 7xon\\}i, quick. 

Agreable, agreeable. Habile, skilful. Propice, propitious. 

A\uiii(;,ftied. Impenetrable, i^rtpenetrahle. VroTpve, proper. 

Alerte, alert. Inabordable, inaccessible. Rebelle, rebellious. 

Anterii'ur, anterior, fore- Inaccessible, inaccessible. Redoutable,/brm/f/a6/e. 

most. Inconcevable, inconceivable. Ref'ractaire, refractory. 

apre, rough. Inconnu, unknown. Semijlable, alike. 

Ardent, ardent. Indocile, untractable. Sensible, sensible. 

Attenant, next, adjoining, Infidele, unfaithful. Sourd, deaf. 

contiguous. lugenieux, ingenious. Sujet, subject. 

Attentif, attentive. Insensible, insensible. Siiperieur, superior ; (this 

Cher, dear. Lent, sloio. adjective governs en, iu 

Cmwmwn, common. Nuisible, /(«/»'//«/. the sense of ?'/?.) 

Contbrme, conformable. Occupe, busy. Supportable, supportable, to- 

Qon\xin\Q, coidrary. OdaQwx., odious. lerable. 

Convenable,/^ Pareil, like. Terrible, terrible. 

Desagreable, disagreeable. Porte, inclined, prompted. Utile, useful. 

Docile, docile, tractable. Vxeci^uTi., precious. TagXc, zealous. 

Enclin, inclined. Preferable, preferable. 

and, in general, all those which denote aptness, fitness, inclination, 
ease, readiness, or any habit, whatever preposition they may govern in 
English. 

2. A list of adjectives and participles which govern the preposition 
de, or, if the article be also required, du, de la, de 1', or des, before 
the next word which depends on them. 

Absent, absent. Adore, adored. AfFranchi, set free. 

AccMse, accused. A ff aw. e, greedy of, Aise, glad. 

N 2 



268 



OF THE GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 



Dependant, de-pendenty de- 



Altere, thirsting after. 

Anaovueux, m love with. fenaing. 

Approchant, something like. Desireux, desirous. 

Arriere, in arrears, behind Different, different, differ- 



hand. 
Aucun, none. 
A V e VI gl e, hlin ded. 
Avide, greedy, eager. 
Capable, capable. 
Charge, charged, loaded 

with. 
Charme, charmed, 
Cheri, cherished. 
Comble, loaded tvith. 
Complice, accomplice. 
Content, contented. 
Contiit, repentant. 
Coupable, guilty. 
CoLivonne, crowned. 
Denue, void. 



xng. 
Digne, worthy. 
Done, endowed. 
Enchante, enchanted. 
Enivre, drunk, infatuated. 
Ennuye, tired, tvearied. 
Envieux, envious. 
Exempt, exempt, free. 
Fatigue, fatigued. 
Fier, proud. 
Fou, mad, very fond. 
Honteux, shameful. 
Incapable, incapable. 
Independant, independent. 
In digne, zmvjorthy. 



InsdiiiahlQ, insatiable. 

Ivre, drunk, drunken. 

Jaloux, jealous. 

^oyewx, joyful. 

Las, fatigued, tired. 

Libre, j'ree. 

Mecontent, dissatisfied. 

Orgueilleux, prottd. 

V\ein, full. 

Ravi, delighted, pleased. 

Rayonnant, radiant. 

Redevable, indebted. 

Rempli,///^^/. 

Satisfait, satisfied, contented. 

Soigneux, careful. 

Sur, sure. 

Taxe, taxed. 

Tributaire, tributary. 

Vide, void, empty. 



and, in general, all those which signify plenty, scarcity, or want*. 



* General observations on several adjectives and participles which^ according to the 
sense in which they are used, reqtnre different prepositions before the words which they 
govern. 

1. Adroit, skilful in, generally requires a before its object, although in be used in 
English : as, — elle est adroite a ses exercices, she is skilful in her exercises. De must 
however be used, and not a, when adroit refers to any part of the body : as, — cet 
hommc est ad7~oit de la main gauche, that man is clever with his left hand. 

2. Affable, civil to, requires a or envers : as, — il est affable a ou en vers tout le 
monde, he is civil to every body. 

3. Anime, animated, requires de, in the sense of with or bt/ ; pour, in the sense of 
for; and u, in the sense of to: as, — he is animated with a noble zeal for his 
country, il est a?iime d'?m bean zele pour sa patiie. They were incited to fight by 
the sound of instruments, ils ttaient animes au combat par le so7i des instrumens. 

4. Assidu, assiduous, requires auprts de before the names of persons: as, — il etait 
fort assidu aupres de M^^'^ S''--'^, he was very attentive to Miss S** ; but it requires 
a before verbs in the present of the infinitive, and before the names of things : as, — 
il est assidu a faire sa cour, he is an assiduous courtier. Jls ne sont pas assidus a 
Vetude, they are not assiduous at study. 

5. Aveuqle, blind, requires sometimes sur, and sometimes dans: as, — elle est 
aveugle sur 5^5 dtfauts, she is blind to her own defects. Les amans sont aveugles 
dans lenrs dtsirs, lovers are blind in their desires. 

6. Ctlcbre, celebrated, requires sometimes /;«?-, and sometimes en : as, — il est c^lebre 
par ses vertus, par ses crimes, he is celebrated for his virtues, notorious for his crimes. 

" Cettc mer oij tu cours est celebre en naufrages.'' — Boileau. 

7. Or?/, polite to, requires envers, and sometimes a Pe'gard de : as, — il est civil 
envers tout le monde, he is polite to every body. // ri'est pas civil a I'egard de ^^a- 
domestiques, he is not civil to his servants. 

8. Comparable, comparable, to be compared with, requires a and also avec: — 
as, — les biens de ce monde ne sont pas comparables a ceux de Pl'ternite, the treasures 
of this world are not to be compared Avith those of eternity. L'espiit Ji'est pas 
comparable avec la vxatitre, the mind is not to be compared v/ith matter. 



OF THE GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 269 

The following adjectives, beau, hon^ doux, agreahle, desagreable, 
facile^ aise, utile, inutile, naturel, horrible, dangereux, difficile, dur, 

9. Co/w/jtei/e, accountable, governs two objects, and requires <ior e/irer* before that 
which refers to persons or personified objects, in the sense of to in English, and de 
before that which refers to things, in the sense of /or: as, — not/s sonunes comptahl^s a 
Dieii ou envers Dieu de nos actions, et a la fatrie de nos biens, we are accountable to 
God for our actions, and to our country for our wealth. 

10. Confus, confused, ashamed, refers to persons, and requires sometimes de be- 
fore the next substantive : as, — je suis tout con/us de Chonneur que vous me faites, I 
am quite confused at the honour you do me. 

11. Consolant, consoling, requires pour before substantives and pronouns, and 
de before verbs in the present of the infinitive : as, — il sera bien consolant pour 
moi de revoir mes enfans, it will be very consoling for me to see my children 
again. 

12. Constant, constant, governs sometimes dans, and sometimes en: as, — il est 
ferme et constant dans Padversite, he is firm and constant in adversity, Elle est 
constanie en amour ou dans ses amours, she is constant in love. 

13. Connu, known, requires de — in the sense of 6//, and a — in the sense of to : as, 
— he is known by every body, il est connu de tout le monde. This person is not 
known to me or to him, cette personne ne vilest ou ne lui est pas connue ; in this case, 
me and lui stand for « 7noi and a lui. 

14. Cruel, cruel to, requires sometimes a, and sometimes envers, before nouns 
referring to persons ; but it generally governs a before those which refer to things : 
as, elle-est cruelle envers ses enfans, she is cruel to her children. Ce roi est cruel a 
son pays, this king is cruel to his countr}-. 

15. Curieux, curious in, requires sometimes de, and sometimes en, before a 
substantive, but always de before a verb in the present of the infinitive : as, — 
vous faites une rechtrche trop curieuse de ma conduite, you look too narrowly into 
my conduct. Cetie femme est curieuse en habits, that woman has a good taste for 
dress. Tousles homines sont curie ux de savoir Pavenir, every man is curious to read 
futurity. 

16. Dissolu, dissolute, loose, requires sometimes dans: as, — cet homme est dissolu 
dans ses moeurs, that man is loose in his manners. 

17. Endurci, hardened, is used with daiis, a, and conlre : as, — etre endurci 
dans le crime, aux coups de la fortune, aux louanges^ aux affronts, contre Padver- 
site, to be hardened in crime, inured to the reverses of fortune, to praises, insults and 
adversity. 

18. Eiranger, stranger, foreigner, requires sometimes a, sometimes en, and some- 
times dans: as, — il est ttranger en mtdecine, he docs not understand any thing of 
physic. // est ttranger dans ce pays, he is a foreigner in this country. Ses habitudes 
sont ttrangtres a toute intrigue, his habits are strangers to intrigue. 

1 9. Expert, versed in, requires en : as, — cet homme est expert en chirurgie, that 
man is versed in surgery. 

20. Fertile, fruitful, requires en : as, — ce pays est fertile en hlk et en vin, this 
country is fruitful in corn and wine. 

21. Fidcle, faithful, requires a before nouns referring to persons, and e« before 
those which refer to things : as, — -je suis fidcle a mon roi, I am faithful to my king. 
Elle est fidele en ses pi'omesses, she is faithful to her promises. 

22. Habile, clever, requires sometimes dans, and sometimes eii, before sub- 
stantives ; but always a before verbs in the present of the infinitive : as, — il est 
habile dans les affaires, he is clever in business. P'otes etes habile en toutes choses, 
you are clever at every thing. Elle est habile a tout faire, she is clever in doing 
every thing. 

23. Heureux, happ}^, requires sometimes de, and sometimes en, before substan- 
tives ; but generally de before verbs in the present of the infinitive : as, — chacun 



270 OF THE GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 

fadievx, and several others, followed by a verb in the present of the 
infinitive mood, require the preposition de before it, when they are pre- 

d^evx servait sa patrie, heureux du hien quHl faisait, each of them served his 
country, happy in the good which he did, Le p/us heureux en amour n'est pas 
toujours le plus tranquille, the most fortunate in love is not always the most tranquil, 
Je suis heureux ^avoir obienu son amitie, I am happy in having obtained her 
friendship. It however requires also a, before verbs in the present of the in- 
finitive, when it means swccess/M/; as, — ila un esprit prompt a conce\:oir les chases, 
et heureux a les exprimer, he is quick in conceiving things, and happy in expressing 
them. 

24. Ignorant, ignorant, requires sometimes en, sometimes sur, and sometimes 
de : as, — elle est fort ignoranie en gtographie, she does not understand a word 
of geography. // est ignorant siir ces matih^es, he is ignorant on those subjects. 
Jl est tout-a-fait ignorant des chases du monde, he is quite ignorant of worldly affairs. 

25. Impatient, impatient, and incertain, uncertain, require de : as, — je mis im- 
patient de savoir si elle viendra, I am impatient to know whether she will come. // 
est incertain de ce qui arrivera, he is uncertain of what will happen. 

26. />i?co/«so/a6/e, inconsolable, governs r/(?, and sometimes sur: as, — elle est incon- 
jiolahle de la perte de son amant, she is inconsolable for the loss of her lover. II est 

inconsolable ^\\x cette mort, he is inconsolable for that death. 

27. Indulgent, indulgent, kind, requires envers : as, — elle est bien indulgente envers 
ses enfans, she is very kind to her children. 

28. Inftrieur, inferior, requires a before nouns referring to persons, and en before 
those which refer to things : as,— z'/ est inftrieur a so7i frere en science, en talens et en 
vertus, he is inferior to his brother in science, talents and virtue. 

29. Inquiet, uneasy, requires sometimes de, and sometimes sur, before substan- 
tives ; but always de before verbs in the present of the infinitive: as,— /e suis fort 
inquiet sur son sort, I am very uneasy about his fate, Je suis inquiet de ne pas 
recevoir de ses nouvelles, I am uneasy at not receiving any news from her. 

30. Ingenieux, ingenious, requires pour before substantives, and a before verbs in 
the present of the infinitive : as, — il a P esprit inghneux pour les plaiairs des autres, he 
has an ingenious mind for the pleasures of others. Le vice est ivginieux a se degniser, 
vice is ingenious in disguising itself. 

31. /;?_9ro/, ungrateful, requires envois before nouns referring to persons, and a 
before those which refer to things: as, — il est ingrat envers son bienfaiteur, ingrat 
envers Dieu meme, he is ungratefvd to his benefactor, ungrateful to God himself. 

" Ingrat a tes bontes, ingrat a ton amour." — Voltaire. 
" Blalheur au citoyen ingrat a sa patrie." — Delii.i.e. 

32. J««o/ew;, insolent, requires sometimes f/a«5, sometimes en, and sometimes avec : 
as, — les ames basses sont insolentes dans la bonne fortune, low minds are insolent m 
prosperity. Ce vnlel est insolent en paroles, en injured, this footman is saucy in his 

• expressions ; combien de jeunes gens sont insolens avec les femmes I how many young 
men are insolent to women ! 

33. Lent, slow, requires dans before substantives, and « before verbs m the present 
of the infinitive : as,—;/ faut etre lent dans le choix de ses amis, one must not be 
hasty in choosing a friend. Soyez lent a punir, be slow to punish. 

34. Mist rwor dieu X, compassionate, requires envers: £is,—il est misericordieux en- 
vers les pauvres, envers les malheureux, he is compassionate to the poor and the 
imfortunate. 

35. Necessaire, necessary, requires sometimes a, and sometimes poz^r ; as, /a 
respiration est ?zecessaire a la vie, breathing is necessary to life.; la foi est ahsolument 
necessaire pour le salut, faith is absolutely necessary to salvation. _ 

36. OJficieux, kind, requires e?ivers: as,— il est ojficieux envers tout le monde, he is 
kind to every body. 



OF THE GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 271 

ceded by a tense of the verb etrCy having the pronoun il taken indeter- 
minately for its subject : as, — il est, il etait, il sera, il serait, &c. but 
they require a before the next infinitive, when the tense of the verb etre, 
b}^ which they may be preceded, has the demonstrative pronoun ce or 
cela, or a substantive for its nominative : as, — il est doux ^'observer 
les lois de Vamitie ; il est beau de mourir maitre de runivers ; il est 
inutile de la contredire ; il est danger eux d'y aller ; il est difficile 
de comprendre cela; il est dur, fdcheux de se voir prefer er un sot; 
but we say — cest beau a voir ; la bouillante jeunesse est facile a 
seduire ; c^est difficile a comfrendre ; il n^y a point de douleur plus 
dure, plus fdcheuse, a supporter que l absence de ce qu^on aime, &c. 

When the above adjectives, or any other of the same kind, come before 
a substantive, they generally govern a before it, or if the article be also 
required, au, a la, a l\ or aux. In this case, the verb etre, by which 
they are preceded, is not taken impersonally, but refers to some person 
or thing which has been mentioned before : as, — c'est doux au toucher ^ 
that is soft to the touch. // est inutile au monde, he is of no use in 
the world. 

Observe. — A substantive may be governed by two or more adjectives 
in French, provided they require the same preposition: thus — cette 
femme est utile ct chere a sa famille, is correct; because we say — utile 
d, cher a ; so, also, une femme belle ct vertueuse est aimec et recherchee 
de tout le inonde, is correct ; because we say — aime de and recherche 
de; but we could not say — cette fe mine est utile ct cherie de sa famille, 

37. Paresse/ix, slothful, requires sometimes ck, and sometimes a before verbs in 
the present of the infinitive: as, — il )i' est pas paresseitx d^tcrire, \iQ \^ not sloihivX 
to write. // est jmresseiix a servii\ he is slothful to serve. 

38. Prodigup, profuse, lavi-h, requires cnvers or a Ptgard de before nouns re- 
ferring to persons, and de before those which refer to things : as, — il est prodigue de 
S071 hien envers les pauvres, he lavishes his property upon the indigent. 

39. Reconnaissant, grateful, requires envers before nouns referring to persons, 
and de before those which refer to things : as, — il est bien reconnaissant envers ses 
parens de la bonne education quails lin ont donme, he is very grateful to his parents 
for the good education which they have given him. 

40. Responsable, answerable, requires a or envers before the word Dieu, and 
before nouns referring to persons ; but it governs de before those which refer to 
things: as, — votts serez respunsab/es k Dieu ou envers Die// de vos maiwaises actions^ 
you will be answerable to God for your bad actions. De is, however, sometimes 
used before nouns referring to persons : as, — un mait7'e est responsable de ses valets, 
a master is answerable for his sei-vants. 

41. Riche, rich, requires sometimes de, and sometimes en: as, — il est riche de 
cent mille francs, he is worth a himdred thousand francs. 11 est riche en terre, he 
is rich in landed property. 

42. Severe, severe, requires envers or a f'egard de, and sometimes poi/r : as, — 
ce pere n'est pas assez s^ve/'e envers ou k I'egard de ses enfans, that father is not 
sufficiently severe to his children. // est severe et impitoyable pour les assassins, he 
is severe and pitiless towards ruffians. 

43. Sterile, barren, requires en : as, — tous les temps ont etc steriles en orateurs, 
most times have been barren in orators. 



272 OF THE GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 

because utile requires the preposition a, and chtrie de ; another turn 
must therefore be given to the sentence, using en before the second 
adjective: as, — cette femrne est utile a sa famille^ et en est cherie. 

ESSAY XLI. 

That is very soft to the touch. — Nothing is more nauseous to the taste. — It 
dottx toucher dtsagreable 

is difficult to explain in a satisfactory manner so abstruse a science. (What 

(T (V satisfaisant abstrus Qii'y 

can he) more dangerous for innocence than tender converse ? Let a 

a-t-il de pour de entredens m. pi. Qu^ 

child (he) attentive to his studies, sensible of reprimands, and docile to 
soit r^primande aux 

his masters. — If I were not sensible of your past kindness, I 
volontts de bontts f. pi. 

should not have interested myself for your son. A person whose mind is 

s^interesser a 

disturbed is not fit to discharge his duty. Somebody told me that you 

trouble propre remplir Oti 

have fallen in love with Miss B**; I (give you joy for it). — That young per- 
etre devenir amoureux vous enfelicite 

son is endowed with the greatest abilities, and is extremely desirous of ini- 
7'emplir talent dhireitx se 

proving herself in (every thing) she undertakes. — She is skilful in doing 

perfectionner tout ce qu' entreprendre habile ^ 

(tvery thing,) and courteous to every body. — The soldiers, already animated 

^tout affable deja 

with a noble zeal for their country, were again excited (to fight) by the sound 

beau au combat 

of warlike instruments. — (You must) be civil to your servants, if you will 

guerrier 11 f aid domeslique vouloir 

(be respected by them.) — As mind is not (to be compared) with matter, 

quHls vous respect€7it De meme que esprit comparable 

(neither so) (are) the riches of this world comparable with those of 

ainsi ^ ne sunt pas ^ '^biens m. pi. ^ '^ ^ 
eternity. — How consoling it will be for me to see my children again * ! — Your 

Qu'' revoir 

brother is known by every body for not (being) constant in love. — That king is 

etre 
cruel to his country and children. — He began by (neglecting) study, became 

jxir ntgliger ^ 

insensibly loose in his manners, hardened in crime, (careless of) 

^peu-a-peu iWendurcir envisagea d'un air dHnsouciance 

the reverses of fortune, and even indifferent to adversity.- -England 

se montrer 
is not so fruitful in corn, wine and fruit, as France and Italy.— They are so 

faithful to their king, that nothing will ever induce them to forfeit their honour. 

porter a agir contre V 

— That lady is not faithful to her promises. — 1 am fatigued with running.— The 



OF THE ADJECTIVES OF DIMENSION. 273 

most fortunate (lover) is not always the most tranquil. Why are you so im- 

heitreux en amour tranquille 

patient to see her ? Miss H * * has been a long time inconsolable for the loss of 

her lover, although he was very inferior to her in science, talents, vir- 

amant sub. imp. 

lues and wealth. — She is very uneasy about that aflPair. — We are uneasy at not 
tichesses 

receiving any news from her. Vice is most ingenious in disguising itself, and 

trts-ingaileux se dtguiser 

often (assumes the most deceitful appearance). He has been ungrateful to 

sous /es formes les plus irompeuses se monlrer 

his benefactor, to your Idndness and* love ; but woe 

iiifjrat bontes/.p/, ing rut a voire malheur 

to him, if he be ungrateful to his country. Be quick to reward, slow to punish, 

patrie prompt 

and compassionate to the poor Faith is as necessary to salvation, as 

mistricordteux Foi aussi salat 

breath to life, — A well-educated son is grateful to his parents for the 

respiration Pest clever recotu/aissant 

good education which they have given him. We are all accountable to God for 

respo?isab/e 

our bad actions. That gentleman is worth two hundred thousand francs. He 

riche franc 

is not sufficiently severe to his children. All his estates are barren in corn. 

assez terre sterile 

Never was a" woman more useful and dear to her family, and (at the same time) 



en meme temps 



more respected and beloved by every bod}', 



LESSON XLII. 

Of tlie adjectives of dimension — high, wide, broad, deep, long, &c. 

General Rule. — The adjectives high, wide, broad, deep, long, &c. 
are rendered into French by an adjective or a substantive ; thus, — high 
is expressed by de haut or de hauteur ; long, by de long or de longueur ; 
wide and broad, by de large or de largeur ; but deep must always be 
construed by de profondeur, and never by de profond ; and, in general, 
the substantives are more elegantly used than the adjectives. De is put 
before the noun of number which precedes the w^ords— /ee^, inches, &c. 
if no tense of the verb avoir be employed before it ; but should a tense 
of the verb avoir come before the noun of number, de should not then 
be used before it, although it should always precede the words hauteur, 
longueur, largeur, profondeur, &c. : as, — a wall twenty feet high, un 
mur de vingt pieds de haut ou de hauteur, and not un mur vingt pieds 

N 5 



274 OF THE ADJECTIVES OF DIMENSION. 

haut. This well is a hundred feet deep, ce putts a cent pieds de pro- 
fondeur, and not — a de cent pieds profond ou de profond. 

When two or more dimensions of the same object are mentioned : as, 
—an apartment three hundreds feet long and fifty wide ; that pond is 
one hundred feet deep by three hundred in circumference ; the con- 
junction and or by which is used to connect the sentence in such a case 
in English, may be expressed in French by sur or et, with this difference, 
that, should sur be used, de must not be put before the following num- 
ber preceding the word of dimension ; whereas, if et be employed, de is 
required before it : as, — an apartment three hundred feet long and fifty 
wide, un appartement de trois cents pieds de longueur sur cinquante 
de largeur, and not sur de cinquante. That pond is one hundred feet 
deep by three hundred in circumference, cet Hang a cent pieds de pro- 
fondeur sur trois cents de cir conference, and not sur de trois cents ^ 
&c. ; but we say with de — un appartement de trois cents pieds de 
longueur et de cinquante de largeur, because et is employed in the sen- 
tence. Par can never be used in sentences of this kind in French, as 
by is in English. 

Whenever the preposition in precedes a word of dimension as in the 
following sentence — that pond is one hundred feet deep by three hun- 
dred in circumference, it is usually expressed in French by de, and not 
by en or dans : as, — that pond is one hundred feet deep by three 
hundred in circumference, cet etang a cent pieds de profondeur sur 
trois cents de cir conference, and not — en ou dans cir conference. 
Thirty feet in height, trente pieds de hauteur, and not en hauteur, &c. 

ESSAY XLII. 

The beautiful column in the Place-Vendome, in Paris, is two hundred feet 

a 

high. There is in that house a roona two hundred and fifty feet long, sixty 

saile 

wide, and twenty-six high. This well will be three hundred feet deep by 

piiifs 
eighteen in diameter; it will be covered with a magnificent marble stone 
dicmittre couvrir iV snperbe de marbre pierre 

eighteen or nineteen inches thick. Your bed- room is no more thanfortj^- 

poiice epaisseur a coucher chambre de 

three feet long and twenty-one wide. The new canal is one hundred feet broad 

and fifteen or sixteen deep. 1 do not think the steeple of that church 

croire elocher sub. pr. 

is more than five hundred and eighty feet high. The two windows of that 

de fenetre 

chapel are each seventy-seven feet eleven inches deep, and twenty-four wide. 
chapelle chacim hauteur 

1 have seen, in America, an iron bridge seventy-three feet wide: it 

en de fer pont 



OF COMPARATIVES. 275 

consists of twenty piers, seventeen large arches, and two small ones* ; the 
etre compost pile grand 

four middle piers are each thirty-four feet broad ; all the others decrease in 
du milieu chacim diminuer en 

breadth by one foot and a* half on each side. The king's palace is one hun- 

Idrgeur d' de palais 

dred and ten feet high, four hundred long, and two hundred broad. This street 

is about one mile long, and ninety feet wide. We have in our garden, in 

environ ' ^ ^dans ^ ^ *ot. 

the country, a pond which is six hundred and twelve feet in length, eighty in 
• c 

breadth, and thirty-eight in depth. 



LESSON XLIII. 

Of Comparatives. 

The degrees of comparison in adjectives having already been explained 
in the beginning of this Grammar, the object of this short article is to 
point out the manner of construing into French several English modes 
of expression, which present some difficulty. 

First General Rule. — When a comparison is expressed in English 
by as repeated, or by so and as^ or also by as much, so much, or as 
many and so many. Sic, these words are construed into French, as it is 
explained in the beginning of this Grammar, page 49, No. 3. 

The preposition by, which is sometimes used in English after a com- 
parative, to denote how much a thing exceeds or is less than another, 
is expressed in French by de : as, — she is taller or less than you by a 
whole head, elle est plus grande ou plus petite que vous de toute la 
tete. 

When the conjunction than, which follows a comparative, comes be- 
fore a verb in the indicative mood : as, — your sister is taller than I 
thought ; women do not speak better than they write ; — ne must be used 
in French before the verb following que, if the first part of the sentence 
be affirmative, whereas ne is not required, if the first part be negative : as, 
— your sister is taller than I thought, votre sceur est plus grande que 
je ne croyais, and not que je croyais ; because the first part of the sen- 
tence is affirmative : but we say, — women do not speak better than they 
write, les femmes ne parlent pas mieux qu^elles ecrivent, and not 
qu'elles nkcrivent, because the first part of the sentence is negative. 

If a conjunction should intervene between than and the following- 
verb : as, — / am better than when / was in the country ; in this case, 
ne should not be used before the verb following que, whether the first 
part of the sentence be affirmative or negative : as, — I am better than 



216 OF COMPARATIVES. 

when I was in the country, je me porte mieux que quand fetais a la 
campagne, and not que quand je n^etais, because the conjunction quand 
comes between que and the following verb etais. 

Whenever also than or as, which is used after a comparative, comes 
between two verbs in the present of the infinitive mood : as, — it is more 
noble to forgive than to revenge ; that is not so easy to do as to say : 
ne is not used before the verb following que, whether the first part of 
the sentence be affirmative or negative; but de or a, or any other pre- 
position which the adjective, substantive, or participle, in the com- 
parative, may require before the verb preceding, ^i/e, must be repeated 
before that which follows it : as, — it is more noble to forgive than to 
revenge, il est plus noble de pardonner que de se venger, and not que 
de ne se venger. That is not so easy to do as to say, cela n'est pas 
aussi facile kfaire qu^k dire, and not qu^a ne dire, &c. 

Second General Rule. — When the more or the less is repeated in 
a sentence before two different verbs : as, — the more I see her, the more 
I love her ; the less I speak, the less I feel tired: ^Ae 7nore is expressed 
in French by plus, and the less by moins, without the article : as, — 
the more I see her, the more I love her, plus je la vois, plus je Vaime, 
and not le plus je la vois, le plus je Vaime. The less I speak, the less 
I feel tired, moins je parle, moins je suis fatigue, and not le moins je 
parle, le moins je suis fatigue. 

But if the more or the less should be repeated before two substan- 
tives, two adjectives, participles, or adverbs, instead of two verbs : as, — 
the more money he gets, the more expenses he incurs ; the more diffi- 
cult a thing is, the more honourable, &c. ; or if two adjectives should 
be repeated with the syllable er at their termination, instead of being 
preceded by more : as, — the longer the day, the shorter the night, &c. ; 
the sentence should then be construed into French by using : I. plus ou 
moins ; 2. the nominative of the verb ; 3. the verb ; 4. the substantive, 
adjective, participle, or adverb, and the rest as in English : as, — the 
more money he gets, the more expenses he incurs, p/its il gagne d' argent, 
plus il jait de depenses. The more difficult a thing is, the more 
honourable, plus une chose est difficile, plus elle est honorable. The 
longer the day, the shorter the night, jjIus le jour est long, plus la nuit 
est courte, &c. 

The verb etre cannot be suppressed in French, as the verb to be is 
sometimes in English, in sentences like the following : — the longer the 
day, the shorter the night. Whenever, therefore, any case of this kind 
occurs, the sentence must be construed into French with a tense of the 
verb etre : as, — the longer the day, the shorter the night, plus le jour 
est long, plus la nuit est courte ; as if it were in English— more the 
day is long, more the night is short. 



OF THE PRONOUNS LUI, ELLE, AND EUX. 211 



ESSAY XLIII. 

If it be as easy to do good as to do evil, why don't you behave better ? — 

bten mal se conduire Les 

Great talents are of every condition, and if they do not shine so commonly in 

tout briller commnnkment 

low people as in (others,) it is (for want) of care and cultivation. — Although 
has cadres classes faide 

I have not so many friends as his brother, I have succeeded much 
sub. pr, reussir 

better than he. — They say that Miss G** is taller than her sisters by the 

On grand 

whole head. — There are persons who write better than they speak, and 

person7ie 
others who speak better than they write. — I am infinitely better than 

^e porter infiniment mieux 
when I was on the continent. — Religion teaches that it is greater to overcome 

sur enseigner de vaincre 

one's passions than to conquer whole nations. — (As for me,) I think it is 

ses conqriirir entier Quant a moi croire 

easier to command than to obey.— The more I speak to those ladies, the more 
facUe de obiir 

I hate them. — The less you (study,) the less you will improve. — He will never 

hair etudierez propter 

be a* rich man,* because the more money he gets, the more expenses he 

gagner 
incurs. — The more elevated in dignity one is, the less pride one ought to* have. 
/aire elevc en 1523 4 

— Is it not evident that the shorter the day is, (so much) longer is the night ? 

p/us 



LESSON XLIV. 

Observations on the pronouns lui, elle, and eux. 

General Rule. — Whenever the pronouns him, ]lci\ and tlieni, being 
joined to a substantive by the conjunction and or nor, are governed by 
a verb, they are expressed in French thus : — him, by lid ; lier, by die ; 
them, by eux or elles ; with one of the pronouns le, la, I', or les, 
according to the import of the sentence, before the verb in a simple 
tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one ; but, if him, her, or 
them, should be joined to the pronoun me or yoii, instead of being joined 
to a substantive, ?i02is should then be used before the verb or the auxiliary, 
if 7/te be employed in English, and voits, if it should be you; at all 
events, lui or leur is required before the verb, if lui, elle, eux or elles, 
depend on the preposition a : as, — I have congratulated him and his 
friends, je 1' ai felicite In i el ses amis. I neither like her nor her brother, 



278 OF THE PRONOUNS LUI, ELLE, AND EUX. 

je ne Vaime ni elle ni son frere. I esteem them and their friends, je 
les estime eux et leurs amis. They neither made him nor me welcome, 
on ne nous accueillit ni lui ni moi. You and she have been seen 
together, on vous a vus ensemble voiis et elle. I have spoken to her 
and her brother, je lui ai parle a elle et a son frere. I gave them and 
their friends something, je leur ai donne qiielque chose a eux et a leurs 
amis, &c. 

When the pronouns it and them, referring to inanimate things, depend 
on the verb to owe or to he indebted, they are expressed in French : — 
it, by lui, and them, by leur ; and not by ij, as in other cases : as, — / 
am indebted to it for the recovery of my health, (alluding to a country,) 
je lui suis redevable du retablissement cle ma sante, and not — fy suis 
redevable, &c. 

If it or them should depend on a preposition which could not be con- 
strued into French by a, it or them should be left out, and the preposition 
would become an adverb : as, — the people were for peace, but the par- 
liament was against it, le peuple etait pour la paix, mais le parlement 
etait contre. If the preposition could not become an adverb, another 
turn should be given to the sentence. 

The adverb there, referring to some place which has been mentioned 
before, is, when the verb governs a in French, usually expressed by y, 
and put before the verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a 
compound one : as, — I have been there, j'y ai ete, &c. 

ESSAY XLIV. 

I blamed him and his mother very much for having taken such a* liberty.— 

cetfe 
He will neither see her nor her brother, (on account of) then- (unpolite 
vouloir voir a cause de malhon- 

behaviour) (to him.) — I hate, and always shall hate them, and all their friends. — 
nitett a son egard 

You and Miss S*'"* have been seen together. — I should have written to 
On 
you and his sister, when I was in France, had I not been obliged to return 

si je ri' avals pas de revenir 

to England so suddenly. — She was (so cross) that she would neither 

de si mauvaise humeur vovloir 

speak to him nor to me. — We shall send some to you and to them. — The climate 

en 
of that country is so mild that I am indebted to it (for the) recovery of 

doux redcvab/e du ritablissement 

my health. — Miss A***, come near the fire. You are very polite, raadame; I 

s'approcher du honnete 

am quite close to it. — The falling of the water of that river makes so much 

tout aiiprts chute 

noise that it deafens those who live near it. — Do you know where the 
rendre sourd demeurer aupres savoir ^ 



OF THE SUPPLEMENTARY PRONOUNS. 279 

Treasury is in London? Yes, I do. Well, you will easily find your way; 
^trdsorerie ^ *a ^ chemin 

near it is the Adntiiralty, just l)y is the Horse-guards, and over against it is 
aupres tout ai/pres garde a cheval vis-a^is 

the Whitehall chapel, where you want to* go. — They unanimously declared against 

vouloir iinanimement se declarer 

it. — Switzerland is a delightful country ; have you ever been there ? No ; but I 
Suisse charm ant y 

intend to go this summer if my affairs allow me. 
d'y le 



LESSON XLV. 

Of the supplementary pronouns /e, /a, /', les. 

General Rule. — Whenever any tense of the verb to be, being used 
in answer to a question, refers either to a substantive, or an adjective 
substantively taken, in the question : as, — is she not the sister of 
Mrs. L*** ? no, she is not; one of the supplementary pronouns le, la, 
V, les, according to the gender and number of the substantive in the 
question, must be used in French before tiie corresponding tense of the 
verb etre, in the answer : as, — is she not the sister of Mrs. L* * * ? no, 
she is not; rtest-elle pas la soeur de Af"" L***? non, elle ne Vest 
pas. Is this your hat? yes, it is; est-ce Id votre chapeau? oiii, ce 
Vest. Are these your books ? no, they are not, sont-ce Id vos livres ? 
non, ce ne les sont pas, &c. 

But if the verb to he, used in answer to a question, should refer to an 
adjective, a participle, or a substantive adjectively taken, in the question, 
instead of referring to a substantive : as, — is your sister married ? yes, 
she is ; are these young ladies relations to Mr. D*** ? no, they are 
not ; in this case, the pronoun le (indeclinable) should be used for both 
genders and numbers loefore the verb etre, in the answer in French : as, 
— is your sister married ? yes, she is ; mademoiselle votre soeur est-elle 
mariee ? oui, elle Vest. Are these young ladies relations to Mr. D*** ? 
no, they are not, mesdemoiselles sont-elles parentes de M. D***? non, 
elles ne le sont pas ; and not elles ne les sont pas. 

In any sentence like the following : — this lady is jealous, and I am 
not ; he is rich, and she is not ; in which the adjective or participle 
used in the first part of the sentence is understood in the second^ the 
pronoun le (indeclinable) should also be employed in its stead in French, 
for both genders and numbers, and be placed before the verb in the 
second part of the sentence : as, — this young lady is jealous, and I am 
xiQi, cette demoiselle est jalouse, et moi je ne le suis pas. He is rich, 
and she is not, il est riche, et elle ne \est pas. 



280 OF THE SUPPLEMENTARY PRONOUNS. 

Whenever, also, the word so is or can be expressed with a verb in 
English, either in an answer to a question or in the second part of a 
sentence : as, — are you ill ? no, I am not ; they have been rich, but 
they are not so at present ; le (indeclinable) is used in the same sense 
in French, with reference to adjectives, participles, verbs, or substantives 
adjectively taken, and is placed before the verb : as, — are you ill ? no, 
I am not ; etes'vous malade ? non, je ne le sms pas. They have been 
rich, but they are not so now, Us ont ete riches, mais Us ne le sont pas 
a present, &c. 

in a reply made to a question, either with the verb to have or with 
one of the auxiliaries do, did, shall, will, would, could, should, can, 
may, and might, &c. : as, — do you believe it ? yes, I do ; have you 
seen them ? yes, I have ; do you think they will come ? yes, I do ; 
one of the pronouns le, la, l\ les, or lui, leur, according to the import 
of the sentence, and the gender and number of the substantive, or pro- 
noun, mentioned in the question, is used in French before the verb in 
the answer, which verb is generally the same as that by which the ques- 
tion is asked : as, — do you believe it ? yes, I do ; le croyez-vous ? out, 
je le crois. Have you seen them ? yes, I have ; les avez-vous vus ? oui, 
je les ai vus. Do you think they are coming ? yes, I do ; croyez-vous 
qiiils viennent 1 oui, je le crois. Sec. 

There are a few questions, implying either being at home or going to 
any place, in which the answer, although sometimes made by the same 
verb as that by which the question is asked, cannot admit of le, la, V, 
les, lui ox leur : as, — will you be at home? yes, I will; serez-vous 
chez vous ? oui, fy serai, and not je le serai. Will you go ? yes, I 
will; irez-vous? oui, j'irai, and not je I' irai. If, however, the sense 
of this last question were, are you willing to go 1 voulez-vous y aller ? 
the answer ought then to be — oui, je le veux Men, and not oui,jHrai; 
but practice alone can teach these differences. 

Any question may also be answered by — oui ou non, monsieur ou mes- 
sieurs, madam^e ou mesdames, mademoiselle ou mesdemoiselles, ac- 
cording as we speak to one or several persons ; or simply by — oui on 
non^ if speaking to our inferiors, friends, or equals. 

ESSAY XLV. 

Is this j^our hat ? Yes, it is. — Is Mademoiselle Mr. S.'s cousin ? No, sir, she is 

cousine 
not. Are these your daughters ? Yes, they are. Are not these your 

horses ? No, they are not. Is not this Mr. K.'s house ? Yes, it is. 1 

thought this was Mrs. L.'s carriage ? No, madain, it is not. Are your 

croire voiture 

sisters married? The eldest is, and the youngest will be (in a very short time). 
mca-i^ cadetie bientot 



OF THE PRONOUNS— 3/y5£LF, THYSELF, &c. 281 

(Have you got a cold ?) Yes, I have. Was there ever a woman 

Etes-votis enrhume eire jamais 

more unfortunate, and treated with more contempt than I am ? (You 

malhtureux trailer mtpris On 

have heen told) that Mrs. W. is dead, but she is not. Is Miss R. rich ? 

vot<s a dit 

No, she is not. Miss T*** has been ill a* very long time, and I 

malade 
am afraid she will be so all her life.— —Why are you so jealous of 

cruindre sub. pr. jaloux 

her? If I were (you), I should not be so (in the least). Is your 

a voire place du tout 

mother still unwell? Yes, sir, she is. Ladies, are you relations to 

encore indispose parente dc 

Colonel D** ? Yes, sir, we are. -This family was highly es- 

Monsieiir fort 

teemed, two or three years ago; but it is not (so much so) at present. Do 

aidant 
you think Mr. and Mrs. B * * will send their son to France ? Yes, I 

sub. pr. 

do. Have you seen the Misses F * * since their return from the continent ? 

Demoiselle re tour 

Yes, I have. Will you have the goodness to take this grammar to them ? 

bontt de porter 

Yes, with pleasure. Do not forget to mention my uncle's marriage to 

oublier parler du 

them. No, I will not. Will your sisters go into the country this year ? Yes, 

oub/ier a annte 

I think they v/ill. Will you be at home to-morrow ? No, I do not think 

al/er 
I shall. 

sub. pr. 



LESSON XLVI. 

Of the pronouns — myself] thyself, himself, herself, itself, one's self, 
ourselves, yourselves, themselves. 

General Rule. — Whenever the pronouns myself, thyself, himself, 
herself, itself, one's self, ourselves, yourselves and themselves, are 
governed by a verb which is a reflective one in French, — myself is ex- 
pressed by me ; — thyself, by te ; — himself, herself, and one's self] by 
se; — ourselves, by nous ; — yourselves, by vous ; and themselves, by se ; 
which are put before the verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary 
in a compound one : as, — I flatter myself, je me jlatte. This lady 
praises herself too much, ceite dame se loue trop. He has killed him- 
self, il s'est tue, &c. 



282 OF THE PRONOUNS— i!fre£:LF, THYSELF, &c. 

But when himself, herself] one's self, ourselves and themselves, are 
governed by a verb which is not a reflective one in French, and of which 
the nominative is taken in an indeterminate sense, as when it is one of 
the following indefinite pronouns : — each, every one, chacun ; one, 
people, they, on ; none, aucun ; some one, somebody, que Iqu^un ; who- 
ever, quiconque ; nobody, personne ; he or she who, celui qui, celle 
qui ; or one of the expressions : — happy who, heureux qui ; every man 
■who, tout homme qui ; or any similar one, provided it be in the singular 
and used in an indeterminate sense in French ; or, also, when himself, 
herself, one^s self, ourselves or themselves, are governed by an uni- 
personal verb, or by any other verb in the present of the infinitive mood, 
they are then expressed by soi, which is always singular : as, — every 
body looks upon himself with a favourable eye, chacun a pour soi un 
ceil de complaisance. We are satisfied with ourselves when we have 
done a good action, on est content de soi quand on a fait une bonne 
action. It is always in our power to act honourably, il depend toujo'urs 
de soi d'^agir honor ablement. To live for nobody but one's self, ne 
vivre que pour soi, &c. 

Itself and themselves, used with reference to things after a preposi- 
tion, are always expressed in French by soi, whether the nominative of 
the verb to which they refer be taken in an indefinite or particular sense, 
provided it be singular : as, — virtue is amiable in itself, la vertu est 
aimable en soi. Vice is odious of itself, de soi le vice est odieux. 
Cats appear to feel only for themselves, le chat parait ne sentir que 
pour soi. 

In other circumstances, myself is generally expressed by moi-meme ; 
thyself, by foi-meme ; himself, by lui-mJme ; herself, by elle-meme ; 
one^s self, by soi-meme ; ourselves, by nous-memes ; yourselves, by 
vous-memes ; and themselves, by eux-memes or elles-memes : as, — I 
have seen it myself, je Pai vu moi-meme, &c. Sometimes, also, the 
word meme is left out, and moi, toi, lui, elle, nous, vous, eux, ellcs, are 
used by themselves : as, — your brother and myself have been there, 
nous y avons ete voire fr ere et moi. 

Meme is generally added to the pronouns wo^, toi, lui, elle, nous, 
vous, eux, elles, to give more energy to the expression. 



ESSAY XLVI. 

However courageous a man may be, he ought not fo* expose himself 

Quelque sub.pr, devoir s'exposer 

to danger unnecessarily. — I flatter myself you will follow the advice I give 
au sans ?itcessite se flatter suivre conseil 

you, and never hring upon* yourself* the reproach of having deviated 

que s'attirer reproche de vous ^etre ^tcartt 

(from it). — (It is often the case) that, in' praising ourselves, we reflect upon 
^en 11 arrive souvent se louer on mtdire rf' 



ORDER OF THE PRONOUNS BEFORE THE VERB. 283 

others. — That unfortunate woman killed herself. — If you praise yourself so 
aiitrin se hier se loner 

much, nobody will believe you. — Every body acts for himself. — One ought 
iant persoiine Chacun agir devoir 

never to* speak of one's self but with modesty. — \^Tioever loves (nobody but) 

qu' Quiconqiie «' que 

himself does not deserve to be loved. — (Does not every body look upon) himself 

77itrite7' d'' Chacun li'a-t-il pas pour 

with* a favourable eye? — Nobody is dissatisfied with himself after having 

de coynp/aisance mtcontent avoir 

done a good action. — (Tliat man is happy) who is accountable to* nobody* but 
Heureux Phomme rC comptahle quC 

himself for his actions and pleasures. — It is always in our power to act 

a de de ses p/aisir 

honourably. — To excuse in one's self the faults which one cannot bear 

soujffrir 
in others^ is a mark of littleness of mind. — That young lady has a* good 
dans les marque petitesse 

opinion of herself. — These ladies speak too favourably of themselves. — 

avantageusement 
Self-love directs (every thing) to itself — \Yliatever is good in itself is not 
Amour propre tout Tout ce qid 

always approved. (It may be) that this medicine is harmless of 

7/ se peidfaire sub. pr. innocent en 

itself, however I will not take it. — Did you see that yourself? Yes, I did, 

cependant Avez voir 

with my own eyes. Well! I should like to* mtness it myself, before I 
de propre Eh bien vouloir voir de 

believe it.— She did it herself. 
faire 



LESSON XLVII. 

General order in lohich the pronouns come before the verb or the 
auxiliary in French. 

General Rule. — Whenever the pronouns me, te, se, nous, vous, 
lid, leur, are governed by a verb with le, la, les, en or y, the following 
is the order which is observed in placing them before the verb or the 
auxiliary : — me, te, se, nous, vous, always precede le, la, les, en and y ; 
— lui, leur, precede en and y ; but le, la, les, precede lui and leur ; and 
y precedes en, as it is pointed out in the following examples, in which 
all the possible combinations of the pronouns are illustrated in affirma- 
tive, negative, and interrogative sentences. 

From this rule, it may be inferred that en and y always come after the other 
pronouns and immediately before the verb in a simple tense, and before the 
auxiliar)^ in a compound one, except in the imperative, when they follow the verb, 
if it be used affirmatively, as hereafter explained. 



I 



284 ORDER OF THE PRONOUNS BEFORE THE VERB. 

1. Examples of the pronouns me^ te, nous, vous, with le, la, les : — me, 

te, nous, vous, always commg first. 

He promised it, or them, to me ; // me le, me la, me les promit. 

He did not promise it, or them, to thee ; 11 ne te le, ne te la, we te les promit pas. 
Did he promise it, or them, to us ? Nous le, nous la, nous les promit-il? 

Did he not promise it, or them, to you ? Ne vous le, ne vous la, ne vous les promit- 
il pas ? 

2. Examples of me, te^ nous, vous, with en : — me, te, nous, vous, always 

coming first. 

He will send me some ; 11 rt^en enverra. 

He will not send thee any ; // ne t^n enverra pas. 

Will he send us some ? Nous en enverra-t-il? 

Will he not send you any ? Ne vous en enverra-t-il pas f 

3. Examples of me, te, se, nous, vous, with y : — me, te, se, nous, vous, 

always coming first. 

I shall go, or repair, thither ; Je m'y rcndrai. 

Thou shalt not go, or repair, thither ; Tu ne Cy rendras pas. 

Will he go, or repair, thither? S'y rendra-t-il? 

Shall we go, or repair, thither P Nous y rendrons-nous 9 

Will you not go, or I'epair, thither ? Ne vous y rendrez-vous pas ? 

4. Examples of me, te, nous, vous, with ?/ and en : — me, te, nous, vous, 

always coming the first ; y, the second ; and en, the third. 

He will send me some thither ; // m'y en enverra. 

He will not send thee any thither ; // ne fy en enverra pas. 

Will he send us some thither ? Nous y en enverra-t-il ? 

Will he not send you any thither ? Ne vous y en enverra-t-il pas ? 

5. Examples of me, te, nous, vous, with le, la, les, and y : — me, te, 
nous, vous, always coming the first; le, la, les, the second; and y, 
the third. 

He will bring it to me there ; // me ty apporiera. 

He will not take it there for thee ; // ne te Py portera pas. 

Will he take it there for us ? Nous Py portera-t-il ? 

Will he not take it there for you ? Ne vous fy portera-t-il-pas ? 

6. Examples of le, la, les, with lui, Icur : — le, la, les, always coming 

first. 

I give it, or them, to him or to her ; Je le lui, la lui, les lui donne. 

I do not give it, or them, to him or to Je ne le lui, ne la lui, ne les lui donne pas. 

her? 

Do you give it, or them, to him or to Le lui, la lui, les lui donnez-vous ? 

her? 

Do you not give it, or them, to him or Ne le lui, ne la lui, ne les lui donnez-vous 

to her ? pas ? 

He gives it, or them, to them; II le leur, la leur, les leur donne. 

He does not give it, or them, to them ; // ne le leur, ne la leur, ne les leur donne 

pas. 



ORDER OF THE PRONOUNS BEFORE THE VERB. 285 

Does he give it, or them, to them ? Le ieur, fa leur, les lew do7ine-t-ir? 

Does he not give it, or them, to them ? Ne le lew, ne la Ieur, ne les Ieur donne-t- 

il pas ? 

7. Examples of le, la, les, with y : — le, la, les, always coming first. 

I have put it, or them, there ; Je Vy, ou je les y, ai mis. 

I have not put it, or them there ; Je ne I'y, ouj'e ne les y, ai pas jnis. 

Have you put it, or them, there P Z,'y, ou le^ y, avez-vous mis? 

Have you not put it, or them, there ? Ne fy, ou ne les y, avez-vous pas mis ? 

8. Examples of lui, Ieur, with en : — hii, Ieur, always coming first. 

I give it him, or them, as a present ; Je li/i, ou Ieur, en fais present. 

I do not give it him, or them, as a pre- Je ne lid, ou ne Ieur, enfaispas prtsent. 

sent ; 

Do you give it him, or them, as a pre- Lui, ou /??/?-, en frntes-vous prtsent ? 

sent ? 

Do you not give it him, or them, as a Ne lui, ou 7ie Ieur, en faites-vous pas prc- 

present ? sent ? 

Observe. — When the above pronouns are used with a verb in a com- 
pound tense, they follow precisely the same order before the auxiliary 
as they do before the verb in a simple tense, the participle being placed 
the last : as, — he has sent it or them to us, il nous Ya envoije ou il nous 
les a envoijes ; she has promised me some, clle m'en a j)romis, &c. 

Exceptions. — 1. When moi, nous, lui, Ieur, occur with le, la, les, 
and a verb in the imperative affirmatively used, they are placed after it, 
in the second person singular, and in the first and second persons 
plural ; and le, la, les, precede moi, nous, liii and leiir, as in the fol- 
lowing examples : — 

Lend it, or them, to me ; Prete-le-moi, la-nioi, ou les-moi. 

Lend it, or them, to us ; Prclez-le-nous, la-nous, ou les-nous. 

Let us lend it, or them, to him ; Pretous-le-lui, la-lui, ou les-lui. 

Lend it, or them, to them ; Pretez-le-leur, la-leur, ou les-leur. 

Should a verb be in the third person singular or plural of the impe- 
rative, either affirmatively or negatively used, (or if it should be in the 
second person singular or in the first and second persons plural nega- 
tively used,) the pronouns should then precede as in the other tenses, 
and me be used instead of moi. Me, te, se, nous, vous, come then 
before le, la, les, and le, la, les, before lui and Ieur : as — 

Let him bring- it, or them, to me ; 
QuUl )ne P, ou 2ne les, apporte. 

Let them not take it, or them, to him or to her ; 
Qu'ils ne le lui, ne la lui, ne les lui, portent pas. 

Don't give it, or them, to me : 

Ne me le, tie me la, ne me les donne pas. 

Do not hope for it, or them ; 

Ne te le, Jie te la, ne te les promeis pas. 



286 ORDER OF THE PRONOUNS BEFORE THE VERB. 

Let him not hope for it, or them ; 

Qu'il tie se le, ne se la, ne se les promette pas. 

Let us not hope for it, or them ; 

Ne nous le, ne nous la, ne nous les promettom pas. 

Do not hope for it, or them ; 

Ne vous le, ne voiis la, ne vous les promettez pas. 

Let us not give it, or them, to him or to her ; 
Ne le Ini, ne la lui, ne les liii donnons pas. 

Do not send it, or them, to them ; 

Ne le leur, ne la leur, ne les leur envoy ez pas. 

2. When me, te, se, nous, vous, lui, leur, occur with en and y, and a 
verb in the imperative affirmatively used, they are placed after it, in the 
second person singular, and in the first and second persons plural; but 
in the third person singular or plural, whether the verb be in the affirm- 
ative or negative form, (and even in the second person singular and 
in the first and second persons plural, if the verb should be used nega- 
tively,) they precede as in the other tenses : in any case me, te, se, nous, 
vous, lui and leur, come before en : as, — 

Send me some ; Envoie-m'en. 

Send me some there ; Envoyez-ni'y-en. 

Let us send him some ; Envoyons-lm-en. 

Buy them some ; Achetez-leur-en. 

Let him give me some; QuHlni'en donne. 

Let him not send her any ; Qu''il ne lui en envoie pas. 

Don't speak of it to me ; Ne m^en parle pas. 

Do not send me any there ; Ne nv'y en envoyez pas. 

Let us not give him any ; Ne lui en donnons pas. 

Do not tell them any thing of it ; Ne leur en diies rien. 

3, Moi, te, se, nous, vous, le, la, les, being employed with y, and a 
verb in the imperative affirmatively used, are placed after the verb, in 
the second person singular, and in the first and second persons plural ; 
but in the third persons singular and plural, whether the verb be used 
affirmatively or negatively, (and even in the second person singular and 
in the first and second persons plural, if the verb should be used nega- 
tively,) they precede as in the other tenses, using then me instead of 
moi. In any case, the following is the order which they retain in the 
sentence : — y comes before moi ; but me, te, se, nous, vous, le, la, les, 
always precede y, as, — 

Take me there ; Menez-y-moi. 

Take him there ; Mtne-Vy. 

Let us take them there ; Menons-les-y. 

Let him take her or them there ; Qu'il Py ou les y mtne. 

Let us not take him there ; Ne fy menons pas. 

Do not take them there ; Ne les y menez pas. 

Observe, — Whenever two or more verbs following each other in the 



ORDER OF THE PRONOUNS BEFORE THE VERB. 287 

imperative are used affirmatively, and joined by the conjunction et or ou, 
the pronouns which they may govern, are placed after the first verb and 
before the second, when only two are used ; but if more than two verbs 
should be employed, the pronouns are put after those which come first, 
and before the last. In either case, the pronoun me is expressed by 
moi, after the first verb or verbs, and by me before the second or last : 
as, — take it and eat it, pre?iez-la et la mangez. Sell it me or give it 
me, vendez-la-moi ou me la donnez. 

If the verbs should be in the imperative negatively used, there would 
be no difficulty, as the pronouns must then always precede the verb, and 
me be expressed by me : as, — do not scold and beat me so much, ne me 
fjrondez -pas et ne me hattez pas taut. 

ESSAY XL VII. 

(Are these) peaches or nectarines ? They are peaches. Will you give me 

Sont-ce la peche pavie Ce Fouloir 

some? Yes 5 mth pleasure. It is not certain that Mr. H** has 

suh. pret. 
refused his daughter to Colonel R**; but even should he have refused her 
refuser 

to him, it does not follow he would give her to you. Make 

s'ensiiivre qu' sub. imp. vouloir Se 

yourself easy, I shall be there in time. Are you quite sure that Mrs. S "•' * 

trunquilliser y a bien 

will be there too ? There is not the least doubt of* it*. If your 

sub. p7\ y aussi moindre doute 

sisters will lend me their guitar this evening, I shall return it to them to-morrow. 
preter guitare rendre denudti 

Where is your cousins' French grammar ? Here it is. When will you send 

comine la void reri- 

it back* to them .? Next week. That house is so respectable that, if I 

voyer jjrochain 

had money to (dispose of,) I should place it there. Miss D * * thinks 

de /' a ma disposition phwer y trouver 

these bracelets beautiful, you should make her a* present (of them). No, 

superhe devriez en 

certainly, I (will not) ; why (should I) ? When you 

ne lui enferai pas prtsent et /ui en ferais-je present 

see the Misses T * *, tell them I have bought two fine pictures. Show them 

voir dire acheter tableau Montrer 

to me. Do not show them to him. If my sister should express a wish to 

ttmoigner le desir de 
read that book, do not lend it to her, for fear she should spoil it; 

de crainte qii' sub. pr. getter 

but sell it to her, and she will take good care (of it). As soon as you (have) 

vendre avoir soin en aurez 

some* of the same plums, which you sold me the other day, send me some. 

prune en 



288 REPETITION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

Your neighbours are in want of coffee; buy some for* them, If they do not 

avoir besoin en leur 

know where I live, do not tell it them. Are the Misses G * * going to 

savoir demeiirer dire 

Epsom-races ? (Not that I know of.) Do not accompany them there. Let 
course Pas queje sache accompagtier y 

your brother take them there, if he likes. Take me there with you. Tell her 

mener voiiloir y 

of* it. Do* not speak to me any more (about it). — ^Who has given you these 

ne m' plus en 

oranges.? Your brother has sent them to us. Who had given them to him? 

He did not tell us.- What a fine apple ! Give it me. Do not give it them. 

V a 
Take it and eat it. Love your enemies, and do them good when you can. — You 

have a beautiful gold watch, which is useless to you ; sell it me or give it me. 

beau inutile 

Do not (forgive) them, but punish them directly. 

pardonner punir sur-le-champ. 



LESSON XLVIII. 

Repetition of the Personal Pronouns. 

1. Cases in which the personal pronouns je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, 
ils, elles, are repeated in French. 

General Rule. — Whenever the personal pronouns /e, tu, il, elle, 
nous, vous, ils, elles, are used as nominatives to two or more verbs 
following each other in a sentence, they are usually repeated before 
each of them, if the parts of the sentence be joined by any other con- 
junction than ni, whether /, thou, he, she, it, ice, ye or ijou and they, be 
repeated in English or not : as, — he will and will not, il veut ct il ne 
veut pas, and not — il veut et ne veut pas. But if the different parts of 
the sentence should be joined by ni, the pronouns should not be repeated 
before the verb following ni : as, — I neither love nor hate her, je ne 
Vaime ni ne la hais, and not — je ne Vaime nije ne la hais. 

There are however circumstances in which the pronouns are and 
sometimes are not repeated, according as the energy, elegance, harmony, 
or clearness of the expression requires it; and, in general, taste is the 
best guide for the repetition or non-repetition of the pronouns : as, — 
I love and shall always love her, je Vaime et]Q V aimer ai toujour s, and 
not — je Vaime et Vaimerai tovjours. But je is not repeated in the fol- 
lowins; line of Voltaire : — 



" J'oi des adorateurs et «'ai pas un ami." — Voltaiuk. 



REPETITION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 289 

Whereas il is repeated in the next of Rousseau : — 

" Jl s'ecoute, il se plait, il s'adonise, il s'aime." — J. B. Rousseau. 

Observe. — ^When a verb has two or more pronouns of different per- 
sons for its nominative : as, — you and I shall go ; you and he are the 
only persons I see; it is put in the phiral, and the pronouns are re- 
sumed with nous, if the first person be used with the second or the 
third, and with vous if the second should be used with the third. Nous 
and vous are placed immediately before the verb which agrees with them 
in number and person, whether the other pronouns precede or follow it : 
as, — you and I shall go, vous et moi nous irons, or nous irons vous 
et moi, and not — vous et moi irons. You and he are the only persons 
I see, vous et lui vous etes les seules personnes quej'e voie ; and not 
— vous et lui etes, &c. 

But the pronouns nous and vous are usually left out, when the 
different nominatives of the verb are joined by the conjunction ni : as, — 
neither he nor I have succeeded, ni lui ni moi n'avons reussi; and not 
— ni lui ni moi nous n'avons reussi. They are also sometimes left out, 
when the different nominatives come either after the conjunction que or 
after a relative pronoun : as, — the gentleman with whom you and your 
daughter were, le monsieur avec qui ou lequel vous et votrejille etiex, 
and not — vous et votrejille vous etiez. 

2. Cases in which the pronouns me, te, se, nous, vous, le, la, les, lui, 
leur, and en, are repeated in French. 

General Rule. — The pronouns me, te, se, nous, vous, le, la, les, 
lui, leur, and en, are generally repeated in French before every verb 
they are governed by, although their corresponding ones in English mav 
not be repeated, when two or more verbs follow each other in a sentence 
governing the same pronoini : as, — he loves, caresses, and adores me, 
il m'aime, il me caresse, il m* adore. I believe and shall always be- 
lieve \.htm,je les crois et je les croirai toujour s. He does and undoes 
it, il le fait et\t defait. 

ESSAY XLVIII. 

Every body says that I am (in love) with Miss O**; however it is 
7b?// le monde dire amoi/reux de cependant cela 

not so,* for I neither love nor hate her. How do" you like these ladies.' 

ca7- aimer hair trouver dame 

They neither please nor displease me. We neither praise nor b]ame them. 

plaire dtplaire loner blamer 

''It is inconceivable how whimsical that woman is): from one moment to another 

Cette femme est d''une hizarrerie inconcevable « Vautre 

she will and will not. — You say so, but you do not believe it. — I assure you that I 
cela croire 

believe and shall always believe it, She has admirers and has not a friend. 

O 



290 PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS 

He (arrived) this mornings and will set out again this evening. — I love, honour, 
est arrive repartir honorer 

and shall always respect her. He took the strongest cities, conquered the 

respecter prendre fort conqutrir 

most considerable provinces, and overturned the most powerful empires. 1 

renverser puissant 

maintain and shall always maintain that she was in the wrong. Avoid drunk- 

soutenir Eviter ivro- 

enness : it impairs the understanding, tarnishes reputation, and consumes the 
gnerie abrutir entendement ternir consumer 

body. They wrote to me, two months ago, that they had seen my mother, hut 

tcrire 
they had not spoken to her. — You and I shall go there.* You and Miss S* * 

are the only persons I know here. It must he you or your 

sub. pr. connaitre ici sub. pr. ce 

brother who have taken my watch. 1 know that you and your cousin were 

savoir 

laughing at me. Neither he nor I Avere present. The gentleman with whom 

«e moquer de monsieur 

you and your daughter were is one of my acquaintances. 1 wonder that 

une f. connaissancesf.pl. s'etonner 

you and he associate with that person. She will never finish that embroidery, 

frequenter broderie 

because she does and undoes it twenty times a day. 1 will see, pray, entreat, 

puree qiH faire defaire par voidoir presser 

importune, and* move them. 
importuner fechir 



LESSON XLIX. 

PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS ON THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

1. My, thy, his, her, our, your, their. 

General Rule. — Whenever the conjunctive possessive pronouns 
my, thy, his, her, our, your, their, are used before the words head, 
arms, legs, life, voice, and mind, or before any other part or attribute 
of the body, which is the object of a verb denoting some fracture, cut, 
bruise J or any impression whatever of harm, inflicted on such part or 
attribute of the body by its nominative, as in the following sentences : 
— our carriage ran over his body ; I shall break his neck ; you hurt 
my fingers ; he turned her mind, &c., they are expressed in French by 
the personal pronouns, thus — my, by me ; — thy, by te ; — his or her, by 
lui ; — our, by nous ; — your, by vous ; — their, by leur ; which are 
placed immediately before the verb in a simple tense, and before the 
auxiliary in a compound one, with the article le, la, or les, or, if the 
verb govern a, — au, a la, a l\ or aux, before the part of the body 
alluded to . as, — our carriage ran over his body, noire voiture lui fassa 



ON THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUxNS. 291 

sur le corps. I shall break his neck, je lui casserai le cou. He turned 
her mind, il lui tourna P esprit. You hurt ray fingers, vous me faites 
mal aux doigts, &c. as if it were in English — owr carnage to him ran 
over the body ; I to him shall break the neck ; you to me hurt the 
fingers ; he to her turned the mind, &c. 

If the verb should denote an impression of harm which an agent either 
has inflicted or will inflict upon any part of his own body : as, — Miss 
A* * has, or ivill, cut her finger ; I have broken my arm, &c. ; in this 
case, the verb should be reflective in French, as the definite article le, 
la, or les, would not sufficiently indicate whose is the part of the body 
alluded to: as, — Miss A* * has, or will, cut her finger. Mademoiselle 
A* * &^est coupe, ou se coupera, le doigt. I have broken my arm, je 
me suis casse le bras ; and not — Mademoiselle A* * a coupe, ou cou- 
pera, le doigt ; fai casse le bras ; because it could not be ascertained 
whose finger or arm it is. 

In the following sentences and any similar one — he had his head 
cut off; she has lost her mind ; he lifted up his eyes and hands to 
heaven ; the possessive pronouns my, thy, his, her, &c. are expressed in 
French by le, la, or les, before the part of the body mentioned, if the 
article sufficiently explains whose is the part of the body alluded to : as 
— he had his head cut off^, il eut la tete tranchee. She has lost her 
mind, elle a perdu V esprit. He lifted up his eyes and hands to heaven, 
il leva les yeux et les mains an del ; as if it were in English — he had 
the head cut off; she has lost the mind, &c. 

But, if the article should not sufficiently explain whose is the part of 
the body alluded to, the possessive pronouns should then be used in 
French as in English : as, — I see my leg swelling, je vois que ma jambe 
s*enfle ; and not — je vois que la jambe s'enfie ; because it could not be 
ascertained whose is the leg spoken of. 

When my, thy, his, her, our, your, their, are used before a part of 
the body denoting some circumstance or situation of the substantive 
antecedent, as when we say — / saw several ladies, with their eyes cast 
down ; they are left out in French, as likewise the preposition with, 
which is used before the possessive pronoun in English ; and the article 
le, la, or les, is used in their stead in French : as, — I saw several ladies, 
with their eyes cast down, je vis plusieurs dames, les yeux baisses, 
and not — avec leurs yeux baisses. 

2. Mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs. 

General Rule. — Whenever the relative possessive pronouns mine, 
thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs, depend on the preposition of, and 
relate to a substantive preceded by one of the demonstrative pronouns 
this, that, these, those, as — where have you put that book of mine ? 
what have you done with those stockings of hers? &c. they are ex- 
pressed, in French, by one of the conjunctive possessive pronouns mon, 
ma, mes ; ton, ta, tes ; son, sa, ses ; notre, nos ; votre, vos ; leur, 

o 2 



292 PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS 

teurs ; and placed before the substantive to which they refer, agreeing 
■with it in gender and number; and the demonstrative pronouns this, 
that^ these, those, as also the preposition of, are left out : as, — where 
have you put that book of mine ? ou avez-vous mis mon livre ? what 
have you done with those stockings of hers ? qu* avez-vous fait de ses 
has ? &c, — Sometimes, also, the demonstrative pronouns this, that, these, 
those, are expressed in French, and the possessive pronouns mine, thine, 
his, hers, &c. are left out, giving another turn to the sentence : as, — 
what have you done with that book of mine ? qu avez-vous fait de ce 
livre que favais? &c. 

Mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs, coming before a verb in 
the present of the infinitive mood, to express either the duty, business, 
fate, &c. of the person or persons alluded to : as, — it is mine to com- 
mand ; it is Iters to he faithful and obedient, &c. are expressed in 
French by one of the personal pronouns, a moi, a toi, a lui, a elle, a 
710US, a vous, a eux or a elles, and retain the same place in the sentence 
which mine, thine, &c. occupy in English : as, — it is mine to command, 
c'est a moi d commander. It is hers to be faithful and obedient, c'^est a 
elle d'*etre Jidele et obeissante,&c. 

But when mine, thine, his, her, hers, ours, yours, theirs, are used as 
in the next sentences: — she had an estate of her own ; he performed 
a concerto of his own; that is no concern of yours, &c. they are ex- 
pressed in French as follows : — she had an estate of her own, elle avait 
line terre a elle. He performed a fine concerto of his own, il executa un 
beau concerto de sa composition. That is no concern of yours, 
cela ne vous regarde pas, &c. ; but practice alone can teach these 
different modes of expression. 

ESSAY XLIX. 

The boot-maker who lives at the corner of the street (has met with) a 
^ote dottier ^ ^^demeurer ^^ ^'^coin ^^ >* ^^ Hi ^est ^arrive * 

shocking accident ; our carriage imfortunately ran over his body, 

^terrible ' voiiure malhevretisement passer 

broke his left thigh, and bruised his right shoulder very much. — Do not 
casser gcniche citisse ^ ^a ^froisser * ' ^ ^beaucoup 

make so much noise, you split my head. — I trod upon his foot. — A cannon- 
faire tant de fendre marcher 

ball shot off (both) their (left arms) (at the) same time. — Do not 

boulet emporter a tons les deux bras gauche en 

press my hand so much, you hurt my fingers terribly. Tell them that 

presser fort ^ ^faire "'mal '^ ^ ^furieiisement 

break their (necks.) Mii 

casser cou Prendre garde de 

(will hurt) her eyes. — Mr. A * * * is afraid they will be obliged to 

faire mal craindre on sub. pr. de 

cut off his thumb. — I caught cold and completely lost my voice. — My 
couper >, pouce ^enrhitmer cntiirement perdre 



ON THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 293 

father (has had a fall,) on the ice, this morning, and injured his back and 

est tombe * * ^glace ^ * il ^s^est %lesse * ^dos " 

head (very much.) — In the battle of Waterloo, our General received a shot 
^ '^dungereitsement a coup de feu 

in his right leg, another in his left shoulder : (by a great deal) of care and atten- 
a epau/e a force soin 

tion, his leg was saved, but it was necessary to * make an incision in his 

on Sttuver falloir 

shoulder. — Would it not be better for a man of probity to * lose his life 

vnloir mieux perdre 

than to sacrifice his honour by a criminal action ? — I think she has lost her 

de sacrijier 
mind. — When this virtuous officer had lost his leg, at the battle of Wagram, he 

lifted up his eyes and hands (to) heaven, and thanked God for having preserved 
lever au de conserver 

his life. — Did not the Prince of * * have his head cut off for (having) assassi- 

trancher avoir 



nated his brother ? No : it was for having attempted to (murder the) King. — 

7ier att enter la vie du 

His niece (tells a falsehood) as often as she opens her mouth. — The inha- 

mentir toutes /esfois qu' 

bitants of that country are so superstitious, that I recollect having seen, one 

se rappeler d'avoir vu 
Sunday, in a magnificent temple, several thousand people, with ♦ their eyes 

temple permmie 

cast down, for more than half an hour, all intimately persuaded that 

baisser pendant intimement 

God was present, and addressed them in the person of their priest. — I see 

qu'il parler leiir 
that my foot begins to swell: I despair (of its) ever being cured. — 

s'enfler dvsesperer quil sub. pr. se guhir 

If you touch that knife, you will certainly cut your fingers. — Go first 

toucher se couper doigt d'abord 

and * wash your hands, (and then) come and * warm your feet. — I broke 

vous /aver puis se chauffer se casser 

my arm in trying to save a child who threw itself (out of) the window of a 

chercher a sejefer par fenetre 

house on fire. — Give me those stockings of mine which you have 

qui etait en bus 

mended. — —Where have you put that pocket-book of mine which I brought 
raccommodk Oil mettre tablettes apportees 

from France P You put it in your pocket, when you went out this afrer- 

mises les poche sortir 

noon. — Is not that little girl aware that it is mine to command and hers to obey ? 
savoir a d'obeir 

— That poor man, in performing a beautiful concerto of his own, was (struck by 

executer beau frappe 

a fit) of apoplexy, and died suddenly — I have often heard Miss A" * mention 
apoplexie subitemeid dire 



294 PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS 

that she has a large estate of her own on the contineiit ; I should like very much 

beau hien 

to know where it is. — You ought not to * trouble yourself about that, because it 

savoir c' devoit^ se meler de parce que 

is no concern of yours. 



LESSON L. 

Cases in which its is expressed in French by son^ sa, ses, and en. 

General Rule. — Whenever its is used with reference to inanimate 
things not personified, it is expressed in French by son, sa, ses : — 

1. When it comes before a substantive which is governed by the 
preceding verb : as, — Paris has its pleasures, Paris a ses plaisirs. I 
have seen London, its theatres, and buildings, fai vu Londres, ses 
theatres, et ses edifices. 

2. When it is employed before the latter of two substantives which 
are joined together by a conjunction, if the latter belongs to the former: 
as, — London and its neighbourhood, Londres et ses environs. 

3. When it precedes a substantive which depends on a preposition 
and refers to something which has either been mentioned before or is 
spoken of after, as when speaking of England, we say : — it is by its 
situation, joined to the wisdom of its government, that it unites such 
vast advantages within itself, c'est far sa position, jointe a la sagesse 
de son gouvernement, qu'elle reunit dans son seiii de si grands avan- 
tages. 

4. When it comes before a substantive which, being qualified by an 
adjective or specified by some other word, serves as nominative to the 
following verb ; or when, without being modified by an adjective, the 
substantive is the nominative of a verb which either is or can be fol- 
lowed by the preposition de : as, — its regular buildings please at the 
first sight, ses bdtimens reguliers plaiseni au premier coup d^oeil. Its 
trade produces immense resources, son commerce prodnit d'immenses 
ressources. :■,: 

Its, being used before a substantive which serves as nominative to a 
verb in any other circumstance, is generally expressed in French by en 
before the verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound 
one, with le, la, or les, before the substantive, as in the following sen- 
tences, in which reference is made either to a parliament, an army, a 
nation, a town, or a tree : as, — its magistrates are upright, les magis- 
trats en so7it integres. Its soldiers are well disciplined, les soldats en 
sont bien disciplines. Its situation is agreeable, la situation en est 
agreahle. Its squares are beautiful and its streets very large, les places 
en sont superhes et les rues spacicuses. Its fruit is delicious, le fruit 
en est delicieux ; and so on, using l.the article; 2. the thing spoken 
of; 3. en ; 4. the verb ; 5, the adjective or participle. 



ON THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 295 

Its, referring to a substantive which is the object of a verb, but which 
relates to another substantive, governed by another verb in the first part 
of the sentence, is likewise expressed in French by en before the verb 
or the auxiliary ; and by y, if reference be made to a place ; with le, la^ 
or les, before the substantive, in either case : as, — all those who read 
Milton's Paradise Lost are not always capable of feeling its beauties, 
tous ceux qui lisent le Paradis Perdu de Milton ne sont pas toujour s 
capables d^eu sentir les heautes. I should like Vauxhall, if indecency 
did not debase its pleasures, j^aimerais Vauxhall, si Vindecence n'y 
avilissait les plaisirs. 

But practice, in general, will be the best guide for knowing when its^ 
referring to inanimate things not personified, is to be expressed in 
French by son, sa, ses, before the substantive, or by en before the verb, 
with le, la, or les, before the substantive; the latter construction always 
being proper, whenever the sense will admit of it ; whereas son, sa, ses, 
must be used when it will not. 



ESSAY L. 

Every country has its customs, laws, and prejudices. — I should regret 
pays usage p^'^'jug^ regretter 

very much to leave France without (having) seen Paris, its theatres, buildings, 

beuucoup de quiticj' sans avoir edi/cce 

and amusements. — Richmond and its. neighbourhood present to the eye the finest 

prospect I ever beheld. — (It is) on account of its climate, soil, 

perspective que sub. pret. voir Cest a cause clivmt sol 

and productions, that France is so much admired by foreigners. — We were in 

taut des ttraiiger 

England, when the Thames (broke out of its banks), and overflowed all this 

Tamise se d^borda inoiider 

part of the country: the water was so high and rapid that, irf its course, it 
partie haut si que cours 

swept away several houses and trees. — Has not war its theory and 

entrahier plusieurs guerre theorie 

principles like other sciences ? — As soon as Solomon had abandoned himself 

comme les Salomon s''abandouner 

to the love of women, his understanding declined^ his heart weakened, and his 

amour esprit baisser s'affaiblir 

piety degenerated into idolatry. — This town would be a delightful spot, if its 

deginerer en charmant lieu 

streets were not so narrow and its houses so high: its regular buildings please 

etroit bdiitneni 

me much, and its peaceful inhabitants are very amiable. — London is the largest 
paisible grand 

city in Europe : its situation is agreeable and very convenient for trade ; 
vil/e de P commode commerce 

its houses are brick-built and extremely clean ; its squares and streets are large 
brique propre place grand 



296 PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS 

and beautiful, aud its parks immense. — ^This peach-tree is not very fine ; but 

beau pare pecker 

its fruit is delicious. — I will not take that physic; I know its strength and 

delicieux m^deciiie ^ force. * 

effects too well.— As all those who read Milton's Paradise Lost are 

^effet ^trop %ien De meme que 

not capable of feeling its beauties, so the greatest part of foreigners who 

ainsi kranger 

attend Racine's tragedies in Paris cannot relish their sublimity. 

cdler aux a lie sauraient en apprecier la 

—I am very fond of Vauxhall, and I should often take my children there, if 

^ * ^mcner * ^ "^y 

indecency and vulgarity did not debase its amusements and pleasures. 
vulgarite avihr 



LESSON LI. 

Particular Observations on the Demonstrative Pronouns. 

First General Rule. — Whenever this, that, these, those, and also 
such, are used before a tense of the verb to be, followed either by a 
substantive, an adjective, a participle, a pronoun, or a verb in the present 
of the infinitive, to which they refer, or which they serve to demonstrate : 
as, — this is a very good thought; I have now two things in con- 
templation, these are to get married and retire into the country ; these 
or such are my sentiments, &c. they are expressed in French by ce 
or c\ (indeclinable,) before the tense of the verb etre which cor- 
responds to that of the verb to be employed in English, which tense is 
put in the third person singular, if it be followed by a substantive, an 
adjective, a participle, or a pronoun in the singular, or also by a verb in 
the present of the infinitive mood ; but it is put in the third person 
plural, if it be followed by a substantive, an adjective, or a pronoun, in 
the plural: as, — this is a very good thought, c''est une tres-bonne 
pensee. I have now two things in contemplation, these are to get mar- 
ried and retire into the country, y'a« maintenant deux choses en vue, 
c^est de me marier et de me retirer a la campagne. These or such 
are my sentiments, ce sont mes sentimens, &c. 

La must be added to the different tenses of the verb etre, in sentences 
of this kind, if we wish to express the thing spoken of with great energy : 
as, — that is a very imprudent step, c^est Id une demarche bien impru- 
dente. Is that behaving as one ought ? est-ce Id se conduire comme 
il faut ? These or such are my sentiments, ce sont Id mes sentimens, 
&c. which sentences are much more energetic than if we said simply : — 
c^est une demarche bien imprudente ; est-ce se conduire comme il 
faut 1 ce sont mes sentimens. 

Sometimes, also, the demonstrative pronouns and the verb to be are 
expressed by the adverbs voici, voild (here or there is, here or there 



ON THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 297 

are) : as, — this or that is a very imprudent step, void ou voila une de- 
marche hien imprudente. That is a very good thought, voila une hien 
bonne feiis^e. Such or those are my sentiments, voila mes sentimens. 

When this^ that, these, those, come before the present participle of 
the verb to be : as, — this being your opinion ; the sentence must be 
construed by another tense of the verb etre in French, placing one of 
the conjunctions puisque, comme, or any other which the sense may 
require, before ce or c' : as, — this or that being your ophiion, puisque 
ou comme c^est votre opinion, and not — c^etant votre opinion. 

Second General Rule. — When this or that is employed in the 
sense of such before a substantive, to point out a person or a thing in 
an indeterminate manner, it is sometimes expressed in French by tel ou 
telle : as, — that friend who professes the most sincere love is often the 
most likely to forsake us in the time of trouble, tel ami qui profere les 
temoignages les plus sinceres d'amiiie est souvent le premier a nous 
abandonner dans le besoin. 

Third General Rule. — ^Whenever the demonstrative pronoun 
those, and also the pronouns he, she, they, him, her, and them, are the 
antecedents of ivho, whom, that or which, they are expressed, in French, 
as follows : — 

1. He who or that is construed into French by celui qui ; — she ivho 
or that, by celle qui ; — they or those who or that, by ceux qui m. and 
celles qui f. for the nominative of the following verb : as, — he who 
fears nothing is very happy, celui qui ne craint rien est tres-heureux. 

2. He or him whom or that is expressed by celui que ; — she or her 
whom or that, by celle que; — they or those whom, and them or those whom 
or which, by ceux que m. and celles que f. for the direct object of the 
following verb : as, — I have seen her whom you love, j'ai vu celle que 
vous aimez. I shall take those which you have shown me, je prendrai 
ceux que vous m'avez monires. 

3. He or him of or about whom is expressed by celui dont ou du- 
quel ; — she or her of or about whom, by celle dont ou de laquelle ; — 
those or them of or about whom or which, by ceux dont ou desquels m. 
and by celles dont ou desquelles f. for the indirect object of the succeeding 
verb, when such verb requires de after it in French, whatever, in 
general, may be the preposition on which the relative depends in Eng- 
lish : as, — those of whom you complain are innocent, ceux dont vous 
vous plaignez sont innocens ; because we say se plaindre de. 

4. He or him to or ivith whom is expressed by celui a qui ou auquel ; 
— she or her to whom, by celle a qui ou a laquelle ; — they or those to 
whom or to which, by ceux a qui ou auxquels m. and by celles a qui ou 
auxquelles f. for the indirect object of the following verb, when such 
verb requires a after it in French, whatever may also be the preposition 
on which the relative depends in English : as, — those to whom you were 
speaking are charming young ladies, celles a qui vous parhez sont de 
charmantes demoiselles ; because we say, parler a. 

o5 



298 PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS 

Observe. — The pronouns he, she, they, him, her, them and those, are 
sometimes separated from the relatives who, whom, that or which, in 
Enghsh : as, — they are not ahvays happy who seem to be so ; but, 
in French, celui, celle, ceux, celles, must always be joined to qui, que, 
or dont, &c. ; and, for this purpose, the second part of the sentence 
following the relative in English must, with the relative, be used the 
first in French, and be placed immediately after the demonstrative pro- 
nouns celui, celle, ceux, celles, &c. : as, — they are not always happy 
who seem to be so, ceux qui par ais sent etre heureux ne le sont pas 
toujours, as if it were in English — those who seem to be happy are not 
always so. 

The same order may however be retained in the French sentence as 
in the English, by adding the adverb Id to the demonstrative pronouns 
celui, celle, ceux, celles : as, — ceux-\k ne sont pas toujours heureux 
qui paraissent Petre, they are not always happy who seem to be so. 

Such as, at the beginning of a sentence of which it is the nominative : 
as, — such as seem to be happy are not always so, is expressed in French 
like he who, she who, they who, &c. by celui qui, celle qui, ceux qui 
or celles qui, according to the gender and number of the substantive 
which such expression is intended to represent; and, also, by tel ou 
telle, in the beginning of the sentence, with qui before the verb occurring 
in the second part : as, — such as seem to be happy are not always so, 
ceux qui paraissent etre heureux ne le sont pas toujours ; ou — tel 
para'it etre heureux qui ne Vest pas toujours. 

Fourth General Rule. — That and those, followed by which, with 
reference lo some thing that has been mentioned before, as when having 
spoken of watches or rings, we say, — / shall take that which is upon 
the table ; give me those which you do not like ; so, also, which, used 
in reply to a question, with reference to something mentioned in the 
question : as, — which of these two hats will you have ? which you 
please ; are expressed in French by one of the demonstrative pronouns 
celui, celle, ceux, celles, with qui, que, or dont, according as which 
is the subject or object, either direct or indirect, of the following verb in 
English : as, — I shall take that which is upon the table, je prendrai 
celle qui est sur la table (speaking of a watch). Give me those which 
you do not like, donnez-moi celles que vous ne voulez pas (alluding to 
rings). Which of these two hats will you have? which you please; 
lequel de ces deux chapeaux voulez-vous ? celui qu'^7 vous plaira. 

The two following familiar sentences must be excepted, and all simi- 
lar ones, wherein which, though referring to something mentioned before 
in the question, is not construed into French by celui que or lequel, 
but by ce qu'il or comme il, with the next verb in the third person 
singular of the future : as, — do you choose meat or fish ? which you 
please; voulez-vous de la viande ou du poisson? ce qu'il vous plaira 
ou ce qu'il vous fera plaisir ; and not — celui quHl vous plaira ou 
lequel il vous plaira. Shall I help you to some of this or that ? to 



ON THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 299 

which you please ; vous servirai-je de ceci ou de cela ? comme il vous 
plaira, and not — a celui quHl vous plaira ou auquel il vous plaira, 
as it is frequently said. 

But which, used in the sense of lohich thing, in the beginning of the 
second part of a sentence which is not interrogative, referring to the 
whole first part and implying some observation on it : as, — she gets up 
very late, which is very had for her health ; that is, which thing is very 
had; — they go out very often, which I do not approve of; that is, 
which thing I do not approve of; is expressed in French by ce qui, for 
the nominative of the following verb ; by ce que, for its direct object ; by 
ce dont, for its indirect object, when it governs de, and by ce a quoi, when 
it requires a ; which expressions are always masculine and of the singular 
number : as, — she gets up very late, which is very bad for her health, 
elle se leve tres-tard, ce qui est tres-mauvais pour sa sante. They go 
out very often, which I do not approve of, ils sortent tres-souvent, ce 
que/e n"* approuve point, &c. following the same method for the sen- 
tences in which ce dont and ce a quoi are required. 

What or that which, signifying that thing which, without referring 
to any thing expressed before, but taken in an indefinite sense : as, — 
what is good is desirahle ; what you say is true ; that is what I wanted 
to speak to you ah out ; I know what you complain of ; you do not know 
what you expose yourself to ; is also expressed in French by ce qui, for 
the nominative of the succeeding verb; by ce que, for its direct object; 
by de quoi and sometimes ce dont, for its indirect object, when it governs 
de ; and by ce a quoi when it requires a : as, — what is good is desirable, 
CE QUI est hon est desirahle. What you say is true, ce que vous dites 
est vrai. That is what I wanted to speak to you about, voUd de quoi 
je voulais vous parler. I know what you complain of, je sais ce dont 
vous vous plaignez. You are not aware what you expose yourself to, 
vous ne savez pas a quoi ou ce a quoi vous vous exposez. 

Ohserve. — Whenever the word ivhat, or any other expression which 
is to be rendered into French by ce qui or ce cjue, begins a sentence, 
and forms, with the next verb, the subject of a tense of the verb to he, 
coming in the second part of the sentence : as, — ivhat I fear is to dis- 
please you ; ivhat costs little is too dear ivhen it is of no use ; ivhat I 
say is true ; the demonstrative pronoun ce or c', must be used in French 
before the tense of the verb etre, which corresponds to that of the verb 
to he, employed in the second part of the sentence in English, if a sub- 
stantive, a pronoun, or a verb follows; but if it should be an adjective, 
either alone or preceded by an adverb, ce or c' is not required : as, — 
what I fear is a relapse, ce que Je crains, c'est une rechute. What I 
know is they have lost, ce que je sais, c'est quHls ont perdu. What 
attaches me to life is you, ce qui ni^ attache a la vie, c'est vous ; in which 
sentences c' is used, on account of est being followed by a substantive, a 
verb, or a pronoun; but in the next — what costs little is too dear when 
it is of no use, ce qui coute peu est trop cher quand il n'est d'aucun 



300 PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS 

usage. What I say is true, ce que je dis est vraL C is not employed, 
because est is followed by an adjective. 

If the verb following c'est, c^ttait, ce fut, &c. should be in the present of the 
infinitive, de ntiust be used before it ; whereas ywe is required, if it should be in any 
other mood : as, — what I fear is to displease you, ce que Je crains, c^est de vous 
dt'plaire. What I know is they will win, ce que je sais, c^est qu'iTs gagneront. 

Ce qui and ce que, always being of the singular number, cannot be 
used before a substantive plural ; whenever, therefore, which, or any 
other expression, which is to be construed into French by ce qui or ce 
que, comes before a substantive plural in English, another turn must be 
given to the sentence in French, instead of using ce qui or ce que : thus, 
— she plays on the piano and draws uncommonly well, which are two 
very fine accomplishments in a lady, must be rendered into French 
by: — elle joue du piano et de s sine par faitement: talens qui sont con- 
sideres comme tres-beaux dans une demoiselle, and not — ce qui ou 
qui sont consider es, &c. 

ESSAY LI. 

A small cottage and a few pieces of furniture, these are all his fortune. 
chaumiere que/que meuhles c'est la 

— I have now two things in contemplation, these are to get married and 

viie de se marier 

retire into the country. — That is very well thought of*. — That will be 
de se retirer a fort penser 

very badly managed. — I have been told you intend to send a challenge 
administrer avoir intention d'' cartel 

to Mr. D* * *; if such are your sentiments, it is not. . . — Is that (behaving) as a 

se conduire 

man of honour ? — This being your opinion, I am very sorry I have done it. — 

de 

That is a very imprudent step. It frequently happens that those who 

demarche souvent arriver 

profess the (most sincere love) are the most likely to forsake us 

nousfaire plus grandes protestations d^amitit premier a 

(in the time of) trouble and need. Alas! that is unfortunately 

quand nous sommes dans la peine besoin H6las «' malheureusement 

but too often the case When your sister is in company, she frequently 

que en '^souvent 

turns the conversation to subjects of literature, (in order) to mention 
^faire tomber sur des ajin de citer 

the most striking passages of this or that author. — He Avho wants nothing 
frappant avoir besoin 

is very happy. These stockings are very fine, but I shall take in preference 

bas-ci de preference 

those which you showed me first. As all the children are not here, I 

avez montres d\ibord 



ON THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 301 

cannot punish those of whom you complain. Put yourself in the place of him 

se plauidre a 

to whom you will do an injury. Those to whom I was speaking, when you 

voidoir 

called me, are charming ladies. He is much to be pitied who gives himself up 

bien plaimlre s'ahandonner 

to his passions and the pleasures of this world. They are mistaken who think 

se tro7nper 

that happiness consists in riches : for such as seem to be happy are not always 

so. 1 am sure they do not know the human heart who trust to the vain 

sejie)' 

promises of men. All these rings are verj' pretty; however I give the pre- 

promesse bugue j'o/i 

ference to that which your cousin has (on her) finger. Madam, which of these 

cousine au 

gowns shall I have the pleasure of sending you P Which you please. Is not 

de 

her happiness infinitely superior to that which one usually enjoys in this 
au-dessus de on ordinaii'ement jouir 

world ? Do you choose meat or fish ? Which you please. Shall I have the 

vouloir 

pleasure of helping you to some of this or that .^ To which you please. He 

offrir 

drinks rum from morning to night, which is very injurious to his health. 

mir mauvais pour 

What you say is very true. What costs little is too dear when it is bad or 

of no use. Ladies, I know what you are laughing at, but I do not 

qinl 7i'est usage se moquer de 

care. If your sister knew what she exposes herself to in going there, 

^se soucier ^en s'exposer y 

she would certainly stay at home. (You may not like) my pro- 

rester chez elle Peut-etre rC aimer ez-vo us point pro- 

ceeding ; but this is my way of acting : I always say what I think. 

cede maniere penser 

She goes out in* the evening, which displeases me very much. What she 

sortir deplaire 

fears is a relapse. What attaches me to life is you. What 1 know is they 

rechule 

have won. Miss A** plays on the harp and piano, speaks French and 

gagner de 

Italian, draws uncommonly well, which are considered very fine 

dessiner parfaitement ^ ^ * ^comme ^ ' 

accomplishments in a lady. 
^talent 



302 PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS 



LESSON LII. 

Particular observations on the relative pronouns who, whom, whose, 
that, what, and which. 

General Rule. — 1. Whenever loho, being used interrogatively be- 
fore a tense of the verb to he, refers to a substantive following, as — who 
is that lady ? it is expressed in French by qui, for both genders and 
numbers, or by quel, quelle, quels or quelles, according to the gender 
and number of the substantive following : as, — who is that lady ? qui 
est ou quelle est cette dame ? 

If an adjective should follow the verb to be, instead of a substantive, 
as — who As courageous enough to follow me? who should then be 
expressed by quel est celui qui ou quelle est celle qui, or simply by 
qui or qui est-ce qui ; but not by quel, quelle, quels or quelles, with- 
out celui qui or celle qui, as when before a substantive : as, — who is 
courageous enough to follow me? quel est celui qui est assez hardi 
pour me suivre ? ox— qui ou qui est-ce qui est assez hardi pour me 
suivre ? 

2. Qui is also frequently used absolutely in French ; that is, without 
any antecedent expressed, though the sentence be not interrogative. 
Qui is then of the masculine gender, and conveys to the mind only a 
vague and indeterminate idea, in the sense of he who : as, — 

Qui se lasse d'un roi, peut se lasser d'un pere. — Nicom. 11. 

Qui veut parler sur tout souvent parle au hasard j 
On se croit orateur, on n'est que babillard. 

3. Whom, used without any antecedent expressed, in a sentence like 
this, — ask her whom she means ; is construed into French by de qui, 
when the verb on which it depends governs de in French : as, — ask her 
whom she means, demandez-lui de qui elle veut parler. 

4. Whose, employed when a comparison is meant between two or 
more persons or things, as — you have had two dancing-masters : ivhose 
lessons have been most beneficial to you ? is expressed in French by 
quel est celui dont? ou quelle est celle dontl as, — you have had two 
dancing-masters : whose lessons have been most beneficial to you? vous 
avez eu deux maitres de danse : quel est celui dont les lemons vous 
ont fait le plus de bien ? 

5. What, used by way of admiration or astonishment before an adjec- 
tive preceded by a or an, as — what an amiable family is Mr. D.^s ! 
what a fine woman she ivould have been! what a fine lecture he gave 
us ! is sometimes expressed in French by quel, quelle, quels or quelles, 
before the adjective, leaving out a or an, and sometimes a different turn 
is given to the sentence: as — what an amiable family is Mr. D.'s! 
quelle aimable famille que la famille de M, D***'/ What a fine 



ON THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 303 

woman she would have been ! quelle belle femme elle aurait ete ! What 
a fine sermon he gave us ! le beau sermon qu^il nous Jit ! 

6. What, coming between two verbs in the sense of what thing, in 
sentences of doubt, incertitude, or interrogation, as — / do not know 
what to say or to do ; is expressed in French by que, with the next verb 
in the present of the infinitive mood : as, — I do not know what to say 
or to do, je ne sais que dire ni que faire. 

7. But «;/ia/, used interrogatively in the sense of i(?/iaf thing, before 
a tense of the verb to be followed by an adjective preceded by more or 
less, as — ichat is more laudable? or also what, not followed by any 
verb, but used immediately before more or less and an adjective, as — 
what more laudable ? is expressed in French by quoi de before the 
adjective, which is put in the masculine singular ; and the tense of the 
verb to be which may be used, is not expressed : as, — what is more 
laudable or what more laudable ? quoi de plus louable ? 

8. If ivhat, signifying of ivhat moment or of what consequence, 
should be used before a tense of the verb to be, as — ivhat are men be- 
fore God? it should then be expressed by que? or qu^est-ce que? as, 
— what are men before God ? que sont les hommcs devant Dieu ? ou 
qu^est-ce que sont les hommes devant Dieu ? 

Note. — The French frequently use de quoi in an indefinite manner, when they 
wish to denote the means or sub^ance required to do any thing. This expres- 
sion must be rendered into English according to the import of the sentence: as, 
— do)mez-moi de quoi tcrire, give me something to write with. Nous avons de quoi 
nous amuser, we have something to amuse ourselves with ; but this can only be 
learnt by practice. 

9. Which, coming before a tense of the verb to be, or before a tense 
of any other verb which is to be rendered into French by the corre- 
sponding tense of etre, and this being followed by an adjective or any 
other qualifying expression referring to the substantive going before, is 
sometimes expressed in French by quel, quelle, quels or quelles ? and 
sometimes by quel estcelui qui? or quelle est celle qui? as, — you have 
read these two books : which is the most interesting ? vous avez lu ces 
deux livres : quel est le plus interessant ? ou quel est celui qui est le 
plus interessant ? 

1 0. Whichj taken in the sense of which or what thing, and coming 
after a preposition of which it is the object, in a sentence which is not 
interrogative, as — the tables were cleared away, after which dancing 
began ; is generally expressed in French by quoi, imless the preposi- 
tion preceding which should not admit of quoi, in which case the pre- 
position and the relative lohich should be supplied by an adverb, such 
as, — ensuite, alors, Id-dessus, aussitot, autrement, or any other, ac- 
cording to the import of the sentence : as,— the tables were cleared 
away, after which dancing began, on Sta les tables, apres quoi la danse 
coinmenpa ; in which sentence, if quoi were not proper, ensuite should 
be used : as, — on ota les tables, ensuite la danse commeiipa. 



304 PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS 

11 . When the pronoun that, being taken in the sense of which, refers 
to one of the words sometliing or any thing, (quelque chose,) nothing, 
(rien), which it has for its antecedent, as — / do not know any thing 
that he is Jit for ; it is also expressed by quoi, placing the preposition 
of which that is the object in English, before quoi in French, although 
it frequently follows the succeeding verb in English : as, — I do not 
know any thing that he is fit for, je ne sache rien a quoi il soit propre. 

12. ^/l^c^, referring to an expression of place, time, condition, end 
or design, and being the object of one of the prepositions at, to, in or 
ijito, or of any other which is to be rendered into French by a or dans, 
as — the place in ivhich he lives ; the end at which he aims, &c. is gene- 
rally construed into French with the preposition which governs it, by 
ou, instead of auquel or dans lequel, &c. as, — the place in which he 
lives, Vendroit ou il demeure, instead of — dans lequel il demeure. 
The end at which he aims, le hut ou il vise, for — auquel il vise, &c. 

li which should be the object of one of the prepositions /rom, out of, 
through, by, or of any other which is to be construed into French by de 
or par, it is likewise expressed by oil, when it refers to a word denoting 
a book, a subject, or a place ; but, in this case, the preposition de or par 
is expressed : as, — I know the book from which you have extracted that 
passage, je connais le livre d'o^i vous avez tire ce passage. The town 
through which we shall pass, la ville par ou nous passerons. 

Oil is also used interrogatively instead of a quoi, when it means con- 
dition : as, — oil or a quoi me reduisez-vous ? what condition do you 
reduce me to ? — and d'^oii instead of de quoi, in the sense oi from which 
cause or reason ? as, — c/'ow tirez-vous cette consequence ? from which 
cause do you draw that consequence ? 

Par oil is likewise employed interrogatively for the English expressions 
with what 1 — hoxu ? — by what means ? as : — with what shall we begin ? 
par oil commencerons-nous ? How shall you extricate yourself from such 
a difficulty ? par oii sortirez-vous dhm pareil embarras ? 

Oil and d'^oii are also adverbs of place, and are used interrogatively 
in the sense of ivhere ? whither ? and whence ? as, — whither are you 
going ? oil allez-vous ? Whence do you come ? d^oii venez-vous ? 

Observe. — The conjunction that, which is understood before the verb 
coming in the second part of the following or of any similar sentence, 
beginning by a tense of the verb to be, with the pronoun it taken inde- 
terminately for its subject, and a substantive or a personal pronoun 
preceded by a preposition for its object, as — it is to you I speak ; is 
always elegantly expressed in French by que, placing the preposition 
which the following verb may require in French, immediately before the 
substantive or pronoun which follows the impersonal it is, it was, &c. 
in English, and expressing it is, it was, by the corresponding tense of 
the verb etre, before which ce or c' is used in the sense of it in English : 
as, — it is to you I speak, c'^est a vous que je parle ; as if it were in 
English — it is to you that / speak. 



ON THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 305 



ESSAY LIL 

Who was that lady to whom Mr. C* * introduced you the other day ? Who 

presenter 

will he courageous enough to attack that furious animal ? He who 

pour aitaquer furieux 

(covets all, loses all.) Did you ask her whom she (meant) ? No ; I 

trop embrasse mal etreint demander voidait parler 

(did not) You have had two or three different masters : whose lessons 

ne le lui demandai pas. 

have been most beneficial to you ? What an amiable family is Mr. L.'s ! But 

what a* disgusting one is Mr. C.'s ! What a fine girl she would have 

que 6 ice//€ ^ Ue^ * 



been, if she had not had that misfortune ! What a beautiful picture !- 



What do you say he has lost ? 1 (am at a loss) what to tell him. She did 

ne sais 

not know what to answer. What more laudable in a young man than 

louable 

spending his time in the study of sciences and arts ? What are men before 

d'employer ci 

God ? Tell them that if they will stay at home they will have something 

vouloir Tester 

to* play with*. You are acquainted with these two families: wliich is the 

s'amuser connaitre 

richest ? The ladies were admitted at ten o'clock, after which the ball began. 

admetire 

Do you know any thing that he is fit for? The end at 

sub.pr. ^'^ voila '^ ^*but^^ 

which he aims is* to* revive liberty in a country from which it seems to* 
'« J 7 ymVe Vmtre =* * ^^ 7 ^ ^paraitre 

(have been) banished. How comes it* that nobody is satisfied with his 

^^etre '^ /->'ow content de 

condition ? The country through which we passed in going to Douleau, a* vil- 

S07't 

lage from which they extract a great quantity of coals, is the most fruitful in 
/'o« tirer chai'bon 

which I have ever travelled. Well! what will you begin with.'* 

S2tb, pret. jamais voyager He bien 

Where are you going this afternoon ? Whence does your sister come .'' Was 

it to this office you applied last year ? — No, it was not. It is not to you I 

ee bureau s'adresser ce ici 

speak. — It is on them I depend for that favour. 
ff attendre 



306 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

LESSON LIII. 

Of Indefinite Pronouns. 

1. Quiconque, qui que, qui que ce soit qui, whoever, whosoever, any 
one who 07' that, any body who or that; qui que ce soit que, whom- 
soever. 

Whoever, whosoever, and any body who or that, are expressed in 
French by quiconque, which being masculine singular, requires any 
adjective or participle referring to it to be in the masculine singular, 
unless quiconque should have a direct relation to women, in which case 
any adjective or participle referring to it ought to be feminine. Quicon- 
que always governs the verb of which it is the nominative in the third 
person singular, and if any verb should occur in the second part of the 
sentence, of which it would also be the nominative, il must not be used 
before it : as, — whoever said so has not spoken the truth, quiconque a 
dit cela n^a pas dit la verite ; and not — il n'a pas dit, &c. 

WJioever, whosoever, any body who or that, may also be expressed 
in French by qui que ce soit qui, putting the next verb in the subjunc- 
tive mood, and following for the rest of the sentence the same rules as 
for quiconque : as, — whoever said so has not spoken the truth, qui que 
ce soit qui ait dit cela n''a pas dit la verite. 

WJioever, nsed w^ith any of the personal pronouns he, she, we, you, 
they, as nominative to any tense of the verb to be, as — whoever he or 
you may be ; whoever he, she, or they may be ; is expressed in French 
by qui que, for the first and second persons singular and plural; quel 
que or quelle que, for the third smgular; and quels que or quelles que, 
for the third plural, before the personal pronouns, je, tu, il, elle, nous, 
vous, ils or elles, putting the following verb in the subjunctive mood : as, 
whoever you may be, qui que vous soyez ; whoever he, she, or they may 
be, quel qu^il ou quelle qit'elle soit ; or quels qu'ils ou quelles qu^ elles 
soient. 

Wliomsoever, coming after a preposition, as — of whomsoever you 
may have heard it, I do not believe it, is expressed in French by qui 
que ce soit que, after the preposition, with the next verb in the sub- 
junctive mood : as, — of whomsoever you may have heard it, I do not 
believe it, de qui que ce soit que vous Payez entendu, je ne le crois 
pas. 

2. Quelqu^un, quelqu^une, somebody, some one,^Jauy body, any one. 

Whenever the pronouns somebody, some one, any body, any one, are 
taken in an indefinite sense, they are expressed in French by quelqu^un, 
which being masculine singular, requires any pronoun, adjective, or par- 
ticiple, referring to it, in the masculine singular, and the verb of which it 
may be the nominative in the third person singular : as, — somebody told 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 307 

me so, quelqu^un me Pa dit. Has any body been here for me to-day ? 
est-il venu quelqu'un me dernander aujourd^hui? ou est-on venu me 
demander aujourd'hui? 

Some of or any of, coming before a substantive plural, and so?7ie or 
any, referring to a substantive plural, mentioned before, are expressed 
in French by quelques-uns, for the masculine, and by quelques-unes for 
the feminine, according to the gender of the substantive which they may 
represent, Quelques-nns and quelques-unes are applicable to both per- 
sons and things. En is put before the verb which precedes them, if 
they refer to a substantive going before, but en is omitted if they precede 
their respective substantive : as, — I have read some of your books, ya2 
In quelques-uns de vos livres. Do you know any of these ladies ? yes, 
I know some of them, connaissez-vous quelques-unes de ces dames ? 
Old, fen connais quelques-unes. 

Some of or any of occurring before a substantive singular preceded 
by a possessive or a demonstrative pronoun, as — give me some of your 
bread ; is expressed in French by un pen de, or simply by de : as, — 
give me some of your bread, donnez-moi un peu de voire pain; or 
simply, donnez-moi de voire pain. But some of or any of, coming 
before one of the pronouns ii or ihem, is construed by un peu, without 
de, using en with the verb : as, — give me some of it or them, donnez- 
m'en un peu ; or simply, donnez-m'en. 

3. Chacun, everyone; ioui le monde, everybody; chacun, chacune, 
each, every one. 

When every one and every body are used with reference to persons 
in an indeterminate manner, every one is usually expressed in French 
by chacun, to denote an idea of individuality, and every body by ioui 
le monde, to express an idea of generality : as, — every one must pay for 
himself, il fiut que cliacun paie pour soi ; every body says so, tout le 
monde le dit, &c., in such a case, cliacun and tout le monde, being mas- 
culine singular, require any adjective or participle referring to them to 
be in the masculine singular, and the verbs of which they may be the 
nominatives, in the third persons singular, as above. 

But each and every one, followed by the preposition of and a sub- 
stantive plural, or also by a personal pronoun in the plural which refers 
to persons or animated beings ; as, likewise, each used immediately before 
or after the verb of which it is the nominative, with the preposition o/and 
the personal pronoun to which it refers, understood, are expressed in 
French by chacun for the masculine, and chacune for the feminine, 
which have no plural : as, — each of these books costs me six shillings, 
chacun de ces livres me coute six schellings. Have you seen the 
ladies? each had on a different dress, (that is, — each of them had on a 
different dress,) avez-vous vu les dames ? chacune avait une parure 
differente. Every one of you will dance in her turn, chacune de vous 
dansera a son tour. 



308 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. . 

If each and every one should be followed by o/and the pronoun tliem | 
used with reference to inanimate things, both them and the preposition 

should be left out in French, as them cannot be expressed by eux or elles^ j 

with reference to inanimate objects ; but each and every one must be \ 

construed, as above, by chacun for the masculine, and chacune for the , 
feminine : as, — have you seen the pictures in the drawing-room ? each 

of them has cost me a hundred guineas, avez-vous vu les tableaux qui ! 

sont dans le salon ? Us m^ont coute chacun cent guinees, and not Us j 
m^ont coute chacun d'eux, &c. because tableaux are inanimate. 

i 

4. Chaque ; tous les, toutes les ; tout, toute ; every. ! 

Every ^ coming immediately before a substantive, without the inter- ; 

vention of the preposition of\ is expressed in French by chaque, if it be I 

taken in a distributive sense, and by tous les or toutes les, if implying \ 

an idea of plurality or being used to express a repetition of something \ 

that is often done : as,- — every age has its duties to fulfd, chaque age a \ 

ses devoirs a remplir. Every lady who was there, toutes les dames qui | 

y etaient. I see her every day, je la vols tous les jours. We go there ; 

every week, nous y allons toutes les semaines. ! 

Every, taken in a general and collective sense before a substantive, j 

is likewise expressed in French by tout or toute singular : as, — every '; 

man is mortal, tout homme est mortel. Every woman who does that is i 

ruined, toute femme qui fait cela est perdue, \ 

Chaque is used with reference to both persons and things, of either the mas- | 

culine or feminine gender. It ahvays precedes its respective substantive, unless j 

this should be preceded by another adjective, in which case chaque would come j 

the first. i 

5. Personne, nobody, no one, any body, any one. 1 

Whenever nobody, no one, are taken in an indeterminate sense, and .■ 

any body, any one, occur after a negative expression, as in the following '' 

sentences: — nobody came; liave you not seen any body? no, I have \ 
seen nobody ; they are expressed in French hy personne, which, being 

masculine singular, requires any adjective or participle referring to it in ; 

the masculine singular, with ne before the verb of which it is either the \ 

nominative or object; and if the nominative, the verb is put in the third > 
person singular : as, — nobody came, personne n'est venu. Have you 

not seen any body ? n"* avez-vous vu personne ? no, I have seen nobody, ^ 

non, je n^ai vu personne. ^ ^ i 

Any body and any one, used in an interrogative sentence which is \ 

not negative, or coming after a verb affirmatively used, but expressing . 

astonishment or doubt, are also expressed in French by personne, ^yhich I 

being masculine singular, requires, as above, any adjective or participle , 

referring to it in the masculine singular, and the verb of which it may 1 

be the nominative in the third person singular, but without ne before ^ 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 309 

it : as, — have you ever seen any body more amiable than Miss H*** ? 
avez-vous jamais fu personne de plus aimahle que M"'H***? I 
doubt whether any body ever knew the origin of the winds, je doute 
que per Sonne ait jamais connu Vorigine des vents. 

But personne, taken in the sense of the substantive person or people, 
is always feminine, and used in the singular and plural. In this case, 
any adjective or participle referring to it, agrees with it in gender and 
number, and ne is not required before the verb of which it is either 
the nominative or object; and if the nominative, the verb agrees with 
it in number : as, — there were two or three hundred people or persons, 
il y avait deux ou trois cents personnes. Some learned people say so, 
des personnes instruites le disent. 

6. Nul, nulle ; aucun, aucuney no ; pas un, pas une, not one. 

No, coming immediately before a substantive, is generally expressed 
in French by nw/, nulle, or aucun, aucune. None, either referring 
to a substantive expressed before, or followed by the preposition of and 
a substantive plural, or also by a personal pronoun in the plural, is con- 
strued by aucun, aucune ; and not one, referring to a substantive going 
before, by pas un, pas une. Nul, nulle, and aucun, aucune, are of 
the singular number, and require ne before the verb of which they are 
either the nominative or object, and govern any adjective or participle 
referring to them in the singular, as also the verb of which they may 
be the nominative in the third person singular : as, — no man is perfect, 
nul homme n''est parfait. None of them has ever been there, aucun 
d*eux n*y a jamais et'e. All my friends were invited, but none would 
go, ious mes amis furent invites, mais pas un ne voulut y aller. 

Not aruj, used with a verb, is expressed in French by pomt after the verb, 
with ne and en before it, thus — n''en : as, — have you any money ? no, I have not 
any, uvez-voiis de V argent f 7ion, je n'en ai point. But, if of them shoidd be ex- 
pressed or understood after not any, anctm should then be used instead of point 
after the verb, with ti'en likewise before it: as, — I do not know any of them, /e 
n'en cnnnais aucun. 

7. Rien, nothing, not anything; ne que, but, only, nothing but, no- 
thing else but, nobody but, nobody else than ; ne qui, any body but. 

1. Rien, nothing, not any thing. 

Nothing, taken in an indefinite sense, as also any thing, coming 
after never, not, or any other negative expression, are expressed in 
French by rieii, which is masculine singular, and governs ne before 
the verb of which it is either the nominative or object. Any adjective 
or participle referring to rien is put in the masculine singular, preceded 
by de, if immediately following nothing or any thing in English, but 
without de if a verb intervene : as, — she says nothing, elle ne dit rien. 
I have never seen any thing so beautiful, je n'ai jamais vu rien de si 
heau. Nothing is more rare than a true friend, rien n^est plus rare 



310 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

qu^un veritable ami, &c. always observing to put the verb in the 
third person singular when rien is its nominative. 

If any thing should be used without a negative expression, in a sen- 
tence of doubt, incertitude, or interrogation, it should likewise be ex- 
pressed by rien, but without ne before the verb, following, in every other 
respect, the preceding rule : as, — I question whether any thing will be 
more congenial to her feelings, ye doute que rien lui soit plus agreable. 
Is there any thing more agreeable than the society of an amiable 
woman? y a-t-il rien de plus agreable que la societe d^une femme 
aimable ? 

But rien, taken in the sense of a mere nothing, a trifle, a thing of 
very little importance, is a substantive which can be used in the plural 
and take the mark of it, although always remaining masculine. In 
this case, de is never used before the adjective or participle foUov/ing : 
as, — she does nothing but mere trifles, elle ne fait que des riens. She 
bid an adieu to the splendid trifles of the court, elle dit adieu aux riens 
hrillans de la cour. 

Observe. — When personne, aucun, nul, pas un, quelquhtn, quoi, 
quelque chose, quoi que ce soit, are immediately followed by an adjec- 
tive, a participle, or an adverb of quantity, they require de before it ; 
whereas de is not required if a verb intervene : as, — there is nobody 
come, il n^y a personne de venu. Something pretty, quelque chose de 
joli. Something more, quelque chose de plus. Nobody is more amiable, 
personne n' est plus aimable. 

2. Ne que, but, only, nothing but, nothing else but, nobody but, 
nobody else than ; ne qui, nobody but, any body but. 

The words but and only, used in the sense of no more, and also 
nobody but, nothing but, nothing else but, nobody else than, coming 
after a verb before its object, as likewise any body but or any body else 
but, if the verb should be in the negative form, are expressed in French 
by ne before the verb or the auxiliary, with que after it in a simple tense, 
and after the participle in a compound one, but never by mais, seule- 
ment, rien, autre, &c. : as, — I have but few friends, je n^ai que pen 
d^amis. She will have only sixty guineas, elle n^aura que soixante 
guinees. I have nothing but that, je n''ai que cela. He had nothing 
else but two or three oranges, il n'eut que deux ou trois oranges. I 
saw nobody but Mr. and Mrs. L* * *, or, I have not seen any body but 
Mr. and Mrs. L***,ye ne vis on je n\ii vu que M. et M""' /,*** 

But, coming either after any body in an interrogative sentence, or 
after nobody in a negative one, is usually expressed in French by qui, 
if any body or nobody should be the nominative of the following verb. 
Any body and nobody are then construed by personne, with ne before 
the verb, which is put in the subjunctive mood : as, — is there any body 
but knows it ? ?/ a-t-il personne qui ne le sache ? There is nobody but 
fears death, il n*y a personne qui ne craigne la moi't. 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 311 

The word hid, in any other circumstance, whether. at the beginning 
or in the second part of a sentence, is expressed in French by mais ; 
and only^ when employed in its natural sense, and not in that of no 
more, by seulement : as, — I wish very much to go, but I have no 
monev, je desire beaucoup cVy allei\ mais je n^ai pas d^ argent. You 
might succeed, if you had only twenty francs, vous pourriez reussir, si 
vous aviez seulement vingt francs. 

8. Le meme, la meme, les memes, the same. 

The same is expressed in French by le meme, la meme, or les memes, 
according to the gender and number of the substantive to which it refers : 
as, — the same man, le meme homme ; the same thing, la meme chose ; 
the same persons, les memes personnes. 

The following expressions — it is all the same, it is all one, are ex- 
pressed in French by : — c''est la meme chose ; c'est egal ; c^est tout un. 

The French frequently use the word meme, without any article, after 
a substantive or a pronoun, making it agree in gender and number with 
that substantive or pronoun, to give more energy to the expression, in 
the sense of all, very, himself, herself, itself, themselves, &c. : as, — he 
or she is all goodness, c^est la honte meme. That very thing which I 
told you, cela meme que je vous ai dit. The rocks themselves were 
affected by the melodious sounds of Orpheus, les rochers memes etaient 
sensihles aux accords d''Orphee. It is yourself, c''est vous-meme. 

Meme, indeclinable, is used in the sense of also, even : as, — women 
and even children were killed, les femmes et meme les enfans furent 
tues. 

9. Plusieurs, many, several. 

The words many and several are expressed in French by plusieurs, 
which, being plural of both genders, is only applicable to persons, when 
used absolutely as follows: — many say so, plusieurs le disent ; but, 
when plusieurs is employed adjectively, it equally well applies to both 
persons and things, and precedes the substantive to which it refers, if 
this should be expressed : as, — several persons, plusieurs personnes ; 
many things, plusieurs choses ; many of your friends, plusieurs de vos 
amis. 

10. Tel, telle, tels, telles, such; tel que, telle que, tels que, telles 
que, such as. 

Such is expressed in French by tel, telle, tels or telles, according 
to the gender and number of the substantive to which it refers, leaving 
out a which follows such in English : as, — such a man, tel homme ; 
such a thing, telle chose ; and not — tel un homme, telle une chose. 

Such as, used to express a comparison between persons or things, is 
expressed by — tel que, telle que, tels que or telles que, according to 
the gender and number of the first of the persons or things compared : 
as, — she is a woman such as you, c^est une femme telle que vous. 



312 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

But such asy taken in an indefinite sense at the beginning of the first 
part of a sentence which consists of two parts, as — such as laugh to 
day ivill cry to-morroiv ; is expressed by tel or telle, tels or telles, 
before the first part of the sentence, with qui before the second : as, — 
such as laugh to-day will cry to-morrow, tel rit aujourd^hui qui pleu- 
rera demain. 

11. Quelque, quelques, adj. some or any; quelque and quelques, with 
que before the following verb , and also — quel que, quelle que, quels 
que, and quelles que, in two words, whatever. Quelque and tout, 
indeclinable, with que before the next verb, however, howsoever, 

THOUGH EVER SO MUCH OT SO LITTLE, LET EVER SO. Quelque choSB 

que, quoi que ce soit que, quoi que ce soit, quoi que, whatever, 
whatsoever, &c. 

1. Quelque, quelques, adj. some or any. 

Some or any, coming before a substantive which refers to things, and 
of which it does not express a portion, is sometimes construed into 
French by quelque or quelques, and sometimes by du, de la, cle l\ or 
des, according to the gender and number of the substantive : as, — I had 
something to tell you, favais quelque chose a vous dire. Have you 
any thing to tell me ? avez-vous quelque chose a rue dire ? If you 
have any thing to tell her, si vous avez quelque chose a lui dire. Do 
you know any news? savez-vous des nouvelles? 

But some or any, employed before a substantive and denoting an in- 
determinate number or portion of it, is always expressed in French by 
du, de la, de l\ or des, according to the gender and number of the sub- 
stantive : as, — give me some bread, donnez-moi du pain. Have you 
any ink ? avez-vous de l^encre ? &c. 

2. Quelque and quelques, with que before the succeeding verb ; and 
also — quel que, quelle que, quels que, and quelles que, in two words, 

WHATEVER. 

Whatever or whatsoever, being used before a substantive which is 
followed by any other verb than to he, or simply wka,t or which before 
a substantive, with soever after it, or though or let before a verb, with 
ever so much or so many, so little or so few, before the following sub- 
stantive, is expressed in French by quelque or quelques before the 
substantive, with que after it, putting the succeeding verb in the sub- 
junctive mood : as, — whatever reasons he may have, or what reasons 
soever he may have ; let him have ever so many reasons, or though he 
have ever so many reasons, quelques raisons quHl ait; &c. using, 
1. quelque or quelques; 2. the substantive; '6. que ; 4. the verb in 
the subjunctive mood ; 5. the rest as in English. 

But if the substantive before which whatever or whatsoever, or any 
of the above expressions is used, should be the nominative of a tense of 
the verb to he, as — whatever his opinions may he ; whatsoever road it 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 313 

may he; whatever or lohatsoever, or any of the above expressions, 
should then be construed into French by — quel que, quelle que, quels 
que or quelles que, in two words, before the corresponding tense of 
the verb etre, in French ; quel taking the gender and number of the 
substantive to which it refers, and que remaining indeclinable : as, — 
whatever his opinions may be, quelles que soient ses opinions. What- 
soever road it maybe, quel que soit le chemin, &c. using, 1. quel, 
quelle, quels or quelles ; 2. que ; 3. the verb in the subjunctive mood; 
4. the substantive; as if it were in English — whatever may be his 
opinions ; whatsoever may be the road. 

3. Quelque and tout (indeclinable), with que before the following verb, 

HOWEVER, HOWSOEVER, THOUGH EVER SO MUCH Or SO LITTLE, LET 
EVER SO. 

However, being used before an adjective or a participle, or how 
before with soever after, or as before and as after, or simply as after it ; 
or, also, though or let before a verb, whether to be or any other, with 
ever so after it, before an adjective or a participle, is expressed in 
French by quelque, indeclinable, before the adjective or participle, with 
que after it, putting the succeeding verb in the subjunctive mood ; or, 
also, by — tout, before the adjective or participle, with que after it, and 
the following verb in the indicative mood : as, — however powerful you 
may be; or, as powerful as you are; or, powerful as you are; or, 
though or let you be ever so powerful, quelque puissant que vous soyez, 
or tout puissant que vous etes ; using, 1. quelque or tout; 2. the ad- 
jective or participle; 3. que ; 4. the verb in the subjunctive mood, if 
quelque be used; but in the indicative, if it be tout; 5. the substantive, 
if any, and the rest as in English. 

Though, used before a tense of the verb to be, followed by a substan- 
tive, as — though she he a woman; is expressed in French by tout, 
toute, tous or toutes, according to the gender and number of the sub- 
stantive following, with que before the verb, which must be put in the 
indicative mood: as, — though she be a woman, toute femme qu^elle 
est; using, 1. tout, toute, tous or toutes ; 2. the substantive; 3. que ; 

4. the verb in the indicative mood ; as if it were in English — all woman 
that she is. 

4. Quelque chose que, quoi que ce soit que, quoi que ce soit, quoi que, 
whatever, whatsoever, nothing whatever. 

When whatever or whatsoever, or also — notliing whatever, or any 
thing whatever or whatsoever in a negative sentence, are used in an 
indeterminate sense, as in the following sentences : — whatever you may 
say ; she does not apply herself to any thing whatever ; whatever or 
whatsoever is expressed in French by quelque chose que, quoi que ce 
soit que or quoi que, with the following verb in the subjunctive mood : 

p 



ai4 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

as, — whatever you may say, quelque chose que, quoi que ce soit que or 
quol que vous disiez ; and nothing whatever, or any thing ivhatever 
or whatsoever in a negative sentence, by quoi que ce soit, quelque chose 
que ce soit or rien du tout, with ne before the verb, which must be 
put in the indicative mood : as, — she does not apply herself to any 
thing whatever, elle ne s'applique a quoi que ce soit or a rien du 
tout. 

Quoi que, pronoun, must be written in two words, to be distinguished from quoique, 
conjunction. 

Any or no, coming before a substantive with whatever or whatsoever 
either expressed or understood after it, in an affirmative or negative 
sentence, as—Jind any pretext whatever; there is no reason ivhat- 
soever ; whatever or whatsoever is expressed in French by quelconque, 
singular, for both genders, and is placed after the substantive to which 
it refers : as, — find any pretext whatever, trouvez un pretexte quel- 
conque. There is no reason whatsoever, il n'y a raison quelconque. 

Quelconque is also sometimes used in the plural : as, — deux points 
quelconques, two points whatsoever. 

12. Tout, toute, tons, toutes, all, the whole of; tout le, toute la, tous 
les, toutes les, all the, the whole; le tow^, the whole ; tout, every 
thing, all things ; tout ce qui, tout ce que, all that, every thing that ; 
tout (indeclinable), wholly, entirely, quite; nous tous, vous tous, 
eux tous, all of us, all of you, all of them. 

1. Tout, toute, tous, toutes ; all, the whole of. 

Whenever all or the ivhole of, comes before a possessive or a demon- 
strative pronoun followed by a substantive, as — all my friends ; with 
all that kindness ; the lohole of their property ; it is expressed in 
French by tout, toute, tous or toutes, according to the gender and 
number of the following substantive, and is placed before the possessive 
or demonstrative pronoun in French as in English, without ever being 
accompanied by any article in French : as, — all my friends, tous mes 
amis ; with all that kindness, avec toute cette honte ; the whole of their 
property, tout leur Hen. 

2. Tout le, toute la, tous les, toutes les ; all the, the whole. 

All the or the whole, coming before a substantive which is not pre- 
ceded by a possessive or a demonstrative pronoun, is expressed in French 
by tout le, toute la, tous les or toutes les, according to the gender and 
number of the substantive: as, — I have danced with all the ladies, y'oi 
danse avec toutes les dames. The whole fleet and army, toute lajiotte 
et toute Parmee. 

3. Le tout ; the whole. 

The whole, not referring to any substantive, but taken in an indefinite 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 315 

sense, is expressed in French by le tout, which being masculine singular, 
requires any adjective or participle referring to it, in the masculine 
singular, and the verb of v»'hich it may be the nominative in the third 
person singular; but if le tout should be the object of a verb, it must be 
placed after the verb in a simple tense, and after the participle in a 
compound one : as, — the whole amounts to so much, le tout se monte a 
tant. Will you have the whole? voulez-vous le tout? The whole 
would not be too much, le tout ne serait pas trap. 

4. Tout, every thing, all, all things. 

Whenever the words everij thing, all, all tilings, are taken in an in- 
definite sense, they are expressed in French by tout, which being mascu- 
line singular, requires the verb of vvhich it may be the nominative in 
the third person singular; but if tout should be the direct object of a 
verb, it must be placed after the verb in a simple tense, and between the 
auxiliary and the participle in a compound one : as, — every thing goes 
badly, tout va mal. Piety refers all things to God, la piete rapporte 
tout a Dieu. She has lost every thing, elle a tout perdu. 

5. Tout ce qui, tout ce que ; all that, every thing that. 

The words all that, every thing that or ivJiich, and also whatever in 
the sense of all that, are expressed in French by tout ce qui, for the 
nominative of the following verb, and by tout ce que for its direct object. 
Tout ce qui and tout ce que, being masculine singular, require any 
adjective or participle referring to them in the masculine singular; and 
the verb of which tout ce qui may be the nominative in the tliird person 
singular : as, — all that or whatever is fashionable is much sought after, 
tout ce qui est a la mode est tres-recherche. All that or whatever she 
says is false, tout ce qu^elle dit est faux. 

6. Tout (indeclinable), wholly, entirely, quite. 

Whenever the adverbs ivholly, entirely, quite, are used before an 
adjective or a participle, they are expressed in French by tout (inde- 
clinable), whether the adjective or participle before which tout comes be 
masculine or feminine, singular or plural ; except, however, wlien being 
feminine, it begins with a consonant or h aspirated, in which case tout 
agrees with it in gender and number: as, — he is entirely devoted to their 
service, il est tout devoue a leur service. She was quite astonished, 
elle etait tout etonnee. Was she not quite sad ? n^etait-elle pas toute 
triste ? &c. 

Should wholly, entirely, quite, come before the possessive pronoun 
yours, SiS — I am ivholly yours ; they should likewise be expressed in 
French by tout (indeclinable), which is placed before the personal pro- 
noun a vous, in the sense of yours in English : as, — I am wholly yours, 
je suis tout a vousj and not— -^e suis tout le votre. 

p2 



316 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

7. Nous tous, vous tons, eux tons, §^c. ; all of us, all of you, all of them. 

Whenever the expressions all of us, all of you, all of them, depend 
on a preposition, as in these sentences: — he complains of all of us ; I 
shall have recourse to all of you ; all of us is expressed in French by 
710US tous, for the masculine plural, and nous toutes, for the feminine 
plural; all of you, by vous tous for the m. pi. and vous toutes for the 
f. pi. ; all of them, by eux tous for the m. pi. and elles toutes for the 
f. pi. ; provided a preposition, corresponding to that of which all of us, 
all of you, all of them, are the objects in English, be used before nous 
tous, vous tous, eux tous or elles toutes, in French ; for should all of 
us, all of you, all oftJiem, come after a verb requiring no preposition 
before nous tous, vous tous, eux tous or elles toutes, in French, or 
should all of us, all of you or all of them, be the nominative of a verb, 
tous or toutes should then be used without the pronouns nous, vous, 
eux or elles : as, — he complains of all of ns, il se plaint de nous tous 
or DE nous toutes. I shall have recourse to all of you, faurai recours 
k vous tous ov h. vous toutes, &c. ; but we should say without eux or 
elles — they were all of them gone, ils etaient tous partis or elles etaient 
toutes parties; and not — lis etaient eux tous partis or elles etaient 
elles toutes parties. 

Observe. — Tout, toute, tous or toutes, is used in French before every 
substantive or adjective which it modifies, and agrees with it in gender 
and number (except in the cases where tout is indeclinable), although 
all, the whole or tlie whole of may not be repeated in English : as, — 
1 am, with all the respect and esteem possible, your very humble servant, 
je suis, avec tout le respect et toute la consideration possible, voire 
tres-humble serviteur. 

13. Un autre, une autre, another; les autres, autrui, others. 

Another is expressed in French by un autre, for the masculine sin- 
gular, and une autre for the feminine singular. Others is construed by 
les autres, which is a plural of both genders. These pronouns are 
equally applicable to both persons and things: as, — another man, -im 
autre homme ; another thing, une autre chose ; the others, les autres. 

If others should be used in an indefinite sense after a preposition, and 
refer to persons, but without comparison with any other word in the 
sentence, as — to speak ill of others ; it should be rendered into French 
by autrui, which is indeclinable and never admits of any article : as, — 
to speak ill of others, mal parler cV autrui ; but if a comparison should 
be established in the sentence, others and another should then be ex- 
pressed by les autres, des autres, or aux autres, according to the sense : 
as, — we must not take a man's goods to give to another, il ne faut pas 
prendre le bien des uns pour le donner aux autres, and not — a 
autrui ; because another used in the second part of the sentence stands 
in opposition to a man's employed in the first part. 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 317 

Aulrui can only be 'used after a preposition in French : as, — ne premz pas le 
bien (i'aiitriti, do not take others' goods. Les autres is employed for the nomina- 
tive or direct ohject of a verb: as, — les autres n\nt pas tie punis ou punies, the 
others have not been punished. J'aime mieux les autres, I like the others best j and 
not autrui. 

14. Uun PaiUre, Pune I'autre, les uns les autres, les unes les autres ; 

one another, each other. 

The pronouns one another and each other are expressed in French 
by I'un Pautre, Vune Vautre, when speaking only of two, and by les 
uns les autres, les unes les a?(ire.y, when speaking of several, according 
to the gender of the substantive or substantives to which they refer ; and 
if they depend on a pre])osition, it is placed between Ihin and Vautrey 
Pune and P autre, les uns and les autres, and les unes and les autres ^ 
and never before them, as it is in English before one another and each 
other : as, — they praise one another too much. Us se louent trop Pun 
P autre; they are always speaking ill of one another, ?7.j par/e/z^ tou- 
jour s mal Pun de P autre, and not — de Pun P autre. 

15. Vun et P autre, Pune et P autre, les uns et les autres, les unes et 
les autres, both, one and another ; Pun ou P autre, Pune ou Pauire, 
either; ni Pun ni P autre, ni Pune ni P autre, neither. 

1. Dun et Pauire, Pune et P autre, les uns et les autres, les unes et 
les autres, both, one and another. 

Whenever both and one and another are used with reference to two 
persons or things, they are expressed in French by Pun et Pautre, Pune 
et Pautre, which require any adjective or participle referring to them in 
the plural, and the verb of which they may be the nominative in the third 
person plural : as, — both are good. Pun et Pautre sont bons. Both 
disobeyed the king, ^7^ desobeirent an roi Pun ct Pautre. 

If both and one and another should refer to more than two persons 
or things, they should be expressed by les uns et les autres, les unes ct 
les autres, requiring, as above, the verb of which they may be the 
nominative in the third person plural, and the adjectives or participles 
which may refer to them in the plural : as, — I hate to be in company 
with those who are too full of flattery, as well as with those whose sin- 
cerity borders upon rudeness, both are equally disagreeable, je ne hats 
pas moins la compagnie de ceux qui font trop de coniplimens, que celle 
cles personnes clont la franchise approche de la grossierete ; les uns et 
les autres sont egalement desagreables. 

When both, referring to two persons or things, comes after the pro- 
nouns ive,yo2i, and they, for the nominative of a verb, and after us, you, 
and them, for its object, as — they both died miserably; I admire you 
both ; he spoke to them both, &c. ; it is expressed in French by Pun et 
Pauire, Pune et Pautre, singular, which must be placed after the verb 



318 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

in a simple tense, and after the participle in a compound one, construing 
the pronouns we, you, they, by 7ious, vous^ Us or elles, for the nomina- 
tive of the verb, and us, you, them, by nous, vous, les, leur, for its object : 
as, — they both died miserably. Us moururent miser ablement Pun et 
r autre. I admire you both,ye vous admire Pun et r autre. He spoke 
to them both, il leur parla a Pun et a P autre. 

Tons les deux and tons deux might also be used instead of Pun et 
V autre, in the above sentences: as, — Us moururent miser ablement 
tous les deux ; je vous admire tons deux : il leur parla a tons deux 
ou a toits les deux. 

When Pun et P autre depends on a preposition, the preposition must 
be repeated before Pun and before P autre: as, — we wrote to them both, 
nous leur ecrivimes a Pun et a Pautre. 

Both, coming immediately before a substantive, as in this sentence : — 
/ have been both roads, is usually expressed in French by les deux : 
as, — I have been both roads, fai ete par les deux chemins. 

When both is used before the first of two substantives which are 
joined by the conjunction and, as — he has travelled both by sea and 
land; it is then a conjunction which is sometimes expressed by et, and 
sometimes left out in French : as, — he has travelled both by sea and 
land, il a voyage par terre et par mer. 

Both, used before two adjectives which are set in a kind of opposition, 
is generally expressed in French by tant : as,~the authors both ancient 
and modern, les auteurs tant anciens que modernes. 

16. Uun ou Pautre, Pune ou Pautre, either, one or the other. 
When either is used in English with reference to two persons or 
things, it is expressed in French by Pun ou Pautre, Pune ou Pautre, 
singular, which requires any adjective or participle referring to it in the 
singular, and the verb of which it may be the nominative in the third 
person singular: as, — either of you will do it. Pun ou Pautre le fera. 

17. Ni Pun ni Pautre, ni Pune ni Pautre, neither. 

When neither is used with reference to two persons or thingSj it is 
expressed in French by ni Pun ni Pautre, for the masculine, and by 
ni Pune ni Pautre, for the feminine, which expressions require any 
adjective or participle referring to them to be in the masculine or 
feminine singular, according as either is used, and the verb of v^'hich 
either may be the nominative in the third person singular, unless both 
ni Pun ni Pautre should concur together to the same action, in which 
case any adjective or participle referring to them must be put in the 
plural, and the verb of which they may be the nominative in the third 
person plural : as, — neither of them has done his duty, ni Pun ni Pautre 
n' a fait son devoir, and not — nont fait. Neither of them is my mother, 
ni Pune ni Pautre n^est ma mere, and not ne sont ; because they can- 
not be both my mother. But we should say : ni Pun ni Pautre n^ont 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 319 

fait leur devoir (neither of them have done their diity), to express that 
both have failed in doing that which they were to accompUsh together. 

Ne is required before the verb of which ni Pun ni P autre or ni Pune 
nl r autre is the nominative or object, as in the above sentences. 

ESSAY LIII. 

Whoever attacks the sacred person of a king is guilty of high treason. Of 

attaquer coupahle haut tiahii>o7i 

whomsoever you may have heard it, I do not believe it. To whom- 

sub.pref. entendre 

soever you may apply, they will tell you the same thing. Has any body 

sub. pr. s'adresser on 

been here for me to-day ? No, sir. 1 expect somebody to supper this evening. 

deniander 

Will you give me some of your new honey ? His sisters will have each 

donner miel 

ten thousand pounds. Every one must pay for himself We must give 

soi It fuut a 

every body his own.* It is a saying which is in every body's mouth. There 

chacun le sien dicfon 

is in every plant a peculiar quality. 1 give her a* lesson every Monday and 

particulier 
Thursday; and I dine with her every Sunday. — Every man who preaches (such a) 
chez cette 

doctrine is in error. Every body seeks happiness, but nobody can iind it in 

dans chercker 

this world. Have you not told any body of'"' it? — Did you ever see any body 

a 
more amiable than Miss H ''-' '" * ? No ; and I doubt whether Nature ever 

que sub. prct. 

formed any thing more perfect. There were several thousand persons by the 

sur 

side of the river. Of the great number of friends who surround us in pros- 

bord entourer 

perity, there is* often not one (remaining) in adversity. Nothing is more 

il ne nous en ^ 3 4 ^7'este 

common than the word — "friendship;" but nothing is more rare than a true 

veritable 

friend. That young lady says nothing. 1 do not think any thing will 

siib.pr. 

be more agreeable to her than a little walk after dinner, There is nothing 

j)rome/>ade 

more pleasing than the company of an amiable woman. Tired (with the) 

(igreable societe Degonte du 

world and its pleasures, she bade adieu to the splendid trifles of the Court.- 1 

de dire 

know nothing new. — I have something very pretty to give you. — Having but few 

years to live, we ought to* try to enjoy them. Friendship is only bought 

annee a tdcher d' en Jmitie ne s'acheter 



320 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

"by friendship. — I saw nobody else but two children. — There was nothing in 
que 

tlie house hut two or three chairs. He only took a basin* of* broth and a 

bouillon 

mutton-chop. There is nobody but fears death. It is very difficult to 

cotelette qui sub. pr. tie 

find two persons of the same temper and of the same opinion. — Do not be afraid 

caractere craindre 

of asking her pardon, she is all goodness. -The animals themselves are affected 

de lui sensible 

(hy the) harmonious sounds of instruments. -Wom.en and even children were 

aux des 

put io deaih. 1 have heard that many of your' pupils do not like j^our new 

mettre a aimer 

house. — Many say so, and several deny it. She was a woman such as you. 

le 
Such as laugh to-day will cry to-morrow. 1 had something to tell you, but I 

have quite forgotten v.'hat it was. If your sister has any thing to send to 

iotalement oublier ce que c' a 

France, tell her I shall set out after to-morrow for Paris. Whatever talents 

you may possess, whatever advantages you (may have received) from 

snb. pr. avoir teniez 

Nature and education, with* what perfections soever you may be en« 

de sub. pr. poss^- 

dowed, expect (the) suffrages but cf a very small number of men - 

der ne voiis attendez aux que 

Whatever the obstacles may be, he must try to surmount them. 1 

sub. pr. tdcher de 

shall never forget what she has said to me, whatever her motives may 

ce qu^ sub.pr.pouvoir 

have been. We shall overtake hira, v/hicbsoever road he may have 

aiieindre quel que soit le sub. pret. 

taken. However skilful and learned we may be, let us not make 

habile quelque sub. pr. 

a vain show of our knowledge. Let him be ever so powerful, he will 

ttalage science sub.pr. puissant 

never conqt\er them. Though she be a woman, she is stronger than you. 

vaincre 
Whatever you undertake, you will never succeed in*, if you do not 

sub. pr. entreprendre reussir 

take your measures better. She is so lazy that she does not apply herself to any 

mesure s'appliquer 

thing whatever. — Find any pretext whatever to excuse you. — All these oranges 

pour 
are rotten. — The whole of his property would not suffice to pay half his 
pourrir bien pour la de 

debts. All the grandeur, wealth, and power of the earth, cannot satisfy 

richessesf. pi. pouvoir 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 321 

an ambitious mind. The whole array fought for six hours and a half. 

comhattre jiendant 

How much do you ask for the whole ? I will not sell the whole. Every 

vouloir 

thing displeases her. They have taken every thing away* with them. All is 

lid emporter ^ ^ 

not gold that glitters. Every thing which is lofty, vast and profound, 

° ^ce ^qid *brif/er e'/eve 

expands the imagination and dilates the heart. Whatever ttnds to enlighten 

etendre di/cdtr tendre tchiirer 

the understanding and to impress the heart with right feelings, is desi- 

entendement imprimer dans de bon sentiment 

rable. Do you believe all that she says ? No ; I do not believe the half (of it). 

croire en 

Your sister was quite cast down at that news: however, afflicted as she 

abaitre cependant tout qii' 

was, she received me kindly. 1 am wholly yours. Children, amiable as 

avec bontd tout 

they are, (have nevertheless) many faults, Avhich it is necessary to correct. 
?ie laissent pas d'' avoir bien des d^faut esfenfiel de 

Your mother is quite altered since her illness. 1 shall have recourse to all 

changer 
of you. He complains of all of us. It was another person. 1 am very 



happy that others enjoy themselves. Do not speak ill of others. 

aise si/b. pr. s'ani/fser 

Behave well towards others, if you wish that others should be- 

Se comporter vo/doir sab. pr. 

have well to you. "We should be guilty of great injustice towards one 

envers conpable 

another, if we were prejudiced by the features of those whom we do not 
se luisser prtvettir trait 

knoAv. (We ought to assist) each other. Your cousin and mine have great 

II f aid se secourir 
abilities, but they both make a very bad use (of them). — I know that one or the other 

talent en 

of you must have broken that dish, although neither of yon will confess 

sub. pr. vouloir avouer 
it. — (The people) often suffer (by the) wars which kings make with one another. 

Lcs peup/es des se faire aux 

— They both relate the same story, although neither believes it. — I should 

rapporter fait sub. pr. 

love them both, if they Avere more attentive to their studies. These two 

bien 

ladies are very rich, and you much please them both. -As you have been both 

leur a 

roads, tell me which is the shortest. 1 have travelled both by sea and land 

court 

for twenty years. Travellers both ancient and modern agree on that 

pendant s'accordcr sur 

point, -, » 

p5 



322 AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. 

LESSON LIV. 
Of Verbs. 

OF THE SUBJECT OR NOMINATIVE OF THE VERB. 

The principal function of verbs being, as before explained, to signify 
affirmation, the word which denotes the person or thing of which any 
thing is affirmed or denied, is called the subject or nominative of the 
verb, and is generally expressed by a noun or a pronoun. 

In order to know the subject or nominative of a verb, it is necessary 
to ask the questions — qui est-ce qui ? (who is it who ?) with reference 
to persons or animated beings ; Sind qu^ est-ce qui? (what is it that?) 
with reference to things. The answer to these questions will always 
denote the nominative of the verb : for instance — cet homme va tomher, 
that man is going to fall : if it be asked — qui est-ce qui va tomber ? 
who is it who is going to fall ? the ansv/er is — cet homme, that man ; cet 
homme is then the subject of va tomber. Mentir est honteux, lying is 
shameful : qu^ est-ce qui est honteux ? what is it that is shameful ? the 
answer is — mentir, lying ; mentir is therefore the subject of est. 

Of the verb's agreeinent ivith its nominative or subject. 

First General Rule. — The verb agrees in French in number and 
person with its nominative : as, — la haine veille et Pamitie s'endort, 
hatred is ever awake and friendship is always sleeping. Les femmes 
sont aimables, women are amiable. 

Observe. — When the relative pronoun qid is used before a verb and refers to a 
noun or pronoun expressed before, the verb must be put in the same number and 
person in French, as the noun or pronoun to which q?d relates is in ; but, should nut 
gzd refer to any thing- expressed before, eitber because it is taken absolutely or in an 
interrogative manner, the verb should then be put in the third person singular : as, 
— est-ce mot qid Pai dii ? is it I who said so ? est-ce vans qui Vavez-vu 9 is it you who 
have seen him P ceiix qid aivient la vertu^ those who like virtue. Qui ne vit qt/e pour 
soi est indigne de vivre, he who lives only for himself does not deserve to live. Qui a 
fait cela ? who has done that .^ &c. 

Second General Rule. — I. When a verb has for its nominative 
two or more nouns or pronouns of the third person singular, united by 
the conjunction et, it is put in the third person plural : as, — le vice et 
la vertu ant des effets contraires, vice and virtue have contrary effects. 
Lui et elle viendront, he and she will come. 

A verb is likewise usually put in the third person plural in French, 
when it has for its nominative two or more substantives not joined by 
the conjunction et : as, — le Rhone, la Loire, la Seine, sont les rivieres 
les plus remarquables de la France, the Rhone, the Loire, and the 
Seine, are the finest rivers in France, 



AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. 323 

'' Le marchaud, I'ouvrier, le pretre, le soldat, 
Sont tous egalement les membres de I'etat."— Voltaike. 

Should the substantives which serve as nominatives to the verb be synonymous 
or nearly so, the verb should agree with the last only, because in this case there 
exists a unity in the thoughts, which must also be found in the words : as, — son 
amenitt, sa douceur est connue de tout le monde, his amenity, his sweet temper, is 
known by every body. 

Le noir venin, le fiel de leurs ecrits, 
N^excite en moi que le plus froid mepris. 

The verb must likewise agree with the last substantive only, although the 
substantives be not synonymous, if we dwell more on the last than on the others, 
either because it explains the preceding ones, or because it is so energetic or of 
such moment that the others are nearly forgotten : as, — t'>ut rwirj, tout sexe, tout 
age doit aspirer au bonheur, there is no rank, sex or age, but ought to aspire to 
happiness. 

" Le Perou, le Potose, Alzire est sa conquete. 
Un seul mot, un soupir, un regard vous trahitr' — VoLXAiiiK. A/zh-c. 

If one of the substantives, which serve as nominatives to the verb, should be 
plural, the verb should then alwaj^s be put in the plural : as, — son repeniir, ses pleurs 
te fiichirent, her repentance, her tears moved him. 

Synonymous sul)stantives should not be united by the conjunction ct ; as 
there is only one and the same idea between them, any sign of addition would 
be useless. We must not therefore say — la douceur et la bonte du grand Henri ; 
but — la douceur, la bonte du grand Henri; the sweet temper and goodness of the 
great Henry. 

2. When a verb has two or more nominatives of different persons 
united by the conjunction et, it is put in the plural and agrees with the 
person which has the priorit}^ ; that is, it agrees with the first person in 
preference to the other two, and with the second rather than with the 
third. Whenever, therefore, the first person is used with the second or 
the third, the verb must be put in the first person plural, and be imme- 
diately preceded by the resuming pronoun nous, which, in such a case, 
is invariably employed in French, although not expressed in English ; 
but, if the second person should be used with the third, the verb should 
be put in the second person plural, and be preceded by vo2is, as may be 
seen in the following examples : — vous et moi nous sommes conlcns de 
notre sort, you and I are satisfied with our fate. — Nous irons a la cam- 
j^agne lui et moi, he and I shall go into the country. Vous et lui vous 
savez la chose, you and he know the affair. 

The following is the order which the pronouns must always observe in such cases 
in French : — 

1. If the first person be used with the second or the third, the second or third 
comes first: as, — vous et moi or lui et moi nous irons, you and 1 or he and I 
shall go. 

2. If the second person should be used with the third, the second comes first: 
as, vous et elle vous avez fait cela, you and she have done that. 

3. But if the three persons should be used together, the second should come the 
first, then the third, and the first should be placed the last : as, — vous, lui, et moi 
■nous y etions, you, he, and J were there. 



324 AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. 

3. When a verb has two or more nominatives of different persons 
united by the conjunction ou, use requires that the person which has the 
priority, that is, the first in preference to the other two, and the second 
in preference to the third, should be immediately placed before the verb, 
which agrees with it in person and is put in the plural : in this case, 
the resuming pronouns nous and vous are not used before the verb, if it 
be preceded by qui, whereas they are required if it be not : as, — c'est toi 
ou moi qui avons fait cela, it is you or I who have done that. C^est lui 
ou moi qui V avons dit, it is he or I who have said it. Lui, elle, ou 
moi nous irons, he, she, or I shall go. 

^^ Le roi, I'ane, ou moi nous mourrons." — La Fontaine. 

When a verb has either the pronoun Pun ou l^auire, or two substan- 
tives, or also two pronouns of the third person singular, united by the 
conjunction ou, for its nominative, it agrees with the last only, and is 
put in the third person singular : as, — Pun ou Vautre nous ecrira, 
either will write to us. Pierre ou Paul le fera, Peter or Paul will 
doit. 

4. The verb is likewise put in the third person singular, though 
having for its nominative several nouns in the singular and plural, when 
a collective expression, such as — chacun, each ; personne, nobody ; nul, 
none; rien, nothing; tout, all; comes immediately before it, and 
resumes all the nominatives into one ; or, also, when the conjunction 
adversative mais is placed before the last substantive, and this is in the 
singular : as, — remords, crainte, perils, rien 7ie m'a retenue, neither 
remorse, fear, or danger restrained me. Non seulement toutes ses 
richesscs et tons ses honneurs, mais toute sa vertu s'evanouit, not only 
all her riches and honours, but her virtue disappeared. 

5. When ainsi que, de meme que, aussi hien que, comrrie, non j^lus 
que, are used as in a parenthesis in a sentence, to establish a resem- 
blance or denote a comparison between two parts of it, the incidental 
sentence introduced by these expressions has not any influence on the 
verb, which agrees with the first substantive, without any consideration 
for the number or gender of the other substantives brought in by any 
of the above conjunctions: as, — la vertu de meme que le savoir a son 
•prix ; virtue as well as learning has its price. 

" Le notirrisson du Pinde, ainsi que le guerrier, 
A tout Tor dvi Perou prefere un beau laurier." 

Piron, la Metrom. Act IIL sc. 7, 

Le juste, aussi Men que le sage, 



Du crime et du malhevu-, sail tirer avantage." 

Voj/rAiuE, Zaire, II. I. 

6. When Pun et Vautre is used as nominative to a verb, it is better 
to put the verb in the third person plural, although many celebrated 
authors have sometimes employed it in the singular, and sometimes in 



AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. 325 

the plural : as, — run et P autre sont bons, both are good ; and not run 
ct rautre est hon. 

If, besides run et Pautre, the verb should also have the pronoun Us 
or elles for its nominative, Pwi et P autre being placed after the verb, 
the verb should then always be used in the plural: as, — Us voudront 
Vnn et Pautre y aUer^ mats Us n^iront ni Pun ni Pautre^ both Avill be 
desirous of going, but neither ^vill go. 

7. When ni Pun ni Pauire, neither the one nor the other, or two 
nouns joined together by ni repeated, are used as nominatives to a verb, 
the verb must be put in the third person plural, if both 7ii Pun ni 
Pautre, or the two nouns, concur together to the action mentioned or 
receive it ; but the verb is put in the third person singular, if only one 
of the subjects does the action or receives it; in either case, ne or n' 
must be employed before the verb : as, — ni Pun ni Pautre n'ont fait 
leur devoir, neither have done their duty. Ni la douceur ni la force 
ne peuvent rien, neither mildness nor force can effect any thing. Ce 
ne sera ni M. le due ni M. le comte qui sera nomme president, neither 
the duke nor the count will be chosen president. Ni Pun ni Pauire 
n'est men psre, neither the one nor the other is my father. 

Observe. — When a verb has for its nominative two or more pronouns 
of different persons joined together by the conjunction ni, it is likewise 
put in the plural, and agrees with that which has the priority; but in 
this case the resuming pronouns nous and vous are not used: as, — 
7ii vous ni moi ne sommes coupables, neither you nor I are guilty. Ni 
vous ni lui n'avez fait cela, neither you nor he have done that ; and 
not — ni vous ni moi nous ne sommes coupables ; ni vous ni lui vous 
rPavcz fait cela. 

8. When un or line is followed by de or dcs and a substantive plural, 
with the relative pronoun qui, for the nominative of the succeeding 
verb, the verb must be put in the plural, if it refers to the substantive 
following un or une, and not to un or une. Any adjective or participle, 
which may also refer to the substantive, is likewise put in the plural: 
as, — votre ami est un des hommes qui perirent dans la sedition, your 
friend is one of the men who perished in the sedition. In this example, 
pcrirent is in the plural, because it refers to the men who perished, and 
not to un. 

But if the verb should refer to 2ni or une, and not to the substantive 
following, it should then be put in the singular, as well as any adjective 
or participle which may also refer to un or une : as, c\'st un de mes 
meillcurs amis qui nPa. fait ce present, it is one of my best friends who 
made me that present. In this example, a fait is in the singular, 
because it refers to un, and not to amis ; a friend who has made me a 
present being the subject spoken of. 

Should, on the contrary, the verb have neither ini or une, nor the 
substantive following, for its nominative or subject, but some other 
substantive or pronoun (un or une with des and the substantive fol- 



326 PLACE OF THE SUBJECT OF THE VERB. 

lowing being used with que for its direct object), in this case any adjec- 
tive or participle coming after the verb should always be put in the 
plural, and agree with the substantive following un or une: as, — c^est 
un cles plus grands services que vous m'ayez jamais rendus, it is one 
of the greatest services that you ever did me. 

9. When a substantive collective partitive, such as— une infinite, an 
infinity; un nombre, a. number ; une foule, a crowd; une multitude, 
n multitude ; une nuee, a cloud, a swarm ; une sorte, a sort ; la plu- 
part, the greater part; or an adverb of quantity, as — beaucoup, much, 
many; pez*, little, few ; awe^, enough; mozVt-5', less; plus, more; trop, 
too much, too many; tant, so much, so many; combien, how much, 
how many, or also que used for combien ; is followed by the preposition 
de and a substantive, as the nominative to a verb, the verb, as well as 
any adjective or participle which may follow, agrees with the substan- 
tive following either the collective or adverb of quantity, because it 
expresses the principal idea : as, — une infinite de jeunes gens s^y sont 
noyes, a great number of young men have been drowned there. Une 
multitude d'habitans abandonnerent leur pays, a multitude of inha- 
bitants abandoned their country. La plupart du monde le croit, the 
majority of people believe it. Peu de gens 7iegligent leurs interets, 
few people neglect their interests. Une vingtaine de soldats se sont 
revoltes, about twenty soldiers have mutinied. 

If however a noun collective partitive should be preceded by the de- 
finite article le or la, it would require the verb of which it would be 
the nominative, as likewise any adjective or participle referring to it, in 
the singular number : as, — le nombre cles habitans se monte a vingt 
millc, the number of inhabitants amounts to twenty thousand. 

La plupart, not being folloAred by any noun, but being used by itself before a 
verb as its nominative, requires that verb to be in the third person plural: as, — la 
pfupart fia-ent d'avis que , the majority were of opinion that 

A substantive collective general, that is, a noun representing the 
w^hole of the persons or things mentioned, as — armee, army; foret, 
forest; peuple, people; nation, nation; whether it be followed by the 
preposition de and a substantive plural, or whether it be used by itself, 
always governs the verb of which it is the subject, as also any adjective or 
participle, which may refer to it in the singular number, because express- 
ing a whole, independent of the terms which may follow, our mind must 
be fixed on it, as being the principal idea : as, — I'armee des confederes 
est tres-nombreuse, the army of the confederates is very numerous. 
La foret des Ardennes est au couchant du Luxembourg, the forest of 
Ardennes is to the west of the Luxemburg. Le peuple desire la paix, 
•the people wish for peace, &c. 

Place of the subject or nominative of the verb. 
The place of the subject or nominative of the verb, in interrogative 
-sentences, having been explained under the article of interrogations, it 



PLACE OF THE SUBJECT OF THE VERB. 327 

only remains here to observe that the subject or nominative of the verb, 
whether a noun or a pronoun, is placed before the verb in a simple 
tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one, when the sentence 
is affirmative or negative : as, — les armees Franpaises ont ete victo- 
rieuses, the French armies have been victorious. Nous n^ irons pas 
vous voir, we shall not go and see you. 

When the words of somebody are quoted, the subject of the verb, if 
a personal pronoun, is however placed after the verb in a simple tense, 
and after the auxiliary in a compound one ; whereas it is placed after the 
participle, if it should be a noun, although the sentence be not interro- 
gative : as, — je le veux bien, disait-il, I consent to it, said he. Tous les 
hommes sont fous, a dit Boileau, et ne different que du plus ou du 
moins, all men are fools, said Boileau, and the only difference is in the 
degree. 

The subject of the verb is also placed after the verb, in a sentence 
beginning either with one of the words — ainsi, tel, peut-etre, or with an 
impersonal verb : as, — ainsi s^est terminee la guerre, thus the war 
ended. Tel etait alors Petal de ses affaires, such was then the state 
of his affairs. Peut-etre vous pardonnera-t-il, he may forgive you. // 
est arrive d'heureux changemens, happy changes have taken place. 

The subject of the verb is likewise placed after the verb, when the 
subjunctive is either used to express a wish or when it is employed for 
■quand meme and a verb in the conditional : as, — puissent tous les 
peuples aimer, cherir la paix ! may all people love and cherish peace ! 
Dusse-je y p'erir, firai, were I to perish there, I will go. 

Whenever the subject of the verb is followed by several words d£r 
pendnig on it, it is likewise placed after the verb, for the sake of perspi- 
cuity : as, — nous ecoutons avec docilite les conseils que nous donnent 
ceux qui savent flatter nos passions, we attentively listen to the advices 
of those who know how to flatter our passions. 

• Sometimes, however, this transposition of the subject of the verb is 
only the effect of taste to avoid an inharmonious cadence : it is also 
frequently used by orators when desirous of arousing the attention of 
their auditors by a bold and an unexpected tuni : as, — ignorez-vous 
que Peternite approche ! ! are you ignorant that eternity is near ! ! 

^' Crois-tu que, toujours ferme aux Lords du precipice, 
Elle pourra marcher sans que le pied lui glisse !"' — Boii.eau, Sat. X. 

ESSAY lAV. 

Is it j'-ou who have (been) here this morning ? No ; it is my brother Victor, who is 
el?-e venu 

returned from America. It is not I who knocked you down. Who has done 

jeicr par lerre 

that? Who is coming away with me ? Champagne, and Burgundy are very 

s'en venir 



328 PLACE OF THE SUBJECT OF THE VERB, 

agreeable to the taste ; but I prefer Madeira. The workman, the merchant, 

gout 
the priest, the soldier, are all equally the members of the state. A single 

word, a sigh, a look betrays her. The amiability, the sweet temper of 

trahir bonte pleine de douceur 

that young lady delights and enchants me. You and I have succeeded very 

demoiselle ravir 

well He and I Avill be partners. You and she know the affair. You, he 

associt 
and I, will dine together. Is it he or I who will go ?' He, she or I, will 

come. Monsieur or Mademoiselle will do it with pleasure. 1 hope that either 

. of you will write to us. Wealth, dignities, honours, every thing disappears 

tout 

at the hour* of* death. — Sports, pleasures, conversations, entertainments. 

Divertissement spectacle 

nothing was able to* divert her from her profound melancholy. 
pouvoir distraire 

Not only all her jewels and gold, but all her linen was stolen.^ Does 

pierreries voler 

not (Apollo's son,) as well as the warrior, prefer a fine laurel to all the gold 
le nourrisson du Pinde ainsi que guerrier 

in Peru? Both of* them* are desirous of going; but neither will go.— — 

du desirer y 

Neither of* them* has learnt his lesson. Neither love nor hatred can move 

touch er 

him. Neither Mr. A* * nor Mr. D** will be elected Lord Mayor for the city 

de 
of London. Must I repeat to you again that neither of* them* is my mother .'* 

1 swear that neither he nor I have ever been there. Was not your brother 

y 

one of the unfortunate victims who were sacrificed to the vengeance of the 

tyrant ? It was one of my greatest enemies who saved my life in that imminent 

me imminent 

danger. — If you could grant him that favour, it would be one of the greatest 

accorder 

services that you ever rendered him and Jiis family. A gang of thieves 

sub. pret. bande 

attacked me, tM^o or three years ago, and robbed me of* (every thing) I had. 

tout ce que 
A great many young men have enlisted themselves voluntarily, although 

iwmbre de jcunes gens s^enroler volontairement 

the greatest part of them have (every inducement) to remain at 

plupart entre suh.pr. les plus puissans motifs de rester chez 

home. Few people neglect their interests. About twenty soldiers have 

euw gens Une vingtaiiie se 



OF THE OBJECT OR REGIMEN OF VERBS. 329 

mutinied. What a crowd of meu, women, and children followed you, when 

rcvolter foule 
you brought the news of the peace. The number of victories which he has 

gained is inconceivable. When will the grand fleet set sail ? A plurality of 

La des 

wives is forbidden in this country. The French armies have been a* long 

femmes dcfendre dans 

time victorious. They took leave of us yesterday. 1 shall never consent 

victorieux prendre conge consentir 

(to it), said he, unless I accompany them. Happy changes have taken 

y sub. pr. 

place, which have revived trade in our unfortunate city. Thus ended a war 

rttablv- 

which had been the cause of so many misfortunes. Such was the state of his 

affairs when he was imprisoned. May all these children follow the 

emprisotmer Puissent siiivre 

principles of our holy religion ! W^ere I to perish there, 1 will go. 

saint Dusse-je y 

We listen with pleasure to the advice of those who know how'^ to flatter our 

passions. 



LESSON LY. 

Of the Object or Regimen of Verbs. 

A verb may have for its object a substantive, a pronoun, or a verb. 
1. A substantive : as, — instruisez la jeunesse, instruct youth. 2. A 
pronoun: as, — je mejlatte, I flatter myself. 3. A verb: as, — il a fait 
batir cette maison, he has had this house built. 

There are two sorts of objects of verbs : — the direct and the indirect 
one. 

1. The direct object is that on which the action of the verb imme- 
diately falls, without the help of any preposition expressed or under- 
stood; it answers to the questions qui? (whom?) with reference to 
persons; and quoi? (^what?) with reference to things : as, — je cheris 
ma sceur^ I cherish my sister; je cheris qui? ma soeur. — // aime 
P etude., he likes stvidy ; il aime quoi ? Petude. — 3Ia soeur and Petude 
are therefore the direct objects of the two verbs cherir and aimer ^ be- 
cause they are affected by them without the help of any preposition. 

The indirect object is that which is affected by the verb with the help 
of a preposition expressed or understood ; it answers to the questions 
— a qui, de qui, pour qui, par qui, &c. with reference to persons, 
and a quoi, de quoi, pour quoi, &c. with reference to things : as, — il 
a parle a son jrere, he has spoken to his brother; il a parle h qvi? 



,;330 OF THE OBJECT OR REGIMEN OF VERBS. 

a son frere, — a son frere is consequently the indirect object of the 
verb parler ; because it is affected by it with the help of the preposi- 
tion d. 

There are some active verbs which govern two objects, a direct and 
an indirect one ; whereas others have only a direct one. Donner, for in- 
stance, in the following sentence, has two objects, and governs a, before 
its indirect one: il donnera vingt mille francs a safille en mariage, 
he will give twenty thousand francs to his daughter in marriage. But 
adorer, to adore, only admits of a direct object : as, — il adore son 
Elo'ise, he adores his Eloisa. 

Passive verbs have only an indirect object, which is preceded by 
the preposition de or par: as, — un enfant sage est aime de tout le 
monde, a prudent youth is loved by every body. U operation fut faite 
. par M. L**, the operation was performed by Mr. L* *. 

Some few neuter verbs have not any object; such are — languir, to 
languish, and dormir, to sleep ; but a great many others have an indi- 
rect one, which is preceded by the preposition de or a : as, — nuire a 
-quelqu^un, to injure some one. Medire de tout le monde, to slander 
every body, &c. 

Some reflective verbs have only a direct object, as — s^enrhumer, 
(to catch cold,) which governs no preposition, and has only the pro- 
nouns 7)ie, te, se, nous, vous, for its object : as, — je me suis enrhvme, 
I have caught cold ; but others have two objects, a direct and an in- 
direct one, as — se repentir (to repent), which, besides the pronouns 
me, te, se, nous, vous, which it has for its direct object, governs the 
preposition de before the succeeding noun : as, — je me repens de ma 
faute, I repent my fault. 

The pronouns me, te, se, noiis, vous, which are used before reflective verbs, 
are sometimes their direct and sometimes their indirect objects. In the fol- 
lowing sentence, for instance, je me leve de bonne heure, I rise early, me is the direct 
object of the verb leve, because the sentence is equivalent to this:— j"e /eve moi 
de bonne heure; but in this — je me reproche vi07i imprudence, me is the indirect 
'object of the verb reproche, because the sentence answers to— je reproche a moi 
mon imprudence. 

Unipersonal verbs may be followed by two indirect objects, to ex- 

, press different references. The preposition which must be used before 

each of them depends on the reference which it is intended to express : 

as, — il importe a voire frere de veiiler a l^ education de sonfils, your 

brother must take care of the education of his son. 

When de or par is to be used after passive verbs. 

General Rule. — Whenever a passive verb expresses a sentiment, a 
passion, and in general an affection of the soul, it governs the preposi- 
tion de, in French, whatever preposition may be used in English : as, 
— riionnete homme est estime, meme de ceux qui n^ontpas de probite, 
an honest man is esteemed, even by those who have no probity. 



OF THE OBJECT OR REGIMEN OF VERBS. 331 

AVhen, on tlie contrary, a passive verb expresses an action to which 
the body or mind solely contributes, the preposition jjar must be used 
after it in French, whatever may be the preposition in English : as, — 
la jjoudre a canon fut inventee par le cordelier Berthold Schwartz^ 
vers la fin du XIIP Steele y et les homhes par Gallen, eveque de Mun- 
ster, vers le milieu du XVI^ siecle, gunpowder was invented by Berthold 
Schwartz, a friar, towards the end of the 13th century, and bombs by 
Gallen, a bishop of Munster, about the middle of the 16th century. 
Les Gaules furent conquises par Cesar, the Gauls were conquered by 
Csesar. 

Observe. — The preposition par should not be used before the word Diet/, in order 
to avoid the equivocation of the vulgar oath pardieu : we should therefore say— 
vous serez piini de Dieu, si , . . (and not par Dieu,^ you will be punished by God, 
if . . . It will however be better to say — /e del, In terre,Phomme, lafemme^ ont ke 
crees par Diei/. than de Dieu, heaven, earth, man and woman, have been created by 
God. 

Passive verbs are frequently used without any object : as, — le temple 
de Jerusalem fid detruit, malgre les defenses de Titus , the temple of 
Jerusalem was destroyed, notwithstanding Titus's prohibition. 

Place of the object or regimen of verbs, when it is a noun or a verb. 

This article will have no interference with the place of the pronouns, 
when a verb governs at the same time a noun and a pronoun : the 
prmioun will always keep the precedence, and retain the place whicli 
has been assigned for it. 

General Rule. — Whenever a verb has only one object, and this 
is a noun or a verb, it is placed after the verb in a simple tense, and 
after the participle in a compound one: as, — I love Isabella, y'am^? 
Isabclle. I have received a letter, fai repu une lettre. He had that 
coat made in London, il a fait faire cet habit a Londres. 

When a verb has two objects, a direct and an indirect one, and these 
are nouns or parts of a sentence, the shortest is generally placed the 
first after the verb, unless they be both of an equal length, in which 
case the direct should precede the indirect one : as, — take to Miss T* * 
the letter which I have given you, portez a mademoiselle T* * la lettre 
que je vous ai donnee. A wise man prefers science to riches, I'homme 
sage prefer e la science aux richesses. 

If there should be any equivocation to be feared, the indirect object should 
precede the direct one, although it may be as long and sometimes longer than the 
direct. 

If the sentence should be interrogative, and the verb should have 
only a direct object, which being a noun preceded by an interrogative 
pronoun, as — loliat book do you read? ivhat lesson have you learnt? 
both the noun and the interrogative pronoun should be placed before the 
verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one : as. 



332 OF THE OBJECT OR REGIMEN OF VERBS. 

— what book do you read? quel livre lisez-vous? What lesson have 
you learnt ? quelle lepon avez-vous ap-prise ? 

But if the verb should have two objects, a direct and an indirect one, 
and the indirect should be a noun accompanied by an interrogative pro- 
noun, whereas the direct one should be a personal pronoun, they should 
likewise go both before the verb, and the indirect one should come first : 
as, — what study do you apply yourself to? a quelle etude vous appli- 
que z-vous ? 

Should both the objects be nouns, that which is accompanied by the 
interrogative pronoun should then be placed before the verb, and the 
other after it : as, — what book have you given to your sister ? quel 
livre avez-vous donne a voire soeur? 

When neither of the objects is accompanied by an interrogative pro- 
noun, the one being a conjunctive personal pronoun, and the other a 
noun, as — have they given her the letter ? the pronoun is placed before 
the verb, and the noun after it: as, — have they given her the letter? 
lui a-t-on donne la lettre ? 

In French, as in English, a noun may be governed by two verbs at 
once, the same as by two adjectives or two prepositions, provided these 
require the same object : as, — on doit aimer, cherir ses parens, one 
ought to love and cherish his parents. 

Le bonhevir le plus grand, le plus digne d'envie, 
Est celui d'etre tdile et cher a sa patrie. 

But the following sentence is incorrect in French — si le roi de 
France avait su connaUre et se servir de ses avantages, if the king 
of France had known and used his advantages ; because the verb con- 
7iaUre requires a direct object and se servir an indirect one. A different 
turn must therefore be given to the sentence, placing the substantive 
avantages after the first verb, and using the pronoun en before the 
second as its object: as, — si le roi de France avait su connaitre ses 
avantages et s''en servir. 

It is necessary to observe that a verb cannot have two direct objects. 
Whenever therefore a verb has two objects, one must be a direct one 
and the other an indirect one, because an action can only have an 
immediate object. Neither can a verb have two indirect objects to ex- 
press the same reference, although it can have two indirect ones to 
express different references : as, — ditcs-lui de venir, tell him to come. 

ESSAY LV. 

What are you looking for ? I am looking for my umbrella, which I have lost. 
chercher 
— He loves and cherishes his Eloisa, although she is * always scolding 

si/b. pr. grander 

him. — Let us forgive our enemies, if we wish that God should forgive 

pardonner a sub. pr. 



OF THE OBJECT OR REGIMEN OF VERBS. 333 

us. We do not easily withstand the alhirements of pleasure. Fill that 

register aux attraits ronplir 

decanter with wine and that bottle with water. — Why do you interest yourself 

carafe de s'lnteresser 

for a man who \vould injure you if he could? — Frequent good company and 
a niiire pouvoir 

avoid libertines. — By what steam-packet (did) you come ? I came by 

paqi/ebot a vapeur etes sins veiiu 

the Star or the Venus. — We flatter ourselves that you (will meet with a very 
Etoile serez accueiUi de la ma- 

kind reception.) (Nothing but religion) can make us bear great misfor- 

nitre la plus honmte La religion seule supporter infor- 

tunes with patience and resignation. Although he is very fond of* his 

tune aimer beaucoup 

daughter, he will only give her fifteen thousand pounds in marriage. — A 

qui est 
modest and (well-informed) young lady is esteemed by every body. 

dont r esprit est bicn cultivt 
— (She has been languishing,) these ten mouths, in the most deplorable 

^qu'elle '^languit ^il ^y '^a -^ ^ 

situation. — I never sleep in the day time.* — Let us slander nobody, and 
etut pendant medire de 

above all let us wrong nobody They inquired after you 

surtout /aire tort a slnj'ornier de fi'tat de voire santc 

and all your family. — Do not rejoice (at the) misfortunes of others. — 

de celui de des malheur 

If you continue laughing at me, I shall make you rejjent it. — She will 
a vous inoqtier de ^ 4 a 5 3^^^ 

reproach herself with * her imprudence, when it (is too late.) Does it not 

se reprocher n\n sera plus temps 

concern parents to take care of the education of their children ? 

importer il un pere et u une mere de vei/ler d, 
— The French were dreaded by their neighbours, under Napoleon. — His plan 

redouter 
is approved by every body. — These rockets were invented by Sir William 

fusee volante 
Congreve. — Was not England subdued by William the Conqueror, in the 

conquis Guillaume 

year lOGG ? — You will be punished by God, if you commit crime and 

que sub. pr. 

despise virtue. — Heaven, earth, animals, reptiles, and fishes, were created by 
me p riser ont ete 

God. The temple of Jerusalem was destroyed, notwithstairding Titus's 

malt/7'e 

prohibition, and (not a stone was left.) — I accept with much pleasure your 
defenses il n^en resia pierre st/r pier re 

kind invitation, and I shall be with you, to-morrow evening, at six o'clock. — 
aimable chez 

I hope you have not ordered any thing ou purpose for me. No; we receive 
se fatter ordomw expres 



334 OF THE OBJECT OR REGIMEN OF VERBS. I 

j 

you (as a) friend without ceremony. — Do not refuse me that favour. — Have you i 

en j 

not found again the spoons which you (missed) the other day ? No ; and I ! 

retrouve)' cuiller qui manquaient \ 

suspect the servant of having taken them? — Why did James blush when j 

soupgonner de Jacques rougir j 

you told him that you had been robbed? I do not know. — As soon as I have j 

voler 

finished my letter, I will show you the pretty things I have. — ^They have j 

montrer I 

overwhelmed me with reproaches, although I do not deserve (them.) — I 

accabler de sub. pr, le I 

You ought to exclude that woman from your society. — Have you informed her i 

exclure fair e part lui j 

of your design? Yes. — Do not give any thing to her brother. — They have j 

rien On \ 

deprived my father of* all his property. — He punished the Catholic religion i 

oter h bien ] 

(for the attempts) of its ministers, and in less than two years he rendered | 

des attentats en \ 

Sweden Lutheran. — We expect a letter from France every day. — She has sent 

Luthtrien 
me a thousand pounds to invest in the Three per Cent. — Explain that 

pour placer les pour Exp/iquer 

difficulty to me, and I shall be satisfied. — ;-Save us the trouble of going 

content Epargner peine retourner 

there again *.-^Let him find me a situation. — Let us remit this affair to Provi- 
y place 

dence. — Do not reproach me so often with* (such a) trifle. Do not give them 

cette bagatelle 
Iheir allowance to-morrow. — What paper do you want ? Post paper, if 

ration desirer Du papier a lettres 

you please. — What excuse has he brought ? — What were you speaking to me 

apporter 
about ? — Whom shall I trust, if you deceive me ? — What promise have your 

de sejter 

sisters made to Mrs. L* * * ? — To whom did he apply first ? — Has Mr. 

s^adresser crabord 
D'=* taught you French ?— Take this letter back* to Miss E- *, and tell her 

€nseig?ier Reporter 

that I attribute her present state* of* misery to her extravagance. — Was it to 

actz/el 
me, my dear, you wished to speak ? — A wise man * sacrifices his pleasures 
que Le 

to his duty; but a fool neglects his duty for his pleasures. — Hypocrites endea- 
le s'etu- 

vour to adorn (with the) appearance of virtue the most shameful and disgraceful 
dier a parer des dehors pf, honteux d'eerik 

vices. — "When he had got frcm his wife all her jewels and money, he aban- 
tirer pierreries 



PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. 335 

doned her and her children. — "VVe are going to root out and pull down that 

elle dkraciner abattre 

tree. — He is so attached and devoted to her. — She obeys and disobeys her 

si devoue 
masters by turns. — He who is useful and dear to his country is worthy of envy. 

tou7'-a-tour 
— If the Emperor had known that position, and had taken advantage 

qu'il sub. plu. ^emparer 

(of it), h^ would not have lost the battle. 
en 



LESSON LVI. 
Of the different Prepositions yihich the Verbs govern. 

General Rule. — Whenever two verbs follow each other in a 
sentence in French, the second is generally put in the present of the 
infinitive mood, preceded by the preposition which the verb going 
before may require, as will be found explained in the following lists : — 

1. A list of verbs ivhich, being folloived by another verb in the pre- 
sent of the infinitive mood in French, require no preposition before 
it, whether any be used in English or not : as, — / am going to see 



Mr. D- *, j 


3 vais voir M. D* * 


; and not je vais a voir ou pour vc 


M. D* * 








to Acknowledge, 


recommitre. 


to Hear, 


entendre, oiar. 


to Appear, 


pwaitre. 


to Hope, 


esperer. 


to Be able, 


pouvoir. 


to Intend, to propose. 


compter. 


to Be better. 


valoir mieux. 


to Know, 


savoir. 


to Be in vain. 


avoir beau. 


to Let, to Leave, 


laisser. 


to Be necessary. 


fa/loir. 


to Like better, 


aimer mieux. 


to Be Avilling, 


vouhir. 


to Maintain, 


soidenir. 


to Come, 


venir. 


to Make, to cause, 


faire. 


to Confess, 


co7ifesser. 


to Owe, 


devoir'. 


to Dare, 


oser. 


to Own, 


avoiier. 


to Declare, 


declarer. 


to Pretend, 


prkendre. 


to Deign, 


daigner. 


to See, 


voir. 


to Deny, 


nier. 


to Seem, 


sembler, par ail re 


to Depose, 


deposer. 


to Send, 


envoy er. 


to Fancy, 


s^imaginer. 


to Think, to believe. 


croire. 


to Go, 


aller. 







Observe. — 1. Whenever a verb is used as nominative to another 
verb in French, it must be put in the present of the infinitive, without 
any preposition before it : as, — always speaking is exhausting, toujours 
parler epuise. 

2. Thougli aimer mieux and valoir mieux, when followed by a verb 
in the present of the infinitive mood, require no preposition before it, if 
that verb should itself be followed by que, and another verb likewise in 



336 PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. 

the present of the infinitive mood, de should be used after que, before 
the succeeding verb, if a comparison or contrast exist between the two 
parts of the sentence : as, — I would rather die than enter his house, 
j^aimerais mieux mourir que d'enti'er chez lid. 

3. Whenever esperer, to hope, is used in the present of the infinitive, 
and is immediately followed by another verb, likewise in the present of the 
infinitive, it requires de before it : as, — how can you hope to succeed 
without his assistance? comment pouvez-xous esperer de reussir sans 
son secours ? 

4. When venir is used in the sense of coming from, (in which case 
it is generally Englished by just before the past participle of another 
verb,) it requires de before that verb, which must be put in the present 
of the infinitive in French ; but, when it implies to come to or in order 
to, it seldom governs any preposition before the next infinitive, unless it 
should be sometimes po2ir : as, — I have just paid a visit to Mrs. L* *, 
je viens de faire ou de rendre visite a M'"' L**. They came to see 
me, Us vinrent me voir. He came yesterday to balance his account, 
but you were out, il vint hier pour solder son compte, mats voiis etiez 
sorti. 

Venir, on the contrary, used for or in the sense of — to happeii, espe- 
cially if it be employed impersonally, requires d before the next infini- 
tive : as, — sHl vient kpleuvoir, if it happen to rain. 

En venir, to come to, always governs a, or, if the article should also 
be required, av, a la, a /', or aux, before the next noun : as, — they 
came to blows, Us en vinrent aux mains. 

5. When pretendre signifies aspirer d, it requires a before its object, 
which is generally a noun : as, — il pretend^ il aspire, il vise a cet 
emploi, he aims at that employment. 

6. The verb faire is expressed in several different manners in Eng- 
lish; but, whatever may be its construction, it always requires the next 
verb to be in the present of the infinitive in French, without any pre- 
position before it : as, — he has had a new house built, il a fait batir 
line nouvelle malson. I had that coat made in London, /'a/ /di^ faire 
cet habit a Lo7idres. 

7. Although laisser, to leave, to let, does not generally require any 
preposition before the next infinitive in French, as, — laissez jouer les 
enfans, let the children play ; there are cases in which, being used 
aflirmatively, it sometimes governs a before it : as, — je vous lalsse a 
penser s'il projita de ^occasion, I leave you to think whether he 
availed himself of the opportunity ; and others in which, being employed 
negatively, it sometimes requires de : as, — il ne laissa pas d'aller son 
chemin, he did not cease going on; but these different forms of expres- 
sion can only be learnt by practice. 



PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN, 331 

ESSAY LVI. (No. 1.) 

Those who pretend to be learned are often very ignorant. — (Should you be 

Quelque riche 

ever so rich), if you do not know how * to * put bounds to your desires, you 



que vous soyez 



borne dtsir 



will never be satisfied. — I should have been to see her last week, if I had not 

been so unwell They ought to go out every day. — We must let others 

indispose devraient It 

think and act as they please.— I leave you to think whether she was afraid of 

answering. — You may suppose that they did not omit profiting by such a 

laisser d'' ^si ^ 

favourable opportunity. — She is so cruel and revengeful, that I dare not speak to 
■* ^ vindicatif 

her. — If ever I hear you calling him names again, I shall certainly 

dire des injures une autrefois 

dismiss you. — (It is necessary) to practise virtue. — Go and* ask leave to go 
renvoyer II faut pratiquer de 

out. They did not deign to answer me. — It is better to get little than to do 

gagner dene'^faire 

nothing. — Do you pretend always to insult me (in that manner ?) — Eating 
^ de 1(1 sorte 

and drinking loo much are injurious to the health. Talking too much 

niiisihle 
(is exhausting). — Would it not be better to die than to linger as I do ?— I have 

epuise languir 

just been paying a ♦ visit to Lord D * *. — When will you come and * see me, that 

/aire 
I may * show you my fine harp ? — If it happen to rain, what will you 

sub. pr. ventr 

do? — They were on the point of coming to blows. — Does he still aim at that 

employment ? No ; lie has bought a commission in the army. 

2. A list of verbs ivhich, being followed by another verb in the 
-present of the infinitive mood in French, govern the preposition a 
before it, ivhether any preposition be used in English or not: as, — 
/ learn dancing, j'apprends a danser. 

to Accustom one's self, s''accoutumer. to Be repugnant, repugner. 

to Addict one's self, s'adonner. to Be resigned, etre resignt. 

to Amuse one's self, s'cmufser. to Condemn, condamner. 

to Apply one's self; s\tppliquer. to Confine one's self, se borner. 

to Authorise, auturiser. to Consent, consentir. 

to Be, etre. to Cost, couter. 

to Be accustomed, etre accoutume. to Delight in, se plaire. 

to Be disposed, <?/re dispose. to Devote one's self, se devoi/er. 

to Be difficult, elre di^cile. to Determine on, se determiner. 

to Be exposed, etre expose. to Displease, dtplaire. 

to Be obstinate, s^obstiner. to Dispose one's self, se disposer. 

to Be obstinate in, s-opiniatrer. to Employ, employer. 

Q 



338 PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. 



^employer. 


to Make up one's mind, se decider. 


encoitrager. 


to Persist in, 


persister. 


engager. 


to Please, 


plaire. 


s^engager. 


to Prepare one's self, 


se prepai'er. 


exceller. 


to Prompt, 


porter. 


exciter. 


to Provoke, 


provoquer. 


s'exercer. 


to Renounce, 


renoncer. 


exhort er. 


to Resign one's self. 


se resigner. 


s'attendre. 


to Resolve, 


se resotulre. 


s'exposer. 


to Seek, 


chercher. 


iapfreter. 


to Serve, 


servir. 


donner. 


to Set one's self, 


se mettre. 


s'ahandonner. 


to Show, 


montrer. 


avoir. 


to Spend, 


depenser, and pas- 


aider. 




ser, when speak- 


hesiter. 




ing of time. 


i?u-it€r, pousser. 


to Stay, to remain, 


rester. 


induire. 


to Stoop to. 


s'abaisser. 


inviter. 


to Stop, 


s'arreter. 


s'inviter. 


to Submit, 


se soumettre. 


garder, a, pour. 


to Teach, 


enseigner. 


apprendre. 


to Teach one's self. 


s'' apprendre. 


aimer. 


to Train up. 


former. 


perdre. 


to Use one's self. 


s'habituer. 


s'etudier. 


to Venture, 


se Iiasarder, 



to Employ one's self, 

to Encourage, 

to Engage, 

to Engage one's self, 

to Excel, 

to Excite, 

to Exercise one's self, 

to Exhort, 

to Expect, 

to Expose one's self, 

to Get one's self ready, 

to Give, 

to Give one's self up, 

to Have, 

to Help, 

to Hesitate, 

to Incite, 

to Induce, 

to Invite, 

to Invite one's self, 

to Keep, 

to Learn, 

to Like, 

to Lose, 

to Make one's study. 

Observe. — 1. If any of the above verbs should be followed by a 
noun for its indirect object, instead of a verb, it would likewise govern 
the preposition a, or, if the article should also be required, au, a la, 
a l\ or aux, before it : as, — I shall never consent to that marriage, je 
ne cons entirai jamais a ce mariage. He has exposed himself to danger, 
il s^est expose au danger. 

But if a personal pronoun should be used as the indirect object of 
any of the above verbs, instead of a noun or a verb, in this case, the 
preposition a should or should not be expressed, according as the pro- 
noun is to follow or precede the verb : as, — that will displease him, cela 
lui deplaira. 

2. Renoncer, to renounce, being an active and neuter verb, re- 
quires no preposition before its object, when it is used actively, in the 
sense of renter, desavouer, to disown : as, — je le renonce pour mon 
fJs, I disown him for my son ; but when being employed in a neuter 
sense, it signifies ahandonner, it governs a, or, if the article should 
also be required, aw, d la, a P, or awo:, before its object: as, — elle a 
renonce au monde et a ses plaisirs, she has given up the world and its 
pleasures. 

Besides the verhs in the above list, there are a great many substantives and 
adjectives which, being followed by a verb in the present of the infinitive, govern 
also the preposition a. before it : as, — I have no time to \ose,je n^ai point de temps a 
perdre ,■ are you ready to go out ? etes^ous pret a sortir ? biit, as there are likewise 
a great many which govern de, as — I am very glad to see jovi,je snis bien-aise de 
vons voir ; and as, moreover, the same will sometimes require de and sometimes a, 
I shall abstain from quoting any, as practice alone can teach when de or a is 
required under such circumstances. 



PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. 339 



ESSAY LVI. (No. 2.) 

Is this house to be let or to be sold ? — Your sou spends all his time in play- 
louer vendre a 

ing. — Are mathematics easy to learn? She likes to relieve the poor, and 

mathematiques faci'e a soulager 

comfort the afflicted. These nuts are not good to eat. They gave her to 

consoler a On a 

understand that he wanted to* marry her, and they exhorted her to encourage 

entendre vouloir epottser on encourager 

his visits. — She delights in speaking ill of every body. — Help me to carry that 

se plaire dire du mal porter 

burden. Every body is liable to mistake. As soon as she saw me, she 

siijet a se tromper 

began to cry. ^Does he teach reading and writing ? They have been con- 

se metire pleurer 

demned to pay all the expenses. 1 invited him once to dine with me, but he 

frais 

did not come. She is accustomed to sup early, and to go to bed every 

se coueher 
evening at ten o'clock. — I suspect him of (being fond) of drinking and gaming. 

d' aimer jouer 

— ^That book is very easy to understand, but difficult to translate into French. 

traduire en 
— Do you learn riding ? No ; bvit I intend to begin very soon. — If you 
monter a ckeval de bientot 

continue to visit her, you Avill soon please her.^ 1 would not stoop to ask 

s'abaisser 



his pardon. 



-We did not expect to set out before to-morrow. She amuses 

s''attendre 



herself with playing on the harp from morning to night. — He will never con- 
de 

sent to her marriage before she is of age. Are you ready to go out ? 

sub. pr. majeur 
I have no time to lose. — We shall always be" very happy to see you. 



3. A list of verbs ivhich govern the prepositio7i de before the next 
infinitive in French, whether any preposition be used in English 
or not : as, — / am very happy to see you, je suis bien-aise de voiis 
voir. 



to Abstain, 


s''abstenir. 


to Be accused. 


St re accuse. 


to Accuse, 


accuser. 


to Be afflicted, 


etre afflige. 


to Accuse one's self, 


s'accKser. 


to Be afraid. 


avoir pern: 


to Advise, 


conseiUer. 


to Be ashamed, 


avoir hoiite. 


to Affect, 


affecler. 


to Be astonished. 


etre etonnc. 


to Agree, 


convenir. 


to Be delighted, 


etre ckarme. 


to Apprehend, 


apprehender. 


to Be eager, 


s'empresser. 


to Ask as a favour. 


demander en 


to Be enchanted. 


etre enchante. 




grace. 


to Be filled with indig- 


• etre indigne. 


to Avoid, 


eviter. 


nation. 


q2 



340 PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. 



to Be frighted, 

to Belong, 

to Be offended at, 

to Be overjoyed, 

to Be surprised, 

to Bet, to lay, 

to Be tempted, 

to Bethink one's self, 

io Be used, 

to Blame, 

to Blush, 

to Boast, 

to Burn, 

to Cease, 

to Charge, to load, to 

desire, 
to Chide, 
to Command, 
to Complain, 
to Conjure, 
to Convince, 
to Defend one's self, 
to Defy, 
to Deprive, 
to Deserve, 
to Desire, 
to Despair, to give up 

hope, 
to Desist, 
to Deter, 
to Differ, 
to Disaccustom one's 

self, 
to Disagree, to disown, 
to Discontinue, 
to Discourage, 
to Disdain, 
to Disgust, 
to Dispense with, 

to Dissuade, 
to Disuse one's self, 
to Dread, 
to Endeavour, 
to Enjoin, 

to Entreat, to beseech, 
to Excuse, 
to Excuse one's self, 
to Exempt, 
to Fear, 
to Feign, 
to Finish, 

to Flatter one's self, 
to Forbear, 
to Forbid, to defend, 
to Fretj to vex one's 
self. 



etre effrayc. 

appartenir. 

s'offenser. 

etre ravi. 

etre surpris. 

parier, gager. 

etre tente. 

s'aviser. 

avoir coutunie. ' 

bldmer. 

I'ovgir, 

se vanter. 

bruler. 

cesser. 

charger. 

reprendre. 

commander. 

se plai7idre. 

conjurer. 

convaincre. 

se defendre. 

defier. 

priver. 

mtriter. 

desirer, charger. 

desesperer. 

se desister. 

dttoiirner, 

diffa-er. 

se desaccoutumer. 

disconvenir. 
discontinuer . 
decourager. 
dedaigner. 
degouter. 
dispenser, se dis- 
penser, 
dissuader. 
se deshabituer. 
redouter. 
tacher, s'efforcer. 
enjoindre. 
supplier, 
excuser. 
s^excuser. 
exempter. 
craindre. 
feindre. 
Jlnir. 
se flatter, 
s'empecher. 
defendre. 
se chagriner^ 



to Get weary or tired, 
to Glory, to pride in, 
to Grieve, 

to Grow impatient, 
to Grow tired, 
to Have the honour, 
to Hinder, 
to Hope, 

to Intend, 

to Intermeddle with, 

to Keep from, to keep 

one's self from, 
to Laugh at, 
to Make haste, 

to Meddle with, 

to Meditate, 

to Mind, to care for, 

to Neglect, 

to Obtain, 

to Omit, 

to Order, 

to Pardon, to forgive, 

to Permit, to allow, 

to Persuade, 

to Pity, 

to Press, to urge, 

to Prescribe, 

to Pretend to, 

to Profess, 

to Project, 

to Promise, 

to Propose, 

to Pray, to ask, to beg, 

to Recollect, 

to Recommend, 

to Refuse, 

to Regret, 

to Rejoice, 

to Remember, 

to Repent, 

to Reprimand, to re- 
prove, 

to Reproach, 

to Say, to tell, 

to Scold, 

to Shudder, 

to Speak, to talk, 

to Suggest, 

to Summon, 

to Suspect; 

to Swear, 

to Take upon one's 
self. 



5 ennuyer. 
se gloi-ifier. 
s'affliger, se de- 

soler. 
s''impalienter. 
se lasser. 
avoir Vhonneur. 
empecher. 
esptrer, se promet- 

tre. 
avoir intention, 
s^ingtrer. 
se garder. 

se moquer, se rire. 
se dc pecker, se 

hitter, 
se mS/er. 
mediter. 
se sot/cier. 
ncg/iger. 
obtenir. 
omettre. 
ordonner. 
pardonner. 
permetire. 
persuader, 
plaindre. 
presser. 
prescrire. 
se piquer. 
professer. 
projeter. 
promettre. 
proposer, se pro- 

poser, 
prier. 

se rappeler. 
recommander. 
refuser, 
regretter. 
se I'tjoinr. 
se souvenir, 
se repentir. 
rtprimander. 

reprocher. 

dire. 

gronder. 

frtmir. 

parier. 

mggirer. 



sozipconner. 

jurer. 

se charger. 



PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. 341 

to Tempt, to attempt, tenter. to Want, avoir besoin. 

to Thank, remercier. ' to Warn, avertir. 

to Think proper, jigger a Tpropos. to Wish. souhaifer, desirer. 

to Threaten, menacer. to Wonder, s'eiofiner. 

to Try, essayer, tdcher. to Write, ecrire. 

to Undertake, entreprendre. to Write word, mander. 

Observe. — 1. Whenever any of the above verbs is followed by a noun 
or a pronoun for its indirect object, instead of a verb, it likewise governs 
the preposition de before it in French, or, if the article should also be 
required, du, de la^ de l\ or des, whether any preposition be used in 
English or not: as, — are you in want of money? avez-vous besoin 
6.^ argent? I have pity on him, fai piiie de lui. She is afraid of 
thunder, elle a peur du tonnerre. 

2. Any other reflective verb not mentioned in the preceding lists, and 
the greater part of verbs followed in English by the prepositions of, 
from, by or loithy govern de in French, or, if the article should also be 
required, du, de la, de V, or des, before their object : as, — I am ex- 
hausted with fatigue, je suis epuise de fatigue. She is despised by 
every body, elle est meprisee de tout le monde. 

3. If any of the verbs — avoir besoin, to want ; avoir pitie, to pity; 
avoir peur, to be afraid ; avoir honte, to be ashamed ; jouir, to enjoy ; 
rendre raison, to give an account ; rougir, to blush ; se meler, to 
meddle with ; se servir, to use ; se plaindre, to complain ; or any 
other of those likewise quoted in the above list, which govern the pre- 
position de, should be followed by the pronoun it or them, referring to 
some thing spoken of before, instead of being followed by a noun or a 
verb, the preposition de should then be left out in French, and the pro- 
noun expressed by en, and placed before the verb in a simple tense, and 
before the auxiliary in a compound one : as, — he wants it, il en a besoin. 
They are afraid of it, ils en ont peur. He has meddled with it, il s^en 
est mele. I shall use it, je m'en servirai. AVe have complained of it, 
nous nous en sommes plaints, &c. 

4. The preposition /or, whicli is used in English after a substantive, 
before a verb in the present or past participle, is also usually expressed 
in French by de, with the verb in the present or preterit of the infinitive : 
as,- — I am under great obligations to you /or having spoken in my favour, 
je vous ai de grandes obligations de vous etre inieresse a moi. 

5. The preposition de is also used in French either after an adjective 
preceded by — il est, it is ; il semble, it seems ; il para'it, it appears ; 
or after any unipersonal verb which can be changed into il est with an 
adjective, as — il suffd, it is sufficient; il convient, it becomes; il 
importe, it is of importance; which can be changed into — il est sujffi- 
sant, il est convenable, il est important : as, — it is dangerous to trust 
every body, il est danger cux de se Jier a tout le monde. It is enough 
to speak to him, il suffit de lui parler, &c. 

6. De is likewise employed in French after capable, capable ; inca- 



342 PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. 



le, incapable ; digne, worthy ; indigne, unworthy ; and after se- 
veral other adjectives and substantives ; but practice alone can teach in 
which cases : as, — she is capable of doing that, elle est capable de faire 
cela. He is incapable of going there, il est incapable d'y aller. They 
are unworthy of that reward, ils sont indignes de cette recompense. 
It is time to get up, il est temps de se lever. 

7. When appartenir is employed impersonally, in the sense of to 
become, it requires de before the next infinitive in French ; whereas it 
governs d, or, if the article should also be required, au, a la, a l\ or aux, 
before nouns referring to persons, whether it be used impersonally or 
not : as, — il ne vous appartient pas de faire cela, it does not belong to 
you to do that. // appartient aux parens de punir leurs enfans, it is 
the duty of parents to punish their children. Ce chapeau appartient a 
monsieur, that hat belongs to the gentleman. 

8. When craindre, to fear; apprehender, to apprehend; desirer, 
to desire ; disconvenir, to disown; eviter, to avoid ; se flatter, to flatter 
one's self ; nier, to deny; obtenir, to obtain ; etre ravi, to be delighted ; 
regretter, to regret; souhaiter, to wish for; are followed by another 
verb, they require it to be in the present of the infinitive in French, pre- 
ceded by the preposition de, if it refers to their nominative, as in the 
following sentences: — he fears to do that, il craint diO, faire cela. I 
wish to go there, je desire d'?/ aller. He does not disown having 
said it, il ne disconvient pas de P avoir dit. He avoids meeting me, il 
Svite de me rencontrer. I flatter myself to be loved by you, je me 
flatte dietre aime de vous. We are delighted to see you, nous sommes 
ravis de vous voir. He has got leave to go, il a obtenu departir. 1 
regret not to have been there, je regrette de n'?/ avoir pas ete. He 
wishes to have an employment under you, il soi/haite d^avoir un emploi 
sous vous, &c. ; but if these verbs should be followed by a verb which 
would not refer to their nominative, they would then require it to be in 
the subjunctive mood, preceded by que, except se'fiatter, which, when 
used affirmatively, ahvays governs the next verb in the indicative mood : 
as, — I fear his example will become contagious, je crains que son 
cxemple ne devienne contagieux. I wish you to go, je desire que 
vous PARTiEZ. We do not deny that you have said it, nous ne discon- 
venons pas que vous ne /'ayez dit. I am delighted that you have suc- 
ceeded, j'e suis ravi que vous ayez reussi. 1 regret you have not been 
into the country, je regrette que vous ?i'ayez pas He a la campagne. 



vous 



I wish you may succeed in your undertaking, je souhaite que 
REUSsissiEz dans votre entreprise. I flatter myself you will come, je 
me flatte que vous viendrez, &c. 

9. When defendre, to forbid, to defend; empecher, to hinder, to 
prevent ; ordomier, to order ; and permettre, to permit ; have a noun 
or a pronoun for their direct or indirect object, they require the next 
verb to be put in the present of the infinitive in French, preceded by the 
preposition de : as, — j''ai defendu a mon fils de lui parler, I have for- 



PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE YERBS GOVERN. 343 

bidden mv son to speak to her. // me defendit de jouer, he forbade me 
to play. Je ne vous empecherai pas d'y aller^ I shall not prevent you 
from going there. // me permit de la voir, he allowed me to see her. 
lis vous ordomierent de le faire, they ordered you to do it. 

But if these verbs should have no noun or pronoun for their object, 
they would then require the next verb to be put in the subjunctive mood, 
with que before it: as, — il a defendu qu'o/i jouat pendant Poffice 
divmj he has forbidden play during divine service. Je n'' empecherai 
pas qu'z7-? viENNENT, I shall not put any obstacle to their coming. 
Votre pere a ordonne que vous le fissiez, your father has ordered that 
you should do it. // ne voulut pas permettre qu'o/i entrat, he would 
not give leave to go in. 

10. Gager and parier^ to bet, to lay, are more elegantly used with 
the conjunction que, and the next verb in the indicative, than with de 
and the infinitive : as, — je gage, je parte que/e gagnerai cdte partie, 
I bet I shall get this game : which sentence is more elegant than— je 
gage, je parie de gagner ceite partie. 

11. Prier, to ask, to invite, to beg, requires de before the next in- 
finitive, except before the four verbs — dejeuner, to breakfast ; dhier, to 
dine; manger, to. eat; and souper, to sup ; when de is used to express 
a sudden and accidental invitation, and a to denote a formal one : as,— 
je me suis trouve chez lui, comme il allait se mettre a table, ct il m'a 
prie de diner, I happened to be at his house, as he was going to sit down 
to dinner, and he asked me to dine with him, // m'^a ejivoije prier a 
diner, he sent to ask me to dinner. 

12. Protester, to protest, is better used with que and the indicative, 
than with de and the infinitive : as, — il lui protesta qu'?/ ne l\ihan- 
donnerait jamais, he declared he would never abandon her ; which is 
better than il lui protesta de ne jamais Vahandoniier. 

13. When se rappeler, to recollect, is followed by the verb avoir in 
the present of the infinitive, it requires the preposition de before it : as, 
— je me rappelle de vous avoir vu, I recollect having seen you. Nous 
nous rappelons d^avoir trouve une fois un nid de bouvreuil dans un 
rosier, we recollect having once found a bullfinch's nest in a rose-bush; 
but when se rappeler is accompanied by a noun or a pronoun for its 
object, it does not require any preposition before it : as, — je me rappelle 
cet evenement, I recollect that event, and not — de cet evenement. Je me 
le rappelle, I recollect it, and not — je ni'en rappelle. 

ESSAY LVI. (No. 3.) 

He does not disown having said it. — She has threatened me to tell my 
disconvenir 
father (of it.) — I have the honour to drink your health. — She is ashamed of 
le a 

having told a falsehood. They charged me with having robbed them. He 

mensonge accuser 



344 PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. ] 

perceived the snare they laid for* him. — Since he has forbidden you to see \ 

s'apercevoir du jnege qu^on tendre revoir I 

her again *, you must forbear going (to her house.) She asked me to accom- , 

cesser chez elle prier i 

pany her to the Opera. — Were you not very much surprised to hear a person so \ 

\ 

well educated using such language ? Do not neglect writing to her. You j 

ienir \ 

(promised) to take me to Vauxhall; when will you fulfil your promise ? j 

nCavez promis conduire i 

— Do you not blush at having so grossly insulted her ? — I was summoned \ 

grossitrement : 

to appear before the court, on the 10th of August. — Make haste to learn j 

comparaitre devant tribunal j 

your lesson. — I am tired with repeating the same thing so often. — Who would j 

enmiye 3 4 .5 i a j 

not grow impatient 'with waiting so long? She is always (meddling) with | 

long-temps se m^le \ 
the concerns of (other people.) — Do you intend going to France this summer P 

affaire aidrui \ 

—Are you afraid of thunder ? — Do not delay any longer writing to them. — ! 

diffkrer davantage de \ 
Tell him to come back in half an hour. — Endeavour to please every body. 

dans a \ 
— Never promise to do a thing when it is not in your power to do it. — We ad- 

de 

vised her to shelter herself from the rain, but she would not. — Her husband ! 

se mettre a Pabri le \ 
blamed her very much for having thus exposed herself to such an imminent 

de \ 

danger. — She did not cease representing to him that he was in the wrong. — I ! 

' did not hinder you from staying here.— We are exhausted with fatigue — We \ 

owe you many obligations for having interested yourself (in our favour.) — I am ; 
avoir bien s^interesser a nous 

very much flattered by the honour you do me. — He is unworthy of that re- ; 

de \ 

ward. — It does not belong to you to dictate to me what I am to say. — Whose ; 

ce que devoir | 

watch is this ? My brother's. — You (don't know how afraid she is) of i 



ne saurtez 



croire combien elle craint 



meeting him. — We shall always be delighted to serve you when an oppor- 
rencontrer ^' '^(^c^- 

tunity offers. 1 shall regret all my life not to have heard that celebrated 

sion se presentera 

preacher. — That young man wishes very much to get an employment under 
prHic.aieur obtenir 

you. — I wish you to* go now, for fear it should rain. — 

que si/b. pr. partir sub. pr. 



PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. 345 

She has desired me to tell you that she is very glad that you have suc- 

charger sub. fret. 

ceeded. — I wish she may get well again* soon. — Your doctor has or- 

suh, pr. se rtlahbr 

dered that you should not drink any wine. — I (will lay) Cyou any 

sub, pr. parte tout ce que 

wager) that he (wins) the game.— He intended to invite me to din- 

vous voudrez gagnera partie avoir intention 

ner, hut, having seen me pass by*, as he was going to* (sit down) to break- 

se mettre 
fast, he called me, and asked me to breakfast with him. — You ought not to 

have declared to her that you would never abandon her. — Do you not recollect 

protester 
having once found with me a nest of (young bullfinches ?) Yes, I recollect 

bouvretnl 
that circumstance very well ; and although we were very young then, 

suh. imp, 
I remember I foimd you beautiful. 
se souvenir charmant f. 



4. A list of verbs which, according to the acceptation in which they 
are taken, require sometimes de and som,etimes a before the next 
infinitive in French. 



to Begin, 




commencer. 


to Fail, to omit, to want. 


manquer. 


to Be, 




etre. 


to Forget, 


ouhlier. 


to Compel, 


to force. 


to forcer, con- 


to Oblige, 


obliger. 


constrain, 




traindre. 


to Occupy one's self. 


s'occuper. 


to Continue, 




continuer. 


to Resolve, to induce. 


r 6 so wire. 


to Decide, 




decidfr, se 


to Suffice, to be sufficient. 


suffire. 






didder. 


to Try, to endeavour, 


tucker. 


to Delay, to 


long. 


tarder. 


to Think, to think of, 


penser, songer 



Observe, — 1. Commencer, to begin, governs a before the next infi- 
nitive in French, to denote an action susceptible of improvement, and 
de to express a complete action which either had or will have some 
duration : thus, speaking of a child who begins to speak and walk, we 
say — il commence a parler et a marcher, he begins to speak and walk; 
because he will improve in both; but we say, w^hen alluding to an 
orator — il commenpa de parler a quatre heures, et ne finit qu'd six, 
he began to speak at four o'clock, and only finished at six; because we 
merely intend to express a duration of time, 

2. Continuer, to continue, requires a before the next infinitive, to 
denote a thing done with interruption, and de, to express a thing per- 
formed without interruption: as, — 3f"^0** continue a me voir et k 
m^ecrire, Miss 0** continues to see me and write to me; in this 
sentence, a is used, because it is meant to express that Miss O* * does 
not continually see me and write to me, but she only does so by inter- 
vals ; whereas in this — la riviere continue de couler, the river continues 

q5 



346 PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. 

flowing, de is employed, because it is implied that the river does not 
discontinue its course. 

3. When contraindre, to constrain, to compel, is used actively, it 
requires indifferently de or a before the next infinitive : as, — contrai- 
gnez-le a ou de faire cela, compel him to do that; but when it is 
employed in a passive sense, it only governs de : as, — il fut contraint 
de se retirer^ he was compelled to retire. 

4. When decider is taken in an active sense, it requires sometimes 
de and sometimes a before the next infinitive : as, — il a decide de 
refuser toute entree dans ses ports aux Anglais^ he has resolved to 
refuse the English all entrance into his ports. On Va decide a fartir^ 
they have determined him to go. But when decider is used in a re- 
ilective or passive sense, it governs a before the next infinitive : as, — il 

- s^est decide h. se marier, he has determined to marry. // est decide a 
mourir., he is resigned to die. 

5. Eire, to be, preceded by ce or c' in its different tenses, governs 
a before the next infinitive, to denote a thing or action which either is 
or was to be done by an agent represented by the pronoun or pronouns 
following c^est,c''etait, cefuty&c. and de when that agent is or was not 
to act, but to remain in a passive state : as, — c''est a vous a parler, it 
is for you to speak. C'etait a nous a decider, it was for us to decide. 
C'est a moi d''obeir, puisque vous commandez, it is mine to obey, since 
you command. 

6. Manquer, to fail, used in the sense of not doing or fulfilling what 
ought to be done, requires a before the next infinitive: as, — il manque 
toujour s a remplir ses devoirs, he always fails to fulfil his duty; but 
when manquer is employed in the sense of omitting or forgetting to do 
any thing, or also when it is used to express want, it governs de before 
the next infinitive or noun : as, — ne manquez pas de vous y trouver, 
do not fail being there. Les malheureux manquent de towi, poor 
people stand in need of every thing. 

Manquer, used in the sense of etre sur le point de, to be very near, 
requires also de before the next infinitive : as, — j'^ai manque de tomher^ 
I have been very near falling. 

7. Ohliger, to oblige, used actively in the sense of binding by an 
obligation to do or say any thing, usually requires a before the next 
infinitive : as, — la loi naturelle et la loi divine nous ohligent a honorer 
nos parens, both the law of nature and the divine lavv obhge us to 
honour our parents; but when obliger is used in the sense of rendering 
a service or doing a pleasure, or also when it is employed in a passive 
sense, it governs de : as, — vous m^obligerez injiniment de lui parler 
pour moi, you will infinitely oblige me by speaking to him for me. 
Je suis oblige de vous quitter, I am obliged to leave you. 

8. Oublier, to forget, requires the preposition a before the next infi- 
nitive, when we wish to express that for want of practice we have 
forgotten something which we knew, and de to denote that we have 



PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. 317 

omitted to say or do a thing which we intended : as, — elle a ouhlie a 
lire et a danser, she has forgotten reading and dancing ; in this sentence 
a is used before lire and danser, because it is for want of practice that 
she has forgotten; but in the following — fai oublie de vous dire 
que . . . . , I have forgotten to tell you that . . . . ; de h employed before 
dire, because it is merely meant to express that something has escaped 
one's memory. 

9. Penser, to think, to think of, requires a before its object, when 
that object is a noun or a personal pronoun, referring to persons, as in 
the -next sentences : he thinks of that young lady, il pense a cette 
demoiselle. I always think of you, je pense toujours a vous. 

If, on the contrary, the object of to think be the pronoun it or them^ 
referring to things, it or them must be expressed in French by y, when, 
by to think it is implied that one is either considering, has considered, 
or will consider the thing mentioned. Y is placed before the verb, in a 
simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one : as, — I will 
think of it, fy penserai. 

But should any tense of the verb to think (penser) be used to ask 
the opinion of some one about any thing, it or them must then be con- 
strued into French by en, and placed, as above, before the verb or its ■ 
auxiliary : as, — what do you think of it? qu^ea pensez-vous? 

10. Resoudre, to resolve, used in an active or passive sense, requires 
the preposition de before the next infinitive : as, — fai resolu de partir 
tout-d-Pheure, I have resolved to set out immediately. Etes-vous 
resolu d'y aller ? are you resolved to go there ? but when resoudre is 
used in a reflective way, it requires a before the next infinitive : as, — 
je me suis resolu a demander une retraite, I have resolved to ask for 
a retreat. 

- II. When s^occuper, to occupy one's self, and occuper, to occupy, 
imply an idea of labour, they require the preposition a, or, if the 
article should also be required, au, a la, a /', or aux, before the next 
infinitive or noun : as, — je m^occupe a lire, I occupy myself with 
reading. Elle s^occupe^k ses etudes, she occupies herself with her 
studies, &c. 

But if s^occuper merely expresses that the attention either is or was 
taken up with some thing, it then governs de, or, if the article be also 
required, du, de la, de l\ or des, before the next word : as, — le plaisir 
de Vame consiste a agir et a s'occuper de quelque objet qui plaise, the 
pleasure of the soul consists in action, and in occupying itself with some 
pleasing object. Je m'occupais du plaisir que j'aurai tantot, I was 
taken up with the pleasure I shall have by and by. 

12. Suffire, to suffice, governs d, or, if the article be also required, 
au, a la, a V, or aux, before the next word, and sometimes also pour : 
as, — cela suffira a monsieur, that will be sufficient for the gentleman. 
Pen de bien suffit au sage, few things are sufficient for a wise man. 
La vie suffit a peine pour aucun art, life is hardly sufficient for any art. 



348 PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. ; 

i 

Suffire, coming before a verb in the present of the infinitive, governs I 

pour before it : as, — les richesses ne siiffisent pas pour eti'e heureux^ '. 
riches are not sufficient for happiness. But suffire,^ being employed 

impersonally, requires de before the next infinitive : il suffit de lui \ 

parler pour. . . . , it is enough to speak to him for. ... ! 

13. When tdcher signifies to aim at, it governs the preposition d \ 
before the next infinitive : as, — he aims at doing me a prejudice, il i 
tdche a me nuire ; but when tdcher means to endeavour, to try, it re- ■ 
quires de before the next infinitive : as, — let us endeavour to overtake i 
him, tdchons de le rejoindre. . \ 

14. Tarder, meaning to delay, generally requires d before the next 
infiuitive in French : as, — il tarde hien a venir, he is very long coming ; 
bnt carder, used impersonally, in the sense of to long, governs de - 
before the next infinitive : as, — il me tarde de la voir, I long to see her. ! 

ESSAY LVI. (No. 4.) \ 

My little boy begins to speak and walk. — If you continue fo visit her, 

faire visite \ 
you will soon please her. — She continues writing to me; and I continue loving 

her. — I was compelled to withdraw. — Compel him to pay you. — It is for you to 

se retire}' 

command, and for us to obey. — Is it not for you io protect us.? — I do not think j 

that, on the whole, I have missed more than once coming, although I j 

sub. pret. (T j 

have often missed learning my lessons. — Do not fail being there. ] 

sub. pret. vom ^trouver ^y \ 

— She is in want of every thing. — I have been very near falling, on entering \ 

en \ 

(your house). — The friendship I* feel* for you obliges me lo give you some j 

chez vous Mon amitii vn \ 

salutary advice. — The same as by the natural and divine laws* we j 

avis De memo que loi la loi , 

are obliged to love our father and mother, so, by the civil law we are bound ; 

aind oblige ■ 

to respect princes. — You will infinitely oblige us by taking those goods , 

se charger de marchandise \ 

upon* yourself*, in case we are obliged to go (out of town,)— I had : 

tn cas qite si(b. pr. a la campagne \ 

forgotten to tell you that Miss A** is married.— That poor yovmg man has been \ 

ill so long, that he has not only forgotten dancing, but even reading and ; 
'^malade ^ '^ 

writing. — Is it not better to * occupy one's self with learning music than to do , 

apprendre de i 

nothing ?— Whilst he was engaged in tormenting me, from morning to night, I j 

s^occt/per '\ 



PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. 349 

was occupying myself in the success of his undertaking. — Does not the pleasure 

of the soul consist in acting and occupying itself with some pleasing 

^qui sub. pr. ^ 
object? — I am or was wholly absorbed in the obstacles which they will have to 
^ occi/pe 

surmount. — That will suffice for Mr. H * *. — ^That is not sufficient for me. — It is 

enough to converse with him a* few minutes, to be convinced that the 

quefque pour 

longest life of man is hardly sufficient for any art. — Few things are sufficient to 

render you happy. — I have finally resolved <o prosecute them. — Try to discover 

if he still aims at doing me a prejudice. — Let us try to overtake them. I 

7-ejomd7-e 
long to see your sister ; she (is very long) coming. 
tarde bien 



5. A list of active verbs which, being followed by a substantive 
instead of a verb for their direct object, require no preposition 
before it in French, whether any preposition be used in English or 
not : as, — / am looking for my stick, je cherche mon baton, and not 
— pour mon baton. 



to Admire, 




admirer. 


to Hoot at, 


huer. 


to Applaud, 




applaudir. 


to Infringe, 


enfreindre. 


to Approve, 




approuver. 


to Judge, 


juger.^ 


to Believe, 




croire. 


to Know, 


connaiire, savoir. 


to Brush, 




brosser. 


to Like, to love. 


aimer. 


to Call one names, 


injurier. 


to Like better. 


aimer mieux. 


to Choose, 




choisir. 


to Leer, 


lorgner. 


to Criticise, 




critiquer. 


to Look at. 


regarder. 


to Comment, 




parnphraser. 


to Look for, 


chercher. 


to Conclude, 




conclure. 


to Lose, 


perdre. 


to Deny, 




titer. 


to Perfect, lo finish, 


achever. 


to Detest, 




dciesfer. 


to Pull down. 


abattre. 


to Dust, to 


beat or 


tpoudrer, epous- 


to Root out, 


dhaciner. 


wipe the dust off, 


sefer. 


to See, 


voir. 


to Examine, 




examiner. 


to Soften, to move^, 


Jicchir. 


to Fear, 




craindre. 


to Tear, 


dechirer. 


to Hate, 




hair. 


to Will, to be willing. 


vot/hir. 



Should the above verbs have a pronoun instead of a noun for their 
direct object, they would not require any preposition before it, and it 
should be placed before the verb or the auxiliary, as it is pointed out 
under the article of personal pronouns. 

Any other active verb, not included in the above list, will likewise 
govern its direct object ^nthout any preposition before it. 

Note. — When applaudir, to applaud, is used in a neuter sense, it 
governs a before its object : as, — he applauds every thing she says, il 
applaudit a tout ce qu'elle dit. 



350 PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. 



A list of active verbs which, admitting of two objects, require no 
preposition before their direct one, whereas they govern de, or, if 
the article should also be required, du, de la, de 1', or des, before 
their indirect one, whether it be a noun or a verb : as, — -fill that 
decanter with wine, remplissez cette carafe de vin. 



to Absolve, 


ahsoud7'e. 


to Expel, 


chasser, expulser. 


to Accept, 


accepter. - 


to Fill, 


emplir, remplir. 


to Accuse, 


accuser. 


to Free, 


delivrer. 


to Banish, 


bannir. 


to Implore, 


implorer. 


to Blame, 


hlamer. 


to Inform, 


informer. 


to Convince, 


convaincre. 


to Load, 


charger, combler. 


to Correct, 


corriger. 


to Obtain, 


obtenir. 


to Deprive, 


priver. 


to Overwhelm, 


accahler. 


to Deter, to divert. 


detourner. 


to Praise, 


louer. 


to Disgust, 


degouter. 


to Receive, 


recevoir. 


to Dissuade, 


dissuader. 


to Reprove, 


reprendre. 


to Drive away, to expel 


, chasser. 


to Suspect, 


soupgonner. 


to Drive out, to turn out 


, debusquer. 


to Thank, 


remereier. 


to Exclude, 


exclure. 


to Threaten, 


menacer. 


to Expect, 


atteytdt^e. 


to Warn, to inform. 


avertir, informer. 



If any of the above verbs sboiild be used with a direct object only, 
de would not then be required : as, — I expect somebody this evening, 
f attends quelqu'^un ce soir. 

7. A list of active verbs ivhich, when, like those in the preceding list, 
admitting of two objects, require no preposition before their direct 
one, whereas they govern k before their indirect one, whatever may 
be the preposition used in English : as, — present my compliments 
to your mamma, prt^sentez mes complimens a votre maman. 



to Address, to direct. 


adresser. 


to Grant, 


accorder. 


to Announce, 


annoncer. 


to Inspire, 


inspirer. 


to Ask, 


demander. 


to Intrust, 


confer. 


to Answer, 


rtpondre. 


to Lend, 


preter. 


to Attribute, 


attribtier. 


to Owe, 


devoir. 


to Bring, 


apporter. 


to Own, 


avouer. 


to Bring hack, 


rapporter. 


to Order, 


ordotiner. 


to Carry, to take, 


porter. 


to Permit, to allow, 


permettrs. 


to Carry hack, 


reporter. 


to Prefer, 


preftrer. 


to Communicate, 


communiquer. 


to Prescribe, 


preserire. 


to Condemn, 


condamner. 


to Present with. 


presenter. 


to Confess, 


confesser. 


to Procure, 


procurer. 


to Declare, 


declarer. 


to Promise, 


promettre. 


to Dedicate, 


dedier. 


to Propose, 


proposer. 


to Denoimce, to inform dhioncer. 


to Recommend, 


recommander. 


against. 




to Reduce, 


reduire. 


to Do, to make, 


faire. 


to Refuse, 


refuser. 


to Explain^ 


expHquer, 


to Relate, 


raconter. 


to Forbid, to defend, 


defendre. 


to Repeat, 


reptter. 


to Foretell, 


prtdire. 


to Reproach, 


reprocher. 


to Forgive; to pardon, 


pardonner. 


to Return, 


rendre. 


to Give, 


donner. 


to Reveal, 


reveler. 



PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. 351 



to Save, 


epargner. 


to Suggest, 


suggtrer. 


to Say, to tell, 


dire. 


to Take, 


prendre. 


to Sell, 


vendre. 


to Take away. 


oter. 


to Send, 


envoyer. 


to Teach, 


enseigner. 


to Send back. 


re?ivoyer. 


to Write, 


ecrire. 


to Serve, to help. 


servir. 


to \Vrite word, 


mander. 


to Show, 


montrer. 







Whenever the above verbs are used with a direct object only, a is 
not then required: as, — she sells stockings, elle vend des has. 

Observe. — Oter, used in the sense of taking any thing away from the 
place where it is, governs c/e, or, if the article should also be required, 
du, de la, de l\ or des, before its indirect object : as, — otez la chaise 
du milieu de la chambre, take the chair away from the middle of the 
room. 



A list of verbs tvhich, only admitting of an indirect object, govern 
the preposition a, or, if the article should also be required, au, a la, 
a 1', or aux, before it, when it is a noun ; but ivhen it is a personal 
pronoun, the preposition a is or is not expressed, according as the 
pronoun is to follow or precede the verb. 



to Aim at. 


viser. 


to Obviate, 


obvier. 


to Apply to. 


s''ad7-esser. 


to Oppose, 


s'opposer. 


to Aspire, 


aspirer. 


to Play, 


jotier. 


to Condescendjtocom- 


condescendre. 


to Please, 


plaire. 


ply, 




to Provide for, 


ponroair. 


to Contravene, to act contrevenir. 


to Relieve, to assist, 


subvenir. 


contrary. 




to Remedy, 


ranedier. 


to Contribute, 


eontrihiier. 


to Resemble, 


ressembler. 


to Displease, 


deplaire. 


to Resist, 


resister. 


to Disobey, 


desobfdr. 


to Subject one's self. 


s'assujetttr. 


to End, to border upon, 


aboutir. 


to Succeed, 


sifcceder. 


to Give one's self up. 


se llvrer. 


to Suit, 


conve/tir. 


to Hurt, to injure. 


nuire. 


to Surrender, to repair 


se rendre. 


to Insult, 


hisii/ter. 


to, 




to Interest one's self, 


sHnth'esser. 


to Survive, 


sm-vivre. 


to Inure one's self. 


s'endurcir. 


to Trust, 


sefier. 


to Obey, 


obeir. 







Observe. — ^When the verb jouer, to play, is used to express that 
some one plays on a musical instrument, it governs the preposition de, 
or, if the article should also be required, du, de la, de P, or des, before 
the name of the instrument mentioned : as, — my sister plays on the 
piano and guitar, ma sosur joue du piano et de la guitare ; but when 
jouer is employed in the sense of playing at a game, it then requires a, 
or, if the article should also be necessary, au, a la, a P, or aux, before 
its object : as, — he likes to play at cards, il aime a jouer aux cartes. 

When plaire, to please, is used impersonally, it requires de before 
the next infinitive : as, — il me plait dJaller a la campagne, it pleases 
me to go into the country. 



352 PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. 

When insulter, to insult, and survivre, to outlive, are used actively, 
they require no preposition before their object : a?, — il insulte violem- 
ment, dans ses, lettres, Pacademie, he violently insults, in his letters, 
the academy. // a survecu ses enfans, he has outlived his children. 

9. A list of verbs ivhich, like those in the preceding list, only admit- 
ting of an indirect object, govern the preposition de, or, if the 
article should also be required, du, de la, de V, or des, before it, 
when it is a noun ; but, when it is a personal 'pronoun, de is or 
is not expressed, according as the pronoun is to follow or precede 
the verb. 



to Be edified, 


etre tJifiL 


to Inherit, 


heriter. 


fo Be filled with in- 


sindigner. 


to Inquire after or 




dignation. 




about. 


s'informer. 


to Be greedy of. 


etre affame. 


to Laugh at. 


se moquer, se rire. 


to Be satiated, 


Stre rassasit. 


to Mistrust, 


se mejier. 


to Be satisfied. 


etre satis/ait, etre 


to Perceive, 


s'apercevoir. 




co7itent. 


to Pity, 


avoir pitit. 


to Be scandalized, 


se scandaliser. 


to Profit, 


profiler. 


to Be startled, to scare, 


, s^effrayer. 


to Put up with, to do 


s' accommoder . 


to Be surprised. 


etre surpris. 


Avith, 




to Console one's self. 


se consoler. 


to Resign, 


se dtmettre. 


to Discharge, 


s^acqt/itter. 


to Retract, to recant, 


se reiracter, se dt- 


to Distrust, 


se defer. 




dire. 


to Draw near. 


^approcher. 


to Seize, to invade. 


s^emparer. 


to Enjoy, 


joidr. 


to Seize upon, to lay 


se saisir. 


to Fall in love with, 


^amoiiracher, de 


- hold of, 






venir amoureux 


■• to Slander, 


medire. 


to Feel uneasy. 


s''inqmtiter. 


to Thirst after. 


etre a/tere. 


to Feel or grow proud, 


, s' ennrgueillir. 


to Use, 


se servir. 


to Grieve one's self. 


iattrister. 







ESSAY LVI.— (No. 5.) 

If you transgress the laws of your country, you will he brought before the 

pays citer 

tribunals. Do you approve of his proceeding ? She criticises every body. 

procede 

(I am very fond of) music, in'"' the eyening. They have informed against* you. 

J^aime beaucoup On denoncer 

Do not look at those ladies so much. Have they expelled him from their 

regard er 

house ? (I have been dissuaded) from going into partnership with him. 1 im- 

On ni'a dissuade • entrer en societe 

plored her assistance, without being able to* obtain it. They have declared 

po/woir 
war against us, without any legitimate reason. You owe me some money. 



Mr. D* * has dedicated to me a beautiful poem on the fatal effects of atheism. 

fi/nesfe 
Allow me to* present you with this diamond, as a tribute of grati- 

^grter que je si/b pr. recon- 



PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. 353 

tude for your past kindness to me. Did Mary take the chairs away 

naissance hontesf.pl. 

from the bed-room? 1 hope you will not reveal this secret to any body. 

Bring me back the book which I have lent you. He applauds (every thing) 

a tout ce 

she says, and complies with all her desires. 1 do not know how to* 

qu* condescendre 

obviate that difficulty. She has such a good constitution, that she will outlive 

all her children. ^^Let us not insult the misery of others. Obey your superiors. 

- ■ That street ends at St. Paul's. He resembles a (blind man), who maintains 

aveugle soutenir 

that white is black. Remedy these evils. Was not Gustavus Vasa reduced to 

rtdiiit 

the necessity of working in the copper-mines to live and hide himself? 

travail/er ctiivre pour pour se cacher 

English Ladies are very fond of playing at cards.- He was playing on 

aimer beaucoup a 

the violin. Nobody was much edified by his sermon. They are at last 

tres de 

satiated with blood and slaughter. 1 am not at all surprised (at it). Who 

rassasic de carnage en 

will inherit his immense property ? Thank God ! she enjoys good health. 

Liens m. pi. Dieu merci une 

They profit by the misfortunes of others. You will perceive your error, 

avtrui s'apercevoir 

when (it is too late). We must do with these two rooms for a 

il n'en sera plus temps s'accommoder 

little time. Do not go so near the fire, for fear you should burn your- 

s^approcher du se bru- 

self. They were soon consoled for the loss of their mother. Foreign armies 

ler se consoler 

have invaded our territory. We are very uneasy at not (hearing from her). 

territoire inqi/iet recevoir de ses nouvelles 

She laid hold of my sword, and (would have run him through with it), had 
se saisir tpee la lui aurait passte ati travers du corps si 

I not kept her back*. 
retenir 

10. Cases inwhich the preposition pour oi' afin de is used before a 
verb in the present of the infinitive mood in French. 

General Rule. — The preposition pour is used before a verb in tlie 
present of the infinitive mood in French, to denote the end, the design 
or the cause for which a thing is done, in the sense of — in order tOy 
iviih a design to, for to, or to used in the same sense : as, — I shall do 
it in order not to displease you, je le ferai pour ne pas vous deplaire. 



354 PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. 

He did it to tease her, il le jit pour la taquiner, because we can say — he 
did it in order to tease her. 

For^ used in English before a verb in the present or past participle, is 
also construed into French by pour, with the verb in the present of the 
infinitive, when the thing mentioned has reference to a present or future 
time -J but, when it refers to a past time, the verb must be put in the 
preterit of the infinitive : as, — how much do you ask for going there ? 
combien demandez-vous pour y aller 1 in this example, aller is in the 
present of the infinitive, because the sentence implies futurity ; but in 
the next — he was hanged for having robbed his master, il fut pendu 
pour avoir vole son maitre ; avoir vole is in the preterit of the infinitive, 
because a past thing is spoken of. 

For, used before the word fun, and in before jest, are also expressed 
in French by pour, and fun and jest by hadiner : as, — he did it for 
fun, il lefit pour hadiner. 

Observe. — The above expressions — in order to, ivith a design to, 
for to, and to used in the same sense, as, likewise, in order that, to 
the end that, or simply that, are also frequently expressed in French 
by ajin de, with the next verb in the present of the infinitive, or ajin 
que, with the verb in the subjunctive : as, — they have been to Paris, in 
order that they may be able to say that they have seen it, ils ont ete a 
Paris afin de ppuvoir dire qu'ils Vont vu. I shall give him a good 
seat, that he may see the king Avell, je lui donnerai une bonne place, 
afin qu'il puisse bien voir le rot. 

Afin de is generally to be preferred to ajin que, when the verb fol- 
lowing in order to, with a design to, or any other of the above expres- 
sions, has the same nominative as the verb preceding them. This is 
the case in the first of the two examples just quoted, — "they have been 
to Paris in order that they may be able to say that they have seen it;^' 
the nominative of may be able is they, which is also that of have been ; 
but, if the nominative of the second verb should not be the same person 
as that of the first, as in the second example likewise before quoted, viz. 
" I shall give him a good seat, that he may see the king well,'''' in 
which the nominative of may see the king is (he,) and that of shall 
give him a good seat, (I,) ajin que must be used. 

ESSAY LVI.— (No. 6.) 

We have not a heart to hate one another. Palamedes invented the game 

se hair les uns les antres jeu 

of chess to serve for diversion to his soldiers^ and to teach them the strata- 
des echecs (T amusement apprendre lexir 

gems of war. Mr. S * * * has played that trick to your sister to frighten her. ■ 

tour faire peur lui 

We are born to work and to glorify God. How much do you ask for going 

naitre travailler 

there ? He was hanged for having murdered his father. — I said so in fun. — We 

y assassi?ier 



OF tHE SUBJUNCTIVE. 355 

shall go to London, that we* (may be able) to* say that we have seen it. If 

ajin de pouvoir 

they will come, I shall give them a good seat, that they may hear 

2)lace aJin qtC sub. pr. pouvoir 

well. You ought to* give prizes to your pupils to encourage them. He 

devriez 
studies those sciences, more to discourse and (make a show) in the world, than 

discQurir hriller 

to enlighten and cultivate his mind. There is a time to work and a time to 

tchdrer 

rest. He will do any thing to oblige you. She is too weak to bear 

se reposer tout son possible foible supporter 

such a fatigue. He has not influence enough to obtain that situation. If 

si grand credit place 

you come to-morrow, there will be nobody at home to receive you. They had 

ckez nous 

not troops enough to blockade the town by sea and land. We find remedies 

On des 

to cure madness, but none to cure love. 

la on n^en trouve point de 



LESSON LVII. 

Of the Subjunctive. 

The indicative is the mood of aiSirmation, and the subjunctive the 
mood of indecision and douht ; the verb, therefore, of the second part 
of a sentence, when preceded by the conjunction que, is put in the in- 
dicative in French, when the verb of the first part expresses some thing 
positive and affirmative, and in the subjunctive (although it may be in 
the indicative in English), when the verb of the first part denotes un- 
certainty or doubt. From this general principle are derived the fol- 
lowing rules on the use of the subjunctive, which must be particularly 
attended to, as they explain the different cases in which the subjunc- 
tive is used in French, although the indicative may be employed in 
English. 

First General Rule. — When a verb is preceded by the conjunc- 
tion quey it is put in the subjunctive mood in French, although it may 
be in the indicative in English, after any verb expressing doubt, uncer- 
tainty, fear, ignorance, wish, command, order, desire, surprise, affection, 
passion, sentiment, and, in general, any emotion of the soul, such as — 
apprehended', avoir peur, craindre, commander, desirer, defendre, 
douter, ignorer, nier, ordonner, se rejouir, souhaiter, vouloir ; and 
also after the words — affligc, charme, content, hien-aise, enchante, 
digne, indigne, fdche, ravi, surjpris, when they are preceded by any 
tense of the verbs etre, sembler, paraHre and avoir Pair : as, — I am 



356 OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

afraid, I apprehend, I fear, I tremble lest he should come, fai peur, 
j'apprehende, je crains, je tremble qu^il ne vienne. I wish you 
may succeed, je desire que vous reussissiez. I am very glad that 
they are well, je suis charme, ravi, enchante, hien-aise qu'ils se 
PORTENT hien. 

" Vous voulez qneje/uie et que je vous evite.^^ — Rac. act II. sc. 6. 
" Obeis, si tu veux qu'on Vobeisse un jour." — Voltaire, stance 28*. t. 33. 

A verb preceded by the conjunction que is also put in the subjunctive 
mood in French, after the following verbs — assurer, avouer, croire, 
conclure, convenir, conjecturer, certifier, dire, declarer, demontrer, 
{esperer, though denoting an aiFection of the soul,) entendre, etre sur, 
gager, juger, jurer, ouhlier, promettre, penser, parier, prouver, pre- 
dire, presager, presumer, savoir, soutenir, supposer, voir, and, in 
general, after all those which express the faculties of the understanding 
(but not the affections of the soul), when they are used negatively or 
interrogatively, or when they are preceded by si, but not when they are 
employed affirmatively, as the indicative is then always required : as, — 
I do not think she is right, /e ne crois pas qu^elle ait raison. Do you 
think he will come? croyez-vous qu^il vienne ? If you think she will 
do it, you are very much mistaken, si vous croyez qu^elle le fasse, vous 
vous trompez Men. But in the following sentences — I think he is 
right, je crois quHl a raison. I hope he will come, j'espere qu*il 
viENDRA. I say, I fancy, I presume, I think, I suspect, I maintain 
that you have learnt dancing, je dis, je mHrnagine, je presume, je 
pense, je soupponne, je soutiens que vous avez appris a danser ; the 
verbs following que are put in the indicative mood, because those which 
precede it are affirmatively used. 

Observe. — 1. A verb preceded by the conjunction que is put in the 
subjunctive mood in French, after the verbs entendre and pretendre, 
used in the sense of meaning, ordering, ivishing and being willing, 
whether they be employed affirmatively, negatively or interrogatively, 
or whether they be preceded by si : as, — I mean, I order you to do 
that, j^entends, je pretends que vous fassiez cela. I do not mean you 
to incur any expenses for me, je n''e7itends pas que vous fasseez de 
depenses pour moi. But entendre, used in the sense of to hear, to 
understand; smd pretendre, in that of to maw/am, require the next 
verb to be in the indicative mood, when they are used affirmatively ; 
and in the subjunctive, when they are employed either negatively or 
interrogatively, or when they are preceded by si : as, — by the sound of 
the voice, I hear that it is my brother, au son de la voix,j^entends 
que c' EST monjr ere. I maintain that it is not true, je pretends que 
cela n'EST pas vrai. 

2. When an interrogation is made merely to affirm or deny with more 
energy, as is done by orators, when desirous of producing a greater 
effect upon the minds of their hearers, the verb coming after que in the 



OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 357 

second part of the sentence, is not put in the subjunctive mood, but in 
the indicative as in English, because then there is no doubt expressed, 
this being a mere form of expression : as, — 

Madame, oubliez-vous 



Que Thesee est mon pere, et qu'il est votre epouxJ'" — Rac. act II. sc. 5. 

3. The verb coming after que, in the second part of a sentence, is 
also put in the indicative in French, although the verb used in the first 
part be in the interrogative form, when there is no doubt entertained 
about the thing mentioned, and we merely wish to communicate it to 
those with whom we converse : for instance, if knowing that the king is 
going to the opera, and wishing to impart it to the person or persons 
whom we address, we must say : — do you know that the king is going 
to the opera? savez-vous que le roi va a P opera? and not aille ; 
because the sentence implies no doubt. For the same reason, we say : 
— have I told you that my brother is dead ? vous ai-je dit que mon 
frere est mort 7 and not soil ; because there is no doubt entertained 
about my brother's death. The same rule must be observed for any 
other sentence of the same kind. 

4. When an interrogative sentence begins by one of the expressions 
— -pourquoi, comment, or any similar one, the verb coming after que 
in the second part of the sentence is likewise sometimes put in the indi- 
cative mood in French, when there is no doubt entertained about the 
thing mentioned, and the verb used in the first part of the sentence is 
not one of those quoted in the first general rule, which always govern 
the subjunctive : as, — why do you think he will not come? pourquoi 
croyez-i'ous qu^il ne viendra pas ? and not qu'il ne vienne pas, because 
the sentence implies no doubt. 

The indicative mood is likewise always used in French, after these 
other interrogative expressions : — est-ce que ? ri'est-ce pas que ? : as, — 
is he really arrived ? est-ce qu'il est arrive ? he has done that, has he 
not? n' est-ce pas qu'il a fait cela? 

Second General Rule. — A verb preceded by the conjunction 
que is likewise put in the subjunctive mood in French, after the dif- 
ferent tenses of unipersonal verbs, and of verbs used unipersonally, 
as — il faut, il fallait, il faudra, il faudrait, il convient, il im- 
porte, il est iviportant, il est a propos, il est avantarjeux, il est 
facheux, il est juste, il est injuste, il serait injuste, il est necessaire, 
il vaut mieux, il vaudrait mieux ; and, in general, after all uniper- 
sonal verbs formed with an adjective and the third persons singular of 
the different tenses of etre (except, however, after those mentioned 
in the following observations) : as, — I must go to town, il faut que 
y'AiLLE d la ville. It is better for her not to come, il vaut mieux 
qu'elle ne vienne point. 

'' // fo/ juste, grand roi, qivun meurtrier joemse." 

CoH^rE^LI,E, /e Cid, act. II. sc. 7. 



358 OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Observe. — 1. II arrive, il par ait, il resulte, il s^ensuit, and, in 
general, all unipersonal verbs denoting evidence, certitude or proba- 
bility, as — il y a apparence, il est clair, il est certain^ il est evident, il 
est probable, il est vrai, il est vraisemblable, il est sur, &c. only 
govern the next verb in the subjunctive mood in French when they are 
used negatively or interrogatively, or when they are preceded by si ; for, 
should they be employed affirmatively, they always require the indicative 
mood : as, — it is not certain, it is not true they will come, il ri'est pas 
certain, il ripest pas vrai, il n^est pas sur quails viennent. Is it 
likely they will make peace this year ? est-il probable qu*on fasse la 
paix cette annee ? If it be certain he will go there, sHl est certain quHl 
y AiLLE, It often happens that we are disappointed in our expectations, 
il arrive souvent qu^on est trompe dans son attente. 

2. When the verb sembler, to seem, is used affirmatively in an uni- 
personal manner, preceded by one of the personal pronouns me, te, 
nous, vous, lui, leur, and followed by que, as — il me semble que; il 
vous semblait que, &c. it requires the next verb to be put in the in- 
dicative mood because then it answers to the different persons of 
croire, and denotes affirmation without any doubt or uncertainty : as, — 
it seems to me that I see him, il me semble queje le vois. 

But when sembler is used negatively or interrogatively, or when it 
is preceded by si, being still accompanied by one of the personal pro- 
nouns, it requires the next verb following que to be put in the sub- 
junctive mood : as, — it does not seem to me that one can think dif- 
ferently, il ne me semble pas qu^on puisse penser differemment. 
Does it seem to you that it is so? vous semble-t-il que cela soit 
ainsi ? 

If, on the contrary, sembler should not be accompanied by any one 
of the personal pronouns, it would then always govern the subjunctive 
mood, whether it be used affirmatively, negatively or interrogatively, 
or whether it be preceded by si : as, — it seems that you have seen hira, 
il semble que vous Z'ayez vu. It does not seem that you have been 
there, il ne semble pas que vous y ayez ete ; &c. 

" II semblait qii'un spectacle si doux 
Wattendit. en ces lieux, qu'un teraoin tel que vous." 

IIac. Andr. act. II. sc. 4. 

Third General Rule. — A verb is always put in the subjunctive 
mood in French, after the following conjunctions : afin que, a moins 
que, avant que, au cas que, en cas que, bien que, de crainte que, de 
peur que, encore que, jusqu^d ce que, loin que, non que, non pas que, 
nonobstant que, malgre que, pose que, pour que, pourvu que, quoique, 
sans que, soit que, suppose que, si peu que, si tant est que, and que, 
used in the sense of a moins que, avant que, ajin que, de crainte que, 
de peur que, soit que and sans que : as, — before I was come, avant 
que je fusse venu. In case that it is so, en cas que cela soit. 



OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 359 

Although he is very yoimg, he is notwithstanding discreet, encore qii'il 
soiT fort jeune, il ne laisse pas d^etre sage. 

" Quoiqite le ciel smV juste, il permet bien sonvent 
Que I'iniquite regne, et marche en triomphant." 

Voltaire, D. Ptdre, act. V. sc. 1. 

Observe. — The following conjunctions, sinon que., si ce n^est que, 
de sorte qne, tellement que., de maniere que, and several others men- 
tioned under the article of conjunctions, govern sometimes the subjunc- 
tive and sometimes the indicative, according to the idea which w-e wish 
to express. They generally govern the subjunctive, when the thing 
spoken of is not certain, but rather washed for ; whereas they require 
the indicative when the sentence positively affirms that such or such a 
thing is or will be : as, — I ask nothing except that you should do your 
duty, je ne demande rien, si nan que vous fassiez voire devoir ; 
in this sentence, the subjunctive is used, because the thing spoken of, 
namely — que vous fassiez voire devoir, is not certain, but wished for; 
but in this — I have nothing to tell you, except that 1 do and shall 
always do my duty, /e n^ai rien a vous dire, si non que jc fais ei que 
je FERAi ioujours man devoir; the indicative is employed, because 
the thing spoken of, namely — que je fais et que je ferai ioujours mon 
devoir, is positively affirmed as existing, there being no doubt remaining 
about it. 

It must be noticed that que, used in the second part of a sentence, to avoid 
the repetition of a conjunction occurring in the first, governs the same mood as 
the conjunction for which it is empkiyed: as, — as soon as my brother writes to 
me, and I find an opportunity, I will let you know it, aussitot que mon frire 
TfHtcrira., et q,v:E. f aiirai tine occasion, je vous ie ferai savoir. Unless you come or write 
to me, I shall not do it, a moins que vous ne veniez ou que vous ne nCecriviez, je ne le 
fej-aipas. 

Fourth General Rule. — A verb preceded by que is likewise put 
in the subjunctive mood in French : — 

1. After the conjunction si, used for quelque : 

" Si mince qu^il ptnsse eire, un cheveu fait de I'ombre." — Vit.lefre. 

2. After si preceded and followed by a negative expression : as — she 
is not so foolish but that she is well aware of it, elle n' est pas si sotte 
qu^elle ne s^en apercoive bieii. 

3. When que, used in the second part of a sentence, is employed 
to avoid the repetition of si, occurring in the first part : as, — if you 
consent to it, and you come with him, si vous y consentez, et que 
vous veniez avec lui ; for — si vous y consentez y et si vous venez avec 
lui. 

Fifth General Rule. — A verb preceded by que or qui is likewise 
put in the subjunctive mood in French : 1. after a superlative; that is, 
after an adjective or a participle preceded by one of the words le plus, 
le moins, le mieux ; la plus, la moins, la mieux ; les plus, les moins. 



360 OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

les mieux ; or after a substantive qualified by one of the adjectives — le 
meilleur, le pire, le moindre ; la meilleure^ la pire, la moindre ; les 
meilleurs ou meilleures, les pires, les moindres ; or, also, after any 
one of these words used by themselves, as, likewise, after le pis^ the 
worst : as, — the movements of the planets are the most regular with 
which we are acquainted, les mouvemens des planetes sontles phis re- 
guliers que nous connaissions. Religion is always the best voucher 
for the morals of men, la religion est toujours le meilleur garant que 
Pan puissE avoir des moeurs des hommes. 

2. After the adjectives seul, unique, dernier, preceded by the defi- 
nite article le, la, or les ; and frequently also after the ordinal numbers 
le premier, le second, le troisieme, le quatrieme, le cinqiiieme, &c. 
when, above all, there is doubt or uncertainty implied in the sentence : 
as, — that is the only one I have, voild le seul ou Punique que /'aie. 
It is the first or second time I have been mistaken, c'est la 'premiere 
ou la seconde fois que je me sois trompe, &c. 

" Ce n'est pas le seul bien que sa main me ravisse .'" 

Creb. Rhad. et Ztn, act. I. sc. 2. 

3. After all words which have a negative import, as — personne, 
aucun, nul, rien, pas un, pas, point, pas de, point de, peu, guere, &c. : 
as, — I know nobody so unhappy as he,ye ne connais personne qui soit 
aussi malheureux que lui. There is nothing but what time at length 
alleviates, il n'^y a rien que le temps a la fin n'ADOucissE. 

Sixth General Rule. — The subjunctive is also required after the 
following words : quelque, quelque que, qui que, qui que ce soit qui, 
quoi que, quoi que ce soit que : as, — whoever told you so was wrong, 
qui que ce soit qui vous /'ait dit avait tort. Whatever you may say, 
quoi que ou quoi que ce soit que vous disiez, &c. 

*' Qi{oi qii'oti DisE, un anon ne devieudra qu'un ane." — Grozelier. 

General Observations. — 1. Besides the cases already mentioned, 
there are some others in which the subjunctive is also required, ac- 
cording to the idea which we wish to express ; for instance, a verb, 
coming in the second part of a sentence, and joined to the first part by 
one of the pronouns, ciui, que, dont, (or oil,') is put in the subjunctive 
mood in French, when it expresses something uncertain ; whereas it is 
used in the indicative, when it expresses something certain or positive : 



1. J'epouserai une demoiselle 2. J'epouserai une demoiselle 
qui me plaise. qui me plaira. 

3. Montrez-moi un chemin 4. Montrez-moi le chemin 
qui conduise a Paris. qui conduit a Paris. 

5. Je cherche quelqu'un 6, Je cherche quel qu'un 

qui me rende service. qui me rendra service. 



OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 361 

7. J 'aspire a une place 8. J 'aspire a une place 
qui soil agreable. qui est agreable. 

9. Je te donnerai des raisons 10. Je te donnerai des raisons 

qui te convainquent. qui te convaincront. 

11. J'irai dans ime retraite 12. J'irai dans une retraite 

oil je sois tranquille. oil je serai tranquille. 

13. Preferez des livres oil le 14. Preferez ces livres oil le 

style soit sublime et pur. style est sublime et pur. 

In the first of the above examples, namely — "fepoiisei'ai ttne demoiselle qui me 
plaise/' the subjunctive is used, because the idea is undetermined : I wish to take a 
lady for my wife ; but, although certain of the qualities I require in her whom I 
shall choose, I do not know yet the young lady wlio possesses them ; but, in the 
second example, — ''ftpomerai une demoiselle qui me plaira,''' the indicative is em- 
ployed, because the idea is positive ; a young lady being spoken of whom I mean to 
marry, and who, I am sure, will please me. It is the same with the other sentences : 
the choice of the indicative or subjunctive is determined by the idea which we wish 
to express. 

2. The subjunctive is also required after the conjunction que used 
in the beginning of a sentence to express imprecation, astonishment or 
reluctancy. In this case, let is generally employed in English : as, — ^let 
me die if that is not true, que je meure si cela 'ii'est pas vrai. 

'' Que la foudre a vos yeux m'ecrase si je mens !" 

Th. CouNEiLLE, le Ment. act. III. sc. 5. 

3. The subjunctive is likewise sometimes used without being pre- 
ceded by any conjunction, in some sentences of desire or wish : these 
sentences are generally expressed in English by may or some other 
similar expression: as,— may you be happy with her! puissiEZ-ro'W.^ 
vivre heureux avec elle ! God grant that the thing may happen! 
FASSE le del que cela arrive ! God forbid ! Dieu m^en preserve ! 
Let him write to her who pleases, lui ecrive qui vouclra. Let him 
escape who can! sauve qui pent / 

" Perisse le Tro3^en auteur de nos alarmes !" — Rac. Eph. act. II. sc. 2. 

" Putsst-\e de mes yeux y voir tomber ce foudre!" — P. Cokn. Hor. act. IV. sc. 5. 

In any sentence of this kind, the nominative of the verb is generally 
placed after the verb. 

4. In all tbe French language, there is only the verb savoir w^hich, 
employed negatively, can be used in the subjunctive mood, instead of 
the indicative, without being dependent on any other word, expressed 
or understood, requiring it : for instance, — I know nothing more me- 
lancholy, ^e ne SACHE rien de plus fdcheux. Not that I know^ of, pas 
que je sache. This, however, must be confined to the first person 
singular only ; because we cannot say in the other persons : — vous ne 
sachez pas, you do not know ; il ou elle ne sache pas, he or she does 
not know; &c. but — vous ne savez pas; il ou elle ne sait pas ; &c. 

r 



362 OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Tenses of the subjunctive which must he used. 

General Rule. — Whenever a verb depending on que, or on any 
other word mentioned in the preceding rules, is required to be in the 
subjunctive mood, it is put in the present of the subjunctive, whatever 
may be the tense in which it is in Enghsh, when the thing or action ex- 
pressed by it, is present or future with reference to the other verb, 
used either in the first or second part of the sentence; but it is put in 
the preterit or compound of the present of the subjunctive, when the 
thing or action expressed by it is past with reference to the other 
verb, and that verb is either in the present or future of the indicative, 
or if it be in the imperative : as, — I do not think he will come to-day, 
je ne crois pas quHl vienne aujourd'hui. Do you think she will 
come to-morrow ? croyez-vous ^w'£?//e vienne demainl I shall always 
doubt they have mentioned it to him, je doutcral toujours quails lui 
en AiENT PARLE. Whatever he says, I will not go, quoi qu^il dise, je 
n^irai pas. Is it the only one he has ? est-ce le seul qu^il ait ? She 
is the prettiest lady I ever saw, c'est la plus jolie demoiselle que j^aie 
jamais vue. 

But a verb required to be in the subjunctive mood, must be put in 
the imperfect or pluperfect of the subjunctive, according as we wish to 
express by it a thing or action present, future, or past, with reference 
to the other verb used in the first or second part of the sentence, if 
that verb be in any other tense than either in the present or future of 
the indicative or in the imperative ; that is, if it should be in the 
imperfect or pluperfect of the indicative, in one of the preterits or of 
the conditionals : as, — I did not think he would set out to-day, je ne 
croyais pas qu'^il partit aujourd'hui. Should you have thought that 
he would have bought that house? auriez-vous cru quHl evt acr-ete 
cette maison ? Though his reasons were good, I would not listen to them, 
quoique ses raisons fussent bonnes, je ne voulus point les entendre. 
We were there before she was arrived, nous y etions avant qu^elle fut 
arrivee, &c. 

Exceptions. — 1. A verb required to be in the subjunctive mood 
rnust be put in the imperfect or pluperfect of the subjunctive, though 
the first verb governing it be in the present or future of the indicative, 
or in the imperative, if there should be a conditional expression ex- 
pressed or understood in the first or second part of the sentence, and 
the verb used or implied in it, should be in any other tense than in the 
present of the indicative : as, — do you think he would come, if he were 
asked, croyez-vous quHl vint, si on Pen priait ? I do not think she 
would play, if you were present, je ne crois pas qu^elle voulut joiLer, 
si vous etiez present. Do you think they would have come, if it had 
been fine weather? croyez-vous qii'elles fussent venues, s^il avait 
fait beau temps ? I do not think this affair would have succeeded, 
•without your interposition, ye ne crois pas que cette affaire eut reussi, 
sans voire intervention. In these examples, the imperfect and plu- 



OF THE subjunctive: 363 

perfect of the subjunctive are employed, because the verbs used in the 
conditional expressions — si on Pen priait ; si vous etiez present; s''il 
avait fait beau temps; and that implied in — sans voire intervention^ 
are not in the present of the indicative. But we must say with the pre- 
sent of the subjunctive — je ne doute pas qu^il ne vienne, si on Pen prie, 
I. do not doubt but he will come, if he be asked; because the con- 
ditional expression, si on Pen prie, is in the present of the indicative. 

2. The imperfect of the subjunctive is usually employed to express 
a future thing or action, and the preterit or compound of the present of 
the same mood, to denote a past thing or action, after the indefinite 
preterit of the indicative : as, — I have ordered that my manuscript 
should be burnt, j^ai ordonne qilon brulat mon manuscrit. He must 
have taken a great deal of trouble, il a fallu qu^il se soit donne bien 
de la peine. 

3. Should a verb, which is to be used in the subjunctive mood, be 
represented as continually acting or acted upon, it must be put in the 
present of the subjunctive, whatever may be the tense in which the 
other verb is in English : as, — God has surrounded the eyes with very 
thin coats, transparent on the outside, that we may see through them, 
Dieu a entoure les yeux de tuniques fort minces, transparentes au 
devant, afin que Von piiisse voir a travers. I have used no fiction but 
what is a sensible image of truth, ye n'^ai employe aucune fiction qui ne 
SOIT line image sensible de la verite. 

t 
ESSAY LVII. 

For the future the verbs which must be put in the subjunctive mood 
will not be found marked as before, as the pupil is now supposed to be 
sufficiently acquainted with the necessary rules on that subject. 

I wonder you have -written to her. — He is delighted that it is so. — We 
^ktonner cela ainsi 

are very sorry that this misfortune has happened to you. — I did not know that 

fdcht etre arrive 

you were friends. — Are you not very sorry she is dead ? — Why do you 

sub. imp. 
think the ambassador mil not come ? — Do you think the French will 

Alonsieur 

storm the town, if it does not capitulate ? — I tremble lest the go- 

doiiner Passaut a capituler 

vernor will see every thing destroyed* with fire and sword, before he surrenders^" 

a a sang se rendre 

— If you perceive that the children steal the fruit, (let me know it). — Do you 

voter donnez-men avis 

mean that she shall send back these ear-rings to him ? — We will iiot " 
vretendre entendre 

have* you to be at* any expense (on our account,) for the same reason that" 
/aire pour noits par 

r2 



364 OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE* i 

you do not suffer us to be at* any for you. — By the sound of the voice i 

vouloir que nous en \ 

and instrument, I conclude that it is my sister who is singing and playing.— • 

entendre c' j 

Do you know that Miss E * * * is married ? Yes, I do. — Have I told you that the ! 

French funds are much higher to-day ? Yes, you have. — She is not dead, is \ 

she ? If your brother is desirous of being esteemed, he must be obliging, \ 

etre \ 

polite and affable to every body. — It is just that the laws should be observed. ' 

— It would be unjust that a vile murderer should not be punished. — It is evident S 

assassin i 

that she is in the wrong. — It is not likely that they will return before next - 

year. — It seems to me that there can be no greater enjoyment than that of 

de jomssance ■ 

rendering others happy. — Did it seem to you that he was very attentive io \ 

assidu auprcs \ 

her ? — It seemed to me that she was walking. — It does not seem to me that one I 

can think differently. — It would seem that the French would wish to'^ make j 

vouloir i 

peace. — I will not pardon you, unless you promise me to behave better in i 

de se conduire a \ 

future. — Do not leave that book here, for fear my sister should read it. ' 

Cavenir de crainte que \ 

— Does not lightning generally appear before the thunder is heard ? — I require i 

eclair demander \ 

nothing from* you, except that you should take care of your childreia and : 

sinon avoir \ 

(impress upon their young minds) sentiments of honour and delicacy. — As I 

qt;e vous leur inculquiez de bonne heiire j 

soon as I am in the country and I have an opportunity, I will send you some j 

occasion \ 

fruit. — Let a hair be ever so small, it produces some shadow. — She is not so i 

foolish but she sees well that you wish (to impose upon her). — If your sister ; 

qii! vouloir lui en faire accroire 

takes her lessons regularly, and studies besides two or three hours a day, ' 

she will make great progress. — I think the most just comparison that can be j 

on j 
made of love is that of a fever. — Who are the two greatest men that England 

has produced? — His cousin is the handsomest young lady that can be'-' seen.— ' 

on voir \ 

Is that the only one you have ? Yes, it is.— It is the first time I have been mis- - j 



OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 365 

taken. — However ingenious they might be, they could not discover the plan I 

had followed. — ^There is nobody but would be very sorry, if he knew all that 

is thought of him. — I want a decanter that contain three pints of wine. — If I 

de carafe 

marry again, I shall take a lady who has plenty of money. — Let me die on 

se remarier heaucoup 

the spot, if I told you an untruth. — God grant that that may happen ! — May 

lieu faussete 

you live happy together many years ! — Let him write to her who likes. — May 

God preserve me (from it) ! — I know nothing more advantageous for you and 
3-our brother. — Has the tailor sent me my coat ? Not that I know of. — I do not 
think the French will succeed in Spain, if the Spaniards are faithful to their 
king and constitution. — "We did not suspect they would have begun the fortifi- 
cations so soon. — ^Talma is the best tragic actor that France has had for a* long 

depuis 
time. — I doubt whether any philosopher has ever satisfactorily ex- 

qu^ d'une maniere saiisfahante 

plained the physical cause of the winds. — I was very much afraid he would tell her 

mother (of it). — Who could have thought that the emperor would have submitted 

le 
to such dishonourable conditions ? — Although she is very young and handsome, 

si 
I do not like her at all. — The Bellerophon is the largest vessel that has ever 

been built in France. — Whatever riches we may have, we are never satisfied. 

const ruire content 

— Unless a book be entertaining, I do not care to read it. — There is no grief 
amusunt se soucier de chagrin 

but time at length alleviates. — Were you not there a* long time before the 
que a la Jin iC adoucir 

coach arrived? — Do you think she would sing, if I (were to ask her)? No, 

croire C'en priais 

I do not believe she would in your piesence. — If you thought the Misses S** 

le vouloir 
would come, in case (it were) fine weather, I should invite them. — He m-ast 
vouloir en qu'ilfit 

have gained much, if he has laid by twenty thousand francs in two years. 

meffre de cote en 

— She has particularly desired that all her letters and papers should be 

suriout recommander 
burnt, in case she should die of that illness. 



366 OF THE PRlESENT PART. AND VERBAL ADJ. 

LESSON LVIII. 

; Of Participles. _ 

L OF THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE AND VERBAL ADJECTIVE. 

The present 'participle is always terminated in ant^ in French, and. 
is indeclinable; whereas verbal adjectives, (that is — adjectives derived 
from verbs,) although having the same termination, are declinable, and 
agree in gender and number with the substantives to which they refer. 

As it is sometimes very dijfficult to know whether a word ending in 
ing, in English, is a present participle or a verbal adjective in French, 
the following rules will, it is hoped, assist in removing this difficulty. 

First General Rule.— Whenever a word ending in ing, in Eng- 
lish, has not any object, but merely expresses the state, manner of 
being, or quality of the substantive which it modifies, as in the follow- 
ing sentence: an obliging woman; it is a verbal adjective, which 
agrees in French in gender and number with the substantive to which it 
refers : as, — an obliging woman, une femme obligeante; but if, in- 
stead of expressing the state or quality of its respective substantive, it 
denotes an action done by it: as, — a man walking, going, striking, 
thinkirig, ivishing, &c. it is then a present participle, which must never 
vary in French in its termination, whatever may be the gender and 
number of the substantive which it qualifies : as, — the plate struck the 
"wall and then came rolling back, Passiette frapp a le mur et revint en 
roulant. 

'^ Uu moment elle est gale, un moment serieuse, ■ 
Riant, pleurant, jasant, se taisant tour-a-tour, 
Enfin, c/mw^7?art/ d'humeur, mille fois en un jour." 

Destouches, le Philos. mar. I. 2. 

Second General Rule. — When a "word ending in ing, in English, 
has a direct object, it is a present participle which is indeclinable in 
French : as, — this reflection perplexing him, cette reflexion le trou- 
blant. a dove holding a letter in its beak, une colombe tenant une 
lettre dans son bee, 

" Un peuple de beautes, un peuple de vainqueurs, 
Foulant d'un pied leger les gazons et les fleurs." — Thomas. 

But if a word ending in ing has an indirect object; that is, if it be 
accompanied by one or more words depending on it, with the help of a 
preposition, as in the next sentences : a young lady shining with a 
thousand attractions; if you were to see that young person shining in 
a party by the graces of her mind ; in this case, you must consider 
whether the word ending in m^ denotes the state, manner of being, or' 
quality of the substantive to which it refers, or whether it represents it 
as performing the action which it expresses : in the first case, it is a 
verbal adjective, which must agree with its respective substantive in 



OF THE PRESENT PART. AND VERBAL ADJ. 36T 

French; whereas, in the second, it is b, present pai'ticiple which never 
varies : as, — a young lady shining with a thousand attractions, U7ie 
demoiselle brillante de mille aitraits. If you were to see that young 
person shining in a party by the graces of her mind, si vous voyiez 
cette jeune personne brillant dans une reunion par les graces de son 
esprit, &c. 

It is after the same rule that we say : — nne Jeune personne brillante 
de sante, brillante de fraicheur, a young person glowing with health 
and freshness; une femme eclatante d^attraits, eclatante de beaute, a 
woman shining with attractions and beauty ; — to express a gift of nature 
belonging to a person ; whereas we say to denote an action, — nous 
entendimes les bombes eclatant avec un horrible fracas, we heard the 
bombs bursting with a horrible noise. 

Whenever a word ending in aid, in French, is immediately preceded bj'- tne 
pronoun se, for its direct object, it is the pj-esent peo'ticip/e of a reflective verb, which 
is always indeclinable : as, — /es morfs se ranimant a la voix (VElisee, the dead 
reviving at the voice of Elisha. Des milliers d^enneinis, se Y>Tessa.nt sous nos po7'tes, 
fondent mr nos remparts, thousands of foes, forcing themselves under our gates, pour 
upon our ramparts. 

Observe. — 1. The preposition <??i is frequently used in French before 
a present participle, to denote that such participle refers to the subject 
of the preceding verb ; whereas, without that preposition, it might relate 
to its subject or object indifferently : as, — j'e Pai rencontre allant a la 
campagne, I met him going to the country ; allant may equally well 
refer to the subject or object of the preceding verb, and the sense may 
be: je Vai rencontre lorsque j'allais a la campagne, on je Pair en-' 
contre qui allait a la campagne ; but the equivocation will disappear 
by placing the preposition en before the participle, and saying : je Pai 
rencontre en allant a la campagne, I met him in going to the country; 
which is the same as — je Pai rencontre lorsque j'allais a la campagne ; 
because the use of the preposition en is to make the present participle 
refer to the subject of the verb. 

The preposition en is also used before a present patiicip/e, in several other cases, 
which can only be known by practice: as, — eti vous remerciant, thanking you or 
thanks to you, &c. 

2. The present participle can never be preceded in French by any 
other preposition than en; whenever, therefore, an English present 
participle is preceded by a preposition which is not to be construed into 
French by en, as of or from which is expressed by de ; loithoui, by 
sans ; after, by apres ; for, by pour ; &c. the present of the infinitive 
must be used in French, instead of the present participle in English : 
as, — you cannot go there without disobeying your father, vous ne pouvez 
y alter sans de'sobeir a voire pere. After having terminated my affairs, 
I . . . . apres avoir termine mes affaires, je , . . . 

3. The preposition bij, which is frequently used before a present 



368 OF THE PRESENT PART. AND VERBAL ADJ. 

p'articiple in English, is most commonly expressed in French by en, 
•with the verb likewise in the present participle : as, — we have obtained 
peace by making great sacrifices, nous avons obtenu la paix en faisant 
de grands sacrifices. 

4. When an English present participle is preceded by the article 
tJWj as — the learning of languages is difficult; it is translated into 
French by the corresponding substantive, with the definite article le, la, 
l\ or les, befijre it : as, — the learning of languages is difficult, Petude 
des langues est difficile. 

5. When an English present participle refers to a substantive or a 
pronoun going before, and this is the object of some preceding word, as 
in the next sentences : / have seen my sisters playing at cards ivitk 
him ; Alexander, at the point of death, asked his friends standing 
about him, if . . , ., &c. such participle is generally expressed in French 
by the present or imperfect of the indicative of the same verb, with the 
relative pronoun qui before it ; sometimes, also, it is construed by the 
present of the infinitive, in which case qui is not required : as, — I have 
seen my sisters playing at cards with him, j^ai vu mes soeurs qui jouaient 
aux cartes avec lui. Alexander, at the point of death, asked his friends 
standing about him, if .... , &c. Alexandre, sur le point de mourir, 
demanda a ses amis qui se tenaient aupres de lui, si , * * *, &c, I saw 
you running, je vous ai vu courir, &c. 

6. When a sentence begins by a present participle in English, as 
*^it being my intention to go and see you ; such a construction not 
being generally allowed in French, another turn must be given to the 
sentence, changing the present participle into another tense of the same 
or of another verb, according to the import of the sentence, with one of 
the conjunctions — comme, puisque, depuis que, or any other which 
may be necessary to explain the sense, before it : as, — it being my in- 
tention to go and see you, comme on puisque c^estmon intention dialler 
vous voir ; or — comme ou puisque fai intention dialler vous voir ; as 
if it were in English — si^ice it is my intention or as I have intention 
to go a7id see you, 

ESSAY LVIII. 

Your sister is a charming girl ; how obliging she is I — Is not this a convincing 

la convaincatit 
proof of the surprising effects of the loadstone ? — Froin one moment to another 

aimant V 

she is gay and serious, laughing and* crying, talking and* being silent by turns j 

in short, changing her humour a thousand times a day. — Grovelling geniuses 

cV en Rampant gt7iie 

never attain the sublime. — Does not every body respect those magistrates 

parvcjtir au 
vho, forgetting their own interest, observing the laws, protecting virtue and 



OF THE PRESENT PART. AND VERBAL ADJ, 369 

restrainiug vice, only seek the welfare of their country? — Beauty may be 
rcprimer rCont en vue que bonheur on 

compared to a flower which, blowing in* the morning, looks fresh and 

s'tpanouir avoir fair 

livel}'- all day, but which, fading towards the evening, loses its fine hues, 

vermeil journce qid se faner perdre couleur 

languishes, and droops its beautiful head. — Although this young lady is not 
langnir pencher beau 

sparkling with beauty, if you (were to see) her shining in a party by the graces 
tclatant voyiez 

of her mind, you would find in her a thousand attractions. — That little girl is 

really beaming with health and freshness. — Did we not hear afar off the 
vrainient brillant 
bombs bursting with a horrid noise ? — Thousands of enemies, forcing them- 

tclater se presser 

selves* under our gates and pouring upon our ramparts, made us cry out for"* 
/ofidre 

mercy It is not in giving ourselves up to our passions that we live happy, 

misancorde 

it is in governing them. — We learn by teaching others. — She has lost every 

On 
thing, in losing her father. — You will succeed in bringing her back* to reason, 

a ramener 

by (imposing some restraint) upon yourself, and using her kindl}-. The 

prenant en trailer avec bontt 

learning of languages is very difficult. — Clouds and fogs are formed from the 

Nuage se former 

vapours arising from the earth and waters. — I have seen a dove carrying a 

qui s'c/ever 
letter in its beak. — She was on the point of yielding, when, suddenly calling 

ceder se rappeier 

her virtue to* her* mind*, she upbraided herself with* her weakness. — You 

se reprocher 
cannot go there without disobeying your father. — Were they not hanged for 

desobeir 
having fired at the king ? — I have seen my sister playing at cards with him, 

sirr 
which has made me conclude that we frequently act from motives arising 
ce qui par des qui venir 

from present circumstances. — Did I not see you running and playing all together ? 

— Finding myself much better now, and it being my intention to go and* 

que ff 

see you very soon, I advise you not to * cross the sea (in the) middle of 
^ ^ ^ bientot conseiller de traverser au 

winter, to come into a town where misery and desolation reign. 
pour ^ 3 4 ^regner 



R 3 



370 OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 

LESSON LIX. 

2. or THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 

Cases in which the past participle is declinable and indeclinable. 

First General Rule. — Whenever the past participle* of a verb is 
employed adjectively to modify a substantive in French, it agrees with 
it in gender and number like an adjective : as, — un livre bien ecrit, a 
book well written. Une lettre mal ecrite^ a letter badly written. Que 
de villes detruites J how many towns destroyed ! Que de lauriers 
cueillis ! how many laurels gathered ! 

'' Que de remparts dttruits ! que de villes forcees ! 
Que de moissons de gloh-e^ en courant amasstes P' — Boileau. 

" The participles attendu, vu, suppose, excepte, y compris, ci- joint, 
ci-inclus, must be excepted, as they are indeclinable when they precede 
the substantives to which they refer, being then considered as preposi- 
tions : as, — attendu les evenemens, considering the events. Vu les 
faits, seeing the facts. Suppose les cir Constances, the circumstances 
being supposed. Excepte elle et moi, except her and me. // a quatre 
rnaisons, y compris sa maison de campagne, he has four houses, his 
country-seat included. Vous trouverez ci-joint, ci-inclus, deux 
lettres, you will find two letters here enclosed ; but when they follow 
their respective substantives, they then agree with them in gender and 
number according to the general rule : as, — des evenemens attendus, 
events expected. Des faits vus, facts seen. Telle circonstance sup- 
posee, such a circumstance supposed. Vous et moi exceptes, you and 
I excepted. Sa maison de campagne y comprise, his country-house 
included. Vous trouverez mes deux lettres ci-jointes, ci-incluses, 
you will find my two letters here enclosed. 

Second General Rule. — -Whenever the past participle of a verb 
is preceded by any tense of the verbs — etre, sembler, para'itre, it agrees 
in French in gender and number with its nominative, although, when 
sembler and para7tre are used in their own compound tenses, their past 
participles remain indeclinable, on account of being then preceded by the 
difierent tenses of avoir : as, — elle est tres-occvvEE, she is very busy. 
Elles n'ont pas et'e si occupees depuis long-temps, they have not been 
so much engaged for a long time. Nous voila enfin arrives, we are 
at last amved. Elle semble ou elle parait affligee, she seems 
afflicted. Elles m^ont paru bien changees, they appeared to me much 
altered. Vous a-t-elle paru aussi grandie qu''on le dit? did she 
seem to you as much grown as they say ? 

" O toi qui vois la honte ou je suis descendue, 
Implacable Venus, suis-je assez con/ondue f — Rac. act. Ill, sc. 2. 

* Et'el s the only past participle in the FreiTch language which never changes its 
termination. 



OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 311. 

But when the past participle of a verb is preceded by any tense of 
the verb avoir, it never agrees with its nominative : as, — ils ont lu la' 
gazette, they have read the gazette. Elle n^a pas ecrit sa lettre, she 
has not written her letter. Avaient-elles fini leur ouvrage ? had they 
finished their work ? &c. 

It must be observed that, in the compound tenses of reflective verbs, e/re being 
used instead of avoi?^, the past participle does not agree with its subject or nomi- 
native, but with its object, as will be hereafter explained under the Agreement of the 
past participle with its object in reflective verbs. 

Third General Rule. — Whenever the past participle of an active 
verb, or of a neuter verb used actively, is preceded by its direct object 
in French,* in a compound tense formed with a tense of avoir, it agrees 
with it in gender and number, whether the person of the verb avoir 
which is employed be preceded or followed by its subject or nominative : 
as, — the ladies whom I have seen, les dames que fai vues. The vic- 
tories which he has gained, les victoires qu'il a remporte'es. The 
dangers which he has run, les dangers qu'il a courus. The troubles 
which that affair has cost me, les peines que m^a coutees cette affaire. 
The English language which he has spoken so well, la langue Aiiglaisc 
quHl a si bien parlee. The pains which his education has cost me, 
les soins que m'ct coutes son education. They have not given it to 
me, ils ne me Pont pas donnee ; speaking of a watch* 

'< O mon fils, que de pleurs ton destin m'a coutes ."' 

* The direct object which precedes the past participle of a verb in a compound 
tense, in French, is either one of the personal pronouns — me, ie, se, nous, voi/s, 
le, la or /es, or que preceded by a substantive or a pronoun, or sometimes a sub- 
stantive preceded b)' quel, quelle, quels or quelles ? (which or what ?) combien de ? or 
que de ? (how much ? how many P) : as, — je les ai vus, I have seen them. La 
DEMOISELLE QUE fai aimte, the young lady whom I have loved. Combien de 
SERVICES ne vous ai-Je pas rendi/s? how many services have I not rendered you? 
quelle reponse fa-t-onfaite ? what answer have they given thee ? 

Whenever the pronoun le or /' is used before the past participle of a verb in a 
compound tense, to represent, not the preceding substantive or pronoun, but an 
adjective or a verb understood, which modifies it, or even the whole or part of a. 
sentence, the participle remains indeclinable, that is, is written in the singular 
masculine, whatever may be the gender and number of the substantive or pronoun 
going before: as, — votre victoire est plus grande que vous 7ie Yavez cru, and not 
crue, — your victory is greater than you imagined. Elle n'est pas si belle quej'e Vavais 
IMAGINE, and not imagines, she is not so handsome as I had fancied ; because the 
pronoun f, employed in these sentences, does not represent the substantive victoire, 
or the pronoun elle, which, precedes, but the expression qu 'elle l'etait, which is 
understood ; and, indeed, the above sentences are equivalent to these : voire victoire 
est plus grande que vous n'avez cru qu'elle l'etait; elle 7i''est pas si belle que favais 
imagine qu^elle Petait. 

When the pronoun en precedes also the past participle of a verb in a compound 
tense, either as its immediate or indirect object, it never has any influence on the 
participle: as,— ;;''en ai cueilli, I have gathered some (speaking of apples). Les deux 
lettres que fen ai regues, the two letters I have received thence, or from him or 
them. 



372 OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 

But when the past participle of a verb, instead of being preceded by 
its direct object, is followed by it, or when it is preceded by its indirect 
object, in either case it remains indeclinable : as, — she has received your 
letters, elle a recu vos lettres. We have cultivated our fields, nous 
avons cultive 7ios champs. She has spoken the English language, elle 
a parle la langue Anglaise. That affair has given me much trouble, 
cette affaire rri'a coute Men des demarches. The thing which you have 
mentioned to me this morning, la chose dont vous m^avez parle ce 
matin, &c. 

Observe. — 1. When que, preceding the past participle of a verb, re- 
presents an indirect instead of a direct object, which is the case when 
it can be changed into lequel, laquelle, lesquels or lesquelles, preceded 
by a preposition, the participle remains indeclinable, that is, is written 
in the masculine singular, whatever may be the gender and number of 
the substantive preceding : as, — les momens qu^il a souffert, the 
moments during which he suffered. Les jours qit^il a parle, the days 
when he spoke. Les cinq heures quHl a dormi, the five hours he has 
slept, &c. In these examples, the participles souffert, parle, and 
dormi, are invariable, because the que preceding them represents an 
indirect object, as it can be changed into pendant lesquels and dans 
lesquels: thus — les momens pendant lesquels il a souffert ; les jours 
dans lesquels il a parle; les cinq heures pendant lesquelles il a. 
dormi ; for we can neither suffer moments, speak days, nor sleep hours ; 
but we suffer during moments, we speak in days, and sleep for hours. 

2. When the past participle of a verb is preceded by the third person 
singular of a tense of avoir, and this is employed impersonally : as, — 
les chaleurs qu^il a fait cet He, the heat there has been this summer. 
Les grands vents qu'*\\ a fait Phiver dernier, the high winds which 
blew last v/inter. La belle journee qu^'A a fait hier I the fine day it 
was yesterday ! la grande inondation qu^il y a eu cet hiver, the great 
inundation there has been this winter; the past participle never varies,, 
being always written in the masculine singular, as above ; because, in 
such a case, not being taken in an active sense, it has not any direct 
object. In the preceding examples, for instance,— /e^ chaleurs qu^il, 
la grande inondation qu^il, &c. are by no means the direct objects of 
the participles Jait and cu, as it is not spoken of any heat made nor of 
any inundation had by any body, which would be ridiculous ; but these 
participles merely show the existence of the thing mentioned, and the 
que is not governed by any verb. 

Fourth General Rule. — Whenever the past participle of a re- 
flective verb is preceded by its direct object in a compound tense, and 
this object is either one of the personal pronouns me, te, se, 7ious, 
vous, which always accompany these verbs, or some other word, the 
past participle agrees with it in gender and number, and not with its 
subject: as, — ils se sont repentis, they have repented. Elle &''est 
woquEE do lui, she has laughed at him. Files se sont enfuies, they 



OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 373 

have fled. Nous nous en etions Men doutes, we had suspected it* 
S'en sont-ils plaints? have they complained of it? les droits qv^ih 
se sont arroge's, the rights which they have arrogated to themselves. 
Les injures qv^ils se sont dites, the names which they have called 
each other ; in which examples the participles repentis, moquee, enfuies, 
doutes, plaints J arroges, dites, agree with their direct objects — se, nous, 
droits que, injures que, which precede, and not with their subjects — ils, 
elle, elles, and nous. 

But when the past participle of a reflective verb is followed by 
its direct object, the personal pronouns me, ie, se, nous, vous, which 
precede, representing an indirect object, the participle remains inde- 
clinable, that is, is written in the masculine singular, because it can 
never agree with its indirect object, neither can it accord with its 
subject in these verbs, since the different tenses of etre are employed 
instead of those of avoir : as, — ils se sont dit mille injures, they have 
called each other a thousand names. Elle s'est imagine cela, she has 
fancied that ; which sentences are equivalent to these — ils ont dit mille 
injures a sot ; elle a imagine cela en soi. 

The nine following reflective verbs — se plaire, se complaire, se de- 
plaire, se rire, se sourire, se parler, se succeder, se nuire, s^cntre- 
nuire, though not followed by a direct object, have likewise their past 
participle indeclinable in their compound tenses, because, being formed 
from neuter verbs which caiuiot be used in an active sense, the 
personal pronouns me, tc, se, nous, vous, which precede them, re- 
present an indirect object, with which the participle can never agree : 
as, — ils SE sont nui, they have injured each other. Elles se sont 
PARLE, they have spoken to one another. Ils se seraient succede, 
they would have succeeded each other ; which sentences are equivalent 
to these — ils ont nui a soi ; elles ont parle Tune ^ I'autre; ils auraient 
succede I'un a I'autre. 

General Observations. — L Whenever the past participle of a 
verb, being used with the different tenses of avoir in a compound tense, 
is preceded by its direct object, and foUow^ed by a verb in the present of 
the infinitive, which has no other direct object, particular attention must 
be paid to ascertain whether the object which precedes the participle is 
its own object or that of the following verb * ; if the former, the participle 

'•' An easy method to ascertain whether the direct object, by which the past parti- 
ciple of a verb is preceded in sentences like the above, is the object of the participle 
or that of the following verb, is to ask the questions — qui ? (who ?) qui est-ce qtie 9 
(whom?) with reference to persons; and qu' est-ce que? quoi? (what?) with re- 
ference to things. When the answer brings the direct object immediately after the 
participle, it is a proof that such is its object, and consequently the participle agrees 
with it ; but when the answer brings the direct object after the next verb, it is then 
the object of the verb, and the participle remains indeclinable : for instance, in the 
above examples, — '^ je les ai laisses quereller^'' I left them quarrelling; if you ask, 
qui est-ce que j'ai Inisst quereller ? whom is it I left quarrelling ? answer — -fai laissti 
Eux, I left them; the direct object eitx, coming immediately after the participle 



374 OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 

agreies with it in gender and number, and if the latter, the participle' 
remains indeclinable : as, — je les ai a peine entendas pai'ler, I hardly 
heard them speak. La demoiselle que j'ai Yue dans er^ the young lady 
whom I have seen dancing. Nous Vavons laissee rire et pleurer toute 
seule, we have left her laughing and crying by herself. Je les ai 
laisses quereller, I left them quarrelling. Uimprudence que fai eue 
de parler^ my imprudence in speaking. Elle s'est chargee de lui 
ecrire, she has taken upon herself to write to him. In these examples, 
the participles agree with the direct objects by which they are preceded, 
because such are their own objects ; but in the next — je lui ai offert 
ma maison qu'elle a refuse d* accepter., I have offered her my house, which 
she has refused to accept. Je vous remercie des demarches que vous 
avez eu la bonte de faire pour moi, I thank you for the trouble which 
you have had the kindness to take for me. Je vous envoie les livres que 
vous avez paru desirer, I send you the books which you seemed to wish 
for. Les airs que j'ai entendu chanter, the songs which I heard sung; 
the participles remain indeclinable, because the direct objects by which 
they are preceded, are not their own objects, but those of the following 
verbs : the subjects spoken of in these sentences being the accepting a 
house, taking steps, wishing for books, singing songs, and not refusing 
a house, having steps, seeming books, hearing songs. 

If the infinitive following the past participle should be accompanied 
by another direct object besides that which precedes the participle, in 
this case the participle would be preceded by its own object, and would 
necessarily agree with it : as, — je les ai laisses manger mes fruits, I let 
them eat my fruit. 

2. When a past participle, used in a compound tense, is preceded by 
a direct object, and immediately followed by the conjunction que and a 
verb either in the indicative, conditional, or subjunctive mood : as, — les 
succes que vous avez pretendu que y'oBTiENDRAis, the success which' 
you pretended I should obtain. La lepon que vous avez voulu que 
y'ETUDiASSE, the lesson which you wished me to study; the participle 
never varies, because the direct object by which it is preceded is not 
its own object, but that of the following verb. In the examples just 
quoted, for instance, — les succes que, la lepon que, are not the objects 
of the participles pre/en(iw, voulu, but of the following verbs obtiendrais, 
etudiasse. 

3. When the past participe fait is used in a compound tense, and is 
immediately followed by another verb in the present of the infinitive, - 
with which it forms an indivisible sense, it never agrees with the direct 

laisse, is its object, and the participle agrees with it ; but in this, — " les livres que 
vous avez faru desirer^^ the books which you seemed to wish for ; qu^est-ce que vous 
avez faru ^eszVer, what is it you seemed to wish for ? answeii — vous avez paru dtsirer 
LES LIVRES, you Seemed to wish for the books ; the direct object les livres, coming 
immediately after the verb clesirer, is its object, and, for this reason, the participle 
remains indeclinable. 



OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 375 

object preceding, as this is the ohject of the following verb ; but it is 
■written in the masculine singular ; as, — une effrayante voix s^est alors 
fait entendre^ a terrific voice was then heard. II les a fait fuir, he 
made them fly. J^ai pali du dessein qui les a fait sortir, I turned pale 
at the thought of the design for which they went out. 

4. When the past participles du, voulu, and pu, are used in a com- 
pound tense, and are preceded by a direct object which is not their ow^n 
object, but that of a following verb understood, they also never agree 
with it : as, — je lui at fait ioutes les caresses que fai du, that is — 
que fai du lui faire, I caressed her as I ought. // a obtenu touies 
les graces quHl a voulu, that is — quHl a voulu obtenir, he has ob- 
tained all the favours he wished for. Je lui ai rendu tous les services 
que fai TV, that is — que fai pu lui rendre, I rendered him all the 
services I could, &c. In these examples, the direct objects — ioutes les 
caresses que, toutes les graces que, tous les services que, being evi- 
dently the objects of the verbs faire, obtenir, and rendre, w^hich are 
understood, the participles du, voulu, and pu, remain indeclinable. 

But if the direct objects, by which the participles du and voulu 
may be preceded, should _be their own objects, there being no other 
verb understood, in this case du and voulii should agree with them : 
as, — elle ni'a toujours paye les sommes qii'elle rn^a dues, she always 
paid me the sums which she owed me. // veut fortement ioutes les 
choses qu'il a une fois voulues, he ardently wishes for the things 
which he once desired. 

ESSAY LIX. 

How many towns destroyed would have been saved, had the conqueror heen 

vai7iqffeifr 
more humane! — Battles won, and laurels gathered, when so much blood is* 

au prix de 
shed*, are never* remembered but with a feeling of horror, which makes 
on ne se rajypeler qii' 

one* shudder. Considering the present circumstances, nothing more advan- 

Vti 0)1 

tageous could be expected. Except you and her they were all sick. We 

ma lade 
have sold all our horses, my little pony excepted. — You will find Irere enclosed 

bidet 
two letters, which (I shall be obliged to you) to give to Miss W**. — They 

je vous prie de votiloir bien remettre 
all went to Italy, she and I excepted. — Are the three bills of exchange here en- 
closed to be paid at Mr. C.'s in the Strand ? — We have been so engaged lately, 

payable chez occiipe 

that it has been impossible for * me to study my French lessons.— —Tlie wicked 

d' 

are always tormented by the remorse of their own conscience. Is MissP** 

remords pi. 



376 OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 

returned from the country ? No, sir ; she will return to-morrow. — The young 

ladies are gone to their dancing and riding lessons. — We have dined sooner to- 

equitation 
day than usual. — We are at last arrived. — They have chosen a very unfavourable 

opportunity. — I have not seen the pictures which you have mentioned to me. 

purler 
Miss A* * and Miss G * * are so much altered, that I did not know them again 

reconiiailre 

at first. The dangers which he has run do him much honour. — ■ — I have 

(Tahord 

spoken six languages to-day, namely — French, Italian, English, German, 

savoxr 

Spanish and Dutch. Far from being thankful to his parents for the 

reconnaissant envers des 

pains and troubles of all kind, which his education has cost them, he treats 

soin espece 
them with contempt and shuns them. The five hours he has slept this 

morning are the only rest which he has had for a fortnight. What a de- 

depuis 
lightful day it was yesterday ! The abundant rains which have fallen this 

summer have entirely spoiled the harvest. Do you recollect the high winds 

which blew, and the great overflow of Avater which there Avas in the be- 

debordement eaux pi. 
ginning of the year ? — The letters which we have received by the mail to-day 

malle 
confirm the capitulation of Moscow. — That unfortunate bankruptcy has reduced 

us a little. — I have attentively read the papers which you have sent me about 

toiichant 

the affair which I had proposed to you, and I have found that if I had under- 
taken it I should have met with obstacles which I had not foreseen. His sister 

has laughed at me during the whole passage. — W^hy have the ladies fled as 

*e sauver 
soon as they perceived me ? — Have the accounts been found right ? — Have 

se troeiver 

your sisters been much amused in his company ? No ; not very. After a 

s^amuser dans 
long and obstinate combat, they have made themselves masters of the citadel. 

se rendre 

—Have the inhabitants surrendered "i — She has turned nun. Why have you 

religieuse 
deviated from the road which you had begun to follow .? The French have 

rendered themselves famous by their courage in war. They have called each 



OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 377 

other a thousand names. — She has made away with* herself*. — I did not 

se donner la rnort 
know they had given themselves the trouble of coming on purpose for me. 

——If she has fancied that, I cannot help it. After they had spoken a long 

qu'y /aire se parler 

time, they separated without saying a single word. — They have smiled at each 

se dWe 
other. — They have injured themselves much. — It is not certain that they would 

have succeeded each other, if. . . . — I am delighted that she has taken upon * 

se charger 

herself* to write to him. We have left them quarrelling. Where are the 

de 

young ladies whom I have seen dancing ? Will you thank him for the (trouble) 

diitnarches 
which he has had the kindness to take for rae ? — The songs which I have heard 

faire 
your sister sing are very fine. — These are the presents which you have refused to 

accept. — The house which I have advised you to buy is large and well-situated. 

—It frequently happens that we commit the same, faults which we had resolved 

to avoid. — Give me the letter which I have desired you to translate into French. 

frier de 

The ladies whom I had flattered myself you would see are unfortunately 

gone to America. — A terrific voice has been heard, which has thrown us 
•pariir pour 

all into the greatest consternation. — He has shomi so much boldness and intre- 
pidity, that he has made them all run away. — Has she not rendered you all the 

s'enfitir 
services she could .^ — We have shown them all the attention we could. — Tell 

liim he should have written to me as he had promised. How many days and 

nights have 1 not passed by your side, when you were ill ! — What answer have 

a 
they made to you ? — The loss is not so great as I should have thought. — She is 

not so handsome as I had fancied. 

s'imaciiier. 



3T8 



PART THE FOURTH. 



OF PROSODY, 



LESSON LX. 

Prosody y being the art of giving to each syllable its proper pronun^- 
ciation, consists of two parts : the first comprises accent^ quantity^ 
Emphasis f pause and tone ; and the second the laws of versification. 

1. Of Accent. 

Accent may be defined : — " the different inflections and modukdions- 
of the voice that are used to pronounce the ivords of a language 
with due propriety ;'^ or, in other words, " Accent is the raising or 
lowering of the voice on particular syllables." Every people, every 
nation, every province, and the inhabitants of almost every town differ 
from each other in their language ; not only because they use different 
expressions to explain their ideas ; but also because they have a different 
manner of articulating and pronouncing the words. These difierent 
modulations, peculiar to each people, are what the Abbe d^ Olivet well 
terms the national accent. 

To speak a living language with propriety and elegance, it is neces- 
sary to have the same accent or the same inflection of the voice as those 
persons of the capital, who move in the best society ; and, when it is 
said that to speak French well one must not have any accent, it is to be 
understood that one must not have either the Italian or Norman, or any 
other foreign or peculiar accent, except tbe accent used in the first circles 
in the French metropolis. 

2. Of Quantity. 

Quantity signifies an emission of the voice of a long or short dura- 
tion; or the time employed in the pronunciation of a syllable. 

A syllable is long, when we dwell on the vowel in it and slowly join it 
in pronunciation with the following letters : as, — arret, barre, rose. 

A syllable is short, when the vowel in it is quickly joined in pronun- 
ciation to the succeeding consonant : as, — barque, berceau. 

A long syllable generally requires double the time of a short one in 



DF PROSODY. 379 

pronouncing it : thus — base and nez should be pronounced as slowly 
again as bdrhe and pot. 

General Rules on Quantity. 

1. Every syllable, the last vowel of which is followed by any other 
consonant than s or z is short : as, — fil, pot, sac, sel. 

2. Every masculine syllable, whether long or short in the singular, is 
always long in the plural : as, — des pots, des sacs, des sets. 

3. Every mascuhne substantive in the singular number, the final letter 
of which is one of the characteristics of tlie plural, has its last syllable 
long : as, — printemps, nez. 

4. The last syllable of a word is short, when it is terminated with a 
liquid I : as, — Avril, eventail, fauteuil. 

5. When a syllable, being terminated with m or n, is immediately 
followed, in the succeeding syllable, by any other consonant than m or 
n, the syllable terminated with m or n is always long : as, — j'dnibe, 
jdmbon, tambour, tomber. 

6. When m or ?i is doubled in a word', the syllable which is termi- 
nated with the first m or n is short, and the nasal sound disappears : as, 
^-epigramme, personne. 

7. Every syllable terminated with r is short, when immediately fol- 
lowed, in the same word, by another syllable beginning with any other 
consonant than r : as, — bdrbe, barque, berceau, infirme, ordre, 

8. Every syllable in which two r's immediately succeed each other, 
whatever may be the vowel which precedes them, is always long, if 
both the r's form an indivisible soimd : as, arret, bdrre, bizarre, 
tonnerre. 

9. When s ox z,dX the beginning of a syllable, is followed by an e 
mute, and preceded by any other vowel than e mute, the vowel going 
before is long : as, — base, beiise, diocese, extase, franchise, rose. 

But if s or z, at the beginning of a syllable, should be immediately 
followed by any other vowel than e mute, and if such syllable should be 
long of itself, it would preserve its quantity, but the preceding syllable 
would frequently become short : as, — il s'extasie. 

10. When r or s, terminating a syllable, is immediately preceded by. 
a vowel and followed by any other consonant than r or s in the begin- 
ning of the next syllable, the syllable concluded by r or s is always 
short : as, — dstre, barbe, berceau, f line ste, infirme, masque, ordre. 

11. Every word ending with an e mitte, immediately preceded by 
another vowel, has the vowel preceding the e mute long : as, — armee, 
joie^joue, nue, rue. 

12. Every syllable terminated with a vowel, and immediately followed 
by any other vowel than e mute in the beginning of the succeeding 
syllable in the same Vv'Ord, is short : — as, — action, cree, doue, ha'ir. 

Observe. — It is absolutely necessary for the English student to pay 
particular attention to the above, rules on quantity, as on them fre-. 



380 



OP PROSODY. 



quently depends the sense which is to be affixed to the words. There 
are several expressions in the French language in which the sounds are 
nearly similar, but which vary in their signification, according as some 
of their vowels are pronounced long or short ; and, if proper care be not 
taken in uttering them, a very different sense may be expressed from 
what is intended. 

To assist in removing this difficulty, I have subjoined a list of the 
principal French Homonymes, (or words having a different sense 
according as they are pronounced long or short,) that are most generally 
used in familiar conversation. > 



A list of the French Homonymes ivhich are most generally used in- 
familiar discourse. 



Acre, 

Alene, 
Avant, 
Bailler, 
Bat, 

Bete, 

Beaute, 

Boite, 

Bond, 

Chair, 

Clair, e. 

Corps, 

Cote, 

Cours, 

Craintj (il ou elle,) 

dure, 

Degoute, (il ou eWe, 

Dont, 

Faite, 

Fete, 

Faix, 

FaTs, (je.) 

Fais, (tu,) 

Foret, 



sour, sharp, 
awl. 
hefore, 

to gape, to yawn, 
pack-saddle, 
beast, 
beauty, 
box. 

rebound, gambol. 
Jlesh. 
clear, 
body. 

rib, coast, hillock, 
course, airing-place, 
he or she fears, 
to bake, to cook. 
,) he or she disgusts, 
of whom or of which, 
top, pinnacle, 
festival, 
burden, weight, 
I make, 
thou makest. 
forest. 



Fumes, (nous,) we were. 

Goute, (je,) / taste. 

GoiiteSj (tu,) thou fastest. 

Goute, (il ou elle,) he or she tastes. 



Grave, 

Hale, 
Hote, 
Jals, 
Jefine, 



grave. 

sun-burning^ drying 

wind, 
host, guest. 

jet, black, 

fast, fasting. 



Acre, 

Haleine, 

Avent, 

Bailler, 

Bat, (il ou elle,) 

Bette, 

Botte, 

Boite, (il ou elle,) 

Bon, 

Cher, 

Clerc, 

Cor, 

Cote, 

Cour, 

Crin, 

CuTr, 

Degoutte,(il ou elle 

Don, 

\ Faite, 

^Fait, (il ou elle,) 

Foret, 
TFume, (je,) 
< Fumes, (tu,) 
f Fume, (il ou elle,) 



\ 



Goiitte, 

r Grave, (je,) 
< Graves, (tu,) 
(^ Grave, (il ou elle,) 

\ Halle, 

Hotte, 
< Jet, 
( Jet d'eau, 

Jeiine, 



acre, 
breath, 
advent, 
to give. 

he or she beats, 
beet. 

having boots on. 
he ox she limps, 
good, 
dear, 
clerk. 

corn, French horn, 
number, quota, 
court, court-yard, 
horse-hair, 
leather. 
,) he or she or it drops 
gift, present. 

made, done. 



he or she makes. 

gimlet. 
1 smoke, 
thou smokest. 
he or she smokes, 

drop, 

I engrave, 
thou engravest. 
he or she engraves. 

market-hall. 

hamper, 
spng. 

waterspout, 
young. 



OF PROSODY. 



Legs, 


legacy. 


/Laid, 
iLatt, 


ugly, 
milk. 


Laisse, (je,) 


Heave. 


1 




Laisses, (tu,) 


thou leavest. 


> Laisse, 


leash. 


Laisse, (il ou elle,) 


he or she leaves. 


J 




Maitre, 


master. 


Mettre, 


to put. 


Male, 


viale. 


Malle, 


trunk, mail. 


Matin, 


mastiff. 


Matin, 


m.orning. 


Mois, 


month. 


Moi, 


I, me. 


Mont, 


mount, hill. 


Mon, 


my. 


Mor, inure, 


ripe. 


Mur, 


wall. 


Nait,(ilo?«elle,) 


he ox she is born. 


}Net, 


neat. 


N'est, (il ou elle,) 


he or she or it is not. 


Pate, 


paste, doifgh. 


Patto, 


paw. 


Paume, 


tennis, palm of the 
hand. 


S Pomme, ' 


apple. ^ 


Pecher, 


peach-tree, ox tojish. 


Pecher, 


to sin. 


Pene, 


bolt of a lock. 


Peine, 


pain, trouble. 


Plalue, 


j)lain. 


Heine, 


{fern. of^\Qh\)full, 


Rot, 


roasted meat. 


Rot, 


eructation. 


Sas, 


sieve. 


JSa, 


his or her. 

here, that, come on. 


Saut, 


leap, jump. 


Sot, 


foolish, silly. 






C Sein, 


breast, bosom. 


Saint, 


holy. 


< Seing, 


signature. 






C Ceint, 


girded. 


Saine, (/e;n. o/sain 


^sound, wholesome. 


7 




Scene, 


scene. 


SSeine, (la,) 


the Seine, (i-iver). 


Cene, 


Lord's supper. 


i 








(Tette, (je,) 


J suck. 


Tete, 


head. 


-{ Tettes, (tu,) 


thou suckest. 






(Tette, (il ou elle,) 


he or she sucks. 


Tache. 


task. 


Tache, 


stain, spot. 


Ties, 


very. 


Trait, 


stroke, dart. 


Valne, 


(^fem. o/*vain) vain. 


Veine, 


vein. 


Ver, 


worm. 


>Vert, 




Vers, 
Vers, 


towards, 
verse. 


green. 


Verre, 


glass. 




VivTes, 


victuals. 


Vivre, 


to live. 


VoTx, 


voice. 


Volt, (il ou elle,) 


he or she iees. 


Voler, 


to rob, to steal. 


Voler, 


tofy. 



3. Of Emphasis, 

By emphasis is meant a stronger and fuller sound of the voice, by 
which we distinguish some word or words, on which we wish to lay a 
particular stress, and to show how they affect the rest of the sentence. 
Sometimes the emphatic words must be distinguished by a particular 
tone of the voice, as well as by a greater stress. 

4. Of Pauses. 
Pauses or 7'esis, in speaking and reading, are a total cessation of the 
voice, during a perceptible, and, in many cases, a measurable space of 
time. 



382 OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 

5. Of Tones. 

Tones are different both from emphasis and pauses. They consist in 
the modulation of the voice, the notes, or variations of sound which we 
employ in the expression of our sentiments. 



OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 



As French literature has been particularly illustrated by poetical 
composition, the most beautiful works having been written in poetry by 
the most gifted of men, it seems necessary to give the student some idea 
of that part of grammar, which explains the principles of versifica- 
tion, that, in reading poetry, he may be the better able to judge of 
the correctness and beauties of this lively exhibition of nature and 
sentiment. 
" Versification is the art of making verses. 

Verses are a certain number of words measured and cadenced, 
according to fixed and determined rules. 

The rules of French versification imply : 1st. The number of syllables 
entering into verses. 2. The caesura or hemistic which marks a pause 
in them. 3. The rhyme at the end of verses. 4. The words which 
cannot be admitted into poetical composition. 5. The licenses allowed 
in poetry. 6. The verses belonging to the different sorts of poetry, and 
their combinations. 

This treatise will be concluded by a few rules . necessary to be ob- 
served in the composition of French verses, and a few remarks on the 
manner of reading French poetry. 

1. Of the number of syllables in verses. 

It is by the number of syllables that the different sorts of French 
verses are distinguished. There are verses of twelve^ ten, eight, seveUy 
six, five, four, three, two, syllables, and even of one syllable. 

As the English scholar may frequently find some difficulty in making out a 
sufficient number of syllables in the lines of French poetry, it may be necessary 
to inform him that, in scanning verses, several syllables that are mute or are but 
faintly sounded in prose, are restored to their full pronunciation : for instance, the 
following line — 

'< La rage de tes flots expire sur tes bords." 

must be scanned — 

La xa.-ge de tes fiots ex-pi-re sur tes bords. 

But when a word ends with e mute, in the body of a verse, and is followed by" 
another word beginning with a vowel or h mute, there is an e/isiofi, and the two 
syllables form but one : as, — 

" Mer terrible en ton lit quelle main te resserre ?" 

is scanned— 

Mer ter-vi-6/en ton lit quel-le main te res-serre ? " 



OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 383 

The last syllable of /€?nmine verses, that is, of verses terminated with e mute, 
either by itself, as in — TERRe; or followed by*, as in globe* y or by w^, as in — t/s 
cHANieni ; is never reckoned in the measure of the verse, as it will be hereafter 
explained. 

1. Verses of twelve syllables. 

" On voit a I'ho-ri-zon, de deux points op-po-ses, 
Des nu-a-ges mon-ter dans les airs em-bra-ses." 

Potme des Saisons, chant 2. 

The above verses are called Alexandrine^ in French — Alexandrins ; 
because they were first invented or used by a poet named Alexander. 
They are also termed heroic, as they are chiefly employed in what is 
st3-led heroic poetry, such as tragedies, epic poems, &c. In French 
they may simply be called grands vers. 

2. Verses often syllables. 

'• Tout est fu-mee, et tout nous fait sen-tir 
Ce grand ne-ant qui va nous en-glou-tir." — Foltcdre. 

3. Verses of eight syllables. 

"■ Sou-vent j'ai vu dans les ci-tes, 
Par-mi nos su-per-bes beau-tes, &c." — Constant Dubos. 

4. Verses of seven syllables. 

" Pas un seul pe-tit mor-ceau 
De mou-che ou de ver-mis-seau."' — La Fontaine. 

5. Verses of six syllables. 

•' Me-me en mou-rant la rose 
Gar-de sa dou-ce o-deur, &c." — De la Chabeaussiere. 

6. Verses of five syllables. 

•■• Dans ces pres fleu-ris 
Qu'ar-ro-se la Seine, 
Cher-chez qui vous mene, 
Mes che-res bre-bis." — Madame Deshoulieres. 

7. Verses of four syllables. 

"' Rien n'est si beau 
Que mou ha-meau." — Bernard. 

8. Verses of three syllables. 

" BeWe rose 
Que j'ar-rose, &c." — Hommage a la Rose. 

9. Verses of two syllables. 

'* Le teint frais, et I'incarnat 

De Rose." — Champmorin — Rosati d^ Arras. 



384 OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 

10. Verses of one syllable. 

" Et Ton voit des commis. 
Mis 
Comme des princes, 
Qui jadis sont venus 

Nus ^ 
De leurs provinces." — Panard. 

2, OF C^SURA AND HEMISTIC. 

Casura is a Latin word which is used to denote the place where a 
pause must be made in reading verses. 

Hemistic is derived from the Greek, and signifies half a verse. 

Each line of Alexandrine poetry is divided into two hemistics, and the 
caesura or pause takes place at the conclusion of the first, as recom- 
mended by Boileau in the following lines :— - 

^' Que toujours dans vos vers, — le sens coupant les mots, 
Suspende Themistiche, — en marque le repos." 

In verses often syllables, the csesura, which is always after the fourth 
syllable, divides the verse into two unequal hemistics, the one of four, 
and the other of six syllables : as — 

" Charmante paix — delices de la terre." 

In the construction of the verse, those words, between which there is 
a necessary connexion, must not be divided for the cj3esura. 

The first hemistic of a verse may be terminated with an e mute, pro- 
vided the second hemistic begins with a vowel, because then the two 
vowels are united by an elision. The csesura should seldom be made 
immediately after a pronoun. 

3. OF RHYME. 

Rhyme is the correspondence of sound in the termination of two 
words at the end of two verses. 

Rhyme is either masculine or feminine. 

Masculine rhyme is that of words which end with any other termina- 
tion than e mute, either by itself or followed by s or nt : as, — 

'^ Quels temoins eclatans devaiit moi rassembles ! 
Repondez, cieux et mers ; et vous, terre, parlez ! 

O Cieux ! que de grandeur et que de majeste ! 
J'y reconnais un maitre a qui rien n'a coCite. 

Toi qu'annonce I'aurore, admirable flambeau, 
Astre toujours le meme, astre toujours nouveau, 

Tous les jours je t'attends; tu reviens tous les jours. 
Est-ce moi qui t'appelle et qui regie ton cours ?" 

Racine. Potme de la Relighu. 



OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 385 

Feminine rhyme is that of words ending with e mute, either by 
itself, as in — lumierc ; or followed by s in the plural of nouns, as in — 
ETOiLe^ ; or by nt, in the third persons plural of verbs, as- in — Us 
FOTjRMiLLen^; 

" Globe resplendissant, ocean de lumiere, 
De vie et dc chaleur source immense et premiere, &c." — Le Mierre^ 

" Quel bras peut vous suspendre, innombrables etoile* ? 
Nuit brillante, dis-nous qui t'a donne tes voile* ?" 

Racine. Potme de la Religion. 

C'est peu qu'en un ouvrapje, ou les fautes fourmille/?^, 
Des traits d'esprit semes de temps en temps petillew/. 

In verses the rhyme of which is feminine, and which, for that reason, 
are called /emmme verses, the e mute, at the end of the last word iii 
the verse, is so little sounded that it is scarcely heard ; the syllable, 
therefore, in which it comes, is not reckoned in the measure of the 
verse. 

The termination aient or oient, in the imperfect and conditional of 
verbs, having the sound of an open e, forms a masculine rhyme : as, — 

<* Du temps que les betes parlo/ew^, 
Les lions entre autres \ou\aient 
£tre admis dans notre alliance." — La Fontaine. 

Particular attention must be paid not to use more than two rhymes of 
the same termination, following each other; and taste and harmony 
require that the same should not be employed again within a less interval 
than six or more lines. 

Difference between rich and sufficient rhymes. 

Rhyme, whether masculine or feminine, is termed — ricli or simply 
sufficient. 

Rich rhyme is that which is formed by two words, the last sounds of 
which are perfectly similar, and, as much as possible, represented by the 
same letters, as in the following verses : — 

" Helas 1 Je n'ai point vu ce sejour enc/<f/;?/e, 
Ces beaux lievix ou Virgile a tant de fois chanttP 

Dklille. Les JardinSy chant 2. 

" Soleil, par tes rayons I'univers iecondi, 
Devant toi s'embellit; de splendeur inondc." — Le Mierre. 

Sufficient rhyme is that which, although not having so rigorous a 
resemblance of sound and orthography, is sufficient to produce on the 
ear a true consonance between the end of two verses : as — 

" Mais des traits enflammes ont silloune la niie, 
Et la foudre en grondant roule dans Vetendue.''' 

Pohne des Saisons. 
s 



38§ OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 

- Observe. — 1. The justness of the sense must never be sacrificed to 
the excellence of the rhyme, as observed by Boileau in the following 
iines; — 

" Quelque sujet qu'on traite, ou plaisant ou sublime, 
Que toujours la raison s'accorde avec la rime, &c." . 

2. The last syllable not being reckoned in feminine verses, the rhyme 
requires more care and exactness in them than in those that are 
masculine : thus — table cannot rhyme with bapteme, nor justice with 
estime. 

3. The same word cannot be used in the same sense, at the end of 
two verses, for the rhyme ; neither can a compound word rhyme with 
tbat of^ wliich it is compounded, nor a derivative with the word from 
which it is derived, unless they should be employed in a different sense: 
thus — juste and injuste, amis and ennemis^ prudence and imprudence, 
lustre and illustre do not rhyme well together. 

But sometimes the same word, having tvvo different meanings, can be 
used to rhyme with itself, when employed in those two different signifi- 
cations, particularly in light and familiar poetry : as — 

'•' J'y brulcrai mes livres, 

Quatre bottes de foiii, cinq a six mille livres." — Racijje. 

4. Particular attention must also be paid not to make short syllables 
ihyme with long ones, nor liquid Ts with those which are not so : thus — 
jeune (young), cannot rh3'me with /^zme (fasting) ; railler (to jeer), 
with quereller (to quarrel). 

5. The two hemistics of a verse must not rhyme together, nor even, 
liave a similarity of sound, Boileau was therefore incorrect when he 
said : 

" Aux Saumaisesy7//«rs preparer des ioriures'^ 

6. The last hemistic of a verse must not rhyme with the first of 
either the preceding or of the following verse ; neither should the two 
first hemistics of two verses succeeding each other rhyme together. 

Arrangement of the rhymes together. 

French rhymes are either plates, croisees, or melees. 
1. When two masculine and two feminine rhymes succeed each other 
alternately without interruption, they are called plates : as — 

*' Le doux printemps revient, et ranime a la fois 
Les oiseaux, les zephyrs, et les fleurs et ma voix. 
Pour quel sujet nouveau dois-je monter ma lyre ? 
Ah! lorsque d'un long deuil la terre enfin respire, 
Daus les champs, dans les bois, sur les monts d'alentour, 
Quand tout rit de bouheur, d'esperauce et d'araour, &c." 

Delille. Les Jardin"!, cJiaii I, 



OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 387 

2. When a masculine verse is succeeded by two feminine verses 
rhyming together, and these are followed by a masculine verse which 
rhymes with the fost; or when after a feminine verse there are two 
masculine verses rhyming together, and then a feminine one which 
rhymes mth the first, these rhymes are term:ed croisees : as— - 

<^ Toi, dont les charmes seducteurs 
Souvent m'ont fait prendre la lyre, 
C'est le meme objet qui m'inspire. 
En chantaut la reine des fleurs. 
Helas ! mes vers sont pen de chose, 
Que n'ai-je un plus heureux talent ! 
IMais, Themire, en te regardant, 
On appreud a chanter la rose." — Roger. 

3. When masculine and feminine rhymes are mixed ad libitum, 
provided however there are never more than two masculine or two 
feminine ones following each other, they are melees : as— 

" Aimahle fleuv, sous tes heureux auspices, 
Jp braverai les outrages du temps : 
Si les beaux jours nous offrent des premices, 
L'automne aussi, Tautomue a ses delices : 
Anacreon aimait en cheveux blancs." 

Constant Dubos. Sur I'Amaranthe* 

Observe, 1. In this mixture of the rhymes, two masculine or two 
feminine verses which do not rhyme together must never be placed after 
each other. 

2. In verses with plates rhymes, if two masculine verses are suc- 
ceeded by two that are feminine, these two feminine verses must not 
rhyme with the verses preceding the two masculhie ones, as they incor- 
rectlv do in the eidit followiuG; lines of la Henriade : — 

'' Soudain Puiier se leveet demande audience ; 
Chaciin a son aspect garde un profoud silence. 
Dc^ns le temps malheureux, par le crime infeste, 
Potier fat toujours juste et pourtant respecic. 
Souvent on I'avait vu par sa male eloquence 
De leurs emportemens reprimer la licence ; 
Et conservant sur eux sa vieille autoritc, 
Lear montrer la justice avec inipunitc.'- — Voi.taire. 

3. Masculine and feminine verses succeeding each other must not 
have rhymes consonant with each other : as — 

'' Tels des antres du Nord, echappes sur la ierre, 
Precedes par les vents et suivis du io?merre, 
D'uu tourbillon de poiidre obscurcissaut les airs, 
Les orages fougueux parcourent Vunivers." 

4. Of the expressions lohich cannot be admitted into poetry. 

The following conjunctions and adverbs: c'est pourquoii pitisqiie, 

s2 



388 OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 

parce que, 'pourvu que, d^ailleurs, de maniere que, de fapon que, en 
effet, quelquefois, or any similar one, cannot be admitted into poetry ; 
because they are too prosaic, and exclusively adapted to the diction of 
oratory. 

Taste likewise excludes from the poetical style every harsh or low 
word. 

5. Of the syllables which cannot enter into a verse ; or, of the hiatus 

and elision. 

A word ending with any other vowel than e mute, cannot be followed 
by a word beginning with a vowel, on account of the disagreeable sound, 
called hiatus, which the meeting of the two vowels would produce, as 
they would not form an elision. Boileau, in the following lines, has 
particularly recommended that this should be avoided. 

" Gardez qu'une voyelle, a courir trop hatee, 
Ne soit d'une voyelle en son chemin heurtee." 

Neither is the conjunction et properly employed before a vowel : 
as — 

*' Get homme est bien a plaindre, et it ne se plaint pas." 

But a word terminated with e mute can be used before another word 
beginning with a vowel, because then they form an elision, and the two 
syllables form only one : as — 

'' La ierre a-t-elle vu ses flancs plus engraisses, 
D'un plus horrift/e amas de mourans entasses ?" 

Whenever a word ends with an e mute preceded by another vowel, 
as — aimee, punie, repue, rendue, joie, rue, joue, it can never be em- 
ployed in poetry, except before a word beginning with a vowel, because 
then it forms an elision with it : as — 

" J 'avou^ a mes amis mes plus secrets defauts. 
But w^e could not say — 

" J'avoue mes defauts, je cache mes vertus." 
H aspirated can be used in poetry after any vowel. 

6. OF LICENSES ALLOWED IN FRENCPI POETRY. 

Licenses allowed in French poetry consist : 1st. in some transpositions 
of words, or a certain manner of turning sentences. 2. In dropping 
letters at the end of a few words. 3. In using expressions which are 
not admitted into prosaic style. 

1. Of the transpositions of words. 
. Transpositions of words, otherwise called inversions, consist in 



OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 389 

placing some words of the sentence in another manner than they would 
otherwise be, should the direct and grammatical sense or order be fol- 
lowed : as — 

** Dieu fit dans ce desert descendre la sagesse." — ^Voltaire. 

" Toi-meme en ton esprit rappelle le passe. . . 
D'un incurable amour remedes impuissans !", . . — Racine. 

Words are sometimes happily placed between the auxiliary and the 
participle in a compound tense, and indirect objects elegantly precede 
the nouns or verbs on which they depend : as — 

" Ta-t-il, de tous les siens, reproche le trepas ? 
Toujours a la raison, je veux m'abandonner." 

2. Of the letters which can he dropped in some words. 

The letters which can be dropped in some words, are : 1st. the final 
s in the first person singular of the present of the indicative in the verbs 
croire, voir^ dire, avertir, which are then spelt — je croi, je voi, je di, 
j'averti, instead ofje crois, je vols, je dis, j'avertis. 2. The e, at the 
end of the word encore, thus, encor, when necessary. 

3. Of the expressions belonging to poetry. 

The expressions chiefly belonging to poetry, and which are not so well 
adapted to the prosaic style, are words having a certain nobleness or 
emphasis, which raises them above common language : as, — antique, 
for ancien ; coursier, for cheval ; le Jlanc, for le cote ; le glaive, for 
Vepee ; Vespoir, for Pesperance ; Vonde^ for Veau ; Veternel, for 
Dieu; le laheur, for le travail; les humains, les mortels, for les 
hommes ; P hymen or I'hymhnee, for le mariage ; &c. 

6. OF VERSES BELONGING TO THE DIFFERENT SORTS OF POETRY. 

The greater part of long pieces of poetry, such as epic and dramatic 
poems, elegies, eclogues, satires, epistles, are commonly written in 
verses of twelve syllables, from the beginning to the end ; and the 
verses are usually in plates rhymes. 

A single tragedy of Voltaire, (Tancrede,) is written with mixed 
rhymes ; it begins with the following verses : — 

" Genereux chevaliers, I'honneur de la Sicile, 
Qui daignez par egard, au declin de mes ans, 
Vous assembler chez moi pour punir nos tyrans, 
!Et fonder un etat triomphant et tranquille ; 
Syracuse en nos murs a gemi trop long-temps 
Des efforts avortes d'un courage inutile, &c." 

Lyric poetry is confined to particular rules; it is divided into stanzas, 
with a variable number of syllables, and the rhymes are usually crossed. 



^390 OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 

In llglit and free poetry, the number of syllables likewise varies ; but 
'the arrangement which is thought most proper is that which is adopted, 
and the rhymes are most frequently mixed. 

Crossed rhymes are therefore more particularly adapted to stanzas, 
odes, idyls, sonnets, and rondeaux. 

Mixed rhymes are used for fables, epigrams, madrigals, im- 
promptus, enigmas, inscriptions, epigraphs, epitaphs, acrostics, and 
' also stanzas and idyls. 

As these short poems have each fixed and particular rules, I shall 
now point them out, and give also rules for the distich. 

1. Of Stanzas. 

A stanza is composed of a certain number of verses, not less than 
four, and not more than ten. The verses of a stanza may be either all 
long, or all short, or mixed one with the other. 

Stanzas are either regular or irregular. They are regular, when 
they have each the same number of verses, and a similar melange 
of crossed rhymes ; and also when the long and short verses are equally 
distributed. They are irregular when this arrangement does not exist. 

In order that a French stanza may be perfect, it is necessary : 1. 
That the sense should, finish with the. last verse of each stanza. 2. That 
the last verse of a stanza should not rhyme with the first of the follow- 
ing stanza. 3. That the same rhyme should not be employed in two 
succeeding stanzas. 

A single stanza may form a little poem, which takes, according to the 
number of verses of which it is composed, the name oi quatrain, sixain, 
octave, or dizain. There are also stanzas of an unequal number of 
. verses, namely, of Jive, seven, or nine verses. 

Some trait piquant must always be reserved for the end of each 
stanza. 

A piece composed of several stanzas retains the name of stanzas, 
when the subject on which it is composed is simple, and the expressions 
are soft and natural ; and when there is no particular warmth of imagi- 
nation in the sentiments. Such are the following stanzas of Chaulieu 
on retirement : — '■ 

^^ La foule de Paris a present m'importune ; 
Les ans m'ont detrompe des maneges de cour: 
Je vols bien que j'y suis dupe de la fortune, . ■ 

Autant que je I'etais autrefois de I'amour. ■ 

" Je rends graces au cielyque I'esprit de retraite 

• Me presse, chaque jour,, d'aller bientot chercher 

Celle que mes aVeux plus sages s'etaient faite, 

<"D'ou mes folles eiTCurs avaient su m'arracher. 

" C'est lit que, jouiss.ant de mon independance, 
" Je serai mou heros, moil souverain, raon roi ;" " 

* Et de ce que jevaux la flatteuse ignorance 

Ne me laissera voir rien au-dessus de moi, &c.'* 



OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 391^ 

But when the subject is sublime, and the style grand and elevated, 
and an elevation of sentiment arising from enthusiasm is spread through 
all the piece, this takes then the name of ode and each stanza that of 
strophe : as — 

" Dans uue eclatante voute, L'univers^ a sa presence, 

II a place de ses mains Semble sortir du neant. 

Ce soleil qui, dans sa route, II prend sa course, il s'avance 

Eclaire tous les humains. Comme un superbe geant. 

Environne de lumiere, Bientot sa marche feconde 

Cet astre ouvre sa carriere, ' Enrijrasse le toxu* du monde 

Comme un epoux glorieux Dans le cercle qu'il decrit ; 

Qui, des I'aube matinale, Et, par sa chaleur puiss'ante, 

De sa coucho nuptiale. La nature languissante 

Sort biillaut et radieux. -Se ranime et se nourrit." — Rousseau". 

2. Of Idyls. 

An idyl is a kind of pastoral poem, used to celebrate the loves ot 
shepherds, and the charms of the creation. It is an imitation of rural 
life, represented with every possible attraction. Madame Deshoulieres* 
idyls, entitled — Les moutous, les oiseaux\ le ruisseau, are all of an 
exquisite taste, and are recommended to a careful perusal. 

The following of M. Constant Dubos, on the Amaranthus, is also 
very pretty : — • 

*' Dans nos jardins I'email sc decolore; 
Sous les baisers des amoureux zephyrs, 
Mes yeux a peine out vu les fleurs eclore ; 
Toutincurt, hclas ! et les presens de Flore 
N'out qu'un instant, ainsi que nos plaisirs ! 

" Je t'aperoois, belle et noble amaranthc ! 
Tu viens m'offVir, pour charmer mes douleurs, 
De ton velours la richesse eclatante ; 
Ainsi la main de I'amitie constante, 
Quand tout nous fuit, vient essuyer nos pleurs. 

" Ton doux aspect, de ma Ijn-e plaintive, 
A ranime les accords languissans ; 
Dernier tribut de Flore fugitive, 
EUe nous legue, avec ta fleur tardive, 
Le souvenir de ses premiers presens. 

" Tel un ami qu'entraino un long voyag'e, ; 

De loin encor tournant les yeux vers nous, 
■ De ses regrets nous ofFre un dernier gage, 

Et de la main, tendre et muet langage. 

Nous dit : Adieu, mon cceur reste avec vous. 

" Lorsque les ans, dont la fuite me presse, 
De moa ete signaleront la fin. 
Ah ! viens aussi couronner ma vieillesse, 
Retrace-moi ma riante jeunesse, 
Et de mes jours joins I'Aurore au declin. 



392 OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. \ 

■I 

" Aimable fleur, sous tes henreux auspices, 
Je braverai les outrages du temps ; 

Si les beaux jours nous ofFrent des premices, i 

L'automne aussi, I'automne a ses delices : | 

Anacreon aimait en cheveux blancs. ' 

'^ Qu'importe I'age ? En vain I'adolescence : 

' Se berce, helas ! de reves euchanteurs ; ' 

Soxivent le sort trahit son esperance ; j 

Et sur la tombe ou repose I'enfance, 

Plus d'un vieillard vient repandre des pleurs.** j 

i 

3. Of Fables. \ 

A fable is the recital of an allegorical action, usually attributed to j 

^inimals, flowers, trees, &c. i 

The fables of La Fontaine exhibit very accurate models of this kind : \ 

for instance — '■, 

La CiGALE et la Fourmi, 

"La cigale, ayant chante tout I'ete, 

Se trouva fort depourvue, J 
Quand la bise fut venue ; 

Pas un seul petit morceau ' 

De mouche ou de vermisseau ! \ 

EUe alia crier famine ; 
Chez la fourmi sa voisine. 

La priant de lid preter ; 

Quelque grain pour subsister i 

Jusqu'ala saison nouvelle. j 

Je vous pairai, lui dit-elle, ' 

Avant Tout, foi d'animal, \ 
Interet et principal. 
La fourmi n'est pas preteuse : 
C'est la son moindre defaut. 

Que faisiez-vous au temps chaud? ' _ ' 

Dit-elle a cette emprunteuse. • 
Nuit et jour a tout venant 

Je chantais, ne vous deplaise. ' ] 

Vous chantiez ! J'en suis fort aise. \ 

He bien ! dansez_niaintenant;' • 

4. Of Epigrams. 

An epigram is a pointe ou bon-mot, expressed in two, four, or any j 

greater number of verses. Such is the following of Boileau : — j 



" A quoi bon tant d'efForts, de larmes et de cris, \ 

Cotin, pour faire oter ton nom de mes ouvrages ? i 

Si tu veux du public eviter les outrages, \ 

Fais efi'acer ton nom de tes propres ecrits."' \ 

. ! 

5. Of Madrigals. \ 

A madrigal, as Boileau says : ; 

« Respire la douceur, la tendresse, et I'amour." \ 



OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 393 

A tender thought, a gallant compliment, expressed in four or more 
verses, forms a madrigal : as — 

*' L'amour rend-il heureux, et I'est-on sans aimer? 
Ainsi parlait Damon a sa tendre Sylvie: 
Avant de voir Damon, je Taurais pu jurer ; 
Damon sevil, aujourd'hui, me fait aimer la vie." 

6. Of Impromptus : (^extempore pieces of poetry.) 

The only difference between an impromptu, a madrigal, and an 
epigram is, that an impromptu, as the term implies, is made extempore. 
It must have delicacy and liveliness enough to induce one to believe 
that it is a thought which has occurred without premeditation. Such 
is the following impromptu of a gentleman upon presenting a lady with 
a rose : — 

" Va, meurs sur le sein de Themire ; 
Qu'il soit ton trone et ton tombeau : 
Jaloiix de ton sort, je n'aspire 
Qu'au bonheur d'un trepas si beau." 

7. Of Enigmas. 

An enigma is a thing given in words difficult to be understood, and 
-which consequently leave a portion of the sense to be unriddled. If 
the meaning is too apparent, the mind is deprived of a part of its plea- 
sure. 

The following lines of Boileau convey an idea of the nature of an 
enigma : — 

" Du rcpos des luimains, implacable ennemie, 
J'ai rendu mille amans, envieux de men sort ; 
Je mc repais de sang, et je trouve ma vie 
Dans les bras de cehii qui recherche ma mort." 

(puce.) 

8. Of Inscriptions. 

An inscription is a short, clear, and precise explanation of what we- 
wish to express concerning a fact, a thing, or a person. It is particu- 
larly devoted to a building, statue, or tomb. Inscriptions may be 
divided into epigraphs and epitaphs. 

1. Of Epigraphs. 

An epigraph is an inscription placed either in a book, on a statue, or 
on a building. Such is the epigraph of Voltaire at the base of the 
statue of love : — 

" Qui que tu sois, voici ton maJtre 
II Test, le fut, ou le doit etre." 



St4 OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION:. 

' ' 2. Of Epitaphs. 

An epitaph is an inscription on a tomb : as — 

'^ Ci-git Tauteur d'un gros livre, ] 

Plus embrouille que savaut; ' 

Apres sa mort,il crut vivre, 
Et mourut des son vivant." ) 

9. OfDistichs. j 

A distich is a tlioiiglit expressed in two verses. It is often made use I 
of in an inscription : as— | 

« Dans nos deux cceurs unis^, reconnais ton ouvrage ; " 

Ne rougis pas d'aimer qui t'aime davantage." ; 

I 

10. Of Acrostics. I 

The only diflference between an acrostic and another piece of poetry i 

consists in there being the same number of verses in an acrostic as there \ 

are letters in the name of the person or thing on which the little poem ; 

is written, so arranged that each line in the piece, in a regular order, \ 

commences Avith the corresponding letter in the name, without the I 

sense being sacrificed. Such is the following on the name of Barhe \ 

{Sainte) : — j 

B avLe, dans ses Ijienfaits, ne connait nulle borne ; ' 

ui ma reconnaissance, en pourrais-je poser ? ' 

JR egle-toi sur ses dons , mon cceur, quoi qu'elle ordonne : i 

B onheur, repos, sante, que le ciel les lui donne ! ! 

£! lie a bien les vertus qui les font meriter. 1 

11. Of Sonnets. 

According to Boileau, it is extremely difficult to make a good sonnet. \ 

He describes it as follows, and points out the necessary rules. j 

He feigns that Apollo — i 

" Voulant pousser a bout tons les rimeurs frangais, ] 

Inventa du sonnet les rigoureuses lois; 
Voulut qu'en deux quatrains de mesure pareille 
La rime avec deux sons frappat huit fois I'oreille; 
Et qu'ensuite six vers, artistement ranges, 
Fussent en deux tercets par le sens partages. 
Surtout de ce poeme il bannit la licence, 
Lui-meme en mesura le nombre et la cadence; 
Defendit qu'un vers faible y put jamais entrer, 
Ni qu.'un mot deja mis osat s'y remontrer. 
Du reste, il Fenrichit d'uire beaute svipreme : 
Un sonnet sans defaut vaut seul un long poeme. 
Mais en vain mille autenrs y pensent arriver, 
Et cet heureux phenix est encore a trouver." 



OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 395 

A sonnet is therefore composed of fourteen verses of an equal mea- 
sure, and commonly of twelve syllables each. These verses are divided 
into two quatrains, that is to sa}^, two stanzas of four verses each, fol- 
lowed by two tiercets, or stanzas of three verses. 

The masculine and feminine rhymes are similar in the two q^uatrains^ 
and mixed in the same manner in both. 

The two first verses of the first tiercet rhyme together, and the third 
verse rhymes with the second of the second tiercet, while the first verse 
of the second tiercet rhymes with the last. 

In each quatrain^ a pause or rest is requisite after the second verse, 
and a longer one after the fourth. A rest must likewise be made at the 
end of the first tiercet, but it is not necessary that it should be longer 
than that after the second verse of each quatrain. 

Serious and sublime subjects are best adapted for the sonnet. The 
thoughts, images, and style, ought all to be noble. A word once 
used should not be employed again, and none of the verses ought to be 
feeble. 

The following sonnet, by Voiture, was very much relished by 
Boileau : — 

" Dos portes du matin Taniaute de Cephale 
Ses roses epandait dans le milieu des airs, 
Et joitait sur les cieux nouvellement ouverts, 
Ces traits d'or et d"azui- qu'en naissant elle 6tale; 

" Quand la nymphe divine, a mon repos fatale, 
Apparut, et brilla de tant d'attraits divers, 
Qu'il semblait qn'elle seule eclairait I'univers, 
Et remplissait de feu la rive orientale. 

^ Le soleil se hatant pour la gloire des cieux, 
Vint opposer sa flamme a I'eclat de ses yeux, 
Et prit tons les rayons dont I'Olympe se dore. 

" L'onde, la terre, et Pair s'allumaient a Tentour, 
Mais aupres de Philis, on le prit pour I'Aurore, 
Et ron-crut que Philis etait I'astre du jour." 

12. Of Rondeaux. 

The principal characteristic of rondeaux is a grace at once simple., 
natural, and spirituelle. 

Verses of all measures can be employed for rondeaux ; but those of 
ten syllables are most frequently used. 

A rondeau consists of thirteen verses of the same measure, and with 
only two rhymes. The thirteen verses are divided into three stanzas : 
the first consists of five verses, the second of three, and the third of 
five. At the end of the tiercet, or stanza of three verses, the first 
words of the rondeau are repeated ; they are also repeated after the last 
verse of the third stanza, and the words thus repeated are called re- 
frain. The refrain must always form a connected sense with what 



396 MANNER OF READING FRENCH POETRY. 

precedes, and come twice in two different meanings, as in the following 
rondeiu of Voiture, which explains at once the rules of this kind of 
poetry, and exemplifies it : — 

" Ma foij c^est fait de moi, car Isabeau 
M'a conjure de lui faire un Rondeau: 

Cela me met en une peine extreme. 

Quoi ! treize vers, huit en eait, cinq en erne, 
Je lui ferais aussitot un bateau. 
En voila cinq pourtant en un monceau: 
Faisons-en huit, en invoquant Brodeau, 
Et puis mettons, par quelque stratageme. 
Ma foi, c'est fait. 

'' Si je pouvais encor de mon cerveau 
, , Tirer cinq vers, I'ouvrage serait beau ; 

Mais cependant me voici dans I'onzierae, 
Et si je crois que je fais le douzieme. 
En voila treize ajustes au niveau. 
Ma foi, c'est fait." 



Manner of reading French poetry. 



The best mode of acquiring grace and elegance of expression in 
reading French poetry, is thoroughly to imbibe the sentiments and 
enthusiasm of the poet, and endeavour to express them with strength 
and dignity. In order to accomplish this, and avoid the disagreeable 
and tedious monotony which would result, if a pause were regularly 
made at the hemistic, the reader should, in some measure, forget that 
he is reading poetry, and be chiefly guided by the sentiments of the 
poet. By this method, the measure of French verses, which is so 
strongly marked, will be softened and more varied, and the hemistics 
will flow in a more mellifluous course. 

These are the rules observed by Talma, Mesdemoiselles Georges and 
Volney, in tragedy ; and, above all, Fleuri and M"^ Mars in comedy. 
When they recite verses, the measure is hardly heard ; the fine senti- 
ments, the beautiful thoughts, the traits piquans, are expressed with a 
nobleness of sentiment that enchants the mind, while the sweetness of 
their voices delights the ear by the purity of the most harmonious 
sounds, united to an unequalled elegance of expression. 



Manner of composing French verses. 

The best and most simple manner of composing French verses, 
after the preceding rules on versification have been carefully studied, 
is: — ' 



MANNER OF COMPOSING FRENCH VERSES. 397 

1 . To find the rhyme of every second verse in a few lines in which 
the rhyme has either been changed or entirely suppressed : as — 

. Grand Dieu ! vols a tes pieds leur foule consternee 
Te deraander le piix des travaux de Van. 

It is here necessary to find a word of two syllables, implying the same idea as a/i, 
the rhyme of which must be feminine, to rhyme with cunsternte *. 

Nice ! heureux sejonr, montagnes renommees, 
De lavande, de thym, de citron ( ) 

A word of three svUableSj implying the idea of being scented, is here wanted to 
rhyme with renommces\. 

2. To find the proper rhymes of verses in which the rhymes have all 
been changed ; as — 

Mais des traits enflammes ont sillonne la nute, 
Et la foudre en grondant roule dans Yespace. 

A word of one syllable, with a feminine rhpne, implying the same meaning as 
Tiwee I, is wanted for the first of the above verses; and another of three syllables^ 
-having the same signification as espace §, likewise with a femiuine rhyme, for the 
second verse. 

3. To find the right construction of verses in which the position of 
the words and rhymes have been transposed : as — 

Par son beau vetement, par ses fleurs, par ses fruits, 
L'arbre est le plus bel ornement de nos jardins ||. 

4. To find the proper construction and the right words and rhymes 
of verses in which different words incorrectly arranged have been sub- 
stituted: as — 

La crainie, I'airain retentissant, font les peuples tpouvanics 
s€ refitgier, a grandes multitudes, dans les temples saintu^. 

5. To give a subject written in prose, or only to suggest the idea 
of it. 

By thus endeavouring to find the right rhj^mes, the memory will in- 
sensibly acquire them in great abundance. 



* Annee. % Nue. 

f Parfumees. § Etendue. 

|] Par ses fruits, par ses fleurs, par son beau vetement, 
L'arbre est de nos jardins le plus bel ornement. 

^ La peur, I'airain sonnant, dans les temples sacres. 
Font entrer a grands flots les peuples egares. 



398 



GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS. 



Of Grammatical Analysis. 



FIRST ESSAY. 



Les connaissances propres a former I'esprit et le cosur, doivent occu- 
per avant tout les jeunes gens : elles inspirent les gouts serieux et solides, 
ecartent les amusemens frivoles, attachent aux devoirs domestiques. 
L'ignorance est egalement honteuse et funeste pour tous. ' 



Les 

connaissances 
propres 

a 
former 

Fespnt 

et 

le 
coeitr, 
doivent 

occnper 

avant 
tout 

les 
jeunes 
gens : 

elles 

inspirent 

les 

gouts 
serieux 

et 
solides, 
keartent 

les 

amusemens 
frivoles, 
attachent 



aux 

devoirs 
domestiques. 
L'ignorance 

est 



Analysis. 

art. simp. pi. des deux genres, qui determine connaissances. 
subs, f. pi. sujet du verbe doivent. . '•- 

adj. pi. des deux genres, qui qualifie connaissances. 
preposition qui regit /or/wer. 

verbe act. regulier, P^ conj. present de I'inf. regime de la prepo- 
sition a ; il a pour objet P esprit et le cceur. 
pour le esprit ; — le, art. simp. m. sing, qui determine esprit;—' 

esprit, subs. m. sing, regime du verbe former. 
conj. copulative qui unit les deux substantifs esprit et coeur. 
art. simp. m. sing, qui determine ccenr. 
subs. m. sing, regime du verbe /ormer. 
verbe act. regulier, 3^ conjug. present de I'ind. 3« personne pi.— 

il a pour sujet connaissances, et pour objet I'inf. ocouper. 

verbe act. regulier, \^^ conj. present de I'inf. regime de doivent i il 

xk^xi jeunes gens. 
preposition qni regit ifoe//. , 

subs, collectif. m, sing, pour toides choses, regime de la preposition 

avant. 
art. simp. pi. des deux genres, qui AiiQxvDXQ.& jeunes gens. 
adj . pi. des deux genres, qui qualifie gens. 
subs. m. pi. regime du verbe occuper. 
pronom pers. f. pi. 3« personne; il remplace connaissances, et est 

sujet du verbe inspirent. 
verbe act. regulier, 1"^^ conj. present de I'ind. 3^ personne pi. ; son 

sujet est el/es pour connaissances ; son regime est gouts. 
art. simp. pi. des deux genres, qui determine gouts. 
subs.m. pi. regime du verbe inspireitt, 
adj. m- pi. qui qualifie 9(??</5. 

conj. copulative qui unit les adjectifs serieux et solides. 
adj. pi. des deux genres, qui qualifie gofds. 
verbe act. regulier, l'^ conj. present de Find. 3^ personne pi. ;— son 

sujet est elles pour connaissances ; son regime est amusemens. 
art. simp. pi. deS deux genres, qui determine amusemens. 
subs. m. pi. regime du verbe ecartent. 
adj. pi. des deux genres, qui qualifie amusemens. 
verbe act. regulier, 1"^^ conj. present de I'ind. 3<^ personne pi.; — son 

sujet est elles pour con?7aissances : son regime direct n'est pas 
" enonce. 

art, compose pi. des deux genres, pour a les : — « regit devoir's. 
subs, m.-pl. regime de la prep, a dans I'art. compose aux, 
adj. pi. des deux genres, qui qualifie devoirs. 
pour la ignorance: — la, art. simp. f. sing, qui d^tennine ignorance; 

— ignorance subs. f. sing, sujet du verbe est. 
verbe auxiliaire, present de Find. 3^ personne sing. ; — son sujet es 

ignorance. 



GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS. 



399 



ega/ement 
honteuse 

et 

faneste 

four 



adv. de maiiiere qui modifie les adjectifs honteiise eifuneste. 

adj. f. sing, attribut du subs, ignorance. 

conj. copulative qui unit les adjectifs honteuse ei funeste. 

adj. sing, des deux genres, attribut du subs, ignorance. 

piep. qui regit tons. 

subs, collectif. m. pi. regime de la prep. jpo?<r. 



SECOND ESSAY. 

Calypso ne pouvait se consoler du depart d'Ulysse. Dans sa douleur, 
€lle se trouvait malheureuse d'etre immortelle. Sa grotte ne rtlsonnait 
plus de son chant : les nymphes qui la servaient n'osaient lui parler. 
Elle se promenait souvent seule sur les gazons fleuris, dont un printemps 
eternel bordait son ile. Mais ces beaux lieux, loin de moderer sa dou- 
leur, ne faisaient que lui rappeler le souvenir d'Ulysse, qu'elle y avait 
vu tant de fois aupres d'elle. , 

Analysis. 



Calypso 
ne 

pouvait 



consofer 

du 

depart 

<f Ulysse. 

Dans 

sa 

dotdeur, 

elle 



trouvait 

malheureuse 

cCetre 

immortelle. 

Sa 

grotte 

ne 

rtsonnait 

plus 

de 

S0}1 

chant: 

les 

nymphes 

qui 

la 



nom propre de femxne, sujet de la phrase, 

particule negative. 

verbe n. irregulier, (pouvoir,) 3e conj. imparfait de Tind. 3^ per- 

sonne sing, 
pronom pers. de la 3^ personne ; il est des deux nombres et des 

deux genres, 
verbe act. regulier, l'^ conj. present de I'inf. 
art. compose pour de le. 
subs. iTi. sing. 

pour de Ulysse ; de, prep. Vlysse, nom propre d'homme. 
preposition qui gouverne douleur. 
adj. possessif, f. sing, qui qualifie doideur. 
subs. f. sing. 

pronom pers. f. sing. 3^ personne. 
pronom pers. de la 3^ personne; il est des deux nombres et des 

deux genres, 
verbe act. regulier, V^ conj. imparf. de Tind. 3^ personne sing, 
adj. f. sing, qui se rapporte a, Calypso. 
pour de etre ; de, preposition; etre, verbe auxiliaire, present de 

I'inf. 
adj. f. sing, qui se rapporte a Calypso. 
adj. possessif, f. sing, qui determine grotte. 
subs. f. sing, sujet de la phrase, 
particule negative. 

verbe n. regulier, 1'® conj. imparf. de I'ind. 3^ personne sing, 
adverbe. 

preposition qui gouvevne chant. 
adj. possessif, qui qualifie chant. 
subs. m. sing. 

art. simp. pi. des deux genres, 
subs. f. pi. 

pronom relatif des deux nombres et des deux genres, 
pronom pers. f. sing. 3® personne, regime du verbe servaient^ il 

tient lieu de elle. 



400 



GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS. 



sermieiii 
■ii'osaient 

lui 

parfer. 

Elle 

se 

promenait 

seule 

stir 

les 

gazons 

JieuriSy 

donf 



printemps 

t tern el 

bordait 

son 

He. 

Mais 

ces 

beaux 

fieux, 

loin de 

modtrer 

sa 
douieuir, 

ne 
faimient 



iui 

rappeter 
le 

triste 
souvenir 
iVUlysse^ 

qii'elle 



avail 



iant 

de 

fois 

auprts d'eile. 



V^el'l)e act. irregiilier, 2^ conj. imparf. de I'ind. 3® persohne pi. 
pour ne osaienl ; ne, particule negative; osaient, verbe neutre 

regulier, l'« conj. imparf. de I'ind. 3« personne pi. 
pronom pers. sing, des deux genres ; il tient lieu ici de h elle. 
verbe n. regulier, 1'^^ conj. present de I'inf. 
pronom pers. f. sing. 3^ personne ; il rappelle I'idee de Calypso. 
pronom pers. de la 3^ personne ; il est des deux nombres et des 

deux genres, 
verbe act. regulier, 1'^ conj. imparf. de I'ind. 3* personne sing, 
adj. f. sing, qui se rapporte au pronom elle, 
prep, de lieu. 

art. simp. pi. des deux genres, qui determine ^azo;w. 
subs, commun, m. pi. 
participe passe, m. pi. du verbe n. regulier, {Jleurir,) 2« conj. il 

qualifie gazoiis. 
pronom relatif des deux nombres et des deux genres, employe 

pour desquels. 
art. ind. m. sing, qui se rapporte ^printemps. 
subs. m. sing. 

adj. m. sing, qui qualifie printemps. 

verbe act. regvdier, 1"^^ conj. imparf. de I'ind. 3^ personne sing, 
adj . possessif, m. sing, employe pour sa, parce que le substantif He 

commence par une voyelle ; il qualifie He, 
subs. f. sing, 
conj. adversative. 

adj. demonstratif, pi. des deux genres, qui determine lieux. 
adj. m. pi. qui qualifie lieux. 
subs, commun, m. pi. 

prep, composee de I'adverbe de lieu loin, et de la prep, de. 
verbe act. regulier, 1'^ conj. present de I'inf. 
adj. possessif, f. sing, qui qualifie douleur. 
subs, commun, f. sing, 
particule negative. 

verbe act. irregnlier, {faire^ 4^ conjug. imparf. de I'ind. 3^ per- 
sonne pi. 
conjonction. 
pronom. pers. sing, des deux genres, 3« personne sing, il tient lieu 

ici de a elle. 
verbe act. regulier, 1" conj. present de I'inf. 
art. simp. m. sing, qui determine souvenir. 
adj. m. sing, des deux genres, qui se rapporte a souvenir. 
subs, commun, m. sing. 

pour de Uiysse ; — de, prep. Ulysse nom propre d'homme. 
pour que elle ; — que, pronom relatif des deux nombres et des deux 

genres, regime direct du verbe avait : — elle, pronom pers. f. 

sing. ^ 
adv. de lieu. 

verbe avoir, imparf. de I'ind. 3® personne sing, 
participe passe du verbe voir ; voir, verbe irregulier de la 3® con- 

jugaison. 
adv. de quantite. 
preposition, 
subs. f. pi. 
pour aupres de elle; — auprts de, prep, qui gouverne elle ;— elle 

pronom pers. f. sing. 3® personne. 



GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS. 



401 



THIRD ESSAY. 



O toi, qui foUement fais ton Dieu du hasard, 
Viens me developper ce nid qu'avec taut d'art, 
Au meme ordre, toujours architecte fidele, 
A I'aide de son bee ma9onne I'hirondelle ! 



o 

lot, 

qui 

follement 

fais 

ton 
Dieu 

du 

hasardy 

vie/is 

me 

developper 

ce 

nid 

qu^avec 

lant 
d'arfy 

au 

meme 

ordre, 

toujours 

architecte 

fdeie, 

a. 
faide 

de 

son 

bee 

ma^nne 



Chirondelk ! 



Analysis, 

interjection. 

pronom pers. 2^ personne sing, des deux genres, mis en apostrophe, 

sujet de viens. 
pronom relatif qui se rapporte a toi. 
adv. de maniere qui modifiey«/s. 
verbe act. irregulier, {fnire,) 4^ conj. present de I'ind. 2^ personne 

sing. Son sujet est qui pour toi ; son regime est Dieu. 
adj. possessif, m. sing, qui determine Dieu. 
subs. m. sing, regime ^Qfais. 

art comp. m. sing, pour de le ; — de gouverne hasard. 
subs. m. sing, regime de la prep, de dans I'art. comp. du. 
verbe n. irregulier, (venir,) 2^ conj. imperatif, 2« personne sing, 
pronom pers. des deux genres, l"^*^ personne sing, regime indirect 

du verbe developper ; il tient lieu de a moi. 
verbe act. regulier, present de Tinf. — son regime direct est nid. 
adj. demonstratif, m, sing, qui determine nid. 
subs. m. sing, regime direct de developper. 
"ponr que avec ; — que, pronom relatif qui se rapporte a nid, ei qui 

est regime de magonne : — avec, prep, qui regit iant. 
adv. de quantite, employe substantiv. regime de la prep. avec. 
pour de art; — de, prep, qui gouverne art j — art, sub. m. sing» 

regime de la prep. de. 
art. comp. m. sing, pour a le ; — a reu;it ordre. 
adj. sing, des deux genres, qui qualifie ordre. 
subs. m. sing, regime de la prep, a dans I'art. comp. au. 
adv. de temps qui modifie^r/e/e. 
subs. m. sing, attribut du subs, hirondelle. 
adj. sing, des deux genres, qui qualifie architecte. 
preposition qui gouverne aide, 
•^oxxx la aide ; — la, art. simp. f. sing, qui determine au/e; — aide, 

subs. f. sing, regime de la prep. a. 
preposition qui gouverne bee. 
adj. possessif, m. sing, qui determine bee. 
subs. m. sing, regime de la prep. de. 

verbe act. regulier, (magonner,) P« conj. present de I'ind. 3^ per- 
sonne sing. ; — son sujet est hirondelle; son regime est ^«e, qui 

represente ?nd. 
pour la hirondelle ; — la, art. simp. f. sing, qui determine hirondelle j 

hirondelle, subs. f. sing, sujet du verbe ma^:onn€. 



402 

A VOCABULARY 

OF . . . • 

WORDS CHIEFLY USED IN FAMILIAR CONVERSATION. 



In the following vocabiilarj^ the terms masculine and feminine have 
been affixed only to those substantives, the genders of which cannot be 
ascertained from the rules laid down in the beginning of the Grammar, 
page 33, and following. 

1. Days of the Week. 

Monday, Lundi *. 

Tuesdays Mardi. 

Wednesday;, Mei'credi. 

Thursday, Jeudi. 

Friday, Vendredi. 



Saturday, Samedi. 

Sunday, Dimanche. 



2. 3Ionthsf of the Year. 
ary, Janvier. 



'•' At the commencement of the French revohition, the names of the days and 
months were changed, and, instead of the usual arrangement of seven days in a 
week, a new method was adopte:! of classing ten days as one decade, three of which 
decades were required to make a month. The year was composed of twelve months, 
with five complementary days in a common year, and six in a bissextile or leap year. 
In numbering the j-ears, instead of using the common epoch of the birth of Christ, 
they were reckoned from the commencement of the republic, or from the 22d of 
September, 1792. " 

The division of the month into decades was but very partially observed,, and was 
totally abolished upon the reintroduction of the Catholic religion. The new num- 
bering of the years, as well as the nev/ naming of the months and days, terminated 
with the republican form of government. 

The names of the months in each qiiarter were as follows:— 
Auhimnal. IVmter. Sp?'ing. Summer. 

Veudemiaire. Nivose. Germinal. Mes'sidor. 

Brumaire. Pluviose. FJor^al, Thermido^. 

Frimaire. Ventose'. Prairial. Fructidor. 

The days in each decade vrere called : Primidi, Duodi, Tridi, Qvartidi, Quinlidi, 
Sexlidi, Septidi, Octidi, Nonidi, Decadi. 

The complementary days, called also sam-culottides, were dedicated as festivals to 
prowess, genius, labour, opinion and rewards. 

t The following simple metliod may he found meful in enabling children to ascertain, 
the 7tumher of days in each month. 

Every month in the year has either thirty or thirty-one days, with the exception of 
February, which, in common years, has twenty-eight da3^s, and twenty-nine in a leap 
year. To distinguish them readily, close your left hand, and, with the first finger 
of j^ovir right hand, begin with January on the knuckle of the fore-fingei' of your left 
hand, call February between the fore and middle finger, March on the knuckle of 
the middle finger, April between the middle and fourth finger^ and so on up and 
down, until j^ou have called the twelve months, taking care to go on from the knuckle 
of tbe little to the knuckle of the fore-finger again, and you will find that the months 
which have thirty-one days occur on the knuckles, whereas the others come between 
them. 



.VOCABULARY.— SUBSTANTIVES. 



403 



Februaiy, 
March, 


Ftvner. 
Mars. 


April, 
May, 


Avril. 
Mai. 


June, 


Juin. 


July, 


Juillef. 


August, 

September, 

October, 


Aout. 

Septembre 

Octobre. 


Novemb,er, 


Novembre. 


December, 


Decembre. 



3. Seasons of the Year and the 
Elements. 



The spring, 
The summer, 
The autuHiin, 
The winter, 
The fire, 
Tlae wat^r, 
Tlie earth, 
The air, 



Le printemps. 

Vttk. 

Uatitomne. 

Vhiver. 

Lefeu. 

Veau. 

La terre. 

U air. 



4. Of 


Meals, 


The breakfast, 


Le dejeuner au dd- 




jedne. 


The luncheon, 


i> gouter. 


The dinner. 


Le diner ou d'lnL 


The afternoon's 


La collation. 


luncheon. 




The supper, 


Le souper.. 



5. Of the different Eatables, 



Aliment, 

Anchovy, 

Artichoke, 

Asparagus, 

Bacon, 

Beef, 

a-la-mode, ■ 

Bit, piece, 
Boiled meat, 
. Bread, 
Broth, 
Jelly-broth, 
Cabbage, greens, 
Calf's-head, 
Caper, 
Capen, 
Carrot, ^ 



lode. 



aliment. 

anchois._ 

artichaiH. 

osperge. 

lard. 

hoeuf. 

boeuf a la 

tnorceau. 

bdidl/i. 

pain. 

bouillon. 

consomme. 

chou, sing. ehoux,pl. 

tete de veau. 

capres,/. pi. 

chapon. 

carotie. 



Cauliflo'wer, 

Chicken,. 

Cod-fish, 

Fresh cod, 

Salt cod, 

Craw-fish, , 

Cresses, 

Crumb, 

Crust, 

Cucumber, 

Duck, 

Eel, 

Egg, 

Fat, 
I Feast, 
: Fricassee, 
j Fish, 
I Food, 
I French beans. 

Game, 

Gerkin, 

Goose. 

Gravy, 

Ham, 
I Lamb, 

Quarter of lamb, 
I Lean, 
j Leek, 

Lettuce, 
] Leveret, 
I Lobster, 
i Mackerel, 
I Meat, 

j Minced meat, 
i Roast meat, 

Melon, 

Mushroom, 

Mustard, 

Mutton, 

Mutton-chop,- 

Breast of mutton. 

Leg of mutton, 

Neck of mutton^ 

Mouthful, 

Nutmeg, 

Oil, 

Omelet, • 

Onion, 

Oyster, 

Pea; 

Pepi^er, 

Pheasant, 

Plaice, 

Pork, 

Pottage, 

Potatoe, 

Poultry, fowlsy 



chou-Jleur, m. 

poulef. 
mo rue. 

monie /raiche, 
morue salee. 
ecrevisse. 
cresson. 
rnie. 
croute. 
conco7nbre. 
canard, 
anguille. 
ceuf. 
gras. 
festin. 
fricassee, 
poisson. 
nourriture. 
haricots verts, 
gibier. 
cornicho7i. 
oie. 
jus. 

jambon. 
agneau. 

quartier d'agtiean. 
maigre. 
poireau. 
laitue. 
levraut. 
komard. 
viaquereau, 
viande. 
hachis. 
roti. 
7nelon. 
champig7t07i. 
rnouiarde. 
mouto7i. 

cotelette de tnouio7i. 
j)oit7-ine de mouion. 
gigot. 

collet de 77iouton, 
hoiichee. 
muscade. 
liuile. 
07nelette. 
ogno7i . 
huitre. 
pais, 
poivre. 
faisan. 
plie. 
pore, 
potage. 

pom7ne de terre. 
volaille. 



404: 



VOCABULARY.— SUBSTANTIVES. 



Provisions, victuals, nvres, /M.p/. ] 


Medlar, 


nefle. 


Radish, 


radis, rave. 


Milk, 


/ait. 


Ragout, 


ragout. 


Mulberry, 


mure. 


Repast, 


repas. 


Nut, 


mix. 


Salad, 


salade» 


Orange, 


orange. 


Salmon, 


saumon. 


Peach, 


piche. 


Salt, 


sel. 


Pear, 


poire. 


Sauce, 


sauce. 


Plum, 


prune. 


Sausage, 


saucisson, saucisse. 


Pie, 


pate, tourte. 


Sirloin, 


aloyau. 


Patties, 


petits pates. 


Slice, 


tranche. 


Quince, 


coing. 


Soup, 


sovpe. 


Raspberry, 


framboise. 


Treat, 


rkgal. 


Red and white heart bigarreau. 


Trout, 


truite. 


cherry, 




Turbot, 


turbot. 


Strawberry, 


/raise. 


Turkey, 


dindon. 


Sugar, 


Sucre, 


Young turkey. 


dindonneau. 


Sugar-plums, 


bonbons, m. dragtes, 


Young partridge. 


perdreau. 




/. 


Young pigeon. 


pigeomieau. 


Sweetmeat,preserves, confitures,/, pi. 


Turnip, 


navet. 


Tart, 


tarte. 


Turtle 


tovtue. 






Veal, ' 
Veal cutlet, 


veau, 

cotelette de veau. 


7. Of Liquors, &c. 


Loin of veal. 


longe de veau. 


Beer, 


biere. 


Vegetable, 


legume^ m. sing. 


Strong beer. 


biere /orte. 




legumes^ m. pi. 


Small beer, 


petite biere. 


Venison, 


venaison. 


Brandy, 


eau-de-vie. 


Vinegar, 


vinaigre. 


Cider, 


cidre. 




' 


Chocolate, 

Cocoa, 

Coffee, 


chocolat. 


6. Of Fruits, Pastry, &Q, 


cacao, 
ca/k. 


Almond, 


amande. 


Ice, 


glace. 


Apple, 


pomme. 


Cream-ice, 


glace a la crime. 


Apple-pie, 


tourte de pommes ou 


Lemon-ice, 


glace au citron. 




tourteauxpommes. 


Raspberry-ice, 


glace aux /ramboises. 


Apricot, 


abricot. 


Strawberry-ice, 


glace aux /raises. 


Biscuit, 


biscuit. 


Lemonade, 


limonade. 


Butter, 


beurre. 


Mead, 


hydromel. 


Cake, 


gateau. 


Nectar, 


nectar. 


Cherry, 


cerise. 


Orgeat, 


orgeat. 


Chestnut, 


chataigne* 


Perry, 


poir6. 


Cheese, 


fromage. 


Punch, 


punch. 


Cream, 


creme. 


Punch a la Romaine, jooMcAed/a/?o»tame,w. 


Currant, (red) 


groseilles rouges en 


Rum, 


rhum. 




grappes. 


Syrup, 


sirop. 


Currant, (white) 


groseilles blanches en 


Tea, 


the. 




grappes. 


Water, 


eau. 


Fig, 
Filbert, 


Jlgue. 
aveline. 


Wine, 


vin. 






Gooseberry, (white) groseille {blanche.^ 


8. Of the Table and the different 
things used at Table, 


Gooseberry, (xed) 
Grapes, 


groseille (rouge.) 
raisin. 


Hazel-nut, 


noisette. 


Basin, 


basstn. 


Jelly, 


gelee. 


Bottle, 


bouteille. 


Lemon, 


citron. 


China, 


porcelaine. 


Macaroon, 


macaron. 


China service. 


service de porcelaine. 


Macaroni, 


macaroni. 


Chocolate-pot, 


chocolatiire. 



VOCABULARY.— SUBSTANTIVES. 



405 



CofFee-pot, 

Cork-screw, 

Cup, 

Decanter, 

Dish, 

Earthen-ware, 

Earthen-ware 

vice. 
%g-cup, 
Finger-glass, 



Fork, 

Glass, 

Goblet, 

Knife, 

Knife and fork, &c. 

Milk-pot, 

Mustard-pot, 

Napkin, 

Oil-cruet, 

Pepper-caster, 

Plate, 

Pewter plate 

Salad-dish, 

Salt-cellar, 

Saucer, 

Silver-plate, 

Soup-dish, 

Spoon, 

Soup-ladle, 

Sugar-caster, 

Table, 

Table-cloth, 

Tea-board, 

Tea-pot, 

Tongs, 

Vinegar-cruet, 



cofetiere. 

tire-bouchon. 

iasse. 

carafe, 

plat. 

faience. 

service de faience. 

coquetier. 

bail {pour se rincer la 

bouche et se laver 

ies doigts apres le 

diner), 
fourchette. 
verre. 
gobelel. 
couieau. 
convert, 
pot au lait. 
moutardier. 
serviette, 
huilier. 
poivritre. 
assiette. 

vaisselle d'etain. 
saladier. 
saliere. 
soucoupe. 
argenterie. vaisselle 

d'argent. 
sou pier e. 

cuiller ou cuillere. 
cuiller a soupe. 
sucrier. 
table, 
nappe. 

plateau, cabaret, 
thtihe. 

pincettes, f. pi. 
vinaigrier. 



Afternoon, 



9. Of Time. 



After to-morrow, 

Aurora, 

Beginning, 

Break of day, dawn, 

Centurv, 

Date, 

nay. 

The day before 

yesterday. 
The next day, 
Work-day, 



apres-midi, apres- 

dinee. 
apres-demain. 
aurore. 

commencement, 
point ou points da 
jour, aube dujour. 
Steele, 
date. 

jour, journte. 
avani-hier. 

le jour suivant. 
jour ouvrable. , 



End, 

Epoch, 

Evening, 

Festival, 

Hour, 

Half-hour, 

Holiday, 

Leap-year, 

Middle, 

Midnight, 

Minute, 

Moment, 

Month, 

Morning, 

Noon, mid-day. 

Night, 

Quarter of an hour, 

Quarter of a year, 

Rising of the sun, 

Season, 

Second, 

Sunset, 

To-day, 

To-morrow, 

Twilight, 

Week, 

Year, 

Yesterday, 



tpoque. 
soir, soiree, 
jour de fete. 
heure. 
demi-heure. 
conge. 

annee bissextile, 
milieu, 
minuit. 
minute, 
moment, 
mois, 

matin, matinee, 
inidi. 
7iuit. 

quart d'heure. 
trimestre, qnnrtier. 
lever du soleil. 
saison. 
seconde. 

coucher du soleil. 
aujourd^htd. 
demain. 
crepuscule, 
semaine. 
an, annte. 
hier. 



10. Princij)al Days in the Tear. 

&c. 
New year's day, 
Christmas-day, 
Twelfth-day, 
Candlemas, 
Carnival, 
Shrove-Tuesday, 
Ash- Wednesday, 
Lent, 

Kmber-week, 
Lady-day, 
Palm-Sunday, 

Good-Friday, 
Easter, ■ 
Easter-Monda}', 
Whit-Sunday, 
Midsummer, 
Michaelmas, 
The vacation or 
holy-days, 



premier jour de fan, 

Noel. 

jiiur des rots, 
chandeleur, f. 
carnaval. 
3Iardi gras. 
Mercredi des cendres. 
Carhne. 

Quat re-temps, 7n.pl. 
Notre-dame. 
Dimanclie des Ba- 

meaux. 
Vendredi Saint. 
Fd'p/es. 

Lundi de Paqucs, 
la Pent ecu' e. 
la Saint- Jean. 
la Scunt-JMichel. 
Ies vacances. 



11. Of Mankind. 

Adolescence, radu/escenct 

Boy, gar con. 

Child, enfaiit. 



406* 



VOCABULARY. --SUBSTANTIVES. 



Childhood, 


Venfance. 


Wet-nurse, 


^oiirrice. 


Decrepitude, 


la dtcrepitude. 


Wife, 


femme, epotise. 


Girl, 


pie. 


Widower, 


veuf. 


Human land. 


genre kumain. 


Widow, 


veuve. 


Tne Maid of Orleai 


IS, la Pucelle cT Orleans, 
homme. 






Man, 






Manhood, 
Maturity, 


la virilitt. 
la matur'itk. 


13. Of the Human Body, 8^'c. 


Old age, 


la vieillesse^ • 


Action, 


action. 


Old man, 


vieillard. 


Action, gesture. 


geste, m. 


Old woman. 


vieille, vieille femme. 


Air, 


air. 


Virgin, maid. 


vierge, pucelle. 


Arm, 


bras. 


Virginity, 


virginiit. 


Artery, 


artere. 


Woman, 


femme. 


Attraction,- allure- 


attraits, appas. 


Young man. 


jeune homme. 


ment, 




Young woman. 


jeune femme. 


Back, 


dos. 


Youth, 


lajeimesse. 


Backbone, 


epine du dos. 






Beard, 
Beauty, 


barbe. 






beaute. 


12. Degrees 


of Kindred, ^^c. 


Belly, 
Bile, 


ventre, 
bile. 


Aunt, 


tante. 


Body, 


corps. 


Brother, 


frere. 


Bone, 


OS. 


!Brother-in-la^v, 


beau-frere. 


Bosom, 


sein. 


Child, 


enfant. 


Brain, 


cerveau. 


Companion, 


compagnon, com- 


Brains, 


cervelle. 




pagne. 


Breast, 


poitrine. 


Cousin, 


cousin, cousine. 


Blood, 


sang. 


Daughter, 


file. 


Bowels, 


entrailles, f. pi. boy- 


Daughter-in-law, 


belle-fdk. 




aux,intestins, m. pi. 


Eldest daughter. 


ainee. 


Breath, 


haleine, f. souffle, m. 


Eldest son, 


aine. 


Breathing, 


respiration. 


Father, 


pere. 


Calf of the le£^. 


viollet, gras de la 


Father-in-la^r, 


bcnu-pere. 




jambe. 


God-daughter, 


fillnile. 


Charms, 


charmes^ appas. 


God-father, 


parrain. 


Cheek, 


joue. 


God-mother, 


marraine* 


Chin, 


menton. 


God-son, 


Jilleul. 


Complexion, 


teint. 


Grand-daughter, 


petite.-fille. 


Cough, 


toux. 


Grand-father, 


grnnd-ptre. 


Dream, 


rive, songe. 


Grand-mother, 


grajid'-mere. 


Drov/siness, 


assGupissemefit . 


Graud-son, 


petit-fls. 


Ear, 


oreille. 


Heir, 


hiritier. 


Elbow, 


coude. 


Heiress, 


heritiere. 


Eye, 


ceil. 


Hushand, 


mari, epoux. 


Eyebrow, 


sourcil. 


Mother, 


mere. 


Eyelid, 


paupiere. 


Mother-in-law, 


belle-mire. 


Eye, (pupil of) 


2irunelle. 


Neighbour, 


voisin, voLine. 


Eyes, 


yeux, m. pi. 


Nephew, 


neveu. 


Face, 


visage, face. 


Niece, 


niece. 


Feature, 


trait. 


Orphan, 


orphelin, orpkeilne. 


Finger, 


doigt. 


Sister, 


scear. 


Finger, (fore) 


index. 


Sister-in-law, 


belle-&cei<r. 


Finger, (fourth) 


doigt anmdaire. 


Son, 


fih. 


Finger, (little) 


petit doigt. 


Son-in-law, 


beau fi Is. 


Finger, (middle) 


doigt du milieu. 


Twin, 


jumeau,ji(mclle. 


Fist, 


poing. 


Uncle, 


oncle. 


Flank, 


fane. 



VOCABULARY.— SUBSTANTIVES. 



407 



Flesh, 


chair. 


Speech, 


parole. 


Foot, 


pied. 


Spleen, 


rate. 


Forehead, 


front. 


Stomach, 


estomac. 


Gait, ^ 


port, danarche. 


Sweat, 


sueur. 


Groaning, 


gemissement. 


Tear, 


lurme. 


Gum, 


gencive. 


Temple, 


tempe. 


Hair, (of the head,) 


cheveu. 


Thi^h, 


cuisse. 


Hair, (on the body,) poil. 


Throat, 


gorge. 


Hand, 


main. 


Tliumb, 


pouce. 


Head, 


iete. 


Toe, 


orteil ou doigt da 


Health, 


sante. 




pied. 


Heart, 


coeur. 


Tongue, 


langue. 


Heel, 


talon. 


Tooth, 


dent. 


Hiccoudi, 


Jwquef. 


Vein, 


vcine. 


Hip, 


hanche. 


Voice, 


voice. 


Humour, 


humeur. 


Ugliness, 


laideur. 


Javv', 


nidchoire. 


Waist, 


ceinture. 


Knee, 


genou. 


Wrinkle, 


ride. 


Laugh, laughter. 


rii, rire, m. 


Wiist, 


poignet. 


Leanness, 


maigrcur. 
jamhe. 
levre. 






Leg, 




Lip, 


14. 


The Senses. 


Under lip. 


Itvre infericure. 


The sight, 


la vue. 


Upper lip;, 


levre s/fpcrieure. 


The hearing. 


fotiie. 


Liver, 


/(lie. 


The smell, ' 


Podorat. 


Loins, 


reins^ m. pL 


The taste, 


le gout. 


Lungs, 


poumon. 


The feeling. 


le toucher. 


Marrow, 


moelle. 

mine. 

mouvemenl. 


15. Oj 




Mien, 
Motion, 


Mai's Clothes. 


Mouth, 


louche. 


Any cover of the chaussw-e. 


Muscle, 


muscle, m. 


foot. 




Nail, 


ongle. 


Boot, 


bolte. 


Neck, 


cou. 


Boot-jack, 


tire-botte, m. 


Nerve, 


nerf. 


Boot-strap, 


iirajit de botle. 


Nose, 


nez. 


Boot-tree, 


ambouchoirs, jn. pi. 


Nostril, 


narine. 


Bosom of a shirt, Jabot. 


Numbness, 


engoKrdiasemenf. 


Breeches, 


calotte. 


Palate, 


palais. 


Buckle, 


boucle. 


Physiognomy, 


phijsiononiie. 


Button, 


bout 071. 


Plumpness, 


embonpoint. 


Button-hook, 


tire-boufon, m. 


Pock-mark, 


marque de petite 


Cane, or stick. 


canne. 




verole. 


Cloak, 


manleau. 


Rest, 


repos. 


Close coat. 


justaucurps 


Rib, 


cote. 


Clothes, 


hardes,f.,pl. 


Saliva, 


salive. 


Coat, 


habit. 


Sensation, 


sensation. 


Cravat, 


cravate. 


Shape, 


faille. 


Gaiter, 


gue're. 


Shoulder, 


epaule. 


Garter, 


Jar ret it re. 


Side, 


cote. 


Glove, 


ga7it. 


Sigh, 


soupir. 


Great-coat, 


surtoiit. 


Silence, 


iilence. 


Handkerchief, 


mouchoir. 


Skin, 


peaie. 


Hat, 


chapeau. 


Sleep, 


sommeil. 


Hook, 


crochet. 


Smile, 


souris ou sourirc. 


Leather, 


ciiir. 


Sneezing, 


eternument. 


Lining, 


doublure. 


Sound, 


son. 


Morning-gown 


, robe de chambre. 



408 



VOCABULARY.— SUBSTANTIVES. 



Night-cap, 


bonnet de nuit. 




Looking-glass, 


miroir. 


Pair of drawers, 


caleQon. 




Morning dress. 


neglige. 


Pencil, 


crayon. 




Muff, 


manchon. 


Pencil-case, 


porte-crayon. 




Neckerchief, 


Hchu. 


Pocket, 


poche. 




Necklace, 


collier. 


Pocket-book, 


portefeuille, m. 


tab- 


Needle, 


aiguille. 




kites, f. pi. 




Needleful, 


aigifillee. 


Preservers, specta- 


conserves, f. pi. 




Night-cap, 


bonnet de nuit. 


cles. 






Paint, 


rouge. 


Pttmp, 


escarpin. 




Parasol, 


parasol. 


Purse, 


bourse. 




Petticoat, 


jupe. 


Razor, 


rasoir. 




Pin, 


tpingle. 


Riding-coat, 


redingote. 




Pincase, 


etui. 


Ring, 


bague, anneau. 




Pincushion, 


pelote. 


Shirt, 


chemise. 




Pocket-glass, 


miroir de poche. 


Shoe, 


Soulier. 




Pomatum, 


pommade. 


Shoe-horn, 


chausse-pied, m. 




Riband, 


ruban. 


Sleeve, 


manche. 




Ring, 


bague. 


Small stick, wand, 


baguette. 




Ruffle, 


manchette. 


Snuff-box, 


tabatitre. 




Set of diamonds. 


garniture de diamans^ 


Spectacles, 


hmettes^f. pi. 




Scarf, 


echarpe. 


Spjdng-glass, 


lorgnette. 




Shawl, 


schall. 


Suit oi clothes, 


vetement, hahillement. 


Scented water, 


eau d^odeur. 


Sword, 


epte. 




Scissars, 


ciseaux, m. pL 


Tobacco, snuff. 


iabac. 




Shift, chemise, 


chemise. 


Umbrella, 


parapluie. 




Silk, 


soie. 


Under-stocking, 


chaussette. 




Slipper, 


pantoufie. 


Waistcoat, 


gilel. 




Stays, 


corset, corps dejupe. 


Watch, 


montre. 




Thimble, 


de. 


Wig, 


perruque. 




Tliread, 
Tippet, 
Toilette, 


jil. 

palatine. 






toilette^ 


16. Ladies^ loearing AppareL 


^C. 


Veil. 
Under-petticoat, 


voile, 
jupon. 


Apron, 


tablier. 




Undress, 


deshabille. 


Ball of thread. 


pelote defil. 




Wool, 


laine. 


Bojddice, 


corset. 








Cap, 


bonnet. 








Bracelet, 


bracelet. 








Clasp, 


agrafe. 




17. Things 


made use of for 


Coil, cap. 
Collar, 


coiffe. 

collet, collerette. 


/raise 


Clothing. 


Comb, 


peigne. 




Cambric, 


batiste. 


Cotton, 


colon. 




Calico, 


toile de coto7i. 


Ear pendants. 


pejidans d'^oreilles, 


Printed cahco. 


toile de colon peiyite 




m. pi. 






ou impriinee, In' 


Ear-rings, 


boucles d'oreilleSff.pl. 




die?ine. 


Fan, 


even tail. 




Indian calico, 


toile de colon des 


Frock, 


fourreau. 






hides. 


Garter, 


jarretitre. 




Cloth, 


drap. 


Glove, 


gant. 




Holland cloth. 


toile d'Hollande. 


Gown, 


robe. 




Irish cloth, 


toile d'Iriande. 


Hat, bonnet. 


chapeau. 




Linen cloth. 


toile. 


Head-dress, 


coiffure. 




Dimity, 


basin. 


Jewel, 


bijou, joyau. 




Flannel, 


jianelle. 


Lace, 


dentelle ; and 


lacet. 


Fur, 


fourrure. 




to lace stays 




Gauze, 


gaze. 



VOCABULARY.— SUBSTANTIVES. 



409 



Glazed silk, 

Leather, 

Linen, 

Lustring, 

Morocco leather, 

Muslin, 

Satin, 

Silk stuff, 

Stuff, 

Taffeta, sarcenet. 

Velvet, 

Woollen stuff. 



taffetas glacL 

cuir. 

linge. 

taffetas lustrt. 

maroquiyi. 

momseline. 

satin. 

ttoffe de soie. 

dtoffe. 

taffetas. 

velours. 

tloffe de laine. 



18. Of a House, its Furniture , 8^c. 

Alcove, alcove. 

Antichamber, antichambre. 

Apartment, appartement. 

Balcony, bulcon. 

Balustrade,banister, rampe. 

Bed-room, 

Blind, 

Bolt, 

Bolt of a lock. 

Ceiling, 

Cellar, 

Chimney, 

Closet, 

Coach-house, 

Corridor, passage. 

Dining-room, 

Drawing-room, 

Dressing room. 

Entry, 

Fender, 

Floor, 

Foundation, 

Front, 

Gallery, 

Garden, 

Gate, 

Glass-door, 

Granary, garret. 

Gutter, 

Hall, entry, 

Hammer, knocker. 

Hearth, 

House, 

Inlaid floor. 

Key, 

Kitchen, 

Landing-place, 

Latch, 

Lattice-work, 

Lock, 



garde- 



chambre a coucher. 
jalousie, treillis, 
verrou. 
ptne, m. 
plafond * 
cellier. 
cheminee. 
cabinet, 
remise. 

couloir, corridor, 
salle a manger, 
salon. 

cabinet de toilette, 
entrte. 

garde-feu, m. 
cendre, in. 
plancher. 
fondement. 
fagade. 
galerie. 
jar din. 
porte cochtre. 
porte vitree. 
grenier. 
goutiiere. 
vestibule, 
marteau. 
atre, m. foyer, 
maison. 
parquet, 
clef, 
cuisine, 
palier. 
loquet. 

treillis, treillage. 
serrure. 



Lodging, 
Mantle-piece, 

chimney-piece, 
Office, 
Padlock, 
Pane of glass, ^ 
Parlour, 
Partition, 
Passage, alley, 
Piazza, portico. 
Pigeon-house, 
Porch, 

Poultry-yard, 
Private staircase, 
Privy, 

Pump, 

Koof, 

Room, 

Safe, larder. 

Shop, 

Shutter, 

Side-board, 

Square, pane. 

Stable, 

Staircase, 

Steps before a house 

Story, 

Stove, 

Study, 

Timber-work, 

Top of a house, 

Top of the stairs, 

Vault, cellar. 

Wainscot, 

Wall, 

Wardrobe, 

Warehouse, 

Water-closet, 

Well, 

Winding staircase, 

Window, 

Yard, 



logemenl. 

manteau de cheminee. 

office. 

cadenas. 

carreau, vitre. 

parloir. 

cloison. 

passage, allee, 

portique. 

colombier. 

porche, m. 

basse-cour. 

escalier derobt. 

garde-robe, f. lleux, 

m. pi. 
pompe. 
toit. 

piece, chambre, salle, 
garde-manger, 
boutique, 
volet, 
buffet, 
carreau, 
tcurie. 
escalier. 
, perron, 
etage. 

poele, fourneau. 
ttude. 
charpente. 

fait€,m. d^une maison. 
haul de I'' escalier. 
cave. 

lambns, boiserie. 
mur. muraille. 
garde-robe, 
magasin. 
cabinet d''aisances, m. 

sing, aisances, fpL 
puits. 

escalier a vis. 
fenetre. 
cour. 



19. Household Gooclsy &c. 

Arm or elbow-chair, fauteidl. 

Basin, bassin, bassine, bas' 

sinet. 
Basket, panier. 

Bed, lit. 

Bellows, souffiet. 

Blanket, couverture. 

Boiler, chaudiere, coquemar* 

Bolster, traversin. 



410 



VOCABULARY.—SUBSTANTIVES. 



Box, 


hoite. 


Pier-glass, 


trumeau. 


Bread or fruit-basket 


, corbeille. 


Pillow, 


oreiller. 


Broonij, 


balai. 


Pillow-case, 


taie d'oreiller. 


Bureau, 


bureau. 


Pinching-tongs, 


fer a f riser. 


Candle, 


chandelle. 


Poker, 


fourgon. 


Candlestick, 


chandelier. 


Portrait, 


portrait. 


Canopy, coucli. 


canapt. 


Portmanteau, 


porte-manteau. 


Carpet, 


tapis. 


Pot, 


pot. 


Chair, 


chaise. 


Chamber-pot, 


vase de nuit, pot de 


Chest, 


caisse. 




chambre. 


Chest of drawers, 


commode. 


Flower-pot, 


pot afleurs. 


Cloak-hag, 


valise. 


Water-pot, 


pot a feau. 


Clock, 


pendule. 


Print, stamp. 


estampe. 


Coals, 


charbon. 


Screen, 


ecran. 


Counterpane, 


courte-pointe . 


Seat, 


siege. 


Curtain, 


rideau. 


Sheet, 


drap de lit. 


Cushion, 


coussin. 


Shovel, 


pelle. 


Desk, 


pupitre, secretaire. 


Skillet, saucepan. 


poelon. 


Down-hed, 


lit de duvet. 


Small flat-basket, 


corbillon. 


Drawer, 


tiroir. 


Small tub, wash- 


cuvette. 


Dressing-case, 


necessaire, m. 


hand basin. 




Extinguisher, 


eteignoir. 


Smoothing-iron, 


fer a repasser. 


Feather-bed, 


lit de plume. 


SmifFers, 


moucheties, f. pi. 


Flint, 


pierre a feu. 


Snuffer-pan, 


porte-mouchettes, m. 


Folding-screen, 


paravent. 


Sofa, 


sofa. 


Frame, 


cadre. 


Soap, 


savon. 


Frying-pan, 


poele. 


Spit, 


broche. 


Furniture, 


ameublement. 


Sponge, 


tponge. 


Glass, 


glace. 


Stand, 


gutridon. 


Grate, 


grille. 


Starch, 


amidon^ empois. 


Hair-broom, 


balai de crin, hous- 


Steel to strike fire 


briquet. 




soir. 


with. 




Hangings, 


tapisserie. 


Stew-pan, 


casserole. 


Jack, 


tourne-broche, m. 


Stool, 


tabouret. 


Jug, pitcher, 


cruche, broc. 


Straw-bed, 


paillasse. 


Kettle, tea-kettle. 


bouilloire,f. 


Table, 


table. 


Ladder, . 


echelle. 


Tinder, 


amadou. 


Lamp, 


lampe. 


Tinder-box, 


boite a fusil. 


Lantern, 


lanterne. 


Tongs, 


pincettes, f. pi. 


Landscape, 


paysage. 


Towel, 


essuie-main, m. 


Library, 


bibliotheque. 


Trunk, 


malle,f. coffre, m. 


Lid, 


couvercle, m. 


Tub, 


cuve. 


Little bell, , 


sonnette. 


Urn, 


tcrne. 


Looking-glass, 


miroir. 


Warming-pan, 


bassinoire,f. 


Match, 


allumette. 


Wax- candle. 


bougie. 


Mat, 


natte. 


Wood, 


bois. 


Mattre&s, 


matelas. 
moulin. 






Mill, 






Coffee-mill, 
Water-mill, 


moulin a eaf6. 
moulin a eau. 


20. Servants of a House. 


Wind-mill, 


moulin a vent. 


Butler, 


sommelier. 


Miniature, 


miniature. 


Coachman, 


cocker. 


Nail, 


clou. 


Cook, (man) 


cuisinier. 


Oven, 


four. 


Cookmaid, 


cuisiniere. 


Pail, 


seau. 


Chamber-maid, 


femme de chambre. 


Pendulum, 


pendule^ m. 


Door-keeper, 


portier^ concierge, 


Picture, . 


tableau. 




Suisse. 



VOCABULARY.—SUBSTANTIVES. 



411 



Footman, 

Groom, 

House-keeper, 
Postilion, 
Scullion, 
Servant, 
Sei'vant-maid, 
Valet, 

Waiting gentle- 
woman, 



iaquais, valet de 

pied, 
palfrenier, valet d^k- 

curie. 
femme de charge, 
postilion, 
marmiton. 
domestique, m. 8^ f. 
servayite. 
valet de chambre. 
suivante. 



21. Temporal Dignities. 



Ambassador, 

Baron, 

Baroness, 

Chancellor, 

Chief-justice, 

Count, 

Countess, 

Dauphin, 

Dauphiness, 

Deputy, 

Duke, 

Duchess, 

Emperor, 

Empress, 

Envoy, 

Esquire, 

Gentleman, 

Governor, 

King, 

Knight, 

Lord, 

Lord Keeper of the 

great seal, 
Madam, 
Marchioness, 
Marquis, 
Monarch, 
Nobleman, 
Peer, 

Plenipotentiary, 
President, 
Prime minister, 
Prince, 
Princess, 
Queen, 
Regent, 

Secretary of state, 
Sir, gentleman. 
Viscount, 
Viscountess, 



ambassadeur. 

baron. 

baronne. 

ckancelier, 

chef de jicstice. 

comte. 

comtesse. 

dauphin. 

dauphine. 

depute. 

due. 

duchesse. 

empereur. 

imptrairice. 

envoy e. 

kcuyer. 

gentilhomme. 

gouverneiir. 

roi. 

chevalier. 

lord. 

garde-des-sceaux. 

madame. 

marquise. 

marquis. 

monarque. 

noble, m. 

pair. 

plenipoteniiaire, m. 

president. 

premier minis tre. 

prince. 

princesse. 

reine. 

regent. 

secretaire d'etat. 

monsieur. 

vicomte. 

vicomiesse. 



22. Of Spin 


tiial Dignities, &c. 


Archbishop, 


archevcjue. 


Beadle, 


bedeau. 


Bishop, 


eveque. 


Canon, 


chanoine. 


Cardinal, 


cardinal. 


Clergy, 


clerge. 


Churchwarden, 


marguillier. 


Curate, 


cure. 


Deacon, 


diacre. 


Dean, 


doyen. 


Pope, 


pape. 


Priest, 


pretre. 


Primate, 


primal. 


Rector, 


recteur. 


Vicar, 


vicaire. 



23. Of the 

Aisle, 

Altar, 

Baluster, 

Bell, 

Bible, 

Burying place, 

vaults. 
Burial, 
Catechism, 
Cell, 
Chair, 
Chapel, 
Choir, 
Church, 
Church-gallery, 
Church-yard, 
Clock, 
Coffin, 

Communion-table, 
Convent, 
Cupola, 
Dome, 
Epitaph, 
Font, 
Front, 
Front gate of a 

church, 
Frontispiece, 
Gospel, 
Grave, 
Hearse, 

Hermitage, 
Inscription, 
Lord's prayer. 
Mausoleum, 
Monastery, 



Church, &c. 

aile. 

aidel. 

balustrade. 

cloche. 

bible. 

caveau^ stpulcrcj 

tombeau. 
enterrement. 
catechisme. 
cellule, 
chaise, 
chape lie. 
choeur. 
eglise. 

galeoie, tribune, 
cimetiere. 
horloge. 
cercueily bit re. 
table de communion, 
convent, 
coupole. 
dome, 
epitaphe. 
fonts, m. pi. 
facade, 
port ail. 

frontispice, m, 
evangile, m. 
fosse, tombeau. 
corbillard, chariot fu- 

nebre. 
hermitage. 
inscriptio7i. 
oraison dominicale. 
inausolte, m. 
monastere. 

t2 



412 



VOCABULARY.— SUBSTANTIVES. 



Monument, 


monument, iomheau. 


Glass-house, 


verrerie. 


Nave, or body of a 


nef,f. 


Hospital, 


hopital. 


church. 




The foundling hos- 


hopital des enfans 


Organ, 


orgite, m. orgues,f. pi. 


pital, 


trouves. 


Pew, bench, seat, 


banc. 


Hotel, 


hotel, 


Portico, piazza, 


poi'tique. 


Furnished hotel. 


hotel garni. 


Prayer-book, 


livre de prieres, des 


The Guildhall, 


hotel de ville. 




heures. 


town-house, 




Psalm, 


psaume. 


House, 


maison. 


Pulpit, 


chaire, tribune sacrte. 


The Upper House chambre haute ou des 


Rail, 


balustrade. 


or the House of Lords, {en Angle- 


Reading or singing 


lutrin. 


Lords or of Peers 


, terre): et cham- 


desk, 






bre superieure ou 


Sanctuary, 


sanctitaire. 




des Pairs, {en 


Sermon, 


sermon. 




France.) 


Solitude, 


solitude. 


The Lower House chambre basse ou des 


Spire, 


fleche, aiguille. 


or the House of communes, {en An- 


Stall, 


stalk. 


CommonS; 


gleterre ;) et cham- 


Steeple, 


docker. 




bre legislative ou 


Symbol, creed. 


symbole, m. 




des deputts, {en 


Synagogue, 


synagogue. 




France.) 


Tomb, 


tombe. 


Inn, 


auberge, hotelier ie. 


Vestry, 


sacristie. 


Infirmary, 


injxrmerie. 






King's palace. 
Lane, narrow street, 


palais du rot. 






ruelle, petite r>;e. 


24. Of ihe Town, its different 
Buildings, &c. 


Mad-house, 

Mansion-house, 

Market-hall, 


hopital des fous. 

mairie. 

halle. 


Academy, 


acadimie. 


Meat-market, 


boucherie. 


Admiralty, 


arniraide. 


The mint. 


hotel de la monnaie. 


Alley, or lane with 


- cul-de-sac. 


Obelisk, 


obelisque. 


out a thorough 


- 


Parish, 


paroisse. 


fare, 




Park, 


pare. 


Arch, 


arche. 


Parliament, 


parlemeni. 


Arcade, 


arcade. 


Passage, 


passage. 


Arsenal, 


arsenal. 


Pavillion,, 


pavilion. 


Bank, 


banque. 


Pavement, 


pave. 


Borough, 


bourg. 


Pedestal, 


piedestal. 


Bridewell, 


maison de correction. 


Pillar, 


pilier. 


Bridge, 


pont. 


Place, square, 


place. 


Building, 


edifice. 


Play-house, 


comedie. 


Bulwark, 


boulevard. 


Portico, 


portique. 


Castle, seat. 


chateau. 


Post-office, 


posie aux lettres. 


Church, 


eg Use. 


Letter-box, 


boite aux lettres. 


Coffee-house, 


cafe. 


General post. 


grande paste. 


College, 


college. 


Two -penny post, 


petite poste. 


Column, 


colonne. 


Provisions, 


provisions, denrtes. 


Colonnade, 


colonnade. 


Prison, 


prison. 


Cross-way, 


carrefour. 


Public-house, 


cabaret. 


Crown, 


couron7i€. 


Public tea-garden. 


guinguette. 


Custom-house, 


douane. 


Pyramid, 


pyramide. 


Dome, 


dome. 


Quay, 


quai. 


Dungeon, 


cachot. 


Rampart, 


rempart. 


Exchange, 


bourse. 


Sceptre, 


sceptre, m. 


Fish-market, 


poissonnerie. 


School, 


ecole. 


Foot-path, 


trottoir. 


Sign, 


enseigne. 


Foundery, 


fonderie. 


Slaughter-house, 


abatoir. 



VOCABULARY— SUBSTANTIVES. 



413 



Spunging-house, 


maison de sergent. 


Coach-box, 


sitge. 


Statue, 


statue. 


Coach-door, 


portiere. 


Street, 


rue. 


Coachman, 


cocher. 


Stronghold, fortified place forte. 


Curb, 


gourmette. 


place. 




Curtain, 


store, m. 


Suburb, 


faubourg. 


Diligence, 


dxligence. 


Tavern, 


taverne. 


Conductor, guard, 


conducteur. 


Throne, 


trone. 


Equipage, 


equipage. 


Town, 


ville. 


Front of a coach, 


devant d^ane voiture. 


Treasury, 


trtsorerie. 


Back of a coach, 


derrierc d'une voi- 


Turnpike-gate, 


barritre. 




ture. 


University, 


vniversite. 


Girth, 


sangle. 


Village, 


village. 


Glass, 


glace. 






Guide, 


guide. 






Halter, 


licou. 


25. Of the Magistrates of a 


Harness, 


harnais. 


Tow 


n, &C. 


Headstall, 


telle re. 






Host, 


hate. 


Alderman, 


alderman. 


Hostess, 


hotesse. 


Attorney, 


procureur. 


Landau, 


landau. 


Bailiff, 
Barrister, 
Chamber counsel. 
Gaoler, 


bailli. 

avocat plaidanf. 

avocat coiisultarit. 

geolier. 


Litter, 

Passage-boat, 
Post-chaise, 
Post-horse, 


litiere. 

coche, coche d'eau, m. 

chaise de poste. 

cheval de poste. 

postilion. 

vine. 

cheval frais ou de re- 

luis. 
exterieur d'une voi' 

iure, Vimpkriale. 
sclle. 
cheval de sclle ou de 


King's counsel, 
Jurisconsult, 
Lawyer, 
Mayor, 


avocat gtnirai. 
jurisconsulte. 
horn me de loi. 
maire. 


Postilion, 

Rein, 

Relay, fresh horse, 


Notary, 
Overseer, 
Police officer. 
Sheriff, 
Sheriff's officer, 


notaire. 
tnspecteur. 
officier de police, 
sherif. 
sergent. 


Roof of a coach. 

Saddle, 
Saddle-horse, 


Town marshal. 


marechal de ville. 


Sedan-chair, 
Spur, 


main, 
chaise a porteur. 






eperon. 


26. Of the Things used in Tra- 
velling y &c. 


Stage-coach, 

Stirrrup, 

Wheel, 


voiture publiquc. 

6trier. 

roue. 


Axle-tree, 


essieu. 


Whip, 


fouet. 


Berlin, 


berline. 
mors, f rein. 






Bit, 






Bridle, 
Cabriolet, 


bnde. 
cabriolet. 


27. Of Coin, Money, &c. 


Calash, 


caltche. 


Bank-note, 


billet de banque. 


Car, 


char. 


Centime, 


cenfitne, m. 


Caravan, 


caravane. 


Crown, 


ecu. 


Carriage, 


voiture, carrosse. 


Half-crown, 


petit ecu. 


Carriage and four 


, voiture a quatre, a six, 


Faithing, 


Hard. 


six, &c. 


Sfc. c/tevat/x. 


Two farthings. 


deux Hards. 


Gentleman's car- 


voiture de mailre. 


Franc, 


franc. 


riage. 




Guinea, 


guinee. 


Hired-carriage, 


voiture de louage. 


Half-guinea, 


demi-guime. 


Glass-coach, 


voiture de remise. 


Livre, 


livre. 


Hackney-coach, 


facre. 


Louis d'or. 


Louis d'or, piece d'or. 


Boot of a coach. 


cave, {sous le siege.") 


Money, 


argent. 


Chariot, 


chariot. 


A Napoleon, 


un Xapoll'on ou une 


Coach-be^m, 


ftche. 




piece de vingt francs. 



414 



VOCABULARY— SUBSTANTIVES. 



Penny, deitx sous. 

Half-penny, sou. 

Piastre, piastre. 

A piece of gold of une piece d\jr de 
twenty or forty vingt ou de qua- 
francs, ra7ite francs. 

Pound sterling, livre sterhng. 

Shilling, schelling ou chelin. 



28. Of^ 


'eight 


s and Measures. 


Acre, 




acre, arpent. 


Barrel, cask. 




baril. 


Bushel, 




boisseau. 


Butt or pipe, 




piece, pipe, tonneau. 


Eighth part. 




huitieme. 


Ell, 




aune. 


Fathom, 




toise. 


Foot, 




pied. 


Grain, 




grain. 


Hogshead, 




viuid. 


Inch, 




pouce. 


League, 




lieue. 


Litre, 




litre., m. 


Mile, 




mille. 


Ounce, 




once. 


Half-ounce, 




demi-once. 


Peck, 




picotin. 


Pint, 




pinte. 


Half-pint, 




demi-pinte, chopine. 


Pound, 




iivre. 


Half-pound, 




demi-livre. 


Quarter of a 


pound, quarteron. 


Quart, 




quarte. 


Quarter, fourth part, quart. 


Quintal, a hundred 


I quintal. 


weight. 






Tun, 




tonneau. 


Weight, 




poids. 


Yard, 




vfrge. 



29. Of the Theatre, 8fc. 

Actor, 

Actress, 

Amphitheatre, 

Artist, 

Box, 

First tier of boxes, 

Second tier of boxes. 

Comedy, 

Company of players 



Concert, 
Curtain, 
Dancing, 



acteur. 

actrice. 

amphitheatre. 

artiste. 

loge. ^ 

premieres loges,f. pi. 

secondes loges,f. pi. 

comtdie, 

compagnie ou troupe 

de comediens. 
concert, 
rideau, toile. 
dame. 



Director or mana- 


directeur. . 


ger. 




Drama, 


drame. 


Farce, 


farce. 


Fencing, 


escrime. 


Flute, 


flute. 


The gods. 


paradis. 


Harp, 


harpe. 


Music, 


musique. 


Opera, 


opera. 


Orchestra, 


orchestre. 


Pantomime, 


pantomime. 


Part, 


rdle. 


Little piece. 


petite piece. 


Piano, 


piano. 


Pit, 


parterre. 


Play, 


spectacle. 


Player, 


comedien,eomedien7ie. 


Prompter, 


souffieur. 


Scene, 


coulisse. 


Scenery, 


decorations, f. pi. 


Singing, 


chant. 


Stage, theatre, 


theatre. 


Stroller, 


comedien de cam- 




pagne. 


Ticket, 


billet. 


Tiring or dressing 


■ foyer. 


room. 




Tragedy, 


tragtdie. 


VioUn, 


violon. 


30. Of 


School, 8^C. 


Academy, 


academic. 


Address, 


adresse. 


Arithmetic, 


arithmetique. 


Astronomy, 


astronomic. 


Book, 


livre. 


Botany, 


botanique. 


Cover, 


enveloppe. 


Dictionary, 


dictionnaire. 


Divinity, 


theologie. 


Drawing, 


dessin. 


Eloquence, 


eloquence. 


Geography, 


geographic. 


Geometry, 


geometric. 


Governess, 


gouvernante. 


Grammar, 


grammaire. 


Histovy, 


histoire. 


Ink, 


encre. 


Letter, 


lettre. 


Logic, 


logique. 


Master, 


maitre. 


Mathematics, 


viatMmatiques, f. pi. 


Mistress, 


maiiresse. 


Navigation, 


navigation* 



VOCABULARY— SUBSTANTIVES. 



MS 



Orthography, 


orthographe. 


Page, 


page. 


Painting, 


peinture. 


Paper, 


papier. 


Paper, (post,) 


papier a lettres. 


Pencil 


crayon. 


Penknife, 


canif. 


Pen, 


plume. 


Philosophy, 


philosophie. 


Physic, 


medecine. 


Poetry, 


poesie. 


Point, dot. 


point. 


Pupil, 


tleve. 


Quire of paper. 


main tie papier. 


Rule, 


regie. 


Sand, 


sable. 


Seal, 


cachet. 


School, 


icole. 


Scholar, , 


ecolier, tcoliere. 


Sculpture, 


sculpture. 


Sheet of paper, 


feuille de papier. 


Signature, 


signature. 


Slate, 


ardoise. 


Surgery, 


chirurgie. 


Swing, 


lalan^oire, brandil- 




loire. 


Teacher, 


maitre, maUresse. 


Translation, 


traduction. 


Wafer, 


pain a cacheler. 


31. Of the World in general, Sfc. 


Africa, 


Afrique. 


America, 


Amerique. 


Angel, 


ange. 


Archangel, 


archange. 


Asia, 


Asie. 


Climate, 


climat. 


Comet, 


comtte. 


Creature, 


creature. 


Demon, 


demon. 


Devil, 


diahle. 


East, 


est, orient. 


Eclipse, 


6clipse. 


Element, 


6l6ment. 


Europe, 


Europe. 


Firmament, 


firmament. 


God, 


Dieu. 


Holy Ghost, 


Saini-Esprit. 


Heaven, 


del. 


Hell, 


enfer. 


Jesus-Christ, 


Jesus-Christ. 


Liglit, 


lurniere,jour. 


Moon, 


lune. 


Moon-light, 


clair de la lune. 


Moonshine, 


clair de lune. 


New moon. 


nouvelle lane. 



Half-moon. 

Full-moon, 

Nature, 

North, 

Paradise, 

Planet, 

Region, 

South, 



Star, 

Sun, 

Rainbow, 

Ray of the sun, 

Trinity, 

Universe, 

West, 

World, 



demi-lune. 

pleine lune. 

nature. 

nord, septentrion, 

Paradis, 

plantte. 

region. 

sud, and midi in 
speaking of the 
south of a coun- 
try. 

astre, etoiie. 

soleil. 

arc-en-ciel. 

rayon du soleil. 

Triniie. 

vnive7's. 

Quest, Occident. 

monde. 



32. Of the Atmosphere, 8fc. 



Calm, 

Clearness, 

Cloud, 

Cold, 

Cool, 

Dampness, 

Darkness, 

Dew, 

Dryness, 

Earthquake, 

Exhalation, 

Frost, 

Hoar-frost, 

Glazed-frost, 

Hail, 

Heat, 

Ice, 

Lightning, 

Mist, fog, 

Phenomenon, 

Rain, 

Serene, 

Shadow, 

Shower, 

Snow, 

Storm, 

Tempest, 

Time and weather, 

Thaw, 

Thunder, 

Thunderbolt, 

Clap of thunder. 

Vapour, 



calme. 

clartL 

mite, nuage, mie. 

froid. 

frais. 

humidite. 

obscuritc, f. tcnebres, 

f.pl. 
rosee. 
secheresse. 

tremblement de terre. 
exhalaison. 
gelce. 

gelee blanche, 
verglas. 
grele. 

cha/eur, chaud. 
glace, 
eclair, 
brotdllard. 
phenomtne. 
pluie. 
serein, 
ombre, 
ondee. 
neige. 
orage. 
tempete. 
temps, 
d'egel. 
tonnerre. 
foudre. 
cotipde tonnerre, eclat 

de tonnerre. 
vapezir, f. 



416 



VOCABULARY— SUBSTANTIVES. 



Wind, 


vent. 




Charcoal, 


charbon de bois. 


Whirlwind, 


tourhillon. 




Chips, shavings, 


copeaux. 


Zephyr, 


zephyr. 




Conflagration, 
/great fire,) 
Live coal, 
Pit-coal, 


incendie. 


33. Of Water, S^c, 


braise. 

charbon de lerre. 


Bath, 


bain* 




Fagot, 


fagot. 


Bay, 


bate. 




Fire, 


feu. 


Brook, 


ruisseau. 




Flame, 


flamme. 


Canal, 


canal. 




Glimmer, faint light 


, lueur. 


Cascade, 


cascade. 




Smoke, 


fumee. 


Cistern, 


citerne. 




Soot, 


sine. 


Current, 


courant. 




Spark, 


etineelle. 


Deluge, 


deluge. 




Wood, 


bois. 


Fountain, 


fontaine. 








Gulf, 


yolfe. 








Harbour, 
Inundation, 


port, havre. 
inondation. 




35. Of the Earth, &c. 


Lake, 


lac. 




Antipodes, 


antipodes. 


Marsh, 


marais. 




Bridge, 


pont. 


Marshy place. 


martcage. 




Brick, 


briqtte. 


Ocean, 


ocean. 




Cape, 


cap. 


Overflowing, 


debordement. 




Cavern, 


caverne. 


Pond, 


etang. 




Causeway, 


chaussee. 


Reservoir, 


reservoir. 




Cement, 


ciment. 


River, 


riviere, Jleuve. 




Chalk, 


craie. 


Source 


source 


^ 


Coast, sea-side, 


cote. 


Bank 


03 rive 


'^1 


Colony, 


colonic. 


Bed 


,-S l^i 


S 


Country, 


pays. 


Brink, border 


d lord 


S; 


County, 


comt6. 


Stream 


^/^ 


5S 


Continent, 


continent. 


Mouth 


embouchure 


^ 


Degree, 


degre. 


Road, 


rade. 




Desert, 


desert. 


Sea, 


mer. 




Dirt, 


boue. 


Arm of the sea, 


bras de mer. 




Ditch, 


fossL 


Sea-port, 


port de mer. 




Dust, 


poussiere. 


Shore 


^ rivage 


j^ 


Earth, 


ierre. 


Flux and reflux 


^ flux et reflux 




Empire, 


empire. 


The waves 


. 5J iles ondes, f. pi. 


Equator, 


tquateur. 




g Xlesflots,m.pl. 


4j 


Estate, 


etat. 




o ' fes V agues,/, pi. 


^ 


Field, 


champ. 


Sluice, 


ecluse. 




Flint, 


pierre a feu. 


Strait, 


d^troit. 




Globe, 


globe. 


Tide, 


maree. 




Granite, 


granit. 


Torrent, 


torrent. 




Gravel, 


gravier. 


Water, 


eau. 




Height, 


hauteur. 


Rain-water, 


eau de pluie. 




Hemisphere, 


hemisphere, m. 


Spring-water, 


eau de fontaine, e 


au 


Hill, 


col line. 




de source. 




Hillock, 


petite colline., cole, 


River-water, 


eau de riviere. 






cbteau. 


Pump-water, 


eau de pompe. 




Horizon, 

Island, 

Isthmus, 


horizon, 
tie. 






isthme. 


34. C 


)f Fire, Sfc, 




Kingdom, 


royaume. 


Ashes, 


cendre. 




Latitude, 


latitude. 


Billet, piece or 1 


3g bicche. 




Lime, 


chat<x. 


of wood, 






Longitude, 


longitude. 



VOCABULARY— SUBSTANTIVES, 



417 



Mine, 


mine. 


Iron, 


M. 


Mortar, 


mortier. 


Iron-wire, 


f I defer. 


Mount, 


mont. 


Lead, 


plomb. 


Mountain, 


montagne. 


Loadstone, 


aimant. 


Top 

Summit . 
Foot }^ 
Bottom ° 


^ ^^"* 1 


Nitre, 


nitre, m. 


c sommet ^ 

If it 


Pearl, 

Pewter, 

Platina, 


perle. 
6lain. 
platiiie. 


Declivity 


1 pente, pen- g 
chant. ) 


Porphyry, 
Rosin, 


porphyre, m. 
resine. 


Path, 


setitier. 


Ruby, 


rub is. 


Peninsula, 


presqu'Ue. 


Salt, 


sel. 


Plain, 


plaine. 


Saltpetre, 


salpetre. 


Plaster, 


pldtre. 


Silver, 


argent. 


Pole, 


pole. 


Quick-silver, 


vif-argent. 


Precipice, 


precipice. 


Steel, 


acier. 


Principality, 


principaut^. 


Sulphur, 


soufre. 


Promontory, 


promontoire. 


Tin, 


fer-blanc. 


Province, 


province. 


Topaz, 


topaze. 


Quarry, 


carriere. 


Turpentine, 


terebenthine. 


Republic, 


repnblique. 


Vitriol, 


vitriol. 


Road, 


route, chemin. 
roc, rocher. 






Rock, 






Top of a rock. 
Rock in the sea. 


cime (Tun rocher. 
tcueil. 


37. Of Animals and Birds, 


Steep rock. 


rocher escarp^. 


Ape, 


singe. 


Sand, 


sable. 


Ass, 


line. 


Sand-bank, 


banc de sable. 


She-ass, 


&nesse. 


Slate, 


ardoise. 


Ass's colt. 


anon. 


Sphere, 


sphere. 


Bear, 


ours. 


Stone, 


pierre, caillou. 


She-bear, 


ourse. 


Free-stone, 


pierre de taille. 


Bear's cub. 


ourson. 


Territory, 


ter'ritoire. 


Bitch, 


chienne. 


Tile, 


iuile. 


Black-bird, 


merle. 


Valley, 


vallte. 


Bull, 


taureau. 


Little valley. 


vallon. 


Calf, 


veau. 


Way, 


chemin. 


Camel, 


chameau. 


Zenith, 


zenith. 


Canary-bird, 


serin. 






Hen Canary-bird, 
Cat, 


serine. 






chat. 


36. Of Metals, Minerals, Pre- 
cious Stones, &c. 


She-cat, 

Cock, 

Colt, 


chatte. 

coq. 

poulain. 


Amethyst, 


amethyste. 


Mare-Colt, 


pouliche. 


Arsenic, 


arsenic. 


Cow, 


vache. 


Bitumen, 


bitume. 


Crow, 


corneille. 


Brass, 


cuivre jautie. 


Crocodile,' 


crocodile. 


Brass-wire, 


Jil de cuivre jaune. 


Cuckoo, 


coucou. 


Bronze, 


bronze. 


Dog, 


chien. 


Copper, 


cuivre. 


Eagle, 


aigle. 


Coral, 


corail. 


Eaglet, 


aiglon. 


Cornelian, 


coi-naline. 


Elephant, 


Elephant. 


Crystal, 


cristal. 


Fawn, 


faon. 


Diamond, 


diamant. 


Fox, 


renard. 


Emerald, 


imeraude. 


Bitch fox, 


renarde. 


Glass, 


verre. 


Frog, 


grenouille. 


Gold, 


or. 


Goldfinch, 


chardonneret 
T 5 



"418 



VOCABULARY— SUBSTANTIVES. 



Greyhound-bitch, 


levrette. 


He-goat, 


bouc. 


She -goat, 


chevre. 


Hare, 


lievre. 


Heifer, 


genisse. 


Hen, 


poule. 


Young hen. 


poutette. 


Moor-hen, 


poule (Peau. 


Turkey-hen, 


poule dCInde. 


Horsed 


cheval. 


Hog, 


cochon, pourcea 


Kid, 


chevreau. 


Lamb, 


agnemi. 


Lion, 


lion. 


Lioness, 


lionne. 


Mare, 


jument^ cavcde. 


Magpie, 


pie. 


Mouse, 


souris. 


Mule, 


mulet. 


She-mule, 


mule. 


Nightingale, 


rossignol. 


hibou. 


O^,' 


boeuf. 


Parrot, 


perroquet. 


Pigeon, 


pigeon. 


Poult, chick, ■ 


poulet. 


Rabbit, 


lapin. 


Ram, 


btlier. 


Rat, 


rat. 


Raven, 


corbeau. 


Roebuck, 


chevreidl. 


Roe, 


chevrette. 


Fawn of a roe. 


chevrillard. 


Robin-red-breast, 


rouge-gorge, m 


Sheep, 


brebis, mouton. 


Sow,_ 


truie. 


Sucking-pig, 


cochon de lait. 


Guinea-pig, 


cochon d'lnde. 


Sparrow, 


moineau. 


Stag, 


cerf. 


Stork, 


cigogne. 


Swan, 


cygne. 


Swallow, 


hirondelle. 


Tiger, 


tigre. 


Tigress, 


tigresse. 


Tortoise, turtle, 


tortue. 


Turtle-dove, 


tourterelle. 


Vulture, 


vautour. 


Wolf, 


loup. 


She-wolf, 


louve. 


Wolf's cub, 


louveteau. 


Wild-boar, 


sang Her. 


38. Insects and Reptiles 


Ant, 


fourmi. 


Bee, 


abeille. 



Butterfly, 


papillon. 


Caterpillar, 


chenille. 


Fly, 


mouche. 


Glow-worm, 


ver luisant. 


Gnat, 


cousin, moucheron 


Grasshopper, 


sauterelle. 


Locust, 


cigale. 


Serpent, 


serpent. 


Silkworm, 


ver a soie. 


Snake, 


couleuvre. 


Snail, 


lima^on. 


Spider, 


araignie. 


Tapeworm, 


ver solitaire. 


Worm, 


ver. 



39. Of the Sounds of Animals and 
Birds, and the parts belonging 
to them. 



Barking, 


ahoiement. 


Beak, 


bee. 


Bleating, 


belement. 


Braying, 


braiment. 


Cage, 


cage. 


Feather, 


plume. 


Female, 


femelle. 


Hair, 


poil. 


Honey, 


viieh 


Horse-hair, 


crin. 


Horse or Lion's 


crinicre. 


mane. 




Lowing, 


mugissement. 


Male, 


male. 


Mewing, 


miaulement. 


Neighing, 


hetinissement. 


Paw, 


patte. 


Singing, 


chant. 


Skin, 


pern. 


Tail, 


queue. 


Warbling, 


gazouillement. 


Wax, 


cire. 


Wing, 


aile. 



40. Illness and Distempers 

Ache, sickness, mal. 

Agony, agonie. 

Ague, or shivering- j'?eure avec frisson, 

fit. 

Bleeding, saignee. 

Blister, vesicatoire. 

Bloody-flux, Jiux de sang. 

Boil, furoncle, m. clou. 

Blow, coup. 

Bruise, contusion. 



&C. 



VOCABULARY— SUBSTANTIVES. 



419. 



Chilblain, 


engelure. 


Small-p«>x, 


variole, petite vtrole 


Cold, 


rhume. 


Sore throat, 


mal de gorge. 


Cold in the head, 


rhume de cerveau. 


Sore eyes, 


mal (Pyeux. 


Colic, 


coliqtte. 


Stone, 


pierre. 


Consultation, 


consultation. 


Swelling, 


enflure. 


Convulsion, 


convulsion. 


Swoon, 


evanouissement. 


Convalescence, 


convalescence. 


S}Tnptom, 


symptome. 


Corn, 


cor. 


Tooth-ache, 


mal de dents. 


Cough, 


toux. 


Tumour, swelling. 


iumeur. 


Cure, 


gutrison. 


Ulcer, sore, 


idcere. 


Cut, 


coupure. 


Wound, 


blessure. 


Death, 


mort. 


Wryneck, stiff neck 


, torticolis. 


Uplirinm. 


delire. 






Disease, illness. 

Dropsy, 

Drug, 


maladie. 

hydropisie. 

drogue. 


41. Of the Soul y its Faculties, 
Virtues, Vices, &c. 


Epilepsy, 


epilepsie. 


Accuracy, exactness 


, exactitude. 


Fainting, 


dtfaillance, pamoison. 


Activity, 


activite. 


-balling-sickness. 


haui-mal, ma/ caduc. 


Address, 


adresse. 


Fever, 


fievre. 


Admiration, 


admiration. 


Fit, 


acccs. 


Adversity, 


adve7'site. 


Flux, 


flux. 


Affability, 


affabilite. 


Fluxion, 


fluxion. 


AlFection, 


affection* 


Frenzy, 


frenesie. 


Affront, 


affront. 


Gout, 


goutle. 


Agreeableness, 


agrement. 


Gravel, stone. 


gravelle, pierre. 


Ambition, 


ambition. 


Griping pains. 


tranchies,f.pl. 


Amazement, 


etonnement. 


Head-ache, 


mal de tete. 


Anger, 


coltre. 


Hoarseness, 


enrouement. 


Animosity, 


animosity. 


Hooping-cough, 


coqueluche. 


Appearance, 


apparence. 


Itch, 


gale. 


Apprehension, 


apprehension. 


Itching, 


demangeaison. 


Assassination, 


assassinat. 


Jaundice, 


jawiisse. 


Assurance, insu- 


assiirance. 


Leprosy, 


lepre. 


rance, 




Looseness, 


devoiement, flux de 


Audacity, 


audace. 




venire. 


Avarice, 


avarice. 


Madness, 


folic, rage. 


Aversion, 


aversion. 


Mania, rage, 


manie, rage. 


Avidity, 


avidite. 


Measles, 


rougeole. 


Babbling, prattle, 


bavardage. 


Megrim, 


migraine. 


Boldness, 


hardiesse. 


Miscarriage, 


fausse-couche. 


Bravery, 


bravoure. 


Pain, 


peine, douleur. 


Brutality, 


brutalite. 


Pain in the bowels 


mal de ventre. 


Calumny, 


calomnie. 


Pill, 


pilule. 


Candour, 


candeur. 


Pimple, ' 


bouton. 


Capacity, 


capacite. 


Physic, 


m6decine. 


Care, 


soin. 


Plague, 


peste. 


Charity, 


charite. 


Powder, 


poudre. 


Chastity, 


ch as tete. 


Prescripfion, 


ordonnance. 


Chastisement, 


chatiment. 


Pustule, 


pustule. 


Chat, 


babil. 


Relapse, 


rechuie. 


Cheat, cheating, 


fraude, fourberie, 


Remedy, 


remede. 


trick. 


t7'omperie. 


Scar, 


cicatrice. 


Civility, 


civilite. 


Scratch, 


egratignure. 


Coarseness, 


grossierete, nidease. 


Scurvy, 


scorbut. 


Common sense, 


sens comrnun. 


Sea-sickness, 


mal de mer. 


Compassion, 


compassion. 


Sirup, 


strop. 


Complacency, 


condescendajice. 



420 



VOCABULARY— SUBSTANTIVES. 



Complaisance, 


complaisance. 


Ferocity, 


ferocity. 


Conception, 


conception. 


Fineness, 


finesse. 


Concord, 


Concorde. 


Firmness, 


fermeie. 


Confidence, 


confdence, confance. 


Foresight, 


prevoyance. 


Constanc}^, 


Constance. 


Forgetfulness, 


oubli. 


Contempt, 


mepris. 


Fragility, 


fragilite. 


Contentment, 


contentemeni. 


Frankness, 


franchise. 


Contract, 


contrat. 


Friendship, 


amitii. 


Coquetry, 


coquetterie. 


Fright, terror. 


frayeur, effroi, epou' 


Courage, 


courage. 




vante. 


Cowardice, 


piisillanimitt , 


Frugality, 


frugalile. 


Crime, 


crime. 


Fury, 


furie,fureur. 


Cruelty, 


cruatitt. 


Generosity, 


generositi. 


Cunning, 


ruse. 


Genius, 


g^nie. 


Daintiness, 


friandise. 


Gift, 


don. 


Debauchery, 


debauche. 


Gluttony, 


glouto7xnerie^ goitV' 


Defect, 


defaut. 




mandise. 


Deposit, trust. 


depot. 


Goodness, 


bonte. 


Despair, 


desespoir. 


Good sense. 


bon sens. 


Desire, 


dtsir. 


Good-will, benevo- 


bienveillance. 


Diligence, 


diligence. 


lence. 




Disagreeableness, 


desagrement. 


Grace, 


grace. 


Discouragement, 


dtcouragemeni. 


Gratitude, 


gratitude, reconnais- 


Discretion, 


discretion. 




sance. 


Disgust, 


dp gout. 


Grief, 


chagrin. 


Dishonesty, 


malhonnetete. 


Habit, 


habitude. 


Dishonour, 


deshonneur. 


Happiness, 


bonheur. 


Disinterestedness, 


dtsintei'essemeni. 


Haste, 


'hate. 


Disorder, 


desordre. 


Hatred, 


haine. 


Displeasure, 


deplaisir. 


Haughtiness, 


hauteur, morgite. 


Disposition, 


dispositio7i. 


Hope, 


esperance, espoir. 


Dispute, 


dispute. 


Honesty, 


hoimetete. 


Dissension, 


dissension. 


Honour, 


honne.ur. 


Dissolution, 


dissolutio7i. 


Humility, 


ht/milite. 


Doubt, 


doute. 


Idea, 


idee. 


Drunkenness, 


ivresse. 


Imagination, 


imagination. 


Duplicity, 


duplicite. 


Imbecility, 


imb ceil lite. 


Eagerness, 


empressement. 


Immodesty, 


immodestie. 


Economy, 


economic. 


Impatience, 


impatience. 


Effrontery, 


effronterie. 


Impoliteness, 


iinpolitesse. 


Emulation, 


emulation. 


Imprudence, 


imprudence. 


Enchantment, 


enchantemeni. 


Impudence, 


impudence. 


Encouragement, 


encouragement. 


Impurity, 


impurete. 


Envy, 


envie. 


Incivility, 


incivilite. 


Equity, 


equite. 


Inclination, 


inclination. 


Error, 


erreur. 


Inconstancy, 


inconsiance. 


Esteem, 


estime. 


Indifference, 


indifference. 


Excess, 


exces. 


Indignation, 


indignation. 


Exile, 


exit, bannissement. 


Indignity, 


iridignite. 


Extravagance, 


extravagance. 


Indiscretion, 


indiscretion. 


Faith, 


foi. 


Industry, 


industrie. 


Faithfulness, 


fidelite.^ 


Ingratitude, 


ingratitude* 


Falsehood, 


faussete. 


Iniquity, 


iniquite. 


Fancy, 


fa7itaisie. 


Injustice, 


injustice. 


Fault, 


fauie. 


Innocence, 


innocence. 


Favour, 


faveur. 


Insult, 


insulte. 


Fear, 


veur^ crainte. 


Intrepidity, 


intrepidite. 



VOCABULARY.—SUBSTANTIVES. 



421 



Intrigue, 


intrigue. 


Prosperity, 


prosperite. 


Irregularity, 


dereglement. 


Prudence, 


prudence. 


Jealousy, 


jalousie. 


Punishment, 


punition. 


Joy, 


joie. 


Pusillanimity, 


pusillanimite. 


Judgment, 


jugement. 


Quarrel, 


guerelle. 


Justice, 


justice. 


Quickness, 


vitesse. 


Knowledge, 


connaissance. 


Raillery, 


raillerie. 


Laziness, 


paresse. 


Rancour, grudge. 


rancune. 


Liberality, 


liberalite. 


Rashness, 


ttmtrit^. 


Liberty, 


liberie. 


Reason, 


raison. 


Libertinism, 


libertimge. 


Recollection, 


souvenir. 


License, 


licence. 


Regret, 


regret. 


Lie, 


mensonge. 


Remembrance, 


souvenir. 


Lightness, 


Itgerete. 


Repentance, 


re pent ir. 


Likelihood, 


vraisemblanee. 


Reputation, 


reputation. 


Love, 


amour. 


Resentment, 


ressentiment. 


Loyalty, 


loijautk* 


Reward, 


recompense. 


Luxury, 


luxe. 


Roguery, 


vagabondage, fripon 


Magnanimity, 


magnanimity. 




nerie. 


Malice, 


malice. 


Rudeness, 


rudesse, grossieret^. 


Manners, 


mameres, mocurs. 


Sadness, 


tristesse. 


Manslaughter, 


homicide. 


Sagacity, 


sagacite. 


Melancholy, 


mtlancolie. 


Sale, 


rente. 


Mercy, 


misericorde. 


Satisfaction, 


satisfaction. 


Misfortune, 


malAeur. 


Science, 


science. 


Mistake, 


mtprise, erreur. 


Sense, 


sens. 


Mockery, 


, moquerie. 


Sentiment, 


sentiment. 


Modesty, 


modestie, pudeur. 


Shame, 


honte. 


Morals, 


moeurs, f. pi. 


Simplicity, 


simplicite. 


Murder, 


meurtre. 


Sincerity, 


sincerite. 


Negligence, 


negligence. 


Skill, 


habilete. 


Oath, 


serment. 


Slander, 


medisance. 


Obstinacy, 


opiniutrete, eniete- 


Slovenliness, 


malproprete. 




ment. 


Sobriety, 


sobriete. 


Opinion, 


opinion. 


Softness, 


mollesse. 


Outrage, 


outrage. 


Soul, 


ame. 


Pain, 


peine. 


Spirit, mind. 


esprit. 


Passion, 


passion. 


Spite, pet. 


depit. 


Patience, 


patience. 


Sport, play. 


badinage. 


Peace, 


paix. 


Story, tale. 


conte. 


Penetration, 


penetration. 


Strength, 


force. 


Perfidy, 


perjxdie. 


Stupidity, 


stupidite. 


Perjury, 


parjure. 


Subtilty, 


subtilite. 


Pity, 


pitit. 


Suspicion, 


soup^on. 


Pleasure, 


plaiiir. 


Sweetness, 


douceur. 


Politeness, 


politesse. 


Tediousness, 


ennm. 


Poltronry, 


poltronnerie. 


Temperance, 


temperance. 


Practice,. 


pratique. 


Terror, 


terreur. 


Present, 


present. 


Theft, robbery. 


vol. 


Presumption, 


prtsomption. 


Thought, 


pensee. 


Price, 


prix. 


Timidity, 


timidite. 


Pride, 


Jiertty orgueih 


Tranquillity, 


tranquillite. 


Probability, 


probability. 


Treason, 


trahison. 


Probity, 


probite. 


Trick, 


tour. 


Prodigality, 


p7'odigalit6. 


Truth, 


veritt. 


Promptitude, 


promptitude. 


Understanding, 


enfendement 


Propensity, 


penchant. 


Uneasiness, 


inquietude. 



422 



VOCABULARY.— SUBSTANTIVES. 



Union, 


union. 


File, 


lime. 


Use, 


usage. 


Fishing, 


pSche. 


Usury, 


usure. 


Flax, 


lin. 


Valour, 


valeur. 


Flower-garden, 


parterre. 


Vengeance, 


vengeance. 


Forage, 


fourrage. 


Venom, 


venin. 


Furrow, 


sillon. 


Vice, 


vice. 


Garden, 


jardin. 


Virtue, 


vertu. 


Gardener, 


jardinier. 


Vivacity, 


vivacite. 


Gardening, 


jardinage. 


Wager, bet, 


gageure, pari. 


Grain, 


grain. 


Weakness, 


faiblesse. 


Grass, 


herbe. 


Whim, caprice, 


caprice. 


Green-house, 


serre. 


Wickedness, 


mechancete. 


Grotto, 


grotte. 


Will, 


volontk. 


Grove, 


bosquet. 


Wisdom^ 


sagesse. 


Hamper, 


hotte. 


Wish, 


desir, souhait, 


Hammer, 


marteau. 


Wit, 


esprit, bel-esprit. 


Harvest, 


moisson. 


W^rath, 


courroux. 


Hay, 


foin. 


Wrong, 


tort. 


Heart's ease. 


pensee. 






Hedge, 
Hemp, 


haie. 






chanvre, m. 


42. Of the Country, and Things 


Highway, 


grand-chemin. 


belonging to the Country, ^c. 


House, 
Hunting, 


maison. 
chasse. 


Agriculture, 


agriculture. 


Hyacinth, 


jacinthe. 


Amaranthus, 


amaranthe. 


Ivy, 


lierre, m. 


Avenue, 


avenue. 


Kitchen-garden, 


jardin potaaer. 


Axis, 


axe, essieu. 


Lily, 


lis. 


Barley, 


orge. 


Liquorice, 


reglisse. 


Barn, 


grange. 


Manor-house, 


manoir, maison sei' 


Bower, 


berceau. 




gneuriale. 


Cart, 


charrette. 


Marigold, 


souci. 


Covered cart, 


fourgon. 


Marsh, 


7narais. 


Castle, mansion. 


chateau. 


Meadow, 


pre, prairie. 


Cattle, 


hktail. 


Mill, 


moulin. 


Clown, 


manant. 


Mint, 


menthe. 


Corn, 


hit. 


Misletoe, 


gui. 


Corporation; the 


commune. 


Moss, 


mousse. 


inhabitants of 


a 


Mower, 


faucheur. 


village; the place 


Nail, 


clou. 


where they as- 


Neat villa. 


maison de plaisance. 


semble; common 


Nightshade, 


belle-de-mdt. 


pasture. 




Nursery-ground, 


pepiniere. 


Country, 


campagne, pays. 


Oats, 


avoine. 


Country-house, 


maisoji de campagne. 


Orchard, 


verger. 


Country- man. 


■paysan. 


Pasturage, 


pdturage. 


Country-woman, 


paysanne. 


Path, 


sentier. 


Crop, 


recolte. 


Perspective, 


perspective. 


Daffodil, 


narcisse, m. 


Pigeon-house, 


colomhier. 


Dairy, 


laiterie. 


Pink, 


ceillet. 


Ditch, 


fosse, fosse. 


Pitchfork, 


fourche. 


Dunghillj 


fumier. 


Plough, 


charrue. 


Ear of corn. 


epi de blL 


Poacher, 


braconnier. 


Earth, 


terre. 


Poppy, 


jpavot. 


Farm, 


ferme, m6tairie. 


Prospect, 


vue. 


Farmer, 


fermier. 


Quickset hedge. 


haie vive. 


Field, 


champ. 


Race, 


course. 



VOCABULARY.— SUBSTANTIVES. 



423 



Rake, 


rdteau. 


Filbert-tree, 


avelinier. 


Reaper, 


moissonneur. 


Fir-tree, 


sapin. 


Rhubarb, 


rkubarbe. 


Flower, 


fieur. 


Rice, 


riz. 


Graft, 


greffe. 


Road, 


route, chemin. 


Hazel-nut-tree, 


coudner. 


Roller, 


rouleau. 


Hazel-tree, 


noisetier. 


Rose, 


rose. 


Hawthorn, 


aiibepine. 


Saw, 


scie. 


Laurel, 


laurter. 


Scythe, 


faux. 


Leaf, 


feuille. 


Senna, 


sene. 


Lemon-tree, 


ciironnier. 


.Sheaf, 


gerbe. 


Lilac, 


lilas. 


Shepherd, 


berger. 


Linden-tree, 


tilleuL 


Small wood, 


petit bois. 


Medlar-tree, 


ntflier. 


Spade, 


beche. 


Mulberry-tree, 


viurier. 


Stable, 


ttable, ecurie. 


M^Ttle-tree, 


myrte. 


Straw, 


faille. 


Oak, 


chene. 


Sunflower, 


soleil, tournesol. 


Olive-tree, 


Olivier. 


Swimming, 


nage. ^ 


Orangery, 


orangerie. 


Thatched cottage. 


chaumiere. 


Orange-tree, 


oranger. 


Tillage, husbandry, 


labourage. 


Palm-tree, 


palmier. 


Tulip, 


tulipe. 


Peach-tree, 


pecher. 


Village, 


village. 


Pear-tree, 


poii'ier. 


Vine, 


vigne. 


Plum-tree, 


prunier. 


Vineyard, . 


vignoble, m. 


Pomegranate-tree, 


grenadier. 


Vintage, 


vendange. 


Poplar, 


peuplier. 


Violet, 


violette. 


Raspberry-bush, 


framboisier. 


Waggon, 


voiture, chariot, char- 


Rose-bush, 


rosier. 




rette. 


Sap, 


seve. 


Walk, 


promenade. 


Seed, 


graine. 


Wateriug-pot, 


arrosoir. 


Shrub, 


arbrisseau. 


Water-spout, 


jet d'eau* 


Sprig, spray, 


jet. 


Wheat, 


froment. 


Strawberry-plant, 


fraisier. 


Wheel-barrow, 


brouelte. 


Thicket of thorns. 


buisson d'epines. 


Wheel-rut, 


rainure, orniere. 


Tlrorn, 


epine. 






Tree, 


arbre. 


43. Of Trees, Shrubs, &c. 


Vein, grain. 
Vine, 


veine. 
vigne. 


Almoud-tree, 


amandier. 


Walnut-tree, 


noyer. 


Apple-tree, 


pommier^ 


Willow-tree, 


saule. 


Apricot-tree, 


abricoiier. 


Yew-tree, 


if- 


Ash-tree, 


frSne. 
icorce. 






Bark, 






Beech-tree, 
Box-tree, 


hitre. 
buis. 


44:.Ofihediffei 


ent Professions y &c 


Branch, bough. 


branche, rameau. 


Accoucheur, 


accoucheur. 


Brier, 


ronce. 


Apothecary, 


apothicaire, pharma 


Cedar, 


cedre. 




cien. 


Cherry-tree, (red 


bigarreautier. 


Architect, 


archiiccte. 


and white heart,' 




Baker, 


boulangcr, boukai' 


Chestnut-tree, 


chdtaignier. 




gere. 


Currant or goose- 


groseillier. 


Barber, 


barbier. 


berry-bush. 




Blacksmith, 


forgeron. 


C)-press-tree, 


cypres. 


Bleacher, 


blanchisseur. 


Ebony-tree, 


ebtnier. 


Bookbinder, 


relieur. 


Elm, 


orme. 


Bookseller, 


hbraire. 


Young elm, 


ormeau. 


Bootmaker, 


bottler. 


Fig-tree, 


fgnier. 


Brewer, 


brasseiir, brasseuse. 



424 



VOCABULARY.— SUBSTANTIVES. 



Butcher, 


boucher, boitchere. 


Labourer, 


manoeuvre, m. 


Cabinet-maker, 


6htmste. 


Locksmith, 


serrurier. 


Carman, 


ckarretier. 


Mason, bricklayer. 


magon. 


Carpenter, 


chnrpentier. 


Master, 


ma'itre. 


Cartwright, 


churron. 


Master oflangu ages 


, maitre de langues. 


Carver, sculptor. 


sculptetcr. 


Merchant, 


marchand, mar- 


Chemist, 


chimiste, pharmacien. 




chande. 


Chimney-sweeper, 


ramoneur. 


Midwife, 


accoucheuse, sage- 


China-man or 


fa'imcier, faienciere. 




femme. 


woman. 




Miller^ 


meunier, meuniere. 


Clock or watch 


horloger, horlogere. 


Musician, 


musicien, vmsicienne. 


maker, 




Music-master, 


maitre de musique. 


Coach-maker, 


carrossier. 


Music-mistress, 


maitresse de musique. 


Cobbler, 


saveiier. 


Painter, 


peintre. 


Confectioner, 


confiaeur, cortfisetise ,• 


Paper-maker, sta- 


papetier. 




confiturier, C07ijt- 


tioner. 






turitre. 


Pastry-cook, 


putissier, patissiere. 


Contractor, 


fuurnisseur. 


Perfumer, 


parfameur, parfu- 


Cooper, 


tonnelier. 




meuse. 


Cutler, 


coutelier, coidelitre. 


Periwig-maker, 


perruquier, perru' 


Dancing-master, 


matt re de danse. 




quiere. 


Dancing-mistress, 


maitresse de danse. 


Philosopher,. 


pkilosophe. 


Distiller, 


distlUateur. 


Physician, 


mkdecin. 


Divine, 


thtologien. 


Plumber, 


plomhier. 


Druggist, 


droguiste. 


Potter, 


potier. 


Dyer, 


teinturier, teiniuritre 


Poulterer, 


poulailler. 


Editor, 


tditeur. 


Preceptor, 


prkcepteur. 


Engraver, 


graveur. 


Printer, 


imprimeur. 


Farrier, 


marechal^ferrant. 


Professor, 


pnfesseur. 


Fencing-master, 


maiire d'armes. 


Saddler, 


seltier. 


Fishmonger, 


poissonnier, poisson- 


Salesman, broker. 


fripier,fripiere. 




niere. 


School-master, 


maitre d^kcole ou de 


Founder, 


fondeur. 




pension,instituteur. 


Friseur, 


friseur, friseuse. 


School-mistress, 


maitresse d'ccole ou 


Fruiterer, 


fruitier, fruitiere. 




de pension, institw 


Furrier, 


fourreur ou pelle- 




trice. 




tier-fourreur. 


Shoe-boy, 


decrotteur. 


Gardener, 


jardinier, jardiniere. 


Shoe-maker, 


cordonnier. 


Gilder, 


doreur, doreuse. 


Sempstress, 


couturiere. 


Glass-maker, 


verrier. 


Street-porter, 


porte-faix. 


Glazier, 


vitrier. 


Steward, 


maitre d'hote/. 


Glover, 


gantier, gantiere. 


Sugar-baker, 


raffineur. 


Goldsmith, 


orfevre. 


Surgeon, 


chirurgien. 


Grammarian, 


grammaii'ien. 


Sword-cutler, 


fourbisseur. 


Grocer, 


epicier, epidtre. 


Tailor, 


tailleur. 


Gunsmith, 


annurier. 


Tallow-chandler, 


chandelier. 


Haberdasher, 


inercier, merciere. 


Tinman, 


ferblantier. 


Hair-dresser, 


coiffeur, coiffeuse. 


Turner, 


tourneur. 


Hatter, 


chapelier, chapeliere. 


Toyman, 


bijoutier ; tabletier, 


Hawker, 


colporteur. 




tabletiere. 


Historian, 


historien. 


Upholsterer, 


tapissier, iapissiere. 


Husbandman, tiller, laboureur. 


Washerwoman, 


blanchisseuse. 


ploughman, 




Waterman, 


batelier. 


Inn-keeper, 


aubergisie. 


Weaver, 


tisserand. 


Interpreter, 


inlerprete. 


Workman, 


ouvrier. 


Jeweller, 


joaiUie.r, joai/iitre. 


Workwoman, 


ouvriere. 


Joiner. 


menuisier. 







VOCABULARY.— SUBSTANTIVES. 



425 



45. A Game at Cards, 8fc. 


the Court-cards, 


les figures. 


the King. 


le roi. 


the Queen, 


la reine,la dame. 


the Knave, 


le valet. 


the Ace, 


las. 


the Ten, 


le dix. 


the Nine, 


le neuf. 


the Eight, 


le huit. 


the Hearts, 


le cceur. 


the Diamonds, 


le carrean. 


the Clubs, 


le trtjle. 


the Spades, 


le pique. 


Piquet, 


le piquet. 


a Counter, 


mijeton. 


Chess, 


echecs. 


a Game at chess. 


une par tie dechecs. 


a Chess-board, 


vn 6chiquier. 


a Pawn, 


wi pion. 


a Bishop, 


un fou. 


a Knight, 


un chevalier. 


a Castle or rook, 


une tour. 


a Draft-board, 


vn damier. 


Drafts, 


les dames. 


a Game at drafts, 


une partie de dames. 


a Pack of cards, 


vn jeu de carles. 


a Game at cards, 


une partie de cartes. 


Chance-play, 


unjeu de hn&ard. 


a Billiard-table, 


tin billard. 


a Game at billiards 


, une partie de billard 


a Bowling-green, 


un jeu de q uilles. 


a Game at bowls, 


une partie de qttdles 




ou de boule. 


46. Of the Army, 8fc. 


Adjutant- general, 


martchal-de<a mp . 


Aid- de-camp, 


aide-de-camp. 


Ammunition, stores 


, munitions, f. pi. 


Artillery, 


artillerie. 


Baggage, 


bagage. 


Ball, 


balle. 


Batta ion. 


bataillon. 


Battle, 


bataille, combat. 


Bayonet, 


bdionnette. 


Blade of a sword. 


lame, fer d'une tpce. 


Body of reserve. 


corps de reserve. 


Bomb, 


bombe. 


Brigade, 


brigade. 


Brigadier, 


brigadier. 


Bullet, ball, 


boulet. 


Caiuion, 


canon. 


Captain, 


capitaine. 


Castle, 


chateau. 


Cavalier, trooper, 


cavalier. 


Cavalry, 


cavalerie. 



Citadel, 


ciiadelle. 


Colonel, 


colonel. 


Colours, 


drapeau. 


Commissary of 


munitionnaire. 


stores. 




Corporal, 


caporal. 


Cuirassier, 


cuirassier. 


Dragoon, 


dragon. 


Drum, drummer. 


tambour. 


Ensign, 


enseigne, m. 


Farrier, marshal, 


mardchal. 


Fight, combat. 


combat. 


Foot- soldier. 


fantassin. 


Forage, 


fourrage. 


Fortitied town. 


ville de guerre. 


Fortress, 


forteresse. 


Grenadier, 


grenadier. 


Gun, 


fusil. 


Gunner, 


canonnier. 


Infantry. 


infant etie. 


Lieutenant, 


lieutenant. ' 


Major, 


major. 


Miner, 


jnineur, m. 


Musket, 


mousquet. 


Officer, 


officier. 


Pay, 


solde, paye. 


Pioneer, 


pionnier. 


Powder, 


poudre. 


Provisions, > 


provisions, mimt 




de bouche. 


Quarter-master, 


marechal-des-lo 


Regiment, 


regiment. 


Sabre, 


sabre. 


Sentinel, 


sentinelle. 


Sentry-box, 


guerite. 


Serjeant, 


sergent. 


Shield, 


bouclier. 


Siege, 


siege. 


Soldier, 


soldat. 


Spy, 


espion. 


Squadron, 


escadron. 


Sword, 


epee. 


Touch-hole, 


lumitre. 


Tower, 


tour. 


Trigger, 


detente. 



47. Of Navigation, 8^c. 

Admiral, amiral. 

Anchor, ancre. 

Barge, bark, barque. 

Boat, bateau. 

Cable, cable. 

Captain of a line-of- capitai?2e de vaisseau, 

battle ship, 

Colours, couleurs nationales. 



4^6 



VOCABULARY.— NAMES OF COUNTRIES. 



Deck, 


pont. 


Oar, 


aviron, rame. 


Flag, 


pavilion. 


Packet-hoat, 


paquebof. 


Fleet, 


flotle. 


Pilot, 


pilute. 


Frigate, 


fregate. 


Rudder, 


gouvernail. 


Harbour-master, 


capitaine de port. 


Sail, 


voile. 


Lieutenant in the 


lieutenant de marine. 


Sailor, 


matelot. 


navy, 




Seaman, 


marin. 


Lighter, 


gabare. 


Ship, 


navire^ m. 


Long boat, sloop, 


chaloupe. 


Steam-packet, 


paquehot a vapeur. 


Main-sail, 


grande voile. 


Surgeon, 


chirurgien. 


Mast, 


mdt. 


A transport, 


batiment de trans- 


Merchantman, tra- 


batiment marchand. 


. 


port. 


ding-vessel, 









48. A List of some of the ancient and modern Names of the most re- 
markable Nations, Empires, Kingdoms, Provinces, Towns, Moun*- 
tains. Capes, Islands, Straits, Rivers, 8^c. that are not spelt alike in 
French and English. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



a. 


adjectif. 


pi. 


pluriel. 


s.8c a. 


substantif et ad- 


anc. r 


ancien royaume. 


riv. 


riviere. 




jectif. 


e. 


empire. 


r. 


royaume. 


s/.pl. 


substantif feminin 


L 


ile. 


s. 


substantif. 




pluriel. 


det. 


detroit. 


•^Z- 


substantif femi- 


sm. pi. 


substantif masculin 


m. 


montagne. 




nin. 




pluriel. 


V- 


pays. 


sm. 


substantif mascu- 


V. 


viUe. 


pro. 


province. 




lin. 


vol. 


volcan. 



It is necessary to observe that, in the following list, according to the 
present method of French orthography, the words the terminations of 
which were formerly spelt ois, but which are pronounced (es), are now 
written ais : as, — Franpais (French) ; Marseillais (an inhabitant of 
Marseilles) : whereas those which are pronounced (oe), retain the former 
letters — ois: as, — Chinois (Chinese); Danois (Dane, Danish); 
Hongrois (Hungarian), &c. 

The same rule must also be observed for Christian and proper 
names : as, — Francois (Francis) ; Franpoise (Frances) ; Dubois 
(Dubois), &c. 

The names of kingdoms, countries, provinces, towns, &c. which end 
with a or burg in English, generally become French by changing a into 
e mute, and burg into bourg : as, — Carolina, Caroline ; Augsburg, 
Augsbourg, &c. 



Africa, 


Afyique, sf. 


Andalusia, 


Andaloiisie, sf. pro 


African, 


Africaiii, e, s. 8^ a. 


Antioch, 


Antioche, v. 


Alexandria, 


Aleccandrie, v. 


Antwerp, 


Anvers, sm. v. 


Algiers, 


Alger, sm. v. 


Apulia, 


La Poznlle, sf. pro. 


Algerine, 


Alg^rien, ne, s. 8f a. 


Arabia, 


Arabie, sf. pro. 


Alps, 


Alpes, sf.pl. 


Arabia deserta. 


r Arabic dtserte. 


America, 


Amerique, sf. 


Arabia felix. 


P Arabie heureuse. 


American, 


American, e, s. 8f a. 


Arabian, 


Arahe, s. 8^^ a. 



VOCABULARY— NAMES GF COUNTRIES. 



427 



Arcadia, 

Arcadian, 

Archipelago, 

Armenia. 

Armenian, 

Asia, 

Asiatic, 

Asspia, 

Assyrian, 

Astnrias, 

Athens, 

Athenian, 

Attica, 

Austria, 

Austrian, 

Babylon, 

Basil, 

Baltic Sea, 

Bavaria, 

Bavarian, 

Belgium, 

Bengal, 

Bern, 

Bernese, 

Bohemia, 

Bohemian, 

Bologna, 

Bordeaux, 

Brazil, 

Brazilian, 

Britain, 

Brit any, 

British, Briton, 

Brussels, 

Burgundy, 

Burgundian, 

Cadiz, 

Cairo, 

Calabria, 

Caledonia, 

Caledonian, 

Canadian, 

Canary Islands, 

Canterbury, 

Cape of Good 

Hope, 
Cape Horn, 
Cappadocia, 
Cappadocian, 
Carlisle, 
Carthagenian, 
Caspian Sea, 
Castile, 
Castilian, 
Chalcedonia, 
Champaign, 
China, 



Arcadie, sf. pro. 
Arcadien, ne^ s. 8f a. 
Ai'chipel, sm. 
Armtnie, sf. pro. 
Armtnien, ne, s. 8f a. 
Asie, sf. 

Asiutiqt/e, s. 8f a. 
Assyria, sf. e. 
Assyrien, ne, s. 8f a. 
Asturies,sf.pro. 
Athtnes, v. 
Athenien, ne, s. 8f a. 
Attiqiie, sf. pro. 8f a. 
Autriche, sf. e. 
Aidrichien, ne, s, 8f a. 
Baby lone, sf. v. 
Bas/e, V. 

la Baltique {mer), sf. 
Baviere, sf. r. 
Bavarois, e, s. 8^ a. 
Belgique, sf. pro. 
Bengale, sm. pro. 
Berne, v. 

Btarnais, e, s. 8f a. 
Bohtme, sf. r. 
Bohemien, ne, s. 8f a. 
Bologne, sf. v. 
Bordeaux, sm. v. 
Brtsi/, sm. r. 
Br^si/ien, ne, s. 8f a. 
Bretagne, sf. r. 
Bretagne, sf. pro, 
Breton, ne, s. 8f a. 
Bmxelles, v. 
Bourgogne, sf, pro. 
Boiirguignon, ne,s. 8f a. 
Cadix, sm. v. 
Le Caire, sm. v. 
Calabre, sf, pro. 
Caltdonie, sf. anc. r. 
Caltdonien, ne, s. 8f a. 
Canadien, ne, s. ^ a. 
les lies Canaries, sf. pi. 
Cantorbcrg, sm. v. 
Cap de Bo?ine Espe- 

ranee. 
Cap Horn. 
Cappadoce, sf. pr. 
Cappadocien, ne, s. 8^ a. 
Carlisle, v. 

Cart hag inois, e, s. 8f a. 
la mer Caspienne, sf. 
Castille, sf. pro. 
Castilian, ne, s. 8f a. 
Calcedoine, sf. v. 
Champagne, sf.pro. 
Chine, sf, e. 



Chinese, 

Circassia, 

Circassian, 

Coblentz, 

Cologn, 

Copenhagen, 

Corfu, 

Corinth, 

Corinthian, 

Cornwall, 

Corunna, 

Corsica, 

Corsican, 

Cossack, 

Courland, 

Cracow, 

Cretan, 

Cyprus, 

Cyprian, 

Dalecarlia, 

Dalecarlian, 

Dalmatia, 

Damascus, 

Dane, Danish, 

Dauphiny, 

Denmark, 

Domingo, (Saint) 

Dover, 

Dresden, 

Dunkirk, 

Dutch, 

Edinburgh, 

Egypt, 

Egyptian, 

England, 

English, 

Ephesus, 

Ephesian, 

Epidaurus, 

Epidaurian, 

Epirus, 

Ethiopia, 

Ethiopian, 

Euphrates, 

Europe, 

European, 

Finland, 

Finlauder, 

Flanders, 

Flemish, 

Florida, 

Frankfort, 

French, 

Friburg, 

Ganges, 

Gas cony, 

Gascon, 



Chinois, e, s. 8f a. 
Circassie, sf.pro. 
Circassien, ne, s. 4' a. 
Coblence, v. 
Cologne, v. 
Copenhague, v. 
Corfoii, sm. i. 8f v. 
Corinthe, sf. v. 
Corinthien, ne, s. 8f a, 
Cornouaille, sf. pro. 
La Corogne, sf. v. 
Corse, sf, i. 
Corse, s. Sf a. 
Cosaque, n. de p. 
Courlande, sf. pro. 
Cracovie, sf. v. ' 
Cretois, e, s. 8f a. 
Chypre, sf. i, 
Chypiien, ne, s. 8f a. 
Dalecarlie, sf. pro. 
Da/ecarlien, ne, s. 8f a. 
Dulmatie, sf. pro. 
Damas, v. 
Danois, e, s. 8^ a. 
Dauphine, sm. pro. 
Danemarck, sm. r. 
Saint-Domitigue,smA.v. 
Douv7-es, V. 
Dresde, v. 
Dunkerqi/e, sm. v. 
Hollandais, e, s. 8f a. 
Edimbou7'g, sm. v. 
Egypt e, sf pro. 
Egypiien, ne, s. 8f a. 
Angleterre, sf. r. 
Anglais, e, s, 8f a. 
Ephese, V. 
Ephesien, ne, s. 8f a. 
Epidaure, v. 
Epidaurien, ne, s,8f a. 
Epire, sm. pro. 
Ethiopie, sf. pro. 
Ethiopic?t, ne, s. 8f a. 
Euphrate, sm. riv. 
Europe, sf. 
Etiropeen, ne, s. 8f a. 
Finlande, sf. pro. 
Finlandais, e, s. 8f a. 
Flandre, sf. pro. 
Flamand, e, s, 8f a. 
Floride, sf. pro. 
Francfort, sm.v. ' 
F7'angais, e, s. 8f a. 
Fribourg., sm. v, 
Gange, sm. riv. 
Gascogne, sf. pro. 
Gascon, ne, s. 8^ a. 



428 



VOCABULARY— NAMES OF COUNTRIES 



Gaul, 

Gaul, 

Geneva, 

Genevese, 

Genoa, 

Genoese, 

German, 

Germany, 

Ghent, 

Glasgow, 

Gloucester, 

Granada, 

Greece, 

Greek, Grecian, 

Greenland, 

Greenlander, 

Guadaloupe, 

Guelderland, 

Guernsey, 

Guinea, 

Gulf of Arabia, 

Gulf of Bengal, 

Gulf of Finland, 

Gulf of Mexico, 

Gulf of Persia, 

Gulf of Venice, 

Hague, 

Hainault, 

Hamburgh, 

Hamburgher, 

Hanover, 

Hanoverian, 

Havannah, 

Hebrew, 

Hebrus, 

Helena, (Saint) 

Holland, 

Hollander, 

Holy Land, 

Hungary, 

Himgarian, 

India, 

Indian, 

Indies, 

East-Indies, 

West-Indies, 

Ingria, 

Ireland, 

Irish, 

Israelites, 

Isle of France, 

Italian, 

Italy, 

Jamaica. 

Japan, 

Japanese, 

Jew, 



La Gmde, sf. r. 
Gaulois, e, s. 8^ a. 
Geneve, v. 
Genevois, e, a. 
Genes, sf. v. 
Genois, e, s. 8f a, 
Allemand, e, s, 8f a. 
Allemagne, sf. e. 
Gand, sm. v. 
G /as cow, sm. v. 
Glocester, sm. v. 
Grenade, sf. pro. v. 
Grece, sf. pro. 
Grec, que, s. Sf a. 
Grotn/and, sm. 
Grotnlandais, e, n. de p. 
Guadeloupe, sf. i, 
Gueldre, sf. pro. 
Guernesey, sm. i. 
Guinte, sf. p. 
Golfe d Arabic, sm. 
Golfe du Bengale, sm. 
Golfe de Fiiilande, sm. 
Golfe du Mexique, sm. 
Golfe de Perse, sm. 
Golfe de Fenise, sm. 
La Haye, sf. v. 
Hainaut, sm. pro. 
Hambourg, sm. v, 
Hambourgeois, e, n, dep. 
Hanovre, stn. r. 
Hanovrien, ne, s. 8f a. 
La Havanne, sf. v. 
Hebrett, e, s. 8f a. 
Htbi'e, sm. riv. 
Sainte-Helene, sf. i. 
Hollande, sf. pro. 
Hollandais, e, s. Sf a. 
La Terre-Sainte,p. 
Hong vie, sf. r. 
Hongrois, e, s. Sf a. 
Inde, sf. 

Jndien, ne, s. Sf a. 
Indes, sf pi. 
Indes Orientaies, sf. pi. 
Indes Occidentales,sf. pi. 
Ingrie, sf. pro. 
Jrlande, sf. i. 
Irlanduis, e, s. Sf a. 
Israelite, s. Sf a. 
L^lle de France, sf. 
Italien, ne, s. Sf a. 
Italic, sf. r. 
Jama'iqtte, sf. i. 
Japon, sm,, e. 
Japonnnis, e, s. Sf a, 
Juif, ve, n. de p. 



Judea, 


Judee, sf. pro. 


Lacedemon, 


Lactdtmone, v. 


Lacedemonian, 


Lacedemonien,ne,s. Sfa. 


Lancaster, 


Lancaslre, sm. pro. Sf v. 


Lapland, 


Laponie^ sf. pro. 


Laplander, 


Lapon, ne,n. de p. 


Latin, 


Latin, e, s. Sf a. 


Leghorn, 


Livourne, v. 


Leyden, 


Leyde, v. 


Lisbon, 


Lisbonne, v. 


Lisle, 


Lille, V. 


Lithuania, 


Lithuanie, sf. pro. 


Lithuanian, 


Lithuanien, ne, s. Sf a. 


Livonia, 


Livonie, sf. pro. 


Livonian, 


Livonien, 7ie, s. Sf a. 


Lombardy, 


Lombardie, sf. r. 


London, 


Londres, sm. v. 


Lorrain, 


Lorraine, sf. pro. 


Lucca, 


Lucques, v. 


Luccese, 


Lucquois, e, n. de p. 


Luxemburg, 


Luxembourg, sm. v. 


Lyons, 


Lyon, sm. v. 


Of Lyons, 


Lyonnais, e, s. 


Macedonia, 


Macedoine, sf. pro. 


Macedonian, 


Macedonien, ne, s. Sf a. 


Madeira, 


Madere, sf. L 


Malta, 


Malte, sf. i. Sf V. 


Maltese, 


Maltais, e, s. 


Mantua, 


Mantoue, v. 


Marseilles, 


Marseille, v. 


Marseillese, 


Marseiflais, e, s. Sf a. 


Martinico, 


La Martinique, sf. i. 


Mecca, 


La Mecque, sf. v. 


Mechlin, 


Malines, v. 


Mediterranean, 


La Mediterranee, sf. 




(mer.) 


Mentz, 


Mayence, v. 


Mesopotamia, 


Mesopotamie, sf. pro. 


Messina, 


Messine, v. 


Mexican, 


Mexicain, e, a. 


Mexico, 


Mexique, sm. p. 


Milanese, 


Milanais, e, s. Sf a. 


Miletus, 


Milet, stn. v. 


Minorca, 


Minorque, i. 


Mogul, 


Mogol, sm. e. 


Moldavia, 


La Moldavie, sf. pro. 


Morea, 


Moree, sf. pro. 


Moor or Maur, 


More ; Maure, sse, s.; 




Moresque, a. 


Morocco, 


Maroe, sm. e. 


Moscovite, 


Moscovite, s. 


Moscovy, 


Moscovie, sf. e. 


Mycene, 


Myotnes, v. 


Nantz, 


Nantes, sm, v. 


Naples, 


Naples, sm. V. Sf r. 


Navarre, 


Navarre, r. 


Navarese, 


Navarrois, e, s. Sf a» 



VOCABULARY— NAMES OF COUNTRIES. 



429 



Neapolitan, 


Napolifain, e. s. 8f a. 


Prussian, 


Negro, 


Negre, sse, s. 


Ratisbon, 


Netherlands, 


Pays-bas, sm. pi. r. 


Rhine, 


Neufchatel, 


Neitchiife/, sm. v. 


Rome, 


New-England, 


Nouvelle-Angltterre^ 


Roman, 




sf. pro. 


Russia, 


Newfoundland, 


Terre-Neuve, sf. L 


Russian, 


Nile, 


Nil, sm. riv. 


Saguntum, 


Nimegnen, 


Nimegue, v. 


Salamanca, 


Nineveh, 


Ninive, sf. v. 


Salentum, 


Norman, 


Normaml, e, s. 8f a. 


Samaria, 


Normandy, 


Norma fidie, sf. pro. 


Samaritan, 


Norway, 


Norvtge, sf r. 


Santillana, 


Norwegian, 


Norvegien, ne, s. S^' a. 


Saracen, 


Nova-Scotia, 


Nouve//e-Ecoss€, sf. pro. 


Saragossa, 


Atlantic Ocean, 


Ocean Al /antique, m. 


Sardinia, 


Frozen Ocean, 


Mer G/acia/e. 


Sardis, 


Pacific Ocean, 


Oc^an Pacifque. 


Sardinian, 


Oldenburg, 


Oldembourg, sm. v. 




Ostend, 


Ostende,sf v. 


Sarmatia, 


Otranto, 


Otrante, sf. v. 


Savoy, 


Padua, 


Padoueysf. v. 


Savoyard, 


Palermo, 


Palerme, sf. v. 


Saxony, 


Palmyra, 


PaJmtjre, sf. v. 


Saxon, 


Pampeluna, 


Pampelime, sf. v. 


Scotch, 


Paris, 


Paris ^ sm. v. 


Scotland, 


Parisian, 


Parisien, ne, s. Sf a. 


Scythia, 


Parma, 


Panne, sf. v. 


Scvthian, 


Parnassus, 


Parnasse, sm. m. 


Black Sea, (the) 


Peloponnesus, 


Pchponnese, sm. pro. 


Red Sea, (the) 


Peloponnesian, 


Peiuponnesien, nc, s. S)' a. 


St. Sebastian, 


Persia, 


Perse, sf r. 


Siberia, 


Persian, 


Perse, Person, e. s.S>i'a. 


Siberian, 


Peru, 


Peroii, sm. p. 


Sicily, 


Peruvian, 


Peruvien, ne, s. 


Sicilian, 


Peters burgh, 


Petersbourg, sm. v. 


Silesia, 


Pharsalia, 


Pharsale, sf v. 


Silesian, 


Pht-nicia, 


P/ienicie, sf. pro. 


Sluys, 


Phenician, 


Phniivien, ne, s. 8f a. 


Smyrna, 


Philadelphia, 


Philade/phie, sf.pro.8fV. 


Sodom, 


Philippine Is- 


Les Philippines, sf pi. 


The Sound, 


lands, 




Spain, 


Picardy, 


Picardie, sf pro. 


Spaniard, 


Piedmont, 


Piemont, sm. pro. 


Spanish, 


Piedmontese, 


Piemonfais, e, s. 8f a. 


Sparta, 


Placentia, 


Plaisance, sf. v. 


Spartan, 


Poland, 


Pologne, sf. r. 


Straits of Dover, 


Polander or Pole 


, Polonais, e, ft. de p. 


the CRannel, 


Pomerania, 


Pomeranie, sf. pj'o. 


Straits of Gibral- 


Pondicherry, 


Pontichery, m. 


tar, 


Pontus, 


Pont, sm. anc. r. 


Strasburgh, 


Pontus-Euxinus, 


Le Pont-Euxin, sm. 


Suabia, 




{mer.) 


Sweden, 


Portuguese, 


Purtugais, e, s. Sf a. 


Swedish, 


Presburgh, 


Presboi/rg, s)n. v. 


Swiss, 


United-Provinces 


, Provinces- Unies, sf. pi. 


Switzerland, 


Prussia, 


Pi'usse, sf. i\ 


Syria, 



Pmssien, ne, s. Sf a. 
Rafisbonne, v. 
Rhin, S7n, riv. 
Rome, V. 

Romain, e, s. Sf a. 
Russie, sf. e. 
Russe, s. Sf a. 
Sagonte,v. 
Salamanqne, v. 
Sa/ente, v. 
Samarie, v. 
Samaritain, e, s, 
Santillane, sf. v. 
Sarrasin, e, s. 
Saragosse, sf. v. 
Sardaigne,sf. i. r, 
Sardes, sfv. 
Sarde, s. Sf a. Sardi- 

nien, ne, s. Sf a. 
Sarmatie, sf. pro. 
Savoie, sf pi'o. 
Savoyard, e, n. de p. 
Saxe, sf. r. 
Saxon, tie, s. ^ a. 
Ecossais, e, s. Sf a. 
Ecosse, sf. r. 
Scylhie, sf.p. 
Scythe, s. Sf a. 
la Mer Noire. 
la Mer Rouge. 
Saint-Stbastien, sm. 
Sibtrie, sf pro. 
Sib^rien., ne, s. Sf a. 
Sicile, sf. i. 
Sicilien, ne, s. Sf a. 
Silesie, sf. pro. 
Silesien, ne, s. Sf a, 
IJEcluse, sf. V. 
Smyrne, v. 
Sodome,sf. v. 
Le Si/nd, del. 
Espagne, sf. r. 
Espagnol, e, n. dep. 
Espagnol, e, a. 
Sparte, sf v. 
Spartiaie, s. Sf a. 
La Manche, sf. Le Pas 

de Calais, sm. 
Le Detroit de Gibra/^ 

tar. 
Strasbourg, sm. v„ 
Souabe, sf. pro. 
Sutde, sf r. 
Suedois, e, s. Sf a. 
Suisse, s. Sf a, 
Suisse, sf. rep. 
Syrie, sf. pro. 



430 



VOCABULARY— NAMES OF COUNTRIES. 



Syrian, 
Tarentine, 
Tarentum, 
Tarsus, 
Tartary, 
Tartar, 
TenerifFe, 
Terra del fuego, 
Terra firma, 
Thames, 
Thelaaid, 
Thetan, 
Thebes, 

Thermopylae, (de- 
file,) 
Thracia, 
Thracian, 
Tigris, 
Tyber, 
Toledo, 
Trent, 
Triers, 
Trinidad, 



Syrien, ne, s. ^ a. 
Tarentin, e, s. 8^ a. 
Tarente, v. 
Tarse, v. 
Tartaric) sf. p. 
Tart are, s. Sf a. 
Ttntriffe, sf. i. 
Terre-de-feu, sf. 
Terre-ferme, sf. pro. 
Tamise, sf. riv. 
Thebdide, sf pro. 
Th6bain, e, s. ^- a. 
Thebes, v. 
Thermopyles, sf. pi. 

Thrace, sf. pi. 
Thrace, s. 8f a. 
Tigre, sm. riv. 
Tibre, sm. riv. 
Tolede, v. 
Trente, v. 
Treves, v. 
La Trinite, sf. i. 



Trojan, 

Troy, 

Tuscan, 

Tuscany, 

Turk, Turkish, 

Turkey, 

Tyre, 

Tyrian, 

United-States, 

Valencia, 

Venetian, 

Venice, 

Vesuvius, 

Vienna, 

Virginia, 

Wales, 

Warsaw, 

Welsh, 

Westphalia, 

Wiburg, 

Wolfenbuttel, 

Xanthus, 

Zealand, 



Troyen, e, s. Sf a. 
Troie, v. 

Toscan, e, s. 8f a. 
Toscane, (Etru7^ie,)sf.r. 
Turc, que, s. ^ a. 
Turquie, sf. e, 
Tyr, V. 

Tyrien, ne, s. 8^ a. 
Etats- Unis, sm. pi. 
Valence, v. 
Feniiien, ne, s. Sf a. 
Venise, sf. v. 
Pesuve, sm. vol. 
Fienne, sfv. 
Virginie, sf. pro. 
Le Pays de Galles, pro. 
VarsQvie, v. 
Gallois, e, s. 8f a. 
Westphalie, sf. pro. 
Wibourg, sm. v. 
Wolfenbuttel, sm. 
Xanthe, sm. riv. 
Ztlande, sf. pro. 



49. Adjectives and Participles. 

The letter e and the syllables che.> le, ne, se, te, ve, &c. which come 
after the following adjectives and participles, denote their feminine; 
whereas the adjectives which end with e mute are of both genders. 

A few substantives which convey peculiar significations in their 
meaning, so as to be nearly considered as adjectives, have been inserted 
in the following list : — 



Abominable, 

Abortive, 

Abundant, 

Absent, 

Abstinent, 

Abstracted, 

Absurd, 

Acceptable, 

Accessible, 

Accidental, 

Accommodating, 

Accomplice, 

Accountable, 

Accustomed, 

Acid, 

Active, 

Actual, 

Adjoining, 

Admirable, 

Adoptive, 

Adorable, 



abominable, 
abortif, ve. 
abondant, e. 
absent, e. 
abstinejit, e. 
abstrait, e. 
absurde. 
acceptable, 
abordable, accessible, 
accidentel, le. 
accommodant, e. 
complice, 
comptable. 
accoutiim6, e. 
acide. 
actif, ve. 
actuel, le. 
joignant, e. 
admirable, 
adoptif, ve. 
adorable. 



Adulterated, 

Adulterous, 

Advantageous, 

Adverbial, 

Adverse, 

ethereal, 

Affable, courteous, 

good. 
Affected, 
Affectionate, 
Affirmative, 
Afflicting, 
Aforesaid, 
Aged, old, 
Agile, nimble. 
Agreeable, 
Alarming, 
Alert, 
Almighty, 

Alivcj 



adulter^, e;falsife, €. 
adultere. 
at*nntageux, se. 
adverbial, e. 
adverse, 
aerien, ne. 
affable, d6bonnaire. 

affecte,e; recherchf,f 

affectionne, e. 

affirmatif, ve. 

affligeant, e. 

sttsdit, e. 

ag6, e. 

agile. 

agreable. 

alarmant, e. 

alerte. 

tout-puissant, tottte- 

puissante. 
vif, ve. 



VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 431 



Aloue_, sole. 


seul, e. 


Bald, 


chauve. 


Allegorical, 


alltgorique. 


Banishable, 


bannissable. 


Allowable, 


admissible. 


Baptismal, 


baptismal, e. 


Alphabetical, 


alphabetique. 


Barbarous, 


barbare. 


Ambiguous, 


ambigu, e. 


Base, vile, low^ 


has, basse. 


Ambitious, 


ambitieux, se. 


Bastard, 


hdtard, e. 


Amicable, 


amical, e. 


Beastly, 


bestial^ e. 


Amusing, 


amusant, e. 


Beggarly, 


indigent, e ; gueux. 


Analogical, 


analog iqne. 




se. 


Analogous, 


analogue. 


Beloved, 


bien-aime, e. 


Anarchic, 


anarchique. 


Benevolent, 


bienfaisant, e. 


Ancient, 


ancien, ne. 


Benign, 


benin, btnigne. 


Angelical, 


angtlique. 


Big, large. 


gros, grosse. 


Anglican, 


anglican, e. 


Bigot, h^-pocrite, 


bigot, e. 


Angry, sorry. 


fdche, e. 


Bilious, 


bilieux, se. 


Animal, 


animal, e. 


Billowy, . 


houleux, se. 


Animated, 


anime, e. 


Bissextile, 


bissextil, e. 


Anniversary, 


amiiversaii'C. 


Bitter, 


amer, amtre.. 


Annual, 


annuel, le. 


Bituminous, 


bitumineux, se. 


Anonymous, 


anonyme. 


Black, 


noir, e. 


Antique, . 


antique. 


Blameable, 


blumable. 


Apostolic, 


apostolique. 


Blameless, 


irr'eprochable. 


Apparent, 


apparent, e. 


Blasphemous, 


blasphematoire. 


Applicable, 


applicable. 


Blessed, 


be nit, e; beni, e; 


Apt, fit, 


apte, propre. 


■ 


bienheureuX) se. 


Aquatic, 


aquatique. 


Blind, 


aveugle. 


Arbitrary, 


arbitraire. 


Bloody, 


sanglant^ e. 


Archiepiscopal, 


archiepiscopal, e. 


Blooming, 


fleuri, e. 


Arctic, 


arctique. 


Blue, 


bleu, e. 


Ardent, 


ardent, e. 


Blunt, over hasty. 


brusque. 


Arid, 


aride. 


Bold, resolute. 


hardi, e ; delibere, e. 


Aristocratical, 


aristocralique. 


Boorish, coarse, 


gi'ossier, grossitr-e. 


Arrears, (in) 


arriere, e. 


Brave, spruce, 


brave. 


Arrogant, 


arrogant, e. 


Brawling, 


braillard, e. 


Artificial, 


artijiciel, le. 


Brief, 


href, ve. 


Ash- coloured. 


cendre, e. 


Brisk, 


fringant, e. 


Assiduous, 


assidu, e. 


Broad, 


large. 


Assuming, 


arrogant, e; entre- 


Broken, 


casse, e ; fracture, e. 




prenant, e. 


Brotherly, 


fraternel, le. 


Atrocious, 


atroce. 


Brown, 


bis, e ; brun, e. 


Attentive, 


attentif, ve. 


Brownish, 


brufiet, ie. 


Attracting, 


attrayant, e. 


Brutish, 


brutal., e. 


Audacious, 


audacieux, se. 


Buffoon, ■ 


houffon, ne. 


August, 


auguste. 


Burlesque, 


burlesque. 


Auricular, 


aimculaire. 


Burning, 


brxdant, e. 


Austere, 


austere. 


Busy, 


occupe, e ; affaire, e. 


Authentic, 


authentiqiie. 


Candid, 


candide. 


Aivkward, unhandy, maladroit, e. 


Capable, 


capable; comp6tent,e. 


Auxiliary, 


auxiliaire. 


Capital, 


capital, e. 


Avaricious, covet- 


avaricieux, se; avare. 


Capricious, 


capricieux, se. 


ous. 




Captive, 


captif, ve. 


Avoidable, 


tvitable. 


Careful, 


soigneux, se. 


Awful, 


i?)iposant, e. 


Carnal, 


charnel, le. 


Azure-coloured, 


azure, e. 


Carnivorous, 


carnassier, carnaS' 


Babbler, 


bavard, e. 




siere. 


Bad, 


mauvaiSj e. 


Catholic, 


catholique. 


Baked, 


cuit, e. 


Celestia], 


celeste. 



432 VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 



Central, 
Ceremonious, 

Certain, 
Changeable, 

variable. 
Charming, 
Chaste, 
Chatterer, 
Cheat, 
Cheerful, 
Chemical, 
Childish, 
Chilled, 
Chilly, ^ 
Chimerical, 
China-like, 
Christian, 
Circumspect, 
Civil, 
Clandestine, 

Clear, \ 

Clear-sighted, 

Clement, 

Clever, 

Close, tight, 

Coarse, 

Cold, 

Coloured, 

Combustible, 

Comical, 

Commendable, 

Commodious, 

Common, 

Communicative, 

Compact, 

Comparable, 

Compassionate, 

Competitor, 

Complaisant, 

Complete, 

Complicate, 

Comprehensible, 

Conceivable, 

Condemnable, 

Conditional, 

Confident, 

Confidential, 

Confiscable, 

Conformable, 

Confounded, 

Confuse, 

Conjugal, 

Considerable, 



central, e. 

ceremonieux, se ; fa- 
gonnier,fagotmitre. 
certain, e. 
changeant, e, 

charmant, e. 
chaste, 
habillard, e. 
fourhe. 

enjoue, e ; riant, e. 
chimique. 

enfantin, e ; pueril, e. 
transi, e. 
frileux, se. 
chimeriqve, 
fa'ience, e. 
Chretien, ne. 
circonspect, e. 
civil, e, 
clandestin, e; fi^rtif, 

ve, 
clair, e. 
clairvoyant, e. 
clement, e. 
habile. 
serr3, e. 
gros, se; grassier, 

grossiere. 
froid, e. 
colore, e, 
combustible, 
comique. 
lovable, 
commode, 
commun, e. 
communicatif^ e. 
compacte. 
comparable, 
compatissant, e. 
concurrent, e. 
complaisant, e. 
complet, complite. 
compliqut, e. 
compr6hemible, 
concevable. 
condamnable. 
conditionnel, le, 
confident, e. 
conjidentiel, le, 
confiscable, 
conforme. 
confondu, e; inter- 

dit, €. 
confius, e. 
CO ijugal, e, 
considerable. 



Consoling, 


consolant, e. 


Constant, 


constant, e. 


Consumptive, 


consomptif, ve ; pid- 




vioniqne. 


Contagious, 


contagieux, se. 


Contemporary, 


contemporain, e. 


Contemptible, 


contemptible; mipri- 




sable. 


Contented, 


content, e ; satisfait, e. 


Contiguous, 


contigu, e; attenant,e. 


Continual, 


continuel, le. 


Contradictory, 


contradictoire. 


Contrary, 


contraire. 


Contrite, 


contrit, e. 


Convalescent, 


convalescent, e. 


Convenient, suit- 


convenable. 


able. 




Cool, fresh. 


frais, fraiche. 


Cooling, 


rafraichissant, e. 


Coquet, 


coquet, te. 


Corporeal, 


corporel, le. 


Correct, 


co7'rect, e. 


Correspondent, 


correspondant, e. 


Corrigible, 


corrigible. 


Corruptible, 


corruptible. 


Costly, 


couteux, se. 


Courageous, 


courageux, se. 


Cottonous, 


cotonneiix, se. 


Covered, 


convert, e. 


Covetous, 


avide. 


(toward, 


Idche. 


Cowardly, 


poltron, ne; pusil- 




lanime. 


Credible, 


croyable. 


Credulous, 


cridule. 


Criminal, 


criminel, le. 


Crimson, 


cramoisi, e. 


Critical, 


critique. 


Crooked, 


cmrbe, e ; tortu, e. 


Cruel, 


cruel, le. 


Cultivable, 


cultivable. 


Cunning, sly. 


iMse, e; artificiei/x. 


Curable, 


guerissable. 


Curious, 


curieux, se. 


Cursed, 


maiidit, e. 


Customary, 


ordifiaire. 


Daily, 


journalier, journa- 




liere ; quotidien, ne. 


Damaged, 


avarie, e. 


Damnable, 


damnable. 


Damp, 


humide. 


Dangerous, 


dangereux, se. 


Dazzling, 


eblouissant, e. 


Dead, deceased. 


mort, e ; defunt, e. 


Deaf, 


sourd, e. 


Debauched, 


dtbaucht, e. 



VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 433 



Decayed, 
Deceitful, 
Deceiving, 
Decent, 
Decisive, 
Decrepit, 
Dedicatory-; 
Deep, 

Defamatory, defa- 
ming, 

Delicious,delightful 

Deplorable, 

Descended, issued, 

Desert, 

Desirable. 

Desirous,. 

Despaired, 

Despotic, 

Destitute, 

Detained, 

Determined, 

Detestable, 

Devilish mad, 

Devout, 

Dextrous, 

Diabolical, 

Different, 

Difficult, 

Diffident, distrust- 
ful. 

Diffuse, 

Dilatory, 

Diligent, 

Direct, 

Disadvantageous, 

Disagreeable, 

Disciplinable, 

Discordant, disso- 
nant, 

Discovered, 

Discreet, 

Disdainful, 

Disgraceful, 

Disguised, 

Disgusted, out of 
conceit with, 

Disgustful, 

Dishevelled, 

Dishonest, 

Dishonourable, 

Disinterestedj 

Dismal, 

Dismayed, 

Disobedient, 

Disobliging, 

Disorderly, 

Dissatisfied, 



caduc, caduque. 
tro7npeur, se. 
decevant, e, 
decent, e. 
dccisif, ve. 
decrepit, e. 
dedicatoire. 
fonce, e. 

dijfamalo'ire, diffa- 
mant, e. 
, de/icieux, se. 
deplorable, 
issit, e. 
desert, e. 
desirable, 
desireux, se. 
desespere, e. 
despotique. 
destiiue, e. 
detenu, e. 
determine^ e, 
detestable, 
endiable, e. 
devot, e. 
adroit, e. 
diabolique. 
different^ e. 
difficile, 
defiant, e. 

diffiis, e, 
dilatoire. 
dili(je)d, e. 
direct, e. 

dl'savuntageux, se. 
desagreable. 
disciplinable. 
discoi\lant, e. 

decouvert, e. 
discret, discrete, 
dedaigneux. se. 
disgracieux, se. 
degidse, e; travesti, e. 
degoide, e. 

degoidant, e. 
t'chevele, e. 
deshonnete. 
deshonorable. 
desinttresse, e. 
affreiix, se ; luguhre, 
eperdif, e. 
desobeissant, e. 
desobligeant, e, 
dtregle, e. 
mecontent. e. 



Dissolute, 

Distinct, 

Diverting, 

Divine, 

Docile, 

Doleful, 

Domestic, 

Double, 

Doubtful, 

Dramatic, 

Dreadful, 

Droll, funny. 

Drunk, drunken, 

Dry, 

Due, owing, owed. 

Dull, gloomy, 

Dumb, 

Dusk, dark, 

Dying, 

Eager, 
Early riser, 

Eas}', 

Easy to be known 

again, 
Eatable, 
Eater, 
Echoing, 
Economical, 
Edifying, 
Educated, 
Effem.inate, 
Efficacious, 
Elastic, 
Eldest, 
Electric, 
Elegant, 
Elementary. 
Eligible, 
Eloquent, 
Embroidered, 
Emigrated, 
Eminent, 
Enclosed, 
Energetical, 
Engaging, 
Enormous, 
Entire, whole,. 
Envious, 
Epic, heroic. 
Epidemical, 
Episcopal, 
Epistolary, 
Equal, 
Equitable, 



dissolu, e, 

distinct, e. 

divertissofit, e. 

divin, e. 

docile, 

higubre ; douloureux ^ 

se. 
domestique. 
double, 
douteux, se. 
dramatique. 
epouvantable. 
drule, 

ivre, enivrt, e, 
seCfSeche. 
du, e. 

sombre, morne. 
ymiet, te. 
obscur, e. 
agonisant, e; mou.. 

rant, e. 
empressi, e, 
matineux, se ; mati- 

nal, e. 
aise, e ; faci'e. 
reconnaissable. 

mangeable. 
mangeur, se» 
resonnant, e. 
economique, 
ediftant, e. 
ttevt, e. 
effemine, e. 
efficace. 
elastique. 
mne, e. 
electrique, 
elegant, e. 
eltmentaire. 
eligible, 
eloquent, e. 
brode, e. 
tinigre, e. 
tminent, e. 
inc. I us, e. 
energique. 
engageant, e. 
t nor me. 
entier, en fie re. 
envieux, se. 
e pique, herdique. 
tpidemique. 
episcopal, e. 
(•pisto/aire. 
eg at, e. 
equitable. 
U 



434 VOCABULARY.- ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 



Equivalent;, 


tquiv Client, e. 


Ferruginous, 


ferrugineux, se. 


Eqiiivocal, 


equivoque. 


Fertile, 


fertile. 


Erroneous^ 


err one, e. 


Fervent, 


fervent, e. 


Essential, 


essentiel, le. 


Fetid, 


fetide. 


Estimable, 


estimable. 


Feverish, 


fevreux, se. 


Eternal, 


kernel, le. 


Fierce, 


feroce. 


Evangelical, 


evangtlique. 


Fiery, 


fouguenx, se. 


Even, smooth, 


uni, e. 


Figured, 


figure, e. 


Evident, 


evident, e. 


Filial, 


filial, e. 


Exact, 


exact, €. 


Filthy, 


crasseux, se. 


Exacting, 


exigeant, e. 


Final, 


final, e. 


Excellent, 


excellent., e. 


Fine, 


fin, e; beau, bel, belle. 


Excessive, 


excessif, ve. 


Firm, 


ferme. 


Excommunicated, 


excommunie, e. 


First, 


premier, premiere. 


Excusable, 


excusable. 


Fit, 


propre, convenable, 


Execrable, 


execrable. 




expedient, e. 


Exemplary, 


exemplaire. 


Fixed, 


fixe. 


Exempt, 


exempt, e. 


Flattering, 


fiatteur, se ; cares- 


Exorbitant, 


exorbitant, e. 




sant, e. 


Expeditious, 


expeditif, ve. 


Fleshy, 


charnu, e. 


Expensive, 


dispendieiix, se. 


Flexible, 


flexible. 


Expired, 


echu, e. 


Flourishing, 


florissant, e. 


Explicable, 


explicable. 


Fluid, _ 


fluide. 


Explicit, 


txplicite. 


Fluttering, 


fretillant, e. 


Express, 


expres, expresse. 


Foamy, 


ecumeux, se. 


Expressive, 


expressif, ve. 


Following, 


suivant, e. 


Exquisite, 


exquis, e. 


Foolish, silly, 


sot, te. 


Exterior, 


exterieur, e. 


Fordable, 


gutable. 


External, day- 


externe. 


Foregoing, 


antecedent, e. 


scholar. 




Foreign, 


stranger, etrangere. 


Extinct, extinguish 


- tteint, e. 


Formal, 


formel, le. 


ed, put out, 




Former, preceding 


precedent, e. 


Extraordinary, 


extraordinaire. 


Formidable, 


formidable, redout' 


Extravagant, 


extravagant, e. 




able. 


Extreme, 


extreme. 


Fortuitous, 


fortuit, e. 


Fabulous, 


fabuleux, se. 


Fortunate, 


fortune, e; heureux, 


Fair, 


blond, e. 




se. 


Faithful, . 


fidtle. 


Forward, 


precoce. 


Fallible, 


faillible. 


Fovil, dirty. 


sale. 


Fallow, 


foiive. 


Fragrant, 


odoriferant, e. 


False, 


faux, fausse. 


Frail, brittle. 


frele, fragile. 


Familiar, 


familier, familiere. 


Frank, 


franc, franche. 


Famished, 


• affame, e. 


Frantic, 


frenetique. 


Famous, 


fameux, se; ce'lebre. 


Fraudulent, 


fraziduleux, se. 


Fanatic, 


fanatique. 


Free, 


libre. 


Fantastical, whimsi- fantasque, bizarre. 


Frequent, 


frequent, e. 


cal. 




Friendly, 


bon, bonne ; ami, e. 


Fat, 


gras, grasse. 


Frightful, 


affreux, se ; epou- 


Fatal, 


fatal, e ; funeste. 




vantable. 


Fatiguing, 


fatigant, e. 


Frivolous, 


frivole. 


Favourable, 


favorable. 


Frothy, 


mousseux, se. 


Fearful, 


peureux, se ; craintif, 


Frozen, 


glacial, e. 




ve. 


Frugal, 


frugal, e. 


Feasible, 


faisable. 


Fruitful, 


fecond, e. 


Feeble, weak. 


faible, debile. 


Fugitive, 


fugitif, ve. 


Feigned, 


feint, e. 


Full, 


plein, e. 


Feminine, 


feminin, c 


Fundamental, 


fondamental, e. 



VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 435 



Funereal, 


funebre. 


Heretical, 


heretique. 


Furious, 


furieux, se. 


Heroic, 


hero'ique. 


Furnished, 


meuble, e ; garni, e. 


Hideous, 


hideux, se. 


Furred, 


foimr, €. 


Hilly, 


montagneux, se. 


Futile, trifling, 


futile. 


Historical, 


historique. 


Future, 


futur, e. 


High, 


kazit^ e. 


Gaitered, 


guelre, e. 


Hoarse, 


enroue, e. 


Gallant, 


galant, e. 


Holy, 


saiftt., e. 


General, 


general, e. 


Hollow, 


creux, se. 


Generous, 


genereux, se. 


Honest, 


homiete, inttgre. 


Geograpliical, 


geogi-aphique. 


Honourable, 


honorable. 


Geometrical, 


geometrique . 


Horrible, 


horrible. 


Gigantic, 


colossal, e; gigantes- 


Hostile, 


hostile. 




que. 


Hot, warm, 


chaud, e. 


Giddy-brained, 


evapore,e; etourdi, e. 


Humble, 


humble. 


Glad, 


aise, ravi, e. 


Human, 


humain, e. 


Glittering, 


reluisant, e ; resplen- 


Hunchbacked, 


voiite, e ; bossu, e. 




dissant, e. 


bvmchbacked, 




Gloomy, 


tenebreux, se. 


Hurtful, 


nuisible,prtjudicxable. 


Glorious, 


glorieux, se. 


Hypocritical, 


hypocrite. 


Glutton, gluttonou 


z,gloiiton, 7ie ; gour- 


Ideal, 


idtal, e. 




mand, e. 


Idiot, 


idiot, e. 


Good, 


bon, bonne. 


Idle, 


oisif, ve. 


Gothic, 


Gothique. 


Idolatrous, 


idoldtre. 


Gouty, 


goutteux, se. 


Ignominious, 


ignominieux, se. 


Graceful, 


gracieux, se. 


Ignorant, 


ignorant, e. 


Grammatical, 


grammatical, e. 


Ill-afFected, 


malintentionnt, e. 


Grateful, 


reconnaissa/it, e. 


Illegitimate, 


illegitime. 


Grave, 


grave. 


Illustrious, 


iUustre. 


Greasy, 


graisseux, se. 


Imaginable, 


imaginable. 


Great, main, 


grand, e. 


Imbecile, 


imbecile. 


Greedy, 


avide. 


Imitable, 


imitable. 


Green, 


vert, e. 


Imitated, 


imite, e; contrefait,€ 


Grey, 


gris,e. 


Immense, 


immense. 


Greyish, 


grisdtre. 


Imminent, 


imminent, e. 


Grievous, 


mortijiant, e; acca- 


Immoderate, 


immodtre, e. 




blant,e; desolant,e. 


Immodest, 


immodeste, impu- 


Grumbling, 


grandeur, se. 




dique. 


Guilty, 


coupable. 


Immoral, 


immoral, e. 


Guttural, 


guttural, e. 


Immortal, 


immorfel, le. 


Habitable, 


habitable. 


Immoveable, 


immobile. 


Habitual, 


habituel, le. 


Impartial, 


impartial, e. 


Haggard, wild, 


hagard, e. 


Impatient, 


impatient, e. 


Half, 


demi, e. 


Impenetrable, 


impenetrable. 


Hanging-matter, 


pendable. 


Impenitent, 


impenitent, e. 


Happy, 


heureux, se ; aise. 


Imperative, 


imptratif, ve. 


Hard, 


dur, e. 


Imperceptible, 


imperceptible. 


Harmonious, 


harmonieux, se. 


Imperfect, 


imparfait, e. 


Harsh, rough. 


dur, e ; rude. 


Imperious, 


imperieux, se. 


Hateful, 


hdissable. 


Impertinent, 


impertinent, e. 


Haughty, 


altier, altiere ; kau- 


Imperturbable, 


imperturbable. 




iain, e. 


Impetuous, 


impetueux, se. 


Hazardous, 


hasardeux, se; ris- 


Impious, 


impie. 




quable. 


Implacable, 


implacable. 


Heaped, 


comble, € ; comble. 


Impolite, 


impoii, e. 


Heavy, 


lourd, e ; pesant, e. 


Important, 


import 0711, e. 


Hereditary, 


hereditaire. 


Impossible, 


impossible, 

u2 



435 VOCABULARY.—ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 



Impracticable, 

Impregnable, 

Improbable, 

Improper, 

Imprudent, 

Impudent, 

Impure, 

Inaccessible, 

In a hurry, 

Inanimate, 

Inattentive, 

Incalculable, 

Incapable, 

Incombustible, 

Incomparable, 

Incompatible, 

Incomplete, 

Incomprehensible, 

Inconceivable, 

Inconsiderate, 

Inconsistent, 

Inconsolable, 

Inconstant, 

Incontestable, 

Inconvenient, 

Incorrect, 

Incorrigible, 

Incorruptible, 

Incredible, 

Incredulous, 

Incurable, 

Indebted, 

Indecent, 

Indefinite, 

Indelible, 

Independent, 

Indefatigable, 

Indifferent, 

Indirect, 

Indiscreet, 

Indispensable, 

Indisposed, 

Indissoluble, 

Indivisible, 

Indolent, 

Indubitable, 

Indulgent, 

Industrious, 

Ineffable, 

Inept, 

Inestimable, 

Inexcusable, 

Inexhaustible, 

Inexorable, 
Inexplicable, 



impraticahle. 
imprenable. 
improbable, 
impropre. 
imprudent, e. 
impudent, e. 
impur, e. 
inaccessible, inabord- 

able, 
presse, e. 
inanimt, e. 
inattentif, ve. 
incalculable, 
incapable, 
incombustible, 
incomparable, 
incompatible, 
incomplete incomplete, 
incomprehensible, 
inconcevable. 
inconsidere, e. 
inconsequent, e. 
inconsolable, 
inconstant, e. 
incontestable, 
incommode, 
incorrect, e. 
incorrigible, 
incorruptible, 
incroyable. 
incrtdule. 
incurable, 
redevable. 
indecent^ e. 
indefini, e. 
ineffagable. 
independant, e. 
infatigable. 
indifferent, e. 
indirect, e. 
indiscret, indiscrete, 
indispensable, 
indispose^ e. 
indissoluble, 
indivisible. 
i?idolent, e. 
indubitable, 
indulgent, e. 
industrieux, se. 
ineffable, 
inepte. 
inestimable, 
inexcusable, 
inl'puisable, intaris- 

sable. 
inexorable, 
inexplicable. 



Inexpressible, 

Infallible, 

Infamous, 

Infected, 

Inferior, 

Infernal, 

Infinite, 

Infirm, 

Inflammable, 

Inflammatory, 

Inflexible, 

Ingenious, 

Inhuman, 

In imaginable. 

Inimitable, 

Iniquitovis, 

Injurious, 

Innocent, 

Innumerable, 

Inodorous, 

Insatiable, 

Insensible, 

Inseparable, 

Insignificant, 

Insipid, 

Insolent, 

Insolvent, 

Instructive, 

Insupportable, 

Insurmountable, 

Intellectual, 

Intelligent, 

Intelligible, 

Intemperate, 

Intentional, 

Interesting, 

Interior, 

Internal, 

Interrogative, 

Intimate, 

Intolerable, 

Intrepid, 

Intrinsic, 

Invalid, 

Invariable, 

Inveterate, 

Invincible, 

Inviolable, 

Invisible, 

Involuntary, 

Invulnerable, 

Irascible, 

Ironical, 

Irrational, 

Irr-econcileable, 

Irregular, 



inexprimahie. 
infaillible. 
infame. 

infecle, e ; infect, e. 
inferieur, e. 
infernal, e. 
infini, e. 
infirm e, 
inflammable.' 
inflammatoire. 
inflexible, 
ingenieux, se. 
inhumain, e. 
inimaginable. 
inimitable, 
inique. 
injurieux., se 
innocent, e. 
innombrable. 
iiiodore. 
insatiable, 
insensible, 
inseparable, 
insignifiant, e. 
insipide. 
insolent, e. 
insolvable. 
instructif, ve. 
insupportable, 
insurmontable. 
intellectuel, le. 
intelligent, e. 
intelligible, 
intemphant, e. 
intentionnel, le. 
intl'ressant, e. 
intl'i'ieur, e. 
interne. 

interrogatif ve. 
intime. 
intolerable, 
intrcpide. 
intrinseque. 
invalide. 
invariable, 
invetere, e. 
invincible, 
inviolable. 
i?zvisible. 
involontaire 
i?ivulncrable. 
irascible, 
ironique. 
irrnisonnable. 
irrvconciliable, 
irrl'gulier, irregw 
Here. 



VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 437 



Irreligious, 


irrtligieuxj se ; inde- 


Low, 


has, basse. 




vot, e. 


Loyal, 


loycd, e. 


Irremediable, 


irremediab/e. 


Lucrative, 


lucratif, ve. 


Irreparable, 


irreparable. 


Lunatic, 


lunatique. 


Irreproachable, 


irreprochable. 


Mad, 


fou,folle ; forccni, e ; 


Irresistible, 


irresistible. 




enrage, e. 


Irresolute, 


irresolu, e. 


Magic, 


magique. 


Irrevocable, 


irrevocable. 


Magnanimous, 


magnanime. 


Irritable, 


irritable. 


Magnificent, 


magnijique. 


Jealous, 


jaloiix, se. 


Maimed, 


estropie, e. 


Jeerer, jester, 


moqueiir, se; railleur, 


Majestic, 


majestueux, se. 




se. 


]\Iaritime, 


maritime. 


Jocose, jovial. 


jovial, e ; badin, e ; 


Marshy, 


matrcageux, se. 




folatre. 


Material, 


matey iel, le. 


Joyful, joyous, 


joyeux. se. 


Maternal, 


maternel, le. 


Judicious, 


judideux, se. 


Mechanical, 


■machinal, e. 


Juridical, 


jnridique. 


Melancholic, 


mtlancolique. 


Just, 


juste. 


Melodious, 


melodieux, se. 


Justifiable, 


justijiable. 


Melting, 


fondant, e. 


Killing, 


tuant, €. 


Memorable, 


memorable. 


Kind, 


bon, ne. 


Merciful, 


misericordieux, se. 


Knowable, 


con?missuble. 


Merciless, 


impitoyahle. 


Laborious, 


laboriet/x, se. 


Mercenary, 


mercenaire. 


Lame, 


estropie, e; boiievx, se. 


IMeritorious, 


meritiire. 


Lamentable, 


/omeiifable. 


Merry, 


gai, e. 


Lascivious, 


Inscif, ve. 


A merry person, 


tin gaillard ou une 


Last. 


dernier, demicre. 




gaillarde. 


Lasting, 


durable; permanent, e. 


Minor, under age. 


mineur, e. 


Late, 


tardif,ve; feu.ftue. 


Minute, 


minutieux, se. 


Laudable, 


loiiable. 


Miraculous, 


miraculeux, se. 


Lawful, 


permis, e; legal, e. 


Mired, 


embourbe, e. 


Lazy, slothful. 


paresseux, se; faint- 


Mirj, 


fangeux, se. 




ant, e. 


IMischievous, 


malin, maligne. 


Lean, thin, 


7naigre. 


Miserable, 


miserable. 


Learned, 


savant, e ; docte. 


Misshapen, 


difforrne. 


Least, 


moindre. 


Moderate, 


mo'Jere, c ; modique. 


Left, awkward, 


gcatcke. 


Modern, 


moderne. 


Legitimate, 


legitime. 


Modpst, 


mr.rlfsle. 


Liar, 


menteur, se. 


Momentary, 


momentane, e. 


Liberal, 


Id/eral, e. 


Monotonous, 


vionotone. 


Licentious, 


licencieux, se. 


Moral, 


moral, e. 


Like, alike, equal, 


pareil, le ; ressem- 


Monstrous, 


monstrueux, se. 




blant, e; set?iblable. 


Morose, cross, 


hourru,e ; chagrin, e. 


Likely, probable. 


probable, vraisemblable 


Mortal, 


morfel, le. 


Light, 


leger,legere. 


Mortifying, 


morlijiant, e. 


Lighted, 


eclaire, e ; illumint, e. 


Mountaineer, 


montagnard, e. 


Limpid, 


limpide. 


Moveable, 


mobile. 


Liquid, 


liquide. 


Moving, 


attendrissant, e. 


Literal, 


littei'al, e. 


Muddy, 


botn-beux, se. 


Little, 


petit, e. 


Mulatto, 


muldtre. 


Livid, 


livide. 


Musician, 


musicien, ne. 


Lively red. 


vermeil, le. 


Mutinous, 


mutin, e. 


Loathsome, 


dtgoutant, € ; rebu- 


Mutual, 


viutuel, le. 




tant, €. 


Mysterious, 


mysttrieux, se. 


Lonely, 


isolc, e. 


Naked, 


nu, nue. 


Long, 


long, longue. 


Narrow-minded, 


borne, e. 


Lost, 


perdu, e» 


Natal, 


natal, e. 



438 VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PAKTICIPLES. 



Native, 

Natural, 

Navigable, 

Neat, clean, 

Njeeessaxy, 

Negligent^ 

Neighbouring, 

Nervous, 

Neuter, 

New, 



Next, 

Nice, delicate, 

Niggardly, 

Noble, 

None, not one, 

Northern, 

Notable, eminent, 

Not knowable. 

Notorious, 

Not used. 

Numerous, 

Obedient, 

Obliging, 

Obstinate, infatua- 
ted, headstrong. 

Ocular, 

Odious, 

Odd, not even. 

Offensive, 

Of three colours. 

Official, 

Officious, 

Old, 

One-eyed, 

Onerous, 

One who has a title, litre, e. 

Only, sole. unique. 

Open, ouveri, e. 

Oppressive, oppressif, ve. 

Ordinary, usual, ordiyiaire. 

Oriental, oriental, e. 

■ Out of breath, pant- essovfle, e. 



natif, ve. 

naturel, le. 

navigable. 

net, nette. 

necessaire. 

77tgligent, e. 

voisin, e. 

nerveux.^ se. 

neutre. 

nouveaif, nouvel, le ; 

neuf, ve. 
prochai)i, e; suivatit, e. 
delicat, e. 

7nesqm?i,e; chiche. 
noble. 

aucim, e ; mil, nulle. 
septentrional, e, 
notable, eminent, e. 
meconnaismhle. 
notoire, manifeste. 
inusite, e. 
nombreiix, se. 
obeissant, e. 
obligeant, e. 
obsline, e ; entete, e; 

opiniatre. 
ociila ire. 
odievx, se. 



impair, e. 
offensant, e. 
tricolore. 
officiel, le. 
officievx, se. 
vieux, vieil, vieille. 
horgne. 
oncreux, se. 



Out of favour. 

Out of work, 

Outrageous, 

Pacific, 

Pagan, 

Painful,' 

Pale, 
Palpable, 
Paralytic, 
Pardonable, 
Particular, nice, 



disgracie, e. 

desoeuvre, e. 

outrageant, e. 

pucijique. 

pdien, ne. 

pmible, douloureux, 

se. 
ptde. 
palpable, 
paralytique. 
pardonnable. 
particulier, parti- 

cu!itre.~ 



Passable, tolerable, 

Passenger, 

Passionate, 

Past, 

Paternal, 

Pathetic, 

Patient, enduring, 

Patriotic, 

Payable, 

Peaceable, 

Pecuniary, 

Pedantic, 

Penetrable, 

Penitent, 

Pensive, 

Peopled, 

Perceptible, 

Perfect, 

Perfidious, 

Perilous, 

Periodical, 

Pernicious, 

Perpetual, 

Perplexing, 

Personal, 

Persuasive, 

Pestilential, 

Philosophic, 

Piercing, 

Pious, 

Pitiable, 

Plausible, 

Plaintive, 

Poetical, 

Pointed, 

Poor, 

Polite, 

Political, 

Pompous, 

Portable, 

Popular, 

Populous, 

Positive, 

Possible, 

Powerful, 

Practicable, 

Precarious. 

Precious, 

Precipitated, 

Precise, 

Preferable, 

Preliminary, 

Premature, 

Present, 

Pressing,. 

Presumptive, 



passager, passagere. 
passionne, e; colere } 

emporte, e. 
passe, e. 
paternel, le. 
pathetique. 
patient, e; endurant,e. 
patriotique. 
payable, 
paisible. 
pecuniaire. 
pedan tesque; pedant^, 
penetrable, 
penitent, e. 

pensif, ve. 
pevple, e. 

perceptible. 

parfait, e ; acheve, e. 

perjide. 

peril leux, se. 

periodique. 

pernieieux, se. 

perpetuel, le. 

emburrassant, e* 

personnel, le*. 

persuasif, ve. 

pestilentiel, le. 

philosophique. 

pergant, e. 

pieux, se. 

pitoyable. 

plausible. 

plaintif, ve. 

poetique. 

pointu, e. 

pauvre. 

poll, €. 

politique. 

pvtnpeux, se. 

portatif, ve. 

populaire. 

populeux, se. 

positif, ve. 



puissa?it, e. 
praticahle. 
precaire. 
precieux, se. 
prtcipite, e. 
prtcis, e. 
preferable, 
preliminaire. 
premature, e. 
present, e. 
pressant, e. 
pr'esomptif, ve. 



VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 439 



Presumptuous, 


presomptueiix^ se. 


Representative, 


representatif, ve. 


Pretty, 


joli, e. 


Reproachful, 


reprochable. 


Principal, 


principal, e. 


Repugnant, 


repugnant, e. 


Privileged, 


privilegie, e. 


Requisite, 


requis, e. 


Prodigal, profuse, 


prodigue. 


Reserved, 


reserve, e ; retenu, e. 


Prodii,^ious, 


pi^odigieux, se. 


Resolved, 


resoht, e. 


Profane, 


profane. 


Resounding, 


resonnatit., e ; reten- 


Profitable, 


profitable. 




tissant, e. 


Profound, 


profond^ e. 


Respectable, 


respectable. 


Progressive, 


progressif, ve. 


Respectful, 


respectueux, se. 


Proper, 


propre. 


Respective, 


respectif, ve. 


Prophetical, 


prophetique. 


Responsible-, 


responsable. 


Propitious, 


propice. 


Restive, 


retif, ve. 


Proportionate, 


proportionne, e. 


Retired, 


retire, e. 


Proverbial-, 


proverbial, e. 


Revengeful, 


vindicatif, ve. 


Provisional, 


provisvire. 


Revolutionary, 


revolutionnaire. 


Provident, 


prevoyant., e. 


Rich, opulent, 


riche, opulent, e. 


Provoking, 


confrariant, e ; fa- 


Ridiculous, 


ridicule. 




cheux, se. 


Rigid, 


rigide. 


Proud, haughty, 


07-gueilleux, se ; Jter, 


Rigorous, 


rigoureux, se. 




fiere. 


Riotous, 


turbulent, e ; iumul- 


Pmdent, 


prt/dent, e. 




tueux, se. 


Public, 


public, publique. 


Risible, 


risible. 


Punctual, 


ponctuel, le. 


Rival, competitor, 


rival, e ; competitettr. 


Putrid, 


puiride. 


Robust, 


robusle. 


Quarrelsome, 


qrterelleiir, se. 


Roguish, 


coquin, e. 


Quick, 


prompt, e. 


Romantic, 


romaniique ; roman- 


Quiet, 


tranqinllp. 




esque. 


Radiant, 


rayonnant, e. 


Round, 


rond, e. 


Radical, 


radical, e. 


Rough, 


raboteux.se i brui,e; 


Rainj-, 


pluvieux, se. 




rude. 


Rapid, 


rapide. 


Royal, 


royal, e. 


Rare, 


1-are. 


Runaway, 


fnyard, e. 


Rash, 


temeraii'e. 


Rustic, rural. 


rustique, champetre. 


Raw, 


cru, e. 


Rusty, 


rouille, e. 


Ready, 


pret, e. 


Sacred, 


sacre, e. 


Reasonable, 


raisonnable. 


Sacrilegious, 


sacrilege. 


Real, 


reel, le. 


Sad, dull, 


trisfe. 


Rebel, rebellious, 


rehelle. 


Safe, 


sai/f, ve. 


Recent. 


recent, e. 


Salted, 


sale, e. 


Reciprocal, 


reciproqiie. 


Salubrious, 


salubre. 


Red, 


rouge. 


Salutary, 


salutaire. 


Reddish, 


7-0 iu\ 7-omse, rouge- 


Sandy, - 


sablonneux, se. 




litre. 


Sanguinary, 


sanguinaire. 


Refined, 


raffine^ e. 


Satin-like, 


satine, e. 


Regent. 


regent, e. 


Satiric, 


satirique. 


Regular, 


regulier, reguliere. 


Satisfactory, 


satisfaisant, e. 


Relative, 


i-e/atif, ve. 


Savage, 


sauvage. 


Relaxed, 


re f ache, e. 


Saving, 


ecoyiome,epargnant, e. 


Religious, 


?'eligieux, se. 


Scandalous, 


scandaleux, se. 


Remarkable, 


remarqnable. 


Scattered, 


epars, e. 


Remote, 


eloigne, e. 


Scientific, 


scientifique. 


Renowned, 


renommL e. 


Scorbutic, 


scorbutique. 


Reparable, 


reparable. 


Scrupulous, 


scrupuleux, se. 


Repentant, 


repentant, e. 


Secondary, 


secondaire. 


Replete, 


replet, replete. 


Secret, 


secret, secrete. 


Reprehensible, 


rtpreherisible. 


Sedentary, 


sede7itaire. 



440 VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 



Seditious, 


seditieux, se. 


Solemn, 


solennelf le. 


Seducing', 


seduisant, e. 


Sohd, 


solide. 


Seigneurial, 


seigneurialy e. 


Solitary, 


solitaire. 


Selfish, 


interesse, e. 


Solvent, 


solvable. 


Senseless, 


insensc, e. 


Somniferous, 


assoiipissant , e. 


Sensible, 


sensible, sense, e. 


Sonorous, 


sonore. 


Sensitive, 


sensii'if, ve. 


Soporific, 


soporijique. 


Sensual, 


sensuel, le. 


Sordid, mean, vile, 


sordide, vil, e ; chetif, 


Sentimental, 


sentimental, e. 




ve. 


Sejiarated, divided. 


sepai'e, e. 


Sorry, angry. 


fache, e. 


Serene, 


serein, e. 


Sound, 


sain, e. 


Serious, 


serieifx, se. 


Sour, 


aigre. 


Serviceable, 


serviable. 


Sovereign, 


souverain, e. 


Servile, 


servile. 


Spacious, 


spacieux, se. 


Sewed, 


COUSU, €. 


Sparkling, 


etincelant, e. 


Severe, 


sevh-e. 


Special, 


special, e. 


Shameful, 


honteux, se. 


Specific, 


specijique. 


Shameless, 


effronte, e ; eliont'e, e. 


Specious, 


specieux, se. 


Sharp, acute, 


aigu, t J degourdi, e ; 


Spiritual, 


spirihiel, le. 




tranchant, e. 


Splendid, 


splendide. 


Shining, gliitering, 


brillajtt, e ; kclatant. 


Spongy, 


spongieux, se. 




€ ; lidsant, e. 


Spotted, 


moucheie, e. 


Shocking, ■ 


choquant, e. 


Spread, 


etendii, e. 


Short, 


court, e. 


Sprightly, 


eveille, e ; espiegle. 


Sick, ill. 


malade. 


Spruce, brave, 


brave. 


Sickly, 


grahataire. 


Stagnated,standing, croifpissant, e. 


Signalized, 


signale, e. 


Stale, 


rassis, e. 


Significative, 


significatif, ve. 


Starry, 


etoile, e. 


Silent, 


silencieux, se ; taci- 


Stationary, 


stationnaire. 




turne. 


Steep, 


escarpe, e. 


Silly, simple. 


niais, e ; sot, sotie. 


Stereotype, 


stereotype. 


Silvered, 


argentl', e. 


Sterile, barren. 


sttrile. 


Simple, 


simple. 


Stiff, 


raide ou roide. 


Sincere, 


s 1710 ere. 


Stingy, 


chiche. 


Singing, 


chaniant, e. 


Stony, 


pierreux, se. 


Singular, 


singulier, singuliere. 


Stormy, 


orageux, se. 


Sinister, 


dnisfre. 


Strange, 


Strange. 


Skilled, versed, 


habile ; versQ, e. 


Strengthening, 


fortijiant, e. i 


Skittish, shy. 


ombrageiix, se. 


Strict, 


strict, e. 


Slavish, 


assiijetlissant, e. 


Striking, 


fruppant, e. 


Slender, thin, 


onince. 


Strong, 


fort, e. 


Slippery, 


glissant, e. 


Strolling, 


ambulant, e. 


Slow, 


lent, e. 


Sullen, pouting, 


boudeur, se. 


Sluttish, 


malpropre. 


Square, 


carre, e. 


Sly, cunning. 


ruse, e. 


Studious, 


studieux, se. 


Smarting, 


ciiisant, e. 


Stunning, 


ttourdxssant. e. 


Smitten, 


epris, e. 


Stupid, 


stiipide, h^bete, e. '■ 


Smoking, 


fumanf, e. 


Stupified, 


stupefait, e. 


Snotty, 


morveux, se. 


Subject, 


sujet, te. 


Sober, 


sobre, frugal, e. 


Sublime, 


sublime. ^ 


Social, 


social, e. 


Substantial, 


substantiel, le. 


Sociable, 


sociable. 


Subterranean, 


souterrain, e. 


Soft, nice. 


douillet, te ; man, 


Subtle, 


szibtil, e. 




molle. 


Such, like, 


tel, telle. 


Softening, 


adoucissant, e. 


Succulent, 


succulent, e. 


Solar, 


solaire. 


Sudden, 


soudain, e ; suUt, e. 


Sole, alone. 


seul, e. 


Suflerable, 


souffrable. 



VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 441 



Sufficient, 

Suffocating, 

Suitable, 

Sultry, 

Sunk, immersed. 

Sumptuous, 

Superb, 

Superficial, 

Superfluous, 

Superior, 

Supernatural, 

Superstitious, 

Supportable, 

Supposed, 

Supreme, 

Sure, 

Surprising, 

Susceptible, 

Suspected, 

Suspicious, 

Sweet, 

Sweetish, 

Sworn, 
Talkative, 

Tanned, 

Tardy, late. 

Tawny, 

Technical, 

Tedious, tiresome. 

Temperate, sober. 

Tempestuous, 

Temporal, 

Tempting, 

Tender, 

Terrestrial, 

Terrible, 

Testamentary, 

Theological, 

Thickset, bristly, 

Thick, 

Thin, slender, 

Thirsty, 

Thorny, difficult. 

Threatening, 



Tight, close. 

Ticklish, 

Timid, 

Tired, 

Tolerable, 

Total, 

Trading, 



siiffisant, e. 
suffoquant, e. 
convenable. 
etoi/ffant, e. 
enfonce, e. 
somptueuxj se. 
superbe. 
svperficiel, le. 
superjliiy e. 
supkr'ieur, e. 
surnaturel, le. 
siiperstitien.r , se. 
supportable, 
suppose, e; pre- 

tendu, e. 
supreme, 
sur, sure, 
surprenant, e. 
susceptible. 
soupconn6, e; s7/s- 

pect, e. 
soup^onneux, se. 
doux, douce ; sucr6, e. 
douceatre ; douce- 

reux, se. 
jure, e. 
causeur, se ; par- 

leur, se. 
hull', e. 
tardif, ve. 
basane, e. 
technique, 
ennui/eux, se. 
iemperant , e. 
iempeslucux, sc. 
temporel, le. 
tenta?it, e. 
iendre. 
tcrrestre. 
terrible, 
iestamentaire. 
theologique. 
herisse, e. 

tpais, se ; trouble, e. 
wiuce. 
altn-v, e. 
tpineux, se. 
mena(^ant, e. 
tonjiant, e; foudro- 

ycint, e. 
serrt, e. 
chatouilleux, se. 
timid e. 

fatigue, e ; las, lasse. 
tolerable, passable, 
total, e. 
comm€r(^ant) e. 



Tragic, 

Transferable, 

Transparent, 

Treacherous, 

Trembling, 

Triumphant, 

Trivial, 

Troublesome, 

True, 

Trusty, 

Tufted, 

Tumultuous, 

Turbulent, 

Turkish, 

Turned away, out of 

the way, 
Twisted, 
Typographical, 
Tja-annical, 

Ugly, 

Unanimous, 

Unavoidable, 

Uncertain, 

Uncivil, 

Uncultivated, 

Undecipherable, 

Undetermined, 

Uneasy, 

Unequal, 

Unexpected, 

Unfaithful, 

Unfavorable, 

Unforeseen, 

Unfortunate, 

Ungovernable, 

Ungrateful, 

Unheard of, 

Unhappy, 

Uniform, 

Uninhabitable, 

Uninhabited, 

Unintelligible, 

Universal, 

Unjust, 

Unknown, 

Unlawful, 

Unmatched, 

Unmoveable, 

Unnatural, 

Unpardonable, 

Unprovided, 

Unreasonable, 

Unruly, untractable, 

Unsalted, freshened, 
Un sewed, 



trajique. 
transmissible, 
transparent, e. 
trattre, traitresse. 
tremblant, e. 
iriomphant, e. 
trivial, e ; commun, e. 
importun, e; genant, 

e. 
vrai, e ; veritable, 
qffide, e. 

touffu, e ; htippt', e. 
tumultueux, se. 
turbulent, e. 
Turc, Turque. 
dctourne, e. 

tors, e ; tort, e. 

fypographique. 

tyj'anniqite. 

laid, e. 

vnanime. 

inevitable. 

incertain, e. 

incivi.', e. 

inculte. 

vuU'chiffrable. 

indeterminc, e. 

inquiet, inqinete. 

inigal, e. 

inattendu, e. 

injidele. 

dt'favorable. 

imprlvu, e. 

infortunc, e. 

ingouvernable. 

in g red, e. 

inon'i, e. 

malheureux, se. 

uniforme. 

inhabitable. 

inhabite, e. 

inintelligible. 

i(mversel, le, 

iyijuste. 

inconnu, e. 

illicile. 

depareille, e. 

immobile. 

denature, e. 

impardomiable. 

depourvu, e. 

deraiso7inable. 

indocile, indiscip'ina-. 

ble. 
dessalc, e. 
decousif, e. 



442 



VOCABULARY.— VERBS. 



Unskilful, 


mulhabile. 


Waggish, frolick- 


goguenard, e ; es- 


Unwise, 


irreflechi, e. 


some, . 


piegle. 


Unwholesome, 


malsain, e. 


Walker, 


vnarcheur, se. 


Umvorthy, 


indigne. 


Wandering, 


eg are, e ; errant, e. 


Urgent, 


urgent, e. 


Warlike, 


guerrier, guerriere. 


Used, 


haUlu'e, e ; accou- 


Warrantable, 


soutenable. 




tum'c, e. 


Wearable, 


meltable, portable. 


Useful, 


ntile. 


Weary, tired. 


ennuyc\ e. 


Useless, 


inutile. 


Weekly, 


hebdomadaire. 


Usual, 


nsiiel, le ; ordinaire. 


Welcome, 


bie?ivem/, e. 


Vacant, 


vacant, e. 


Western, 


occidental, e. 


Valiant, 


vaillant, e. 


Wicked, 


mechant, e. 


Variable, 


variable. 


Wild, 


sativage, farouche^ 


Vast, 


vaste. 




hagard, e. 


Venerable, 


venerable. 


Wise, 


sage. 


Veridical, 


vendiqtie. 


Whipt, 


fouett'e, e. 


Versed, skilled. 


verse, e. 


Whole, pure, 


intact, e. 


Vicious, 


viciei/x, se. 


Wonderful, 


etomiant, e. 


Victorious, 


victorieux, se. 


Worldly, 


mondain, e. 


Vigilant, 


vigilant, e. 


Worthy, 


dig?ie. 


Vigorous, 


vigourenXy se. 


Woven, 


tisstf, e. 


Violent, 


violent, e. 


Winding, 


tortueiix, se. 


Virtuous, 


vertneia, se. 


Yearly, 


annuel, le. 


Visible, 


visible. 


Yellow, 


janne. 


Visionary, 


visionnaire. 


Yellowish, 


jamiatre. 


Voluminous, 


vohimineuXi se. 


Young, youthful. 


jeiine. 


Voluptuous, 


voluptueux, se. 


Zealous, 


z'el'e, e. 



Of Verbs. 

The prepositions which some of the following verbs govern before their 
indirect objects in French have been affixed to each of those verbs; 
whereas the verbs which are commonly used without any preposition 
after them will be found without any in the following list. 



to Abandon, 


abandonner, a. 


to Accommodate 


s' accommoder, de. 


to Abate, 


rabuttre. 


one's self. 




to Abdicate, 


abdiquer. 


to Accompany, 


accompagner. 


to Abhor, 


abhorrer. 


to Accomplish, 


accomplir. 


to Abjure, 


abjurer. 


to Accost, 


accoster, aborder. 


to Abolish, 


abolir. 


to Accustom OTie's 


s'accoutumer, a. 


to Abound, 


abonder, en ; affluer. 


self, 




to Abridge, 


abrtger. 


to Accumulate, 


accmnuler. 


to Absent one's self 


s'absenter, de. 


to Acquire, 


acqutrir. 


to Absolve, 


absoudre, de. 


to Acquit, 


aequitter. 


to Abstain, to re- 


s'abstenir, de. 


to Acquit one's self, 


s'acquitter, de. 


frain from. 




to Accuse, 


accuser, de. 


to Abuse, 


abuser. 


to Act, 


agir. 


to Accelerate, 


accel(:rer. 


to Add, 


ajouter, a. 


to Accentuate, 


accent uer. 


to Addict one's self. 


s^adonner, a, vaquer,a. 


to Accept, 


accepter. 


to Address, 


adresser, a. 


to Accept of, 


agrcer. 


to Adjourn, to put 


ajowner, a. 


to Accommodate, 


accommoder. 


off. 





VOCABULARY.—VERBS. 



443- 



to Adjudge, 

to Adjust, 

to Administer, 

to iVdmire, 

to Admit, 

to Adopt, 

to Adore, 

to Adorn, to deck, 

to Adorn one's self, 

to Adulterate, 

to Advance, to go 

on, 
to Advise, 
to Affect, to soften, 
to be Affected, 
to Affirm, 
to Afflict, 
to Afford, 
to Affiont, to face, 
to Aggravate, 
to Agitate, 
to Agree, to suit, 
to Aim, to aim at, 

to Air, to divulge, 
to Alarm, 

to Alienate, 

to Allege, quote, 

to Allure, to entice, 

to bait, 
to Alter, to change, 
to Alter the nature, 
to Amalgamate, 
to Amuse one's self, 
to Amount, 
to Analyse, 
to Anatomise, 
to Anchor, 
to be Angry, 



to Animate, 
to Annihilate, 
to Announce, 
to Annul, 
to Answer, 
to Anticipate, 
to Apostatise, 
to Apostrophise, 
to Ajipear, 

to Appear again, 
to Appease, 
to Applaud, 
to Apply, 

to Apply one's self. 



adjitger, a. 

ajuster. 

administrer, 

admirer. 

admettre. 

adopter. 

adorer. 

orner, de ; parer, de. 

se parer, de. 

adulterer. 

avancer. 

conseiller, a, de. 

affect er, attendrir, 

s'attendri): 

afffirmer. 

affliger, attrister. 

avoir hs moyens, de. 

affronter, braver. 

ag graver. 

agiter. 

convenir, de. 

viser, a ; coucher en 

joue. 
tventer. 
alarmer. 
alihier. 
alltguer. 
allkcher, amorcer, 

attraire, a. 
alttrer, changer, 
dtnaturer. 
amalgamer. 
s^amuser, a, 
monter, se motiter, a. 
analyser, 
anatumiser. 
ancrer. 
se fdcher, de, con- 

tre, pour ; s^offen- 

ser, de. 
animer, a. 
aneantir. 
annoncer, a. 
a??m//er. 
repondre, a, de. 
anticiper. 
apostasier. 
apostropher. 
paraitre, apparai- 

tre, a. 
reparaitre. 
apaiser, 
appiaiidir, §.. 
s^adresser, a; 

qi/er, a, sur. 
s^app/iquer, a. 



appli- 



approuver. 

vouter. 

argaer, argumenter. 

armer. 

s'armer, de. 

s'arrier'er. 



to Appraise, ^valuer, a; 

to Appreciate, apprecier. 

to Apprehend, apprehender. 

to Approach, to draw approcher, s' appro* 

near^ cher, de. 

to Appropriate to s'approprier. 

one's self, 
to Approve, 
to Arch, to vault, 
to Argue, 
to Arm, 

to Arm one's self, 
to be in Arrears, 
to Arrange, to ma- arranger. 

nage, 
to Arrest, arreter. 

to Arrive, to happen, arriver. 
to Arrive at, to at- parvenir, a. 

tain, 
to Arrogate to one's s'arroger. 

self, 
to Articulate, articuler. 

to Ask too much, surfaire. 
to Ask questions, questionner. 
to Asperse, to slan- dinigrer. 

der, 
to Aspire, 
to Assault, 
to Assemble, 
to Assemble again, 
to Assign, 
to Assist, to relieve 
to Assure, to insure, assurer. 
to Astonish, etoujier. 

to Attack, uttaquer. 

to Attempt, to tempt, alt enter, a 



aspirer, a. 

assai//ir. 

assembler, 

se r assembler. 

assigner, a. 

assister ; snhven ir, a , 



tentei\ 



to Attest, 
to Attract, to draw, 
to Attribute, 
to Augment, to in- 
crease, 
to Augur ate, 
to Authorise, 
to Avoid, 
to Avow, to own, 
to Awake, to rouse, 
to Bail, 

to Bait, to allure, 
to Bake, to cook, 
to Ballast, 
to Ballot, 
to Banish, 
to Baptize, 
to Baptize again, 
to be in Barracks, 
to Bar, 
to Bark, 



attester. 
attirer, a. 
attribuer, a. 
aifgmenier. 

augurer. 

auioriser, a. 

tviter, esqiiiver. 

avouer, a. 

kveiller., reveiller, de. 

cauliomier. 

amorcer. 

citire. 

tester. 

ballolter. 

exiler. bannir, de. 

haptiser. 

rebaptiser. 

caserner. , 

barrer, a. 

aboyer, japper. 



444 



VOCABULARY.— VERBS. 



to Barricade, harricader. 

to Bathe, baigner, se baigner, 

to Beat, baitre. 

to Be, to belong, etre, a. 

to be Better, se porter mieux. 

to be Brought to accoucher. 

bed, 
to Become, devenir. 

to Become cool, se refroidir. 

to Become green reverdir. 

again, 
to Become man, ^incamer. 
to Become liquid, se liquejier. 
to Become milder s''adoucir, se rado2(cir. 

and sweeter, 
to Become young rajeunxr, 

again, 
to Beg, demander faumbne, 

■mendier. 
to Begin, commencer^ a, de ; 

dtbuter. 
to Begin again, recommencer^ a. 

to Beget, frocreer. 

to Behave, se cornporter, se don- 

diiire. 
to Behead, decapiter. 

to Be in vain, avoir beau. 

to Believe, croire. 

to Bellow, beugler. 

to Belong, appartenir, a, de. 

to Bend, to tend, to bander, tendre, plier, 

fold, to bov/, courber. 

to Bequeath, /eguer, a. 

to Besiege, assicger. 

to Bespeak, to \\bxq fair ef aire. 

made, 
to Besprinkle, asperger. 

to Bet, to lay, g^ger, parier. 

to Betray, trahir. 

to Betray one's self, se trahir. 
to Bethink oaae's self, s'aiiser, de. 
to Betroth, fiancer. 

■ to Beware, prendre garde, a; se 

do7i7ierde garde, de. 
to Bewitch, ensorceler, 

to Bind, Her, relier. 

to Bind one's self, se Her, de, avec. 
to Bind, astreindre, s'ast^'ein- 

dre, a. 
to Blacken, noircir. 

to Blame, blamer, de. 

to Blaspheme, blasphtmer. 

to Blaze, Jlamber. 

to Bleat, beler. 

to Bless,^ feeniV. 

to Bleed, saigner. 

to Blind, to dazzle, avettgler. 



to Blossom, to flou- j^e2mr. 

rish, 

to Blossom again, refleurir, 

to Blow, soujfler, venter. 

to Blow, to Bloom, s''6panouir. 

to Blow the horn, corner. 

to Blow one's nose, se movcher. 

to Blunt, tmousser. 

to Boast of, se vanter, de. 

to Boil, bouilHr. 

to Boil again, rebouiUir. 

to Bolt, verroniller, fermer 

au verroi/. 

to Bombard, bombarder. 

to be Born, jiaitre, de. 

to Borrow, emprunter, a.. 

to Bound, to limit, borner. 

to Bound, to re- bondir, rebondir. 

bound, 

to Bow down, to sUncHner. 

stoop, 

to Brand, noter dHnfamie. 

to Brave, braver. 

to Bray, braire. 
to Break, to dash, casser, briser, se bri- 

to shatter, ser, rompre, fra- 

casser. 

to Breakfast, dvjeuner. 

to Break loose, se dechatner, contre. 

to Break open, enfoncer. 

to Breathe, respirer. 

to Brew, brasser. 

to Brick, briqueter. 

to Bridle, brider. 

to Bring, amener, apporter, 

a, de. 

to Bring back, 7'amener, rapporter, 

a, de. 

to Bring forth, mettre bas. 

to Bring ill-luck, porter malheiir, a. 
to Bring upon one's ^attirer. 

self, 

to Brood, to set on, couver. 

to Bronze, bronzer. 

to Browse, braider. 

to Bruise, froisser, meurtrir. 

to Brush, brosser,vergeter. 

to Bubble up, houillonner. 

to Buckle, boucler. 

to Budge, to stir, bouger, de. 

to Bud, to shoot, bourgeonner. 

to Build, batir, construire. 

to Build again, rebdtir, reconstruire. 

to Burn, brider, de. 

to Burnish again, rebriniir. 

to Burst, tclater, crever, 

to Bury, enierrer. 



VOCABULARY.— VERBS. 



445 



to Butter, 


heurrer. \ 


to Circumcise, 


clrconcire. 


to Button, 


boutonner. 


to Cite, to quote. 


citer. 


to Buy, 


acheter, a. 


to Claim, 


rtclamer. 


to Cabal, 


cabaler. 


to Clap, 


battre des mains, ap- 


to Cadence. 


cadencer, 




plaudir. 


to Cajole, 


cajoler. 


to Clarify, 


clarijler. 


to Calculate, 


calculer. 


to Class, 


classer. 


to Call, 


appeler. 


to Clean, to Cleanse;, 


nettoyer. 


to Call back, 


rappeler. 


to Clean one's self. 


se dkcrasser, se net- 


to Calm, 


calmer. 




toyer. 


to Calumniate, 


calomnier. 


to Clear, to get clear j 


dtbarrasser, de. 


to Cancel, 


canceller. 


to Clear the table. 


desservir. 


to Cannonade, 


canonner. 


to Clear up, 


s'tclaircir. 


to Capitulate, 


capituler. 


to Cleave, to split. 


fendre. 


to Captivate, 


captiver. 


to Climb, 


grimper, a. 


to Care for. 


se soucier, de. 


to Cling, 


se cramponner, a. 


to Caress, 


caresser. 


to Clothe, 


habiller, vetir, revetir. 


to Carry, 


porter, a. 


to Coalesce, 


se coafker. 


to Carrj-, to take 


emmener, emporter. 


to Coast along, 


coloyo.r. 


away, 




to Coin, 


battre monnaie, mon- 


to Carrj-, to take 


remmener, r empor- 




iiayer. 


back. 


ter, reporter, a. 


to Cohabit, 


cohabiter. 


to Carry, to convey 


, voiturer. 


to Collar, 


colleter. 


to Carry off, 


enlever, a. 


to Collate, 


c.ollationner. 


to Carve, to cut up, 


decotiper. 


to Collect, 


recueillir, ra^semhler. 


to Case, to pack up. 


encaisser. 


to Colour, 


colurer, colorier, en- 


to Cast again, 


refondre. 




luminer. 


to Cast up. 


additionner, chiffrer. 


to Comb, 


feigner. 


to Catch, 


attraper. 


to Comb one's head 


, se peigner. 


to Catechise, 


cattchiser. 


to Combine, 


combiner. 


to Cease, 


cesser, de. 


to C(mie, 


venir, a, de. 


to Ceil, 


plafonner. 


to Come back, 


revenir. 


to Celebrate, 


ctltbrer. 


to Come down, 


descendre. 


to Cement, 


cim enter. 


toCome down again 


, 7-edescendre. 


to Censure, 


censurer. 


to Come near, 


approcher, s'aupro- 


to Certify, 


certifier. 




c/ier, de. 


to Chain, 


enchahier. 


to Come to one's 


se reciteillir. 


to Change, 


changer. 


self again. 




to Change again. 


rechanger. 


to Come to prefer- 


parver.ir, a. 


to Characterise, 


caracitriser. 


ment, 




to Charm, 


charmer. 


to Command, to or- 


CG7nmander, a, de. 


to Chase, to carve. 


ciseler. 


der, 




to Chastise, 


chatter. 


to Comment, 


com7}ienttr. 


to Chatter, to prat- 


babi/ler, j'aser. 


to Commit, 


cominettre. 


tie. 




to Commit one's 


se co77wiettre. 


to Cheapen, 


marcha7ider. 


self, 




to Cheat, 


tricher, fourber, 


to Commit to 


rediger. 




tromper, friponner. 


writing, 




to Check, to repri- 


iancer, rtprimander. 


to Commiserate, 


compatir, a. 


mand, 




to Commute, 


commuer, en. 


to Cherish, 


chtrir. 


to Compensate, 


cojnpenser, de. 


to Chew, 


mdcher. 


to Compile, 


conpi/er. 


to Chill, 


transir. 


to Complain, 


se plaindve, de. 


to Chime, 


carillonner. 


to Complete, 


completer. 


to Chip, 


dtgrossir. 


to CompHment, 


complimoder, sur. 


to Choose, 


choisir. 


to Comply with, 


se prefer, a ; conde- 


to Circulate, 


circider. 


to condescend to 


, scendre, a. 



446 



VOCABULARY.— VERBS. 



to Compose, 

to Compose one's 

self, 
to Compose again, 
to Comprehend, 
to Compress, 
to Compromise, 
to Compromise 

one's self, . 
to Conceal, 
to Conceive, 
to Concentrate, 
to Concern, 
to Conciliate, 
to Conclude, 
to Concur, 

to Condemn, 

to Conduct, 

to Confer, 

to Confess, to own, 

to Confide in, 

to Confine, 

to Confine one's 
self, 

to Confirm, 

to Confiscate, 

to Conform one's 
self, 

to Confound, 

to Confront, 

to Confuse, to per- 
plex, 

to Congeal, 

to Congratulate, 

to Conjecture, 

to Conjugate, 

to Conjure, 

to Conjure up, 

to Conquer, 

to Conquer one's 
■ self, 

to Consecrate, 

to Consent, 

to Consider, 

to Consider where 
one is, 

to Consign, 

to Consist, 

to Console, to com- 
fort, 

to Console one's self, 

to Consolidate, 

to Conspire, to plot, 

to Constitute, 



composer, 
se composer.- 

recomposer. 
comprendre. 
compnmer. 
Gompromettre. 
se compromettre. 

cacher, taire. 

concevoir. 

concenirer. 

Goncerner. 

concilier. 

conclnre. 

concourir, a, avec, 

pour. 
condamner, a. 
condidre, a. 
confh'er. 
confesser, a. 
se conjier, a. 
conJiner,\, avec, dans. 
se confiner, dans. 

confirmer. 
confisquer. 
se conformer, a. 

confondre. 
confronter. 
emhroinller, brouiller. 

conge ler, se congeler, 

sefger. 
ft licit 67', de. 
conjecturer. 
conjuguer . 
conjurer^ de. 
^voquer. 
conquerir. 
se vainer e soi-meme. 

C07isacrer. 
conseniir, a, 
consider cr. 
s' orient er. 

consigner, a. 
consister, en, dans. 
consoler, de. 

se consoler, de. 
consolider. 
conspirer, comploier, 

contre. 
constitiier. 



to Constrain, 
to Construct, 
to Consult, 
to Consume, 
to Consummate, 
to Contain, 
to Contemplate, 
to Content, 



contruindre,^,^ de. 

eonstruire. 

Gonsulter. 

consumer. 

oonsomm,er, 

(ionienir. 

contemplen 

contenter. 



to Content one's self, se contenter, de. 
to Contest, to con- ooniester. 

tend, 

to Continue, ooniinuer, a, de. 

to Contract, contracter. 

to Contradict, coniredir€,contrarier. 

to Contrast, contraster. 

to Contravene, to contrevenir, a. 

infringe, 

to Contribute, contribuery a. 

to Control, controler. 

to Converse, converser, avec. 

to Convert, convertir, a. 

to be Converted, se convertir, a. 

to Convince, convcdncre, de. 

to be Convinced, se convaincre, de. 

to Convoke, convoquer. 

to Coo, roucouler. 

to Cook, cuire. 

to Cool, refroidir, ti6dir, 

to Co-operate, cooperer. 

to Copj'^, copier. 

to Cord, corder. 

to Correct, corriger, de. 

to Correct one's self, se corriger, de. 

to Correspond, correspondre, avec. 

to Corrupt, corrompre. 

to Cost, couter, a, de. 

to Cough, tousser. 

to Count, to depend compter, compter, s\xx. 

on, 



to Count again, 

to Counterfeit, 

to Countermand, 

to Countermine, 

to Countersign, 

to Cover, 

to Cover again, 

to Cover one's self, 

to Covet, 

to Crack, 

to Crackle, 

to Crawl, 

to Create, 

to Credit, 

to Creep into, 

to Criticise, 

to Croak, 

to Cross, 



recompter. 

contrefaire. 

contremander. 

contreminer. 

contresigner. 

couvrir, de. 

7'ecouvrir, de. 

se couvrir, de. 

convoiter. 

craquer. 

pitiller. 

ramper. 

creer. 

crediter. 

s'insinuer, dans. 

critiqt/er. 

croasser. 

traverser, croiser. 



vocabulary::— VERBS. 



441 



to Crown, 


coiironner. 


to Define, 


definir. 


to Crucify, 


crucifier. 


to Defraud, 


frauder. 


to Cruise, 


croiser, sur, dans. 


to Defray, 


defrayer. 


to Cru>.h, 


tcraser, sous, de. 


to Defy, to chal- 


defer, de. 


to Cry down, 


dt crier. 


lenge. 




to Cry out. to ex- 


crier, s^ecrier. 


to Degenerate, 


deg'emrer, en. 


claim, 




to Degrade, 


degrader. 


to Cry up, 


jtroner, prtconiser. 


to Deify, 


deifier. 


to Cudgel, 


bdtonner. 


to Deign, 


daigner. 


to Cuff; to box. 


soiiffleter. 


to Delay, to go toe 


retarder, turder, a. 


to Cultivate, 


cultiver. 


slow. 




to Curdle, 


cailler. 


to Delegate, to ap- 


deleguer. 


to Cure, 


gi/l'vir, de. 


point, 




to Cure a cold, 


d6senrhinner. 


to Deliberate, 


deliherer. 


to Curl, 


/riser. 


to Delight in, 


se plaire, §-. 


to Curry, 


Qtriller. 


to Deliver, to free. 


delivrer, de. 


to Curse, 


mcaidire. 


to Deliver up. 


livrer, abandonner, a. 


to Cut down a ship, 


raser tin vaissem. 


to Deliver one's self se livrer, a. 


to Cut, to hew. 


coi/per, taifler. 


up, 




to Cut off". 


amjMter, traneher, a. 


to Demand, to ask. 


demander, a. 


to Cut the throat, 


i'goraer. 


to Demolish, 


demolir. 


to Dally, to toy. 


foldtrer. 


to Demonstrate, 


dl'inontrer, a. 


to Damn, 


damner. 


to Denote, 


denoter. 


to Dance, 


danser. 


to Deny, to abjure. 


nier, denier, renier. 


to Dare, 


oser. 


to Deny one's self. 


se refuser, a. 


to Darken, 


obscurcir. 


to Depend on. 


dependre, de. 


to Dart, 


darder. 


to Depict, 


depeindre. 


to Date, 


dater. 


to Depose, 


deposer, contre. 


to Daub, to scribble 


, harhouiller. 


to Deplore, 


deplorer. 


to Daub one's face, 


se harhouiller. 


to Deprave, 


depraver. 


to Dazzle, 


eblouir. 


to Depreciate, 


deprtcier. 


to Debate, 


debattre. 


to Deprive, 


priver, de. 


to Debauch, 


dcbaucher. 


to Deprive one's self 


, se priver, de. 


to Decamp, 


dccamper. 


to Depute, 


deputer, ii. 


to Decant, 


decanter, ii'ansvaser. 


to Derange, 


deranger. 


to Decay, 


dcp6rir, dechoir. 


to Derogate, 


deroger, a. 


to Decease, to die. 


deceda; mourir. 


to Describe, 


deer ire, depeindre. 


to Deceive, 


di'cevoir. 


to Deserve, 


me}-ifer, de. 


to Decide, 


decider, a, de. 


to Design, to denote 


, designer, destiner, ^. 


to be Decided, 


se decider, S.. 


to destinate. 




to Decipher, 


dci hiffrer. 


to Desire, 


desire r, de. 


to Deck, to adorn. 


parer, de. 


to Desist, to give 


se dcsister, de ; se de- 


to Deck or adorn 


se parer, de. 


over, to recede 


partir, de. 


one's self. 




from. 




to Declaim, 


declamer. 


to Desolate, 


desoler. 


to Declare, 


declarer, a. 


to Despair, 


dksesp'erer, de. 


to Decline, 


decliner. 


to be I3riveu to de 


■ se desespirer. 


to Decorate, 


decorer. 


spair, 




to Decrease, 


decroi(re. 


to Despise, 


mepriser. 


to Decree, to ordair 


I, decreter, d'ecerner. 


to Destroy, 


detruire. 


to Dedicate, 


dedier, a. 


to Detail, 


detainer, a. 


to Deduct, to de- 


deduire, de. 


to Detain, 


detenir. 


duce, 




to Detect, 


deceler. 


to Defame, 


diffamer. 


to Deter, to turn 


detourner, de. 


to Defend, 


d^fendre, a, de. 


aside. 




to Defend one's self, se dtfendre, de. 


to Determine, 


determiner, se deter- 


to Defer, to peld. 


deftrer, a. 




ininer, a. de. 



448 



VOCABULARY.--VERBS. 



to Determine pre- 


preciser. 


to Disengage, to 


degager. 


cisely, 




clear. 




to Detest, 


dkester. 


to Disfigure, 


dejtgurer. 


to Dethrone, 


detroner. 


to Disgrace, 


disgracier. 


to Detract, to 


detracter. 


to Disgrace or to 


s'avi/ir, se disgracier. 


slander. 




vilify one's self. 




to Deviate, 


devier, smearier, de. 


to Disguise, 


deguiser^ travestir. 


to Devote, 


dhouer, a. 


to Disguise one's 


se deguiser, se tra- 


to Devote one's self 


se devouer, a, pour : 


self, 


vestir. 




se voiier, se con- 


to Disgust, 


degoxitet', de. 




sacrer, a. 


to Disgust one's self 


, se degoider, de. 


to Devour, 


devorer. 


to Dishonour, 


dishonorer. 


to Dictate, 


dieter, a. 


to Disinherit, 


desheriier. 


to Die, 


mourir, de. 


to Dislocate, 


disloquer. 


to be Dying, 


se monrir. 


to Dismast, 


dlmdter. 


to Dig, 


bicker, creuser. 


to Dismember, 


dlmemhrer. 


to Digest, 


dicjcrer. 


to Dismiss, 


congldier. 


to Dig out of the 


deterrer. 


to Dismount, 


dlmonter. 


grave. 




to Disobey, 


dlsoblir^ a. 


to Dilapidate, 


dilapider. 


to Disoblige, 


dlsobliger. de. 


to DifFer, to delay, 


differer, a, de. 


to Disorder, 


derlgler. 


to Dilute, to soften 


delayer^ dktremper. 


to Disorganise, 


dl'sorganiser. 


steel. 


dans. 


to Disown, to dis- 


dlsavouer. 


to Diminish, to 


dlminuer. 


avow. 




lessen, 




to Dispatch, 


dlpecher, expldier, &. 


to Dine, 


diner. 


to Dispeople, 


dlpeitpler. 


to Dip, to soak, to 


tremper, dans. 


to Dispense with, 


dispenser, se dispen- 


steep. 






ser, de. 


to Direct, 


diriger. 


to Disperse, 


disperser. 


to Dirt, 


sa/ir, crotter. 


to Displace, 


deplacer. 


to Disaccustom 


se dcsaccouttmer, de. 


to Displant, 


dl planter, 
deployer. 


one's self, 




to Displaj', 


to Disagree, 


disconvenir, de. 


to Displease, 


deplaire, a. 


to Disa.ppcar, 


disparaitre. 


to Dispose, 


disposer, de. 


to Disapprove, 


dhapproKver. 


to Dispossess, 


dlposseder, de. 


to Disarm, 


dharmer. 


to Dispossess one's 


se dessaisir. de. 


to Disburse, 


debourser. 


self, to give up. 




to Discern, 


dlscerner, de. 


to Dispute, 


dispidcr. 


to Discipline, 


discipliner. 


to Dissatisfj', 


mtcontenter. 


to Discolour, 


dccolorer, dtteindre. 


to Dissect, 


disseqner. 


to Discompose, 


decomposer. 


to Dissemble, 


dissimuler. 


to Disconcert, 


deconcerler. 


to Dissipate, 


dissiper. 


to Discontinue, 


disconiifiner, de. 


to Dissolve, 


dissoudre. 


to Discount, 


escompter. 


to Distil, 


distiller. 


to Discourage, 


discourager. 


to Distinguish, 


distingner, de. 


to be Discouraged, 


se discourager, se 


to Distinguish one's se disthigtier, par. 




rebutcr. 


self, _ 




to Discourse, 


discoiair. 


to Distribute, 


distribi/er, a. 


to Discover, 


dlcoKvrir. 


to Dissuade, 


dissuade r, deconseil- 


to Discover one's 


se decmvrir, a. 




ler, de. 


self, • 




to Disunite, 


desunir. 


to Discredit, 


dccrlditer. 


to Disuse one's self, se dlshahituer, de. 


to Discuss, 


discuter. 


to Divert, 


di sir aire, de; divert ir, 


to Disdain, 


dldaigner, de. 




de. 


to Disembark, 


dlbarquer, a, sur. 


to Divert one's self. 


se divertir, de. 




de. 


to Divert one's me- 


se dt'semuiyer. 


to Disenchant, 


dlsenchanter. 


lancholy. 





VOCABULARY.— VERBS. 



449 



to Divide, 

to Divorce, 

to Divulge, 

to Do again, 

to Do ill, 

to Doat, 

to Dogmatise, 

to Domineer, to rule, 

to master, 
to Double, 
to Doubt, 
to Do without, 
to Drain, to dry up, 
to Draw, to sketch, 
to DraAV, to drag 

away, 
to Draw near again, 
to Draw, to shoot, 

to fire, 
to Draw up, 
to Dress a wound, 
to Dress one's head, 
to Dress one's self, 
to Dread, 
to Dream, 
to Drink, 
to Drink one's 

health, 
to Drink tea, 
to Drizzle, 
to Drive out, 
to Drop, 
to Drown, 

to Drown one's self, 
to Dry, to wither, 
to Dupe, 

to Dust, to brush, 
to Eat, 
to Eclipse, 
to Economise, 
to Edge, to border, 
to Edify, 
to Efface, to strike 

out, 
to Elbow, 
to Electrify, 
to Elect, 
to Elude, 
to Emanate, 
to Emancipate, 
to Embalm, 
to Embark, 

to Embarrass, 

to Embarrass one's 

self, 
to Embellish, 



diviser, en. 

divorcer. 

divulguer. 

refaire. 

malfaire. 

radoter. 

dogmatiser. 

domiiier, mintriser. 

douhler, en. 
douter, de. 
se passer, de. 
desshher. 

dessmer, crayonner. 
trainer, entrahier. 

rapproeher, de. 
tlrer. 

piiiser, a, dans. 

panser. 

se coiffer. 

s'liabil/er. 

redouter. 

rever, songer, a. 

hoire, a. 

porter tine safitc, a, 

prendre le the. 

bt-uiner. 

dcbusquer, de. 

dcgoutter, de. 

noyer. 

se noyer. 

sccher. 

duper. 

i'pousseter, brosser. 

manger. 

(■clipser, s'cclipser. 

economiser. 

border. 

edijier, 

effacer, de. 

coudoyer. 

electriser. 

elire. 

eluder. 

Imaner, de. 

emanciper. 

embaumer. 

embarquer, s^embar- 

quer. 
embarasser, 
s^embai-rasser, de, 

dans. 
embellir. 



to Embolden, 

to Embrace, 

to Embroider, 

to Embroil, 

to Emigrate, 

to Employ, to use, 

to Employ one's self, 

to Empty, 

to Encamp, 

to Enchant, 

to Enclose, 

to Encoiu-age, 

to Encumber, 

to Encroach, 

to End, 

to Endeavour, 

to Engage, 
to Engage one's self, 
to Engrave, 
to Enjoin, 
to Enjoy, 
to Enrol one's self, 
to Enlist one's self, 
to Enliven, 
to Ennoble, 
to Enrich ones self, 
to Entangle one's 
self, 

to Enter, to go or 
come in, 

to Entertain, to 
maintain, to keep, 

to Entice, to aUure, 

to Entitle, 

to Entreat, 

to Enumerate, 

to Envelope, to wrap 
up, 

to Envenom, 

to Environ, to sur- 
round, 

to Envy, 

to Equal, 

to Equip, 

to Erase, to scratch, 

to Erect, 

to Err, to wander,' 

to Escape, 



to Escort, 
to Establish, 
to Esteem, 
to Eternise, 



enhardir. 

embrasser. 

broder. 

hrouiller. 

l^migrer, de. 

employer. 

s' employer, a, pour. 

vider, se vider. 

cai?iper. 

enchanter, fasciner. 

enclorre, de. 

encourager, a. 

encomhrer, de. 

empiker, sur. 

aboidir, a. 

t acker, a, de ; s'effor- 

cer, de ; s'ktidier, S. 
engager, a. 
s"" engager, a, dans. 
buriner, graver, 
enjoindre, a. 
jouir, de. 
s'enrdler, dans. 
s'enrufer, dans, 
(gayer, 

ennablir, anoblir, 
s'enrichir, 
s^ntortiUer, s^empe- 

trer, s'embarrasser, 

dans. 
entrer, dans. 

entretenir. 

atfirer, amorcer, 
iniitider. 
supplier, de. 
i'ntimh'er. 
envelopper, de, dans, 

envenimer. 
environner, de. 

envier ; porter envie, a. 

t'ga/er. 

eqtdper. 

effacer, de; raiurer, 

rayer. 
(triger, a. 
errer. 
echapper,^,; s'cchap- 

per, de ; se sauver, 

de. 
escorter. 
vtahlir. 
estimer. 
eterniser. 



450 



VOCABULARY.^VERBS. 



to Evacuate, . dvacuer. 

to Evaporate, evaporer, s'evapore?'. 

to Exact, exiger, de. 

to Exaggerate, exagerer. 

to Exalt, to extol, exalter. 

to Examine, examiner. 

to Exhaust, epuiser. 

to be Exhausted, s' epuiser, en. 

to Exceed, exceder. 

to Excel, exceller, en, dans, 

par. 

to Except, excepter. 

to Except against, reciiser. 

to recuse, 

to Exchange, echanger, contre. 

to Excite, exciter, a. 

to Exclaim, s' eerier; se r eerier, 

contre. 

to Exclude, exdure, de. 

to Excommunicate, excommunier. 

to Exculpate, disculper,se disculper. 

to Exculpate one's se justijier, de. 

self, 

to Excvise, excuser. 
to Excuse one's self, s^ excuser, de. 

to Execute, executer. 

to Exempt, exempter, de. 

to Exercise, exercer. 

to Exercise one's s* exercer, a. 

self, 

to Exert one's self, s'evertuer. 
to Exhale, to hreathe exhaler,s^exha/er,en. 

out, 

to Exhort, exhorter, a. 

to Exist, exister. 

to Expatriate, expatrier. 

to Expect, attefidre, de. 

to Expel, expu/ser, chasser, de. 

to Experience, eprouver. 

to Experiment, experimenter. 

to Expiate, expier. 

to Expire, expirer. 

to Expire, to fall echoir. 

due, 

to Explain, expliquer, a. 

to Explore, explorer. 

to Export, exporter. 

to Expose, exposer, a, en. 
to Expose one's self, s'exposer, a. 

to Express, exprimer, 

to Express one's s^exprimer, s^'enoncer. 

self, 
to Extend, to spread, etendre, s'etendre. 

to Extenuate, extenuer. 

to Exterminate, exterminer. 
to Extinguish,. to put eteindre. 
out. 



to Extirpate, • 


extirper. 


to Extort, 


extorquer, ai. 


to Extract, ■ 


ex tr aire, de. 


to Extravagate, 


extravaguer. 


to Extol, 


vanter. 


to Eye, to view, to 


envisager. , 


consider, 




to Facilitate^ 


faeiliter, a. 


to Fade, to wither, 


fletrir, se Jikrir, se 


to decay-, 


ternir. 


to Fail, 


faillir,defaillir; man' 




quer, a, de. 


to Faint, to vanish 


sevanouir. 


away. 




to Fall, 


tomber, de, par, sut^ 




en, dans. 


to Fallback, 


reculer. 



to Fall down, to give s''ecrouler. 

■way, 
to Fall upon, sejeter, sur. 

to Fall asleep, s^e7xdormir. 

to Fall asleep again, se rendormir. 



to Falsify, 

to Falter, to stam- 
mer, 

to Familiarize one's 
self, 

to Famish, to starve, 

to Fancy, 



falsifier, 
se troubler. 

se familiar iser, avec. 

affamer. 

sefgurer, sHmaginer, 

se reprhenter. 
affermer. 



to Farm, 

to Fashion, to polish, /«fo?^?^er, 

to Fast, jeiiner. 

to Fatigue, to tire, fatiguer, de. 

to Fathom, 

to Fatten, 

to Favour, 

to Fear, 

to Feast, 

to Feather, 



to Fecundify, to 
make fruitful, 
to Feed, 
to Feed upon, 
to Feel, to resent, 



toiser. 
engraisser. 
favoriser, 
craindre, de. 
festiner. 
-emplumer, s^emplu- 

mer. 
feconder. 

pattre. 

se repattre, de. 

ressentir; se ressen- 

tir, de. 
sentir. 
toucher, tater. 



to Feel, to smell, 
to Feel, to touch, 
to Feel one's way in tatonner. 

the dark, 
to Feign, feindre, faire sent 

blant, de. 
to Ferment, fermenter. 

to Ferret, to search, /wre^er. 
to Fertilize, fertiliser. 

to Fetch, qukrir. 



VOCABULARY .—VERBS. 



451 



to Fight, 

to File, 

to Fill, to fill up, 

to Fill, to satiate, 



a, en, 



to Filtrate, 

to Find, 

to Find again, 

to Find one's self, 

to be found, 
to Finish, 
to Fish, 
to Fix, 
to Flatter, 
to Flatter one's self, se flatter, de. 
to Flank, flunqner, de, 

to Fling, to dart, to lancer. 

launch, 
to Float, to flue- flatter, ba/ancer. 

tuate, 
to Flock in crowds, s'attrotiper. 
to Flourish, to bios- fleurir. 

som, 



eombattre, se battre, 

avec. 
livier. 

emp/ir, renvplir^ de. 
rassasier, se rassasier, 

de. 
flJtrer. 
trouver, a. 
retrouver. 
se trouver 

dans. 
finir, achever. 
pecker, 
flxer. 
flatter, de. 



to Flow, 

to Flutter about, 

to Fly, to shun, 

to Fly away, 

to Foam, to^skim, 

to Follow, 

to Follow, to ensue, 

to Foment, 

to Forage, 

to Forbear, 

to Forearm, 
to Force, 
tq Foresee, 
to Forfeit, to tres- 
pass, 
to Forge, to invent, 
to Forget, 

to Forget one's self, 

to Form, to frame, 

to Forsake, 

to Found, to ground 

to Foretell, 

to Fortify, 

to Foul, to defile, 

to Freeze, 

to Freeze again, 

to Freight, 

to Frenchify, 

to Frequent, 

to Freshen, 



colder', 
voltiger. 

fuir, eviter, voler. 
s'eiwoler. 
tcumer. 
sidvre. 
s''ensinvre, de. 
fomenter. 
fourrager. 
s''empecher, se retenir, 

se dispenser, de. 
se prtmunir, contre. 
forcer, a, de. 
prevoir, pressentir. 
forfaire, a. 

forger, invent er. 
oub/ier, a, de ; dts- 

apprendre. 
s^oiib/ier, se mecon- 

nattre. 
former. 

de/a isser,aban donn e r. 
, fonder, 
predire, a. 
fortifler, de. 
souiler,se souii/er,de. 
ge/er, glaeer. 
regeler. 
frtter. 
franciser. 
frequenter, hanter. 
fraichir. 



to Fret, 

to Fret and fume, 

to Frighten, 

to Fringe, 

to Froth, to foam, 

to Frown, 

to Fructify, 

to Frustrate, 

to Fry, 

to Fulminate, 

thunder, 
to Fumigate, 



to 



se chagriner, de ; &e 

depite'r, contre. 
fulminer. 

effrayer, epoztvanter. 
franger. 

moKsser, moutonner. 
se rider, se refrogner. 
fructifier. 
frustrer, de. 
frire, fricasser. 
fulmiyier, foudroyev* 

fiimiger. 



to Fur, to stuff with, fourrer, de. 



to Furbish, 
to Furnish, 

to Furnish again, 

to Gallop, 

to Gambol, 

to Gangrene, 

to Gather, 

to Garden, 

to Gauge, 

to Gesticulate, 

to Get again, 

to Get, to gain, to 

win, 
to Get off clear, 

to Get one's self 

ready, 
to Get rid of, 
to Get the start, 
to Gf t tipsj^, 
to Get weary or 

tired, 
to Gild, 
to Gird, 



fviirbir, polir. 
foi/rnir, garnir, meu' 

bier, 
refuiirnir, r eg amir, 

remeubler. 
galoper. 
gambader. 
se gangrmer. 
cneillir, ipercevoir. 
jardiner. 
jauger. 
gesticuler. 
ravoir. 
gagner. 

se tirer, de ; se dt' 
meler, de. 

se disposer, a ; se pre- 
parer, a. 

se difcnre, de. 

prendre les devanfs. 

s'enivrer. 

s''ennu!/er, de. 

do}'er. 

ceindre, sangler. 



to Give one's self up, s^abatidontier, a. 
to Give, donner, a. 

to Give again, redonner, a. 

to Give a gloss, lustrer. 

to Give cold, enrhumer. 

to Give one the lie, dementir. 
to Glaze over again, revernir. 



to Glean, 

to Glitter, to shine, 

to Glory, 

to Glory in, 

to Glut one's self, 

to Gnaw, 

to Go, 

to Go back, 

to Go or come up, 

to Go in again. 



glaner. 

lu'ire, relidre. 

glorifler. 

se. gloiifler, de. 

se gorger, de. 

grincer, ranger. 

aller, a, en, dans. 

s'e;j retourner. 

vionter. 

rentrer, dans. 



452 



VOCABULARY.—VERBS. 



to Go out, sortir, s^Heindre. 

to Go out again, ressortir, de. 
to Go out of one's se dttourner, de. 



way, 
to Go or walk on, 
to Govern, 
to Graft, 
to Grant, 
to Grasp, to gripe, 
to Grate, to rasp, 
to Grieve, 
to Grind, 
to Grind again, 
to Groan, 
to Grow, 
to Grow bigger, 
to Grow loold, 
to Grow fair, 
to Grow hoarse, 
to Grow impatient, 
to Grow inveterate, 
to Grow lean, 
to Grow milder, 
to Grow old, 
to Grow pale, 
to Grow prou.d, 
to Grow rich, 
to Grov/ rotten, 
to Grow tall, 
to Grow ugly, 
to Grow used, 

to Grow worm-eaten, 

to Grow yellow, 

to Grow young, 

to Grub up, 

to Guess, 

to Guide, 

to Gush, to run out, 

to Hail, 

to Hail a ship, 

to Haggle, 

to Handle, 

to Hang, 

to Hang out for 

sale, 
to Hang up, 
to Happen, 
to Harangue, 
to Hash, 
to Hate, 
to Have, 

to Have a glimpse of, 
to Have patience, 

to Have a strong 
desire for, 



avancer, cheminer. 

gouverner. 

greffer. 

accorder, a. 

empoigner, 

7'dper. 

s'affliger, de. 

moudre, emoudre. 

remoudi'e, rimondre. 

gkmir. 

croitre. 

grossir, 

s'aihardir, 

hlon dir. 

s'enrouer. 

sHmpatieyiter, de. 

s'invl'ther. 

maigrir. 

se radoucir, 

vieillir. 

pdlir, hlemir. 

eenorgueillir, de. 

s''enrichir. 

poiirrir, se putrejier, 

grandir. 

enlaidir. 

s^habihter^ S'accou- 
tumer, sefaire, a. 

se vermoider. 

jaunir. 

rajeimir. 

def richer. 

deviner. 

guider. 

ridsseler, de. 

grtler. 

h'der tin itavire. 

harguigner. 

manicr. 

pendre. 

etcder, exposer en 
vente. 

suspendre. 

arriver, sitrvenir, a. 

haravguer. 

hacker. 

hair. 

avoir, a. 

entrevoir. 

avoir patience, pati- 
ent er. 

se passionner, pour. 



to Have recourse 
to, 

to Have secret in- 
telligence with, 

to Hawk about, 

to Heap up, 

to Hear, to listen. 



avoir recours, recou- 

rir, §,. 
s^entendre, avec. 

colporter. 

entasser, amonceler. 
entendre^ ecouter. 



to Hear favourably, exaucer. 

to Heat, 

to Heat one's self, 

to Help, 

to Help one's self, 

to Help one another 

or each other, 
to Plem, 
to Hesitate, 
to Hide in the 

ground, 
to Hinder, 
toHit, to run against, 
to Hoe, 
to Hoist, 
to Honour, 
to Hope, 

to Howl, 
to Hum, 
to Humble, 



chaufftr, echauffer. 
s'^echavffer, S. 
aider, a, de. 
s' aider, de. 
s'entr'' aider, s'entre- 

secourlr. 
curler. 

hesiter, balancer, 
enfouir. 

empecher, de. 

kezirter. 

holier. 

arborer. 

honorer, de. 

esperer, en ; se p? o- 
metlre, de. 

hinder. 

fredonner. 

hum ilier, 
to Humble one's self, s' humilier* 
to Hunt, chasser. 

to Hurt, hlesser ; nitire, a. 

to Hurt one's self, se blesser, a. 
to Hurt one another, s''entrc-nuire. 
to Identify, identijier. 

to Idolise, idoldlrer. 

to Illuminate, illuminer. 

to Illustrate, illnstrer, 

to Imagine, to fancy, sHmaginer^seJigwer 
to Imitate, innter. 

to Immortalise, immortaliser. 

to Implant, implanter. 

to Implicate, impliqiier. 

to Implore, implorer. 

to Import, to concern importer, a. 
to Importune, importiiner, de. 

to Impose, imposer, a. 

to Impose on or en imposer, en f aire 

upon, accroire, a. 

to Imprison, emprisonner, incar- 

cerer. 
to Improve, amcliorer, honifier, 

to Impute, imputer, a. 

to Inaugurate, inaugurer. 

to Incense, to praise, encenser. 
to Incite, inciter, a. 

to Incommode, incommoder. 

to Incorporate, incorporer, dans. 



VOCABULARY.— VERBS. 



453 



to Inculcate, 
to Indemnify, 

to Indemnify one's 

self, 
to Indicate, 
to Induce, 
to Inebriate, 
to Infatuate, 
to Infect, 
to Infer, 
to Infest, 
to Inflame, 

to Inflict, 

to Influence, 

to Inform, 

to Inform against, 

to Infringe, 

to Infuse, 

to Inhabit, to live, 

to Inherit, 

to Initiate, 

to Injure, 

to Inlay, 

to Inoculate, 

to Innovate, 

to Inquire, 

to Inscribe, 

to Inscribe one's self, 

to Insert, 

to Insinuate, 

to Insist, 
to Inspect, 
to Inspire, 
to Instal, 

to Institute, 

to Instruct, 

to Insult, 

to Inter, to bury, 

to Intercede, 

to Intercept, 

to Interdict, 

to Interest, 

to Interest one's 

self, 
to Interpose, 
to Interpret, 
to Interrogate, 
to Interrupt, to 

trouble, 
to Intimate, 
to Intimidate, 
to Intrigue, 



inculquer, a. 
diidommager, de ; in- 

demniser, de. 
se dcdommager, de. 

indiquer, a. 
induire, a, en. 
enivrer, de. 
infatuer, de. 
infecter. 
infer er, de. 
infester. 
enjiammer, s'enfiam- 

mer, de. 
infiger, a. 
injliier, sur. 
informer, de. 
denoncer, 
enfreindre. 
infuser. 
habiier. 
hrriter, de. 
initier, dans. 
injurier. 

viarqiieter.farqueter. 
inoculer. 
innover. 
s^e?iqifcriryS' informer, 

de. 
inscrire, sur. 
s'inscrire, sur. 
inserer, dans. 
insiniier. ii ; s'insi- 

nuer, dans. 
insisier, sur. 
surveiller. 
inspirer, a. 
installer, ^installer, 

dans. 
instiliter. 
inatrnire. 
insiilter, a. 
enterrer, inhiimer. 
interccder, pour. 
intercepter. 
inter dire, u. 
interesser. 
s'interesser, a. 

s'enlremettre. 
interpreter, 
interroger. 
interrompre. 

in timer. 

intimider. 

intriguer. 



to Introduce, inlroduire, presen- 

ter, a. 
to Introduce one's s^introdinre, chez, 

self, aupres. 

to Intrude one's self, se fourrer, se fau- 
filer, chez. 



to Intrust, 

to Invade, 

to Invalidate, 

to Inveigh, 

to Invent, 

to Invest, 

to Invite, 

to Invite one's self, 

to Invoke, 

to Irritate, 

to Itch, 



fer, confer, 
envahir. 
invalider. 
invectiver, coutre. 
inventer. 
inveslir, de. 
inviter, a, de. 
s'inviter, a. 
invoqiter. 
irriter, contre. 
demanger. 



to Jeer, to jeer at, miller ; serailler,(le; 

to play upon one, turlupiner quel- 
qii'un, 
to Jest, badiner. 

to Jog, to shake, branler, remuer. 
to Join, to overtake, joindre, rejoindre, 
to Joke, plaisanter, sur. 

to Jolt, cahoter. 

to Judge, ji'g^)', de. 

to Justify, justifer, de. 

to Justify one's self, se justifer, de. 
to Justle, jouter. 

to Keep, garder, a, pour, 

to Keep from, to garantir, de. 

preserve, 
to Keep from, to se garder, de. 

forbear, 
to Keep a holiday, /e/e?-. 

to make welcome, 
to Keep in pay, soudoyer. 

to Keep, to stay, &e tenir, a, dans ; 

rester, a. 
toKeep one's temper, se r e tenir, se posskder. 
to Keep, to retain, retenir. 
to Kill, tuer. 

to Kill one another, s' entre-tuer. 
to Kill one's self, se tuer, se dttruire. 
to Kindle, to break se rallumer. 

out again. 



to Knead, 

to Kneel down, 

to Knit, to stitch, 

to Know, 

to Know again, 

to Lace, 

to Lacerate, 

to Lament, 

to Land, 



pttnr. 

s'agenouiller. 

brocher. 

savoir, conn mire. 

reconnaUi'e. 

lacer. 

lace'rer. 

lamenter. 

ahorder, sur, dans, 

de ; prendre 

terre* 



454 



VOCABULARY.— VERBS. 



to Languish, languir. 

to Lard, larder. 

to Last, durer. 

to Lauu;h, rire, de. 

to Laugh at, se moqtier, de ; se 

rire, de. 
to Launch, lancer. 

to Lavish, gaspiller, prodiguer. 

to Lay out by line, aligner. 
to Lay eggs, pondre. 

to Lay waste, dev aster. 

to Lay, to set, poser. 

to Lay, to bet, parier, gager. 

to Lay up a ship, desarmer un vaisseau. 
to Lead, to take, mener, a. 
to Lead, plomher. 

to Lean, to rely, s'appuyer, de, sur, 

contre. 
to Lean on one's s^accouder, sur. 

elbow, 
to Leap, to jump, sauter. 
to Leap over, franchir. 

to Learn, apprendre, a. 

to Learn again, rapprendre, a. 

to Leave, laisser, quitter. 

to Leave behind, devancer. 
to Leer, to ogle, lorgner. 

to Lend, preter, a. 

to Lengthen, allonger, rallonger. 

to Lessen, rapetisser. 

to Let go, laisser aller, lacker, 

largicer. 
to Let loose, dechainer, contre. 

to Let one know, faire savoir, a. 
to Level, aplanir, niveler. 

to Liberate, liberer, de. 

to Lick, lecher. 

to Lift up, lever, soulever, de. 

to Light, allumer, eclair er. 

to Light again, rallumer. 

to Limit, limiter. 

to Limp, to hobble, boiter, clocher. 
to Liquidate, liqmder. 

to Liquify, ' liqul'Jler. 

to Lisp, grasseytr. 

to List, enroler, dans, 

to Live or feed upon, iiiyrc, de ; se nourrir 

de. 
to Live, to abide, demeurcr, a, en, 

dans, 
to Load, to charge, charger, de. 
to Load again, recharger, de. 

to Lock, fermer a clef. 

to Lock or shut in, enferiiier,(\sins, sous 
to Lodge, loger. 

to Look for, chercher. 

to Look at, regarder. 



to Look at or stare s'entre-regarder. 

at one another, 
to Look gruff, rechigner. 

to Loosen, detacher, de. 

to Loosen one's self, se detacher, de. 
to Lop, to prune, elaguer. 
to Lose, perdre. 

to Lose its coloxir, se deteindre. 
to Lose one's self, se perdre. 
to Lose one's way, s'egarer. 
to Love, to like, to aimer, a. 

be fond of, 
to Love one another, s'entr aimer. 
to Low, mugir. 

to Lower, baisser. 

to Lull asleep, endormir. 

to Magnify, magnijier. 

to Maintain, to keep, maintenir, entretenir, 

scndenir. 
to Make, to do, faire. 

to Make one's ap- comparaitrc, parai- 
pearance, tie. 

to Make one bleed, faire saigner. 

to Make darker, rembrunir. 
to Make drowsy, assoi/pir. 
to Make one's es- s'echapper, s' evader, 
cape, de, 

to Make faggots, fagoter. 

to Make fast, to amarrer, a, dans, 
mooi-, 

to Make the first cut, entamer. 

to Make glad, rejouir. 

to Make haste, se depecher, se hater, 

de. 

to Make a hole, faire un trou, trouer. 

to Make lonely, isolcr. 

to Make round, arrondir. 

to Make sour, aigrir. 

to Make uneasy, inquieter. 

to Make welcome, accueillir. 

to Manage, menager. 

to Manifest, manifester. 

to Manoeuvre, manoeuvrer. 

to Manufacture, fabriquer. 

to Marble, marbrer, 

to Mark, marquer, a. 

to Marry, epouser, marier, se 

marirr. 

to Mairy again, se remarier. 

to Marvel, s'' emerveiller, de. 

to Mask, masquer. 

to Massacre, massocrer. 

to Mast, mater. 

to Master, maitriser. 

to Match, assorlir. 

to Measure, mesurer. 

to Meddle, se /y/e/e>-, de. 



VOCABULARY.— VERBS. 



455 



to Meet, to meet 


rencontrer, &e ren- 


to New gild, 


redorer. 


agaiii;, 


contrer. 


to New pave. 


repaver. 


to Meet close, 


se joindre. 


to New shoe 


referrer. 


to Melt, 


fondre, parfondre. 


(horses). 




to Mend, 


raccommoder. 


to Note, 


noter, de. 


to Metamorphose, 


metamorphose }•, en ; 


to Notify, 


notijier, a. 




se mkamorphoser, 


to Nourish, 


nourrir. 




en. 


to Number, 


nomhrer, numtroier. 


to Mew, 


miauler. 


to Nurse a sick per 


garder un malade. 


to Milk, 


traire. 


son. 




to Mince, 


kacher. 


to Obey, 


oheir, a. 


to Misinterpret, 


mesifiterpreter, inter- 


to Object, 


objecter, a. 




preter mal. 


to Oblige, 


obliger, a, de. 


to Mislead, 


egarer, ecarter, de. 


to Oblige one ano 


s'entrobliger. 


to Mistrust, 


se mefier, de ; se de- 


ther, 






Jter,de. 


to Observe, 


observer. 


to Misuse, 


mcdtrai/er, sevir. 


to Obstruct, 


obstrmr. 


to Mitigate, 


mitiger. 


to Obtain, 


obtenir, de. 


to Mix, 


mcler, avfic. 


to Obviate, 


obvier, a. 


to Model, 


modeler. 


to Occasion, 


occasionner. 


to Moderate, 


moderer. 


to Occupy, 


occuper, a. 


to Modify, 


modifier. 


to Occupy one's self, s'occuper, a, de. 


to Modulate, 


modu/er. 


to Offend, 


offenser. 


to Moisten, 


humect er. 


to be Offended, 


s'offenser, de. 


to Molest, 


molester. 


to Offer, 


offrir, a. 


to Monopolise, 


monopoler, monopo- 


to Officiate, 


ojficier. 




liser. 


to Offuscate, 


offusquer. 


to Moralise, 


moraliser. 


to Oil, 


huiler. 


to Mortify, 


morlifier. 


to Omit, 


omettre, a, de. 


to Mould, 


mouler; moisir. 


to Open, 


ouv?^ir, dessiller, a. 


to Mount, 


of liter. 


to Open again. 


rouvrir. 


to Move, 


mouvoir ; tmouvoir, 


to Open half way. 


rentr'ouvrir. 




attendrir. 


to Operate, 


optrer. 


to Move, to stir. 


s'ebrmler, remuer. 


to Oppose, 


oppose r, s^opposer, a. 


to Mow, 


faucher. 


to Oppress, 


oppresser, opprimer, 


to Muffle up, 


affuhler, de. 




grever, de. 


to Muffle one's self s envelopjter, dans, 


to Order, 


ordonner, a. 


up, to wrap one's de, avec. 


to Organise, 


organiser. 


self up, 




to Outlaw, to banish 


, proscrire. 


to Multiply, 


midtiplier. 


to Outrage, 


out rage r. 


to Murder, 


assassi/ier. 


to Overflow, 


regorger, de ; d4- 


to Murmur, 


murmi/rer, eutre. 




border, se deborder. 




contre. 


to Overheat one's 


s'echaujfer. 


to Mutilate, 


muiiler. 


self, 




to Mutiny, 


se mutiner. 


to Overtake, 


rattraper, rejoindre. 


to Mutter, 


marmotler. 


to Overthrow, to 


renverser, de ; cul- 


to Nail, 


cloutr. 


overturn, 


buter. 


to Nail again, 


reclouer. 


to Own, 


avouery a. 


to Nail up, 


enclouer. 


to Pacify, 


pacifier. 


to Name, 


nommer, a. 


to Pack up, - 


ejnballer,empaqueter. 


to Naturalise, 


naturaliser. 


to Pack up again. 


remballer. 


to Navigate, 


navigicer, en, sur. 


to Pain, to trouble. 


peiner. 


to Necessitate, 


neeessiter. 


to P.dnt, 


peindre, se farder. 


to Neglect, 


ntgliger. 


to Paint again. 


repeindre. 


to Neglect one's self, se ntgliger. 


to Palpitate, 


palpiter. 


to Negotiate, 


negocier. 


to Paraphrase, 


paraphraser. 


to Neigh, 


hennir. 


to Pardon, 


pa7-donner, h. 



456 



VOCABULARY.— VERBS. 



to Part> 
to Parody, 
to Participate, 
to Particularise, 
to Pass, to spend, 
to Pass, to go for, _ 
to Pass the night in 

the open air, 
to Paste, to glue, 
to Patch, 

to Pause, to keep on, 
to Pave, 
to Pawn, 
to Pay, 
to Pay again, 
to Pay one's self, 
to Peck, 
to Penetrate, 
to People, 
to Pepper, 
to Perch, 
to Perfect, 
to Perfect one's self, 

to Perfume, 

to Perish, 

to Perjure one's self, 

to Permit, 

to Perpetuate, 

to Persecute, 

to Persevere, 

to Persist, 

to Personify, 

to Perspire, 

to Persuade, 

to Persuade one's 

self, 
to Pervert, 
to Pei-vert one's self 
to Petrify, 
to Philosophise, 
to Pick, 
to Piece, to patch, 

to Pierce, to tap, 
to Pile up, 
to Pilfer, 

to Pillage, to plun- 
der, 
to Pinch, 
to Pirate, 
to Pity, 
to Place, 

to Place one's self, 
to Plane, 
to Plant, 
to Plaster, 



se sepa7'er, de. 

parodier. 

participer, a. 

particulariser. 

passer, 

passer pour. 

bivouaquer. 

colier. 
rapitceter. 

pauser, appuyer, sur. 
paver. 

mettre en gage, 
payer, a, de. 
repayer, a, de. 
se payer, de. 
picoter, becqueter. 
ptnetrer, dans. 
peupler, de. 
poivrer. 
se percher, sur. 
per/eciionner. 
, se perfectionner, 

dans. 
parfumer. ■ 
pc?-ir, de. 
se parjurer. 
pennettre, a, de. 
perptluer. 
perstcuter. 
perstvtrtr, dans. 
persister, dans. 
personnijier. 
transpirer. 
persuader, a, de. 
se persuader. 

pervertir. 
, se pervertir. 
petrifier. 
philosopher, 
tplitcher, trier, 
rapitcer, rapieceter, 

raboutir. 
percer. 
evipiler. 
escamoter, a. 
rapiner, butiner. 

pincer. 
piruter, sur. 
plaindre, de. 
placer, a, sur, chez. 
se placer, sur, chez. 
raboter, dtgauchir. 
planter, 
plairer. 



to Plate, 

to Play, 

to Plead, 

to Please, 

to Plot, to conspire, 

to Plume, 

to Plunder, 

to Plunge, 

to Plunge one's self, 

to Pocket up, 

to Point, 

to Poison, to infect, 

to Poke, to stir the 
fire, 

to Polish, 

to Pollute, 

to Pome,tocabhage, 

to Put up, 

to Possess, 

to Possess one's 
self, 

to Post, 

to Post one's self, 

to Pound, 

to Pour out, to scat- 
ter, 

to Pout, 

to Practise, 

to Prance, 

to Prate, to prattle, 

to Pray, 

to Preach, 

to Precipitate, 

to Predestinate, 

to Predominate, 

to Pre-exist, 

to Prefer, 

to Prejudice, 

to Prejudge, 

to Prelude, 

to Premeditate, 

to Prepare, 

to Prepare one's 

self, 
to Presage, 
to Prescribe, 
to Present, 
to Present one's self, 

to offer one's self, 
to Preserve, to keep, 

to pickle, 
to Preside, 
to Press, to squeeze, 
to Presume, 



plaqner. 
jouer, a, de. 
plaider. 
plaire, a. 
complofer, conspirery 

contre. 
phimcr. 
piller. 

plonger, dans. 
se plonger, dans. 
empocher. 
ponetuer, pointer, 
empoisonner. 
fourgonner, remuer 

lefeu. 
polir. 
pollucr. 
pommer, 
ajfficher. 
posseder. 
se posseder. 

poster, sur, dans. 
se poster, sur, dans. 
broyer, dans. 
verser, epandre, 

bonder, 
pratiquer, ejcercer, 

professer. 
se cabrer. 
bavarder. 
prier, a, de. 
precher. 
prtcipiter. 
prtdestincr. 
predominer. 
preexister. 
preferer, a. 
prl'judicier, faire 

tort, a. 
prejuger. 
preluder. 
premediter. 
preparer, 
se prl'paretf a. 

presager.pronostiquer. 
prescrire^ li. 
presenter, 3.. 
se presenter, a, de- 

vant. 
preserver, conserver, 

confire. 
pr'isider, 
presser, de. 
presumer, de. 



YOCABUI.ARY.— VERBS. 



457 



to Pretend, 


prtiendre. 


to Pursue, to pro- 


poursuivre. 


to Pretend, to al- 


pretexter. 


secute. 




lege, 




to Push, 


pousser, a. 


to Prevaricate, 


prevariquer. 


to Put a title or 


etiqueter. 


to Prevent, 


prcveni?; 


label to. 




to Prick, 


piquer. 


to Put in or fill with 


I empailler. 


to Prim, 


tninauder. 


straw, 




to Print, 


imprimer. 


to Put into a frame 


, encadrer. 


to Privilege, 


priviliyier. 


to Put on one's shoes se chaitsser. 


to Proceed, 


proecder, a. 


and stockings, 




to Proceed from, 


provenir, de. 


to Put one's boots 


se hotter. 


to Proclaim, 


proclamer. 


on, 




to Procure, 


procurer^ a. 


to Put one's self out se dhanger. 


to Produce, to be- 


produire, engendrer. 


of the wav. 




get, 




to Put out, ' 


d'csorienter. 


to Profane, 


profane r. 


to Put to, 


atteler, a. 


to Profess, 


professe?: 


to Putrify, 


putrefier. 


to Profit, 


profiler, de. 


to Quadruplicate, 


qitadrupler. 


to Prohibit, 


prohiber; dl/endre, a. 


to Quake, to shiver 


, trembler, de; trem- 




de. 




bloter. 


to Project, 


projeter, saii/ir. 


to Qualify, 


qualijxer. 


to Prolong, 


p7-olonger. 


to Quarrel with, 


qitt reller, se quereVer. 


to Promise, 


prometlre, a, de. 


to Rack, 


torturer. 


to Promote, 


promouvoir, a. 


to Rage, 


se courroucer. 


to Promulgate, 


promulguer. 


to Rain, 


pleuvoir. 


to Pronounce, 


prononcer. 


i> Raise, 


exliausser, sur. 


to Prop, 


appuyer, ttangomier. 


to Raise, 


e level'. 


to Prophesy, 


prophetiser, a. 


to Raise again. 


relever. 


to Propagate, 


propager, se prO' 


to Rally, 


rallier. 




pager. 


to Ramble from. 


s'l'loigner. 


to Proportion, 


proportio7iner, a. 


fo Range, to set in 


ranger, arranger. 


to Propose, 


proposer, a. 


ordei". 




to Prorogue, 


proroger. 


to Ransom, 


ranQonner. 


to Prosper, 


prosperer. 


to Rarify, 


rarl'fier. 


to Prostitute, 


prostitKer. 


to Ratify, 


ratijier. 


to Prostitute one's 


se prostiluer. 


to Ravage, 


ravager. 


self, 




to Ravish, to charm 


ravir. 


to Prostrate one's 


se prosferner, devant. 


to Reach, 


atteindre. 


self. 




to Read, 


lire. 


to Protect, 


proteger. 


to Read over again, 


retire. 


to Protest, 


protester, a. 


to Realize, 


rcaliser. 


to Prove, 


proiiver, vprouver. 


to Reap, 


7noissonner, reaieillir. 


to Provide, 


pour voir, a. 


to Reason, 


raisotiner. 


to Provide one's self, se poto'voir, de ; se 


to Re-assure, 


rassurer. 




prlmunir, contre. 


to Rebel, 


se revolte?; contre. 


to Provoke, to set 


provoqiier, a; agacer. 


to Rebound, 


rebondir. 


on edge, 




to Rebuild, 


rebdtir. 


to Prune, 


emonder. 


to Recant, to go 


se dedire^ se rctracter. 


to Publish, 


puhlier. 


from one's word. 




to Pulverise, 


pulv ['riser. 


to Recapitulate, 


rl'capituler. 


to Pull down. 


abattre. 


to Recede from, 


dhnordre, de. 


to Pull, to draw, to 


aracher, a, de. 


to Receive, 


recevoir, de. 


snatch, 




to Recite, 


reciter. 


to Pump, 


pomper. 


to Reclaim, 


rec/amer. 


to Punish, 


pitnir, de. 


to Recline, 


recliner. 


to Purge, 


purger. 


to Recollect, 


se rappeler, se remel- 


to Purify, 


2mi'ijier, 




ire. 



458 



VOCABULARY.—VERBS. 



to Recollect one's 

self, 
to Recommend, 
to Recompense, 
to Reconcile, 
to Reconduct, 
to Reconquer, 
to Recover, to mend, 

to Recover one's self, 

to Recreate, 

to Recriminate, 

to Recruit, 

to Rectify, 

to Redden, to blush, 

to Redouble, 

to Redound, 

to Redress, 

to Reduce, 

to Refer, to relate, 

to Refine, 
to Reflect, 
to Reform, 
to Refrain, 

to Refresh, to cool, 
to Refresh one's self, 
to Re-establish, 
to Refuse, 
to Refute, 
to Regain favour, 
to Regenerate, 
to Register, to re- 
cord, 
to Register, 
to Regret, 
to Reign, 
to Re-embark, 

to Reimburse, 

to Reinforce, 

to Reiterate, 

to Reject, 

to Rejoice, 

to Rejoin, to meet 

again, 
to Relapse, 
to Relate, to tell, 

to Relate the mo- 
tives, 
to Relax one's self, 
to Relegate, 
to Relieve, 
to Relent, 



se reeueilHr. 

recommander, a, de. 
recompenser, de. 
recoHcilier. 
recondidre. 
reconqukrir. 
recouvrer ; se rcta- 

blir, de. 
revenir a soi ; se re- 

mettre, de. 
recreer. 
recriminer. 
recruter. 
rectifier, 
rougir, de. 
redoubler. 
redonder. 
redresser. 
reduire, a. 
se rapporter, a ; s^en 

rapporter, §,. 
epiirer, raffiner. 
reflechir, k. 
reformer, 
se contenir, se mO' 

derer. 
rafraichir. 
se rafraichir. 
retablir. 
refuser^ a. 
refuter. 

rentrer en faveur. 
regenerer. 
enregistrer. 

registrer. 
regretter, de. 
7'egner. 
rembarqiier, se rem- 

barquer. 
rembourser, de. 
renforcer. 
reiterer. 
rejeter. 
se rejouirf de. 
rejoindre, 

recidiver. 

conter, raconter, a; 

narrer. 
motiver. 

se reldcher, de. 
releguer, el, dans. 
soulager, de. 
se ralentir» 



to Remain, to sta}', 

to Remark, 

to Remedy, 

to Remit, to put 

again, 
to Remonstrate, 
to Remove> 

to Remove one's 
fears, 

to Remove, to with- 
hold, 

to Render, to return, 
to restore, 

to Renew, 

to Renounce, 

to Repair, to make 

amends, 
to Repair, to go to, 

to Repeal, 

to Repeat, 

to Repel, to repulse, 

to Repent, 

to Repeople, 

to Replace, 

to Reply, 

to Reply sharply, 

to Represent, 

to Repress, 

to Reprimand, to 

chide, 
to Reprint, 
to Reproach, 
to Reprobate, 
to Reproach one's 

self. 
to Reproduce, 
to Repudiate, 
to Require, 
to Resemble, 
to Reserve, 
to Reside, to abide, 
to Resign, 



7'ester, a, dans. i 

remarquer. i 

rem''die?; a. \ 

remettre, a. ; 

remo/ftrer, ii. \ 

de/oger, de; dhne- { 

nager. \ 

se rassiirer. \ 

eloigner, de. \ 

rendre, a.. j 

renouveler, se renou- \ 

veler. 
renoncer, a. 
reparer. 

se rendre, a ; se 
transporter, dans. 

revoquer. 

repker, a. 

repousser. 

se repentiry de. 

repeupler. 

remplacer. 

7'epliquer, a. 

riposter, k. 

representer, a. 

reprimer. 

reptimander, sur ; 
reprendre, de. 

reimprimer. 

rep7'ocher, a. 

reprouver. 

se repror.her, de. 

reproduire. 

repudier. 

requerir. 

ressemh/er, a. 

reserver, pour. 

resider, k. 

resigner, se resigner. 



to Resist, resister, a. 

to Resign, to yield se demettre ; se de- 

up, mettre, de. 

to Resolve, resoudre, k, de ; se 

determiner, a. 
to Resort, to abound, affluer. 
to Resound, r'esonner, de ; reten- 

tir, de. 
to Respect, respecter. 

to Rest to slumber, reposer. 
to Rest one's self, se reposer, de, sur. 



VOCABULARY.— VERBS. 



459 



to Restore, to re- rendre,^.', restituer. 

fund, 
to Restrain, restreindre, se re- 

streindre^ a. 
to Result, resulter, de. 

to Resume, reprendre, resumer. 

to Retire, se retire?', a. 

to Retract, retracter, se retrac- 

ter. 
to Retrench, to sup- retnmcher ; se re- 
press, tranche}'. 
to Retrograde, rktrograder. 
to Return to one's rentrer dans le de- 

duty, voir. 

to Return, to go retourner, a, en. 

back, 
to Return like for revaloir, a. 
like, to l)e even 
with, 
to Reunite, reunir. 

to Reveal, reveler, a. 

to Revenge, venger. 

to Revenge one's se venger, de. 

self, 
to Revere, rherer. 

to Rivet, river. 

to Revise, reviser. 

to Revive, revivre ; ravigoter, 

raviver, ranimer, 
to Revive one's ragouter. 

stomach, 
to Revolt, 7'evolter. 

to Revolve in one's repasser dans son 

mind, esprit. 

to Ride, aller a cheval, a. 

to Ride Postj courir la paste. 

to Ridicule, ridicuiiser. 

to Ripen, murir. 

to Rise again, relever, ressusciter. 

to Rise, to revolt, se soulever, se r'n- 

volter. 
to Rise, to get up, se lever. 
to Risk, risquer. 

to Rinse, rincer. 

to Roam, to ramble, roder, autour. 
to Roar, rugir. 

to Rob, to steal, derober, voler, a. 

to Rock, bercer. 

to Roll, fouler. 

to Root out, dkraciner. 

to Row, ramer. 

to Ruin, ruiner. 

to Rub again, refrotter. 

to Rub off the rust, derouiller. 
to Rub off one's rust, se derouiller. 
to Rule, to govern, i-egir, gouverner. 
to Rule to regulate, regler. 



to Ruminate, 
to Rumple, to 

tiunble, 
to Run, 
to Run aground. 



rummer, 
chiffonner. 



courir, a. 
schouer, a, sur, 
contre. 
to Run away, s'enfuir, de. 

to Run down, se precipiter, de. 

to Run to, accourir, a. 

to Run into debt, ti'endetter. 
to Rush on or upon, s'elancer, sur. 
to Rust, rouiller. 

to Sack, saccager. 

to Sacrifice, immoler, sacrijier, ^ 

to Sacrifice one's se sacrijier, pour. 

self, 
to Saddle, seller. 

to Sail, faire voile, poxir, 

to Salivate, saliver. 

to Salt, saler. 

to Salute, saluer. 

to Salute one se saluer. 

another, 
to Sanctify, sanctijier. 

to Sanction, sanctionner. 

to Sap, saper. 

to Satisfy, satisfaire, assoitvir. 

to Satisfy one's self, se satisfaire, 
to Save, sauver, de. 

to Savour, to relish, savourer. 
to Saw, scier. 

to Say, to tell, dire, a, de. 

to Say over again, redire. 
to Scaffold, echafauder. 

to Scald, echauder. 

to Scale, escalade r. 

to Scandalise, scandaliser. 

to Scold, to snub, gronder, gourman- 

der. 
to Scour, d^graisser. 

to Scourge, to lash, fustiger. 
to Scrawl, griffonner, 

to Scranch, croquer. 

to Scratch, kgratigner. 

to Screw, visser. 

to Scrutinise, scruier. 

to Scum, ecutner. 

to Seal, cacheter, sceller. 

to Search, fouiller. 

to Season, assaisonner, de. 

to Second, seconder, dans, 

to Seduce, seduire. 

to See, to behold, voir, 
to See again, revoir. 

to Seek, to look for, chercher. 
to Seek again, rechercher. 

to Seem, sembler, paraitre, 

X 2 



460 



VOCABULARY.— VERBS. 



to Seize,to take pos- 


saisir; se snisir, s'em- 


to Simplify, 


simplifier. 
pecker, centre. 


session of, 


paver, de. 


to Sin, 


to Sell, 


vendre, a. 


to Sing, 


chanter. 


to Sell by retail, 


dchiter. 


to Sing psalms, 


psalniodier. 


to Send, 


envoyer, a. 


to Sink, 


couler a fond. 


to Send back. 


renvoyer, a. 


to Sink into the 


s' onbourber. 


to Separate, 


scparer, se svparer, 


mud, 






de. 


to Sink under, 


siiccomber, sous, a. 


to Sermon,to lecture 


sermonner. 


to Sip, 


buvotter. 


to Serve, 


servir. 


to Sit down. 


s''asseoir, a, aupres. 


to Set fire to, 


incendier. 


to Sit down at table 


se mettre a table. 


to Set free, 


affranchir, de. 


to Situate, 


situer. 


to Set in order. 


mettre en ordre, ar- 


to Skate, 


patiner. 




ranger. 


to Sketch, 


ebaucher, esquisser. 


to Set, to lay, 


poser. 


to Skin, to flay. 


C'corcher. 


to Set on fire. 


embraser. 


to Skirmish, 


escarmoucher. 


to Set out, 


partir, de, pour. 


to Slacken, to relent 


, ralentir, se ralentir. 


to Set out again, 


reparttr, de, pour. 


to Slacken, to dis 


• se debander. 


to Set over, . 


prcposer, a. 


perse. 




to Settle, 


s'etablir, se fixer, a , 


to Slander, 


medire, sur. 




dans; se rasseoir. 


to Slaver, 


baver. 


to Set up. 


s^eriger, en. 


to Sleep, 


dormir. 


to Shade, 


ombrager, ombre?'. 


to Slide away, 


s^c couler. 


to Shake, 


cadencer, trembler, 


to Shp, to creep into 


, se glisser, dans. 




ebran/er. 


to Slope, 


echancrer. 


to Shake off, 


secouer. 


to Slumber, 


sommeiller. 


to Share, to divide. 


partager, avec, en, 


to Smell, 


fairer, sentir. 




entre ; diviser, en. 


to Smile, 


soiirire, ai. 


to Sharpen, to whet 


, uffder, ai guise r. 


to Smoke, 


fiimer. 


to mount. 


a ff liter. 


to Sneeze, 


eteryiuer. 


to Shave, 


raser. 


to Snore, 


ronfler. 


to Shear, 


tondre. 


to Snow, 


7ieiger. 


to Shell, 


I'cosser. 


to Snuff, 


moucher. 


to Shine, to glitter, 


briller, de ; rehdre. 


to Sob, 


sangloter. 


to Ship back again. 


rembarqiter. 


to Soften, to move 


adoucir. 


to Shiver, 


grehtter, frissonner, 


to pity. 






de. 


to Soften, to grow 


se radoucir. 


to Shock, to offend. 


choquer. 


gentle. 




to Shoe a horse. 


ferrer vn chevaL 


to Sojourn, 


si'jovrner. 


to Shoot, 


fimller. 


to Solder, 


souder. 


to Shoot up, to bud, 


germer. 


to Solemnise, 


solenniser. 


to Shorten, 


accourcir, raccourcir. 


to SoHcit, 


briguer. 


to Shovi^, 


montrer, a. 


to Solve, 


•soudre, rhoudre. 


to Shrink up, to con 


- se resserrer, se con- 


to Sound, to ring, 


sonner. 


tract. 


tracter. 


to Sound, to search 


, sonder. 


to Shroud, 


ensevelir. 


to Sow, 


ensemencer. 


to Shudder, 


frcmir, de. 


to Spare, 


epargner, a. 


to Shuffle, 


hiaiser. 


to Sparkle, 


etinceler, de. 


to Shuffle cards, 


batire les cartes. 


to Speak, 


parler, a, de. 


to Shut, to close. 


fermer. 


to Speak at random 


, diraisonner, baltre la 


to Shut again, 


refermer. 




campagne. 


to Shut up, 


renfermer. 


to Speak gibberish, 


baragoviner. 


to Sift, 


tamiser, cribler. 


to Spell, 


I'peler. 


to Sigh, 


soupirer, apres. 


to Spell and write 


orthographier. 


tc Sign, 


signer. 


correctly. 




to Signify, 


signijier, a. 


to Spend, 


passer; depenser, a, 


to Silver over 


argsntsr. 




en. 



VOCABULARY.—VERBS. 



461 



to Spill, to shed, 

to Spin, 

to Spit, 

to Splash, 

to Split, 

to Spoil, 

to Sport with, 

to Spread, 

to Spur, 

to Spurt up, 

to Spy, 

to Squat down, 

to Squeak, 

to Squeeze, to press, 

to Stab, 

to Stammer, 

to Stamp, 

to Stamp money, 

to Stamp paper, 

to Stanch, to quench, 

to Stand, 

to Stand a tiptoe, 

to Stand by, 

to Stand up, to rise, 

to Starch, 

to Start, 

to Startle, 

to Stay, 

to Steal away, 

to Stiffen, 

to Stifle, to smother, 

to Sting, to incite, 

to Stink, 

to Stipulate, 

to Stir the fire, 

to Stone, to lapidate, 

to Stoop, 

to Stoop with age, 

to Stop, to Stay, 

to Stop up, 

to Store, 

to Straiten, 

to Strangle, 

to Strengthen, 

to Stretch one's self, 

to enlarge, 
to Strew, 

to Strike, to knock, 
to Strip off leaves, 
to Strip, to rob, 



repandre, 

filer. 

embrocher. 

eclabousner. 

poxirfendre. 

gdter. 

se jouer, de. 

se rtpandi'e, se pro- 
pager. 

eperonner. 

rejaUlir, de, sur. 

espionner. 

s' accroupir. 

c/apir. 

presser, serrer, 

poigriarder. 

balbiHier, bl'gayer, 
bredouiUer. 

estamper. 

f rapper de la mon- 
naie. 

timbrer. 

ctancher. 

el re oic se tenir de- 
bout. 

se hausser, 

se ranger. 

se dresser, 

empeser. 

tressaillir, de. 

s'effaroiicher, i'<?/*- 
fraijer, de. 

Tester, demeui'er, a. 

s'esquiver. 

raidir ; se raidir^ 
contre. 

etouffer. 

aigidllomier, 

piier. 

stipuler. 

aftiser le feu, 

lapider. 

se baisser. 

se vouter. 

s'^ar refer. 

boucher. 

emmagasiner. 

etrecir, s'vtj'ccir. 

etrangler. 

fortifier, affermir. 

s'etendre, s'elargir. 

joncher, de. 
f rapper, a, de, sur. 
effeuiller. 

depouiller, de; dcva- 
liser. 



to Strip the dead, 
to Study, 
to Stuff; 

to Stumble, 
to Stun, 
to Stupify, 
to Subdivide, 
to Subdue, 
to Subject, to en- 
slave, 
to Subject one's self, 

to Submerge, 
to Submit, 
to Submit one's self, 
to Suborn, to cor- 
rupt, 
to Subordinate, 
to Subrogate, 
to Subscribe, 

to Subsist, 
to Substitute, 

to Subtract, 

to Subvert, 

to Succeed in, 

to Succeed to, 

to Succour, 

to Suck, 

to Suckle, 

to Suffer, 

to Suffice, 

to Suffocate, 

to Sugar, to sweeten, 

to Suggest, 

to Summon, 

to Superabound, 

to Supersede, 

to Supplant, 

to Supply, to make 

up, 

to Supply, to pro- 
vide, 

to Supply with, 

to Support, to prop, 

to Suppose, 

to Suppress, 

to Suppurate, 

to Surmount, 

to Surname, 

to Surpass, 

to Surprise, 

to Surrender, 

to Surround, 



desensevelir, 
liludier. 
rembourrer, de ; etof' 

fer ; farcir, de. 
trebucher, bi'oncher, 
etourdir, de. 
stupifier, rabetir, 
subdiviser, en. 
subjuguer, dumpier, 
assujettir, asservir, a, 

s'assujetiir, s^asser- 

vir, a. 
submerger. 
soumettre, a. 
se soumettre i a. 
suborner, 

subordonner, a. 
subroger. 
s''abonner, a ; soil" 

scrire, a. 
subsister. 
substituer, a; subdc" 

leguer. 
sou sir aire, 
subvertir. 
retissir, dans, 
succeder, a. 
secourir, 
teter. 
alluiler. 
souffrir. 
suffirc, a.. 
nuffoquer. 
sucrer. 
ivgytrer, a,, 
sommer. 
surabonder, 
surseoir, iu 
supplanter. 
suppleer, a. 

munir, de. 

approvisionner. 
supporter, appuijfr, 
supposer. 
supprimer. 
suppurer. 
surmonier, 
surnommer, 
surpasser, en. 
surprendre. 
se rendre, a. 
environncr, entourer, 
de. 



462 



VOCABULARY.—VERBS. 



to Survey land, arpenter. 

to Survive, survivre, a. 

Xo Suspect, soup(^onner, de ; se 

douter, de. 
to Sustain, soutenir. 

to Swarm with, fourrniller, de. 

to Swear, jnrei', de. 

to Sweep, balayer. 

to Sweep (a chim- 
ney)^ ramoner. 
to Swell, enjler, gonfler, 
tg Swerve, to go 

from, s^ecarter, de. 

to Swim, nager. 

to Swim over, mrnager. 

to Swing, se hrandiller, se 

bala7icer. 
to Sympathise, sympathiser. 

to Take, prendre, a. 

to Take advantage, prendre avantage, se 

prevaloir, de, 
to Take away, emporter, emmener. 

to Take back, remporter, remme- 

ner, reprendre. 
to Take care, avoir soin, de ; soig- 

ner. 
to Take care of one's se maiager. 

self, 
to Take out of a decaisser. 

chest, 
to'^Take fire, prendre feu., s^em- 

braser. 
to Take too much s^emanciper. 

liberty, 
to Take out, oter, a, de ; aveindre, 

de. 
to Take an oath, prefer serment. 
to Take offence, s'offenser, de ; se for- 

■maliser, de. 
to Take pet, se piqtier, se choqner, 

de. 
to Take one's plea- se diverttr. 

sure, 
to Take a post, se poster, a, sur. 

to Take physic, prendre medecine. 

to Take refuge, se refvgicr, chez, 

dans, 
to Take root, s'enraciner. 

to Take upon one's se charger, de. 

self, * 
to Talk, par/er, a, de ; causer. 

to Talk nonsense, deraisonner. 
to Tan, tanner. 

to Tarnish, ternir. 

to Taste, gouter. 

to Tax, , taxer, de. 

to Teach, enseigner^k. 



to Tear, dechirer. 

to Tear off one's skin, s'tcorcher. 

to Temper, temperer. 

to Tempest, tempeter. 

to Temporise, temporiser, 

to Tempt, tenter, de. 

to Tend, tendre, a. 

to Terminate, terminer. 

to Testify, temoigner. 

to Thank, remercier, de. 

to Think, penser, a, de. 

to Think better of it, se raviser. 

to Thou and thee, tut oyer. 

to Threaten, menacer, de. 

to Thresh corn, battre le ble. 

to Throw, yp/er, a. 

to Throw down, atterrer.^ ierrasser. 

to Thunder, ionner, fuudroyer. 

to Tickle, chatouiller. 

to Tie, to fasten, attacker, a ; nouer. 

to Tie again, rattacher,^^; renouer. 

to Tie one's self up, s'astreindre, i. 

to Tie with pack- Jiceler. 

thread, 

to Till, to dig, labourer. 

to Tin over, ttamer. 

to Tipple, pinter. 

to Tire, to weary, to ennuyer, dej fati- 
fatigue, guer. 

to Titter, ricaner. 

to Toll, tinter. 

to Torment, tourmenter. 

to Toss, peloter. 

to Totter, chanceler, vaciller. 

to Touch, toucher. 

to Touch again, retoucher. 

to Tow, touer, remorqtier. 

to Trace, tracer. ' 

to Traffic, trajiquer. 

to Train up to war, aguerrir. 

to Transact, transiger / traiter, 

/aire affiaire, axec. 

to Transcribe. transcrire. 

to Transfer, transferer, de. 

to Transform, transformer, en. 

to Transform one's se transformer, en. 
self, 

to Transgress, transgresser. 

to Translate, traduire, en. 

to Transmit, transmettre, a. 

to Transplant, transplanter, 

to Transport, trans-porter, de, a, 

dans. 

to Transpose, transposer. 

to Travel, voyager, en, dans. 

to Travel, to run parcourir. 
over, 



VOCABULARY.— -VERBS. 



463 



to Tread, 


fouler, a. 


to Unfurnisb, 


dkmeubler. 


to Treat, 


rtgaler, de. 


to Unglue, 


decoller. 


to Treat upon, 


iraiter, disserfet^, sur. 


to Unhook, 


dtcrocher. 


to Treble, 


h'ipler. 


to Unite, 


unir, s'unir, a. 


to Tremble, 


trembler, de. 


to Unlace^ 


delacer. 


to Trepan, 


trepaner. 


to Unlearn, 


desapprendre. 


to Ti:ick, 


tricher, escroqiter, a. 


to Unload, 


decharger. 


to Trickle, 


decouler, de. 


to Unmark, 


demarqtier. 


to Triumph, 


triompher, de. 


to Unmask, 


dem.asqiier. 


to Trill, to quaver, 


cadencer. 


to Unmatch, 


depareiller. 


-to Trot, 


trotter. 


to Unnail, 


dtcloiier. 


to Trouble, 


troubler, imporluner. 


to Unroll, 


derouler. 


to Truck, 


troquer, contre. 


to Unpack, 


deballer, desemballer 


to Trumpet^ 


trompeter. 




depaqueter. 


to Truss, 


irousser. 


to Unpave, 


depaver. 


to Trust, 


Jier ; s'ipancher ; se 


to Unplait, 


deplisser. 




fier, a. ^ 


to Unpolish, 


dtpolir. 


to Try, 


essayer, eproiiver ; 


to Unsalt, to freshen 


, dessaler. 




tdcher, chercher^ii. 


to Unsew, 


dicoiulre. 


to Turn, to change. 


tourner ; changer, se 


to Unseal, 


decacheter. 




changer, en. - 


to Unshoe a horse, 


deferrer im cheval. 


to Turn about. 


toitrnoyer. 


to Unstop, 


deboitcher. 


to Turn brown, 


brimir. 


to Unteam, 


deteler. 


to Turn one's self. 


se tourner, de, vers. 


to Untie, 


delier, daiouer, de- 




contre. 




tacher. 


to Turn over a book 


, feuilleter. 


to Untuck, 


dttrousser. 


to Twist, 


iordre, corder,tresser 


to Untune, 


dcsaccorder. 


to Twist again, 


retordre. 


to Untwist, 


detordre, decorder, 


to T}-rannise, 


tyranniser. 




detortiller. 


to Unbar, 


debarrer. 


to Unveil, 


devoifer. 


to Unbend, 


detendre. 


to Unweave, 


effiler. 


to Unbolt, 


di'verrouiller. 


to Utter, 


proferer. 


to Unbuckle. 


deboucler. 


to Use one's self, 


s^ habit Iter, a. 


to Unbutton, 


deboutonner. 


to Usurp, 


usurper. 


to Unbridle, 


debrider. 


to be Vacant, 


vaqver. 


to Unchain, 


dechainer, contre. 


to Vanquish, 


vaincre. 


to Uncoif, 


dtcoifer. 


to \'arnish, to gloss 


J vernir, vemisser. 


to Uncover, 


dtcoiivrir. 


to Vary, 


varifr. 


to Uncurl, 


def riser. 


to ^'cgetate, 


v6gtter. 


to Undeceive. 


dtsabuser, dltromper. 


to Venerate, 


venerer. - 




de. 


to Venture, 


hasarder, de ; se ha- 


to Undeceive one's 


se dl'sabuser, se de- 




sarder, de. 


self, 


iromper, de. 


to Verify, 


verijier. 


to Undergo, to sui 


- subir, souffrir. 


to Vex, 


vejcer. 


fer. 




to View one's self. 


se mirer, dans. 


to Underlet, 


sovs-louer, a. 


to Vibrate, 


vibrer. 


to Underline, 


soi/iigner. 


to Violate, 


violer. 


to Undermine, 


miner. 


to Visit, 


visiter'. 


to Undersign, 


soussigner . 


to Vitiate, 


vicier. 


to Undertake, 


entreprendre, de. 


to Veil, 


voiler. 


to Undo, 


dl'faii'e. 


to Vociferate, 


vociferer. 


to Undo again. 


redefaire. 


to Wait for, to ex- attendre. 


to Undress, 


d'tshabiller. 


pect, 




to Undress one's 


se dhhabil/er. 


to Wainscot, 


Ia7nbrisser, boiser. 


self, 




to Walk, 


w archer, sepromener, 


to Unfold, 


di'p/ier. 




aller a pied. 


to Unfurl the sails. 


deployer les voiles. 


to Wallow, to grovel, se vavirer, dans. . 



464 



VOCABULARY.—ADVERBS. 



to be Warm, 


avoir chaud, a. 


to Wet, to anchor. 


mouiller,jeterl''artcre. 


to Warm, 


chauffeVi bassiner. 




dans, sur. 


to Warm again, 


rcchanffer, se rt~ 


to Whisper, 


chuehoter. 




chaufei'. 


to Whistle, to hiss. 


siffler. 


to Warn, 


avertir, de. 


to Widen, 


tlarqir. 


to Warp, to frame, 


ourdir. 


toWilljto be willing vouloir. 


to Warrant, 


gara7ith', a, de. 


to Wind, 


serpenter, dans. 


to Wash, 


/aver. 


to Wind to a skein, 


dtvider. 


to Watch, 


veiller, a. 


to Wipe, 


essuyer. 


to Water, 


abreuver, urroser. 


to Wish, 


dtsirer,soukuiter, de. 


to Wax, 


cirer. 


to Withdraw, 


se reiirer; se sous^ 


to Weaken, 


affaiblir. 




traire, a. 


to Wean, 


sevrer. 


to Work, 


iravailleTy a, en ; 


to Wean from. 


desaccoulwner, se 




cuver. 




desaccoiitumer, de. 


to Wrestle, to strug 


- lutter. 


to Wear out. 


user, s\iser. 


gle. 




to Wear off the 


dksargentcr. 


to Write, 


krire, a, de. 


silver. 




to Yield, 


elder, accordtr, ^. 


to Weigh, 


peser. 






51. 


Of Adverbs, and Adverbial Expressions, 


About, 


environ. 


All the day long. 


tout le long dujour. 


About and about. 


de cote et d?av(re. 


All the night. 


toute la nuit. 


About the evening. 


sur le soir, vers ie soir. 


All the night long. 


tout le long de la 


Above, 


la-haKt. 




nuit. 


Above all. 


surtoiit. 


All the places round 


, tous les lieux d^ alert- 


Abreast, 


de front. 




tour. 


Abroad, 


dans /es pays ttran- 


All ways. 


de toutes lesmanieres. 




gers. 


Almost, 


presque, quasi. 


Absolutely, 


ahso/ument. 


Almost always. 


presque ioujovrs. 


Across, 


de trovers. 


A long time ago. 


il y a long-temps. 


Added to that, 


Joint a cela. 


Aloud, 


tout haut. 


Admirably, 


admirahlement. 


Also, 


aussi. 


A fortnight ago. 


il y a quinze jours. 


Alternately, 


alternativemenl. 


After ? 


apres ? 


Always, 


toujour s. 


After all, 


apris tout. 


Amicably, 


amicalemenf, a P ami- 


After the Englisb 


a PJnglaise. 




able. 


way, 
After the Frencl- 




A month ago. 


il y a un mois. 


I a la Francaise. 


Anciently, 


anciennement. 


. fashion. 




Anew, 


de nouveau. 


After the Italiar 


I a ritallenne. 


Any more. 


davantage. 


way, 




Apart, 


a part. 


After the Spanish a I'Espagnole. 


As far as here. 


jusqu'ict. 


way. 




As far as there. 


jusque la. 


After' this or that de celte manitre. 


As for "the rest. 


au reste, du restc 


manner. 




Aside, 


a Pecart, de cote. 


After to-morrow, 


apres-demairi. 


As, 


comme. 


Afterwards, 


ensttite, dans la state. 


As much, as many. 


autant. 


Agreed, 


d^accord. 


Assuredly, 


assurlment. 


AH at once. 


tovt a la foiSy tout 


As well. 


aussi hien. 




d'un coup. 


As well as possible. 


aussi bien que pos- 


All or nothing. 


tout ou rieu. 




sible. 


All around. 


tout autour. 


At a distance, 


de loin. 


All the day. 


toute laJQurn^e. 


At a low price. 


a bas prir. 



VOCABULARY.— ADVERBS. 



46 



At ease, 

At every hour, 

At every moment, 

At first, 

At full length. 

At last, 

At least, above 

things. 
At that time, 
At the first oppor 

tunitv, 
At the latest. 
At the most, 
At the same place. 
At the soonest. 
At this hour. 
At a venture, 
A week ago, 
A year ago, 
Backwards, 

Badly, 

Badly enough. 

Before, 



Before all things, 
Before long. 



Before yesterday. 

Be it so. 

Below, 

Besides, 

Besides that. 

Better, 

Better and better. 

Between wind and 

water. 
Beyond, 
Bluntly, 



a raise. 

a touie heure. 

a tout moment. 

(Tahord. 

tout au long, 

etifin, a la Jin. 
all au moins, du mouis, 
tout au moins. 

pour lot's. 

a la p7'€tmt?'€ occa- 
sion. 

au plus tard. 

tout au plus. 

au mime endroit. 

au plus tot. 

a cette heure. 

a Vaventure. 

il y a une semaine. 

il y a tin an. 

a reculons, en ar- 
riere. 

mul. 

assez mal. 

avant, devant, aupa- 
ravanty par devant 
efi avant. 

avant tout. 

avant qu^il soit long- 
temps. 

avant-hier. 

a la bonne hetire, soit. 

la-bas. 

d^ailleurs, de plus. 

outre cela. 

mieux. 

de mieux en mieux. 

ajleur d'eau. 



Briskly, 
But little. 
By all means, 
By and by, a little tantot 
while aoo. 



au-dela, par-dela. 
hrusqiietnent, de hut 

en blanc. 
vivement. 



guere ou gueres. 
a tout e force. 



By chance, 
By daylight. 
By degrees. 
By force. 
By mistake. 

By night, 
By no means, 
By retail, 
By turns. 
By wholesale, 



par hasard. 
de jour, 
peu a peu, 
deforce. 
par erreur, 

prise, 
de nuit. 
7iullement. 
en detail, 
tour a tour, 
en arcs. 



par mc- 



Certainly, 

Cheap, 

Closely, 

Coarsely, 

Commonly, 

Conformably, 

Consequently, 

Constantly, 

Continually, 

Daily, 

DeUberately, 

Designedly, 
Dexterously, 
Directly, 

Down stairs, 

Down to the ground^ 

Early, in good time. 

Earnestly, 

Easily, 

Elsewhere, 

Empty, 

Enough, 

Entirely, 

Equally, 

Especially, 

Even, 

Even with, 

Ever since, 

Ever so little. 

Every day. 

Every other day, 

Every way. 

Every where. 

Every whit as. 

Exactly, 

Exclusively, 

Extremely, 

Fairly, 

Far, 

Far from here. 

Farther, 

Falselj^, 

Fashionably, 

Favourably, 

Finally, in short, 

First, 

Five or six months 

ago, 
Foolishl}'-, 
For ever. 
For fun, 



certainement. 
a bon marche, 
de pres. 
grossitrement. 
communtment. 
conformement. 
constquemment, 
constamment. 
continuellement. 
journellement. 
de propos delibi 

deliberkment, 
a dessein. 
adroitement. 
tout de suite, sur-le* 

champ, 
en bus. 
par terre. 
de bonne heure, 
imtamment, 
aise'ment. 
ailleurs. 
a vide, 
assez. 

entierement, 
egalement. 
notamment, 
me me. 

de niveau, au niveau, 
depuis ce temps-la, 
tant soit peu. 
to us I es jours, 
de deux jours fun^ 

tous les deux jours, 
de tous les sens, de 

ioutesles manieres, 
par tout, 
tout aussi. 
exact em ent, 
exclusivement, 
extrememetit, 
de bon jeu, 
loin. 

loin d'ici. 
plus loin. ' 
a faux^ fuussement. 
a la mode, 
en bien, favorable- 

ment, 
enjin. ^ 

premier ement. 
il y a cinq ou six 

mois. 
sottement, 
ajat7iais. 
en badinant, pcur 

badiner. 

X 5 



466 



VOCABULARY.— ADVERBS, 



For less, 

Formerly, 

For pleasure's sake, 

For the future, 

For the present, 

Four or five weeis 

ago, 
Freely, 
Frequently, 
Friendly, 
From above. 
From below. 
From day to day. 
From here. 
From that time. 

From the top to thf^ 

bottom. 
From what place, 
Gallantly, 
Generally, 
Generously, 
Gently, 
Graciously, 
Gratis, 
Half, 
Half-way, 
Happily, 
Hard by. 



Hardly, 
Hastily, 
Heartily, 
Henceforth, 

Here, 

Here about. 
Here before, late, 
Here below. 
Here is, here are. 
Here and there. 

Hereupon, 
Honestly, 
HowP 

However, yet, 
How far ? 
How long ? 

How many times? 
How much, how 

many ? 
Immediately, 

In a boat, 
In a coach. 



a moms. 

autrefois. 

a plaisir. 

a Vavenir. 

povr le frtsent, 

il y a qitatre ou cinq 

semaines. 
librement. 
frequemment. 
en ami. 
(Pen haul 
d'en bas. 
de jow en jour, 
d'ici. 
des-/ors, depuis ou 

dts ce temps-la. 
depuis le kaut j'us- 

qii'en bas. 
de quel endroit. 
galamment. 
generalement. 
genereusement. 
lout beau, tout doux. 
graeieusement. 
gratis, 
a demi. 

a moitie chemin. 
heureusement. 
ici preSf tout pres, 

tout procke, tout 

pres d^ici. 
a peine, 
a la h&te. 
de ban coeur. 
dcsonnais, dortna- 

vent. 
ici. 

ici avtour. 
ci-devant, 
ici-bas. 
void. 
ca et la, de cote et 

(Vautre. 
ci-dessus. 
honnetement. 
comment ? 
cependant, toutefois. 
jiisqu'on ? 
jusqn^a quand, jus- 

qu.es a quand ? 
combien de fois ? 
combien ? 

immediatement, tout 

de suite, 
en bateau, 
en voiturejen carrosse. 



In a crowd, 
Inadvertentl)'-, 

In a great number, 
In a great quantity, 
III a like manner, 
In a month. 

In a proper time 
and place. 

In a short time, 

In a superior man- 
ner. 

In an unfavourable 
manner. 

In a word. 

Incessantly, 

In cool blood. 

Indeed, 

IndifFerentlj'-, 

In earnest, 

In emulation of one 
another, 

Infallibly, 

Infinite!}', 
In good faith. 
In haste. 
In joke or jest. 



In less than nothing. 

In no place, 

In order. 

In peace. 

In private. 

In public, 

Iti that place, 

In that very place. 
In that very same 

place. 
In the afternoon. 

In the evening, 
In the meanwhile. 
In the morning, 

In the neighbour- 
hood, 

In the night. 

In the same manner, 

In the tAvinkling of 
an eye. 

Intimately, 



en foul e. \ 

parinadverfance,par \ 

megarde. I 

en grand nombre. , 

en grande quantite. j 

semblablement. ; 
en un mois, dans un 

mois. 
en temps et lieu. 

dans peu, sous peu. 
superieurement. 

en mal, defavorable- 

ment. 
en un mot. 
incessamment. 
de sang froid. 
en veritf. 
indifftremm ent. 
tout de bon. 
a qui mieux mieux. 

infailliblementy im- 

manquablement. 
infinimenl. 
de bonne foi. 
en diligence, 
en riant, en plaisan- 

tant, en badinant ; 

pour plaisanter, 

pour badiner, pour 

rire. 
en moins de 7'ien. 
en aucun endroit. 
en ordre. 
en paix. 
en particulier. 
en public, 
duns ce lieu-Id, dans 

cet endi'oit-la. 
la-meme. 
dans ce meme en- 

droit-la. 
dansPaprcs-midi, dans 

Papres-dmee. 
le soir, dans la soiree. 
en meme temps, 
le matin, dans la 7na- 

tinee. 
dans le voisinage, aux 

environs, 
dans la nuit. 
de la meme maniere. 
en ou dans un clin- 

d^osil. 
intimement. 



VOCABULARY.— ADVERBS. 



461 



In time. 

Into, the bargain, 

Inwardly, 

Just by, 

Justly, 

Just as much, 

Last months 

Lastly, 

Last week, 

Last year, 

Late, 

Later, 

Later than usual, 

Lately, not long 

since or ago, 
Less, 
Likewise, 
Little, few. 
Let the worst come. 
Like a black-guard. 
Like a good fellow. 
Like an honest man. 
Like a king, 
Like that, as that. 
Loudly, 
Maliciously, 
Mortally, 
Moreover. 

More than ever, 
More than enough, 
More, 

More and more, 
Most times, 
Much better. 
Much, many, 
Much less, 

Much more. 

Much worse. 

Namely, 

Narrowly, 

Near, 

•Near, by. 

Nearer, 

Nearly, about, 

Necessaril)', 

Negatively, 
Negligently, 



^ tem-pSy avee le 

teni'ps. 
far dessits le marche. 
i?itiriei{rement. 
tout pres, tout proche, 
justement, 
tout autant. 
le mois dernier, 
en dernier lieu, 
la semaine passee, la 

semaine dei'niere. 
Vannce pa^s^e. Vau- 
nt e dernier e. 
tard. 

plus tard. 
plus tard qu'a tor- 

d in aire, 
dernierement, depuis 

peu. 
moins. 

pareillement. 
peu. 

a tout hasard. 
en polisson. 
en brave homme. 
en honnete homme. 
en roi. 
comme cela. 
kaut. 

par malice, 
a mort. 
de plus, qui plus est, 

en outre, 
plus que jamais, 
de reste. 
plus. 

de plus en plus, 
la pluparl du temps, 
bien mieux. 
beaucoup. 
bien inoins, beaucoup 

moins. 
beaucoup plus, bien 

davantage, 
bien pis. 
savoir. 
a Detroit, 
a. beaucoup pres. 
pres, aupres, proche. 
plus pres, de plus p res. 
presque, a peu pres, 

enviro7i. 
necessai7^ement, de 

necessity 
negutivement. 
negligeinment, non' 

chalamment. 



Neither more nor ni plus ni mains, 

less, 
Neither well nor ill, ni bien ni mat. 



Never, 
Nevertheless, 

Newly, 
No, not. 
Not at all. 
Not long ago, 

Nothing, 
Nothing at all. 
Not much, 
Not only, 
Now, 

Now and then. 
No where. 
Not yet. 



jamais, 
nmnmoins, pourtantj 

toulefois. 
nouvellement. 
non. 

point du tout, 
il n'y a pas long- 

temps, 
rien. 

rien du tout, 
pas beiiucoup. 
?ion seulement. 
a present, maintenant, 

actuellement. 
de temps en temps, 
nulle part, 
pas ejicore. 



Of one's own head de son chef, de sa tete. 

or accord, 
Often, soievent. 

Often enough, assez souvent. 

Of old, j'adis. 

On a sudden, iout-a-coup, soudainC' 

ment. 
On both sides, des deux cotes, de 

part et d/autre. 
On every side, de tons cotes, de toutes 

parts. 
One day or another, unjour ou taiitre. 
One after the other, dt suite, fun apres 

Pautre. 



On foot. 

On horseback, 

Onh', solely, 

On one's knees, 
On purpose. 
Openly, 
Opposite, over- 

against, 
On that side. 

On the back, 
On the coutrarj', 
On the front. 
On the left. 

On the right, 
On this side, 

Or better. 
Or else. 
Over, ' 
j Particularly, 



a pied, 
a cheval. 
settlement, unique- 

ment. 
a genoux. 
exprts. 
a decouvert. 
en face, vis-a-vis. 

au-dela, de ce cSti-ld, 

deld. 
sur le derriere. 
au conlraire. 
sur le devant. 
a gauche, sur la 

gauche, 
a droite, sur la droite. 
degd, en degd, de ce 

c6te-ci. 
ou mieux. 
ou bien. 
dessus. 
pa rticulierement. 



466 



VOCABULARY.— ADVERBS. 



Partly, 

Peaceably, 

Perhaps, 

Plentifully, 

Precipitately, 

Precisely, 

Presently, 

Prettily, 

Pretty well. 

Previously, 

Principally, 

Probably, 

Promiscuously, 

Prudently, 

Quickly, 

Quietly, 

Quite, 

Quite enough. 

Quite near, 

Rashly, 

Really, 

Relatively, 

Recently, 

Reluctantly, 

Roughly, 

Rudely, 

Seldom, 

Seriously, 

Short, 

Since, 

Slowly, 

Softly, 

So so. 

So, 

So badly, 

Some time ago. 

Sometimes, 

Somewhere, 

So honestly. 

So little, so few, 

So much the less. 

So much the more. 

So much, so many, 

Soon, 

Sooner, 

Soon or late, 

So often, 

So well. 

Step by step. 

Straight along, 

Strangely, 

Strictly, 

Strongly, 



en pari I e, 

paisib/ement, 

peut-etre. 

€71 abojidance. 

precipitammeni. 

precisement. 

presentement. 

joliment. 

assez bien. 

prkalablement, au 

prealabfe. 
prhicipa lem ent. 
probablement. 
pele-mele. 
prudemment. 
promptement^ vi'e, 

vitemenf, 
en repos. 
touta-fait. 
bien assez, bien suf- 

jlsamment. 
tout pres. 
temtrairemeni. 
reeflement, en effef. 
relativement. 
recemment. 
a regret. 

riidement, durement 
brutalement. 
rarement. 
serieusement . 
court, tout court, 
dept/is. 
lentement. 
doucement, tout bas, 

tout beau, 
la la. 
de me me. 
si mal. 

il y a quelque temp, 
guelquefois. 
quelque part, 
si homietement. 
si pen. 

d'autant moins, 
d'autunt plus^. 
tant, autant. 
bientot, tot. 
plus tot. 
tot ou tard. 
si souvent. 
si bien. 
pas a pas. 
tout droit, 
ttrangemeni. 
a la rigueur. 
fort etferme. 



Suddenly, 

Sufficiently, 

Surely, 

Ten days ago. 

That excepted. 

That is to say. 

That way. 

The better. 

The day after the 

next. 
The day before, 
The following day. 
The last time. 
The less. 
The most. 
Thence, 
Then, 
The next day. 

The next door. 
The next month. 
The next year. 

There is, there are. 
The other day. 
The right way, 
The wrong side out- 
wards. 
The wrong way. 



There, 
Therein, 
Thereupon, 
The time of. 
There wants biTt 

very little, 
Thoroughly, 
Throughout, 

The worst, 
Thirdly, 
Till now. 
This afternoon. 

This evening. 
This minute. 
This way, 
Three or four years 

ago, 
Through what place? 
Thus, 
To-day, 
Together, 

To his or her mind. 
Tolerably, 
To-morrow, 



subitement. 

sujffisamment. 

cerles, suremeut. 

il y a dix jours. 

a cela pres. 

c'est-a-dire. 

par-la. 

le mieux. 

le surlendemakn, 

lejour precedent, 
le jour suivoTit. 
la demit re fois. 
le moins. 
le plus, 
de la. 

alo7's, pour lors. 
le jour suivant, le 

lendemain. 
la porte joignante. 
le wois prochain. 
Pannee qui vient, 

Vanme prochaine. 
voila. 

P autre jour, 
du bun sens, 
a Pcnvers. 

a rebours, du mau- 
vais sens, en sens 
contraire* 

la. 

la-dedans. 

la-dessus. 

lors de. 

pen s'enfaut. 

a fond. 

a travers, d'outre en 

outre. 
le pis. 

troistemement 
jusqu^a present, 
cette ou ceiapi^es-midi, 

ceite aprcs-dinee. 
ce soir. 
tout-a-Pheure. 
par-ici. 
il y a ti'ois ou quatre 

ans. 
par quel endroil ? 
ainsi. 

aujourd' hui. 
ensemble, 
a son y re. 
pnssab/ement^ 
demain. 



VOCABULARY.— ADVERBS. 



469 



To-morrow morn- 


demcun matin, de- 


Very happily. 


fui't hei/reusemetit. 


ing, 


main au matin. 


Very honestly. 


fort honneternent. 


To-morrow evening 


, demain au soir. 


Very late. 


bien tard, tres-tard. 


To my mind, 


a moil grt. 


Very little, very few 


irts-peu, bien peu. 


Too dear, 


trop cher. 


Very long. 


bien long-temps. 


Too fast, too quick, 


trop vite. 


Very much. 


fort, bien fort. 


Too late. 


trop tard. 


Very near, 


bien pres, tres-pres, 


Too little, too few, 


trop pen. 




apeudechoseprts. 


Too much, too many 


, trop. ^ 


Very often, 


bien souvent. 


Too much or too 


trap a la fois. 


Very quick. 


bien vite. 


many at a time, 




Very slowlj". 


bien lentement. 


Too often. 


trop souvent. 


Very seasonably. 


fort a propos. 


Too seldom. 


trop rarement. 


Very well, 


trts-bien,fort bien. 


Too slowly, 


trop lentement. 


Voluntarily, 


volontairement. 


Too soon, 


trop tot. 


Vulgarl}'-, 


vulgairement. 


Topsy-turvjr, 


sens dessm dessom. 


Wantonly, 


de gaieie de cceur. 


To their mind. 


a leur gre. 


W^ell well I 


bien! eh bien I he 


To the life. 


au nature/. 




bien ! 


To the worst. 


au pis alter. 


What ! 


quoi ! 


To your mind, 


a voire gre. 


When, 


quandj lorsque. 


Towards the even- 


vers le soir, sitr le 


Whence, 


d'oii. 


ing' 


soir. 


Where, whither. 


oii. 


Truly, 


vraiment, vcritable- 


Which way ? 


par ok ? 




menf. 


Whilst, 


en attendant. 


Two or three days 


dans deux ou trots 


Wholly, entirely, 


tout, iuut-a-fait. 


hence, 


Joi/7'S d'ici. 


quite. 




Two days ago. 


il y a deux jam's. 


Why ? 


pourquoi f 


Tavo or three days 


it y a deitx oti trois 


Willingly, 


volontiers. 


ago. 


jours. 


With a cause, 


avec raison. 


Two years hence, 


dans deux ans. 


With all speed. 


en toute diligence. 


Unanimouslj'', 


unanimement. 


With care, 


avec so in. 


Unawares, 


a rimproviste. 


With emulation, 


a I'envi. 


Under, 


dessoiis. 


Within, 


dedans, en dedans. 


Under here, 


ci-dessous. 


Within a little time 


, dans pen de temps. 


Under there. 


la-dessous. 


Without cause. 


sans raison. 


Undoubtedly, 


induhitablement. 


Without doubt, 


sans doute. 


Unexpectedly, 


inopinhnent. 


Without ceremony. 


sans fac^on, sans ct- 


Unguardedly, 


par megarde. 




ranouie. 


Uniformly, ' 


uniformeinenf. 


Without fail, 


sans faute. 


Universally, 


universellement. 


Without, 


dehors, en dehors. 


Unmannerly, 


dhme maniere gros- 

sitre. 
en haut. 


W ithoiit thinking of sans y penser. 
it, 


Up-stairs, 


With reluctance. 


a confre coeur. 


Usefully, 


vtilement. 


^VonderfuUy, 


« tncrvei/le ou a 


Usually, 


07'diriai7'ement. 




merveilles. 


Vastly, 


a Viujini. 


Worse, 


pis. 


Very, 


ires, fort, bien. 


Worse and worse, 


de pis en pis. 


Very bad. 


irts-ma/, for-t mal. 


Yes, 


oui. 


Very cheap. 


a bon ou a grand 


Yes indeed. 


oui-da, oui en vcritc, 




marchc. 




oui vraiment. 


Very dear, 


fort cher, tres-cher. 


Yesterday, 


kier. 


Very early. 


debon matin, de grand 


Yesterday morning 


hier matin, hier au 




matin. 




?naiin. 


Very far. 


bien loin, ires-loin, 


Yesterday evening. 


hier au soir. 




fort loin. 


Yet, 


encore. 



410 



VOCABULARY.^PREPOSITIONS. 



About, 

Above, -j 

According to, 

After, 

After the fashion 

of. 
Against, 
Along, 
Amongst, 

As far as. 

As to, with re-j" 
gard to, as{ 
for, [ 

At, 

At the expense 
of. 

At the peril of, 

At the price of. 

At the rate of, i 

At the risk of. 
At or to, 



Before, 

Behind, 
Besides, 

Between, 

By, 

By, beside, 
By dint of, 

By the means 
of, for. 

Concerning, 

Considering, 
During, I 

Even with, close 

to, 
Even with, 

level with. 

Except, ex- 
cepting. 



environ ; 
au-clessus de ; 
par-dessns ; 
selon, sinvant ; 
apres ; 
a la mode de; 

contre ; 
le long de ; 
parmi ; 

jusque onjusques; 
d Vegard de ; 
par rapport a ; 
quant a; 
d; 
aux depens de ; 

au pkril de ; 
au prix de ; 
a raison de, ou 
siir le pied de; 
au 7'isque de ; 
chez ; 
avant ; 
deva?it ; 
au devant de ; 

derriere ; 
fiutre ; 
eiitre ; 
par ; 

aupres de ; 
d cote de ; 
a force de ; 
a lafaveur de ; 
a?i moyen de, 

moyennant ; 

concernant, tou- 

chant ; 
^7/, attendu ; 
pendant ; 
diirant ; 
a fleur de ; 



52. Of Prepositions. 

(as) 

about twenty persons, 

above him, 

above the head, 

according to his advice, 

after me, 

after the fashion of Pa- 



against the wall, 

along the river, 

amongst his acquaint- 
ances, 

as far as the park, 

as to the child, 

as to this, 

as for that, 

at Paris, 

at the expense of his 
life, 

at the peril of his life, 

at the price of that, 

at the rate of ten per 
cent. 

at the risk of his honour, 

at or to your house, 

before you, 

before the door, 

to go and meet some- 
body, 

behind the door, 

besides that, 

between you and me, 

by the beginning, 

sit by her, 

by dint of money, 
by the means of the night, 
by the means of his as- 
sistance, 
for a reward, 

concerning your affair, 

considering his promise, 
during the summer, 
during the night, 
close to the ground. 



, { 



au niveau de ; even with the yard, 

au rez dc ; even with the ground, 

excepte ; except that, 

a l exception de ; except his wife, 

d I' exclusion de ; excepting his son, 

d la reserve de ; except a little house. 



environ vingl personnes. 
au-dessus de lui. 
par-dessus la tete. 
selon ou suivant son avis, 
apres moi. 
d la mode de Paris. 

contre le mur. 

le long de la riviere. 

parmi ses connaissances. 

jusqu^au pare, 
d Vegard de Cenfant, 
par rapport d ceci. 
quant a cela. 
d Paris, 
aux depens de sa vie. 

ou peril de sa vie. 

au prix de cela. 

d raison de ou sur le pied 
de dix pour cent. 

au risque de son honneur. 

chez vous. 

avant vous, devant vous. 

devant la porte. 

aller au devant de quel- 
qiinn. 

derriere la parte. 

outre cela. 

entre vous et moi. 

par le commencement. 

asseyez-vous auprts ou d 
cote d-elle. 

d force d' argent. 
, d la faveur de la nuit. 
• au moyen de son secours. 

7noyennant une recom- 
pense. 

concernant ou touchant 
votre affaire. 

vu owattendu sapromesse. 

pendant Pete. 

durant la nuit.. 

d fleur de terre. 

au niveau de la cour. 
au 7'eZ'de-chaussee. 
excepte cela. 

d Vexceptionde sa femme. 
a f exclusion de sonjils. 
a la 7-eserve d'u?ie petite 
maison. 



VOCABULARY.— PREPOSITIONS. 



4^1 



Far from, 


loifi de; 


For, 


pom-; 


For the sake of, 


pour r amour de ; 


For want of, 


fuute de ; 


J'"™. { S/,. 


From above, 


de dessus; 


From under. 


de dessous; 


Here is, 


void; 


Here are. 


void; 


In, { ^««^'- 




en; 




en depit de ; 


In spite of, 






malgre ; 


Instead of, 


au lieu de ; 


In the inside of, au dedans de ; 


In the middle 


au milieu de ; 


of, 






prts de ; 


Near, by, 






aupres de ; 




proche ; 


Next to. 


joignant ; 


Notvvithstand- 


nonobstant ; 


i"g> 




On account of. 


a cause de ; 


On that side of, 


par dela ; 


On the other 


au-dela de ; 


side of, 




On this side. 


en-degd de ; 


On the outside 


a fexfcrieuy de ; 


of, 




Opposite, 


vis-a-vis ; 
vis-a-vis de ; 


over < 
against. 


en face de, a P op- 
posite de ; 


Out of, 


hors de ; 


Save, saving, 


sauf; 


Secvire from, 


a convert de ; 


Seeing, consi- 


vu; 


dering, 




Sheltered from. 


a I'ahri de ; 


Since, from. 


depuis ; 


Through, 


a lrave?'S ; 
OK trovers de; 


There is, 


voild ; 


There are, 


voila ; 


To the regret oi 


', au regret de ; 


To, towards. 


vers; 
envers; 




sous; 


Under, 


a moins de ; 




au-dessous de ; 



far from here, 

for you, 

for the sake of you, 

for want of money, 

from London, 

from the beginning, 

from above the bed, 

from under the bed. 

here is your hat, 

here are your gloves, 

in winter, 

in prison, 

in spite of sense and 

reason, 
in spite of myself, 
instead of bread, 
in the inside of the 

church, 
in the middle of the 

street, 

{near the royal palace, 
near here, 
near town, 

near her, 

near the mill, 

next to the chapel of... 

notwithstanding all these 
reasons, 

on account of you, 

on that side the seas, 

on the other side of the 
river, 

on this side the Rhine, 

on the outside of the 
coach, 

opposite the hotel of... 

opposite the Bank, 

over against the Ex- 
change, 

out of danger, 

saving your presence, 

secure from the storm, 

seeing her age, 

sheltered from the rain, 
since yesterday, 
through the fields, 
through the body, 
there is your mother, 
there are your daughters, 
to the regret of every 

body, 
towards the park, 
towards his friends, 
under the table, 
under ten guineas, 
under them, 



loin dHci. 

pour vous. 

pour r amour de vous. 

faute d'argenf. 

de Londres. 

des le commencement. 

de dessus le lit. 

de dessous le lit. 

void voire chapeau. 

void vos ga?tfs. 

dans rhiver, en hiver. 

en prison. 

en depit du ban sens. 



're mot. 
au lieu de paiti. 
au dedans de Peglise. 

au milieu de la rue. 

pres du palais royal, 
prts d'ici. 
pres de la vilte. 
aupres d'elle. 
proche du moulin. 
joignant la chapelle de... 
nonobstant toutesces rai- 

sons. 
a cause de vous. 
par dela les mers. 
au-dela de la riviere. 

en-de^a du Rhin. 

a Cextkrieur de la voi- 

ture. 
vis-a-vis I' hotel de... 
vis-a-vis de la Banque. 
en face de ou a P opposite 

de la Bourse, 
hors de danger, 
sauf voire respect, 
a convert de Porage. 
VIC S071 age. 

a Pabri de la pluie. 

depuis hier. 

a iravers les champs. 

au iravers du corps. 

voila voire mere. 

voila vos files. 

au regret de tout le 

monde. 
vers le pare, 
envers ses amis. 
sozfs la table, 
a moins de dix guinees 
au-dessous d^eux. 



412 



VOCABULARY.— CONJUNCTIONS. 



Upon, 




sur; 




With, 




avec ; 




Without, 




sans ; 




Without the 




a I'insu 


cle; 


knowledge 


of. 







upon the table, sur la table. 

with him, avec lui. 

without that, sans ce.'a. 

without the knowledge of a Pinm de ses parens. 
his parents, 



53. Of Conjunctions, %■€. 



According as, 
According to. 

Although, < 

And, 

As, 

As for instance. 

As if. 

As long as, < 

As much as. 

As soon as, -J 

As well as, 
At all events. 
Because, 

Before, < 

Besides that. 
But, 
But yet, 
Except that. 

Far from, < 

For, 

For all that, 

For fear, 

God grant that ! 
How comes it that ? 
However, 

If; 

If ever so little or so 

few, 
If not, but that, S 

except that, i^ 
Inasmuch as, as. 

In case that, < 

In order that. 



suivant que, selon que. 

a. ce que. 

bien que, 

quandbien vieme qtee, 

quoique. 

et. 

comme,aitisi que. 

comme par exemple. 

comme si. 

aussi long-temps que, 

tant que. 

tant que, autant que. 

aiissitot que. 

des que, sitot que. 

aussi bien que. 

en tout cas. 

parce que, c^est que. 

avant que, 

avunt qiie de, 

avant de. 

outre que, 

mais. 

mais encore. 

excepte que. 

loin de, loin que, 

biefi loin de, bien loin 

que, 
tant s^en faut que, 
car. 

cependant^ toutefois. 
de crainte que, 
de crainte de, 
de peur que, 
de peur de. 
Dieu veuille que ! 
d'oil vient que ? 
cependant, pourtant . 
si. 
pour peu que. 

si ce n'est que, 
sinon que. 
en tant que. 
en cas que, 
ail cas que. 
ajin que. 



In order fo. 

In proportion as. 

Instead of, 

It follows that, 
hence follows 
that, 

It is for that rea- 
son that. 

It is not but that. 

It is true that, 

Let us suppose that 

Neither, nor, 

Nevertheless, 

No more than. 

Not that. 

Notwithstanding f 
that, I 

Nov/, 

On or upon condition 
that. 

Or, or else. 

Perhaps, 

Provided that, 

Rather than, 
Seeing that. 
Since, 



So that, 



Suppose that. 

That, than, 

That is to sav that. 

That, to the end that. 

The same as, 

Then, 

Therefore, 

Though, tho', al- f 
tho'jif^ although. I 

Till, until. 



aJln de. 

a mesure que. 

au lieu de. 

il s^ensuit que, 

il s'ensuil de la que. 

c'est pour cela que. 

ce n^est pas que. 

il est vrai que. 

supposons que. 

ni. 

neanmoins, toutefois. 

non plus que. 

non pas que, non 

que, 
ce r^est pas que. 
nonobstant que, 
malgre que, quoique. 
or. 
a condition que, bien 

entendu que. 
ou, ou bien. 
peut-etre que. 
pvurvu que, moyen- 

nant que. 
phitbt que de. 
vu que, ottendu que. 
puisque, depuis que. 
de surte que, 
de fagon que, 
si bien que, 
de inanitre que, 
tellement que. 
suppose quey post que, 
que. 

c'est-a-dire que. 
pour que. 
de mime que. 
done. 

c^ est pour quoi. 
quoique, encore que, 
quand, qvand m6me, 
quand bien meme. 
jusqu^a ce que, en at' 

tenJant que. 



FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 



473 



To, for, 

Unless, 

Very far from, 

When, after, 



pour. 

a moiiis que, 

a moifis que de, 

a moins de. 

bien /oin de, bien loiyi 

que. 
qiiand, iorsque, apres 

que. 



Whereas, 



Whether, 
While, whilst. 

Without, 



pmsque, comme, au 
lieu que, d'autant 
que. 

soil, soit que. 

pendant que, tand'is 
que. 

sans que. 



Would to God that ! p/iit a Dieu que ! 



54. FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 



1. To Accost, to Salute, 

Good morning, or good evening, sir' 
madam, or miss, 

I wish you a good morning, or good 

evt-ning, sir, 
I have the honour to wish you a good 

morning, sir, madam, or miss. 
How do j^ou do ? 
You do me honour, I am very well, 

I am very glad or happy to see you. 

How are your father and mother ? 

They are very well, sir, I thank you. 

And how are your sisters ? 
They are tolerably well, 
They are quite well, sir. 

How are they all at home ? 
How does all the family do ? 
They are all very well. 

2. On the French Lanyiiage, 8fc, 

Do you speak French ? 

Do you speak French, miss ? 

A little, sir. 

Have you been to France ? 

Yes, sir. 

Do you know Miss T* * *, in Paris ? 

I know her a little, 
I know her by sight, 
I know her by name. 
Do you know whether she...? 
No, I do not know ; or, I know nothing 
of it; 



1. Pour Aborder, pour Saluer, 

Bonjour, on bonsoir, monsieur, madame, ou 
mademoiselle ; ou — je vous salue, mon- 
sieur, madame, ou mademoiselle. 

Monsieur, je vous souhaite le bonjour, ou le 
bonsoir. 

Monsieur, madame, ou mademoiselle, j'' at 
rhonnenr de vous sahter. 

Comment vous portez-vous ? 

Vous me fait es honneur, je me porte fort 
bien. 

Je suis bien aise de vous voir ; ou,je suis 
charmt de vous voir. 

Comment se portent M. voire pere et 31"*' 
voire mtre ? 

lis se portent trts-bien, monsieur, je vous 
remercie. 

Et mesdemoiselles vos socurs ? 

E/les se portent passablement bien. 

Elles se portent parfaitement bien, ou a 
merveille. 

Comment se porte-t-on chez vous ? 

Comment se porte toufe la famille ? 

Tout le monde est en bonne sante. 



2. Sur la Langue Franpaise, ^c. 

Parlez-vous Fran^ais ? 
Mademoiselle parle-t-elle Fran^ais ? 
Un peu, monsieur. 
Jvez-vous t/c' en France ? 
Oui, monsieur. 
Connaissez-vous Mademoiselle 7"* * *, a 

Paris ? 
Je la connais un pert. 
Je la connais de vue. 
Je la connais de nom. 
Savez-vous si elle...? 
Non,je ne sais pas ; on,je iCen sais rien. 



'4^^ 



FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 



She is very amiable, 

■She sings beautifully, 

She is a charming young lady,. 



Elle est hten aimable. 

Elle chante divinement. 

Cest une charmante demoiselle. 



3. Eating and Drinking, 

Are you hungry ? 
Are you thirsty ? 
I am neither hungry nor thirsty, 
I am hungry, 
I am thirsty, 
I am very hungry, 
I am very thirsty, 
I am dying with hunger, 
I am dying with thirst, 
I have a good appetite. 
Give me something to eat, 
Give me something to drink, 
What will you drink ? 
.Give me a glass of water, 
Will you take a glass of wine ? 
Which will you have ? 
Red or white ? 
White, if you please, 
Come, drink. 
Your health, sir, 
.Madam, I have the honour to drink your 

health, 
.Young ladies, I have the honour to drink 

your health, 
, You eat nothing. 
I beg your pardon, I am eating very 

well, 
I have eaten very well, 
What shall I have the pleasure of 

helping you to P 
Whatever you please. 



4. At Breakfast. — An Invitation 
to Dinner., 8^c. 
Is your tea, or coffee, sweet enough ? 

It is excellent, it is delicious. 

Have you breakfasted — dined — supped ? 

Yes, sir, 

At what o'clock do you breakfast ? 

At ten o'clock. 

Will you stop and dine with us ? 

No, 1 thank you, 

Dinner is ready, it is just going to be put 

on the table. 
Dinner is on the table. 
You are very kind, Tjut I must set out 

for the country, 
Pray, put your hat on, 



3. Manger et Boire* 

Avez-vous /aim ? 

Avez-vous soif? 

Je n'ai ni faim ni soif. 

J^aifaim, 

J'ai soif. 

J'ai grand'' faim. 

Tai grand' soif. 

Je meurs de faim. 

Je meurs de soif. 

J'ai bon nppeiit. 

Donnez-moi a manger. 

Donnez-moi a boire. 

Que voulez-vous boire ? 

Donnez-moi tin verre d'eau. 

Voulez-vous prendre vn verre de vin ? 

Duquel voulez-vous ? 

Du ronge ou da blanc ? 

Du blanc, s'il vous plait. 

Buvez done. 

A votre santS, monsieur. 

Madame, fai Vhonneur de boire a votre 

sante. 
Mesdetnoiselles, fai Vhonneur 

saluer. 
Fous ne mangez rien. 
Je tons demande pardon, je mange 

hien. 
J'ai tres-bien mange. 
Qu^aurai-je le plaisir de vous offrir ? 

Ce cjiHil vousfera plaisir. 



de vous 



tres- 



4. A Dejeuner. — Invitation dc 
Dmer, 8fc. 



voire cafe, est-il assez 



Foire th6, ou 

Sucre ? 

II est excellent ; il est delicieux. 
Avez-vous dejeimt — dink. — soup6 ? 
Qui, monsieur. 

A quelle heure dejeunez-vous ? 
A dice heures. 

Foulez-vous rester a diner avec nous 9 
Non,je vous remercie. 
Le diner est pret, on va servir. 

Le diner est servi. 

Fous etes bien honnete, mais il faut que 

je parte pour la campagne. 
Couvrez-vous^je vous prie. 



FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 



475 



Yoti are very polite, sir, 
Do not mention it, 
Well then, good-by, 
Take care of yourself, 
I wish you good health. 



Fous eies bien honnete, monsieur. 

Ne faites pas attention. 

Adieu done. 

Portez-vous bien. 

Je vous souhaite tine bonne sante. 



5. Of the Hour. 

What o'clock is it ? 
What o'clock do you suppose it is ? 
What o'clock is it by you P 
Do you know what o'clock it is ? 
What hour is that striking P 
Six o'clock ; 

Tell me, if you please, what o'clock it is, 
Will you have the goodness to tell me 
what o'clock it is, sir ? 

It is twelve o'clock (in the day), or it is 

noon. 
It is twelve o'clock (at night), or it is 

midnight, 
It is two o'clock, 
It is half-past two, 
It wants a quarter to three, 

It is very nearly four. 
It has struck four. 
It has just struck four, 
i did not think it was so late, 
- Does your watch go well ? 
My watch does not go well. 
It goes right. 
It goes extremely well. 
It goes too fast, 
It goes too slow, 

It gains a quarter of an hour every day. 
It loses half an hour every day. 
It stops now and then, 
It is right. 
It is not right. 
It is too fast. 
It is too slow, 
It is not late. 
It is early, 
It is late. 
It is very late. 



6. Meeting. 

Where are you going ? 

I am going home, 

I am going to the park, 

I was going to your house, 

Where are you coming from ? 



5. De VHeure. 

Quelle heure est-il 9 

Quelle heure est-il bien ? 

Quelle heure dites-vous ? 

Savez-vous P heure qu''il est ? 

Quelle heure est-ce qit'il sonne 9 

Six heures. 

Dites-mol, sHl vous plait, f heure qu^il est: 

Monsieur, voulez-vous avoir la bonle de me 
dire t heure qit'il est 9 (ou simplement — 
P heure qu^il est, s'il vous plait, monsieur ?) 

// est midi. 

II est minuit. 

II est deux heures. 

II est deux heures et demie. 

II est deux heures trois quarts, ou il est 

.trois heures mains un quart. 
II est bien pres de quatre heures. 
II est qualre heures sonntes. 
Quatre heures viennent de sonner. 
Je ne croyais pas qiHl fut si tard, 
Votre montre va-t-elle lien 9 
Ma montre ne va pas bien. 
Elle va bien. 
Elle va suptrieurement. 
Elle avance. 
Elle retarde. 

Elle avance dhm quart d* heure par jour. 
Elle retarde d'une demi-heure par jour. 
Elle s^arrete qtielquefois. 
Elle est juste. 
Elle ii'est pas juste. 
Elle est en avance. 
Elle est en retard. 
II Ii'est pas tard. 
II est de bonne heure. 
II est tard. 
II est bien tard. 



6. Rencontre. 



Ou allez-vous 9 
Je vais chez moi. 
Je vais au pare. 
J'allais chez vous. 
D'oii venez-vous 9 



476 



FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 



From Mrs. L***'§, 

How does she do ? 

She is indisposed, 

She is not well, 

What is the matter with her P 

She has a head-ache, 

She has a megrim, or a violent pain in her 

head. 
She has got a cold. 
She has a bad cold. 



7. Of Walking. 

Let us go and take a walk, 

Will you come and take a little walk 

with me. 
Yes, with pleasure ; where shall we go ? 
Wherever j^ou please ; we will go where 

you like ; 
Well ! let us go to the park, 
W^illingly, 

What a beautiful prospect ! 
What a beautiful landscape ! 
Can you skate ? 
Yes, a little. 

Have you been to the play lately ? 
Yes, I was at the Opera yesterday 

evening, 
I never saw the house so full. 
The scenery is magnificent, and the 

orchestra excellent. 
Now, it begins to grow late, I must 

leave you, 
I must go, 
Good evening, 
Adieu, 

I will see you again, 
Good-by, 

Till I see you again. 
He is at last gone ! 



8. A Visit. 



There is a knock, 

Somebody knocks. 

Who knocks ? 

It is Mr. D***, 

Tell him to walk in. 

Who is there r* 

It is I, 

Come in, 

I am very happy to see you; how do you 

do ? 
Very well, I thank you, 
Take a seat, take a chair, 
Sit down, 



Je vicns de chez M"^* Z, * * *. 
Comment se porle-t-elle ? 
Elfe est indisposf^e. 
Elle ne se porte pas bien. 
Qu'a-t-elle ? ou, QWest-ce qu^elle a 9 
Kile a mat a la iete. 
Elle a la migraine, 

Elle est enrhumte. 
Elle a un gros rkume. 



7. De la Promenade, 

Allons faire un tour de promenade. 
Voidez-vous venir faire tm petit tour de 

promenade avec moi f 
Otii, avec plaisir ; ou irons-nous ? 
Ou vous voudrez ; nous irons du cote que 

vous voudrez. 
Eh bien / allons au pare, 
Foloniiers. 

Quelle belle vue ! quelle vue charmante / 
Quel magnijique coup d^oeil ,' 
Savez-vous patiner ? 
Out, un peu. 

u4vrz-vous tte depuis peu au spectacle ? 
Ouiffttais hier au soir a Poptra, 

Je 71^ ai jamais vu la salle si pleine. 

Les decorations (ou decors) sont mag' 

nijiques, et V orc^iestre est excellent. 
Maintenunt, il commence a se faire iard) 

il faut que je vous quitie. 
llfaut que je m^en aille. 
Bonsoir. 
Adieu. 

Sans adieu; ou^ Je ne vous dis pas adieu. 
Jusqu'au revoir. 
Jusqu^au plaisir de vou^ revoir. 
Enfin le voila parti! 



8. Visite. 

Onfrappe. 

QuelqiCun frappe. 

Qui frappe ? 

Cest M. D * * *. 

J)ites-lui d^entrer. 

Qui est la ? ou. Qui esl-ce qui est Id ? 

Cest 7noi. 

Entrez. 

Je suis charmt d'avoir le plaisir de 

voir ; comment vous portez-vous ? 
Tres-bien, je vous remercie. 
Prenez un siege ; prenez vne chaise. 
Asseijez-vous. 



FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 



477 



Do me the pleasure to sit down, 

Please to be seated, 

You are very kind, I have not time ; I 

am in a great hurry, 
Give the gentleman a chair, 
Ask the lady to take a seat, 

Come near the fire, 

It is a long time since I had the plea- 
sure of seeing yo'.i. 
Who told you so ? 

I have been told so, 
Somebody told me so. 



9. To inquire if the person whom 

we loish to see is at home. 
Is Mrs. S * - * at home ? 

No, sir, she has just gone out, 

Is not Miss A * * * within P 

No, she is at church, 

She is gone to see a friend. 

She is gone to the opera, 

At what o'clock will she be at home ? 

She said nothing when she went out, 

Does Mr. D * * * live here ? 



Faites-moi le plaisir de vous asseoir. 
Donnez^ous la peine de vous asseoir. 
Fbus etesbien honnete, je n'ai pas le temps; 

je suis tris-presse. 
Donnez tm siege a. monsieur. 
Priez madame, ou mademoiselle, de s'aS' 

seoir. 
Approchez-votis du feu. 
11 y a long-temps que je ii'ai eu Pavantage 

de vous voir. 
Qui vous a dit cela ? ou, qui esi-ce qui vous 

a dit cela ? 
On me Pa dit. 
Quelqiiun me l''a dit. 



9. Pour demand er si la personne 
qu'^on desire de voir est chez elle. 

Madame S * * * rj est-elle ? ou, Madame 

S- * * est-elle chez elle ? 
Non, jnonsieur, elle vifjil de sortir. 
Mademoiselle A** * n^y est-elle point ? 
Nvn, elle est a Peg Use. 
Elle est allie voir une amie, 
Elle est a Popera. 
A quelle heure y sera-t-elle ? 
Elle 7i'a ricn dit en sortant. 
M. D'^ * * demeure-t-il ici ? 



10. To ask whether anybody has 
called during one^s absence. 

Has any body asked for me to-day ? or, 
has any body called for me to-day ? 

Yes, sir, Miss C * * * has been here. 

Has she left any message with you ? 
No, she said that she would call again 

to-moirow, about ten o'clock. 
Has any body else called ? 
Nobody, sir, 



II. Of Compliments. 

I have many compliments for you, 
Trom whom, pray? 
From one of your intimate friends, 
I am very happy, or delighted to hear 
from him, 

I am very much obliged to him for re- 
membering me. 

Have the goodness to thank him for 
me. 



10. Pour demander s^iln'esf venu 
personne pendant son Absence. 

Est-il veuu quelqu'wi me demander au- 

jourd'hui? ou, n^ est-il ve?iu personne 

me demander aujourd'^hui ? 
Qui, monsieur^ Mademoiselle C * * * est 

venue. 
Foils a-t-elle charge de quelque message ? 
Non, elle a dit qu'elle reviendrait demain, 

sur les dix heiires. 
N* est-il venu aucune autre personne i 
Personne, monsieur. 



11. Des Complimens. 

J^ai bien des complimens a voitsfaire. 

De quelle part, s'il vo?/s plait ? 

D'un de vos amis in times. 

Je suis bien aise d' avoir de ses nouvelles f 

ou, Je suis charme d^entendre de ses 

nouvelles. 
Je lui suis bien reconnaissant de son bon 

souvetiir. 
Veuillez vous charger de mes remerci- 



41B 



FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 



When you see him, present my respects 

to him, 
Present my duty to your sister, 
Give my kind regards to her, 
Give my best wishes to her, or tell hev 

many kind things from me, 
I will not fail, 
Remember me to your lady, 
My love to all your children. 
My compliments to all the family. 

Remember me most kindly to all our 

friends, 
You are very kind in coming to see us, 



vous le verrez, presentez-lui mes 

respects. 
Prtsentez mes devoirs a M"^ voire soeur. 
Offrez-lui vies hommages. 
Diles-lui bien ties chases de ma part. 

Je n'y manquerai pas. 

Rappelez-moi au souvenir de madam,e. 

Bien.des amities a tons vos enfans. 

Mes complimens, ou mes civilites a ioute la 

famille. 
Mille choses honnetes de ma part a tous nos . 

amis. 
Vbus etes bien aimahle d^ etre venu nous voir. 



12. Of News. 

Do you know any news ? 

Do you know any thing new ? 

Is there any news to-day ? 

Is there any thing new ? 

What is the best news ? 

What news is there ? 

Have you read the papers ? 

I have read the Literary Gazette, 

Have you received any letters from the 

continent ?. 
I know no news, 
I do not know any thing new. 
There is no news. 
There is some good news, 
There is great news, 

I have heard that 

They say that 



13. To return Thanks, 8^c, 

I thank yon, 

I am much obliged to you, 
I thank you, 
I thank you most kindly, 
I thank you most respectfully, 
I am exceedingly obliged to you, 
Many thanks to 3 ou. 
Will you do me a pleasure ? 
Will you render me a service ? 
Yes, certainly, assuredly, 
I give you much trouble, 
Do not mention it. 
No trouble at all. 
It is a pleasure to me. 
You are too polite. 

You are extremely kind, you are too 
kind, 



12. Des Nouvelles. 

Savez-vous des nouvelles ? 
Savez-vous quelque chose de 7iouveau ? 

Y a-t-il des nouvelles aujourd''huL ? 

Y a-t-il quelque chose de nouveau ? 
Que dit-on de ton ? 

Que dit-on de nouveau ? 
Avez-vous lu les journaux'^ 
J'ai lu la Gazette Litteraire. 
Avez-vous regu des lettres du continent ? 

Je ne sais point de nouvelles. 
Je ne sais rien de nouveau. 
11 n^y a point de nouvelles. 
II y a de bonnes nouvelles. 
II y a de grandes nouvelles. 

J^ai entendu dire que 

On dit que 



13. Pour Remercier, 8^c. 

Merci. 

Bien oblig6 ; ou, Je vous suis biea oblige, 
Je vous remercie. 
Je vous remercie injiniment. 
Je vous remercie tres-humblement. 
Je vous suis extremement oblige. 
En vous remerciant . 
Voulez-vous me f aire un plaisir f 
Voulez-vous me rendre un service? 
Ouif cerlainementy assurtment, 
Je vous donne bien de la peine. 
Ne parlez pas de cela. 
La peine n'est rien. 
C'est un plaisir pour moi. 
Vous etes trop honnete. 
Vous nvez bien de la bonii ; vous avez trop 
de bonte. 



FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 



479 



14. To affirm* 

It is likely, 

It is likely enough. 

It is not unlikely, 

That may be. 

That is true, 

That is certain, 

It is but too true. 

It is but too certain. 

It is the truth, 

Nothing is more true. 

Nothing is more certain. 

The fact is certain, 

The fact is authentic, 

I give you my word for it, 

Upon my honour. 

Upon my word of honour. 



15. To Deny, ^c. 

No, not at all. 

That is not so, 

That is false, 

There is no such thing, 

It is a falsehood, 

It is a newspaper dream, 

That cannot be. 

That is impossible. 

It is a fabrication. 

It is a story. 

It is an invention. 

It is a flying report. 

You jest, 

1 doubt it, 

Is it true ? 

Is it certain P 

Is it possible ? 

Is it true that...? 

Is it certain that...? 

Is it possible that ..? 

Can it be true ? 

Can it be possible ? 

Can it be true that...? 

Can it be possible that...? 

Is it really possible ? 

Do you speak seriously ? 

You are mistaken, 

It is incredible, 



16. To 



express Contentment and 
Pleasure. 



14. Pour Assurer, Affirmer 

Cest ou cela est probable. 

Cela est bien probable. 

Cela rl est pas improbable. 

Cela se peut. 

Cela est vrai. 

Cela est certain. 

Ce 7test que trap vrai. 

Ce ji'est que trap certain. 

Cest la verite. 

Rien de plus vrai. 

Rieji de plus certain. 

Le fait est certain. 

Le fait est authentique. 

Je vous en donne ma parole, 

Sur vion hoimeur. 

Sur ma parole d'fwnneur. 



15. Pour nier, Sfc. 

Nan, point du tout, 

Cela n^est pas. 

Cela est faux ; c'est fanx, 

11 tien est rien. 

Cest line faussete ; c^est un mensonge. 

Cest u?ie reverie de gazetier. 

Cela ne se pent pas. 

Cela est i?npossible. 

Cest un conte. 

Cest ime histoire. 

C'est une histoire faite a plaisir. 

Cest une 7iouvelle en fa'r. 

Fbus plaisantez ; vous voulez rirc. 

J^en doute. 

Est-ce vrai ? 

Est-ce certain ? 

Est-ce possible ? 

Est-il vrai que...? 

Est-il certain que.. . ? 

Est-il possible que. . . ? 

Serait-ce vrai ? 

Serait-ce possible ? 

Serait-il vra i que...? 

Se7'ait-il possible que...? 

Serait-il bien possible ? 

Parlez-vous serieusement ? 

Fbus vous trompez. 

Cest incroyable. 



Good ! Bravo ! 

Very well. 
It is superb. 



16. Pour marquer le Contente- 
ment, le Plaisir. 

Bon! Bravo! 
Fort bien. 
Cest superbe. 



480 



FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 



It is magnificent, 

It is very beautiful, 

Wliat pleasure I 

What satisfaction ! 

What a pleasing satisfaction ! 

I am very glad of it, 

I am delighted with it, 

I am charmed with it, 

I am enchanted with it, 

That gives me much pleasure. 

It is impossible to be more satisfied with 

it than I am. 
That delights me, charms me, transports 



Cest magnijique, 

C^est de toute beaute. 

Quel plaisir ! 

Quelle satisfaction ! 

Qiielle douce satisfaction ! 

J'e« suis bien aise ; on, fen si/isfori aise. 

J' en suis ravi, 

Ten suis charmc. 

J^en suis enchante. 

Cela me fait bien du plaisir. 

Ten suis on ne pent plus content, 

Cela me ravit, me ckarme, m^enckante. 



17. To 



express Horror 
tonishment. 



and As- 



fy ! for shame ! 
What a shame ! 
Oh God I 
What horror ! 
What abomination I 
It is shameful, 

It is odiovis. 

It is abominable. 

It is dreadful. 

That makes one tremble. 

Oh heavens ! 

What surprise ! 

What a misfortune ! 

What a grievous disappointment ! 

1 am sorry for it, 

I am very sorry for it. 

It is impossible to be more sorry for it 

than I am, 
How that grieves me ! 
How unhappy I am ! 
That affects me exceedingly, 
I am ruined beyond resovirce. 
It is a pity. 
It is a great pity. 
What a pity ! 



17. Pour marquer VHorreur et 
V Etonnement. 

Fi! Fidonc! 

Quelle honte ! 

Dieu! ODieu! 

Quelle horreur ! 

Quelle abomination ! 

Cest honteux. 

Cest odieux ; aes' affreiix. 

CPest abominable. 

Cest epouvantable, 

Cela fait trembler. 

del! 

Quelle surprise ! 

Quelle malheur ! 

Quel facheux contretemps I 

Teti suis f ache. 

Ten suis bien f ache. 

Ten suis on ne pent plus f ache. 

Que cela me fait de peine ! 

Que je suis malheureux ! 

Cela ti-Caffiige sensiblement. 

Je suis ruine sans ressource. 

Cest dommage. 

Cest bien dommage; c"" est grand dommage. 

Quel dommage ! 



18. Questions and Observations 
in accosting somebody. 

I beg pardon, if I interrupt you. 

Do yoix want any thing ? 

Yes, I wish to speak to Mr. N * * *, 

I wish to see Mr. D * * *, 

He is my friend, 

He is my intimate friend, 

I love him sincerely, 

What do you want him for ? 



18. Questions et Observations en 
abordant quelqu'un. 

Pardon, sije vous interromps. 

Dtsirez-vous quelque chose f 

Oui,je voudrais bien parler a M. A^* * *. 

Je desire de voir M. D * * *. 

Cest mon ami. 

Cest mon intime ami. 

Je taime sincerement. 

Que lui voulez-vous ? 



FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 



4BI 



What do you want to tell him ? 

What do you v/ant ? 

What is the meaning of that ? 

I do not know, 

Do you understand me ? 

Do you understand me well ? 

Yes, I understand you very well, 

That astonishes me, 

I wish or give you joy of it, 

I congratulate you Avith all my heart, 



19. Rising^ Sleep, 8fc. 
At what o'clock do you get up ? 
I usuall}'- get up at seven o'clock. 
It is a good hour, 
I am tired, 
I am very tired, 
I am sleepy, 
I am very sleepy, 
I am quite sleep}'^, 
I sleep as I stand, 
I have slept well, 
I have slept pretty well, 
I have not s'ept well last night, 
I have slept badlj', 
I have slept very indifferently, 
I have not been able to sleep, 
I have not closed my eyes all night, 
I have had nothing but troublesome 
dreams all night. 



20. Of Fire, S^c. 

Light the fire, 

Light the candles. 

Have j'ou lighted the fire ? 

Have you lighted the candles ? 

You have not lighted the fire. 
You have not lighted the candles, 

Why have you not lighted the fire? 
Why have you not lighted the candles ? 

SnufFthe candles. 

Give me the snuffers. 

Where are the snuffers ? 

You have not brought in the snuffers, 

Bring the snuffers. 

Here they are,— there they are, 

That is a poor fire, 

Fire begins to be comfortable. 

You have a bad fire. 

The fire is very low. 

The fire is going out. 

The fire is out. 

Put out the fire, 



Que lid voulez-voiis dire ? 

Que souhaitez-vous ? 

Qu'est-ee que cela veut dire ? 

Je ne sais pas. 

M^eniendez-vous ? 

M'entendez-vous bien ? 

Ouifj'e vous eniends fort biefu 

Cela irCttonne. 

Je vous enfelicite. 

Je vous enfelicite bien sineeremetif. 



19. Du Lever, du Sommeil, 8^c. 

A quelle heure vous levez-vous ? 

Je ')ne Itve ordinairement a sept heures. 

C'est tine bo?/ne heure. 

Je suis fatigud ; je suis las. 

Je suis b.en fatigue. 

J'ai sommeil. 

J^aibien somm'il. 

Je suis tout endormi. 

Je dors debout. 

J'ai bien dormi. 

J'ai assez bien dormi. 

Je fi'ai pas bien dormi la nuit derniere. 

J'ai mal dormi. 

J'ai assez mal dormi. 

Je 7i'ai pas pu dormir. 

Je 71 ai pas fermt Pceil de toute la nuit. 

Je n'aifa't que rSvasser toute la nuit. 



20. Du Feu, 8^c. 

Allumez le feu. 

Allumez les chandelles ou les bougies. 

Avez-vous allum^ lefeu 9 

Avez-vous allume les chandelles ou les 

bougies ? 
Vous n'avezpas allume lefeu. 
Vous n'avez pas allume les chandelles ou 

les bougies. 
Pourquoi 71' avez-vous pas allume le feu ? 
Pourquoi 71' avez-vo7ts pas allmnk les chan' 

delles ou les bougies 9 
Mouchez les chandelles ou les bougies. 
Donnez-moi les mouchettes. 
Oil S07it les mouchettes ? 
Vous 7i'avez pus appo)'te les mouchettes. 
Apportez les 77iouchettcs. 
Les void ; — les voila. 
Voila u7i pauvre feu. 
I^efeu coi7i7ne7ice ci etre de saison. 
Vous avez ?m mauvais feu. 
Le feu est bie/i bas. 
Lefeu s'eteint. 
Lefeu est l:iei7it. 
Eieignez le feu. 



48^ 



FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 



21. In a Shop. 

Do you sell gloves ? 

Yes, madam, 

Show me some, if you please. 

Here are some, 

What do you sell them at ? 

Four shilUngs a pair, 

It is very dear, 

Have you any fine cloth ? 

Yes, sir, I have some very beautiful. 

How inuch do you sell it an ell ? 

A hundred and forty francs, 

It is too dear, 

I never ask too much, 

How much do I owe you ? 

How much is it ? 

Two hundred francs. 

Have you change for a guinea ? 



21. Dans une Boutique. 

VendeZ'Vous des gants ? 

Oiii, madame, 

Montr ez-tn'en^ s'il vous plait. 

En void ; — en voila. 

Combien les vendez-vous f 

Quatre schellings la paire. 

Cest bien cher ; — c' est fort cher. 

Avez-vous de beau drop ? 

Oui, monsieur, fen ai de touie beaute. 

Combien le vendez-vous faune ? 

Cent quarante francs. 

Cest trop cher. 

Je ne surfais jamais. 

Combien vous dois-je ? 

Combien est-ce ? 

Deux cents francs. 

Avez-vous la monnaie d\ne guinte ? 



22. Of Age. 
How old are you ? 
I am fifteen years old. 
How old is your sister ? 
She is twenty. 

She does not appear so much, 
Your cousin has grown very much. 



23. Of Epochs. 
These last days, 
One of these days, 
It is not two days since, 
Last week, 
A week ago. 
It was this day week, 
It was yesterday week, 
A fortnight ago. 
It is three weeks since, 
It is at least a month. 
It is about a month since. 
It wants a day or two. 
Last month. 
Last year. 
Next year, 
New year's day. 
On new year's day, 
At Christmas, 
At Easter, 
At Midsummer, 
At Michaelmas, 
This day Aveek, 
To-morrow week, 
To-morrow fortnight, 
In a month, within a month, 
A month hence, 



22. De PAge. 

Quel age avez-vous ? 

J^ai quinze ans. 

Quel age a mademoiselle voire scetir ? 

Elle a vingt ans. 

Elle ne les paraif pas. 

Voire cousine a bien grandi. 



23. Des Epoques. 

Ces jours derniers. 

Un de ces jours. 

II n''ij a pas deux jours. 

La semaine passce ; — la semaine dernitre. 

II y a une semaine. 

II y a aitjourd'' hui une seinaine. 

II y eut ou il y a eu hier huit jours. 

II y a qui7ize joiirs. 

11 y a de cela trois semaines. 

II y a bien un mois, 

Il y a a pen pres un mois. 

II ien faut d'un jour ou deux, 

Le mois dernier. 

Vannee passee; — Pannke dernitre, 

Uannte prochaine. 

Le premier jour de Pan. 

Au premier jour de fan. 

A Noel. 

A Pdques. 

A la Saint- Jean. 

A la Saint-Michel. 

D''anjourd''hui en huit. 

De demain en huit. 

De demain en quinze. 

Dans nn mois. 

D'ici a tin mois. 



FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 



483 



The first of June, 

The third, the fourth of uext month, 

Within six weeks, 

Six weeks hence. 

At the end of the month. 

Towards the middle of June, 

In the middle of Januar}'', 

In a fortnight, 

Next week, 

In a Aveek, 

Towards the end of the week. 

From day to day, 

Some day or other. 

Every day. 

Daily, 

What is the day of the month to day ? 

To day is the sixth, seventh, &c. 



24. Of the Weather. 
How is the weather ? 
What sort of weather is it ? 
Is it fine ? 
Is it fine weather ? 
Yes, it is fine, it is fine weather, 
The weather is settled, 
It is beautiful weather. 
It is charming weather. 
It is most delightful weather. 
The weather is very close, 
The weather is changeable. 

It gets cloudy, 

It is cloudy weather, 

It is bad weather. 

It is very bad weather, 

It is dreadful weather. 

It is windy. 

It is very windy. 

The wind subsides, 

The wind falls, 

The wind begins to fall or to subside. 

It is foggy, 

It is very foggy. 

The weather begins to clear up, 

It is mild, 

It is hot, 

It is cold, 

It is very hot, 

It is very cold. 

It is sultry, 

It is dry weather, 

It is damp. 

It threatens to rain. 

It is going to rain, 

I feel some drops of rain, 

It rains, — it is raiuing. 



Le premier de Juui. 

Le trois,le qttatre du mois prochain, 

Dans six semaines. 

IXici a six semaines. 

A la Jin du mois. 

Vers la mi-Juiti. 

A la mi-Janvier. 

Dans qiiinze jours ; — daiu une quinzaine. 

La semaine prochai?ie. 

Dans une semaine ; — dans huit jours. 

Vers la Jin de la semaine. 

De jour en jour. 

TJnjour on l^ autre. 

Tous les jours. 

Journellement. 

Quel est aujourd'hui le jour du mois? 

(Test aujourdliui le six, le sept, 8fc. 

24. Du Temps. 

Quel temps fait-il f 
Quelle sjrte de temps fait-il? 
Fait-il beau? 
Fait-il beau temps ? 
Oui, il fait beau ; il fait beau temps. 
Le temps est au beau. 
Jl fait un temps superbe. 
11 fait tin temps charmatit. 
II fait le plus beau temps du jnonde. 
II fait un temps lourd. 
Le temps est variable ; le temps est incon- 
stant. 
Le temps se couvj-e. 

Le temps est couvert ; le temps est charge. 
II fait mauvais temps, 
II fait bien mauvais temps. 
II fait un temps affreux. 
II fait du vent. 
Ilfait bien du vent. 
Le vent s^opaise. 
Le vent tombe. 

Le vent commence a tomber, ou a s^apaiser^ 
II fail du brouillard. 
II fait bien du brouillard. 
Le temps commence a s^eclaircir, 
Ilfait im temps doux. 
II fait chaud. 
Ilfait froid. 
II fait bien chaud. 
Ilfait bien froid, 
II fait une chaleur etouffante. 
II fait im tanps sec. 
Ilfait tin temps humide. 
Le temps est a la pluie. 
II va pleuvoir. 
Je sens des gouttes de pluie. 
II pleui, — ilfait de la pluie. 
y2 



484 



FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 



It rains very fast, 

It pours, 07' it is pouring, 

It is only a shower. 

It does not rain. 

The weather is stormy. 

We shall have a storm. 

There is a storm. 

Do you hear the thunder ? 

It thunders. 

It lightens, 

It has thundered and lightened all night, 

The weather clears up, 

The weather settles. 

It freezes. 

It freezes very hard, 

It freezes extremely hard. 

The river is frozen, 

There is ice. 

Is there ice ? 

The ice hears. 

We shall have some snow, 

It snows, — it is snowing. 

It hails, — it is hailing, 

It thaws, — it is thawing, 

It is dusty, — the roads are dusty, 

It is very dusty, 

The rain has laid the dust. 

It is very dirty. 

The streets are very dirty, 

The pavement is greasy (slippery,) 

The pavement is slippery, 

It is very bad walking, 

It is daylight. 

It is night. 

It is dark, 

It is very dark. 

It is a dark night. 

It is moon-light, 

Is it moon-light? 

The days decrease. 

The days begin to decrease. 

The daj-s are so short, 

I am hot, 

I am cold. 

Are you hot ? 

Are you cold ? 

I am veiy hot, 

I am very cold, 

I am quite wet, 

I am wet through, 

I am Avet to the very skin. 

Dry yourself. 



Jl pleut bienfort. 

Ilpleut a verse; ou, /a plide tombe a verse. 

Ce n'est qiiune ondte. 

11 ne pleut pas. 

Le temps est a Parage. 

Nous aurons de Parage. 

II fait de forage. 

Eniendez-vous le tonnerre ? 

II tonne, — il fait du tonnerre. 

II tclaire. 

II a tonne et eclaire toute la nuit. 

Le temps s'eclaircit. 

Le temps se 7-emet au beau. 

II gele. 

II g tie t res-fort. 

II gele a pierre fendre. 

La riviere est prise. 

II y a de la glace. 

Ya-t-ilde la glace? 

La glace porte. 

Nous aurons de la neige. 

II neige, — il tombe de la ncige. 

II grele,—il tombe de la grele. 

II degcle. 

11 fait de la poussiere. 

II fait bien de la poussiere. 

La pluie a abattu la poussiere. 

II fait bien crotte. ' 

Les rues sont bien crottees. 

Le pave est gras. 

Le pave est glissant. 

II fait bien mauvais marcher. 

Ilfaitjot/r. 

II fait nuit. 

11 fait somhi'e. 

II fait bien nuit; il fait bien sombre. 

Il fait une nuit obscure, 

II fait clair de lune. 

Fait-il clair de lune ? 

Les jours diminuent. 

Les jours commencent a decroiire, a di" 

minuer. 
Les jours sont si courts. 
J'ai chaud. 
J^ai froid. 
^vez-vous chaud ? 
Avez-vous froid ? 
J^ai bien chaud. 
J^ai bien froid. 
Je SDis tout trempL 
Je suis traverse. 
Je suis mouill'e jiisqu'' aux os. 
Sechez-vous. 



A JOURNEY FROM CALAIS TO PARIS. 



485 



2b. To ask the Way, S^c. 

Pray, sir, which is the street of...? 

Is this the way to.... ^ Is this the v/ay 

to ^o to...? 
Is this the way that leads to...? 
Pray, which is the way to go to...? 

You are in the right way, 

How far is it from here ? 

Is it fur from here ? 

Is it very far from here ? 

No, it is not far, it is quite near here^ it 

is hard by. 
It is only two steps from here. 
It is only a short league, 
It is ahout a league. 
It is full a league from here, 

Which way am I to go ? Which way 

must I go ? 
Go straight on, — go quite straight on, 
Go to the right. 
Go to the left, 
You will turn to the ri^ht, at the first 

corner, then to the left, and then keep 

straight on, 
Where does Mr. L* '•' " live ? 
Do you know where Mr. L* " * lives ? 
Can you tell me where Mr. L'-''* * lives ? 

I do not know exactly ; he formerly lived 
at No. 10, Rtie de la Pair, but I think 
he now lives at St. Cloud, 



25. Pout demander le Chemin^^c. 

La rue de..., s'ilvous plait, monsiew- ? 
Est-ce ici le chemin de...l Est-ce ici le 

chemin four oiler a...? 
Est-ce ici le chemin qui conduit a...? 
Quel est, je vous prie, le chemin pour 

a Her a...? 
Fous etes dans le vrai chemin ; ou, vous 

etes dans le droit chemin. 
Comhien y a-t-il ctici ? 
Ya-t-il loin d'ici? 
Y a-t-il bien loin d'ici ? 
Non, il ri'y a pas loin, c'cst tout prts d^ici. 

II n''y a que deux pas. 

ll n''y a quhine petite lieue. 

11 y a a peu pres unc lietie. 

II y a line bonne lieue, ou il y a une grande 

lieue d^ici. 
Par oil faut-il aller ? Par oufaut-il que 

faille ? De quel cote faut-il que faille ? 
Allez tout droit. 
Allez a droiie. 
Allez a gauche. 
Fous tournerez a droite, au premier coin, 

puis a gauche, et ensiiite vous irez tout 

droit. 
Oil demeure M. L* * * 9 
Savez-vous oii demeure 31. L* * * ? 
Pourriez-vous me dire ou demeure M. 

U^ * « 9 

Je ne sais pas au juste ; autrefois il de- 
7neurait, Rue de la Paix, No. 10 ; tnais 
je crois quil demeure a present a St. 
Cloud. 



26. A JOURNEY FROM CALAIS TO PARIS; 



Or, A Collection of the Phrases, 
commonly occur in a Journey 
Return. 

I wish to take a place for Paris, 

I want an inside seat, 

I want a front seat, (or an inside seat 

with my face to the horses), 
I want a back seat, {or an inside seat 

with my back to the horses), 
I want an inside seat in the corner, 
I want a seat in the coupe, 
I want a seat in the rotonde, 
I w^ant an outside place, 



Directions, Observations, ^^c. that 
from Calais to Paris, and on the 



Je viens prendre ou je viens retenir tine 

place pour Paris. 
Je desirerais une place dans rint6rieur. 
Je desirerais une place du fond. 

Je desirerais une place de devant. 

Je desirerais une place de cote. 
Je desirerais une place de coupe. 
Je desirerais une place dans la rotonde. 
Je desirerais une place a Pexterieur ou 
sur la banquette ou Pimperiale. 



486 



A JOURNEY FROM CALAIS TO PARIS. 



Quel numiro ai-je ? 

Quand part-on ? 

Demam au soir, a six heures. 

Comhien compte-t-on ch Calais a Paris f 

Trente-qiiatre posies^ et demie, par Amiens, 
et trente-deux et un quart, par Beati' 
vais. 

Oil couche-t-on ? 

Je ne sais pas j dema)idez aic conducteiir. 

Condncteur, couche-t-on en route ? 

Non, monsieur. 

S^arreie-t-o?i a Boulogne ? 

Oui, pour souper et changer de ckevaux. 

Oil dejeune-t-on demain ? 

A Abbeville. 

Tai un porte-manteau. 

J'ai line malle. 

Combien dois-je payer pour ma place 9 

Cin quanie fran cs. 

Combien pour mes effets ? 

Douze, treize, 8fc. francs. 

Conducteur, ayez sain de mes effets. 

Conducteur, payez les postilions pour moi. 

Nous voila en fin emballts. 

He bien ! partons-nous 9 

Nous voila enji7i partis. 

Nous voila enjxn en route. 

Cette voiture est bien douce. 

Voulez-vousme permettre debaisserki glace9 

Cette voiture n^a pas de stores. 

Conducteur, faites arreler ; j'ai besoin de 

descendre ; — madame desii^e descendre. 
Ouvrez la portiere. 
Fermez la porlitre. 
Oil dhie-t-on 9 \ 
A Amiens. 

Oh descend la diligence 9 
A la Posle Royale. 

Y dine-t-on bien 9 
Tres-bien. 
Combien prend-on par iete 9 Combien par 

tete9 
Quatre francs. 

Y est-on bien servi 9 
Siiperieurement. 
Le vin y est-il bon 9 
Excellent. 
Nous voila arrives. 
Je sors le premier. 
Madame, permettez que je vous offre la 

main. 

* The distances in France are calculated by French posts, which, with a trifling 
fraction, may be reckoned at 4^ English miles each. The distance from Calais to 
Paris is therefore nearly 155 English miles by Beauvais, and about 165i by Amiens. 



What is my number ? 
When shall we start ? 
To-morrow evening, at six o'clock, 
How far do they reckon it from Calais 

to Paris ? 
Thirty-four posts and a half, by Amiens, 

and thirty- two and a quarter, by Beau- 

vais, 
Where shall we sleep ? 
I do not know, ask the conductor. 
Conductor, do we stop to sleep on the 

road ? 
No, sir, 

Shall we stop at Boulogne ? 
Yes, to take supper and change horses, 
Where shall we breakfast to-morrow ? 
At Abbeville, 
I have a portmanteau, 
I have a box, 

How much have I to pay for my place ? 
Fifty francs. 

How much for ray luggage ? 
Twelve, thirteen, &c. francs, 
Conductor, take care of my luggage, 
Conductor, pay the postilions for me, 
We are at last packed up. 
Well ! are we going ? 
We are off at last, 
We are launched at last, 
This coach is ver)'- easy, 
Will you allow me to put down the glass, 
This coach has no blinds, 
Conductor, stop ; I want to get out ; — 

this lady wishes to get out. 
Open the door, 
Shut the door, 
Where shall we dine ? 
At Amiens, 

Where does the diligence put up ? 
At the Royal Post, 

Do they give one a good dinner there ? 
Yes, very. 
How much do they charge a head? 

How mAich a head r* 
Four francs, 

Is one well attended there ? 
Very well. 

Is the wine good there ? 
Excellent, 

Now we are arrived, 
I get out the first, 
Madam, allow me to offer you my hand, 



A JOURNEY FROM CALAIS TO PARIS. 



487 



Mademoiselle, let me have the honour to 
present you my arm, 

The postilion. — Please to remeraher the 
postilion, sir, 

A. — the conductor paj's for me. 

Ask the conductor, 

Dinner is ready, take your seats, gentle- 
men, 

We are only allowed one hour for dinner, 

Some bread — beer — wine — water, if you 
please. 

Waiter, give a knife, — a spoon, — a fork, 
to madam, — to mademoiselle. 

The conductor. — Ladies and gentlemen, 
the horses are put to, we are going to 
set off. 

The maid. — Ladies and gentlemen, please 
to remember the maid. 

Come, let us start. 

The dinner was tolerable, — bad, — de- 
testable, 

It was a true stage-coach dinner. 

In general the inns where diligences put 
up at are bad, 

Besides one is always fleeced in them, 

We are off' once more, 

This coach is very uncomfortable, one 
is terribly jolted in it, 

Ah ! my back! 

One is very much confined in it, 

One is as if packed up. 

As close as herrings, 

Where are we ? 

At Chantill)', 

How far is it from here to Paris ? 

About five posts. 

Does the diligence stop here ? 

Yes, sir, to change horses. 

Have we time to take any thing ? 

Have we time to take some refreshment P 

No, sir. 

Shall we soon be at Paris ? 

We are arrived, sir, there it is before us, 

Where does the diligence put up ? 

At the Royal Messageries, rue Nutre- 

Dame-des- Victoires. 
To what hotel do you go ? 
To the Grand Hotel de Londres, Place 

P'endome ; or, to the Hotel de Rivoli, 

Rue de Rivol'i ; or else, to the Hotel 

Ti'agram, Rue de la Paix, 
Is one comfortable there, 
Yes, very. 
We are at last arrived, 



Mademoiselle, que j'aie I'honneur de vous 

offrir le bras. 
Le postilion. — Monsieur, n'oubliez pas le 

postilion. 
R. — Le conducteur paie pour moi. 
Demandez au conducteur. 
Le diner est pret, prenons place. 

On ne nous donne quune heure pow diner. 
Du pain — de la biere — du vin — de Veau, 

s'll vous plait. 
Gargon, dorinez un couteau, — ime cuiller, 

— une fourchetle, a madame, — a made- 

moiselle. 
Le conducteur, — iMesdames et T)Iess:eurs, 

les chevaux sont attetes, on va partir. 

La fiUe. — Mesdames et tnessieurs, n^oN- 
hliez pas lajxlle. 

Allons, partons. 

Le diner ttail passable, — mauvais, — de- 
testable. 

Cetait un vrai diner de diligence. 

En gkmral les auberges ok descendent les 
diligences sont mauvaises. 

Jit puii on y est vcorche, — ttnlle. 

Nous voilci encore unefois en route. 

Cette voilure est bie7i dure; on >j est hor- 
riblement cahote. 

Ah ! les reins ! 

On y est fort a I't'troif. 

On y est comme empnquetc. 

On y est serre comme des harengs. 

Oh somnies nous ? 

A Chantillij. 

Combien compte-t-on d^ici a Paris ? 

A pen pres cinq posies. 

La diligence arrete-t-elle ici ? 

Qui, monsieur, pour changer de chevaux, 

Avons-nous le temps de prendre quelque 
chose ? 

Avons-nous le temps de nous rafruichir 9 

Non, monsieur. 

Sommes-nous enjin bientol a Pan's ? 

Nous y sommes monsieur ; le voi/li devant 
nous. 

Oh descend la diligence ? 

Aux Messageries Royales, Rue Notre- 
^ Dame-des-Victoires. 

A quel hotel descendez-vous ? 

Au Grand Hotel de Londres, Place Ven- 
dome ; ou, a /'Hotel de Rivoli, Rue de 
Rivoli; ou bien, a /'Hotel Wagram, 
Rue de la Paix. 

Y est -on bien? 

Par/aitemenl bien. 

Nous voilci enJin rendus. 



488 



A JOURNEY FROM CALAIS TO PARIS. 



Sir, have you any luggage to carry? 

Yes, take this portmanteau, 

Take me to the Hotel Wagram, Rue de la 

Puix, 
Here it is, sir, 

I want a room with a single bed, 
I shall keep another for a gentleman 

whom I expect here, 
Is that gentleman arrived ? 
Yes, sir, he is in the cofFee-room, 
At what o'clock do we sup ? 
At half-past ten. 
Have the goodness to procure me a 

ticket-porter, — a valet de place. 
Is "there any J)! ay to-night ? 
Yes, sir. 

Is it well frequented P 
Pretty well. 

Have you seen the bill ? 
Yes, sir, 

What is the performance ? 
The FouRBEiiiEs dk Scapin. — The Mk- 

BECIN MalGRE LUI, &C. 

Where are the passports examined? 

At the Prcfechive de Police, Qimi des 

Orfevres, pres le Pont-neuf. 
Sir, I come to have my passport exa- 
mined and signed, 
I intend to remain liere only a few days. 
From here I return direct to Calais, 
I lodge at the hotel of... 
Is supper ready "^ Shall we soon sup ? 
Yes, sir, the supper is going to be put on 

the table, 
I shall retire early, 
I shall go to bed early. 
Chambermaid, take particular care of 

the sheets, and I shall remember you, 
When the person I mentioned to j^ou is 

arrived, inform me. 
If Monsieur Le Comte come and ask for 

me, shov/ him to my room. 
Should Madame Suint-Ange come again, 

ask her to wait, 
I shall be back about seven o'clock. 
Get my room ready, 
Let me be called to-moiTow, at seven, 

eight, &c. o'clock, 
I am going to bed ; a light, if you please, 

Take my boots and my coat, 
I set out to-morrow for Calais, 
Madam, my bill, if you please. 
Adieu, till my next journey, 
I am at last returned to Calais, 
Where is the steam-packet-office for 
Dover ? 



Monsiet/y, avezrvous des effels ci poHer ? 

Oui, prenez ce port^-manteau. 

Conduisez-moi a /'Hotel Wagram, Rue 
de la Paix. 

Nons y vnild, monsieur. 

Je voudrais une chambre a tin lit. 

Ten retiendrai une aidre potir tin mon- 
sieur que f attends ici. 

Ce mo7isieur est-il arrive. ?■ 

(\ui, monsieur, il est dans le cafe. 

A quelle heure soupe-t-on ? 

A dix hetires et dernie. 

Procurez-moi, je vovs prie. un commission- 
naire, — un valet de place. 

Y a-t-il spectacle ce soir ? 

Oui, monsieur. 

Est-il suivi ? 

Assez bien. 

Avez-vous vu Vaffiche ? 

Oui, monsieur. 

Que donne-t-on ? 

Les FoURBEIilKS DK ScAPIN. Le M6- 

DECIN MaLGRE LUI ; &c. 

OU fait-on viser les passe-ports ? 

A la Prefecture de Police, Quai des Or- 
fevres, pres le Pont-neuf. 

Monsieur, je viens /aire viser mon passe- 
port. 

Je ne compte rester ici que que Iques jours. 

Tfici je relourne direct ement a Calais. 

Je suis descendzi (on lege) a Pliotel de... 

Le souper est-il pre t ? Soupe-t-on bientot ? 

Oui, monsieur, on va servir. 

Je me retirerai de bonne heure. 

J'^irai me coucher de bonne heure. 

La Jille, je vous recommande surtout les 

draps,j'aurai soin de vous. 
Quand la personne dont je vous ai parle 

sera arrivee, avertissez-moi. 
Si Monsieur le Comte vient me demander, 

conduisez-le dans ma chambre. 
Si Madame Saint-Ange revient, priez-la 

d''attendre. 
Je rentrerai sur les sept heures. 
Tenez ma chambre prete. 
Faites-moi reveiller demain ci sept, huit, 

8^c. heures. 
Je vais me coucher; de la lumiere^ s^il 

vous plait. 
Pre/: ez mes boties et mon habit. 
Je pars demain foiir Calais. 
Madame, mon compte, s^il vous plait. < 
Adieu, jusqu'' d mon pi'Ochain voyage. 
Me void enjin de retour d Calais. 
Oil est le bureau du paquebot d vapeur 

pour Dour res ? 



NOTES AND CARDS OF INVITATION. 



489 



Ver)' near here, sir, . 

Is Mr. D* * arrived by the packet to- 
day ? 

No, sir. 

Will you have the goodness, o/v^iH yon 
have the kindness to give him this 
note upon his arrival ? 

Yes, sir, with pleasure, 

Adieu, I am oif. 



Tout pres d'ici, 7nonsieur. 

M. />** est-il arrive par le paquebot de 
cejour ? 

No7t, mo7isieur. 

Voidez-vous avoir la bonte, ou — vouiez- 
vous hien avoir la complaisance de lui 
rcmettre ce billet a son arrivee ? 

Oui, monsieur, avec plaisir. 

Adieu, je pars. 



Models of Notes and Cards of Invitation, Ceremony, and Thanks. 



" 1^/ Note. 

Mrs. C** * requests the honour of the 
Misses G***'s company to a little 
dance, which she intends giving this 
evening. 

8, Rue des Bons-Enfans. 
Tuesday, June 3(1. 

Answer. 

Misses G* * *'s respectful compliments 
to Mrs. C* * *, and will do themselves 
the pleasure to attend her polite invita- 
tion. 

5, Rue de la Paix. 
Sunday morning. 



Id Note. 

Mr. and Mrs. D* * ''■' present their com- 
pliments to Miss L-'- * *, and request the 
favour of her company to dinner, on 
Saturday next, at seven o'clock, to meet 
a few friends. 

10, Boulevard des Italiens. 
September 20th, 1827. 



!'■ Billet. 

Mme. C'-' * '•' donne ce soir un petit bal ; 
elle s'estimerait heureuse,si Mesdemoisclles 
Q* * # voulaient bien venir embellir sa 
petite fete, ainsi qu^elle a rhonneur de les 
en prier. 

Rue des Bons-En/ans, ]S'o. 8. 
Mardi, 3 Juin. 

Reponse. 

Miles. G* * * font leurs respectueux 
complimens a Madame C* * *, et elles au- 
ront Vhonneur de se rendre avec autant 
d^empressement que de plaisir a son aimable 
invitation. 

Rue de la Paix, No. 5. 
Dimunche matin. 



T'' Billet. 

M. et Mme. D'' ''•' * ont Phonneur de 
presenter leurs coynplimem a Mademoiselle 
£j* ■» *^ gi (Iq la pritr de vouloir bien aug- 
menter le petit novibre d^amis quails rc- 
uniront chez eux a diner Samedi pochain. 
On se mettra d table a sept heures. 

Boulevard des Italiens. No. 10. 
Ze20 Septembre,lS27. 



Ansioer, 

Miss L* * * returns a thousand com- 
pliments to Mr. and Mrs, D***, and 
will not fail to attend their kind invita- 
tion. 

1, Boulevard des Italiens. 
Friday morning. 



Reponse. 

Mile. Lr * * dit mille choses honnetes a 
Monsieur et a Madame D''''^'^, et elle ne 
manquera pas de se rendre a leur aimable 
invitation. 

Boulevard des Italiens, No. 1. 
Fendredi matin. 



y 5 



490 



NOTES AND CARDS OF INVITATION. 



3d Note. 
Mr. S* * presents his compliments to 
Mrs. C***, and be<^s the favour of her 
compan}-^ to-morrov/ evening, to tea and 
cards. 

8, Place Vendome. 
Monday morning. 



Ist Answer. 
Mrs. C* * * begs to thank Mr. S* * 
for his kind invitation, which she is very 
sorry it will not be in her power to accept, 
on account of a concert which she has at 
home to-morrow evening. 
2, Place des Victoires. 
Monday evening. 

2d Ansioer. 

Mrs. C* * * feels very much obliged to 
Mr. S** for his kind invitation which she 
is very sorry she cannot accept, on ac- 
count of a similar engagement which she 
has for to-morrow evening. 

6, Rue de Richelieu. 
Tuesday, May 21st, 1828. 



Ath Note. 
Mr. and Mrs. T* '■' * present their com- 
pliments to Mrs. L* * *, and request the 
favour of her compaily at a little concert 
•which they intend giving on Tuesday 
next. 

An answer is requested. 
Wednesday morning. 

\st Answer. 
Mrs. L* * * presents her best compli- 
ments to Mr. and Mrs. T" * *, and ac- 
cepts with pleasure their kind invitation. 
4, Rue de Grammont. 
Thursday morning. 

2d Answer. 
Mrs. L* * presents her compliments to 
Mr. and Mi-s. T* *, and is very sorry 
that a previous engagement for Tuesday 
will prevent her having the honour of 
waiting on them on that day. 

hth Note. 
Mr. L***. 
Mrs. de P* * * at home on Thursday 
next, the 7th of June, a dejeuner. 



She will depend upon seeing him, if 
she receives no answer. 



S"'^ Billet. 
Mi iS.* * fait bien ses amities a. Ma- 
dame C* * *, et il r invite a Vhonorer de sa 
compagnie, demain uu soir, pour h thk ei 
la partie. 

Place Fendome, iS^o. 8. 
Lundi matin. 



V" Reponse. 

Mme. C* * * fait mille remerc'imens a 
Monsieur S* * de so?i aimable invitation 
qu'elle est tres-fdchee de ne pouvoir ac- 
cepter, ayant elle-meme un concert, demain 
au soir. 

Place des Victoires, No. 2. 
Lundi soir. 

2-^' Reponse. 
Mille remerczmens de la part de Mme. 
C * * * a Monsieur S * * pour son obli- 
geante invitation qu'elle est dholte de ne 
pouvoir accepter, a cause d'un engagement 
de meme nature qii'elle a pour demain au soir. 
Rue de Richelieu, No. 6. 
Mardi, 21 Mai, 1828. 



4'"" Billet. 

M. et Mme. T*** presenletit leurs 
complimens a Madame IJ* * *, et its la 
prient de leur faire Chonneur d''assi^ter a 
un petit concert qiHls se proposent de don- 
ner Mardi pi^ochain. 

On desire une reponse. 
Mercredi m,aiin. 

1" Reponse. 

Mme. L* * * presente ses complimens a 
Mo7isieur et a Madame T'''' * '■', et elle se fait 
un plaisir d' accepter leur aimable invitation . 

Rue de Grammont, No. 4. 
Jeudi matin. 

2'^^ Reponse. 

Mme. Z* *, etant engagee pour Mardi, 
prie Monsieur et Madame 7'** d'agr'eer 
ses excuses et rassurance de tous ses re- 
grets. 



b-^' Billet. 

Mme. de P-'=** sera chez elle, Jeudi 
prochain ; elle aura beaucoup de plaisir a 
recevoir Monsieur L* * *, s^il veut hn faire 
ramitie de venir lid demander a dejeu>,er. 

Mme. de P"' * ''■' comptera sur Monsieur 
IJ'' '•' *, si elle ne re^oit point de reponse. 



NOTES AND CARDS OF INVITATION. 



491 



Ansiuer. 

Mr. L* * * sends his most respectful 
compliments to Mrs, de P* * *, and as- 
sures her that he could not receive a more 
gratifying invitation ; but, being unfor- 
tunately obliged immediately to leave 
town for the countr)'', he will be deprived 
of the pleasure of enjoying Mrs. de P* * *'s 
agreeable company. 

1, Rue Neuve-de-Luxembourg. 
Tuesday morning. 



6th Note, 



I invite you, my dear, to come and 
drink tea with me this evening ; I shall 
be alone, and hope you will favour me 
with your agreeable company : — do not 
refuse me this kindness. Adieu. 

Yoiir's truly, 

Adelaide. 

Ansiver. 

I return you a thousand thanks, my 
dear, for your kind invitation ; but having 
companj', this evening, I shall not be 
able to have the pleasure of seeing you. 

I am your's for ever, 

Emilia. 



Repo7ise. 

M. Z* * * -prhente ses civil it es ies plus 
respectueuses a Madame de P'-' * */ il ne 
pouvait recevoir tine invitation qui liti fut 
p/iis aqreable ; mais, malhew'eusement, il 
est oblige de partir incessamment pour ia 
campagne, ce qui le privera du plaisir 
inestimable de jouir de Paimable socicte de 
Madame de P* * *. 
Eue Neuve-de-Luxembourg y No. 1. 
Mardi matin. 



6*"* Billet. 



Je vous invite, ma chere, d venir pren' 
dre le the, ce soir, avec moi ; je serai seufe, 
et fespere que vous voudrez bien me pro- 
curer le plaisir de voire charmanie com,' 
pagnie: ne me refusez pas cette grace. 
Adieu. 

Tout a voi/s, 

Adelaide. 



Repo 



nse. 

Je vous remei'cie mille et mxlle fois, ma 
chere, de votre cdniable invitation; mais 
ayant de la compagnie ce soir chez moi, 
je ne jjourrai pas avoir le plaiiir de vous 
voir. 

Je svis a vous pour toujours, 

Emilie. 



nth Note. 

Miss B* * *, finding herself obliged to 
go into the country to-morrow, desires 
Mr. D* " * not to give himself the trouble 
of calling. Miss B''' * * will be very glad 
to see Mr. D* * *, after to-morrow, at any 
hour which will be most convenient to 
him. 

20, Rue Montmartre. 
Wednesday evening. 



8th Note. 



Miss W^" * * presents her compliments 
to Mr. E***; as she is going to a ball 
this evening, she cannot have the plea- 
sure of seeing him ; and. begs he will 
have the kindness not to come before 
eleven to-morrow. 

4, Rue de la Mounaie. 
Friday morning. 



1'"' Billet. 

Mile. B* * * se trouvant ob/igee d'al/er 
demain a la campagne, prie M. £>*** de 
nc pas se donner la peine de pasier chez 
elle. Mile. 5* * * sera bien aise de voir 
Monsieur Z)* '■' '•', apres-demain, a I'heitre 
qui lui sera le plus convenable. 

Rue Montmartre, No. 20. 
Mercredi soir. 



8"'" Billet. 

Mile. JV'-' ••• '•'■ souhaile le bonjuur a 
Monsieur E'-' '•"' "'7 commeelle va ce soir au 
bal, elle ne poitrra pas avoir le plaisir de 
le voir aujouyvf/if/i. Elle le prie de 
voutcir bien ne venir qu'a onze heures 
demam. 

Rue de la Monnaie, No. 4. 
Vendredi matin. 



492 



FORMS OF BILLS OF EXCHANGE. 



mhNote. 

Mr. T* * * feels much obliged to Mr. 
and Mrs. P* * * for the kind concern 
they have expressed during his indis- 
position, and begs to return his most 
sincere thanks. 

12, Palais-Royal. 
Thursday morning. 



\QthNote. 

My dear friend, 

You will receive v/ith tbiis letter a 
necklace of fine pearls, which I intreat 
you to accept as a small testimony of the 
friendship between us. I enclose, at tbe 
same time, a few trifles for your two 
charming little girls ; they are the gifts 
of my Kloisa, who joins with me in 
hoping they will please you. Adieu. 

Believe me your's very tenderly, 

Adelaide. 



9""^ Billet. 

M. r* * * est bien sensible a Pinttret 
que Monsieur et Madame P* * * ont bien 
voulu lui temoigner, en envoyant savoir de 
ses noKvelles, pendant son indisposition. 11 
leur adresse ses plus unctres remercimens. 

Palais-Royal, No. 12. 
Jeiidi matin. 



W' Billet. 

Madame et chere amie, 

Fous recevrez avec cette lettre une 
parure de perles fines, que je vozis prie 
d'accepter comme un faible iemoignage de 
Pamitie qui nous lie. Je joins a cet envoi 
quelques bagatelles pour vos deux char- 
mantes petites filles : c'esl mon Elolse qui 
leur en fait hommage ; elle desire, ainst 
que moi, que le tout vous soil agreable. 
Adieu. 

Je vous embrasse tres-tendrement, 

Adelaide. 



Forms of Bills of Exchange. 



1. 

Paris, le 6 Septembre 1834. 
Pour £1000 sterle. 

Monsieur, — a vue, {ou a huit, dix. quinze, &c. jours de vue,) il vous plaira 
payer, par cette premiere de change, (la seconde ne Fetant,) a M. R** *, ou a son 
ordre, la somme de mille livres sterl. valeur regue, q\ie passerez en compte, suivant 
I'avis de 

Votre tres-humble serviteur, 
■ A Monsieur Harrison, negociant, J. A. Homerton. 

Cornhilh Londres. 



[1-] 



Londres, le 14 Novembre 1834. 
Bon pour 10,000 francs. 

Messieurs, — a trois mois de date, payez par cette seule de change, a I'ordre de 
Mesbieurs Bellex et C^^^ \^ somme de dix mille francs, valeur recue comptant, [ou 
en marchandises,) que passerez en compte, suivant I'avis de 

Vos tres-humbles serviteurs, 
A Messieurs Arden et Flint, Jones, Hankev, et Cie. 

Rue St.-Honore, a Paris. 



FORMS OF PROMISSORY NOTES, <S:c. 493 

Forms of Promissory Notes. 

1. 

Paris, le 26 Janvier 1834. 
Bon pour 2000 francs. 

Dans deux mois, {ou sur tlemande,) je promets payer a M. Haro, ou a son ordre, 
la somme de deux mille francs, valeur recue. 

J. H. Hamilton. 



Londres, le 28 Decembre 1834. 
Bon pour 30,000 francs. 

Sur demande, (pu le 20 Fevrier prochain,) je promets paj'er a M. Morgan, ou 
son ordre, la somme de trente mille francs, valeur re^ue en marchandises. 

A. B. Robinson. 



Models of Receipts. 



J'ai recu de M. Brown et Cie. la somme de quarante livres sterl. pour solde de 
compte. 

Londres, le 12 Janvier 1835. 

£40. C. Bardget. 



Je reconnais avoir re^u de, (or shnplt/, — rec;u de,) M. C * *, la somme de miile 
francs que je lui avais pretee. 

Paris, le 30 Decembre 1834. 

1000 f. 

J. A* - *. 



494 



TABLES, &c. 



Tables of the respective value of the French and English coins. 

There are now in circulation in France : 

1 . Copper pieces of 1 and 2 sous, and also of ^ of a sou. 

2. Small silver pieces of 5, 10, and 15 sous. 

3. Silver pieces of 1, 1^, 2, and ^francs. 

4. Gold pieces of 20 and A^ francs. 

It is necessary to observe that all accounts in France are kept in francs 
and centimes. 

A franc is worth 20 sous or 100 centimes ; 5 centimes are therefore equal 
to one sou. 



A Table of the value of French sous anc? centimes, with reference to 
English 'pence and half-pence^ up to 1 franc. 



Sous. 


Centimes. 


d. 


1 


5 


i 


2 


10 


1 


3 


15 


\h 


4 


20 


2 


5 


25 


2* 


6 


30 


3 


7 


35 


3i 


8 


AQ 


4 


9 


45 


^ 


10 


50 


5 


11 


55 


. 5^ 


12 


60 


6 


13 


65 


. ' 61 


14 


70 


7 


15 


75 


• ^ 


16 


80 


8 


17 


85 


8i 


18 


90 


9 


19 


^5 


9* 


20 or \ franc 


IGO 


10 



TABLES, &c. 



495 



A Table of the value of French francs, with reference to English 
pence and shillings, iij) to 1 jjound. 



Francs. 


s. 


d. 


1 





10 


2 


1 


8 


3 


2 


6 


4 


3 


4 


5 


4 


2 


6 


5 





7 


5 


10 


8 


6 


8 


9 


7 


6 


10 


8 


4 


11 


9 


2 


12 


10 





13 


10 


10 


14 


11 


8 


15 


12 


6 


16 


13 


4 


17 


14 


2 


18 . . 


15 





19 


15 


10 


20 


16 


8 


21 


17 


6 


22 


18 


4 


23 


19 


2 


24 . i 


1 


and so on 



London : Printed by William Clowes and Sons, Duke Street, Stamford Street. 



496 Recommendations of the large Octavo Grammar in Two Volumes. 

« DOUVILLE'S FRENCH GRAMMAR. 

" Of all the works to facilitate the acquirement of the French language, 
we have not seen one that appears so well calculated to effect the object as the 
Grammar recently published by J. V. Douville. The author has exhibited 
the nature of the French verbs in a new and clear manner; his remarks on 
pronunciation have also much merit ; and he displays, on many occasions, 
considerable critical talent. His principal object, as distinguished from other 
writers on the same subject, is to render the speaking of French easy to 
English persons ; and all those who study the language, with a view to con- 
versation, will do well to consult the work of M. Douville." — Oriental Herald^ 
June, 1826. 



" We call the attention of our readers to M. Douville's " French Gram- 
mar,'' just published, in two volumes : the first contains exercises admirably 
adapted to the quick attainment of that elegant language ; the second forms 
a collection of sentences most used in conversation, with notes, letters of com- 
pliment, business, and a number of choice pieces of poetry." — British Press, 
August, 1824. 

" A NEW FRENCH GRAMMAR, in 2 vols. By M. DOUVILLE. 
" We have no hesitation in pronouncing this work, which is just pub- 
lished, to be the most complete thing of the kind that has yet appeared. Li 
the first volume, the pronunciation and accent of every letter is concisely laid 
down, and each part of speech is defined in a manner to be clearly under- 
stood by the beginner. There are also easy and progressive exercises affixed 
to each rule, v/hich will be found highly useful and instructive. The second 
volume sets forth fully and comprehensively the different rules of syntax, 
and there are exercises in illustration of them. M. Douville then proceeds 
to treat of French versification, and lays down several useful rules. The 
work concludes with a very comprehensive Vocabulary, and a considerable 
number of familiar and well selected sentences. Those, in short, who wish 
to become proficients in the French language, can desire to know nothing 
that is not clearly and satisfactorily explained in these volumes." — Morning 
Post, Sept. 6, 1824. 

" FRENCH GRAMMAR, by J. V. DOUVILLE. 

" A greater number of works to facilitate the learning of the French lan- 
guage has been published within the last few years than ever was known 
before. We are happy to see public attention thus directed, as we consider 
it of national importance that the language of our neighbours should be well 
understood by a large portion of our countrymen. But, certainly, of all the 
ingenious works that have been published on this subject, none has higher 
claims to public notice than the one before us." — After several quotations 
from the work, the Editor thus concludes: — " The Vocabulary is very exten- 
sive, and the classification of the words judicious. The Author closes the 
second volume by a compendium of sentences most useful for familiar dis- 
course, and a grammatical analysis calculated to save the student much 
trouble and perplexity. We' feel no hesitation in recommending the above 
work to our readers, being satisfied that it is admirably adapted for the rapid 
acquirement of the French language." — Brighton Gazette, Sept. 16, 1824. 



A KEY 



ESSAYS OF THE * 



FRENCH GRAMMAR, 

TO FACILITATE THE ACQUIREMENT OF FRENCH TO THOSE PERSONS 
WHO MAY BE PRECLUDED FROM THE ASSISTANCE OF A MASTER. 



By J. V. DOUVILLE, 

Professor of the French Language. 



HonJJCtt : 

PRINTED FOR THE AUTHOR, No. 6, COVENTRY-STREET, HAYMARKET; AND 
2, LAWRENCE-LANE, CHEAPSIDE ; 

AND SOLD BY ALL BOOKSELLERS. 



1827. 



ENTERED AT STATIONERS' HALL. 



MARCHANT, PRINTER, INGRAM-COURT, FENCHURCH-STREEt. 



PREFACE. 



The rapid sale of two very large editions of the "Speaking 
French Grammar,"* and the repeated suggestions of many 
persons for whose judgement the Author entertains the highest 
respect, as well as numerous applications from those who have 
honoured him by their patronage of that Work, have at length 
induced him to publish a Key to the Essays, with a view 
to facilitate the acquirement of French to those who may be 
precluded from availing themselves of the assistance of a 
master. 

At the same time, he would observe that it is not intended 
the learner should copy the words and phrases of the Key ; 
on the contrary, it is suggested he should only refer to it, to 
correct his own translation, after having attentively studied 
the rules, and rendered the essay into the best French he is 
able. When comparing his own version with that of the Key, 
if he perceives any difference in the grammatical arrange- 



* It is necessary to observe that this Key is only intended for the Edition 
in 1 Vol. 8vo. 1827. It would prove useless for the large Edition in 2 Vols. 
8vo. 1824. 

a2 



IV PREFACE. 

ment, he must read the rules again, and endeavour to find out 
whence the mistake arises. A strict adherence to this method 
will enable a student, without the assistance of a master, to acquire 
a thorough knowledge of the elementary principles of the lan- 
guage, and even insensibly to become acquainted with a con- 
siderable number of familiar and idiomatic phrases : for the 
Essays being all colloquial, the attainment of expressions neces- 
sary for conversation must be the necessary result of an attentive 
perusal of them. 

In the same manner, he trusts it will be found useful, even to 
those who have gone through the Grammar under the instructions 
of a master, when they no longer pursue their studies under 
his guidance. Occasional references to the Key will not only 
impress more strongly on their minds the grammatical techni- 
caUties of the language, but will also enable them to revise their 
future compositions, by comparing their own phrases with 
similar ones in the Key. Students will thus perceive whether 
they have caught that peculiar mode of expression which 
forms at once the beauty of the French language and its most 
striking feature ; or whether they have only turned English 
thoughts and English words into literal French, the fault of all 
others which most frequently distinguishes the French com- 
position of an EngUsh scholar. 

The Essays will be found arranged in the same numerical 
order in the Key as they are in the Grammar, and the index 
will point out the subject and the place of each Essay, both in 
the Key and in the Grammar. 



TABLE DES MATIERES. 



Th^me I. 
ThSme II. 
Theme III. 
Th^me IV. 
ThSme V. 
Thfime VI. 
Theme VII. 
ThSrae VIII. 
ThSme IX. 
Th6me X. 
ThSme XI. 
Theme XII. 

Thime XIII. 
Theme XIV. 
Thdme XV. 



Th^me XVI. 



Th^me XVII. 
Th§me XVIII. 
Theme XIX. 



Clef, 
Page 

Article indefini, uti, une 1 . 

Pronoms possessifs ib. . 

Pronoms demonstratifs 2 . 

Pronoms relatifs ih, , 

De TArticIe indefini, «n, une ib. . 

De TArticle defini, le, lay V, les 3 . 

De I'Article partitif, du, de la, de V, des. ib. . 

Du Genre des Substantifs 4 . 

Formation du Pluriel des Substantifs . . 5 . 

Formation du Feminin des AdjectifSj&c. ib. . 

Formation du Pluriel des Adjectifs .... 6 . 

Degres de Signification ou de Qualifica- 
tion dans les Adjectifs ib. , 

Des Adjectifs de Nombre Cardinaux .. 7 o 

Des Adjectifs de Nombre Ordinaux .. 8 . 

Des Pronoms personnels, je, tu, il, elle, 
nous, vous, its, elles, employes comme 

sujet du Verbe 9 . 

Des Pronoms personnels me, te, le, la, 
lui, leur, y, en, employes comme 

objet du Verbe 10 . 

Des Pronoms possessifs ib. . 

Des Pronoms demonstratifs 11 . 

Des Pronoms relatifs 12 . 



Gram . 

Page 
18 
21 
23 
24 
25 
26 
28 
33 
35 
38 
39 

42 
46 
50 



53 



56 
59 
61 
66 



VI TABLE DES MATIERES. 

Clef, Gram. 

Page Page 

Theme XX. Des Pronoms indefinis 13 .... 71 

Theme XXII. De I'usage des Negatives, ne^ paSy 

point, &c ,. 14 .... 167 

Theme XXIII. De la Negative we 15 .... 170 

Theme XXIV. Des Interrogations 16 .... 17.? 

Theme XXV. Des Adverbes ....'. ib 175 

Theme XXVI. Des Prepositions 17 .... 175 

Theme XXVII. Des Conjonctions et des Interjections . . 18 .... 184 

Theme XXVIII. Des Idiotismes 19 .... 186 

Theme XXIX. Cas ou les Terns du Verbe to be doivent 

s'exprimer par ceux du Verbe uni- 

personnel y avoir 20 .... 188 

Theme XXX. Cas ou les diflFerens tems des Verbes to 

be et to do s'expriment en Fran^ais 

par ceux des Verbes /aire et reporter i6 189 

Th§me XXXI. Cas oii Ton doit se servir de il est, il itait, 

il sera, ^c. et de c'est, c^etait, ce 

sera, S^c 21 .... 191 

Theme XXXII. Avoir mal a, au, dla, d /', aux, 22 .... 193 

Theme XXXIII. Cas oh must s'exprime en Frangais par il 

fautf ilfallaii, ^c ib 195 

Theme XXXIV. Des Verbes d^fectifs, may, will, would, 

can, shall, should, could, might, et ought 23 .... 197 

SYNTAXE. 

Theme XXXV. Cas oil I'on emploie I'Article d6fini en 

Fran9ais ib 202 

Theme XXXVI. Cas ou Ton ne doit pas faire usage de 

I'Article en Fran^ais .25 .... 206 

Theme XXXVI. Continuation des Cas oil Ton ne doit pas 

faire usage de I'Article en Fran^ais 26 .... 210 

Th^me XXXVII. Syntaxe du Substantif, &c 27 .... 214 

Thgme XXXVIIL Syntaxe de I'Adjectif 28 .,.. 217 

Theme XXXIX. De la Place de I'Adjectif 29 .... 219 

Theme XL. Du Regime ou Complement des Adjectifs i& 225 

Theme XLL Des Adjectifs de Dimension 30 .... 227 



TABLE DES MATIERES. Vll 

Clef, Gram. 

Page Page 

Th^me XLII. Des Degres de Signification 31 .... 229 

Theme XLIII. Observationssur lesPronomsZMi,eZ/e, ewa- 32 .... 230 

Theme XLIV. Difliculte touchant les Pronoms le, la, V, 

leSf ^claircie ib 232 

Theme XLV. Des Pronoms moz-rweme, toi-m^me, ^c... 33 .... 234 

Theme XL VI. Places respectives des Pronoms personnels i6 238 

Theme XLVII. Repetition des Pronoms Personnels 34 .... 240 

Theme XLVIII. Regies particulieres des Pronoms posses- 

sifs 35 242 

Theme XLXIX. Cas ou Ton doit se servir de son, sa, ses, 

etdeen 36 .... 245 

Theme L. Regies particulieres des Pronoms demon- 

stratifs ib 249 

Theme LI. Regies particulieres des Pronoms relatifs 37 .... 253 

Theme LIL Des Pronoms ind6finis 38 265 

Theme LIII. Accord du Verbe avec son Sujet 40 .... 273 

Theme LIV. De I'Objet ou du regime des Yerbes . . 41 .... 277 

Theme LV. (No. 1.) Du regime des Verbes. v 43 .... 280 

Theme LV. (No. 2.) Du regime des Verbes ib 282 

Theme LV. (No. 3.) Du regime des Verbes 44 .... 287 

Theme LV. (No. 4.) Du regime des Verbes 45 .... 290 

Theme LV. (No. 5.) Du regime des Verbes 46 .... 294 

Theme LV. (No. 6.) Du regime des Verbes ib 296 

Theme LVI. Du Subjonctif et de son Emploi 47 .... 303 

Theme LVII. Du Participe present et de I'Adjectif 

verbal 49 .... 308 

Theme LVIII. Du participe passe ib 314 



ERUATA. 



Page 


Line 






8 


29 


for 


J'hrivis a voire frere ei 
Le 9 Juin, f^crivis 


9 


22 




regevoir 


13 


8 




rSgnent 


ib. 


33 




recevrez 


18 


3 




en ville 


ib. 


29 




tandis qu'en ville 


20 


18 




elk 


ib. 


41 




en ville 


22 


34 




en ville 


36 


30 




plApart 


38 


39 




Ne Vavez-vous ■point I 
dit a personne ? 5 


40 


14 




le 


47 


12 




Hmedes 



read recevoir. 

, . regnent. 

. , recevrez. 
d. la ville. 

. . tandis qu'd la vilU. 

. . elles. 

. . dla ville. 

. . dla ville. 

. . plupart. 

Ne Vavez-vous dit a personne? 

. . les. 

. . remedes. 



A KEY 

TO THE 

ESSAYS OF J. V. DOTJVILLE'S 

FRENCH GRAMMAR. 



Theme I. Gram, page 18. 
Article indejini, ud, une. 

Un homme. — Une femme. — D'un homrae. — D'une femme, — A 
un homme. —A une femme. — Tin ami.— D'un ami. — A un ami. — Le 
pare. — Du pare. — Au pare. — Du parc.^ — Un beau jour. — Une se- 
maine. — Un mois. — Un roman. — Une histoire. — Une charrette.— 
Le gar^on. — Du garfon. — Au gar^on. — La maitresse de la maison. 
— De la maitresse de la maison.-^A la maitresse de la maison. — 
Les voitures. — Les charrettes. — A la campagne. — De la campagne. 
— L'ame. — De I'ame. — A I'^me. — Les dames. — Des dames. — Aux 
dames. — Les liommes. — Des hommes. — Aux hommes. — Les femmes. 
— Aux femmes. — Des femmes. — Du pain. — Du beurre. — De la 
biere. — De I'eau. — Du vin. — Du jambon. — Des oeufs. — Des le- 
gumes. 



Theme II. Gram, page ^\, 

Pt^onoms possessifs. 

Mon pere. — De mon pere. — A mon pere. — De mon fils.— A men 
frere. — A sa soeur. — Sa niece. — A son cousin. — Ta femme. — De ta 
femme. — A ta femme. — De ta femme. — Son mari. — De son raari. — 
A son mari. — Ses fiiles. — A ses filles. — -De son ami. — A son neveu. 
— Leur oncle. — Notre tante. — Votre parrain et votre marraine. — Sa 
belle-mere. — Son beau-pere. — Ton grand-pere.— Magrand'-mere.— • 
Votre mouchoir. — Sa cravate. — Son argent. — A son argent. — Leur 
jardin. — A leur jardin. — De leur maison. — A leur verger. — Mes 
parens. — Vos voisins. — Ses connaissances. — Ses oiseaux. — JSToa 

B 



'Z DES PRONOMS DEMONSTRATIFS. 

serrantes. — Vos maitres. — A leurs enfans. — Votre disposition et la 
sienne. — Mes tableaux, les votres et les leurs. — Sa voiture et la 
n6tre, — Sa maison et la mienne. — Mes livres et les votres. 



Theme III. Gram, page 23. 
Pronoms demonstratifs, 
Ce tableau.— Cet or. — Cette nuit. — Ces oranges. — Ce livre. — De 
cet oiseau. — A cet oiseau. — De cet homme. — A cette riviere. — De 
cette maison. — A ces lauriers. — ;;De ces lauriers. — A ce jour. — A 
cette heure. — Des ce moment. — A ces dames. — De ces messieurs. — 
A ces maisons.— -Le systeme de Copernic et celui de Ptolomee. — 
Cette robe et celle de votre sceur. — Les maladies de I'esprit et 
celles du corps. — Ces bracelets et ceux de sa fille. — Le climat de 
la Suisse est preferable a ceiui de Tltalie. — L'etat de la France est 
tres-different de celui de TAngleterre. — Voila deuxchevaux; celui- 
ci a quatre ans, et celui-1^ cinq.: — Voila des abrigots ; ceux-ci sont 
murs, et ceux-la ne le sont pas. — Donnez-moi ceci ou cela. — 
Gardez cela pour vous-m^me. — Je parlais de ceci, et non de cela. 



Th^me IV. Gram, page 24. 

Pronoms relatifs. 

L'homme qui parle.— La demoiselle qui danse.— La femme que 
je connais. — Les plumes que j'ai. — Le raaitre dont vous vous 
plaignez. — Les chevaux dont il m'a parle. — La personne de qui 
nous avons re^u cette nouvelle. — Le jeune homraeque vous aimez. 
— Les enfans qui sont obeissans. — Les messieurs a qui j'ecris. — 
Qui est la?— De qui parlez-vous? — Qui appelez-vous ?— Que fait- 
il?— Qui croirai-je? — Lequel de ces deux livres? — De laquelle de 
vos soeurs parlez-vous ? — A laquelle de ces maisons allez-vous ? — 
Qui est ce grand jeune homme? — Quel chemin a-t-il pris? — Quel 
livre lisez-vous?— Quelle rue est-ce?— Quel jour ont-ils fixe? — 
Quels sont leurs motifs? — A quelle eglise va-t-il? — Quoi!— Dequoi 
I'accusez-vous? — A quoi pensez-vous ? — En quoi ai-je neglig^ de 
remplir mon devoir? — Que dites-vous? 

Theme V. Gram, page 25. 

De V Article incUfini, un, une. 

Un garfon.— Une fille. — Une femme de ehambre.— Une fille 

d'honneur.— Le regard d'un enfant aimable. -La porte d'une maison. 

— J'ai ecrit a un ami.— II n'a pas parle a une dame. — Elle a une 



DE l'ARTICLE DEFINI, ETC. 3 

bonne poire. — Vous avez un bel abricot. — lis avaient un jardin, 
un pare et une riviere. — J'aurai un cheval. — Voulez-vous avoir 
une voiture ? — Nous n'aurons pas un nouveau phaeton. — J'aurais 
eu un habit bleu. — Auriez-vous eu une raontre ? — N'avait-elle 'pas 
une paire de bas de soie et une paire de souliers neufs?— Nous 
e^mes un bon diner. — N'eurent-ils pas un bon souper? — J'ai re^u 
une lettre d'une charmante demoiselle. — Donnez-moi un verre d'eau. 
— Apportez-moi un couteau, une fourchette et une cuiller. — 
Prenez un verre de vin. —Voulez-vous un peu de froraage? — J'ai 
pris une tasse de the et une tasse de cafe. — Mr, S*** nous a envoy6 
un panier d'oranges. — Nous avons re^u ce fruit d'un ami. 



Theme VI. Gram, page 26. 

De V Article defini, le, la, \\ les. 

Le pere, la mere et les enfans. — L'araour de la gloire. — La crainte 
do la honte. — Le babil des filles. — La malice des gardens. — Les 
quatre saisons de I'annee. J'ai parle a la sceur de Mr. D * * "*. — 
Ne parliez-vous pas a X enfant ? — L'honneur le defend. — Avez-vous 
donne ma lettre k I'homme ? — L'espoir du succes. — Le lis est I'em- 
bl^me de la virginite, de I'innocence, de la purete et de la can- 
deur. — Je prefere le printems h. I'ete, a I'automne et ^ I'hiver. — 
L'Est, rOuest, le Nord et le Sud, sont les quatre points cardi- 
naux. — J'ai ete ebloui par les rayons du soleil. — J'irai au village ce 
soir. — Voulez-vous venir avec moi au marche ? — Nous allAmes en- 
semble ^ la campagne. — La crainte de la mort etl'amour de la gloire 
sont naturels k tous les hommes. — Coupez la corde en deux. — Por- 
tez ceci aux femmes. — Envoyez cela aux hommes. — Je viens de 
France et d' Italic. — II reviendra d'Espagne en deux mois. — Cela 
appartient a Jean ou a Pierre. — De Paris a Amsterdam. II sert de 
jouet k tout le monde. — Eile le dit k tout le monde. — lis en donn^- 
rent k tous les enfans. 



Theme VII. Gram, page 28. 
De V Article partitlf, du, de la, de 1', des. 
Donnez-moi du pain et du beurre.— Avez-vous du roti ? — Non ; 
mais nous avons d'excellent bouilli. — Voulez-vous du gras ou du 
maigre ? — Un peu de I'un et de I'autre, s'il vous plait. — Si vous avez 
du fromage, apportez-m'en. — Nous avons des porames, des oranges 
et des citrons. — Voila des framboises et des fraises. — Mettez de 
I'huile et du vinaigre dans la salade. — Mangez du poisson. — Vous 
servirai-je de la sauce ? — Servez du champagne a Monsieur. — En 
avez-vous offert a Madame? — Oui ; mais elle prefere de I'eau. — 



4 DU GENRE DES SUBSTANTIFS. 

Voulez-Tous prendre du the? — Oui ; j'en prendrai avec plaisir.— 
Servez-vous du sucre et du lait. — Nous avions de belles p^ches et 
de beaux abricots, cette ann6e. — lis vendent de bonne encre, de 
bonnes plumes et de bon papier. — La France produit du vin, des 
oranges et des olives.— Je vous ai apport6 du beau drap que vous 
m'aviez demande. — Vous avez de superbe raisin, voulez-vous m'en 
donner 1 — Si vous en voulez, achetez-en. — La femme a-t-elle ap- 
port6 de la creme ? — Non ; elle u'a pas pu en tronver. — Je vous 
serais oblige, si vous pouviez m'en procurer. — Avez-vous un fusil?-— 
Non ; j'en avais autrefois deux tres-bons ; mais je n'en ai point a 
present, — Allez-vous au pare ? — Non; nous en venons. 



Th^me VIII. Gram, page 33. 
Du Genre des Suhstantifs, 
Les Franpais et les Anglais ont eu un terrible combat naval.— 
Avez-vous ete a la comedie cette saison? Non ; mais je vais ce 
soir a I'opera. — Nous avons de bien bonne eau-de-vie, en voulez- 
vous? Qui, donnez-m'en, s'il vous plait. — lime faut un chapeau 
neuf. — Nous all^mes tous dans un bateau. — ^Vendez-vous du cafe? 
Non ; nous ne vendons que du the. — II avait un beau cheval. — 
File n'a pas une voix fort harmonieuse. — C'etait un oubli. — Don- 
nez-moi une pomme et une poire.— Pretez-lui une aiguille. — La 
bonte est la base de son caractere. — Ma soeur est sortie. — La nation 
Frauf aise est tres-puissante. — Une mauvaise noix. — Oil est la pri- 
son de Fleet? — Elle chanta une jolie chanson. — La clef est sur la 
fatile. — Les enfans sont dans la cour. — J'ai une dent qui branle, 
qui me fait un mal terrible. — Cette eau n'est pas bonne. — La fin du 
livre. — C'est la premiere fois. — N'avaient-ils pas un pare et une 
riviere dans la foret? — Cette loi sera abolie. — La main de cette 
demoiselle.— Attendez, monsieur, maman vient. — La moisson n'est 
pas encore finie. — II a eu une mauvaise nuit.— La mer est agitee. — 
II ne craint pas la mort. — Voil^ sa portion. — La soif est pire que 
la faim. — La vertu est louable.— Un grand malheur leur arriva en 
Amerique.— Son bonheur n'est pas k envier. — Nous eiimes mal au 
cceur pendant tout le trajet. — Elle a fait un bon choix. — Appelez le 
garfon.— L'horizon est rouge.— Sur mon honneur. — II y avait pres 
d'un million d'hommes. — C'est un prix enorme. — Ne buvez pas 
cela, c'est du poison. — Un grand age.— Elle n'aura pas un grand 
salaire. — Le royaume de Naples. — N'avez-vous pas une cage? — 
Voulez-vous me prater le Directoire de Londres? — Cette creme est 
aigre. — Un encrier d'argent. — U me conta une longue histoire. — 
— Je n'ai pas une bonne meraoire. — Elle lut une page de la Bible. 
— C'est un athee. — Le cimetiere de la paroisse.— N'etait-elle pas 
dans sa voiture?— Une belle nuit.— II y eut un incendie la semaine 



PLURIEL DES SUBSTANTIFS, ETC. 5 

derni^re. — Tin intervalle de deux ou trois jours. — Quel merite y 
a-t-il a cela? — Aliens au spectacle. — Irons-nous au parterre? — 
Voulez-vous rae preter un parapluie ? — 11 regna un profoiid silence, 
quand le tonnerre se fit entendre. — ^Le comte d'Esjex n'est pas si 
peuple que celui de Middlesex. — Elle avait raal au c6te. — On tint 
un comite. — Nous avons eu un bel ete. — Donnez-moi un pen de ce 
p^te. — Le traite est fait. — C'est un usurpateur.— Elle etait bonjuge. 
— Parlez-vous Francais ? — Le cuivre n'est pas cher. — Un beau 
chene. — Une jeune vigne. 



Theme IX. Gram, page 35. 
Formation du Pluriel des Suhstaniifs. 
Ses filles sont jeunes et belles. — Les fleurs de ces jardins sont 
presque fletries. — Les palais des rois de France et d'Angleterre. — 
Ces lis appartiennent a nies petites sceurs. — Toutes ces noix sont 
niauvaises. — Les enfans aiment a jouer. — Y a-t-il de beaux ap- 
partemens a louer? — Elle a eu mal aux dents toute la nuit. — Ces 
deux ponts sont les plus beaux de rEurope. — N'entendez-vous 
point le chant des oiseaux ? — Leurs voix ne sont pas tres-douces. — 
Les bijoux de sa sosur sont niagnitiques. — Les dieux des paiens 
etaient meprisables.— Quels lieux charmans ! — Ne vend-elle pas 
des cliapeaux de dame ? Non ; elle vend des choux et des navets. 
— Y a-t-il beaucoup de filous k Paris? Non; pas autant qu'a Lon- 
dres. — II y a plus de fous que de sages. — lis avaient deux chevaux 
Anglais. — Avez-vous vu les betes sauvages ? — II offrit des eventails 
aux dames. — J'ai mal aux yeux. — L'ltalie est sous un des plus 
beaux ciels de I'Europe. — Mes deux aieuls ont rempli les premieres 
charges. — La posterite admirera les victoires de ces generaux. — 
Ou sont les terres de vos parens ?~Ne sont-ce pas la les jouets de 
nos enfans? — Avez-vous vu les catacombes? — Donnez moi mes 
ciseaux.— On lui lit ses funerailles avant-hier. — Ses moeurs sont 
corrompues. — N'avez-vous pas les mouchettes ?- Vos freres oiit 
ete tres-imprudens. — II a plusieurs jolis tableaux. — Les vivres sont- 
ils chers dans ce pays ? — Y avait-il de belles dames? — Dites-lui de 
m'apporter deux petits couteaux et deux petites fourchettes. 



Theme X. Gram, page 38. 
Formation du Feminin des Adjectifs, Ssc 

Sa femme est grande, belle et bien faite. — Leur maison est. trop 
petite. — Cette eglise est mal batie. — Ma sceur etait cherie de lui.— 
Cette femme a ete tres-imprudente.— Ne lui etait-elle pas fidele?™- 
Cette pomme n'est pas assez mure. --La viande est froide. — La route 



6 PLURIEL DES ADJEOTIFS^ ETC. 

au nord de ce pays est mauvaise, peu siire, et tres-dangereuse sur 
les montagnes escarpees. — La porte sera-t-elle ouverte?— J'ai lu une 
histoire tres-amusante. — Cette robe est-elle neuve? — Sa soeur n'est 
pas fort active ; mais elle est affable, sensible et bien instruite. — 
]^me p*** a ete tres-malheureuse. — N^est-elle pas vertueuse ? 
— Elle a toujours ete trompeuse et jalouse, — Cette vache n'est pas 
tres-grasse. — Cette loi est crueile et barbare. — C'est une ancienne 
coutunie. — Je crois qu'une femme buveuse est la pire chose qu'il y 
ait au monde. — M^^^^ q*** etait une charmante actrice, et une can- 
tatrice delicieuse ; elle avait surtout Ihumeur la plus benigne.^ — 
IN^ous vimes une tres-belle femme, qui avait une echarpe blanche. — 
Votre cousine sera une tres-bonne chanteuse. — Avez-vous vu ma 
fleur favorite, la rose si fralche et si douce? — Cette demoiselle est 
si sotte. — Cette nouvelle est fausse.^ — Je vous ^crirai uoe tres- 
longue lettre. — ^11 parait une nouvelle mode tous les ans.^ — C'est 
Fopinion publique. — Elle avait une vieille femme avec elle. — II porte 
toujours un vieil habit. — C'est un tres-habile jeune homme, — La 
peinture sera bient6t seche, — C'etait une pure defaite. — Cette eau 
est-elle claire ? — N'est-elle pas attentive] — Ces vieilles hardes ne 
sont bonnes a rien. 



Theme XI. Gram, page 39. 

Formation du Pluri'el des Adjectifs. 

II a de grands talens. — Ses amis seront bien aises de la voir.— 
Les jeunes gens font de grandes depenses. — Ces dames sont si gra- 
cieuses qu^elles sont admirees de tout le monde. — Vos freres ont ete 
tres-heureux, et vos soeurs extremementmalheureuses. — Ces femmes 
sont cruelles et vindicatives. — Vos eleves sont-ils tres-diligens? 
jS^on; ils sont extremement paresseux. — Mes domestiques ne sont 
pas si lents que les votres. — Toutes nos brebis sont tres-grasses. — 
Sont-ce \k tous vos enfans ? Non; j'ai deux jolies petites filJes a la 
campagne. — Ses chevaux ne sont pas si beaux que les miens.— Nous 
avons vu les deux nouveaux opera. — Les officiers generaux sont- 
ils assembles ? — Tous les hommes sont egaux apres la mort. — Les 
deux belles dames qui viurent nous voir sont mortes. — Ces perdrix 
sont tres-maigres. — Toutes ces avelines sont mauvaises. — Ces his- 
toires ne sont point du tout amusantes. — Ont-ils achete les cinq 
maisons blanches dont je vous ai parle I'autre jour? — Ces tables ne 
sont pas neuves. 



Theme XII. Gram, page 42. 
Degres de Signification ou de Qualification dans les Adjectifs. 
La simplicite de la nature est plus agreable que tous les embel- 



DES ADJECTIFS DE NOMBRE CARDINAUX. 7 

lissemens de I'art. — La marine Anglaiseest plus puissante que vous 
ne croyez. — M^^'^ § * * * gerait beaucoup plus estimee, si elle 
6tait raoins liere de sa beauts. — La rose n'est pas moins belle que 
latuiipe; mais la tuiipe est plus brillante. — ^Est-il moins sujet au 
mat de tete qu'il n'etait ? — Je suis plus 4ge que vous. — Mr. 
S * * * a plus de soixante ans. — Je ne croyais pas qu'il eut plus de 
cinquante ans. — La consoraniatiou de ble a Londres n'est pas plus 
de six millions soixaiite-dix-neuf mille boisseaux par an. — L'Angle- 
terre a plus de deux cents vaisseaux de guerre. — Ce pays n'a jamais 
moins de dix-huit mille matelots. — Je croirais qu'il n'y avait pas 
moins de douze cents personnes au bal hier au soir. — Votre mere 
n'est pas si vieille qu'elle le parait. — Paris n'est pas si peuple 
ni si grand que Londres. — La Tamise est beaucoup plus pro- 
fonde que la Seine. — Votre fille ne sera jamais si grande que 
vous. — Nous n'aurons pas autant de prunes cette annee que 
nous en efjiiies I'annee derniere ; mais je crois que nous aurons 
plus de poraraes. — Ce jeune Monsieur est autant estime que son 
frere est m6prise. — Ce champagne n'est pas meilleur que le mien. — 
Ces enfans sont pires que vous ne pensez. — II parle beaucoup 
mieux qu'il u'ecrit. — Cette peche est-elle meilleure que I'autre ? — Les 
edifices publics k Paris sont les plus beaux du monde. — Vous don- 
nerez cette parure de perles a la plus aimable et a la plus habile des 
trois. — Quoique cette demoiselle soit la plus accomplie et la plus 
belle que j'aie jamais vue, je puis vous assurer qu'elle n'est pas ma 
meilleure amie. — Les ignorans sont plus vains que les autres. — Vous 
faites de plus grands progres que je n'adrais pense. — La Chine est 
le plus grand empire du monde. — Napoleon etait un des princes les 
plus absolus qui aient jamais regne. — Les hommes les plus savans 
ne sont pas souvent les plus vertueux. — Les Alpes sont tres-hautes 
et tres-escarpees. — Le style de Fenelon est tres-riche et tres-harmo- 
nieux. — Londres est la ville la plus riche de I'Europe. — Dieu est 
infininient misericordieux. — L'or est le plus pur, le plus precieux, 
le plus ductile, et, apres la platine, le plus pesant de tons les 
metaux. 



Theme XIII. Gram, page 46. 
I>es Adjectifs de Nomhre Cardinaux, 
L'infanterie se monte a cent vingt-six hommes. — II nous doit 
mille quatre cent cinquante-six livres sterling. — Combien de jours 
y avez-vous ete detenu? Cent. — Combien de fusils ont~ils cora- 
roandes ? A peu pres mille. — Napoleon alia en Hussie, i'an mil 
huit cent treize ; et Louis dix-huit revint en France en mil huit cent 
quinze. — George quatre fut couronne en mil huit cent vingt, ou en 
mil huit cent vingt et un. — L'armee consiste de deux cent cinquante 
mille quatre cent vingt-cinq hommes, avec trois cent vingt-huit 



8 DES ADJECTIFS DE NOMBRE ORDINAUX. 

pieces d'artillerie. — Combien de milles compte-t-on d'ici a la tour? 
— Soixante et un ou soixante-deux. — Je re^us hier cinq mille six 
cent quarante-six livres huit seheUings onze sous. — Nous ^tions 
vingt-huit personnes k table au dernier diner ; mais nous ne serons 
pas plus de quinze au prochain.— Voulez-vous me preter cent vingt 
et une livres seize schellings ? Je le ferais de tout mon coeur, si je 
le pouvais ; mais j'ai paye ce matin deux cent quatre-vingt-une 
livres, que je devais, etje n'ai pas un schelling de reste. — Quatre- 
vingt-onze livres et neuf livres font cent livres. — Soixante et uu 
schellings et neuf schellings font trois livres dix schellings. — 
Nous avons a present trois cents superbes fregates et deux cents 
vaisseaux de ligne pr^ts a faire voile — II y aura cent vingt dames ; 
mais je ne crois pas qu'il y ait plus de quatre vingts messieurs. — 
Nous etions six cent quatre-vingts au dernier bal; mais nous ne 
serons pas plus de trois cents au prochain. — Combien de dames y 
aura-t-il ? Cent. — Seulement cent! D'ou vient cela? Vous en 
avez invite quatre cents. — Je vais vous donner un repu pour quatre- 
vingt-une livres, si vous voulez. — Ne lui donnates-vous point huit 
cents livres, douze schellings ? Non ; il n'en avait besoin que de 
six cents. — Ce fameux acteur raourut I'an mil sept cent quatre-vingt. 
— Cet homme est riche de deux millions sterling. — II y eut 
qtiatre-vingt-quinze hommes de tues et trente-deux de blesses dans 
les deux premieres batailles ; mais il y en eut neuf cents de tues et 
sept cents de blesses dans la derniere. 



Theme XIV. Graw. page 50. 

Des Adjectifs de Nomhre Ordinaux. 

George trois etait bon, pacifique et bieuveillant; tandis que 
Napoleon premier etait guerrier et ambitieux. — Avez-vous vu 
Charles dix k la revue, ce matin? — J'ecrivis a votre frere, en 
Irlande, a ce sujet, le 9 Juin ; mais il me repondit, le 20 Juillet, 
qu'il avait intention de partir pour Paris, le premier d'Aoiit, si ses 
affaires le lui permettaient. — Votre lettre du dix d'Avril nous est 
parvenue le 15 de Mai. — Elle vint deux fois, hier; mais la pre- 
miere fois qu'elle passa, j'etais absent; et la seconde fois j'6tais si 
occupe que je ne pus pas lui parler.— lis y vont onze ou douze fois 
par an. — 11 nous envoie les papiers cinq ou six fois par semaine. — 
Combien de fois y avez-vous ete ? — Cent fois. — Voici la vingt et 
unieme ou la vingt-deuxieme lettre que j'ai recue aujourd'hui. — La 
personue qui vient de frapper k la porte a I'air extremement malade. 
— ^Elle est venue, au moins, cinquante fois, sans pouvoir vous 
parler. — lie biea, dites-lui que, si elle veut revenir, Vendredi 
prochain, h sept heures du soir, je la verrai sans faute. — J'ai fait 
cela mille fois. — N'est-il venu personne me demander aujourd'hui ? 



DES PRONOMS PERSONNELS. 9 

— Oui; il y a deux messieurs qui vous attenclent dans la salle. — Ou 
demeure sa mere ? Dans Oxford-street, No. Tl ou 73. — Je vous 
demande pardon, c'est dans Parliament -street, No. 90. — Votre 
cousine ne demeure-t-elle pas, Cheapside, No. 31 ? Non ; c'est 
dans King-street, No. 12. — Si vous voulez aller dansle Strand, No. 
41, vous verrez quelqu'un qui desire vous parler. — Nous avons 
demeure quinze ans dans la cite, et vingt et un a i'autre bout de la 
ville. — Mon pere vient tous les matins a la ville, et il retourne, le 
soir, h. la campagne, apres avoir fait sept ou huit visites qu'il ne 
manque jamais de rendre. — Londres, le 12 Septembre, 1826. — 
Mardi, vingt-quatre. — Venez Vendredi ou Samedi. 



Theme XV. Gram, page 53. 

Des Pronoms personnels je, ta, il, elle, nous, vous, ils, elles, 
employes comme sujet du Verbe. 

Vous parlez trop vite. — II lit tres-bien. — Elle ne danse pas bien. 
— Ils viendront si le terns le permet. — Est-elle belle? — ^Pieut-il? — 
Oui ; il a plu toute la matinee. — Je crois qu'il fera beau temps 
aujourd'hui. — Irez-vous a la comedie ce soir? — Non ; je vais a la 
campagne. — Si vous ne venez pas passer la journee avec moi, je 
ne vous invitcrai plus. — Avez-vous tini votre lettre? Non; pas 
encore. — Ne vous a-t-il point envoye votre habit? — Oui; je viens 
de le repevoir. — Combien vous a-t-il cotite? — Six guinees et demie. 
— Vend-elle des gants? — A-t-elle dejeune? — Parlez-vous Francais? 
— A quelle heure dinent-ils? — A cinq heures. — Quelle heure est-il 
k present?- Trois heures et demie.— Quel est, je vous prie, le 
chemin pour aller au pare? — Lui et votre soeur y etaieut. — Vous et 
moi, nous irons ensemble, — Eux et votre fille ailerent, hier au soir, 
k I'opera Anglais. — Est-ce lui qui etait si fache ? — Etaient-ce 
eux qui frappaient a la porte? — Non; c'etait moi. — Leur frere est 
plus grand que moi ; mais il n'est pas si tort que moi. — Lui seul 
pent faire cela. — Ce ne sera ni lui ni moi. — Cette dame soutient 
que cette proposition est vraie ; et moi, je pretends le contraire.- — 
Vous me elites qu'elle est raorte, et lui, il dit que cela n'est pas. — 
Nous irons faire un tour de promenade, ce soir, vous, votre mere 
et moi. — Moi, j'ai dit cela! — Lui, il fera cela! — Je ne le crois pas. 
— Moi, reveler le secret de mon ami! — Non, jamais. — Qui vous 
parlait? — Lui ou M'"^ ^y * * * — Vous aimez la viile, et moi, 
j'aime la campagne. — Regardez ce magnifique edifice ; il reunit la 
grace a la beaute, et lelegance k la simpiicite. — Voila un beau 
poirier ; il fleurit tous les printems, cependant il produit rarement 
aucun fruit. 



10 DES PRONOMS PERSONNELS. 

Theme XVI. Gram, page 56. 

Des Pronoms petsonnels me, te, le, la, lui, leur, y, en, em- 
ployes comme objet du Verbs. 

Avez-vous vu Charles dix?— Oui; je I'ai vu plusieurs fois ; 
mais je ne lui ai jamais parl6.-- Je les connais tres-bien de vue. — 
La croyez-vous ? — Negligez les plaisirs de la vie ; les peines qui 
les suivent prouvent leur vanit6. — Jupiter irrite que Saturne lui 
teadit des pieges, prit les armes centre lui, le chassa de son 
royaume, et le forca a quitter le ciel.— L'admirez-vous? Oui; et 
je I'aime de tout mon coeur. — Pour lui plaire, il ne faut jamais la 
flatter. — Je vous ecrirai dans deux ou trois jours. — Ne le voyez- 
vous point quelquefois? — Oui; je le rencontre frequemment h. la 
bourse. — La prosperite nous fait des amis, et I'adversite les ^prouve. 
— Y avez-vous pense?— Non; je I'ai tout-a-fait oublie. — Pensez-y 
pour Diraanche prochain. — N'y pensez pas davantage. — Quand la 
verite paralt dans tout son eclat, personne ne peut y resister. — 
Dites-moi la verite. — Ne lui dites pas que vous m'avez vu. — Ne 
me parlez pas. — Vos chiens ont faim et soif, donnez-leur k manger 
et a boire. — Je m'adresserai a vous. — Ne vous fiez pas k lui. — 
Elle vint a moi, et me pria d'aller avec elle. — Vous ne pensez 
jamais a moi. — 11 a affaire a vous.— Nous aurons recours k elle, 
si nous avons besoin de quelque chose. — C'est a vous et k moi. — 
lis en appelerent k moi. — 11 n'y fait jamais attention. — Cet argent 
est a moi.— Je vous pardonne, et k vous et a elle, parce que j'espere 
que vous vous comporterez mieux a I'avenir. — Voulez-vous faire 
cela pour moi? — 11 depend de vous de meriter son estime. — Je n'ai i 
pas pitie d'eux. — J'ai recours k eux. — Venez me parler. — Allez vous I 
habiller. — Hepondez-moi. — Allez a lui. — Ecrivez4ui. — Pardonnez- ; 
leur.— Ecoutez-moi. — Pr^tez-nous ce livre.— Je ne saurais, il faut i 
que je le rende aujourd'hui.— Cela vous appartient, a vous ou k i 
votre soeur. — Ce n'etait pas a vous, mais k monsieur que je parlais. ] 
— S'est-il plaint de moi? — Nous nous moquions de lui. — Je m'ea 
^tonne. — En ^tes-vous bien aise? — Non ; j'en suis bien f^che. — La ; 
vie est un don de Dieu : en disposer est un crime. — Gardez ceci j 
pour moi, et prenez cela pour vous.— Pisistrate dit d'un homme ; 
ivre qui avait parle centre lui : je ne suis pas plus fAche centre lull 
que je ne le serais centre un aveugle qui se serait jete centre moi. | 
— Que servent les richesses a un avare] II n'en fait aucun usage.) 



Theme XVll. Gram, page 59. j 

Des Pronoms possessifs. /I 

Men pere, ma mere et mes soeurs I'aimaient tendrement. — Sai 

femme est tres-laide. — J'ai parle a son mari. — Son esperance estj 



DES PRONOMS D^MONSTRATIFS. 11 

mal fondee. — Son fils n'est pas fort savant. — Quel age a sa belle- 
mere ? — Son esprit, ses talens, son honnetete et son bon nature!, 
le font admirer de tout le monde. — Mes principes, mon gout pour 
I'etude et mon amour de la retraite, m'ont fait choisir une vie re- 
tiree. — Si vous desirez d'obtenir ma faveur et ma protection, ne 
parlez pas mal de moi. — II a re^u ces presens de mon oncle et de 
ma tante. — Enverrai-je ce faisan k votre ami? — A-t-elle perdu tout 
sonbien? — Nous attendons une lettre de notre correspondant de- 
main. — N'avez-vous point encore re9U de nouvelles de votre aimable 
cousine ? — Tous leurs projets ont echoue. — Votre grand-pere vit-il 
encore ? Oui ; mais ma grand'-raere est morte.- — Ailons, amis, vo- 
lons a la gloire. — Comment vous portez-vous, mes enfans? — Faites 
mes amities a vos soeurs. — Votre mere y est-elle? jSon ; mais mon 
pere y est, et il sera bien aise de vous voir. — Vos nieces apprennent- 
elles le Fran9ais? — On ne peut pas tou jours satisfaire ses desirs. — 
Ma maison et la votre sont tres-mauvaises ; mais je crois que la 
mienne est un peu meilleure que la votre. — Est-ce son humeur ou 
la votre qui vous emp^che de bien vivre ensemble ]— Si c'est la 
votre, il vous est aise d'y apporter remede, en prenant sur vous- 
meme; si c'est la sienne, redoublez d attention, de complaisance, 
et de bons procedes ; il est tres-rare que ce moyen ne reussisse pas, 
— Tous les tableaux sont arrives d'ltalie, excepte les votres, les 
siens et les miens, qui viendront demain. — Nous savons quels 
sont vos amusemens a la ville, tandis que vous n'avez nuUe idee 
des notres a la campagne ; mais je vous assure que les notres sont 
infiniment preferables aux votres. — I!s nous ont rendu notre musique, 
ob. est la leur? — Notre champ est cultive, le leur ne Test pas. — Ses 
moeurs sont bonnes, les leurs sont corrompues. — Mes livres sont 
neufs, les siens sont vieux. — Portez ceci a mon fils, et ceia au 
v6tre. — Vous pouvez euvoyer ces pistolets a leur maison de cam- 
pagne, si vous voulez ; mais non pas a la mienne. — Eile a appris 
sa lefon ; et lui, il n'a pas appris la sienne. — II a trouve une de 
vos cravates parmi les siennes. — Une de mes cravates, dites-vous ? 
montrez-la-moi. Non, ce n'est pas k moi, c'est a mon frere.— J'ai 
vu hier un de vos compatriotes. — Voila un de ses tours. — Voulez- 
vous porter cette montre a votre soeur ? Je crois que c'est a elle. — 
Est-ce-la votre surtout] — Non; ce n'est pas a moi: je n'en ai pas 
apporte. — Je croyais que c'etait a vous.— Avez-vous reellement 
entendu cela ? Oui; je I'ai entendn de mes propres oreilles. — Que 
ne me croyez-vous, quand je vous dis que je I'ai vu de mes propres 
yeux? 



Theme XVIII. Gram, pageG\, 
Des Pr ononis cUmonstratifs. 
Ce portrait est de toute beaute. — Le terns de la vie est court, 



12 DES PHOI^OMS E^El^ATIFS. 

celui de la beaut6 Test encore davaiitage. — Ces p^ches ne sont pas 
aussi mures que celles que j'achetai hier. — Nous donnarues I'argent 
a cet liomrae. — Kegardez le bee de cet oiseau. — Y a-t-il loin d'ici 
k cette maison 1 — Le bonheur Sterne! est infiniment au-dessus de 
celui qu'un horame peut posseder dans ce monde. — Le climat de 
i'Angleterre n'est pas comparable k celui de la Suisse. — Cette haine, 
long-tems contenue, eclata, et fut la malheureuse source de ces 
terribles evenemens. — Quelle robe lui preterai-je? — Celle que vous 
montr^tes k M^"^ g***^ I'annee derniere. — Je viens d'acbeter ces 
deux parapluies de soie; celui-ci me co^te vingt-quatre schellings, 
et celui-la trente. — Ne parlez de cela k personne. — Si elle fait cela, 
elle s'en repentira. — Ceci est-il bon a manger?— Cela est tres-mau- 
Tais a boire. — Portez ceci a Madame, et gardez cela pour vous- 
meme. — Que veut dire oeci? — Voyez comme ces hommes et ces 
femmes jouent ensemble ! — ^Cyrus commen^a la monarchie de Perse, 
et Ninus celle d'Assyrie. — Vous ne devriez pas vous fier k ceux 
qui sont interesses a vous tromper, — II peut conter ces histoires k 
ceux qui voudront bien I'ecouter. 



Theme XIX. Gram, page ^Q. 
Des Pronoms relatifs. 
Le monsieur qui est a la fenetre. — La dame qui vient de sortir. — ' 
L'oiseau qui chante sur cet arbre est tr^s-beau. — C'est le jeune 
homme que vous m'avez recommande. — Les pommes que vous avez 
apportees sont toutes g^tees. — Renvoyez-moi le dictionnaire que 
je vous ai pret6. — Les enfans qui sont obeissans sont aimes de tout 
ie monde. — Qui vous a donne cela? — Qui avez-vous rencontr6 dans 
la rue? — -A qui ailez-vous ^crire? — De qui avez-vous reyu ces 
lettres? — A qui desirez-vous parler? — A qui est cette maison? — A 
qui sont ces gants] — Lequel de vos freres apprend le Francais? — A 
laquelle de ces maisons voulez-vous aller? — De laquelle de ses 
soeurs a-t-il re^u des nouvelles? — Voilk du vin rouge et du via 
blanc, duquel vou!ez-vous? — Quelle faute a-t-elie commise pour 
la punir si severement? — Quelles sont les nouvelles aujourd'hui? — 
Quels sont ses motifs? — Quelle satisfaction! — A quel hotel allez- 
vous? — De quelle grammaire vous servez-vous? — Qu'ai-je fait? — 
Que veut-il? — Que vous disait-elle? — Quefaisaient-ils l^?- Qu'avez 
vous fait de votre argent? — En quoi ai-je n6glige de remplir mon 
devoir? — De quoi I'accuse-t-on?^ — A quoi s'applique son frere? — 
A quoi visent-ils? — L'bomrae dont le g6nie est grand et sublime 
comme la nature. — La dame dont vous admiriez tant I'esprit et les 
talens. — Napoleon dont on vantait tant la grandeur d'^me, et k la 
valeur de qui les Fran9ais doivent tant de victoires, est mort a 
I'^ge de quarante-cinq ans. — L'homme dont la couduite estreguliere 



DES PRONOMS INDEFINIS. 13 

et dont les actions sont irreprochables, est cent fois plus heureux 
que celui qui passe sa vie dans la dissipation et I'iniquite. — C'est 
une ferame aux caprices de qui je ne me soumettrai jamais. — Nous 
avons des fleurs etrangeres dont I'odeur est tres-agreable. — N'est- 
ce pas la la demoiselle dont votre mere se plaint? La providence, 
sans le secours de laquelle nous ne pouvons reussir. — La fille de 
Minos donna un fil a Thesee, au moyen duquel il sortit du la- 
byrinthe. — Les Alpes sur le sommet desquelles regnent des neiges 
et des glaces perpetuelles presentent, au soleil couchant, le spec- 
tacle le plus imposant et le plus magnifique que Toeil ait jamais 
contemple. — La personne dont vous aviez si grand' pitie est morte. — 
La bonne reputation dont iljouit. — Avez-vous vu la maison dont 
je vous ai parle ? — L'argent dont j'avais besoin etait pour le 
soulagement de cette malheureuse famille.-^Voilace dont je voulais 
vous parler. — La personne a laquelle je me fiais le plus m'a 
trompe. — C'est un malheur auquel je ne m'attendais pas. — Les 
dames de qui j'ai refu cette nouvelle sont allees en Amerique. — 
La paresse est un vice auquel les jeunes gens sont tres-enclins. — 
Si j'avais su I'etat deplorable auquel elle est reduite, je lui aurais 
prete de l'argent. — Les etudes ausquelies il s'applique, ne sont pas 
fort difficiles. — C'est le monsieur apres qui je courais. — Londres et 
Paris sont deux grands theatres sur lesquels les horames sont 
toujours masques.- Qui va la? — A qui m'adresserai-je ? — Quel 
terrible accident! — Quel est votre avis sur cette affaire? — Que 
faites-vous la? — Le theme, que je vous ai donne k ecrire, est-il 
trop difficile? — Le vin, que nous bumes hier, n'etait pas fort bon. — 
C'est une demoiselle, qui chante bien, qui joue de plusieurs in- 
strumens, et qui est admiree de tout le monde. — N'est-il pas 
nialheureux cet homrae qui aime la ville et habite la campagne? 



Theme XX. Gram, page 71. 
Des Pronoms Indejinis. 

Y est-on bien servi? — Qui; tres-bien. — On est toujours mieux 
chez sol qu'ailleurs. — Vous refevrez deux lettres ; dans Tune 
vous trouverez un billet de change, et, dans I'autre, deux billets 
de banque. — M""* L * * * m'a dit que votre mere se porte beau- 
coup mieux. — Mon pere fut attaque par quatre voleurs, en re- 
tournant chez lui, hier au soir. — Sa soeur fut malheureusement 
mordue par un chien enrage.— Parle-t-on de paix? — On attribue 
Tinvention de la poudre a canon a Berthold Scherward de Fribourg. 
— On dit que les Fran^ais ne reussiront pas en Espagne. — On dit 
que les Espagnols ont gagne la derniere bataille. — On me le dit 
hier. — Que dit-on de nouveau? — Kien. — Croit-on que le Marechal 
N * * * soit acquitte? Non ; on croit qu'il sera condamne k mort. — • 

c 



14 

Si I'on faisait la paix, j'irais en France. — On apprend mieux ce que 
Ton comprend, que ce que Ton ne comprend pas.— Faites cela, ou 
Ton vous punira. — On le lui a mande. — Apportez vos papiers et on 
les examinera. — On fait souvent courir de faux bruits. — Que dit-on, 
en Angleterre, de la guerre d'Espagne? — On m'enverra du fruit de 
la campagne. — On aime une femme aimable, on la cherit, on 
I'adore. — Quelqu'un me I'a dit. — Eh bien, quiconque vous I'a dit 
avait tort. — Quelqu'un lui a-t-il ecrit? — 'rout le monde le croit. 
II n'est venu personne aujourd'hui. — Nous n'avons vu aucun de ses 
amis. — EUe ne sait rien. — Cnacun a sa maniere de penser et d'agir. 
— Chaque pays a ses lois et ses usages. — Nul homaie n'est exempt 
d'erreur. — 11 n'y avait pas une seule dame. — La m^me chose ne 
plait pas en tout tems. — Plusieurs Je disent. — II ne fait rien. — 
Quand on s*applique k plusieu»'s sciences k la fois, on reussit rarement 
dans aucune. — Telle ou telle chose. — Quelque merite qu'il ait, il 
ne reussira jamais.— Quelques services que vous m'ayez rendus, 
j'en ai 6te reconnaissant. — Quelles que soient votre naissance et 
votre Elevation, vous ne devez mepriser personne.— Quelque folles 
que soient les modes, on les suit. — Quoi qu'il arrive, donnez- 
m'en avis. — Tous les horames et toutes les femmes sont mortels. — 
Tons leurs amis y etaient-ils? — Tout ce qu'e'le dit n'est pas vrai. — 
Ne parlez pas mal d'autrui. — Un autre ne se serait pas comporte 
de cette maniere. — lis viendront tous les deux. — Vous pouvez I'un 
ou I'autre me rendre ce service. — lis ne savent quoi faire, ni I'un 
ni I'autre. 



Theme XXTI. Gram, page 167. 

De Viisage des Negatives, ne, pas, point, &c. 

Les demoiselles S*** n'excellent pas dans la musique. — Vos freres 
n'ont pas fait de progres dans I'ltalien. — Ne la connaissez-vous 
point? — Elle avoua qu'elle ne m'aurait pas parle, si elle n'avait pas 
eu besoin d'argent. — 11 est tres-desagreable de ne pas parler Fran- 
cais. — Que j'etais contrarie de ne pouvoir aller avec eux! — Com- 
ment se porte Madame votre mere? — Pas tres-bien, Madame ; elle 
eut encore une rechute hier. — Passerez-vous chez Lady D*** au- 
jourd'hui? Non, monsieur; je crois qu'elie est allee a la campagne; 
de plus, je n'ai pas le plaisir de la connaitre. — Qu'elle m'ecrive ou 
uon, je n'irai pas. — Voulez-vous me donner une pomme, ma chere? 
Nenni, monsieur, elles ne sont pas k moi, — Le proverbe, ** point 
de vertu, point de bonheur," n'est pas si vrai que celui-ci, ** point 
d'argent, point de Suisse." — II n'est pas tres-recherche dans ses 
habits, quoiqu'il se mette toujours tres-proprement. — Je ne puis 
aller les chercher. — Ses parens sont dans un etat tres-miserable, ils 
n'ont point d'argent, point de moyens d'en gagner, et point d'amis 



DE LA NEGATIVE NE. 15 

sur qui ils puissent compter. — He bien ! je leur donnerai quelques 
secours, non que je croie qu'ils le meritent, mais pour I'amour de 
leurs enfans. — C'etait un fruit delicieux; mais nous n'en avonsplus. 
-^^Vous ne le verrez plus apres cette semaine. — Mon petit garpon n'a 
pas plus de six ou sept ans. — lis ne sont pas plus avances qu'ils 
etaient quand ils vinrent a la ville. — Elle ne sait ni lire ni ecrire. — 
Vous n'avez mis ni sucre ni lait dans mon cafe. — Je ne I'aime ni ne la 
hais. — Elle ne me plait, ni ne me deplait. — Ils ne s'en soucient pas, 
ni moi non plus. — Pourquoi dites-vous cela, puisque vous savez 
qu'elle ne parle pas Anglais ? — Je n'ose le lui dire. — II y a des 
gens qui ne cessent de se plaindre de la fortune, quoiqu'ils soient 
combles de ses faveurs. — Le terns passe ne revient jamais, et un 
mot, une fois prononce, ne pent se rappeler. — Ne parlez jamais raal 
d'autrui. — Je n'approuve nuUement sa conduite. — Aimez vos enfans, 
ne les bl^niez jamais sans raison, et ne les reprimandez jamais avec 
colere. — II est noble de ne jamais tromper personne. Y consen- 
tirez-vous? Non ; jamais. — Jamais je n'ai vu rien de semblable.— 
Jamais homme n'eut plus de succes avec si peu de merite. — Je ne 
bois jamais d'eau. 



Theme XXIII. Gram, page 170. 

De la Negative ne. 

II se flatte plus qu'il ne devrait, et il loue les autres moins qu'ils 
ne meritent. — Ma soeur 6crit beaucoup mieux qu'elle ne parle. — 
]y|eiie ])*** ggj. j-Qy^ autre qu'elle n'^tait, quand elle nous quitta. — 
lis parlent autrement qu'ils ne pensent. — M'^^L*** n'est pas 
mieux qu'elle etait hier; et je crois que sa sante ne se r^- 
tablira jamais, a moins qu'elle n'aille k la campagne. — II vaut mieux 
differer un peu que de les poursuivre k present. — Nous sommes 
plus nombreux que quand nous etions en France.— A moins que 
vous ne le punissiez severement, il n'etudiera pas. — Attendez un 
moment, de crainte que mon pere ne vienne et qu'il ne vous voie. 
— Je ne vous pardonnerai jamais, a moins que vous ne lui demandiez 
pardon. — lis ne partiront pas que vous ne soyez de retour. — 
Attendez qu'il ne pleuve plus. — II m'ecrivit deux mois avant 
qu'il partit pour les Indes. — Elle avait si grand' peur que je ne vous 
le disse, qu'elle me fit promettre de ne jamais prononcer son nom 
en votre presence. — M*^* S*** tarde bien ce soir ; je crains qu'il ne 
lui soit arrive quelque malheur. — M^^'^ X*** est allee voir sa cou- 
sine ; mais le terns est si mauvais que nous craignons qu'elle ne re- 
vienne pas ce soir. — lis ne craignent pas du tout qu'il les gronde. — 
Ils trerablent qu'il ne les rencontre.— Je n'ai pas peur de lui parler ; 
mais je tremble d'adresser la paroled sa femme. — Je vais sortir ua 
moment, prenez garde que I'enfant ne tombe. — Je doute qu'il lui en 



16 DES INTERROGATIONS ET DES ADVERBES. 

ait parle. — Prenez garde de tomber.— II ne le fera pas, de crainte 
de vous deplaire. — 



Theme XXIV. Gram,, page 173. 
Des Interi'ogations, 
Sortirons-naus aujourd'hui? — Voulez-vous venir prendre le the 
chez nous ? M'appelle-t-on ? — L'aime-je plus tendrement que je ne 
devrais ? — Puisse-je vivre pour voir ces jours heureux !— Dusse-je 
y perdre la vie, je jure que je la delivrerai de Tesclavage auquelelle 
est reduite. — Est-ce que je dors k I'eglise? — Est-ce que je vends 
des livres inapies? — M^* T*** joua-t-il hier au soir ? — Oui ; il rem- 
plit le role d'Henri Quatre. — Quelqu'un vous a-t-il dit cela? — La 
compagnie est-elle arrivee ? — A quelle heure le. diner sera-t-il pret ? 
— La servante ne vous a-t-elle pas dit qu'il n'est pas eveille? — 
Pourquoi M'"' T*** n'a-t-il pas accepte les deux efFets que j'ai ap- 
portes ce matin ? — M"^' P*** est-il au bureau 1 -La fille allait-elle 
au marche quand je la rencontrai hier? — M'"^ q*** est-elle chez 
elle ? — Oui, monsieur, elle est a s'habiller. — Le maitre de musique 
n*est-il pas ici? — Non; il vient de sortir. — Que vous disaient ces 
dames? -Combien vous a coute cet habit? — Combien de soeurs a 
M'- N***?— Comment se porte M^- Z***?— M^"^ g*** ne viendra-t- 
elle point ce soir? — Oil est allee Mademoiselle ?— Par o\x est allee 
la dame? — Dans quelle annee Louis Seize fut-il couronne? — Com- 
bien de tems regna-t-il ? — Comment votre soeur trouva-t-elle son 
chemin hier au soir? — Pourquoi ne m'attendit-elle pas ? — Est-ce I^ 
votre chapeau? — Oui; ce Test; donnez-le-moi. — N'est-ce pas 1^ 
votre voiture? — Non ; ce ne Test pas. — 6tait-ce R votre maison ? — 
Oui; ce I'etait. — Sont-ce Ik vos chevaux ? — Non; ce ne les sont 
pas. — Vous parlez Fran^ais, n'est-ce pas? — lis demeurent k la 
campagne, n'est-ce pas? — II 6tait marchand de charbon, n'est-ce 
pas? — lis viendront, n'est-ce pas? — Est-ce qu'il pleut? — Est-ce 
qu'elle est morte ? — Est-ce que vous n'allez pas quelquefois h. 
I'opera! Non, jamais. 



Theme XXV. Gram, page 175. 
Des Adverhes, 
On se repent rarement de parler peu, mais souvent de parler 
trop. — Ne faites jamais a autrui ce que vous ne voudriez pas 
qu'on vous fit. — J'ai toujours conseille a mes enfans de se 
bien conduire, et de ne jamais faire tort a personne. — Les courti- 
sans passent souvent toute leur vie dans I'espoir de parvenir a 
des honneurs qu'ils n'obtiennent jamais. — Votre lettre est tres-mal 
ecrite ; je crains que vous ne I'ayez ecrite k la h^te. — II 



DES PREPOSITIONS. 17 

fait tres-mal de permettre k ses filles de frequenter si souvent les 
spectacles. — Si vous n'evitez pas le jeu, vous en acquerrez insen- 
sibiement le gotit. — Remplissez bien votre devoir, et vous meriterez 
son estime. — Je ne crois pas qu'elle ait bien fait d'envoyer son fils k 
Paris pour apprendre les mathematiques. — On enseigne beaucoup 
mieux le Fran^ais en Angleterre qu'en France. — Interpretez favo- 
rableraent les actions d'autrui, et ne pensez pas mal de votre pro- 
chain. — Si elle avait agi conforraement aux regies de I'honneur et 
de la justice, personne n'aurait parle mal d'elle. — Nous dejeu- 
n^mes, hier, k la Franfaise, et, aujourd'hui, nous dinerons k I'An- 
glaise. — Ce qui se fait avec plaisir se fait ordinairement bien. — II 
vient assez souvent. — lis ont beaucoup trop de confiance en lui ; 
ils sen repentiront certainement. — En voila bien assez, je vous 
reraercie. — Elle est aussi bien chez vous qu'ici.— Ces fleurs-ci ne sen- 
tent pas si raauvais que celles-la.— Qu'elle chanta faux toute la 
soiree ! — Vous prenez beaucoup trop de medecine, cela detruira 
votre constitution. — Si elle desire de se retablir, il faut qu'elle boive 
beaucoup moins de vin. 



Theme XXVI. Gram, page 179. 

Des Prtpositions, 

On va a present en deux jours de Londres a Paris, et, en deux 
heures, de Paris k St. Cloud. — Nous allames de Suisse en Italic, 
et d' Italic en Turquie — Vous passez reellement tout votre teras k 
aller de boutique en boutique, de rue en rue, et de place en place. — 
Y a-t-il loin d'ici au Pare du Regent? — II me fit attendre depuis huit 
heures du matin jusqu'a quatre heures de I'apres-midi, et, apres tout, 
je ne pus pas lui parler. — Nous revinraes, hier, de chez M'"^ L*** 
en quatre heures. — Quand allez-vous chez Lady D***? — En 
allant, ce matin, au palais du roi, j'ai rencontre Lord S *** qui 
revenait de la tour avec sa dame et ses enfans. — Nous sortons tous 
les jours, depuis sept heures du matin jusqu'a neuf, et nous etudions 
depuis dix heures jusqu'a une heure, et quelquefois jusqu'k deux 
heures.— Ce malheureux accident m'arriva vers le soir. — Je passerai 
chez vous sur les une heure pour arranger cette petite affaire. — 
Nous attendons nos batimens des ludes Occidentales, vers le 
milieu d'Aout. — Elle vous ecrira vers le douze. — A quelle heure 
pass^tes-vous hier chez moi ? — J'etais chez vous sur les dix ou les 
onze heures. — II y avait environ trois cents personnes k Tassemblee, 
cette apres-midi, dans une salle d'environ cinquante pieds de 
longueur et de trente-cinq de largeur.— II y aura k peu pres vingt 
boisseauxdefroment. — Je n'ai point d'argentsur moi. — Je verrai M'* 
L * * * dans trois ou quatre jours touchant cette affaire. — Le prince 
partira dans deux heures pour Hichniond. — Combien de terns sera- 

C 2 



18 DES CONJONCTIONS ET DES INTERJECTIONS. 

t-il a y aller? — A peu pr^s une heure et demie. — J'y allai, Tautre 
jour, en une heure vingt minutes. — Dans Tautoinne et dans Thiver 
je couche en ville ; mais dans le printems et dans I'ete je reside k 
la campagne. — Nous ne sortons jamais en Pabsence de notre pere. 
— Nous avons tire sur vous k trois mois de vue, et nous nous flattons 
que vous ferez honneur a notre demande. — Vous serez ravi de 
Fentendre jouer de la harpe. — Dites-leur qu'ils re9evront de mes 
nouvelles a la premiere occasion. — Quel est le chemin pour aller a 
I'opera? — Prenez la premiere rue adroite, puis la se,conde a gauche, 
et vous verrez I'opera devant vous. — A la nouvelle de son arrivee, 
nous partimes ^ cheval pour Londres. — Nous les rencontr^nies qui 
allaient a pied a la foire. — Mettez vos bottes ou vos souliers. — 
Avancez. — Elle a voyage par toute I'Afrique et I'Amerique. — Ayez 
patience, I'operation sera bient6t finie. — Quoique les m^decins 
i'aient abandonnee, j'espere qu'elie se retablira. — Je me ferai un 
plaisir de vous rendre ce service, a mon retour du continent. — 
Chacun agit a sa raaniere et suivant ses desirs. — Ma fille aime a 
s'habiiler a la Franyaise, et moi, j'aime k m'habiller a I'Angiaise. — 
Avez-vous des has a trois tils ] — Ne vendez-vous pas ce raisin k la 
livre ? — Les murs de cet ancien chateau sont b^tis k chaux et k 
ciment. — Je vous prends a teraoin que nous nous battrons a Tepee. 
— Cela n'est pas tout-a-fait a mon gout. — Leur maison est situee 
dans un lieu charmant qui presente a la fois une belle vue de la 
mer, de la ville et de la campagne. — Cette demoiselle est extraor- 
dinairement habile; elle enseigne k dessiner, k chanter et a danser. 
— Vous verrez la meme chose dans tons les pays; en France, en 
Angleterre et en Italic. —Je laissai mes gants, hier matin, sur mon 
lit ou sur le votre. — A la campagne, ils passent tout leur terns dans 
la mollesse et I'oisivete, tandis qu'en ville, ils sont occupes a 
leur Fran^ais, a leur Italien et a leur musique. — J'allai I'ann^e 
derniere en Pologne, en Allemagne, en Suede et en Russie. — Je 
crois que j'irai cette annee en Angleterre, en Ecosse et en Irlande. 
— Dans notre voyage en Italic, nous allames a Florence, k Venise 
et k Rome. — Nous revinmes a Londres par Geneve et par Douvres. 
— N'etes-vous pas redevable de la vie aux soins de toute espece 
qu'elie vous a rendus pendant votre maladie en Amerique ? — Com- 
ment pouviez-vous, sans craiute et sans pudeur, tenir de tels 
propos ? 



Theme XXVII. Gram, page 184. 

Des Conjonctions et des Interjections. 

Ils n'epargn^rent ni enfans, ni femmes, ni vieillards.— Elle n'a i 

ni honneur ni decence — Venez ici que je vous parle. — Au moment j 

que nous mourons notre sort est determine pour toujours.— Nous I 



DES IDIOTISMES. 19 

ne partirons pas qu'il ne soit jour. — Attendez qu'il ne pleuve plus. 
— Un avaie aurait tout I'or du monde, qu'il ne seraitpas content. — 
Puisque vous avez eu tant de malheurs, et que vous ne pouvez pas 
payer vos dettes, vous devriez composer avec vos creanciers. — 
Puisqu'elle a tant de perfections, et que vous I'aimez si tendrement, 
pourquoi ne I'epousez-vous pas ? — A moins que votre pere ne me 
paie la moitie de ce qu'il me doit, et qu'il ne me donne caution pour 
le reste, je le poursuivrai. — Quoiqu'ils possedent de grands biens, 
et qu'ils jouissent de tons les plaisirs de la vie, ils ne sout pas 
heureux. — Je sais qu'elle tremble que son maitre nela renvoie. — Le 
roi etait a peine arrive, qu'il tit illurainer les jardins. — Les dames 
etaient a peine descendues de voiture, qu'il commenca a pleuvoir. — 
Que cet homme est malheureux ! il ne reussit jamais dans aucune 
chose. — Qu'elle ressemble a sa mere ! et que de charmes elle 
deploiedeja! mais de combien d'adulations n'est-elle pas I'objet! 
— A, combien de dangers ne suis-je pas journellementexpose '. — Que 
je meure si je lui en ai jamais parle ! — Nous irons, demain, a la 
campagne, s'il fait beau tems. — Je vous menerais avec moi, si vous 
vouliez lui demander pardon. — Us ne savent pas s'il viendra. — 
Dites-leur, quand vous les verrez, qu'aussitot que je recevrai des 
nouvelles de leur frere, jele leur feral savoir. — Ecrivez-nous aussitot 
que vous y serez. 



Theme XXVIII. Gram, page 186. 

Des Idiot ismes. 

Cas oil Ton doit exprimer le Verbe to be par le Verhe avoir. 

J'avais grand' faim et grand' soif. — J'aurais honte de lui parler. — 
— Elle avait chaud, et elle s'enrhuma. — Us ont peur de moi. — 
Avez-vous froid aux pieds? — Je n'ai pas tres-froid aux pieds, 
parce que j'ai marche vite ; mais j'ai si froid aux mains que je 
ne puis taiiler ma plume. — Vous avez beau lui faire des re- 
montrances, elle ne con viendra jamais qu'elle ait tort, quoiqu'ellp 
soit pleiuement convaincue qu'elle n'a pas raison. — Quel ^ge ont 
vos soBurs ?— L'ainee a vingt-cinq ans, et la cadette aura quinze ans 
i\ Noel prochain. — Cette chambre a cent pieds de longueur, sur 
cinquanle de largeur et vingt de hauteur. — Le clocher de cette eglise 
n'apasquatre cent vingt-cinq pieds, septpouces, de hauteur, et cent 
treize de diametre. — il y avait dans le Perou une mine de quinze 
ou seize cents pieds de profondeur. — Je croyais que cette montagne 
avait trois mille pieds de hauteur, et mille de circonference. — II se- 
rait inutile de leur ecrire a la campagne, puisqu'ils parteut, demain 
matin, pour le continent, oil ils ont intention de passer tout 
i'ele. 



20 DES IDIOTISMES. 

Theme XXIX. Gram, page 188. 

Cas oil les Terns du Verhe to be doivent s'expr inter par ceux du 
Verbe unipersonnel y avoir. 

Tl y avait beaucoup de monde au pare, dimanche dernier. — Y 
avait-il bien des dames? — Je croirais qu'il y en avait au moins trois 
ou quatre mille. — II y a des gens qui sent trompeurs. — Combien y 
a-t-il de Londres a Plymouth?— Une tres-grande distance; presque 
trois cents milles. — 11 n'y a pas loin de Paris k Rheims ; mais il y 
a tres-loin de Rome k Moscou. — 11 y a vingt-sept milles de Douvres 
a Calais. — 11 y a vingt ans qu'elle est marine.-- 11 y a quatre jours 
qu'ils sont partis. — Combien d'habitans y a-t-il a Paris ? — II pent y 
en avoir septou huit cent mille. — Savez-vous combien de membres il 
y a dans la Chambre des Communes? — 11 y en a six centcinquante- 
huit. — J'^tais aux courses d' Epsom, il y a quelques annees, oil je 
fus temoin d'un accident tres-f^cheuxquiarrivaaun des spectateurs. 
— Un de mes amis recut une letire de la campagne, il y a huit ou 
quinze jours, dans laquelle on lui mandait que bien que les pluies 
eussent ete tres-abondantes, elle n'avaient pas encore fait de tort 
aux bles. — 11 n'y a pas uu mois que vous me pri-ites de Vous preter 
cinquante livres sterling. — M*"* P*** mourut, il y a environ six 
semaines, d'un coup de sabre, qu'il rep ut a la t^te, I'hiver dernier, 
sur la route de Douvres. 



Theme XXX. Gram, page 189. 

Cas ou les differens Terns des Verbes to be et to do s^expriment 
en Fran^ais par ceux des Verbes faire et se porter. 
II fait bien froid ce matin ; cependant, je ne crois pas qu'il fasse 
tout a fait si froid qu'il faisait hier et avant-hier. — 11 faisait exces- 
sivement froid, la semaine derniere. — 8'il fait beau tems demain, et 
que les chemins ne soient pas trop crottes, nous irons a la campagne. 
Le tems a ete tres-inconstant tout I'^t^, nous n'avons pas eu une 
seule semaine de beau tems continuel. — Le tems n'est pas sihumide 
au midi de I'Angleterre qu'il I'est au nord. — Fait-il beau tems au- 
jourd'hui? — Non ; il fait tres-mauvais tems. — Le tems est si va- 
riable dans ce pays, qu'il fait quelquefois le plus beau tems du 
monde le matin, et deux heures apres, il fait un tems lourd, som- 
bre et pluvieux, qui est tres-prejudiciable k la sante.— Les jours 
commencent a decroitre rapideraent; il fait nuit k sept heures. — II 
fait tres-mauvais marcherquand le pave est si glissant. — S'il fait jour, 
nous partirons certainement k quatre heures.— Quel tems fait-il cette 
apres-midi? — Je ne sais pas, je ne suis pas sorti. -Quand nous etions 
en ville, la semaine derniere, il faisait tres-mauvais tems ; mainte- 
nant que nous sommes k la campagne, il fait ues-beau ; je suis 



DES IDIOTISMES. 21 

presque sAr que si nous retournions k la ville, il ferait encore maii- 
vais terns. — Comment vous portez-vous ce soirl Tres-bien, je 
vous remercie. — Comment se portent votre pere et votre mere? — 
lis se portent passablement bien. — M^'^^ A*** se porte-t-elle mieux? 
— Non; elle est encore tres-indisposee. — Avez-vousvu vos cousines 
depuis peu? — Comment seportent-elles? — Pas tres-bien, Monsieur; 
jyjeiie Q. * * * g^ yjj g^Qg rhume, et sa soeur est encore tres-boiteuse; 
je crois reellement qu'il en sera d'elles, comme il en a ete des 
demoiselles W * * *. H6 bien, ne vous ai-je pas dit qu'il en serait 
de vous, comme il en a ete de votre frere? 



Theme XXXI. Gram, page 191. 

Cos oil Von doit se servir de il est, il etait, il sera, &c. et de 
c'est, c'etait, ce sera, &c. 

11 est bien malheureux qu'il n'ait pas r^ussi.^ — Ne serait-il pas 
expedient de lui ecrire? — C'est, certainement, une tres-bonne 
pensee. — 11 est si incertain quand ils reviendront. — Avez-vous 
€ntendu parler de I'horrible meurtre de M^"^ p * * ?— Qui ; cela fait 
frissonner d'horreur. — C'etait une fort jeune demoiselle qui m'en 
apporta la nouvelle, et I'aimable enfant s'evanouit en prononcant 
le nom de la victirae infortun^e. — N'etait-ce pas M"^^ ^ * * * qui 
vous grondatant, k la revue, I'autre jour? — Non ; c'etait sa soear. — 
Est-ce la premiere fois que vous I'ayez vue] — C'est la troisieme ou 
la quatrieme fois qu'il est venu pour vous payer. — Est-ce vous qui 
en parities le premier? Non ; c'etait elle. — S'il n'etait pas si tard, je 
serais charme d'etre de la partie. — Ceci est-il pour moi ou pour 
vous? — Ce n'est ni pour I'un ni pour I'autre de nous; c'est pour 
la soeur de M'* D * *. — Si Ton nereprimandaitpas cet homme sur sa 
conduite inf^me, ce serait autoriser le vice. — Je crois que c'est la 
jalousie qui vous fait tenir ce langage. — Quelle heure est-il? — 11 
est onze heures. — Est-il reellement si tard? Oui. En ce cas il 
faut que je vous quitte sur-le-champ. — Aliens, Messieurs, eveillez- 
vous, il est terns de se lever; il est presque huit heures. — Huit 
heures! c'est impossible; il n'y a que trois heures que nous sommes 
au lit.— J'ai vu M^^'« F * * *, ce matin, et je lui ai deraande a quelle 
heure le concert commencerait ; elle m'a dit que ce serait a neuf ou k 
dix heures du soir. — N'etait-ce pas k midi que vousviiites Samedi? 
— Non; c'etait sur les deux heures de I'apres-midi. — Ce ne sont 
pas ceux qui parlent beaucoup qui sont le plus estimes.— C'etaient 
les f ranjais et les Russes qui commencerent cette guerre honteuse 
et deshonorable. — Ce ne seront pas elles qui auront I'honneur 
d'ouvrir le bal. — Sont-ce les honneurs auxquels il a ete si injuste- 
ment eleve qui le rendent si fier et le font nous raepriser?— Etaient- 



22 DES IDIOTISMES. 

ce eux qui vous sauverent la vie, quand votre maison 4tait en feu? 
—-Non; c'etaient leurs voisins.— C'est k eux a commander, eta 
vous d'obeir. — N'etait-ce pas a eux que vous prlt^tes cet argent? — 
C'est k vous que je parle. — Seraient-ce eux qui....? — Non ; ce 
sont MM. Stewart et C"'^ 



Theme XXXII. Gram, page 193. 
Avoir mal a, au, k la, a 1', aux. 
J'ai grand-mal aux yeux, au cou et au c6te. — Qu'a M^^^^ H***? 
— EUe a mal k la gorge, et elle ^prouve une grande oppression dans 
la poitrine. — J'ai si mal aux yeux, que je ne puis les ouvrir. — Quand 
j'etais jeune, j'avais souvent mal k la t^te; maintenant que je suis 
vieux, j'ai si mal aux jambes, que je ne puis me tenir debout. — 
Vous ne sauriez croire combien mon pied me fait mal. — M™^ 'j' *** 
a eu un violent mal de dents toute la nuit. — Mon bras me fait tres- 
mal.— Ce pauvre enfant a mal partout; son mal de tete lui est 
revenu, et ses yeux lui font plus mal que jamais.- — Elle a grand 
mal k I'estomac. — Mon epaule ne se gu6rit pas, et la tete me fait 
encore mal. 



Theme XXXIIl. Gram, page 195. 

Cas oil must s'exprime en Francais par il faut, il fallait, &c. 

II faut que votre scEur vienne, elle-m^me, chercher son livre, 
parce que je ne sais pas oil elle I'a mis. — II faut leur ecrire 
tout de suite. — II ne faut pas faire cela. — Faut-il y aller? — 
II faut qu'une femme ait beaucoup de circonspection. — II faut 
aller voir mes filles k la carapagne.— II faut que nous ache- 
tions un cheval, a la premiere occasion. — Je crains qu'il ne 
faille aller k Bath, pour arreter le paiement de ce billet. — 
Faudra-t-il leur donner du tems? — II faut ^tre tres-patient pour 
soufFrir ainsi sans se plaindre. — II faut encourager les jeunes gens 
et assister les vieillards.— II me faut un nouvel habit. — II faut k 
mon frere une paire de bottes, etdeux ou trois paires de souliers. — 
II vous faut une paire de gants noirs pour assister k I'enterrement, 
et une paire de blancs pour I'opera. — II faudra qu'ils prennent une 
maison en ville. — Croyez-vous qu'il soit necessaire que mes nieces 
y soient? — On m'a dit que ses cousines ne se conduisent pas tout- 
^-fait comme il faut. — Sa femme parle toujours de vous comme il 
faut; je puis merae ajouter, avec le plus grand respect et la plus 
grande estime. — II ne s'en fallait pas de beaucoup que la somme 
entiere n'y fut. — Combien s'en fallait-il que la somme entiere n'y 
fut? — II s'en faut beaucoup qu'elle soit aussi belle que sa soeur. 



SYNTAXE DE l'ARTICLE. 23 

Theme XXXIV. Gram, page 197. 

Des Verbes defectifs, may, will, would, can, shall, sJiould, 
could, might, and ought, 

r Voulezvous me preter le livre doiit je vous parlai, il y a quelque 
tems? — Oui, je le veux bien, pourvu que vous me le rendiez dans 
deux ou trois jours. — Voulez-vous me donner votre bague ? — Non, 
certainement, je ne le veux pas. — Savez-vous I'ltalien ? — Oui; je 
le sais. — Je vous obligerais tres-volontiers, si je le pouvais. — Ce 
jeune homme sait-il bien tenir les livres? — Je ne sais pas; mais il 
le devrait. — Voulez-vous avoir la bonte de mettre cette lettre k la 
poste, pour moi? — Oui; je le ferai, avec plaisir, si vous voulez me 
preter un parapluie. — II faut lui dire qu'il devrait vous mener au 
spectacle, trois ou quatre fois par an. — Si les Fran^ais avaient 
voulu poursuivre les Russes, ils auraient pu prendre toutes leurs 
munitions. — J'aurais pu finir mon dessin aussitot que vous, si 
j'avais voulu, mais il n'aurait pas ete si bien execute qu'il Test. — 
II aurait dii lui faire visite, puisqu'il savait qu'elle etait de retour. 
— Je sais que je pourrais avoir fini mon ouvrage avant vous, sije 
voulais ; mais de quelle utilite serait-ce? — Sij'etais ^ votre place, 
je voudrais qu'il me pay^t sur-le-champ, quoique je ne voulusse 
pas qu'il en souffrit. — He bien ! laquelle de ces deux montres 
voulez-vous? — Elles sont reellement si jolies, que je les voudrais 
toutes les deux. — Elle est si ignorante, qu'elle ne sait ni lire ni 
ecrire. — Cette temp^te dura si long-tems, et fut si violente, que 
vous devriez vous en souvenir. — Je ne crois pas qu'il doive pardon- 
ner ^ sa soeur, avant qu'elle ne lui demande pardon. — Croyez-vous 
qu'elle vint avec nous, sije i'en priais. — Oui ; je suis sur qu'elle ne 
vous refuserait pas. — Est-il probable que vous eussiez pu obtenir 
le consentement de son pere, si je ne lui avais pas parle en votre 
faveur? 



Theme XXXV. Gram, page 202. 

Syntaxe de V Article. 

Cas ou Von emploie V Article defini en Francais. 

Le^' dames croient que le Latin et le Gr^c ne sont pas aussi 

necessaires que I'histoire, la geographic et Jes math^raatiques. — 

La fortune est une divinite capricieuse. — La gloire, les richesses, 

la noblesse et la puissance, ne sont que des noms imaginaires. — 

La charite est la plus grande de toutes les vertus chretiennes. — 

L'orgueil et la vanite ont souvent ete la source de bien des erreurs. 

— La platine est beaucoup plus dure que Tor, mais elle n'est pas 

aussi precieuse que le diamant. — Le bon champagne se vend, en 

France, huit ou neuf francs la bouteilie. — Corabien la soie vaut- 

elle I'aune dans ce pays.'' — Le pain coute deux sous la livre en 



24 

France. — Nous avons du tabac h. trois sous I'once. — Je lui donne 
soixante guinees par an, la table et le logement. — On lui donne dix 
ou onze schellings, par semaine, pour ses menus plaisirs. — Combien 
prenez-vous par le9on ? — Suivant les circonstances ; quelquefois 
une demi-guinee, et, quelquefois, seulement cinq ou six schellings. 
— On dine a cet hotel k quatre schellings par tete. — J'aime mieux 
le vert que le rouge, parce qu'il ne blesse pas tant la vue. — Le 
manger et le boire sont necessaires k I'homme. — La bonne et la 
mauvaise compagnie ont chacune leurs partisans. — Le vertueux et 
savant M^. C*** mourut k I'kge de trente-trois ans, k son chateau 
pres de Windsor, et laissa la plus aimable des femmes et quatre 
charmans petits enfans. — Nous primes le premier et le second 
etage du No.9, Piccadilly ; et le troisieme et le quatrieme, Cheapside, 
No. 54. — Quoique vous disiez que le Franpais et I'ltalien sont les 
plus belles langues de I'Europe, et les plus faciles a apprendre; 
cependant, je donne la preference a FAnglais et k TAllemand, 
— J'ai souvent admire le flux et reflux de la mer ; mais pas 
autant que j'adraire la belle harmonic des cieux, et la revolution 
reguliere des etoiles et des planetes. — Qui aurait cru qu'il se {At 
debarrasse si facilement des tours et sinuosites de ce fleuve? — 
Monsieur le Colonel, serez-vous des n6tres k diner, aujourd'hui? — 
Monsieur le fripon, s'il vous arrive jamais de remettre les pieds 
ici, je jure que je vous casserai le cou. — Mesdemoiselles les pa- 
resseuses, qu'avez-vous fait toute la matinee ?— Nous avons appris 
nos lemons de Franyais. — Les demoiselles de cette pension se con- 
duisent si bien, que tout le monde les admire. — On attend, tous les 
jours, la visite de la Princesse de Galles, chez M""^ la Comtesse 
de T * * *. — L'Europe, I'Asie, I'Afrique et I'Amerique, sont les 
quatre parties du monde. — La France, I'Angleterre, I'Espagne, la 
Russie, I'Allemagne, la Suede, la Prusse et I'ltalie, sont les 
plus beaux royaumes de I'Europe.— Le Rhone, le Rhin et le 
Danube sont de tres-grands fleuves ; et le Mont-blanc, les Alpes 
et les Pyrenees de tres-hautes montagnes. — Je viens de recevoir 
une lettre de mon frere qui est arrive de Prusse la semaine 
passee ; il me mande qu'on attend, tous les jours ,en Angleterre, le 
roi d'Espagne et I'lmperatrice Marie. — Quand votre frere partira- 
t-il de France pour le Portugal ] Dans dix ou douze jours. — J'ai 
vu a Vienne, les Empereurs de France et de Russie, et les Rois 
d'Angleterre et de Prusse, diner ensemble dans un superbe pavilion 
eleve expres pour Toccasion. — Croyez-vous que les peuples de 
I'Europe soient plus civilises que ceux des autres parties du monde? 
Sans doute.— Jusqu'ou s'etendent les limites de la France?— Je ne 
saurais vous le dire; mais celles de la Suisse et de I'ltalie s'eten- 
dent jusqu'ici.— Si vous croyez que les cotes de I'Angleterre soient 
ornees d'aussi belles maisons de plaisance, et qu'elles ofl^'rent k la 
vue d'aussi riantes perspectives que celles-ci, vous vous trompez bien. 



SYNTAXE DE L^ARTICLE. 25 

— Combien de terns avez-vous demeure en Angleterre ? Sept ans. 
— Et en Hollands? Cinq ans et demi. — Rest^tes-vous long-lems 
en Italie, quand vous fites le tour de I'Europe ? Seulement deux 
mois. — Et en France ? Trois ans. — Tons mes amis sont a present 
en Amerique. — Nous avons intention d'aller en Prusse eten Suede, 
I'annee prochaine. — Quand partez-vous pour I'Ecosse et I'Irlande ? — 
Dans trois ou quatre mois. — Mon neveu part, la Semaine prochaine, 
pour les Indes occidentales, oiX il a intention de passer cinq ou six 
ans.— Avez-vous ete au Japon et a la Chine? — Le gouverneur du 
Canada n'est pas tres-populaire. — lis vont, cette annee, aux Tndes 
Orientales. — 11 est alle a Terre-Neuve. — Mr. E * * * est arriv^, 
hier, des Indes Occidentales, et il a intention de partir, le mois 
prochain, pour le continent. — Ira-t-il au Mont-Blanc? II en parle ; 
mais je ne crois pas qu'il en ait le terns avant I'hiver. — Le royaume 
de Naples et les Etats de Venise ne sont pas fort puissans. 



Theme XXXVI. Gram, page 206. 

Cas oil Von ne doit pas faire usage de V Article en Fran^ais. 

Dieu est Tetre supreme qui gouverne tout par sa puissance et 
sa sagesse. — Oxford, Bath et Brighton sont trois belles villes. — 
Quand partez-vous pour Paris? L'ete prochain. — Venus etait une 
des deesses k qui les Paiens offraient leur eneens et leurs sacri- 
fices.— Alexandre-le-Grand et Napoleon sont les deux plus puis- 
sans monarques qui aient jamais regne. — Quelle difference entre 
la morale du Dieu des Chretiens et celle des dieux des Paiens ! — 
On eleva une superbe statue au dieu de la guerre en raemoire de 
cette brillante et k jamais memorable victoire sur les Thraces. — Les 
Paiens avaient un grand nombre de dieux et de demi-dieux. — Venez 
ine voir Lundi ou Jeudi. — Septembre et Octobre sont deux beaux 
mois en Angleterre. — Les ouvrages du Dante ne sont pas mieux 
Merits que ceux du Tasse.— Elle a intention de quitter ^ la Saint- 
Jean ou a la Saint-Michel. — Livre premier.— Chapitre second. — 
Section douzieme. — Regie septieme. — Tome six. — Article trois. — 
Proclamation de sa majeste George Quatre. — Nouvelle grammaire 
de la langue Franfaise. — Reflexions generales sur les progres de la 
religion Chretienne parmi les Paiens. — Vie du tres-regrette Mon- 
sieur D * * *. — Le due de * * * * demeurait autrefois, Pail-Mall, 
No. 21, quartier St. James ; mais je ne crois pas qu'il y demeure ^ 
present. — Histoire de France depuis mil huit cent, jusqu'a I'abdica- 
tion de Napoleon-le-Grand. — Je ne trouve partout que basse flat- 
terie, injustice, interet, trahison, fourberie. — Avez-vous jamais en- 
tendu ces proverbes? ** Pauvrete n'est pas vice;" " Contentement 
passe richesse." — Aliens, amis, volons k la gloire ! — Fleurs char- 
luantes ! par vous, la nature est embellie ! — Garden, donnez-nous 

D 



26 SYNTAXE DE L'ARTICLE. 

une bouteille de Madere.— Ecoutez, la fille, ayez soin de mettre 
des draps blancs a mon lit. — La femme aux huitres, je voudrais vous 
parler. — Quel bruit terrible font ces enfans! — Je ne savais pas que 
le due de * * * fut prince du sang. — 11 a ete accuse de felonie, crime 
puuissable de mort. — Ayez pitie des pauvres. — Prenez garde de 
lui faire peur. — Vous tremblez de froid, venez vous chauffer.— 
George Trois agit toujours en bon roi et en bon pere.— II ne sait ni 
histoire, ni geographie, ni niath^matiques.— Je n'avais ni encre, ni 
papier. — Soit negligence ou oubli de sa part, le billet ne fut pas 
presente en terns. — Jamais horame ne fut plus cruel. — Vous ferez 
mieux de ne pas y alier en Tabsence de M™* N * * *.— Pensez tou- 
jours que vous etes en la presence de Dieu. — Quoique vous ayez 
ete condamne a mort, ayez confiance en la raisericorde du roi, peut- 
etre vous pardonnera-t-il. 



Theme XXXYI. Gram, page 210. 
Continuation des Cas ou ran ne doit pas faire usage de Varticle 

en Franfais. 
Mon pere etait lieutenant des gardes du corps sous Napoleon. — 
Son frere etait Colonel du dix-huitieme regiment.— Etes-vous Frau- 
fais ou Anglais? — Non ; je suis Ecossais. — Elle est Italienne. — 
Je ne suis ni Portugais ni Espagnoi; je suis Irlandais. — Une de 
lues soeurs est marchande de modes, au coin de Regent-street ; et 
mon frere aine est chirurgien a la campagne.— Ce miserable raourut 
athee. — II fut elu membre du Parlement pour le corate de Mid- 
dlesex. — Ce jeune ecclesiastique sera bient6t eveque. — Le meilleur 
cafe vient de Moka, viile de TArabie-Heureuse.— Son pere n'etait- 
il pas general? Non ; il n'etait que major. — Nous avons ete dans 
la Norrnandie, province de France.— Apelie etait peintre; Phidias, 
sculpteur; Tite-Live, historien. — Socrate etait un philosophe dis- 
tingue; Harvey un medecin de grande reputation.— Ciceron etait 
un grand orateur, et Virgile un excellent poete.~Mon cousin est 
ojKicier aux gardes. — Qui est ce monsieur qui parle a cette belle 
dame? — Cest un capitaine de ma connaissance. — Et celui qui est 
pr^s de lui?— C'est M^ L** * I'avocat. — Ne faites pas attention 
k ce qu'il dit; ce n'est qu'un enfant.— Connaissez- vous ces dames? 
— Qui, ce sont des danseuses de I'op^ra. — Qu'avez-vous intention 
de faire de vos deux tils ? — Je crois que je ferai un negociant de 
I'aine, et un agent de change du cadet. — A vez-vous ete chez 
M""- S * * depuis peu ? Qui ; n'est-ce pas un palais que sa raaison ? 
—Nous sommes exposes, dans ce monde, k toutes sortes d'infir- 
raites et de dangers. — 11 ra'ordonna une mixtion de rhubarbe, 
de nitre, et d'autres drogues. — Les hieroglyphes des Egyptiens 
etaient des figures d'hommes, d'oiseaux, d'animaux et de reptiles. — 
Voila deux sortes de pommes, desquelles aurai-je le plaisir de 



SYNTAXE DU SUBSTANTIF, ETC. 27 

vous servir? — J'ai une tabatiere d'or, qui m'a cotite vingt-cinq 
livies sterling. — EUe porte toujours des bas de sole. — Dites au 
maitre de musique, quand il viendra, que je ne puis pas le voir 
aujourd'hui. — Gar^on, donnez-nous une bouteille de vin du Rhin. — 
La fille de chambre est-e!le en haut? — Peu de gens savent se 
contenter du pur necessaire. — Je doute qu'ils aient deux quintaux 
de Sucre dans leur magasin.— La plupart des jeunes gens se vantent 
trop, — Les femmes ont souvent trop de sensibilite.— Je n'ai point 
des sentiraens si bas. — Ecoutez, ma chere, ne donnez jamais des 
conseils qui puissent vous attirer des reproches. — Les cfiemins sont 
bordes de lauriers, de grenadiers, de jasmins, et d'autres arbres 
toujours verts et toujours jfieuris. — 11 n'est pas digne des honneurs 
qu'on lui rend. — IVf. C * * * precha, hier, pendant deux heures, 
avec force et eloquence. — Le quarante-deuxi^nie regiment combattit, 
avec le plus grand courage et la plus grande intrepidite, contre les 
Franfais et les Espagnols. — Elle passe tout son tems k aller de 
boutique en boutique, et de place en place. 



Th^me XXXVII. Gram, page 214. 

Syntaxe du Sitbstantif^ ^c. 

II faut observer les regies de I'honnetete, de la bienseance et des 
bonnes mceurs. — II n'y a point de pays qui ait autant de riches 
mines d'or et d'argent que le Perou. — La loi divine prescrit 
Tobeissance aux rois, aux raagistrats, et ^ tons les superieurs. — Je 
ne crois pas que le chapeau de votre soeur soit ici, ^ raoins que 
jVfme ^* « * ,^g pgjj. jj^jg dans la chambre ^ coucher. — Avez-vous, 
dans votre bibliotheque, I'histoire d'Angleterre par Hume? — Non ; 
raais je i'ai fait demander chez mon libraire, et il doit me I'envoyer 
deraain. — L'aimable disposition de M"^^ L * * * et sa grande activity 
excitent mon admiration. — Je suis revenu hier, ^ pied, de chez 
M. T* * •*", en deux heures, sans ^tre fatigue. — 0\X est la pelisse de 
ma mere? — Celle-ci est ^ ma so^ur. — Voulez-vous me donner le 
parapluie de M. W * * ?_M^'i^ A * 'a une belle paire de boucles 
d'oreilles qu'on lui a envoyee d'Amerique, avec un superbe schall 
des Indes.-J'ai besoin d'un etui de chapeau de carton.— Je doute 
qu'il y ait un meilleur cheval de main dans toute I'Angleterre. — 
Vous devriez garder des amies a feu dans votre chambre ^ coucher, 
pour votre surete pendant la nuit. — Cest ce que je fais, mais elles 
sont inutiles, parce que je n'ai point de poudre k canon. — Cette 
maison consiste en deux grandes offices et une salle a manger au rez 
de chaussee, deux sallons au premier, six chambres k coucher au 
second, quatre au troisieme, deux cabiiiets d'aisance, un grand 
jardin, et plusieurs autres commodites. — La ferame au lait est a la 
porte; oil avez-vous mis le pot au lait? — Ya-t-il autant de vers ^ 



28 SYNTAX E DE l'ADJECTIF. 

sole en Suisse qu'en Italie? — Venez-vous du marche aux herbes?— 
'Non; je viens du marche au foin. — Allez k la poissonnerie, et 
t^chez de trouver un bon saunion ; passez ensuite chez le boucher, 
et lui dites d'envoyer une poitrine de veau. — Dites k la femme aux 
huitres d'appeler fhomrae aux lapins, qui est de Tautre cote du 
chemin. — Combien de marchands de vin ya-t-il dans cette ville? — 
Trois. — Ce canape et ce fauteuil sont rembourr^s de crin.— Envoyez- 
moi deux langues de mouton, et de la marmelade de coing. — Con- 
naissez-vous une bonne pension de dames oh je puisse envoyer 
ma petite fille? Non; je n'en connais point. — Quel beau bouquet 
de roses! — Je puis sauter par dessus ce ruisseau k pieds joints; et 
vous, le pouvez-vous?— Non ; je ne crois pas que je le puisse. — 
Irons-nous k cheval ou k pied? Je prefererais beaucoup d'y aller 
en bateau. 



Theme XXXVIII. Gram, page 217. 

Syntaxe de VAdjectif, 

La victoire, que Napoleon remporta dans ce pays, fut desavanta- 
geuse aux Fran9ais et prejudiciable aux Anglais. — Cette dame est 
cherie de son mari; il la caresse, il I'adore. — lln'est pas improbable 
que la feue reine n*ait eu plusieurs bonnes qualites. — Je fus oblige 
d'attendre une demi-heure. — Donnez-moi une demi-livre de sucrcc — 
II y a k peine une demi-lieue d'ici. — Je ne puis pas y aller en une 
heure et demie. — Le mendiant k qui j'ai donne I'aumone, ce matin, 
6tait nu-t^te et nu-pieds. — II avait les jambes nues. — lis firent, 
hier, cinq lieues et demie, en six heures et demie. — M"^. T*** joue 
avec une noblesse et un goAt charmans. — Les Fran^ais se battent 
avec une intr^pidite et un courage etonnans. — Je n'ai jamais vu de 
dame qui reunit une douceur et une egalite d'esprit simerveilleuses. 
— La modestie et le desinteressement meritent d'etre loues et 
admires, quand ils viennent de motifs bons et louables. — Son fr^re 
et ses sceurs ne sont pas heureux. — Toute leur vie n'a 6te qu'un 
travail, qu'une occupation continuelle. — De grands evenemens et 
de grandes revolutions arriverent k sa mort. — Ne me donnez pas 
un livre long et ennuyeux, ou je ne le lirai pas. — Qu'ai-je k re- 
douter d'un roi juste, bon et clement? — L'experience apprendra 
toujours qu'une vie mod^ree, reglee et laborieuse, fortifie la sante, 
tandis qu'une vie dissipee et oisive la detruit. — Voulez-vous me 
montrer la lettre de ce grand jeune homrae k sa chere et tendre 
amie? — Oui, la voici, mais prenez garde de la perdre. — Une autre 
fois, je vous ecrirai une longue et charmante lettre; aujourd'hui, je 
n'ai que le tems de vous dire que la charmante petite enfant de 
j^me g*** est morte. — Personne n'ignore que la langue Fran- 
caise, TAnglaise et I'Espagnole le cedent k i'ltalienne en dou- 



DE LA PLACE DE L'ADJECTIF, ETC. 29 

ceur; niais, aussi, tout le raonde convient que la Fran^aise I'em- 
porte sur toutes les autres en clarte et en beaute. — Je suis charnie 
de vous entendre dire que ces fleurs sentent si bon. 



Theme XXXIX. Gram, page 219. 

De la Place de VAdjectif. 

XJne femnie airaable repand sur tout ce qu'elle dit una grace inex- 
primable. — J'aime un jeune homme qui suit les bons conseils qu'on 
lui donne. — Cetait un grand horaime. — Regardez ce grand hornnie 
sec. — II avait un habit bleu, bien fait, et de drap superfin. — Dans 
quinze jours ou trois semaines, les jours seront longs et beaux. — 
Mon petit neveu vient tres-regulierement, tous les premiers jours 
de I'an, me souhaiter une bonne et heureuse annee. — Outre les 
difFerens appartemens dont je vous ai parle, il y a un tres-grancl 
cabinet contigu k la cuisine, dans lequel deux domestiques pour- 
raient tres-bien coucher. — En entrant dans la chambre de mon ami 
malade, je trouvai un tres-jeune docteur qui querellait, avec un fort 
habile homrae de ma connaissance, sur la cause de I'indisposition 
du malade. — Mon cher enfant, votre fiere n'est-il pas egalement 
cher ^ votre pere que vous ? — Est-ce la une action digne d'un 
homme qui se vante d'etre civil et olEcieux envers tout le monde ? 
— Hier, votre soeur avait I'air tres-triste ; je crains qu'elle n'ait 
eprouve quelque f^cheux contre-tems. — La semaine derniere, nous 
resumes des Indes une nouvelle fort affligeante ; c'etait la mort de 
la fille du gouverneur, demoiselle remplie des charmes les plus 
attrayans, et sur qui reposaient les esperances les plus flatteuses. — 
Votre fils a fait des progres etonnans dans ses etudes. — Ntiv-York^ 
en Amerique, est une vills bien peuplee. — Un esprit prevenu est la 
source d'erreurs innombrables. — Tout ministre, qui prefere le bien 
public a son interet particulier, est aime de ses compatriotes. — 
Qu'est-ce que c'est que la geographie? — C'est la description du 
globe terrestre. — Je suis extremement fache que I'incomparable 
auteurde Vert-Vert soit movt. — Le seul litqu'il y eiiitdans sa maison 
etait une natte d^ jonc grossiere. 



Theme XL. Gram, page 225. 

Du Regime ou Compltmeni des Adjectifs, 

Cela est tres-doux au toucher. — Hien n'est plus desagreable au 
goAt. — II est difficile d'expliquer d'une maniere satisfaisante une 
science si abstruse. — Qu'y a-t-il de plus dangereux pour I'innocence 
que de tendres entretiens? — Qu'un enfant soit attentif a ses etudes, 
sensible aux reprimandes, et docile aux volontes de ses maitres. — 
Si je n'etais pas sensible a vos bont^s passees, je ne me serais pas 

D 2 



30 DES ADJECTIFS DE DIMENSION. 

interess^ pour vous.- — Celui qui a I'esprit trouble n'est ni propre 
ni enclin k remplir son devoir. — On m'a dit que vous ^tes de- 
venu amoureux de M^''^ g*** . jg vous en felicite. — Cette jeune 
personne est remplie des plus grands talens, et elle est extr^me- 
ment desireuse deseperfectionner dans tout ce qu'elleentreprend. — 
Elle est habile ^ tout faire, et affable envers tout le monde. — Les 
soldats, dej^ animus d'un beau zele pour leur patrie, etaient encore 
excites au combat par le son des instrumens guerriers. — II faut 
etre civil envers vos domestiques, si vous voulez qu'ils vous 
respectent.— De m^me que I'esprit n'est pas coraparable avec la 
matiere, ainsi les biens de ce monde ne sont pas comparables k ceux 
de I'eternite. — Qu'il sera consolant pour moi de revoirraes enfans ! — 
Votre fr^re est connu de tout le monde pour ne pas etre constant 
en amour. — Ce roi est cruel a son pays; cruel envers ses enfans. — 
II commen^a par negligerl'etude; peu k peu, il devint dissolu dans 
ses moeurs ; il s'endurcit dans le crime ; envisagea, d'un air d'in- 
souciance, les revers de la fortune ; et se montra m^me indifierent 
contre Tadversite. — L'Angleterre n'est pas si fertile en ble, en vin 
et en fruit, que la France et I'ltalie. — lis sont si fideles k leur roi 
que rien ne les portera jamais k agir contre rhonneur.— Cette dame 
n'est pas fiddle en ses promesses.- — Je suis fatigue de courir.— Le 
plus heureux en amour n'est pas toujours le plus tranquille. — Pour- 
quoi ^tes-vous si impatient de la voir.'' — JVP^^^ j^*** o^ ^^^ long-tems 
inconsolable de la perte de son amant, quoiqu'il lui fAt tres-inferieur 
en science, en talens, en vertus et en richesses. — Elle est tres- 
inqui^te sur cette affaire. — Nous sommes inquiets de ne pas rece- 
voir de ses nouvelles.— Le vice est tres-ingenieux k se deguiser, 
et souvent sous les formes les plus trompeuses. — II s'est montre 
iugrat envers son bienfaiteur, ingrat a vos bontes, ingrat k votre^ 
amour ; mais, malheur k lui, s'il est ingrat k sa patrie. — Soyez prompt 
a recompenser, lent k punir, et misericordieux envers les pauvres. 
— La foi est aussi necessaire pour le salut, que la respiration Test k 
la vie. — Un fils bien eleve est reconnaissant envers ses parens de 
la bonne education qu'ils lui ont donnee.— Nous sommes tons respon- 
sables k Dieu de nos mauvaises actions. — Ce monsieur est riclie 
de deux cent mille francs. — II n'est pas assez severe k I'egard de 
ses enfans. — Toutes ses terres sont steriles en ble. — Jamais femme 
ne fut plus utile et plus chere k sa famille, et en meme tems plus 
respectee et cherie de tout le monde. 



Theme XLI. Gram, 227. 

Des Adjectifs de Dimension. 

La belle colonne dans la Place-Vendome, k Paris, a deux cents 
pieds de hauteur. — II y a dans cette maison une salle de deux cent 



DES DEGR^S DE SIGNIFICATION. 31 

cinquante pieds de longueur, de soixante de largeur, et de trente- 
six de hauteur. — Ce puits aura cinq cents pieds de profondeur, sur 
soixante de diametre ; il sera couvert d'une maguitique pierre de 
marbre de dix-huit ou de dix-neuf pouces d epaisseur. — Votre cham- 
bre a coucher n'a pas plus de quarante-trois pieds de longueur sur 
vingt-et-un de largeur. — Le nouveau canal a cent pieds de largeur, 
et quinze ou seize de profondeur. — Je ne crois pas que le clocher 
de cette eglise ait plus de trois cent quatre-vingts pieds de hauteur. 
— Les deux fenetres sur le derriere de cette chapelle out chacune 
soixante-dix-sept pieds onze pouces de hauteur, sur vingt-quatre 
de largeur. — J'ai vu, en Amerique, un pont de ferde soixante-treize 
pieds de largeur; il est compose de vingt piles, de dix-sept grandes 
arches, et de deux petites : les quatre piles du milieu ont chacune 
vingt-quatre pieds de largeur; toutes les autres diminuent en largeur 
d'un pied et demi de chaque cote. — Le palais du roi a cent dix pieds 
de hauteur, quatre cents de longueur, sur deux cents de largeur, 
— Cette rue a environ un mille de longueur, et quatre-vingt-dix pieds 
de largeur. — Nous avons dans notre jardin, a la carapagne, un 
^tang qui a six cent douze pieds de longueur, quatre-vingts de lar- 
geur, et trente-huit de profondeur. 



Theme XLII. Gram, page 229. 

Des Degrts de Signification. 

S'il est aussi facile de faire le bien que de faire le mal, pourquoi 
ne vous conduisez-vous pas raieux? — Les grands talens sont de 
toute condition, et s'ils ne brillent pas si communement dans le bas 
peuple que dans les autres classes, c'est faute de soin et d'etre cultives. 
— Quoique je n'aie pas autant d'amis que son frere, j'ai reussi beau- 
coup mieux que lui. — On dit que M^^'^ Q*** ^g^ plus grande que 
toutes ses soeurs de toute la tete. — 11 y a des personnes qui ecrivent 
mieux qu'elles ne parlent, et d'autres qui parlent mieux qu'elles 
n'ecrivent. — Je me porte inliniment mieux que quand j'etais sur le 
continent — La religion enseigne qu'il est plus grand de vaincre ses 
passions que de conquerir des nations enti^res. — Quant k moi, je 
crois qu'il est plus facile de commander que d'obeir. — Plus je suis 
dans la societe de ces dames, plus je les hais. — Moins vous 
etudierez, moins vous profiterez. — 11 ne sera jamais riche, parce 
que plus il gagne d'argent, plus il fait de depenses. — Plus on est 
eleve en dignite, moins on doit avoir d'orgueil. — N'est-il pas 
Evident que plus le jour est court, plus la nuit est longue ? 



32 DES PRONOMS — LUI, ELLE, EUX, ET LE, LA, LES. 

Theme XLIII. Gram, page 230. 
Ohservations sur Us Pronoms lui, elle, eux. 

Je I'ai beaucoup bl^m6, lui et sa m^re, d'avoir pris cette liberty. 
' — 11 ne veut la voir, ni eile ni son frere, k cause de leur raalhonn^- 
tete k son ^gard.— Je les hais, et je les hairai toujours, eux, et tous 
leurs amis.— On vous a vus, ensemble, vous et M^^^^ S***. — Je 
vous aurais ecrit, k vous et k sa sceur, quand j'etais en France, si 
je n'avais pas ete ob!ig6 de revenir si soudainement en Angleterre, 
-—Elle etait de si mauvaise humeur qu'elle ne voulut nous parler, ni 
^lui, ni^ moi.— Nous vous en enverrons, a vous et k eux. — Le 
climat de ce pays est si doux, que je lui suis redevable du reta- 
blissement de ma sante.— M*^^^^ ^***^ approchez-vous du feu, 
Vous etes bien honnete, Madame; je suis tout aupres. — La chute 
de i'eau de cette riviere fait tant de bruit, qu'eile rend sourds ceux 
qui demeurent aupres. — Savez-vous ou est la tresorerie de Londresl 
Oui, je le sais. — Eh bien, vous trouverez aisement votre cherain ; 
aupres, est le palais d'York ; tout aupres, est la garde a cheval, et 
vis-^-vis, est la chapelle royale oii vous voulez aller. — lis se 
declarerent unanimement contre. — La Suisse est un pays charmant; 
y avez-vous jamais ete ] — Non ; mais j'ai intention d'y aller cet ^t6, 
si mes affaires me le permettent. 



Theme XLIV. Gram, page 232. 
Difficulte touchant les Pronoms le, la, T, les, eclaircie. 
Est-ce la votre chapeau? — Oui, ce Test.— Cette demoiselle n'est- 
elle pas la cousine de Monsieur S***? — Non, Monsieur, elle ne 
Test pas. — Sont-ce la vos filies? Oui ; ce les sont.— Ne sont-ce pas 
1^ vos chevaux?— Non ; ce ne les sont pas. — Est-ce la la maison 
de M. K***? — Non; ce ne Test pas. — Je croyais que c'etait 1^ 
votre voiture? — Non, Madame, c'est celle de notre amie M"™^ L**. 
— Vos sceurs sont-elles mariees?— L'ainee Test, et la cadette le 
sera bientot. — Etes-vous enrhume? Oui, je le suis. — Y eut-il 
jamais une femme plus raalheureuse, et traitee avec plus de mepris 
que je le suis? — On m'avait dit que M™^ VY*** etait morte, cepen- 
dant elle ne Test pas.-~M^"^ R*** est-elle riche? — Non, elle ne 
Test pas. — Cette pauvre enfant a et6 long-terns malade, et je crains 
bien qu'elle ne le soit toute sa vie. — Pourquoi etes-vous si jaloux 
d'elle? — Si j'etais a votre place, je ne le serais pas du tout. — Votre 
m^re est-elle encore indisposee? — Oui, Monsieur, elle lest — 
Mesdames, ^tes-vous parentes de M*"- le Colonel D***? — Oui, 
Monsieur, nous le sommes.-- Cette famille etait fort estimee, il y a 
deux ou trois ans ; mais elle ne Test pas autant k present.— Croyez- 
vous que M*^- et M™^ JS*** envoient leur fils en France? — Oui; je 



DES PRONOMS — MOI-MEME, TOT-MEME, ETC. 33 

le crois. — Avez-vous vu les Demoiselles F * * * depuis leur retour de 
la campagne? — Non; je ne les ai pas vues. — Voulez-vous avoir la 
bont6 de leur parler pour moi?— Oui; je le ferai avec plaisir. — 
N'oubliez pas de leur parler du retour de mon oncle. — ISon ; je 
ne I'oublierai pas. — Vos soeurs iront-elles k la carapagne, cette 
annee ? — Oui; je crois qu'elles iront. — Serez-vous, demain, chez 
vous? — Non, je ne crois pas que j'y sois. 



Theme XLV. Gram, page 234. 

Des Pronoms moi-meme, toi-meme, ^c. 

Quelque courageux qu'un homrae soit, il ne doit pas s'exposer 
au danger sans necessite. — Je me flatte que vous suivrez le conseil 
que je vous donne, et que vous ne vous attirerez jamais le reproche 
de vous en etre ecarte, — II arrive souvent qu'en se louant, on medit 
d'autrui. — Cette malheureuse femoje se tua. — Si vous vous louez 
tant, personne ne vous croira. — Chacun agit pour soi.— On ne doit 
jamais parler de soi qu'avec modestie. — Quiconque n'aime que soi, 
ne merite pas d'etre aime. — Chacun n'a-t-il pas pour soi un ceil de 
complaisance ? — Personne n'est raecontent de soi, pour avoir fait 
une bonne action. — Heureux I'homme qui n'est comptable qu'k soi 
de ses actions et de ses plaisirs. — II depend toujours de soi d'agir 
honorablement. — Excuser en soi les fautes qu'on ne saurait souffrir 
dans les autres est une marque de petitesse d'esprit.— Cette demoi- 
selle a bonne opinion d'elle-meme. — Ces dames parlent trop avan- 
tageusement d'elles-memes. — L'amour propre dirige tout k soi. — 
Tout ce qui est bon en soi, n'est pas toujours approuve. — 11 se pent 
faire que ce remede soit innocent en soi, cependant je ne le prendrai 
pas. — Avez-vous vu cela vous-m^me ? Oui; je I'ai vu, de mes 
propres yeux. — He bien, je voudrais le voir moi-m^me, avant de 
le croire. — £lle I'a fait elle-m^me. 



Theme XLVI. Gram, page 238. 

Places respectives des Pronoms Personnels, 

Sont-ce la des peches ou des pavies ? Ce sont des p^ches. — 
Voulez-vous ra'en donner ? Oui ; avec plaisir. — 11 n'est pas certain 
queM^- H*** ait refuse sa fille k M^* le Colonel U***; mais, 
quand il la lui aurait refusee, ii ne s*ensuit pas qu'il voulut vous la 
donner. — Tranquillisez-vous, j'y serai en tems. — Etes-vous bien siftr 
que M'"^ S*** y soit aussi? II n'y a pas le moindre doute. — Si 
vos soeurs veulent me preter leur guitare, ce soir, je la leur rendrai 
demain.— Oii est la grammaire Francaise de vos cousines ? La 
yoici. — Quand la leur renverrez-vous ? La semaine prochaine. — 



34 REP]ETITION DES PRONOMS PERSONNELS. 

Cette rnaison est si respectable, que, si j'avais de I'argent k ma 
disposition, je I'y placerais. — M^^^^ j)*** trouve ces bracelets 
superbes, vous devriez lui en faire present. Non, certainement, 
je ne lui en ferai pas present ; et pourquoi lui en ferais-je present ? 
— Quand vous verrez les Demoiselles T** *, dites-leur que j'ai 
acbet6 deux beaux tableaux. — Montrez-les-moi. — Ne les lui mon- 
trez pas. — Si ma sceur teraoigne le d^sir de lire ce livre, ne le lui 
pr^tez pas, de crainte qu'elle ne le g^te ; raais vendez-le-lui, et elle 
en aura bien soin. — Aussit6t que vous aurez des m^mes prunes, 
que vous me vendites I'autre jour, envoyez-m'en. — Vos voisins ont 
besoin de cafe ; achetez-leur-en. — S'ils ne saventpas o^ jedemeure, 
De le ieur dites pas.— Les demoiselles G *** vont-elles aux courses 
d'Epsom ? — Pas que je sache. — Ne les y accompagnez pas. — Que 
votre frere les y m^ne, s'il veut. — Menez-y-moi avec vous. — Dites- 
le-lui. — Ne m'en parlez plus. — Qui vous a donne ces oranges? — 
Votre frere nous les a envoyees.— Qui les lui avait donnees ? 11 
ne nous I'a pas dit.— Quelle belle pomme ! — Donnez-la-moi. — Ne la 
Ieur donnez pas. — Prenez-la, et la mangez. — Aimez vos ennemis, 
et Ieur faites du bien quand vous le pouvez. — Vous avez une belle 
montre d'or, qui vous est inutile ; vendez-la moi, ou me la donnez. — 
Ne Ieur pardonnez pas, mais punissez les sur-le-champ. 



Theme XLVlf. Gram, page 240. 

Repetition des Pronoms Personnels. 

Tout le monde dit queje suis amoureuxde M^^^^O*** ; cependant 
cela n'est pas; car je ne I'aime ni ne la hais. — Comnient trouvez- 
vous ces dames? Elles ne me plaisent ni ne me deplaisent. — 
Nous ne les louons ni oe les blaraons. — Cette femme est d'une 
bizarrerie inconcevable; d'un moment k I'autre, elle veut et elle ne 
veut pas. — Vous dites cela, mais vous ne le croyez pas. — Je vous 
assure queje le crois et le croirai toujours. — Elle a des adorateurs, 
et elle n'a pas un ami. — 11 est arriv6 ce matin, etil repartira ce soir. 
— Je I'aime, je Thonore, et je la respecterai toujours. — 11 prit les 
villes les plus fortes, ccnquit les provinces les plus considerables, et 
renversa les empires les plus puissarss.— Je soutiens et je soutien- 
drai toujours qu'eile avait tort. — Evitez I'ivrognerie ; elle abrutit 
Tentendement, ternit la reputation, et consume le corps. — lis m'ecri- 
virent, il y a environ deux mois, qu'ils avaient vu ma mere, mais 
qu'ils ne lui avaient pas parie. — ^Nous irons, vous et moi. — Vous et 
^eiie g***^ vous ctes Ics seulcs personnes queje eonnaisse ici. — 
II faut que ce soit vous ou votre frere qui avez pris ma raontre. — Je 
sais que vous et votre cousin vous vous moquiez de moi. — Ni lui ni 
moi n etions presens. — Le monsieur avec lequel vous et votre fiUe 
^tiez, est une de mes connaissances.— Je m'etonne que vous et lui. 



DES PRONOMS POSSESSIFS. 35 

vous fr^uentiez cette personne. — Elle ne finira jamais cette broderie; 
car elle la fait et la defait vingt fois par jour. — Je veux les voir, 
les prier, les presser, les importuner, les flechir. 



TheQie XLVIII. Gram, page 242. 
Regies particulitres des Pronoms possessifs. ^ 

Le bottier qui demeure au coin de la rue eut un accident f^cheux, 
il y a deux ans ; notre voiture lui passa malheureusement sur te 
corps, lui cassa la cuisse gauche, et lui meurtrit beaucoup I'epaule 
droite. — Ne faites pas tant de bruit, vous me fendez la tete. — 
Votre frere etait tres en coJere centre moi, parce que je lui avais 
marche sur le pied. — Un boulet de canon leur emporta, a tous les 
deux, le bras gauche en meme terns. — Ne me pressez pas la main 
si fort, vous me faites furieusement mal aux doigts. — Dites-leur 
que, s'ils reviennent jamais ici, je leur casserai le cou. — Prenez 
garde de lui faire mal aux yeux.— Mr. A* * craint qu'on ne soit 
oblige de lui couper le pouce. — Je m'enrhumai, et je perdis en- 
tierement la voix. — Mon pere tomba hier sur la glace, et se fit 
tr^s-grand mal au dos et a la tete. — A la bataille de Waterloo, 
notre General rejut un coup de feu k la jambe droite, un autre k 
I'epaule gauche: ^ force de soin et d'attention, on lui sauva la 
jambe, mais il fallut lui faire une incision a I'epaule. ~Ne vaudrait- 
il pas mieux, pour un homme de probite, perdre la vie, que 
I'honneur par une action crirninelle? — Je crois qu'elie a perdu 
I'esprit. — Quand ce vertueux officier eut perdu la jambe, a la 
bataille de Wagram, il leva les yeux et les mains au ciel, et 
remereia Dieu de lui avoir conserve la vie. — Le Prince de *** 
u'eut-il pas la tete tranchee pour avoir assassine son frere? Non ; 
c'etait pour avoir attente k la vie du roi.— Sa ni^ce ment toutes 
les fois qu'elie cuvre la bouche. — Les habitans de ce pays sont si 
superstitieux, que je me rappelle d'avoir vu, un Dimanche, dans 
un temple magnifique, plusieurs mille personnes, les yeux baisses, 
pendant plus d'une heure et demie, toutes intimement persuadees 
que Dieu eiait present, et qu'il leur parlait dans la personne de leur 
pretre. — Je vois que mon pied commence k s'enfler; je desespere 
qu'il se guerisse jamais. — Si vous touchez ce couteau, vous vous 
couperez certainement les doigts. — AUez d'abord vous laver les 
mains, puis venez vous chauffer les pieds. — Je me cassai le bras 
en cherchant k sauver un enfant qui se jeta par la fenetre d'une 
maison qui etait en feu. — Donnez-moi mes bas que vous avez 
raccoramodes. — Ou avez-vons mis mes tablettes que j'ai apport^es 
de France? — Vous les avez mises dans votre poche quand vous 
^tes sorti, cette apres-midi. — Cette petite fille ne sait-elle pas que 
c'est k moi il commander et k elle d'obeir? — Ce pauvre homme, en 



1 



36 DES PRONOMS DEMONSTRATIFS. 

executant un beau concerto de sa composition, fut frappe d'apo- 
plexie, etoiourut subiteraent. — J'ai souvent entendu dire k Meiie^*** 
qu'elle a une belle terre sur le continent; j'aimerais bien k savoir 
o\X c'est. — Vous ne devriez pas vous m^ler de cela, parce que cela 
ne vous regarde pas. 



Theme XLXIX. Gram, page 245. 
Cas oil Von doit se servir de son^ sa, ses, et de en. 

Chaque pays a ses usages, ses lois et ses prejuges. — Je re- 
gretterais beaucoup de quitter la France, sans avoir vu Paris, ses 
th6itres, ses edifices et ses amusemens. — Richmond et ses environs 
pr^sentent k Tosil la plus belle perspective que j'aie jamais vue.- 
C'est ^ cause de son climat, de son sol et de ses productions, que 
la France est tant admir^e des Strangers. — Nous etions en Angle- 
terre, quand la Tamise se deborda et inonda toute cette partie de la 
campagne : I'eau etait si haute et si rapide, que, dans son cours, elle 
entraina plusieurs maisons et plusieurs arbres. — La guerre n*a-t- 
elle pas sa theorie et ses principes, comme les autres sciences?— 
Aussit6t que Salomon se fut abandonne a I'amour des femmes, son 
esprit baissa, son coeur s'afFaiblit, et sa piete degenera en idol^trie. 
— Cette ville serait un lieu charmant, si les rues n'en etaient pas 
si etroites, et les maisons si hautes ; ses batimens reguliers me 
plaisent beaucoup, et ses paisibles habitans sont fort aimables.- 
Londres est la plus grande ville de TEurope; la situation en est 
agreable, et tres-commode pour le commerce ; les maisons en sont 
de brique et extremement propres; les places et les rues en sont 
grandes et belles, et les pares iramenses. — Ce pecher n'est pas 
tr^s-beau ; mais le fruit en est delicieux. — Je ne prendai point cette 
m^decine ; j'en connais trop bien la force et les effets. — De m^me 
que tous ceux qui lisent le Paradis Perdu de Milton ne sont pas 
toujours capables d'en sentir les beautes, ainsi la plupart des 
Strangers qui vont aux tragedies de Hacine, a Paris, ne sauraient 
en appr^cier la sublimite. — J'aime beaucoup Vauxhall, et j'y me- 
nerais souvent mes enfans, si I'indecence et la vulgarite n'y avilis- 
saient les amusemens et les plaisirs. 



Theme L. Gram, page 249. 

Ragles particulieres des Pronoms demonstratifs. 

Une petite chaumiere et quelques meubles, c'est 1^ toute sa 

fortune. — J'ai maintenant deux choses en vue, c'est de me marier 

et de me retirer k la campagne. — C'est fort bien pense. — Ce sera 

tres-mal administre. — On m'a dit que vous avez intention d'envoyer 



REGLES PARTICULIERES DES PRONOMS RELATIFS. 37 

un cartel a M""* B * * * ; si ce sont ]k vos sentimens, ce n*est pas 
se coiiduire en homme d'honneur. — Puisque c'est votre opinion, je 
suis bien f^che de i'avoir fait. — Voila une demarche bien imprudente. 
— II arrive souvent que ceux qui font les plus grandes protestations 
d'amitie sont les premiers a nous abandonner, quand nous sommes 
dans la peine et le besoin. — Helas! ce n'est malheureusement que 
trop souvent le cas. — Quand votre scEur est en societe, elle fait 
souvent tomber la conversation snr des sujets de litterature, afin 
de citer les passages les plus frappans de tel ou tel auteur. — Celui 
qui n'a besoin de rien est tres-heureux. — Ces bas sont tres-fins ; 
cependantje prendrai, de preference, ceux que vous m'avez montres 
d'abord. — Comme tous les enfans ne sont pas ici, je ne puis punir 
ceux dont vous vous plaignez. — Mettez-vous a la place de celui a 
qui vous voulez faire une injure. — Celles a qui je parlais, quand 
vous m'avez appele, sont de charmantes demoiselles. — Celui qui 
s^abandonne k ses passions et aux plaisirs de ce monde est bien k 
plaindre. — Ceux-la se trompent qui croient que le bonheur consiste 
dans les richesses; car ceux qui paraissent ^tre heureux ne le 
sont pas toujours. — Je suis siir que ceux qui se fient aux vaines 
promesses des hommes ne connaissent pas le coeur humain. — Toutes 
ces bagues sont tr^s-jolies; cependantje donne la preference a 
celle que votre cousine a au doigt. — Madame, laquelle de ces 
robes aurai-je le plaisir de vous envoyer? — Celle qu'il vous plaira. 
— Le bonheur eternel n'est-il pas infiniment au-dessus de celui 
qu'un homme pent posseder dans ce monde? — Voulez-vous de la 
viande ou du poisson? — Ce qu'il vous plaira. — Vous servirai-je de 
ceci ou de cela? — Comme il vous plaira. — II boit du rum depuis le 
matin jusqu'au soir, ce qui est tres-mauvais pour sa sant6. — Ce 
que vous dites est tr^s-vrai. — Ce qui coute peu est trop cher quand 
il est mauvais ou qu'il n'est d'aucun usage. — Mesdames, je sais 
ce dont vous vous moquez; mais je ne m'en soucie pas. — Si votre 
soeur savait ce k quoi elle s'expose en y allant, elle resterait ^gr- 
tainement chez elle. — Peut etre n'aimerez-vous point mon procede ; 
mais c'est 1*^ ma maniere d'agir : je dis toujours ce que je pense. — 
Elle sort le soir, ce qui me deplait beaucoup. — Ce qu'elle craint, 
c'est une rechute. — Ce qui m'attache a la vie, c'est vous. — Ce quo 
je sais, c'est qu'ils out gagne. — M^"^ ^ * * * j^^g ^^ \^ harpe et 
du piano, parle Franjais et Italien, dessine parfaitement bieu, 
talens qui sont xjonsideres comme tres-beaux dans une demoiselle. 



Theme LI. Gram, page 253. 
Regies pai'iiculieres des Pronoms i^elati/s. 
Qui etait cette dame k qui M'^* C *** vous presenta, I'autre jour? 
— Qui sera assez courageux pour attaquer cet animal furieux? — 

E 



^S DES PRrONOMS INDj^FINIS. 

Qui trop embrasse mal areint.—Lui demanddtes-vous de qui elk 
voulaitparler?— Non; je ne le lui demandai pas.—Vous avez ei 
deux ou trois differens maitres, quel est celui dont les lecons vou<= 
ont fait le plus de bien?~Quelle aimable famille que la famiUe d€ 

K ;, 1,**%,"'^'^'^"^''^"^ ^^ M. L*** est degotontel-Quelk 
belle hlle elle aurait H^, si elle n'avait pas eu ce malheur!— Quel 
beau tableau!— Que dites-vous qu'il a perdu?— Je ne sais quoi lui 
dire.— Elle ne savait quoi repondre.— Quoi de plus louable dans 
un jeune homme que d'employer son terns k I'^tude des sciences et 
des arts?— Que sont les hommes devant Dieu?— Dites-leur que. 
s'lls veulent rester chez eux, ils auront de quoi s'amuser.— Votis 
connaissez ces deux families, quelle est la plus riche?— Les dames 
lurent admises k dix heures, apres quoi le bal commenfa— Savez- 
vous quelque chose k quoi il soit propre?— Faire revivre la liberte 
dans un pays d'o^ elle parait ^tre bannie, c'est le but oil il vise. 
—-D'oil vient que personne n'est content de son sort?— Le pays par 
oii nous pass^mes, en allant a Douleau, village d'oii I'on tire une 
grande quantity de charbon, est le plus fertile oil j'aie jamais 
voyage.— He bien ! par oh voulez-vous commencer?— Oii allez-vous 
<3ette apres-midi?—D'o;i vient votre soeur ?— foait-ce k ce bureau 
que vous vous adressdtes I'annee derniere?— Non, ce n'etait pas ici. 
—Ce n'est pas k vous que je parle.— C'est d'eux que j'attends 
cette faveur. 

Theme LII. Gram, page 265. 
Des Pronoms indefinis. 
Quiconque attaque la personne sacree d'un roi est coupable de 
haute trahison.— De qui que ce soit que vous I'ayez entendu, je 
ne le crois pas. — A qui que ce soit que vous vous adressiez, on 
vous dira la m^me chose.— Est-il venu quelqu'un me demander, 
au^ourd'hui? Non, Monsieur.— J'attends quelqu'un k souper, ce 
soir.— Voulez-vous me donner de votre nouveau miel?— Ses sceurs 
auront chacune dix mille livres sterling.^W faut que chacun paie 
pour soi.— II faut donner k chacun le sien.— C'est un dicton qui est 
dans la bouche de tout le monde.— II y a dans chaque plante 
une qualite particuli^re.— Je lui donne le^on tous les Lundis et 
tons les Jeudis, et je dine chez elle tous les Dimanches.— Tout 
homme qui preche cette doctrine est dans I'erreur.— Tout le monde 
cherche le bonheur, mais personne ne peut le trouver ici-bas. 
— Ne I'avez-vous point dit k personne ?—Avez-vous jamais vu 
personne de plus aimable et de plus charmant que M^"^ H * * *? 
Non ; et je doute que la nature ait jamais form^ rien de plus parfait. 
— Nous avons vu plusieurs mille personnes qui se promenaient sur 
le bord de la riviere.— Du grand nombre d'amis qui nous environ- 
nent dans la prosperity, il n'ea reste souvent pas un dans I'adversit^. 



DES PRONOMS INDiPINIS. 39 

— RieB n'est plus eommuQ que le naotamitie; mais riea n'est plus 
rare qu'un veritable ami.— Cette demoiselle ne dit rien. — Je ne 
crois pas que rien lui soit plus agreable qu'une petite promenade 
apres diner. — ^11 n'y a rien de plus agreable que la societe d'une 
ferame aimable. — Degoiitee du monde et de ses plaisirs, elle dit 
adieu aux riens brillans de la cour. — Je ne sais rien de nouveau. — 
J'ai quelque chose de tres-joli a vous donner. — N'ayant que peu 
d'annees k vivre, nous devons t&eher d'en jouir, — L'amitie ne 
s'achete que par l'amitie. — Je n'ai vu que deux enfans. — II n'y 
avait dans la maison que deux ou trois chaises. — 11 ne prit qu'ua 
bouillon et une cotelette de mouton.-— II n'y a personne qui ne 
craigne la mort— II est tres-difGcile de trouver deux personnes du 
m^me caractere et de la m^me opinion. — Ne craignez pas de lui 
demander pardon, c'est la bonte meme. — Les aniraaux memes sont 
sensibles aux sons harmonieux des instrumens. — Les femmes et 
m^me les enfans furent mis a mort. — J'ai entendu dire que plusieurs 
de vos 61^7es n'aiment pas votre nouvelle maison. — Plusieurs le 
disent, et plusieurs le nient.- — C'etait une femme telle que vous.-— 
Tel rit aujourd'hui qui pleurera demain. — J'avais quelque chose a 
vous dire, mais j'ai tout-^-fait oublie ce que c'etait. — Si votre soeur 
a quelque chose k envoyer en France, dites-lui que je partirai 
apres-demain pour Paris. — Quelques talens que vous ayez, quel* 
ques avantages que vous teniez de la nature et de I'education, 
quelques perfections que vous possediez, ne vous attendez aux 
suflfrages que d'un tres-petit nombre d'hommes. — Quels que soient 
les obstacles, il faut qu'il t^che de les surmonter. — Je n'oublierai 
jamais ce qu'elle me dit, quels que fussent ses motifs. — Nous I'at- 
teindrons, quel que soit le chemiu qu'il ait pris. — Quelque habtles 
et quelque savans que nous soyons, ne faisons pas un vain ^talage 
de notre science. — Quelque puissant qu'il soit, il ne les vaincra 
jamais. — Toute femme qu'elle est, elle est plus forte que vous. — 
Quelque chose que vous entrepreniez, vous ne reussirez jamais, si 
vous ne prenez pas mieux vos mesures. — Elle est si paresseuse 
qu'elle ne s'applique k rien du tout.— Trouvez un pretexte quelcon- 
que pour vous excuser. — Toutes ces oranges sont pourries. — Tout 
son bien ne suffirait pas pour payer la moitie de ses dettes. — Toute 
la grandeur, toutes les richesses et tout le pouvoir de la terre ne 
peuvent satisfaire un esprit ambitieux. — Toute I'armee combattit 
pendant six heures et demie. — Combien demandez-vous pour le 
tout? Je ne veux pas vendre le tout. — Tout lui deplait.— lis ont 
tout emporte avec eux. — Tout ce qui brille n'est pas or. — Tout ce 
qui est eleve, vaste et profond, etend Timagination et dilate le 
coeur. — Tout ce qui tend a eclairer Tentendement, et a imprimer 
dans le coeur de bons sentimens, est desirable. — Croyez-vous tout 
ce qu'elle dit? Non; je n'en crois pas la moitie.. — Votre soeur fut 
tout abattue k cette nouvelle; cependant, tout afflige^ q^u'elle^tait. 



40 ACCORD DU VERBE AVEC SON SUJET. 

elle me re9ut avec bont6.— Je suis tout k vous.— Les enfans, tout 
aimables qu lis sont, ne laissent pas d^avoir bien des defauts qu'il 
est essentiel de corriger.— Votre mere est toute chang^e depuis sa 
maladie.— J'aurai recours k vous tous.— 11 se plaint de nous tous— 
C etait une autre persoune.— Je suis bien aise que les autres s'amu- 
sent.— -Ne parlez pas mal d'autrui.— Coraportez-vous bien envers 
les autres, si vous voulez que les autres se coraportent bien envers 
vous.— Nous serions coupables de grande injustice les uns envers 
les autres, si nous nous laissions prevenir par les traits de ceux 
que nous ne connaissons pas.— II faut se secourir les uns les autres. 
—Votre cousin et le mien ont de grands talens; mais ils en fontl'un 
et I'autre un tr^s-mauvais usage.— II faut que Tun ou I'autre de vous 
ait casse ce plat, quoique vous ne vouliez I'avouer ni I'un ni I'autre. 
— Le peuples soufFrent souvent des guerres que les rois se font les 
uns aux autres.— Ils rapportent I'un et I'autre le m^rae fait, quoique 
ni I'un ni I'autre ne le croient.— Je les aimerais bien tous les deux, 
s'ils etaient plus attentifs k leurs etudes. — Ces deux dames sont 

tres-riches, et vous leur plaisez beaucoup k Tune et k I'autre. 

Comme vous ayez ete par les deux chemins, dites-moi quel est le 
plus court? — J'ai voyage par terre et par mer pendant vingt ans.— 
Les voyageurs, tant anciens que modernes, s'accordent a dire que 
c'est le pays le plus riche du monde. 



Theme LIII. Gram, page 273. 
Accord du Verhe avec son Sujet. 
Etait-ce vous qui vintes ici liier? — ^Non ; c'etait mon frere qui 
estarrive d'Amerique.— Ce n'etait pas moi qui vous jetai par terre. 
— Qui a fait cela? — Qui s'en vient avec moi? — Le champagne et le 
bourgogne sont fort agreables au goiit, maisje prefere le Madere. 
— L'ouvrier, le marchand, le pretre, le soldat, sont tous 6gale- 
raent les membres de T^tat. — Un seul mot, un soupir, un regard la 
trahit.— -L'amabilite, la bonte pleine de douceur de cette demoiselle, 
me ravit et m'enchante. — Vous et moi, nous avons tres-bien reussi. 
Lui et moi, nous serons associes. — Vous et elle, vous savez I'af- 
faire. — Vous, lui et moi, nous dinerons ensemble. — Est-ce lui ou 
moi qui irons? — Lui, elle, ou moi, nous viendrons. — Monsieur ou 
Mademoiselle le fera avec plaisir.— J'espere que I'un ou I'autre nous 
^crira. — Richesses, dignites, honneurs, tout s'evanouit a la mort. 
— Divertissemens, plaisirs, conversations, spectacles, rien ne pou- 
vait tei distraire de sa profonde melancolie. — Non seulement toutes 
ses pierreries et tout son or, mais tout son linge fut vole.— Le nour- 
risson du Pinde, ainsi que le guerrier, ne prefere-t-il pas un beau 
laurier a tout Tor du Perou ? — Ils desirent tous les deux d'y aller; 
mais ils n'iront ni I'un ni I'autre. — Ni I'un ni I'autre n'ont appris leur 



DE L'OBJET OU DU REGIME DES VERBES. 41 

le^on. — Ni I'amour ni la haine ne le touchent— Ni M'- A* * * ni 
M'* D*** ne sera elu Lord Maire de la ville de Londres. — Faut-U 
vous repeter encore que ni I'une ni I'autre n'est ma mere. — Je jure 
que ni lui ni moi n'y avons jamais ete. — Votre frere ne fut-il pas 
une des malheureuses victimes qui furent sacrifices a la vengeance 
du tyran 1 — C'etait un de mes plus grands ennemis qui me sauva la 
vie dans ce danger imminent. — Si vous pouviez lui accorder cette 
faveur, ce serait un des plus grands services que vous lui ayez ja- 
mais rendus, k lui et a sa famille. — Une bande de voleurs m'at- 
taquerent, il y a deux ou trois ans, et me volerent tout ce que 
j'avais. — Un grand nombre dejeunes gens se sont enroles volon- 
tairement, quoique la plupart d'entre eux aient les plus puissans 
motifs de rester chez eux. — Peu de gens negligent leurs inter^ts. 
— Une vingtaine de soldats se sont revoites. — Qu'elle foule d*horames, 
de femmes et d'enfans vous suivaient quand vous apportates la 
nouvelle de la paix. — Le nombre des victoires qu'il a gagnees est 
inconcevable. — Quand la grande flotte mettra-t-elle a la voile 1 — 
La pluralite des femmes est defendue dans ce pays. — Les arraees 
Franfaises ont ete long-tems victorieuses. — lis prirent conge de 
nous, hier. — Je n'y consentirai jamais, dit-il, k moins que je ne les 
accompagne. — II est arrive d'heureux changemens qui ont retabli 
le commerce dans uotre malheureuse ville. — Ainsi s*est terminee 
une guerre qui fut la cause de tant de malheurs. — Tel etait I'etat 
de ses affaires, quand il fut emprisonne. — Puissent tous ces enfans 
suivre les principes de notre sainte religion ! — Dusse-je y perir, 
j'irai. — Nous ecoutons avec plaisir les conseils que nous donnent 
ceux qui savent flatter nos passions. 



Theme LIV. Gram, page 277. 
De rObjet ou du Regime des Verhes. 
Que cherchez-vous 1 Je cherche mon parapluie que j'ai perdu. 
— 11 aime et cherit son Eloise, quoiqu'elle le gronde toujours,— 
Pardonnons a nos ennemis, si nous voulons que Dieu nous par- 
donne. — Nous ne resistons pas aisement aux attraits du plaisir.^ — 
Remplissez cette carafe de vin et cette bouteille d'eau. — Pourquoi 
vous interessez-vous pour un horarae qui vous nuirait s'il pouvait? 
— Frequentez la bonne compagnie, et evitez les libertins. — Par quel 
paquebot a vapeur etes-vous venu ?— Je suis venu par I'^fetoile ou la 
Venus. — Nous nous flattens que vous serez accueilli de la maniere 
la plus honn^te. — La religion seule pent nous faire supporter de 
grandes iufortunes avec patience et resignation. — Vous dites qu'il 
aime beaucoup sa fille ; corabien lui donnera-t-il en mariage ? — 
Dix ou quinze mille livres sterling. — Une demoiselle, qui est mo- 
deste et dont I'esprit est bien cultive, est estimee de tout le monde. 

E 2 



42 DE L*OBJET OU DU RIIGIME DES VERBES. 

— II y a dix mois qu'elle languit dans I'etat le plus deplorable. — • 
Je ne dors jamais pendant le jour. — Ne medisons de personne; et, 
surtout, ne faisons tort k personne. — lis s'informerent de Tetat de 
votre sante, et de celle de toute votre famille. — Ne vous rejouissez 
pas des malheurs d'autrui. — Si vous continuez de vous raoquer de 
moi, je vous en ferai repentir. — EUe se reprochera son imprudence, 
quand il n'en sera plus tems. — N'importe-t-il pas k un pere et k une 
mere de veiller al'education de leurs enfaus ? — Sous Napoleon, les 
Fran^ais etaient redoutes de leurs voisins. — Son plan est approuve 
de tout le raonde.—^Ces fusees volantes ont ^te inventees par M'* 
le chevalier Congreve.- — L'Angleterre ne fut-elle pas conquise par 
Guillaume le conquerant, en mil soixante-six? — Vous serez puni 
de Dieu, si vous commettez le crime et que vous meprisiez la 
Tertu. — Le ciel, la terre, l6s animaux, les reptiles et les pois- 
sons, ont ^te cr^es par Dieu. — Le temple de Jerusalem fut 
detruit, malgr6 les defenses de Titus, et il n'en resta pierre sur 
pierre. — J'accepte, avec beaucoup de plaisir, votre aimable invita- 
tion, et je serai chez vous, demain soir, k six heures. — Je me flatte 
que vous n'avez rien ordonne expres pour moi. — Non ; nous vous 
repevous en ami, sans ceremonie.— Ne me refusez pas cette faveur. 
— N'avez-vous point retrouve les cuillers qui vous manquaient, 
I'autre jour ? Non ; et je soupfonne la servante de les avoir prises. 
— Pourquoi Jacques rougit-il, quand vous lui dites que vous aviez 
ete vole 1 Je ne sais pas, — Aussit6t que j'aurai fini ma lettre, je 
vous montrerai les jolies choses que j'ai. — lis m'ont accable de 
reproches, quoique je ne le merite pas. — Vous devriez exclure cette 
femme de votre societe. — Lui avez-vous fait part de votre dessein t 
Oui. — Ne montrez pas de deplaisir k son frere. — On a ote k mon 
pere tout son bien. — II punit la religion catholique des attentats de 
ses ministres, et, en moins de deux ans, il rendit la Suede Luth^- 
rienne. — Nous attendons une lettre de France, cette semaine.— Elle 
m'a envoyemille livres sterling pour placer dans les trois pour cent. 
— Expliquez-moi cette difficulte, etje serai content. — 'Epargnez-nous 
la peine d'y retourner. — Qu'il me trouve une place.— Reraettons 
cette affaire a la Providence. — Ne me reprochez pas si souventcette 
bagatelle. — Ne leur donnez pas leur ration, demain. - Quel papier 
desirez-vous ? — Du papier k lettres, s'il vous plait. — ^Quelle excuse 
a-t-il apportee ? — De quel cheval me parliez-vous] — A qui me fierai- 
ie, si vous me trompez ? — Quelle promesse vos soeurs ont-elles faite 
^k JVP- L***? — a qui s'adressa-t-il d'abord ?— M"-* D*** vous 
a-t-il enseigne le Franjais ? — Reportez cette lettre a M'^"^ E***, et 
jui dites que j'attribue sa misere actuelle k son extravagance. — 
Etait-ce a moi, ma chere, que vous vouliez parler?— Le sage 
sacrifie ses plaisirs a son devoir; mais le fou neglige son devoir 
pour ses plaisirs. ^ — Les hypocrites s'etudient k parer des dehors de 
la vertu les vices les plus honteux et les plus decries. — Quand il 



DU REGIME DES VERBES. 4S 

eut tir6 de sa femme toutes ses pierreries et tout son argent, il 
I'abandonna, elle et ses enfans. — Nous allons deraciner et abattre 
cet arbre.— II lui est si attach^ et si devoue. — Elle obeitetdesobeit, 
tour-^-tour, a ses maitres. — Celui qui est utile et cher a sa patrie est 
digne d'envie. — Si I'Empereur avait su connaitre cette position, et 
qu'il s'en ftit empare, il n'aurait pas perdu la bataille. 



Theme LV. (No. 1.) Gram, page 2S0. 

Du rtgime des Verbes. 

Ceux qui pretendent ^tre savans sont souvent tres-ignorans. — 
Quelque riche que vous soyez, si vous ne savez mettre des bornes 
k vos desirs, vous ne serez jamais content. — J'aurais ete la voir, la 
semaine derni^re, si je n'avais pas ete si indispose. — lis devraient 
sortir tons les jours. — II faut laisser les autres penser et agir comme 
il leur plait. — £lle est si cruelle et si vindicative que je n'ose lui 
parler. — Si je vous entends jamais lui dire des injures, une autre 
fois, je vous renverrai certaineraent. — II faut pratiquer la vertu. — 
Allcz demander permission de sortir. — lis ne daignerent pas me 
r^pondre. — II vaut mieux gagner peu que rien. — Pretendez-vous 
toujours m'insulter de la sorte ? — Trop manger et trop boire sont 
nuisibles a la sante. — Trop parler epuise. — Ne vaudrait-il pas mieux 
mourir que de languir comme je fais. — Je viens de faire visit© k 
LordD***. — Quand viendrez-vous me voir, que je vous montre 
ma b^lle harpe ? — S'il vient k pleuvoir, que ferez-vous 1 — lis etaient 
sur le point d'en venir aux mains. — Pretend-il encore a cet emploi? 
— Non ; il a achete une commission dans I'armee. 



Theme LV. (No. 2.) Gram, page 282. 
Du regime des Verhes. 
Cette maison est-elle a loner on k vendre ? — Votre fils passe tout 
son tems a jouer. — Les raathematiques sont-elles faciles k ap- 
prendre ? — Elle aime k soulager les pauvres, et k consoler les 
affliges. — Ces noix ne sont pas bonnes k manger. — On lui donna k 
entendre qu'il voulait Tepouser, et on I'exhorta k encourager ses 
visites. — Elle se plait k dire du mal de tout le monde. — Aiclez-moi 
k porter ce fardeau. — Tout le monde est sujet a se tromper. — 
Aussitot qu'elle me vit, elle se mit k pleurer. — Enseigne-t-il k lire 
et k ecrire ? — lis ont ete condamnes k payer tons les frais. — Je I'in- 
vitai une fois k diner chez moi, mais il ne vint pas. — Elle est ac- 
coutumee a souper de bonne heure, et k se coucher, tous les soirs, 
k dix heures. — Je le soupconne d'aimer k boire et a jouer.— Ce livre 
est tr^s-facile k entendre, mais difScile k traduire en Franfais. — 
Apprenez-vous a monter a cheval ? Non; mais j'ai intention de 



44 DU REGIME DES VERBES. 

commencer bient6t.— Si vous continuez de la voir, vous lui plairez 
bientot. — Je ne voudrais pas m'abaisser a lui demander pardon.— 
Nous ne nous attendions pas k partir avant deraain. — Elle s'amuse 
^jouer de la harpe du matin jusqu'au soir. — line consentira jamais 
a ce mariage, avant qu'elle ne soit majeure. — Etes-vous pret k 
sortir? — Je n'ai point de temsaperdre. — Nous serons toujours bieo 
aises de vous voir. 



Theme LV. (No. 3.) Gram, page 287. 
Du regime des Verhes. 

II ne disconvient pas de I'avoir dit. — Elle m'a menace de le dire 
k mon pere. — J'ai Thonneur de boire k votre sante. — Elle a honte 
d'avoir avance une faussete. — On m'a accus6 de les avoir voles.— 
II s'aper9ut du piege qu'on lui avait tendu. — Puisqu'il vous a 
defendu de la revoir, vous ferez mieux de cesser d'aller chez elle. 
— Elle me pria de Taccompagner k Top^ra. — N'etiez-vous pas tres- 
surpris d'entendre une personne si bien 61evee tenir un tel langage? 
— Ne n^gligez pas de lui ^crire. — Vous m'avez promis de me con- 
duire k Yauxhall ; quand remplirez-vous votre promesse '? — Ne 
rougissez-vous pas de I'avoir si grossierement insultee ? — Je fus 
somme de comparaitre devant le tribunal le 10 d'Aotit. — Dep^chez- 
vous d'apprendre votre le^on. — Je suis ennuye de repeter si sou- 
vent la m^me chose. — Qui ne s'impatienterait pas d'attendre si 
long-temsl — Elle se m^le toujours des affaires d'autrui. — Avez- 
vous intention d'aller en France cet 6te? — Avez-vous peur du ton- 
nerre? — Ne diff^rez pas davantage de leur ecrire. — Dites-lui de 
revenir dans une demi-heure. — T^chez de plaire k tout le monde. 
— Ne promettez jamais de faire une chose, quand il n'est pas en 
votre pouvoir de la faire. — Nous lui conseill-^mes de se raettre a 
I'abri de la pluie, mais elle ne voulut pas. — Son mari la bl4ma 
beaucoup de s'^tre ainsi exposee k un danger si imminent. — Elle ne 
cessait de lui repr^senter qu'il avait tort. — Fourquoi I'emp^cheriez- 
vous de rester ici? — Nous sommes epuises de fatigue. — Nous vous 
avons bien des obligations de vous ^tre interesse pour nous. — Je 
suis tres-flatte de I'honneur que vous me faites. — 11 est indigne de 
cette recompense. — II ne vous appartient pas de me dieter ce que 
je dois dire. — A qui appartient cette montre ? A mon frere. — Vous 
ne sauriez croire combien elle craintde le rencontrer. — Nous serons 
toujours charmes de vous servir, quand I'occasion s'en presentera. 
— Je regretterai toute ma vie de n'avoir pas entendu ce pr^dicateur 
celebre. — Ce jeune homme souhaite beaucoup d'obtenir un emploi 
sous vous. — Je desire que vous partiez k present, de crainte qu'il 
ne pleuve. — Elle m'a charge de vous dire qu'elle est bien aise que 
vous ayez reussi. — Nous desirons bien sincerement qu'il se reta- 



DU REGIME DES VERBES. 45 

blisse bient6t. — Votre m^decin a ordonne que vous ne buviez pas 
de via. — Je parie tout ce que vous voudrez, qu'il gagnera la partie. 
— II avait intention de ra'inviter a diner; mais, m'ayant vu passer 
comme il allait se mettre k dejetiner, il m'appela et me pria de 
dejeiiner avec lui. — Vous n'auriez pas du lui protester que vous ne 
I'abandonneriez jamais. — Ne vous rappelez-vous pas d'avoir trouve 
une fois, avec moi, un nid de bouvreuils? — Oui; je me rappelle 
fort bien cette circonstance; et, quoique nous fussions alors tres- 
jeunes, je me souviens que je vous trouvai charmante. 



Theme LV. (No. 4.) Gram, page 290. 
Du regime des Verbes, 

Men petit gar^on commence k parler et k marcher. — Si vous 
continuez de lui faire visite, elle continuera de vous ecrire. — Je fus 
contraint de me retirer. — Contraignez-le a vous payer. — C'est k vous 
k commander et k nous d'obeir. — N'est-ce pas a vous a nous proteger 
et a montrer qui nous sommes. — Je vous laisse a penser si elle 
avait peur de repondre, — Vous pouvez supposer qu'il ne laissa pas 
de profiter d'une occasion si favorable. — Je ne crois pas que, sur 
le tout, j'aie manque plus d'une fois a venir, quoique j'aie souvent 
manqu6 k apprendre mes le9ons. — Ne manquez pas de vous y 
trouver. — Elle manque de tout. — J'ai manque de tomber, en entrant 
chez vous. — Mon amitie pour vous m'oblige a vous donner un avis 
salutaire. — De meme que par la loi naturelle et la loi divine nous 
sommes obliges d'honorer nos parens ; ainsi, par la loi civile, nous 
sommes obliges de respecter les princes. — Vous nous obligerez 
infiniment de vous charger de ces marchandises, en cas que nous 
soyons obliges d'aller a la campagne. — J'avais oublie de vous dire 
que M^"^ ^ * * * gg^ mariee. — Ce pauvre jeune homme k ete si long- 
teras malade, qu'il a oublie non seulement k danser, mais meme 
k lire et a ecrire. — Ne vaut-il pas mieux s'occuper a apprendre la 
musiquc que de ne rien faire. — Tandis qu'il s'occupait k me tour- 
menter, depuis le matin jusqu'au soir, je m'occupais au succes de 
son entreprise. — Le plaisir de I'^me ne consiste-t-il pas k agir, 
et k s'occuper de quelque objet qui plaise? — Je suis tout occupe 
des obstacles qu'ils auront k surmonter. — Cela suffira a M'- H***; 
mais cela ne me suffit pas. — II suffit de lui parler quelques minutes, 
pour ^tre convaincu que la vie la plus longue de Thomme suflSt a 
peine pour aucun art. — Peu de choses suffisent pour vous rendre 
heureux. — J'ai, enfin, resolu de les poursuivre. — T^chez de d6- 
couvrir s'il t^che encore h me nuire. — Tachons de les rejoindre. — 
II me tarde de voir votre soeur ; elle tarde bien a venir. 



46 DU REGIME DES VERBES. 

Theme LV. (No. 5.) Gram, page 294. d 

Du regime des Verhes, 

Si vous transgressez les lois de voire pays, vous serez cite devant 
les tiibunaux. — Approuvez-vous son procede? — EUe critique tout 
le monde. — J'aime beaucoup la musique le soir. — On vous a d6- 
nonce. — Ne regardez pas tant ces dames. — L'ont-ils chasse de leut 
maison? — On m'a dissuade d'entrer en society avec lui. — J'implorai 
son assistance, sans pouvoir I'obtenir. — lis nous ont declar6 la 
guerre, sans aucune raison legitime. -Vous me devezde I'argent. — 
]y|r. J) * * * jjj'g^ dedie un beau poeme, sur les funestes efFets de 
ratheisme.— Agreez que je vous pr^sente ce diamant comme un 
tribut de reconnaissance pour vos bont^s passees euvers moi. — 
Marie a-t-elle 6t6 les chaises de la chambre k coucher? — J'espere 
que vous ne revelerez ce secret k personne. — Rapportez-moi le 
livre que je vous ai pr^te. — II applaudit a tout ce qu'elle dit, et il 
condescend k tons ses d^sirs. — Je ne sais comment obvier k cette 
difficulte. — Elle a une si bonne constitution qu'elle survivra k tous 
ses enfans. — N'insultons pas a la misere d'autrui. — Obeissez k vos 
superienrs. — Cette rue aboutit k St. Paul. — II ressemble k un 
aveugle qui soutient que le blanc est noir. — Remediez k ces maux. 
— Gu'^taTC Vasa ne fut-ilpas reduitk la necessite de travailler dans 
les mines de cuivre pour vivre et pour se cacher? — Les dames 
Anglaises aiment beaucoup k jouer aux cartes. — II jouait du violon. 
— Personne n'etait fort ^difie de son sermon. — lis sont, enjSn, 
rassasies de sang et de carnage. — Je n'en suis pas du toutsurpris.— 
Qui heritera de ses biens immenses? — Dieu merci! elle jouit d'une 
bonne sante. — lis profitent des malheurs d'autrui,— Vous vous 
aper^evrez de votre erreur, quand il n'en sera plus tems, — 11 faut 
que nous nous accommodions de ces deux chambres pour quelque 
tems. — Ne vous approchez pas si pres du feu, de crainte de vous 
briiler. — lis se consolerent bientot de la perte de leur mere. — ^Des 
armies etrangeres se sont emparees de notre territoire. — Nous 
sommes tres-inquiets de ne pas recevoir de ses nouvelles. — Elle se 
saisit de mon ^pee, et la lui aurait passee au travers du corps, si je 
ne I'avais pas retenue. 



Theme LV. (No. 6.) Gram, page 296. 
Du regime des Verbe s. 
Nous n'avons pas un coeur pour nous hair les uns les autres. — 
Palamede inventa le jeu des tehees pour servir d'amusement k ses 
soldats, et pour leur apprendre les stratagemes de la guerre. — 
M'* S*** a joue ce tour k votre soeur pour lui faire peur. — Nous 
sommes n6s pour travailler, et pour glorifier Dieu. — Combien de- 
mandez-vous pour y aller? -11 fut pendu pour avoir assassin^ son 



DU SUBJONCTIF ET DE SON EMPLOI. 47 

pere. — Je I'ai dit pour badiner. — Nous irons a Londres, afin de pou- 
voir dire que nous I'avons vu. — S'ils viennent, je leur donnerai 
une bonne place, afin qu'ils puissent bien entendre. — Vous de- 
vriez donner des prix a vos eleves pour les encourager. — II etudie 
ces sciences, plus pour discourir et briller dans le monde, que pour 
eclairer et cultiver son esprit. — II y a un terns pour travailler et un 
terns pour se reposer. — II fera tout son possible pour vous obliger. 
— EUe est trop faible pour supporter une si grande fatigue. — II n'a 
pas assez de credit pour obtenir cette place. — Je suis bien f^che 
qu'il n'y eut personne chez moi pour vous recevoir. — lis n'avaient 
pas assez de troupes pour bloquer la ville par mer et par terre, — 
On trouve des remedes pour guerir la folic, mais on n'en trouve 
point pour guerir de I'amour. 



Theme LVf. Gram, page 303. 
Du Suhjonctif et de son Emploi. 
Je m'6tonne que vous lui ayez ecrit. — II est ravi que cela soit ainsi. 
— Nous sonimes bien f^ches que ce malheur vous soit arrive. — Je ne 
savais pas que vous fussiez amis. — N'etes-vous pas tres-fache 
qu'elle soit morte ? — Pourquoi croyez-vous que M'* I'ambassadeur 
«e viendra pas? — Croyez-vous que les Franpais donnent I'assaut k 
la ville, si elle ne capitule pas ? — Je tremble que le gouverneur ne 
voie tout ^ feu et a sang, avant qu'il ne se rende. — Si vous vous 
apercevez que les enfans volent ie fruit, donnez-m'en avis. — Pre- 
tendez-vous qu'elle lui renvoie ces boucles d'oreilles? — Nous n'en- 
tendons pas que vous fassiez de depenses pour nous, par la ra^me 
raison que vous ne voulez pas que nous en fassions pour vous. — Au 
son de la voix et de I'instrument, j'entends que c'est ma soeur qui 
chante et qui joue. — Savez-vous que M^^'^ £»** est mariee? — Oui ; 
je le sais. — Vous ai-je dit que les fonds d'Espagne sont beaucoup 
plus haut aujourd'hui? — Oui; vous me I'avez dit. — Est-ce qu'elle 
est morte? — Si votre frere desire d'etre estime, il faut qu'il soit 
obligeant, poli et affable envers tout le monde.^ — II est juste que 
les lois soient observees. — II serait injuste qu'un vil assassin 
ne iht pas puni. — II est evident qu'elle a tort. — II n'est pas 
probable qu'ils revienuent avant Tannic prochaine. — II me sem- 
ble qu'il ne peut y avoir de plus grande jouissance que celle de 
rendre les autres heureux. — Vous semblait-il qu'il fut tres-assidu 
aupres d'elle? — II me semblait qu'elle marchait. — II ne me 
semble pas qu'on puisse penser differemment.— II semblerait que 
les Franfais voulussent faire la paix.— Je ne vous pardonnerai 
pas A raoins que vous ne me promettiez de vous mieux conduire k 
i'avenir. — Emportez ce livre, de crainte que ma soeur ne le lise.— 
L'eclair ne parait-il pas ordinairement, avant qu'on n'entende le 



48 DU SUBJONCTIF ET DE SON EMPLOI. 

tonnerre? — Je ne vous demaude rien sinon que vous ayez soin de 
vos enfans, et que vous leur inculquiez de bonne heure des senti- 
mens d'honneur et de delicatesse. — Votre fille se conduit de 
maniere qu'elie gagne I'estime de tout le monde.— Aussit6t que je 
serai a la campagne et que j'aurai une occasion, je vous enverrai 
du fruit. — Si mince qu'il puisse ^tre, un cheveu fait de Tombre. — 
Eiie n'est pas si sotte qu'elie ne s'aper^oive bien que vous voulez 
i'insulter. — Si votre soeur prend regulierement ses lepons, et qu'elie 
etudie, en outre, deux ou trois beures par jour, elle fera de grands 
progres. — Je crois que la coraparaison la plus juste qu'on puisse 
faire de Tamour, est celle d'une fievre.— Qui sont les deux plus 
grands hommes que I'Angleterre ait produits?--Sa cousine est la 
plus belle demoiselle qu'on puisse voir. — Est-ce Ih le seul que vous 
ayez? — Oui, ce Test. — C'est la premiere fois que je me sois trompe. 
— Quelque ingenieux qu'ils fussent, ils ne purent pas decouvrir le 
plan que j'avais suivi. — II n'y a personne qui ne fi^t tres-f^che, s'il 
savait tout ce qu'on pense de lui. — J'ai besoin d'une carafe qui 
contienne trois pintes de vin. — Si je me remarie, je prendrai une 
demoiselle qui ait beaucoup d'argent. — Que je meure sur le lieu, 
si je vous ai dit une fausset^. — JFasse le ciel que cela arrive! — 
Puissiez-vous vivre heureux ensemble, plusieurs annees. — Lui 
derive qui voudra! — Dieu m'en preserve ! — Je ne sacbe rien de plus 
avantageux pour vous et votre fr^re. — Le tailleur m'a-t-il envoys 
mon habit? — Pas que je sacbe. — Je ne crois pas que les Fran9ais 
reussissent en Espagne, si les Espagnols sont fideles k leur roi et k 
leur constitution. — Nous ne soup^onnions pas qu'ils eussent com- 
mence les fortifications sit6t. — Talma estle meilleur acteur tragique 
que la France ait eu depuis long-tems. — II est douteux qu'aucun 
philosophe ait jamais explique d'une maniere satisfaisante la presci- 
ence de Dieu. — Je craignais fort qu'il ne le dit k sa mere. — Qui 
aurait pu croire que I'Empereur se ftit soumis k des conditions si 
deshonorantes? — Quoiqu'elle soit tres-jeune et tres-belle, je ne 
I'aime point du tout. — Le Bellerophon est le plus grand vaisseau 
qu'on ait jamais construit en France. — Quelques richesses que nous 
ayons, nous ne sommes jamais contens. — A moins qu'un livre ne 
soit amusant, je ne me soucie pas de le lire. — II n'y a point de 
chagrin que le tems, k la fin, n'adoucisse.— N'y etiez-vous pas 
long-tems avant que la voiture ne ftit arrivee ? — Croyez-vous qu'elie 
chant^t, si je Ten priais? — Nou ; je ne crois pas qu'elie le voulut 
en votre presence. — Si vous croyez que les demoiselles S * * * 
voulussent venir en cas qu'il fit beau tems, je les inviterais. — II 
faut qu'il ait beaucoup gagne, pour avoir mis de c6te vingt mille 
francs en deux ans. — Elleasurtout recommande qu'on brfil^t toutes 
ses lettres et tous ses papiers, en cas qu'elie mourtit de cette 
maladie. 



DU PARTICIPE PRESENT ET DE l'ADJECTIF VERBAL. 49 

Theme LVII. Gram, page 308. 

Du Participe present et de VAdjectif verhal. 

Votre scEur est uiie charmante fille ; qu'elle est obligeante ! — 
^'est-ce pas 1^ une preuve convaincante des efFets surprenans de 
raimanf? — D'uq moment a I'autre, elle est gaie et serieuse, riant, 
pleurant, jasant, se taisant tour k tour, enfin chaugeant d'humeur 
mille fois en un jour. — Les genies rampans ne parviennent jamais 
au sublime. — Tout le monde ne respecte-t-il pas ces magistrats 
qui, oubliant leur propre inter^t, observant les lois, protegeant la 
vertu, et reprimant le vice, n'ont en vue que le bonheur de leur 
pays ? — On pent comparer la beaute a une fleur qui, s'epanouissant 
le matin, a I'air frais et vermeil toute la journee ; mais qui, se 
fanant vers le soir, perd ses belles couleurs, languit et penche sa 
belle tete. — Quoique cette demoiselle ne soit pas eclatante de 
beaute, si vous la voyiez brillant dans une compagnie par les 
graces de son esprit, vous trouveriez en elle raille attraits. — Cette 
petite fille est vraiment brillante de sante et de fraicheur. — N'en- 
tendiraes-nous pas, de loin, les bombes 6clatant avec un horrible 
fracas? — Des milliers d'ennemis, se pressant sous nos portes et 
fondant sur nos remparts, nous firent crier misericorde. — Ce n'est 
pas en nous abandonnant a nos passions que nous vivons heureux, 
c'est en les gouvernant. — On apprend, en enseignant les autres. — 
Elle a tout perdu, en perdant son pere. — Vous reussirez a la rame- 
ner h la raison, en prenant sur vous-m^rae, et en la traitant avec 
bonte. — L'etude des langues est tres-difficile. — Les nuages et les 
brouillards se forment des vapeurs qui s'elevent de la terre et des 
eaux. — J'ai vu une colorabe qui portait une lettre dans son bee. — 
Elle etait sur le point de ceder, quand, se rappelant soudainement 
sa vertu, elle se reprocba sa faiblesse. — Vous ne pouvez y aller 
sans desobeir k votre pere. — Ne furent-ils pas pendus pour avoir 
tire sur le roi? — J'ai vu ma soeur qui jouait aux cartes avec lui, ce 
qui m'a fait conclure qu'on agit souvent par des motifs qui viennent 
des circonstances presentes. — Ne vous ai-je pas vu courir etjouer 
tous ensemble? — Comme je me trouve beaucoup mieux, a present, 
et que j'ai intention d'aller bientot vous voir, je vous conseille de 
ne pas traverser la mer au milieu de I'hiver, pour veuir dans une 
ville oil regnent la misere et la desolation. 



Theme LVIII. Gram, page 314. 

Du Participe passe. 

Que de villes detruites auraient ete sauvees, si le vainqueur 

avait ete plus humain ! — On ne se rappelle ces batailles gagnees, 

ces lauriers cueillis au prix de tant de sang, qu'avec un certain 

F 



50 DU PARTIGTFE PASSi. 

sentiment d'horreur qui faitfremir. — Vu les circonstances presentes, 
on ne pouvait attendre rien de plus avantageux. — Excepte vous 
et elle, ils ^taient tous malades. — Nous avons vendu tous nos 
chevaux, mon petit bidet excepte. — Vous trouverez ci-iuclus 
deux lettres, que je vous serai oblig^ de remettre k M^^^^ \y * * *, 
—lis allerent tous en Italie, elle et moi exceptes. — Les trois 
lettres de change, ci-incluses, sont-elles payables chez M. C** * 
dans le Strand? — Nous avons ^te dernierement si occup6s, 
qu'il m'a 6te impossible d'etudier mes lemons de Fran^ais.— 
Les mechans sont toujours tourmentes par les remords de 
leur conscience. — M^^^^ p*** est-elle revenue de la campagne? 
— Non, Monsieur, elle revient demain. — Les demoiselles sont 
allies a leurs lemons de danse et d'equitation. — Nous avons dine 
plus t6t aujourd'hui qu'a I'ordinaire. — Nous voil^ enfin arriv^s^ — 
lis ont choisi une occasion tres-defavorable. — Je n'ai pas vu les 
tableaux dont vous m'avez parle.— M^'^^A*** et M.eii* G*** m'ont 
paru si changees, que je ne les reconnaissais pas d'abord. — Les dan- 
gers qu'il a courus, lui font beaucoup d'honneur. — Je parlais six 
langues dans ma jeunesse, savoir, le Franfais, I'ltalien, I'Anglais, 
I'Allemand, TEspagnol et le Hollandais. — Loin d'etre recon- 
naissant des soins et des peines, detouteespece, que m'a coi&t4s son 
Education, il me traite avec mepris et m'evite. — Les cinq heures 
qu'il a dormi, ce matin, sont le seul repos qu'il ait eu depuis quinze 
jours..— La belle journee qu'il a fait bier! — Les pluies abondantes 
qu'il a fait cet ete ont entierement g^t6 la moisson. — Vous rappelez- 
vous les grands vents qu'il a fait, et le grand d^bordementdes eaux 
qu'il y a eu, au commencement de I'annee? — Les lettres que nous 
avons re9ues, aujourd'hui, par la malle, confirment la capitulation 
de la Corogne. — Cette malheureuse banqueroute nous a un peu 
reduits.— J'ai lu attentivement les papiers que vous m'avez envoy6s, 
touchant I'affaire que je vous avais proposee, et j'ai trouve que, si 
je I'avais entreprise, j'aurais rencontre des obstacles que je n'avais 
pas prevus. — Sa soeur s'est moquee de moi pendant tout le passage. 
Pourquoi les dames se sont-elles enfuies aussit6t qu'elles m'ont 
aper^u ? — Les comptes se sont-ils irouves justes? — Vos soeurs se 
sont-elles beaucoup amusees dans sacompagnie? — Non; pas beau- 
coup. — Apres un combat long et opini^tre, ils se sont rendus mai- 
tres de la citadelle. — Les habitans se sont-ils rendus? — Elle s'est 
faite religieuse. — Pourquoi vous ^teg-vous ecarte du chemin que 
vous aviez commence a suivre? — Les Fran^ais se sont rendus fa- 
meux par leur courage dans la guerre. — lis se sont dit mille injures. 
— Elle s'est donne la mort. — Je ne savais pas qu'ils sefussent donn6 
la peine de venir expr^s pour moi. — Si elle s'est imagine cela, je 
ne puis qu'y faire. — Apres qu'ils se furent long-tems parl6, ils se 
separ^rent sans se dire un seul mot. — lis se sont souri. — lis se sont 
beaucoup nui. — II n'est pas certain qu'ils se fussent succede.— Je- 



DU PARTICIPE PASSE. ^ 

suis charme qu'elle se soit chargee de lui 6crire. — Nous les avons 
iaiss^s quereller.— Oii sont les demoiselles que j'ai vues danser? — 
Voulez-vous le remercier des demarches qu'il a eu la bonte de fairs 
pour moi? — Les airs que j'ai entendu votre soeur chanter sont tres- 
beaux. — Voici les presens que vous avez refuse d'accepter. — La 
maison que je vous ai conseille d'acheter, est grande et bien situee, 
— 11 arrive souvent qu'on commetles memes fautes qu'on avait re- 
solu d'eviter. — Donnez-moi la lettre que je vous ai prie de traduire 
en Fran9ais. — Les dames que je m'etais flatte que vous verriez sont 
malheureusement parties pour I'Amerique. — tJne efFrayante voix 
s'est alors fait entendre, qui nous ajetesdans la plus grande con- 
sternation. — II a montre tant de hardiesse et d'intrepidite, qu'il les 
a fait tons s'enfuir. — Ne vous a-t-elle pas rendu tons les services 
qu^elle a pu? — Nous leur avons montre toute I'attention que nous 
avons pu. — Dites-lui qu'il aurait du m'ecrire, comme il me I'avait 
promis. — Combien de jours et de nuits n'ai-je pas passes a votre 
c6te, quand vous etiez malade! — Quelle reponse vous a-t-on faite? 
— La perte n'est pas si grande que je I'aurais cru, — Elle n'est pas. 
aussi belle que je me I'etais imagine. 



FIN, 



M.UICHANT, PRINTER^ INGRAM-COURT, FENCHURCH-STREET. 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




003 116 738 3 




